te 4
ty
τ Ὑ
‘
|
et 1}.
EIA Se
“At ly Oe is
4
»"
tor,
Mr,
Biyirs
saat
an ἫΝ
sah ὦ .
> La ΠΥ Sine: nt
Ι ἵ ἢ» Ἵ i 11
# a ,
Ty i i a hn τν I
et se en i dah ‘
᾿ Ε " ἣὰἑ ?
PAN ats | sia .
pia’ σὲ δ 09 Wit Ν ΝΕ:
», γὴ .Ξ 7 ’
τὰ £
- : Ty ye
' . ‘
vy
Ιλ Gs
(itr ahs
; ae aR
GREEK GRAMMAR
SYNTAX
By THE SAME AUTHOR.
A GREEK GRAMMAR: AccIDENCE.
This work contains all the facts of any importance in the Phon-
ology and Inflection of the Greek language, as it appears in literature
up to the late period. After an Introduction on the History of the
Greek Language, it is divided into four parts: Phonology, Inflections,
Dialects, and Formation of Words. The List of Attic and Dialectic
Verbs is very full. The general arrangement of the book, especially
the employment of the tabular form in the sections whenever possible,
greatly facilitates the use of the work both for general study and for
reference.
LONDON: SWAN SONNENSCHEIN ἃ CO. Lim.
NEW YORK: D. C. HEATH & CO.
A
GREEK GRAMMAR:
SYNTAX
By
GUSTAVE SIMONSON, M.A., M.D.
“4 GREEK GRAMMAR: ACCIDENCE”
‘* 4 PLAIN EXAMINATION OF SOCIALISM ”’
LONDON
SWAN SONNENSCHEIN ἃ CO. Lim.
NEW YORK: D. C. HEATH & CO.
1gt!
PREFACE
ΙΝ compiling the present Greek Grammar, my aim has been to
bring together in convenient and accessible form all the gram-
matical facts and rules of any importance in the Greek language
as it appears in the literature of ancient Greece up to the late
period. The work is in two volumes, issued separately. The
first volume contains a brief History of the Greek language, the
Phonology, the Inflections of Attic Greek, the Inflections of the
Dialects, an extensive General List of Verbs containing all forms
presenting any difficulties or peculiarities, and the Word-Forma-
tion. The second volume is devoted to the Syntax. The typo-
graphical plan of the work is as follows: The pagination of the
two volumes is independent, but the numbering of the sections is
continuous from the first volume into the second: thus Volume I
ends with section 1200, while Volume IT begins with section
1201. All cross-references are by sections; and although there
are no section or page-references from one volume to the other,
the plan of continued section-numbering was adopted to avoid
any possible confusion. In the first volume the tabular form
_ was employed whenever in any way possible, as this typographi-
cal arrangement greatly facilitates the use of the book both for
study and for reference ; and in both volumes brief running side-
titles were used for sections whenever practical. The word
Nore after the number of any section means that such section
is subordinate to the nearest preceding section without that indica-
ν
vi PREFACE
tion; thus in Volume I, section “525, Nore” means that this
section is subordinate to section 524; in Volume II, section
“1264, Note” means that this section is subordinate to section
1263 ;—naturally an independent section may be followed by a
number of subordinate sections bearing the indication “Nore”.
In the Syntax volume, all the sections devoted to poetic or
dialectic syntax are printed in shorter lines. The quotations cited
in the Syntax have all been verified and are printed as they
appear in the texts, omissions not bearing on the rule cited being
indicated by dots. In concluding these explanatory remarks,
the author desires to state that he will be thankful to have
pointed out to him any errors of any kind for future correction.
GUSTAVE SIMONSON.
September, 1910.
CONTENTS ‘4
t 4 a + @a4- ἽΝ νὰ ° Mi? ee
ον το ia ys) icvocadassocsdecsueriocesces Υ͂
PART V
ke SYNTAX
Definitions
1201. Subject and Predicate................:...0008 ΤΡ 1
ΝΟ τονε σο, κορ δον δρψνε τξδ ἑκα εὺν ected 1
IN, ον νυ cig Fitsisisexshsiesedepcoguscs séeannvsense τἂν 1
1204. Predicate Noun.................+ WEcebaabsuakaY κυ ἐν νυδέλνόνεν ἡ ιόλί eh tie 1
1205. Copulate Verbs.....................06 shuepaediedbsatowedihsuiaspsavenasantah 2
1206. Attributive Adjective .............cccceseceeeeeees noassivadanrsabsiurerven 2
1207. Attribute........... Sietavesticinadags ev caates Gaby Upeatveyéanvadttetinarvanceé 2
1208. Predicate Adjective ...........sccsesssseesevereees peaked adateobelitoncaseen? 2
Subject
1209-1215. ἈΡΕΣΤᾺ of a Finite Verb................. sada pateavirten desis Cesinnsenteease 2-4
The Verb
1216-1218, The Copula εἰμί Omitted................. ΤΥ ἐπ ρον idsseeedies uses 4-5
1219-1221. Other Verbs occasionally Omitted .............. τ ραν ΣΝ δ
cates...
1223. The Verb ki with Local Adverbs =COME ....csccceeeseeeees ae
vii
Vill
Peculiarities in the Use of Numbers, Genders, and Persons
SECTION
1224-1226,
1227-1238.
1239-1241,
1242-1244,
1245.
1246-1247,
1248.
1249-1264.
1265-1269.
1270.
1271-1280.
1281-1301.
1302-1310.
1311-1313,
1314-1315.
1316.
1317-1318.
1319.
1320.
1821.
1322,
1323.
1824.
1325.
CONTENTS
PU RUIAL.,..1000ccskssebsnvesseasvanedesdiapatestheaeneattens isaaehedanks vide eave
Paral ΡΟ ΤΥ caked cathsnesseaeeneevaned ἜΡΙΑ ΤΕ γ
Dual........ sone ssbacdsniassny νὰν ον όαννσυμἡηνηλεν τυ cay Κα νὴ ΓΟ ᾿
Genders ........+. ΤΟΥ, devon ee antatnarhptetathes Thane Sacsvcsaveagani
POLAOVG: .cicsepcacicahancadsnr τὴ}. ρο ρα bens ya cisvedunesacecs ane
Agreement
General Principles of Agreement...........csccereeeeseees hitcsssense εξ
Construction according to Sense ...... κεν νυν νυν εν νκονον vaalavensapes
Subject—Nominative and Verb ...........ccccscsececscsecseseeeees ze
Attribute
Various Parts of Speech and Phrases used as Attributes.........
ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY
OPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP Pee Pee eee eee eee)
Predicate Noun and Adjective
Agreement with its Substantive .......... 0 νννννο σον νον ον σεν νον ονοσνον
Assimilation of Demonstrative Pronoun to the Gender and
Number of its Predicate Noum ...........ccccsecssevsessens ee
Predicate Adjective with some Part of εἰμί understood ........ ‘
Predicate Adjective expressing Purpose, Character or Quality
ADJECTIVES WITH ADVERBIAL ForcE
Predicate Adjective used where the English uses an Adverb..,
Different Meaning where an Adverb is used instead ............
Predicate Adjectives μέγας, πολύς, ἄφθονος, ἐναντίος with péw
GIP SEMAN sis avemeceacena μον ge sip κρεφῥεθεντι cksa sav eausaeviaeyinayene
Predicate Adjective πολύς with Other Expressions ...............
Apposition
Worn in Appomlihon janic scan licscck ΡΤ ΡΥ ΡΥ 110 base
Adjective with Article as Appositive to a Pasoaied Pronoun ..
Appositive belonging to two or more Nouns in Plural or Dual
Noun denoting Place with Appositive denoting Inhabitants ...
PAGE
6-7
7-10
10
10-11
11
12
12.18
18-15
15-16
CONTENTS
1326. Appositive denoting Part of the Subject............ccccccceeeeeeee ees
1327. Genitive as Appositive to an Adjective...........cccccsseeeeeeeeeerees
1328. In Homer Noun or Pronoun denoting a Person with Apposi-
BEVG Gemobitng δ᾽ δον ιν, ἐξ. νιυϑεεξινος ἀξοινον εἰς ον ἐόν ουνοὺ ἐὸν οδο
1899, Appositive may agree in Gender with its Subject..................
1330. Noun as Appositive to a whole Sentence.............csecesseseeneeees
1331. Position of Appositive Names of Rivers, Mountains, Islands,
Trealces, ONG CHAOS si civic sssesvccseassivcsese sihakccabutavanavdee sed
1332. The Expression ἡ βουλὴ of πεντακόσιοι ....... «ον ννννν νον αν ννν γεν ceees
The Adjective
1883-1386. Agreement of Adjective ..............cccsccccseesecsccscecveneseeeveseeees
1337. Adjectives and Participles used as Noums ........ ....scseeseeeeeees
DEGREES OF COMPARISON
IUCN ΣΟ ia cas Cu saXse τ ιν ιν cath naar wuss sssdrseeennesdsdincetene
1840-1854. Comparative Degrec.............ccssccsecscesscssscccccscescsccecesesecssvee
_ 1855-1366. Superlative Degree .......... ἀνε ενεννννεενεενεεενε κεν εεννεενεεεεεεενεέννεενεν
The Article
THE ARTICLE IN POETRY AND THE DIALECTS
1367-1368. The Article in Homer as a Demonstrative 6r Personal or
ΠΝ ΝΟ ors Bee ond co oes sa enkbnes treahectenennés
1370. Adverbial use of τῷ and τό in Poetry .........ceecsseeeeeseseeeeeeees
1871-1375. The Article used as Article Proper .............cccssscsceeesneeneeeees
1376. The Article in Lyric and Tragic Poetry; as Relative in
Herodotus, Doric, and Aeolic .............cecceseecsessesceeecees
Tue ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK
1877-1388. Use as Pronoun or Demonstrative ...........:.cceceeceeeseeeneeeeees
2889-1898. Use as Article Proper ............ccscsccsevesscscrsccccetnscevevcecseseeees
1394-1395. Use of Article in forming Substantives ..............cccsccceeeeneves
1396-1405. Insertion and Omission of the Article..........ccccccsccceseeeeneneees
1406-1417. Position of Attributes and Predicate Adjectives relating to
Nouns which have the Article...........:ccccccseseesensseneenees
32-33:
33
33-34
34-37
37-38
39
39-40.
40
40-41
41
SECTION
1418,
1419-1420,
1421-1422,
1423-1431.
1432-1434.
1435-1439,
1440.
1441,
1442-1448,
1444-1448,
1449-1452.
1453,
1454-1459.
1460-1464.
1465-1466,
1467.
1468.
1469.
1470-1477.
1478.
1479-1483.
1484-1486.
1487,
1488-1489,
1491-1492,
1493-1508.
1509.
1510.
CONTENTS
Pronouns
PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS
Nominative used only when Emphatic .............ccccccceceeeeeees
Uses of ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ and of Enclitic Forms...............scceeeee:
Oblique Cases of αὐτός as Personal Pronouns of the Third
POFBOR. vias yisesverver av vevvocenenspeteditesy sk με γθνον εν aval ect iae tee
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
Gonoral use Of TOMeNIVOG | ceecccs.cgcptenscesesccsctscounessbalapassacten
Uses of the Forms ἐμὲ αὐτόν, C60. .........ccesececsceeececeereesseeneees
Reflexives of the Third Person used for the First or Second...
Plural Reflexives used for Reciprocal Pronoun, etc...........++++.
Refloxives: in Tomah, i:cicideicecvckes+covtcy ince vai ceahousssutiscenecesthel
Personal Pronoun οὗ, of, etc., in Attic Prose as Reflexive ......
Personal Pronoun οὗ, of, etc., in the Dialects................ceeeeee
PossEssIvVE PRONOUNS
General Uses of Possessive Promouns...........scescseeseseeseers ae -
Reflexive Possessive, my own, etc. ..... mashbanhhanie sees SRE a
Simple Possessives sometimes Reflexive...........:.ccsscecseeeeeeees
Genitives of Personal Pronouns seldom Reflexive..............+0+
Genitives of Demonstratives used instead of Reflexives for
DARD PIGME τροφοῦ axasniesbacsuheuncnshunndsguensekiexacadssaientace rect
Synopsis of Simple and Reflexive Possessive Forms............ ἐν
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
Wald OBE ΟΡ See nde Hoek a dep ra Ἐν ΑΓ ρετῆς ta van απο ueasblaatexess eae
Position of οὗτος, ὅδε, ἐκεῖνος with the Article.............cceceeeeees
Οὗτος as Antecedent Relative............ccccscsccccceccccecsccesceseveses
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
Particular and Indefinite Relatives ................csccceeeseeceeeeeees
“Qe pe & Demiometrahive -cininscakskccas ds Gedsavesounddessdt>ss τ πὸ
Relative a6. Predioste .i0i.iscaiccctapeesdoccidasveansnesvoabucvaeacercates
CONTENTS xi
SECTION PAGE
1511-1520. Agreement of Relative.................cccsssesesesesesevecevecssescsseseees 74-77
1521. Governing Preposition of the Relative omitted.................... 17
~ 1522-1528. Omission of Antecedent of the Relative.............c.ccccseseeeeeees 77-78
1529-1539. Assimilation and Attraction with Relative ................seseeees 79-83
1540-1541. Relative not Repeated............::scccreseecssccecsrsenceeseneeevesnenecs 83-84
1542-1544. Relatives οἷος, ὅσος, and ὡς in Exclamations ........ .νννννννννννεννν 84
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
1545-1547. Use of Interrogatives and Indirect Questions ..............0..6008 84-85
1548. Interrogatives as Predicate-Adjectives.............ccceessecneereseeees 85
1549-1551. Interrogative belonging to a Participle or Dependent Word... 85-86
1552. Two or more Interrogatives belonging to one Verb............... 86
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS τὶς AND ἄλλος
1553-1557. Uses of τὶς, τὶ........ Wad ous tnaehabas seisade taaknarend¥ ys dbasbanianoesecyshese 86-87
UC CRIMOM: Ol MRAM) cecdacabassdniscdnariiSsvntalcasiksdesesacieseteosevedacccnpo yess 87-88
The Cases
es ὈΒΗΝ, cc asevavedinvvydes cod sevocucrsersscnjavevnedscdecbebseces 88
NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE
1564. Nominative as Subject or Predicatic.............c.ccceeeeeeeneeesnenee 88
1565. Nominative used independently ..............csececeeseseeeneseneeeees 89
1566. Nominative and Changes of Construction (Anacoluthon) ...... 89
1567-1572. Vocative and Nominative used as Vocative ...........cseeseeeesee 89-90
ACCUSATIVE
ὖὸς ἈΠ π| ν ΠῚ} {τ os. ockccveasscouvennnecscvoowytuvevatendesecsevescceseecs 90
1574-1586. Accusative of Direct Object ..........ν. νον ννννννννον νον νυ νον νον ονν νον ννον 90.98
1587-1594. Cogmate—Accusative πούς ἐ εν, ννῦνν ἐοοσοῦνυνον νον ύ κοι σονοονοοςουνοονοοοο 93.95
1595-1596. Accusative of Specification.............cccccscseeesecseeseceeeeeseees have 95
U5O7-1608. Adverbial Accusative .........c0c.ccrccccsssrovcccssvevseserseseccecscesess 95-96
1599-1601. Accusative of Extent of Time and Space .............cscceeseeneees 96
1602. Accusative of Object of Motion (Poetic)...........cccsceccseeeesenees 96-97
1603-1604, Accusative with Adverbs of Swearing ...........cccecccsseseceeeeeeees 97
TWO ACCUSATIVES WITH ONE VERB ;
1605-1608. Double Object-Accusative ............0ἀονοννν νυν ον νον νον ον ον σοσοννονονονν 97.98
1609-1614. Object-Accusative and Ῥυθᾶϊοδίθ- ἀοουβαύϊνθ.,... 1... ννννννννννννννν 98.100
1615-1618. Object-Accusative and Cognate-Accusative ................0000008 100-101
xii
SECTION
1618.
1619-1630.
1631-1637.
1638-1640.
1641-1643.
1644-1647.
1648-1652,
1653-1662,
1663-1668.
1669-1673.
1674-1679.
1680-1685.
1686-1687,
1688-1691.
1692.
1693-1698.
1699-1703.
1704-1713.
1714-1720.
1721.
1722.
1723.
1724.
1725-1728.
1729-1731.
1732-1735.
1736.
1737,
1738,
CONTENTS
GENITIVE
PAGE
Genoral Romarkg,, .. oi: ss svdsashstcadecavarpacuecti¥ewunckotes ΤΥ rita’ 101-102
Genitive with Nouns (Attributive Genitive) ........ννννννννννννννον 102-105
Prodicate-Genitive .......scisscensscsovcsnscscecsstecsssess δεν τ τι ΝΣ εν 105-107
GENITIVE WITH VERBS
Genitive with Verbs affecting the Object only in Part ......... 107-108
Genitive with Verbs of sharing and e@njoying.........cccceceeeeecees 108
Genitive with Verbs meaning to touch, to take hold of, to tread ~
UPON, 60, δρρῶν, EO HY dciecsidaecteavedt cache cunsderW ease sas yavndcvetue 109-110
Genitive with Verbs meaning (o desire, to aim at, to claim, to
αὐίώμε, Δὲ, £0 MABE: εξ τινος δ ρων νον ἐνῇ ccdcapasedsctsocedectoes 110-111
Genitive with Verbs meaning to remember, to forget, to care for,
to neglect; £0. MeGpise ..siervnccasvcodss ὦφλεν εκυκ ον μὲν κελέτς τς akaat 111-113
Genitive with Verbs of Mental or Sensory Perception ......... 113-115
Genitive with Verbs meaning to rule and to lead.................. 115-116
Genitive of Material with Verbs of Plenty and Want and
BAG ia cc gush asvanscaeaegamaa Xiah tenes & gave νον εν ἐγ τοῦ cr acasenere 116-118
Genitive with Verbs expressing Separation.........cccceesccececeenes 118-120
Genitive of Distinction with Verbs meaning to surpass or to
TA RTI ccc sa5k ehscdaes coiareaatpo nenicks chaebhittteters τα τα πὸ 121
Genitive of Cause or Regard with Verbs expressing Emotion 121-123
Genitive of Source with Verbs ............:scsscscscssecsersescecsecnsess 123
Genitive of Price or Value with Verbs ..............ccccceeeeecetens 123-125
Genitive of Crime with Judicial Verbs ...............cceceeeeeeeeees 125-126
Genitive with Compound Verbs................sesceceeseeseeccevsveneess 126-128
GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS
Genitive with Adjectives similar to Verbs governing the
CHONG GW Sai ous o's ΤΥ ΤΕ ΛΎΤΙ ΤΙ δι, τ 129-132
Genitive with some Adjectives similar in Meaning to Transi-
BEPE VORIO cics istasceSvucay toonnegrsdaphbeke arta Oulteee Δ το ταν 132
Genitive with Adjectives expressing an implied Noun ......... 132
Genitive after Adjectives of Comparative Degree.................. 132-183
Partitive Genitive with Adjectives ................cccccecececeesseecees 133
ChemiSrwe WHE: AM {τς ΠΕ Ύ ΎΤΥΝ, baa édvecsvavitacosshumaus 133
GENITIVE IN LOOSER RELATIONS
Genitive: OF Tittle ΡΥ vsvcads stents ctccssocesdudesereeneeen 133-134
CRONIES: OF ῬΊΔσδ τς inci τον dis vas ges vevcetsconcdecevecscsceucsdaetraaeae 134-135
Genitive in Hixelmmations τον τινός ices sescsaied.siassbdenedcvacsgeenmenvne 135
Genitive expressing im regard tO. .....c.cccceccececscevseusess ΚΈΑΡ δ᾽ 135
Geenthive. ΡΟ δι, cies. saciis cin cc idan Xg cm caes ca cBhasbeueaderakaeeeeteel 135
SECTION
1739.
1740-1741.
1742-1753.
1754-1756.
1757.
1758.
1759-1765.
1766-1769.
1770.
1771-1772.
1773-1775.
1776-1785.
1786.
1787-1790.
1791-1794.
1795.
1796-1799.
1800.
1801-1803.
1804-1809.
1810-1814.
1814-1815.
1816 1822.
1823-1827.
1828-1830.
1831,
1832-1836.
1837.
1838.
1839-1842.
1843-1861.
1862-1864,
1865.
CONTENTS xili
DATIVE
PAGE
ΠΕ Πρ νον ΕΟ τύ ἐν οήθυυξενονευκο εν εξ οὐενενονοννα 135
Dative of Indirect Object with Transitive Verbs .................5 135-136
Dative of Indirect Object with Intransitive Verbs ............... 136-139
Dative of Indirect Object with Adjectives and Adverbs ....,.... 139-140
Dative of Indirect Object with Nouns.............cccsecseseeseneeenes 140
Dative of Association and Resemblance (General) ............... 140
Dative of Association and Resemblance with Verbs............... 140-142
Dative of Association and Resemblance with Adjectives ....., 142-144
Dative of Association and Resemblance with Nouns............ 144
Dative of Association and Resemblance with Adverbs ......... 144
Dative of Association and Resemblance as Dative of Accom-
πη acs cuscnmhbbtpensmurs cascahanateccesacccyesecasecacceedskgedte 144-145
Dative with Compound Nouns and Adjectives ...............se00es 145-147
Dative of Interest (General) ................cscsccescescscsecsccesneeees 147
Dative of Interest as Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage... 147-148
Dative of Interest as Dative of Possessor .............cccseeeseeeees 148
Dative of Interest as Ethical Dative ...................ceceeeseeeeees 148-149
Dative of Interest as Dative of Relation or Standpoint......... 149-150
Dative of Interest as Dative of Agent...............cscececesseeeeeees 150
Dative of Instrument or Means,............ccsseseessecerseeveeereses z+» 150-151
ΝΠ CR NIU ον τεὴν, εὐ τες εὴ bee τὰκ κε ἐν AU ευεξὸν μα ὐ κε νιν οἷ GES owe 151-152
ΠΥ Ἰ κον coco aes sie cna το τον τυ εὐδὲ oe <Xds qn 000s <auussuanels snnegesess 152-153
Dative of Measure of Differemce................ccscscsseseseseeseeeceeses 153
ΝΟΣ MUMMERS ΟΣ slice cunt hu cas ξ ας κ κονο κς κύνα φδρκαναν ςανν οὐ ξεν ἐς 153-154
τ οι ἡ CMMI Suvepecyavagacadesnsuustes bess ΤΥ ΓΤ 155
Prepositions
πα οδδοδ δὲ IE VOID ose cannes caness vonusecsanencdavestanceneesoce 155-156
ΝΣ τ sieve bun dood bathtarvaceddadyuh is erisetss chdercsbionsquedss core 156-157
ΠΝ ΟΝ, oukacsneunetbsheapdsidanasaqoonseeescpsetenecescccecs 157-158
Preposition used for a Compound Verb ..........sccceeeseeeeeeeeees 158
Improper Prepositions never used in Composition ............... 158
General Use of the Prepositions .....,......:+++ Redenvgvalavabetecsxes 158-160
The Prepositions in Detail (alphabetically) .............csseeeeeees 160-175
ποθ ΘΟ ΟΝ τοτονοινυνεννγουρουνοουνυυνεουφοὶ ϑοὺ δὶ ἐόν φρονεῖ 176-177
Adverbs
References to Peeuliarities in the Use of Adverbs ............++ 177
xiv CONTENTS
The Verb
THE VOICES
SECTION PAGE
1866-1867. The Active Valea: i....ssccaveess ccancdogealv eaadapedCanrtedatenenvaaiainenes 177-178
1868-1880. The Middle; Voice........s0s.scccccsscccocesesvseccsvccens POE R RIS OST τς 178-181
3681-1890. "The Passive Voioe......3<cicacscackecescaccathsesécuantvetccsseseusakusaneiie 181-184
THE TENSES
1891-1893. General Character of the Tenses ..........ccsecececsececeseceseceeeeecs 184-186
41694-1000, Probent Σιδίσα ee casei dcissccssssncvnandiancdaaehucdecshscoacenedeccelelyn 186-187
1901-1909. Imperfect ΤΟΊΗ δ᾽ so sndceiadecissdaccsescenhccseseecevnsssvesetenpsteben 187-190
7 0 2050. Αονῖος UMGIOMEIWE: ον ἐπ oo che Fae chaauda de nlinsdganenati¥anas 190-192
1921-1927. Future Fr τ iss cds o να κ νιν acs bd ucTaccecavdad aabecassaucesaccyeees 192-193
1928-1935. Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative. ..............cscseseseeeeceeeseseevee 194-195
1986-1987. Future-Perfect Indicative .............ccccoscescscccccecescceccccasecves 195
1938-1944. Tenses in the other Moods not in Indirect Discourse ............ 196-197
1945-1948. Optative and Infinitive im Indirect Discourse ........ccccecseeeees 197-198
1949-1956. Tenses of the Participle ............csccorccevscccscesesccctsrccesenssesess 198-199
1957. Primary and Secondary Temses ........c.cesscscescessecsvscsceeseeees 199
The Moods
1958-1959. General View of the Moods ..........c.ccccccvcccecccccvecsvecencvsesees 200
TSGO-1972.’ Phe Partlare Biiaicicccee cil ΡΜ ΤΥ ΡΥ ΤΡ τι Ἢ 901-908
FINITE MOODS IN SIMPLE OR INDEPENDENT CLAUSES
1973. Different Kinds of Independent Clauses............s.sssceeeseseseees 203
INDICATIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES
1974-1975. Indicative in Direct Statements and Questions .........s.ssecees 204
1976; Potential TndioaGive τοῖν ccvncdccavevancvedes ydedeucsesueanwesseceueannen 204
1977-1978. Strong Denial in Future expressed by οὐ μή followed by Sub- ;
Pat junctive or Future Indicative ........ ὁ εννννν κεν κε νε κε κεε κε εν σεν 204
IMPERATIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES
1979-1981. Expression of Command by Imperative.......... seteeseeseneneneres ..« 204-205
1982. Perfect Timperative .........:ccecsersesececseeerececesnececesasenseuausees ab 205
1983. Prohibitions expressed by μή with Pres. Imperative or Aor.
Subjunctive .........scccesccsecsccscrerecsececaeseecsecseeseneen setees 205
1984. Prohibitions sometimes expressed by Aorist Imperative ...... 205
1985. Prohibitions sometimes expressed in the Dramatists by οὐ μή
205
and the Second Pers. Sing. of Fut. Indic. or Aor. Subj.
CONTENTS XV
“ SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES
«SECTION PAGE
ΝΞ IONE. Fortative Subjunctive.......dcccccccsssccsevesssssesscascesesceeeveseoees 205-206.
1987-1990. Deliberative or Interrogative Subjunctive or Indicative......... 206
1991. Subjunctive equivalent to Fut. Indic. in Homer .................. 206
1992. Subjunctive and Future Indic. as expressing Expectation...... 207
OPTATIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES
1993-1998. Potential Optative ........ NOPRUMARDRLMMER AA SLD SSObts<s0essoscscenccecccesy MOTOS
ΝΥΝ of Wishing ............0:.ccc.sscsecesscccvescesccnnesevseseseees 208-209
2004-2007.. Unattainable Wishes expressed by Past Tenses of Indicative 209-210.
Tue Moops ΙΝ INDEPENDENT OR DiRECT QUESTIONS
08-2009. Direct Simple and Double Questions ........:...c:scsssecsesessssaee 210-211
ΝΥ ΟΝ TOW δοιὰ γι νυ κονοὐνος ον οι ἐσος δνοδονο».. 211-212
FINITE MOODS IN DEPENDENT OR SUBORDINATE CLAUSES
2011. General Reference to the Various Constructions ................++ 212
OBLIQUE OPTATIVE
2012. Use of Optative in Indirect Discourse.............c.ccccsseeeseeeeees 213:
DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS
2018-2015. Direct and Indirect Statements ..........ἁ.νννννν νον νον εν νον νννεννννον 213-214
2016-2022. Rules for Simple Dependent Declarative Clauses introduced
τον sacenasanes ved epchedacedvenenncekevqerice space . 214-218.
D8&PENDENT QUESTIONS
2028-205. Direct and Indirect (or Dependent) Questions ..........νννννννννον 218
2026-2033. Rules for Dependent Questions ............sccceceeeseeseeeeeeeeseeees 218-221
2034-2036. Dependent Clauses after Implied Inquiry...............ccceseeeeees 221-223
ΕἾΝΑΙ, OCLavusEs
-2039. Meaning and Kinds of Final and Object Clauses.................. 298
9047, Final Clauses of Absolute Purpose ..........ἁκνννννν νυν νον νον νον ενν νον 223-226
2048-2049. Final Clauses of Unattainable Purpose ...............cscssesseeeeees 226.
_ 2050-2057. Object-Clauses after Verbs of Effort, etc. ..........cscecceeceeeeeees 226-229
_ 2058-2061. Ὅπως and ὅπως μή in Commands,.,.........cccccessssereseeeesssessnees 229-230
_ 2062-2070. Clauses and Various Constructions after Verbs of Fearing ... 280-288
2071-2076, Causal ΟἸδιβοβ......... ον ννννννννον Aa) Fe ΕΥ̓ ΥΥΕΝΝ .. 283-285
Xvi
SEOTION
2077.
2078-2079.
2086-2087.
2088.
2089-2091.
2092.
2093.
2094.
2095-2097.
2098-2101.
2102-2108.
2109-2112,
2113-2115.
2116.
2117.
2118.
2119-2123.
2124-2127,
2128-2132.
2133-2134.
2135,
2136.
2187,
2138-2139.
2140-2141.
2142-2146.
2147-2160.
2161.
2162.
CONTENTS
CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES
PAGE
Meaning of Consecutive Clauses ...........sccessssssscessererscevenees 235
Consecutive Clauses with Finite Mood .............ceseeeee ee nao 235-236
Consecutive Clauses with the Infinitive,...............ccceeeeeeeees . 286-237
“Ooos and οἷος used instead of ὥστε in Consecutive Clauses ... 238
CoNDITIONAL SENTENCES
όπου Femara. οὐ τε vvccicdsnasbissiaversasvecunnd aches αὐ δὴ .... 2838-289
Particular and General Suppositions .............ssseeeseeee eeeeenes 239
Four Classes of Conditional Sentences .............:sseeeeeveeeeeees 239-240
Synopsis of Conditional Forms.............scscscsssecscscnessee eeseees (240-241
Simple Present or Past Particular Conditions with Nothing
ΧΗ ced a cxnneb bt nani pais acgs bales νύκταν ony oduhye ἐρῶν ceneveeerienae 241-242
Simple Present or Past General Conditions with Nothing
TITAS Sinks scentancavanconstibentekdivesoxetisk saush ake tt Fee 242-243
Present and Past Conditions Contrary to Reality........ccccss00s 243-247
Future Conditions of more Distinct Form. ..........ccccsecseeeeeees 247-248
Future Conditions of less Distinct Form ...........cccccceeseeeeeee 248-249
Various Peculiarities of Conditional Sentences. ............0.s06: 249
Mixed Forms of Conditional Sentences ...........ccccceeseeeeseeeers 250
Disjunctive Conditional Clauses ...........c.c.cceccessceeeeereeeeeenes 251
Ellipsis and Substitution in the Protasis ...........c.ceceseseseeeer 251-252
Ellipsis and Substitution in the Apodosis ..............ccceseeeeeees 252-254
Omission of the Verb in Conditional Clauses...............:seesee0e 254-255
CoNcESSIVE CLAUSES
Construction and Peculiarities of Concessive Clauses..,......... 255-256
Concession also expressed by a Participle, or by a Clause with
Gaal -cccccacccvescdechadbesavedtcnctandane oeboedauctucs cael casesertaee 256.
RELATIVE CLAUSES
Gomneral. Remarks ΠΤ ΡΠ" 256
Explanatory Relative Clauses ............sscscsssssscsssccecenssteseees 256-257
Causal Relative: Clause ooo ivesiseieseciscsscccccucsessuvcevesyosseceeniem 257
Consecutive Relative Clauses...........csccscscecsssvcecses sescesseeenes 257-258
ὉΠ ΉΔῚ ΠΟΘΙ ΕΟ ΠΌΝΘΙ. τ}. γον προ cancedsccnadscrdcugesonacecniae ες. 258
Conditional Relative Clauses..............ccscccseseesecesseeeeeceeseeees 258-261
TEMPORAL CLAUSES
Tomporal Parbioles 5.4: c.scesevsesvaidvcvsvessrecesedessseyasscaueueen . 261-262
General Remark
CONTENTS XVll
ἘΘΌΝΕΝΟΝ PAGE
2163. Correlatives of Temporal Particles ................ccceeeeeceeeeeeeeees 262
2164-2165. Temporal Clauses expressing Actual Occurrence ...... ........... 262
2166 2171. Temporal Clauses not expressing Actual Occurrence ............ 263-265
2172-2175. ΤΘ poral Clauses introduced by “ Until” ......Ψ.ὅ.(ὁἐννονονννννννννννον 265-266
2176-2182. Temporal Clause; introduced by *‘ Before” .......ὑννννννννννννονον 266-270
2183-2184. Assimilation of Mood in Relative and Temporal Clauses ...... 270-271
The Infinitive
reMenIm OF Bre TUS 6505 cat cxnscahs cp onbdagsavevtgdase ver taceseess 271
2186-2191. Subject and Predicate-Noun with the Infinitive .................. 271-274
2192-2200. Infinitive without the Article in Indirect Discourse............... 274-277
INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE NoT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
2201. Summary of the following uses........ πο τεννιν νων ἐν δε υτονυνν κεν 277
Νὰ δῆ τ εξεύς, κε ond casi ἐξῥεςνενι κανόνος 278-281
2216-2225. Supplementary Infinitive .................ccccsevecsssesseseeneceereeeres 281-284
2226-2229. Infinitive jin other Constructions (Conditions, Result, Pur-
pose, Commands, Wishes, Resolutions, Infinitive Absolute,
Idiomatic Expressions, Infinitive with πρίν) ................55 284-286
INFINITIVE WITH THE NEUTER ARTICLE
2230. Character of the Articular Infinitive ....0...........cccceeseeeeeeeeees 286
2231-2237. Uses of the Articular Infinitive ............. ΤΟΥΣ Κ᾿ τς ΡΥ 286-290
The Participle
2238. Nature of the Participle...............scsseeccsssscsvesseeevevsscecenes 4 290
ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE
2239-2245. Various Uses of the Attributive Participle..................:01seeees 290-291
PREDICATE PARTICIPLE
: CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE
2246-2258. Various Uses (Time, Cause, Means, Accompanying Circum-
stance, Purpose, Condition, Concession)............. cesses 292-295
2259-2264. Genitive Absolute..............:cccsscccssersesseeeeceeeenerssensennensarnen 295-296
2265-2268. Accusative Absolute. .............ccsesssssecsensscseerenensnssnnes sepnanens 296-298
2269-2276. Particles used with the Circumstantial Participle ............... 298-301
2277-2278. Omission of év belonging to a Predicate-Noun or Adjective.., 801-302
b
XVill
SECTION
2279.
2280-2283.
2284.
2285-2288.
2289-2290.
2291-2295.
2296.
2297.
2298.
2299.
2300.
_ 2301-2310.
2311.
2312.
2313.
2314.
2315.
2316-2319.
2320.
2321-2323.
2324-2328.
2329-2333,
CONTENTS
SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE
? PAGE
Nature of the Supplementary Participle ..............:.:s:seeeeees 302
PARTICIPLE LIMITING THE MEANING OF THE VERB
With εἰμ, ylyvopat,badpyeo......ccccssescsscstesccesdconesccesvssstesauays 302-304
Wh Το τ ον χινγο χρυ τ 804
With Verhe GE ΘΒ OS conc cecstatentsads~cony scene setccvstereivonsag 304-305
With Verbs of beginning, ceasing, stopping, persevering, weary-
ING, ANA POTIMNALLING 55 <ciswaaives en yhowsesevesivescoesescreaenecsscages 306-309
With Verbs of Feeling or Emotion ...............seecseeeeseeceeceeees 309-310
With Verbs meaning to do well or ill, to surpass, be inferior,
BEG. ccasacscdeetiae caaceuee hes ihaescnesk an nsetcadhadset surneteteaebdasi ἡ οὖς 311
With συμβαίνει, συμπίπτω, βελτίων (ἀμείνων, κρείσσων) εἰμί, and .
with Verbs meaning fo be full of, to be sufficient ... ........ 311
With Verbs of Coming and Going ...... cee cee cesssseeeseteeeeeenees 312
ἌΝ Vari ΗΘ. V ORIG oe ccs caancsenctsscs ante conbessss00 αὐκὰκ ἡ ρῶν 312-313
PARTICIPLE EQUIVALENT TO A CLAUSE WITH ὅτι
General Principle of Participle of Indirect Direct Discourse... 313
Verbs of Perception governing Participle of Indirect Discourse 313-318
Verbs of Perception governing Participle or Infinitive of Ind.
ΡΥ ΣΣ ΠΥ Ὁ Wee ee env g Nhe y OR sa τς ΤΡ, 318-321
Omission of the Supplementary Participle dy .................6... 321
Use of ὡς with the Supplementary Participle......................+ 321-322
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -teos, -τέᾶ, -τέον
Used personally and impersonally ................cccceeeeeeeeceeeeeee 322
Personal ΟΠ ΘΕ ΕΟ προ ase cdad ete <x scecnckss νειν κείν τς τ τς 822-323
Impeéraonal Consiruction wise cssscscsstseassivesegestcusras>sneseesque 323-324
Indirect Discourse
or
ORATIO OBLIQUA
Direct and Indirect Discourse ................cccscececsecceccececsecte 324
Principal Clauses of Indirect Discourse.................ccccseecevees 324-325
Subordinate Clauses of Indirect Discourse...............cccceceeesce 825-329
CONTENTS xix
Negatives
SEOTION PAGE
OE a co ce ee Ms each acences ss ise susaigutyyidedesinpbé sos 332
2335. Ov and ph in Principal Clauses...................seceeseeceseereeeees ees 332
2336-2337. Ov and μή in Subordinate Clauses...................064 sehesapedaa ssp sah 332-333
2338-2340. Μή with the Infinitive.............. ccsceseeeeeesseecseeeneeseeseseeeeeeees 333
MEMEEDS, Ob With CHO TMAMIGIVE oo. occncs sce. ceccnsscecs ese sscscnncdaemonessnenscns 333-334
2346-2347. Οὐ and μή with Participles, Adjectives, and Nouns ............... 334
2348-2349. Οὐ and μή as Interrogative Particles ............... ceseevenseeseeees 334-335
APPARENT REDUNDANCE OF NEGATIVES
ΝΕΎΕΙΝ δεν ch ates Mind ει dpedesvecvevsavsesecswsessedsssvonveases 335
2351-2355. With the Infinitive after Verbs of Negative Meaning ............ 335-337
2356. With the Infinitive after Verbs and Expressions of Inability,
Impossibility, Impropriety, C66. ...........0cccceceenvseveceresevees 337
2357. Μὴ οὐ with Participles and Nouns ...............seseceseeeeceeeeeeees 337
DovusBLING OF NEGATIVES
ΝΕ SIMIWMMNN Gs sec ancc gush otvapersh (aneanckes i cedan get dsucacnse φερώνυμον 337-338
2559-2361. Negative followed by Compound Negative(s) of the Same Kind 338
2362-2363. Negative followed by Simple Negative(s) of the Same Kind... 338
ΝΟ ΝΗ γος, τ ccaycesesecepsnccossedeccacaserabesevsansunestess 389
2365. Various Negative Expressions ..............sccccesevsceesesseevevsenes 339
Particles
2366. Particles Defined ; Interjections ..................sccceeecsseceveeerees 339
2367. Classes of Conjumctions .............scssee δονο ιν νασενοσ νος αὶ ἐῤνυῤνινεννο 889-840
τς ρον δ οι Το πο οΣ πε ΤΥ 840
2369. Postpositive Particles Defined ..................scscecesssessscecscseees 340
EMMONS τ snnsapihend sub ebaatPadar ares sasvaciosesledyesnvasebessacesses 340
2371. Alphabetical List of Particles ΡΥ 340-359
Some Figures of Syntax
SU UaEy EIEN | το θεν cada cabelas λει θεόν, Suet cdunGhdnpis cevdeWaviinbevobescass 359
ΝΥΝ can lc Sigh duck vith sddehs st το Gari von theses eon vandgtssvoesese cee 859-360
ΝΥΝ Sa abe ds cusn cisyseurudijuavsb ened cn sb κα ο νομὴν tvs ἐκ οςννο νος κοῦ 860
ΝΕ προ τὰ ἐκελενο ιν» κε λλορυνν εν ξιο ἀνου κε δεοκάδε δον δινονονεν 860
NIN USES Tal. ctvasauneWabaiedvéeresesccsacdistectaes eve ceevecsecctscas 860
ΝΌΟΝ Jadu UU bis h Ses age civysccresecscceUeuyvovedendvecscstecccccs¥es 860
xx CONTENTS
Order of Words and Clauses
SECTION PAGE
2878. Usual Orden: iiciiss cocsactvenbsticec<scsescsuesecnnsbcataybecttteaeeraens fast 361
2879. Inverted. Order os ississsccatsiasseectesccsessedvedavestimsenacbeuatihasttiees 361
880. Postpositived. iscsceccatssrtetcesecteessvesvedsses oe ἌΡΗΑ Ἐς ποτ δῦ 361-362
2381. Position of Dependent Clauses.............ccccssecesessereeeeeseesennes 362
S889. Hyperbatom ΟΣ vas eesytvacsacktunsasstecatdscgepeatevanericcagyemateanae 362
558, J uxtapomiticit en err, cic. cunadseavadeohapceastesreversryebccavteaese Cantthee 362-563
DORE, OChiasyaos |: ciscices ies saccades spacey spare caedtewev see de both δου δὲ bias avian 363
265. ΙΒ ΟΣ Proweron. sis inciacaavige savas tasendasenovssss stents srech octaves 363
2086. Tasertion Of Words 14 .50-isaacudeens xk ty ca tas treksehes weaes1s5ecalvase tenes 363-364
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN CITING AUTHORS ....cs..scceeceseseccne eeeeeeerconeeeees 365-368
ENERO ΡΟΣ ΡΥ ΤΡ ΓΤ 869
PART V
SYNTAX
DEFINITIONS
1201. Subject and Predicate.—Every sentence is composed of
a subject and a predicate. The subject is that of which something
is said. The predicate is that which is said of the subject. Thus,
in the sentence, Κῦρος πολλὰ ἔθνη ἐνίκησεν, Cyrus conquered many
nations, Κῦρος is the subject, and πολλὰ ἔθνη ἐνίκησεν is the
predicate.
1202. Object.—The object is that upon which the action of the
verb is exerted. It may be direct or indirect. Thus, in the
sentence, ἔδωκε TO βιβλίον τῷ παιδί, he gave the book to the boy,
βιβλίον is the direct object of the verb, and παιδί is the indirect
or remote object. Verbs which can take a direct object are called
transitive verbs; others are called intransitive.
1203. Appositive Noun.—A noun added to another noun to
describe it, is called an appositive noun ; as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος,
Socrates the philosopher.
1204. Predicate Noun.—When a noun forms part of the
predicate and is asserted of the person or thing to which it refers,
it is called a predicate noun; as Ἐενοφῶν στρατηγός ἐστιν, Xeno-
phon is general; καθίσταται βασιλεύς, he is established as king ;
Δαρεῖος Κῦρον σατράπην ἐποίησεν, Darius made Cyrus satrap ;
᾿Αλκιβιάδην στρατηγὸν εἵλοντο, they chose Alcibiades general.
1
2 SUBJECT 1205
1205. Copulative Yerbs.—1. When the verb εἰμί, be, connects
the subject with a predicate noun or a predicate adjective, it is
called the copula. Some other verbs, signifying to become, to
appear, to be chosen, to be made, to be regarded, and the like, are
also termed copulative verbs. τι
2. But εἰμί and these other copulative verbs may form complete
predicates, without predicate nouns or adjectives; as ἔστι θεός,
there is a God.
1206. Attributive Adjective.—An adjective is said to be αὖ-
tributive when it simply qualifies the substantive without the
intervention of a verb; as ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ, the good man.
1207. Attribute.—Besides attributive adjectives, all parts of
speech and expressions with the force of attributive adjectives,
are termed attributes. See 1265.
1208. Predicate Adjective.—An adjective is said to be pre-
dicate when it forms part of the predicate, and is asserted of the
person or thing to which it refers; as ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός ἐστιν, the
man is good; σοφὸν τὸν ἄνδρα νομίζουσι, they consider the man
(to be) wise. Every adjective and participle not attributive is
predicate.
SUBJECT
1209. The subject of a finite verb is in the nominative case ;
as Δαρεῖος βασιλεύει, Darius is king.
For the accusative subject of the infinitive, see 2189.
1210. The subject-nominative of the first or second person is
omitted, except when specially emphatic; as λέγω, I say ; λέγετε,
you say ; but ἐγὼ μὲν λέγω, σὺ δὲ οὐ λέγεις, I say, but you do not say.
1211. The subject-nominative of the third person is omitted—
1. When it is implied in the context ; as Κῦρος τὰς ναῦς μετεπέμψατο,
ὅπως ὁπλίτας ἀποβιβάσειε, Cyrus sent for the ships that he (Cyrus)
might land troops (Xen. Anab. 1, 4°).
2. When it is a general expression for persons; as λέγουσι, φᾶσί,
they say, it is said.
1214 SUBJECT 3
3. When it is implied in the verb. Such verbs are: σαλπίζει,
the trumpeter (σαλπιγκτής) sounds the trumpet ; κηρύσσει, the herald
(κῆρυξ) proclaims ; σημαίνει, a signal is given, they signal ; κωλύει, a
hindrance occurs. Similarly in the impersonal use of the passive, as
λέγεται, it is said ; especially in the perfect and pluperfect, as παρε-
σκεύασταί μοι, preparation has been made by me (= things have been ©
prepared by me). See 1800, 2314—2319.
4. In verbs like ὕει, ἐξ rains ; vider, it snows ; βροντᾷ, it thunders ;
ἀστράπτει, it lightens; σείει, there is an earthquake (lit. it shakes).
. With such verbs ὁ θεός or Ζεύς is sometimes found as a subject.
5. When it is indefinite. The verb is then called impersonal. So
δοκεῖ, it seems good ; δεῖ, χρή, it is necessary, one ought ; πρέπει, προσήκει,
it is proper ; ἔστι, ἔξεστι, it 1s possible ; δηλοῖ, it is evident, it shows ;
καλῶς, κακῶς ἔχει, it is well, ill; συμβαίνει, it happens ; διαφέρει, the
difference is ; ὀψὲ ἦν, it was late ; εἰς τοῦτο ἦλθε, it went so far ; ἡμέρα
ἐγένετο, it became day. Similarly in the impersonal construction of
the verbal in -réov, which often omits ἐστί; as τῷ νόμῳ πειστέον, We
must obey the law (Plat. Apol. 19") : see 2314—2319.
6. The indefinite τὶς is often omitted; as ἐὰν μὴ υἱὸν καταλίπῃ
γνήσιον, if one does not leave a legitimate son (Isae. 6, 44).
1212. Norz.—Many impersonal verbs may have an infinitive or a
whole sentence as the subject.
Ξυνέβη ὑμῖν πεισθῆναι, it happened to you to be persuaded (Thue. 2, 612).
Aci ἐπισάξαι τὸν ἵππον, it is necessary to saddle the horse (Xen. Anab. 3, 4°).
Δῆλον ἦν ὅτι ἐγγύς που ὁ βασιλεὺς ἦν, it was evident that the king was somewhere
near (Xen. Anab. 2, 3°). ᾿Ηγγέλθη ὅτι Μέγαρα ἀφέστηκε, it was reported that
Megara had revolted (Thue. 1, 114’). It is hardly proper,-although quite
common, to call these impersonal verbs.
41213. Norm.—Occasionally the subject must be supplied from some
word of the sentence.
Τειχίζεταί re καὶ ἤδη ὕψος λαμβάνει (τὸ τεῖχος), the wall is being built,
and is already advancing to some height (Το. 1, 91). Θεογονίᾶν
διεξέρχονται, γενόμενοί τε ws πρὸς ἀλλήλους ὡμΐλησαν (οἱ θεοί), they narrate the
birth of the gods, and how, after they were born, they behaved toward one
another (Plat. Leg. 886°).
1214. 1. The subject of a dependent clause is often emphati-
cally placed at the beginning of its clause.
Πρῶτον ἐπιχειρήσωμεν εἰπεῖν, dvdpeia ri ποτ᾽ ἐστίν, let us first try to
define what courage is (Plat. Lach. 1904).
4 THE VERB ; 1215
2. The subject of a dependent clause is very often drawn into
the principal clause, and its case made to depend on the leading
verb. This is called prolepsis (πρόληψις, anticipation), and occurs
mostly with verbs of saying, perceiving, knowing, fearing, and with
πιμελέομαι, take care.
Φίλιππον τοίνυν twes τολμῶσι λέγειν ὡς οὐδ᾽ ἐβούλετο Θηβαίοις
᾿Ορχομενὸν παραδοῦναι (= τολμῶσι τοίνυν τινὲς λέγειν ὡς φίλιππος οὐδ᾽, ete.),
some persons venture to say that Philip did not wish to deliver Orchomenos
to the Thebans (Dem. 5, 22). Οἶνον ἔφρασεν ἔνθα ἢν κατορωρυγμένος
(= ἔφρασεν ἔνθα οἶνος, etc.), he showed where the wine was buried (Xen.
Anab, 4, 5%). "Hider βασιλέᾷ ὅτι μέσον ἔχοι τοῦ Περσικοῦ στρατεύματος
(= ἤδει ὅτι βασιλεὺς μέσον, etc.), he knew that the king held the centre of the
Persian army (Xen. Anab. 1, 8"). "Apyovra Sei τῶν ἀρχομένων ἐπι-
μελεῖσθαι ὅπως ὡς βέλτιστοι ἔσονται (= ἄρχοντα δεῖ ἐπιμελεῖσθαι ὅπως oi
ἀρχόμενοι ὡς βέλτιστοι ἔσονται), it is the duty of an officer to take such care of
those whom he commands that they may be as brave as possible (Xen. Cyr.
2, 1"). Τὴν ὑπερβολὴν τῶν ὀρῶν ἐδεδοίκεσαν μὴ προκαταληφθείη
(= ἐδεδοίκεσαν μὴ ἡ ὑπερβολὴ τῶν ὀρῶν προκαταληφθείη), they feared that the
pass over the mountains might. be occupied in advance (Xen. Anab. 3, 5").
1215. Norr.—The subject of the dependent clause may even be-
come a genitive depending on a noun of the principal clause.
Ἦλθε τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις εὐθὺς ἡ ἀγγελίᾷ τῶν πόλεων ὅτι ἀφεστᾶσιν (= ἦλθε
τοῖς ᾿Αθηναῖοις εὐθὺς ἡ ἀγγελίᾷ ὅτι αἱ πόλεις ἀφεστᾶσιν), to the Athenians came
immediately the announcement that the cities had revolted (Thue. 1, 61°).
THE VERB
1216. The copula εἰμί, be, is often omitted, especially the forms
ἐστί and εἰσί. This occurs chiefly in pithy and proverbial sayings ;
with verbals in -réos; with certain nouns, adjectives, and parti-
ciples, as ἀνάγκη, necessity; @pa, time; θέμις, justice; ῥάδιον,
easy ; δῆλον, plain; χαλεπόν, difficult ; δυνατός, able; φροῦδος,
gone ; ἕτοιμος, ready ; δέον and χρέων, needful ; ἔξον, possible, and
the like.
Πλεονεξίᾶ μέγιστον ἀνθρώποις κακόν, greediness is a very great evil to men.
(Men. Mon. 549). Στρατιᾷ yap ἡ ῥᾷάστη (sc. ὁδὸς) ταχίστη, to an army the
easiest way is the quickest (Xen. Cyr. 2, 457). épew ἀνάγκη τὰς παρεστώσᾶς:
roxas, it is necessary to bear the present evils (Kur. Or. 1024). “Opa λέγειν,
it is time to speak (Xen. Anab. 1, 3"). Δῆλον ὅτι τοῦ ὁρᾶν ἕνεκα ὀφθαλμῶν
δεόμεθα, it is plain that we need eyes for seeing (Xen. Symp. 5, 5). Σκέψασθαι.
~
1222 THE VERB 9
δέον, it is necessary to examine (Dem. 3,1). ἰδεῖν ἃ οὐκ ἐξὸν αὐτῇ, to see
what was not permitted to her to see (Isae. 6, 50). Τῷ νόμῳ πειστέον. the
law must be obeyed (Plat. Apol. 19"). Πειρᾶτέον ὀρθῶς λέγειν, it is necessary
to speak correctly (Xen. Mem. 1, 2).
1217. Nore.—Other forms of εἰμί are seldom omitted.
Ἐγὼ πάσχειν ὁτιοῦν ἕτοιμος (sc. εἰμί), [ am ready to suffer anything (Dem.
4, 29; 9,4). Δίκαιος σὺ ἡγεῖσθαι (sc. εἶ), you ought to take the lead (Plat.
Protag. 351°). Περὶ τούτου ἕτοιμοι τῷ λόγῳ διαμάχεσθαι (sc. ἐσμέν), We are
prepared to argue it out concerning this (Plat. Rep. 4994). Ἕως (sc. ἐστε)
ἔτ᾽ ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ φυλάξασθε, while you are yet in safety, beware (Dem. 19, 262).
1218. Norz.—Occasionally the imperfect is omitted.
“Hpero εἰ οἱ τεθνεῶτες αὐτῶν καλοὶ κἀγαθοί (sc. ἦσαν), he asked if those whe
had fallen were honourable and brave men (Thue. 4, 40°).
1219. Some common verbs of being, happening, going, coming,
_ doing, saying, which are easily understood, are sometimes omitted for
brevity or effect, especially in questions and commands.
Ἵνα τί (se. γένηται) ; to what purpose ? = lit. that what may happen
(Dem. 19, 257). Ω φίλε Φαῖδρε, ποῖ δὴ (sc. εἶ) καὶ πόθεν (sc. ἥκεις), dear
Phaedrus, whither, pray, are you going and whence are you come? (Plat.
Phaedr. 227"). Οὐδὲν GN (se. ποιοῦσιν) ἢ συμβουλεύουσιν ἡμῖν, they do nothing
else than advise us (Isoc. 8, 37). Ti ἄλλο (se. ἐποίησαν) οὗτοι 4 ἐπεβούλευσαν ;
what else did these men than plot against us ? (Thue. 3, 39%). Περὶ τούτων
κατὰ σχολήν (sc. λέξομεν), about these we will speak at leisure (Dem. 24, 187).
Μή μοι μῦρίους ξένους (sc. λέξητε), tell me not of ten thousand mercenaries
(Dem. 4, 19).
1220. Norz.—In proverbs, official statements, and inscriptions,
omissions of other verbs occur ; these are readily supplied.
Γλαῦκ᾽ εἰς “AOnvas (sc. φέρειν). Οἱ σύμμαχοι ἀριστεῖον τῇ ᾿Αθηνᾷ (sc.
ἀνέθεσαν), the allies erected a memorial to Athene (Dem. 22,72). Οἱ σύμμαχοι
τὸν δῆμον avdpayabias ἕνεκα καὶ δικαιοσύνης (sc. ἐστεφάνωσαν), the allies crowned
the people on account of their bravery and justice (ibid. ).
1221. Norr.—The above cases of omission (1219 and 1220) must
not be confounded with the very numerous cases in which an omitted
verb is easily supplied from a preceding, seldom from a following one.
Πάνυ χαλεπῶς ἔχω, οἶμαι δὲ καὶ ὑμῶν rods πολλούς (sc. χαλεπῶς ἔχειν), 1]
Jeel rather in a bad way, but I think many of you do also (Plat. Symp. 1765).
Οὗτος μὲν ὕδωρ (sc. river), ἐγὼ δὲ οἶνον rive, this man drinks water, but 1
drink wine (Dem. 19, 46).
1222. In connection with adverbs, the verbs εἰμί and γίγνομαι
are not copulative, but form complete predicates.
6 PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBERS 1223
᾿Εγγὺς ἦσαν οἱ ὁπλῖται, the hoplites were near (Xen. Anab. 5, 4"). Καλῶς
ἔσται, ἢν θεὸς θέλῃ, it will be well, if God wills (Xen. Anab. 7, 83). Ἔστιν
οὕτως, it is thus (Plat. Phaedo, 71*). Τεγενῆσθαι καλῶς, to be of good descent
(Dem. 60, 3). Téyovas κακῶς, you are of low birth (Ar. Eq. 218).
1223. Norzr.—With local adverbs, γίγνομαι is to be rendered by
come.
᾿Εγγύτερον ἐγίγνοντο, they were coming nearer (Xen. Anab. 1, 8°). Πᾶν
ὁμοῦ ἐγένετο τὸ Ἑλληνικόν (= συνῆλθε), the whole Greek force came together
(Xen. Anab. 4, 2”).
PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBERS,
GENDERS, AND PERSONS
SINGULAR
1224. The singular sometimes has collective meaning, and then
stands for the plural.
1. It may denote the material or mass.
Λίθους καὶ mriv θον, stones and bricks (Thue. 4, 905. Ἰχθῦν ἕψειν, to
cook fish (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2°). Στρωμνὴν καὶ ἐσθῆτα, carpets and clothes (Xen.
Oyr. 4, 5*). Ἕρπει δάκρυον ὀμμάτων ἄπο, the tears trickle from our eyes
(Soph. El. 1231).
2. The singular of a noun denoting a person is sometimes used
collectively, but much less often than in Latin.
Ὃ ἄρχων, 6 δικαστής, ὁ ἰδιώτης, the archons, the judges, the private citizens
(Lye. 79). ‘Omdirns, σκευοφόρος, ἱππεύς, hoplites, sutlers, cavalry (Xen. Oec.
8, 4). ‘O πολέμιος, the enemy (Thuc. 4, 10°). ‘O πέλας, the neighbours
(Thue. 1, 32*). Thus ἀσπίς is used for ὁπλῖται and (ἡ) ἵππος for ἱππεῖς ; as
ἀσπὶς pupia rerpaxocia, 10,400 shields = hoplites (Xen. Anab. 1, 7). Τὴν
διᾶκοσίαᾶν ἵππον, the (troop of ) 200 cavalry = horse (Thuc. 1, 62°).
3. Oftener than in cases like the above a nation may be denoted
by the singular, especially if it is a monarchy.
ὋὉ Πέρσης, the Persians (Hdt. 8, 108°). ‘O Μῆδος, the Medes (Thue. 1,
69°). Ὁ λΛακών (Hat. 8, 2°). Τὸν Ἕλληνα (Hat. 1, 69). The monarch may
thus represent the people; as ὁ ’Appévios (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3"), ἡ Κῶισσα (Xen.
Anab. 1, 2). The representative of a state may use ἐγώ for ἡμεῖς (Thue. 1,
137°).
4. The singular is sometimes used in a distributive way, referring
to several persons or things individually, in cases where the plural
would be expected.
Διάφοροι τὸν τρόπον, different in their characters (Thue. 8, 96°). Τὸν
1229 PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBERS 7
πηλὸν.....ἐπὶ τοῦ νώτου ἔφερον, they carried the clay on their backs (Thuc.
4, 42). Mer’ ἀσπίδος καὶ δόρατος εἰώθεσαν τὰς πομπὰς ποιεῖν, they were in
the habit of celebrating the procession with spears and shields (Thue. 6, 683).
5. The neuter singular of adjectives (especially of those in -ικος)
with the article is often used collectively ; occasionally the neuter
singular of participles is so used (compare 1301).
Τὸ πολῖτικόν = οἱ πολῖται, the citizens (Hdt. 7, 103°). Td “Ἑλληνικόν = οἱ
Ἕλληνες, the Greeks (Thue. 1, 1"). So τὸ ὁπλιτικόν, τὸ ἱππικόν, τὸ συμμαχικόν,
ete. Td ἐναντίον = οἱ ἐναντίοι, the enemy (Thuc. 7, 445). Ei τούτους τε καὶ τὸ
ὑπομένον (= τοὺς ὑπομένοντας; ἐν Σπάρτῃ καταστρέφεαι, if you subdue these,
and those remaining behind in Sparta (Hdt. 7, 209°). ‘Opév πολὺ τὸ ξυνε-
στηκός (= τοὺς ξυνεστηκότας), seeing that those leagued together were many
(Thue. 8, 665). Τὸ κρατοῦν (= οἱ κρατοῦντες) τῆς πόλεως, the rulers of the city
(Xen. Mem. 1, 2*).
1225. Norr.—A dramatic chorus is generally treated
as one individual, the coryphaeus speaking and acting
as its representative. It is therefore commonly denoted
by the singular, sometimes by the plural.
Ὦ ξεῖνοι, μὴ δῆτ᾽ ἀδικηθῶ vol πιστεύσᾶς, O friends, let
me not suffer wrong, having placed my faith in you (Soph.
Oed. Col. 174). ‘Hyiv μὲν ἤδη wav τετόξευται βέλος, μένω δέ,
every shaft has now been shot by us, and I wait (Aesch.
Eum. 676). So the dual may be used of two semichoruses,
as λεύσσετον πάντα, do you both look everywhere (Aesch.
Eum., 255).
1226. Nore.—These singulars also denote plurals occasionally.
Tis, any one (Thue. 2, 37). Tis; who? (Thue. 3, 39°). Οὐδεὶς, no one
(Xen. Anab. 3, 1). ‘O with a participle (Thue. 5, 38°).
PLURAL
1227. The Greek frequently uses the plural (or dual) of abstract
nouns, nouns of material, and proper names,
1228, Proper names are used in the plural to designate several
persons of the same, as δύ» Κρατύλοι, two Cratyluses (Plat. Cratyl.
439"); or to denote men like , a8 of Ἡρακλέες καὶ Θησέες, men like
Heracles and Theseus (Plat. Theaet. 169°).
1229. The plural of names of material is used to denote the
separate parts of which the substance is composed, its various kinds,
its accumulation or mass, or various quantities of the substance.
8 PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBERS 1230
Ἐπὶ ψαμάθοις, on the sands (beach) (Il. 1, 486). Ἐν κονίῃσι, in the dust (1.
12, 23).—Oivous πολυτελεῖς, expensive wines (Xen. Mem. 2, 1%). Τῶν λαμπρῶν
καὶ ψυχρῶν ὑδάτων (Xen. Hell. 5, 3”).—IIvpoi καὶ xpiOai καὶ ὄσπρια, wheat,
barley, and vegetables (Xen. Anab. 4, 5%). οἴνους παλαιούς, old wines (Xen.
Anab. 4, 4°). Ἔν γάλαξι τρεφόμενοι, brought up on milk (Plat. Leg. 8874).
1230. Norzr.—Some concrete nouns occasionally have different
significations in the singular and plural.
Ξύλον, one piece of wood or wood, but ξύλα, pieces or a mass of wood (Xen.
Hell. 3, 3’). So also κρέας and xpéa, meat, κρέας, piece of meat (Thue. 4, 16").
For ds, salt in the lump or a grain of salt, the plural ἅλες is generally used
in prose. Ἥλιοι may mean suns (Eur. Bacch. 918), but also rays of the sun,
heat of the sun (Thue. 7, 871), and days (Eur. El. 654, Hel. 652).
1231. The plural (and dual) of abstract nouns is used to denote
various kinds, instances, or manifestations of the abstract idea; also
to denote that the abstract noun refers to several persons or things
(1.6., is distributive).
‘H γεωργίᾳ Wiyn τε χειμῶνος καὶ θάλπη θέρους ἐθίζει καρτερεῖν, agriculture
accustoms us to endure the colds of winter and the heats of swmmer (Xen.
Oec. 5,4). Καὶ χάλαζαι καὶ πάχν αι, hails and frosts (Xen. Oec. 5, 18). Av’
ἐστόν τινε Biw, there are two lives (Plat. Leg. 662"). Ταῖς ἡλικίαις καὶ ταῖς
ἐμπειρίαις προέχοντες, those having advantage in age and experience (Isoc. 15,
200). Εἰδότες τὰς μὲν ἀπορίᾶς διὰ τὰς Apyias γιγνομένᾶς, ras dé kak ovp-
yids διὰ τὰς ἀπορίας, knowing that want of means arises from idleness, and
vicious habits from want of means (Isoc. 7, 44). Ἔν πότοις καὶ ἀκολασίαις
καὶ ῥᾳθυμίαις καὶ παιδιαῖς τὴν ἡκιλίᾶν διάγουσιν, they spend their time m
drinking, in licentiousness, in amusements and in pastimes (Isoc. 15, 286). Ἰδοῦσα
νέους θανάτου ς, having seen (these) recent deaths (Soph. Trach. 1276). Gay a-
των πολλῶν... τυγχάνειν, to suffer many deaths (Plat. Leg. 869°). Ai
σαὶ μεγάλαι εὐτυχίαι, thy (frequent instances of) great fortune (Hdt. 3, 40°).
Ai μάχαι κρίνονται μᾶλλον ταῖς Wiyats ἢ ταῖς τῶν σωμάτων ῥώμαις, battles are
decided rather by the mind than by strength of body (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3"). Στάσεις
ἡ ἀδικίᾳ καὶ pion παρέχει, injustice breeds divisions and animosities (Plat. Rep.
351"). Παυσανίας ib ro Wias πολλὰς παρεῖχεν, Pausanias gave room for many
suspicions (Thue. 1, 1327). Οἱ ἀνδρεῖοι οὐκ αἰσχροὺς φόβους φοβοῦνται οὐδ᾽
αἰσχρὰ θ ἀρ ρη θαρροῦσιν, courageous men have no base fear or base confidence
(Plat. Prot. 360°). Nixav ἐν τε παιδιαῖς καὶ ἐν σπουδαῖς, to conquer in
playing and in earnestness (Plat. Leg. 6474). Siyads re τῶν νεωτέρων mapa
πρεσβυτέροις καὶ ὑπαναστάσεις καὶ γονέων Oepameias, silence of the young
before their elders, rising up (at their entrance), and attention to parents (Plat.
Rep. 425* pis Tovs κρατίστους τὰ εἴδη, the best in appearance (Xen. Hell. 3, 2").
Νεᾶνίαι τὰς ὄψεις, young in appearance (Lys. 10, sin ᾿Ορθοὶ ras ψῦχᾶς,
righteous in their souls (Plat. Theaet. 173*).
1238 PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBERS 9
1232. Nore.—Some abstract nouns have particular meanings in
the plural.
Νύκτες, the howrs of night, so μέσαι νύκτες, midnight. Avopai, setting,
sinking, so ἡλίου δυσμαί ; δυσμαὶ τοῦ βίου, decline of life (Plat. Leg. 770*).
1233. The neuter plural is regarded as one mass, and is therefore
regularly construed with a singular verb (1255).
1234. Norz.—Hence also the frequent (predicate) use of the
plural of verbals in -réos and other adjectives (2316, 1310).
1235. Norz.—Some neuter plurals of pronouns are used as singu-
lars; especially ταῦτα, τάδε, this; ἐκεῖνα, that; τὰ ἕτερα, θάτερα, the
other, one of two; ἀμφότερα, each, both ; οὐδέτερα (μηδέτερα), neither ;
a, which. |
Ταῦτα ἔμοιγε μᾶλλον δοκεῖ ἀγαστὰ εἶναι, this seems to me to be more ad-
mirable (Xen. Anab. 1, 9"). Ap’ ody ὕβρις rade; is not this insult? (Soph.
Oed. Col. 883). ᾿Ἐφτέντων ἡμῶν δυοῖν θάτερα, i} πείθειν ἡμᾶς ἢ ποιεῖν, τούτων
οὐδέτερα ποιεῖ, we offering the alternative of two things, either to convince us
or to obey, he does neither (Plat. Crito, 52"). To μηδέτερα τοῦτων ἔσθ᾽ ἡμῖν
ὅπως θάτε ρ a γένοιτ᾽ dv; that which is neither of these, can it be either ? (Plat.
Phil. 43°). Example of ἅ (Thue. 4, 13°).
1236. 1. The speaker occasionally uses the plural for the singular
(we for I) as a more polite form. This is uncommon in prose, more
frequent in poetry.
CR bigets πειρᾷσόμεθα διηγήσασθαι, these things we \Se DT) will endeavour to
relate (Xen. Cyr. 1, 1°). Ἡμεῖς δεινοὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἦμεν, we were (= I was)
skilled in such things (Xen. Mem. 1, 2"). So often the phrase poi δακοῦμεν
(Dem. 1, 2).
2. A woman speaking of herself thus in the plural always
uses adjective words in the masculine. πΠεσούμεθ᾽ εἰ χρή,
πατρὶ ripwpovpevor, I (Electra) will fall, if need be,
avenging my father (Soph. El. 399); so also οἴπερ in Eur.
Med. 1241.
1237. Nore.—The singular imperatives, εἰπέ, say, dye, φέρε, come
now, ἰδέ, see, are sometimes addressed to several persons ; see 1254.
1238. Norz.—Occasionally in prose, often in poetry, a singular
vocative is addressed to several persons, the singular thus denoting
the chief person addressed.
᾿Αλλ᾽ ὦ ᾽γαθέ, τοῦτο μὲν καὶ λαθεῖν φήσαιτ᾽ dv ὑμᾶς, but, good friends, some
one might say that this escaped you (Isae. 3, 70). ὮὮ τέκνον, ἦ πάρεστον ;
10 PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF GENDERS 1239
ΝΣ προσέλθετ᾽, ὦ παῖ, πατρί, my child, are you both here?......Come to a
father’s arms (Soph. Oed. Col. 1102).
DUAL
1239. In speaking of two, the dual as well as the plural may
be used. Moreover, in matters of agreement, the dual and plural
are freely interchanged or joined. See 1252, 1260.
Ἐς τὼ κοθόρνω τὼ π ὀόδ᾽ ἐνθείς, having put my feet into the buskins (Ar.
Eccl. 346). Παῖδες δύο, two children; τὼ παῖδε, the two children (Xen. Anab.
1, 1). Ado ἔχω ψῦχαάς, I have two souls (Xen. Cyr. 6,1"). Δύο ἐστὸν
Wixad, there are two souls (ibid.). Προσέτρεχον δύο νεᾶνίσκω, two
young men came running wp (Xen. Anab. 4, 3"). Ἐγελασάτην οὖν ἄμφω
βλέψαντες eis ἀλλήλους, they both burst out laughing on looking at each
other (Plat. Euthyd. 273°).
1240. Norz.—The supposition that the dual is used in speaking
of things in pairs does not appear tenable. In fact, in most cases it
is used where each of two subjects is considered by itself.
Several passages occur in the older poetry in which
the dual is applied to more than two; as dzoriverov
(Hom. J/. 8, 186).
1241. Norr.—In adjective words of the first and second declension
the masculine dual is usually used for the feminine, especially in the
nominative and accusative.
Τὼ yuvaixe, the two women (Xen. Cyr. 5, 5’). Τούτω τὼ ἡμέρᾶ, these
two days (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2"). Παῖδ᾽ ἐμώ, my two daughters (Kur, Suppl.
140). Ἤδεσθε τώδε τὼ κασιγνήτω, φίλοι, ὦ τὸν πατρῷον οἶκον ἐξεσωσάτην,
behold these two sisters, who saved their father’s house (Soph. El. 978). The
duals rd, ταῖν, τάδε, raivde, ravra, ravray, and the like are very rare.
The dual of a masculine participle of the third declen-
sion is occasionally found in poetry ; as πληγέντε in II. 8,
455 ; προλιπόντε in Hes. Op. 199; ἔχοντε in Eur. Hipp.
387 ; ἕλκοντε in Ar. Eccl. 1087. Soin Plat. Phaedr. 287",
GENDERS
1242. The masculine is used in speaking of persons in general
and may mean females as well as males.
(ΟἹ ἄνθρωπος, any person male or female (but ἡ ἄνθρωπος, the female
o_o
1245 PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF PERSONS 11
_ person); οἱ γονεῖς, the parents; ἀδελφοί, brothers or brother and sister.
ὋὉ πότερος ἂν ἦ βελτίων, εἴθ᾽ ὁ ἀνὴρ εἴθ᾽ ἡ γυνή, od ros Kai πλεῖον φέρεται τοῦ
ἀγαθοῦ, whichever is the better, whether the man or the woman, he receives also
more of good (Xen. Oec. 7, 27). Τῶν εὐτυχούντων πάντες εἰσὶ συγγενεῖς,
of the prosperous all are relations (Men. Mon. 510). Τῶν δυστυχούντων
εὐτυχὴς οὐδεὶς φίλος, of the unfortunate, no one who is prosperous is a
friend (Men. Mon. 502).
1243. Norr.— When a word is considered as a part of speech, the
Grammarians often prefix to it the article ὁ, ἡ, τό, the name of the
part of speech being omitted.
Ἡ (se. ἀντωνυμία) éxeivos καὶ ἡ (Sc? ἀντωνυμία) ob ros, the pronoun ἐκεῖνος
and the pronoun οὗτος. Τὸ (sc. ῥῆμα) γράφω, the verb γράφω. Ἔστιν ὁ
(se. σύνδεσμος) ἀλλὰ a ἀντὶ τοῦ dé, the (conjunction) ἀλλά is instead of δέ (Soph.
Oed. Col. 237, schol.). λείπει ἡ (sc. πρόθεσις) Sid, the preposition διά is
wanting (Soph. Oed. Col. 1291, schol.).
1244, Norr.—For the infinitive as a neuter noun, see 2230. For
clauses used as neuter substantives, see 1520. For any word or
phrase considered merely as such and then taking the neuter article,
see 1394, 8. For the neuter relative used in reference to a whole
clause or phrase, or word, see 1520.
PERSONS
1245. A change of person sometimes occurs.
(a) A person speaking of himself in the third person, may in the
course of the speech return to the first.
Ἐνταῦθ᾽ οὐδαμοῦ Δημοσθένην γέγραφεν οὐδ᾽ αἰτίᾶν οὐδεμίαν κατ᾽ ἐμοῦ,
here he nowhere mentions (me) Demosthenes nor does he mention any charge
against me (Dem. 18, 79). Τοῦθ᾽ ὑμῖν Alas τοὖπος ὕστατον θροεῖ" ra δ᾽ ἄλλ᾽ ἐν
Ἅιδου τοῖς κάτω pt θήσομαι, this last word does Ajax speak to you, all else
I shall speak in Hades to the dead (Soph. Aj. 864). So ὅδε ὁ ἀνὴρ is often
used for ἐγώ in the Tragedians.
(b) In addressing a company (or a person), a speaker may change
from the second person to the first and thereby include himself among
them.
Μάλιστα δ᾽ ἂν παροξυν θείη ς ὀρέγεσθαι τῶν καλῶν ἔργων, εἰ καταμάθοις,
ὅτι καὶ τὰς ἡδονὰς ἐκ τούτων μάλιστα γνησίως ἔχο μ εν, you would be best spurred
on to strive after noble deeds, if you understood that pleasures too, in the truest
sense, we get from them (Isoc. 1, 46). So also Isoc. 7, 9.
12 AGREEMENT 1246
AGREEMENT
1246. 1. The verb agrees with its subject in person and
number (1249).
2. An adjective agrees with its substantive in gender, number,
and case (1333).
3. A predicate or an appositive noun agrees with the sub-
stantive to which it refers in case; and if the sense permits, also
in number and gender (1302, 1322).
4. A. pronoun agrees with the noun to which it refers in
number and gender (1511—1520).
1247, Norr.—To the above general rules there are a number of
exceptions, some of which are quite regular. All these rules and
their exceptions are given below in their proper places. See Subject-
Nominative and Verb, Predicate-Noun and Adjective, Apposition,
Adjectives, Agreement of Relative.
1248. Construction according to the Sense-—A word often con-
forms to the real rather than to the grammatical number or
gender of the word to which it refers. This is termed construction
according to the sense (constructio ad sensum, κατὰ σύνεσιν).
(a) Thus a collective singular noun may take a plural verb (1257,
1258), or a plural predicate participle (1307); a noun denoting place
may take an appositive denoting the inhabitants (1325); a neuter or
feminine noun denoting a male person sometimes has its predicate
participle in the masculine (1307) ; in poetry an attributive adjective or
participle may conform to the real rather than to the grammatical
gender of the noun to which it refers (1336); a relative pronoun with .
a singular collective antecedent may be in the plural (1513); a relative
pronoun may conform to the real rather than to the grammatical
gender of its antecedent (1518), it may also at the same time be in
the plural if its antecedent is collective in meaning (1513, 1518).
(ὁ) Construction according to the sense is particularly frequent
with pronouns, especially after τὶς, τὶ.
Ὑπῆγον ἐπὶ Nevpida, ταρασσομένων δὲ καὶ τούτων, they proceeded to
Neuris, and these too (i.e., the inhabitants) being disturbed (Hdt. 4, 125).
Θεμιστοκλῆς φεύγει ἐς Κέρκῦραν, dv αὐτῶν εὐεργέτης, Themistocles flees to
Corcyra, being a benefactor of them, i.e., of the Corcyreans (Thue. 1, 156}).
1958 AGREEMENT 13
Ἔς δὲ τὴν Σπάρτην ὡς ἠγγέλθη τὰ γεγενημένα περὶ Πύλον, ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς, when
the occurrences αὐ Pylus were reported at Sparta, it was determined by them, i.e.,
by the Spartans (Thuc. 4, 15"). “Edy ris φανερὸς γένηται κλέπτων....... ‘
τούτοις θάνατός ἐστιν ἡ ζημία, if any one is found stealing, death is the punish-
ment for them (Xen. Mem. 1, 2); so also Xen. Cyr. 1, 2° and 7, 4°, and Anab.
i, 45.
SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE AND VERB
1249. A finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative in
number and person.
(Ἐγὼ) γράφω, I write. Οὗτος γελᾷ, this man laughs. Ἡμεῖς χαίρομεν, we
rejoice. Oi ἄνδρες λέγουσιν, the men say. Ἐγώ, ὃς ἔλεξα, I who said.
1259. Norr.—1. Sometimes the verb agrees with the predicate
nominative, or with the appositive.
Ai δὲ εἰσφοραὶ καὶ xopnyia εὐδαιμονίας ἱκανὸν σημεῖόν ἐστιν, his taxes
and payments for choruses are a sufficient sign of prosperity (Antiphon 2, γ. 8).
Θῆβαι, πόλις ἀστυγείτων, μεθ᾽ ἡμέραν μίαν ἐκ μέσης τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἀ ν ἡ p-
πασται, Thebes, a neighbouring city, has been blotted out from the midst of
Greece within a day (Aeschin. 3, 133).
2. When the subject has in agreement a_predicate-adjective
in the neuter plural, the verb is regularly in the singular.
Οὔτε σώματος κάλλος καὶ ἰσχὺς δειλῷ ξυνοικοῦντα πρέποντα φαίνεται,
nor do beauty and strength of body residing in a coward appear becoming (Plat.
Menex. 246°). ᾿
1251. Norz.—A preposition and a numeral may take the place of
the subject of the verb.
᾿Απέθανον αὐτῶν περὶ τριᾶκοσίους, about three hundred of them died (Xen.
Hell. 4, 6”).
1252. Norz.—A plural subject denoting two persons or things
may have its verb in the dual, and a dual subject may have its verb
in the plural.
AW ἀποχρήσουσιν μόνω, two alone will suffice (Ar. Plut. 484). Προσέτρεχον
δύο νεᾶνίσκω, two young men came running up (Xen. Anab. 4, 3").
1253. Norz.—Very seldom, a masculine or feminine plural subject
has its verb in the singular. This occurs especially after ἔστιν and
γίγνεται, there is or there exists.
Ἔστι μέν που καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἄλλαις πόλεσιν ἄρχοντές τε καὶ δῆμος, there
are surely in other states also, both governors and people (Plat. Rep. 463").
Δοκοῦντι δικαίῳ εἶναι γίγνεται ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης ἀρχαί re καὶ γάμοι, toa man
14 AGREEMENT 1254
reputed to be just, there come, in consequence of his reputation, both offices and
nuptials (Plat. Rep. 363°). See the expressions ἔστιν οἵ, ete.
1254. Norze.—The singular imperative forms dye and φέρε, come
now ! εἰπέ, say! ἰδέ, see! are occasionally addressed to several persons,
Εἰπέ μοι ὦ Σώκρατες τε καὶ Ἱππόκρατες, Ti ἐν νῷ ἔχετε ; tell me, O Socrates
and Hippocrates, what have you in mind? (Plat. Prot. 5114); so also Od.
3, 332, and Soph. Trach. 821 (ἰδέ).
1255. A neuter plural subject regularly has its verb in the singular.
Ta ζῶα τρέχει, the animals run. Ταῦτα ἐγένετο, these things happened.
Ta ἐπιτήδεια ἐπέλιπε, the provisions failed (Xen. Anab. 4, 7'). Πλοῖα δ᾽ ὑμῖν
πάρεστιν, vessels wre here for you (Xen. Anab. 5, 6”).
1256. Norz.—But when a neuter plural subject denotes per-
sons, the verb may be in the plural; as, τοσάδε μετὰ ᾿Αθηναίων ἔθνη
ἐστράτευον, so many nations were warring on the side of the
Athenians (Thue. 7, 574). Also when the different parts of the noun
are considered as separate parts of the mass; as φανερὰ ἧσαν καὶ
ἵππων καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἴχνη πολλά, there were many traces of horses and
men (Xen. Anab. 1, 7"). Other exceptions are rare in Attic (as
Xen, Anab, 1, 28, Thuc. 6, 624), frequent in poetry and in the
dialects (as Hom. J/. 2,135).
1257. A singular collective subject denoting persons may have its
verb in the plural.
‘O ἄλλος στρατὸς ἀπέβαινον, the rest of the army marched away (Thuc. 4,
32°). Td πλῆθος ἐψηφίσαντο πολεμεῖν, the majority voted for war (Thue.
1, 125). ‘H πόλις ᾿Αγησίλᾶον εἵλοντο βασιλέᾷ, the state chose Agesilaus king
(Xen. Hell. 3, 3*).
1258. Norr.—Occasionally ἕκαστος, each, has a plural verb.
Τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ἕκαστος καὶ παίδων καὶ χρημάτων ἄρχουσιν, each man rules his
own, both children and property (Xen. Rep. Lac. 6, 1).
1259. When two or more subjects are connected by and, the
verb is regularly in the plural. If the subjects are of different
persons, the verb is regularly in the first person in preference to
the second, and in the second in preference to the third.
Δεινοὶ καὶ σοφοὶ ἐγώ τε καὶ od ἦμεν, both I and thou were both skillful and
wise (Plat. Theaet. 1544). Οὐ σὺ μόνος οὐδὲ of σοὶ φίλοι πρῶτον ταύτην δόξαν
ἔσχετε, it was not you alone, nor your friends, who first conceived this notion
(Plat. Leg. 888°). δΔέονται καὶ ἡ γυνὴ καὶ ὁ ἀνήρ, the woman and the man |
require (Plat. Meno, 73°). |
1265 ATTRIBUTE 15
1260. Notze.—Two singular subjects may have their verb in the
dual.
Mivas καὶ Λυκοῦργος νόμους ἐθέτην, Minos and Lycurgus gave laws (Plat.
Leg. 632").
1261. Norz.—Sometimes the verb agrees with one of the subjects
{the nearest, or the most important) and is understood with the rest.
"Ἔπεμψέ pe “Apiaios καὶ “Aprdofos, Ariaeus and Artaozus sent me (Xen.
Anab. 2, 4°). Ἐγὼ λέγω καὶ Σεύθης τὰ αὐτά, I and Seuthes say the same thing
(Xen. Anab. 7, 7°). Βασιλεὺς καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ ciorinre εἰς τὸ στρατόπεδον, the
king and his followers break into the camp (Xen. Anab.1, 10"). Σάρκες καὶ νεῦρα
ἐξ αἵματος γίγνεται, flesh and sinews are formed from blood (Plat. Tim. 82°).
Οἱ πένητες καὶ ὁ δῆμος πλέον ἔχει, the poor and the common people have more
power (Xen. Rep. Ath. 1°).
1262. Norr.—Rarely a papas subject followed by perd, with,
has a plural verb.
Δημοσθένης peta τῶν συστρατηγῶν σπένδονται Μαντινεῦσι,
Demosthenes with his fellow-generals makes a treaty with the Mantineans
(Thue. 3, 1095).
1263. When several subjects are connected by %, or, or ἤ...ἤ,
either...or, Or οὔτε... οὔτε, neither...nor, the verb agrees with the
nearest subject.
"Qu ἂν ἢ σὺ ἢ ἄλλος τις πράττῃ, if you or any one else do any of which
things (Plat. Euthyphr. 6°). Οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἐγώ, οὔτ᾽ ἂν σύ, οὔτ᾽ ἄλλος οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων
δέξαιτ᾽ ἂν μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖν ἢ ἀδικεῖσθαι, neither you nor_I nor any one else would
prefer to do wrong than to suffer wrong (Plat. Gorg. 475°).
1264. Nore.—When singular subjects are thus connected, the
verb is rarely in the plural.
Ei περὶ τούτου ἔμελλον ἀπολογήσασθαι Λεωχάρης ἣ Δικαιογένης, if Leochares
or Dicaeogenes were about to make a defence about this (Isae. 5°).
ATTRIBUTE
1265. Besides adjectives, participles, genitives of nouns (except
the partitive genitive), adverbs, and prepositional phrases, may
serve as attributes.
Ὁ παρὼν xivdivos, the present danger. Οἱ τῶν Θηβαίων στρατηγοί,
the generals of the Thebans. ‘H ἄνω πόλις, the upper city. Οἱ ἐν ἄστει
ἄνθρωποι, the men in the city.
16 ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 1266
1266. Norr.—Occasionally a dative serves as attribute.
Ἔν τῷ Ἐλευσῖνι ἱερῷ, in the temple at Eleusis (Lys. 6, 4). Τὸ τῷ ὄντι
ψεῦδος, the real falsehood (Plat. Rep. 382°,.
1267. Attributive nouns denoting station, occwpation, age, or
nationality, are often joined to the words ἀνήρ, man, γυνή, woman, —
(ὁ, ἡ) ἄνθρωπος, person (the last usually in a contemptuous sense).
᾿Ανὴρ ἰδιώτης, a private man, one in private station (Aeschin. 3, 233).
᾿Ανὴρ ῥήτωρ, an orator (Aeschin. 3, 253). ᾿Ανθρώπους πολίτας, citizens (Dem.
19, 172). Ανθρωπος γόης, a mountebank fellow (Aeschin. 2, 153). Tpais
γυνή, old woman (Ar. Thesm. 345). ἾὮΩ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, O Athenians. ἾὮΩ ἄνδρες
δικασταί (Dem. 20,1). In addresses, ἄνδρες has the force of our “ gentlemen ”’.
1268. Nore.—The names of nations often appear as adjectives.
Οἱ Ἕλληνες πελτασταί, the Greek targeteers (Xen. Anab.). Πέρσης ἀνήρ, a
Persian (Xen. Anab. 1, 6°).
1269. Norr.—Attributive nouns are seldom joined to other nouns
than those mentioned above (1267, 1268), but a few cases are found.
᾿Οπισθοφύλακες oxayoi, rear-guard captains (Xen. Anab. 4, 7°). Τυμνῆτες
ragtapxoi, light-infantry captains (Xen. Anab. 4, 1%). “Ομῖλος στρατιώτης, the
mass of the soldiery (Thuc. 6, 24°). Λόγος ἔπαινος (Plat. Phaedr. 260°). For
ὁ Εὐφράτης ποταμός and the like, see 1331.
ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY
1270. The noun to which an attribute belongs is often omitted.
Often it is expressed in the context.
I. MASCULINES AND FEMININES
1271. Thus a person may be denoted by a masculine or feminine
adjective, participle or pronoun, with or without the article ; or by 6 or
ἡ with an adverb, or a local dative, or a preposition and its case.
Ὃ σοφός, the wise man. Καλή, a handsome woman. Φίλος, a friend, Οἱ
πλούσιοι, the rich. Kadai, handsome women. ‘O λέγων, the speaker. Οἱ
παρόντες, those present. ᾿Ἐρωμένη, a beloved. Ὅστις γαμεῖ πονηρὰν μῶρός
ἐστιν, whoever marries a wicked woman is a fool (Eur. El. 1097). Odros, this
man. Ἐκείνη, that woman. Ὁ τοιοῦτος, such a person. Οἵ τ᾽ ἔνδον συνελαμ-
βάνοντο καὶ οἱ ἐκτὸς κατεκόπησαν, those within were seized and those without
were cut down (Xen. Anab. 2, 5"). Σωκράτης ἀνὴρ τῶν τότε hv ἄριστος,
Socrates was the best man of the men of that time Plat. Phaedo, 118). Οὐδενὸς
ὕστερος ὧν τῶν ἐκεῖ, not inferior to any of the people there (Plat. Tim. 20*).
4974 ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 17
Ἦσαν πολλὸὶ τῶν πρότερον σπουδαῖοι, many of the men of former times were
estimable (Dem. 20, 114). Οἱ Μαραθῶνι καὶ Σαλαμῖνι, those (who fought) at
Marathon and Salamis (Dem. 19,312). Οἱ ἐπὶ τῷ δεξιῷ κέραι, those on the
right wing (Thuc. 1, 50). Βασιλεὺς καὶ of σὺν αὐτῷ διώκει....... καὶ of
μετὰ ᾿Αριαίου οὐκέτι ἵστανται, the king and those with him pursued...and
those with Ariaeus no longer stood their grownd (Xen. Anab. 1, 10"). Oi ἐν τῇ
ἡλικίᾳ, those in the prime of life (Thuc. 6, 24°). Τοῖς rap ἑαυτᾧ παρήγγειλε
«+++.-Oeiv, he gave the order to his own men (= to those about himself) to run
(Xen. Anab. 4, 3”). Ἧκον οἱ παρὰ τοῦ Nixiov, those from Nicias arrived
(= the messengers) (Thuc. 7, 10). Οἱ περὶ ᾿Αριαῖον, Ariaeus and his friends
(Xen. Anab. 2, 45). Oi διὰ πλείστου, those most distant (Thue. 4, 115°).
1272. Norzr.—The expressions oi ἀμφί and οἱ περί followed by the
_ name of a person, mean the person with all his attendants, associates,
partisans, etc.; or they may simply mean the person himself, especi-
ally in later Greek.
Oi δὲ ἀμφὶ Τισσαφέρνην, Tissaphernes and those with him (Xen. Anab.
3, δ). Oi περὶ Ξενοφῶντα, Xenophon with his men (Xen. Anab. 7, 4.5). οἱ
περὶ Κέκροπα, simply Cecrops (Xen. Mem. 3, 5°).
1273. So also ὃ or ἡ with a genitive may denote the son, daughter,
or husband, or any person connected by relationship, or: service or
dependence with the person indicated by the genitive.
Θουκυδίδης ὁ ᾽᾿Ολόρου, Thucydides the son of Olorus (Thue. 4, 104°). Ἑλένη
Kar οἴκους ἐστὶ τούσδ᾽ ἡ τοῦ Διός, Helen the daughter of Jove is in this house
(Eur. Hel. 470). Τὸν τῆς στρατηγοῦ τοῦτον οὐ θαυμάζετε; do you not admire
this husband of our (female) general? (Ar. Eccl. 727). Μεγάλα ἂν ζημιοῖο, εἰ
τοὺς σεαυτοῦ κατακαίνοις, you would be severely punished if you put to death those
that belonged to you (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1"). Πορεύομαι πρὸς τοὺς ἐμαυτοῦ, I go
to mine own (Soph. Ant. 892). Εἶχε τὸ εὐώνυμον Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου,
Clearchus and his men held the left (Xen. Anab. 1, 2"). ΄᾿Ἤλαυνεν ἐπὶ τοὺς
Μένωνος, he advanced against Menon’s soldiers (Xen. Anab. 1, 5").
1274. The masculine article with the possessive pronoun also
denotes a person connected by relationship or service or dependence
with the person indicated by the possessive pronoun.
Εὔνοιαν δεῖ τὸν ἐπίτροπον ἔχειν σοὶ καὶ τοῖς σοῖς, it is necessary that the
steward have good will to you and yours = your family (Xen, Oec. 12, 5). Τὸ
εὐνοεῖν ἐμοὶ καὶ τοῖς ἐμοῖς ἐγὼ πρῶτον πειρῶμαι παιδεύειν, I try first to teach
good will toward me and mine = my family (ibid.). Τοὺς σφετέρους
αὐτῶν προπέμποντες, accompanying those who belonged to them (Thue. 6, 30°).
Συμπέμψαιτ᾽ ἄν μοι τῶν ὑμετέρων οἵτινες τὴν ὁδὸν ἡγοῖντο ; would you send
me some of your people who would ot (him) on the way? (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2”).
18 ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 1275
1275. Certain nouns denoting things, to which an attributive
adjective belongs, are often omitted.
1. Few masculine nouns are thus omitted :—_
[Κόλπος] τὸν Τόνιον, the Ionian Gulf (Thue. 6, 544). [Srarnp] ὁ Κυζικηνός,
the Cyzicene stater (Xen. Anab. 6, 2'). [Otvos] ὁ ἄκρᾶτος, unmixed wine (Men.
Mon. 420). [Rarely στρατός] 6 πεζός, the foot-soldiery (Thuc. 1, 47%).
2. The principal feminines thus onaitted are :-—
[Ἡμέρα] τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, τῇ τρίτῃ, on the following, on the third day (Ken:
Anab. 3, 451). [Τῇ or χώρα] διὰ πολεμίας, through hostile country (Xen. Hier.
2,8). “Hrpdayxeia, ἡ ὁμαλή, the rugged, the level land (Xen. Anab. 4,6"). [‘O8ds]
βάδιζε τὴν εὐθεῖαν, walk the straight way (Men. Mon. 62). [Mepis] εἰκοστὴν
ἐπράσσοντο, they exacted the twentieth part (Thue. 6, 54°). [Μοῖρα] ἡ πεπρω-
μένη, the allotted portion, destiny (Isoc. 1, 43). [Xeip] ἡ δεξιά, ἡ ἀριστερά, the
right, the left hand. Tumropevos ταῖς πλατείαις ἔφυγεν, being beaten with the
flat of the hands (Ar. Ran. 1096). [Πληγή] τοῦτον ὀλίγας ἔπαισεν, he struck
this man a few blows (Xen, Anab. 5, 8"). [Τέχνη] μουσική, music, musical
art. ‘Pyropixn, rhetoric, art of speaking. [Δίκη] ἐρημὴν κατηγοροῦσι, they bring
as plaintiffs an abandoned suit, i.e., the defendant not appearing (Plat. Apol.
18°). [Ψῆφος] τὴν ἐναντίᾶν Λάχης Νικίᾳ ἔθετο, Laches put in a vote opposite to
that of Nicias (Plat. Lach. 1844). [Tvapn] ἐκ τῆς νϊκώσης, according to the
prevailing opinion, according to the vote of the majority (Xen. Anab. 6, 1%).
[Δραχμή] τρία τάλαντα καὶ τρισχιλίᾶς εἴληφε, 4 talents and 3000 drachmae
(Dem. 29, 44). [Θρίξ] πολιά, grey hairs (Men. Mon. 700). [ὝὍὝπνος] ὡς βαθὺν
ἐκοιμήθης, how deep a sleep you slept (Lucian, Dialogi Marini, 293). [Χορδή]
ἡ ὑπάτη, the highest chord. ["Αγκῦρα] οὐκ ἐπὶ τῆς αὐτῆς ὁρμεῖ τοῖς πολλοῖς, he
rides not on the same anchor with the people (Dem. 18, 281).
3. Few neuters are omitted.
Τὸ εὐώνυμον [κέρας], the left wing (of an army). Θερμῷ [ὕδατι] λοῦσθαι,
to bathe in warm water (Ar. Nub. 1044).—In most neuter adjectives used
substantively no particular noun is to be supplied (see 1281).
1276. Some of the above nouns may be omitted with a possessive
pronoun, with the article and an adverb, and with the article and a
preposition with its case, and with the article and a genitive.
1277. Norr.—1l. Τνώμη may be omitted after ἡ and a possessive
pronoun. Kara ye τὴν ἐμήν, according to my opinion (Plat. Phil. 41°). Ἢ
ἐμὴ νϊκᾷ, my opinion is right (Plat. Leg. 8625).
2. Ἡμέρα may be omitted after ἡ and an adverb. ‘H αὔριον, the
morrow. ἫἪ ἑξῆς, the next day.
3. Γῆ may be omitted after ἡ with a genitive. Ξυνέβη μοι φεύγεν
τὴν ἐμαυτοῦ ἔτη εἴκοσι, it was my lot to be banished from my country twenty
years (Thuc. 5, 26°).
1282 ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 19
4. “Odds may be omitted after ἡ and a preposition. "Hye τὴν ἐπὶ
Μέγαρα, he advanced on the road to Megara (Xen. Hell. 4, 4").
1278. Nore. Locality may be denoted in a very general and
indefinite way by τό and τά with the genitive.
Ἐβάδιζεν εἰς τὰ rod ἀδελφοῦ rod ἐμοῦ. he was going to my brother's place
(Lys. 12, 12).
1279. 1. If the word house is understood after the prepositions
εἰς or ἐν, a genitive attribute omits the article.
Eis “Acdov, to (the home of) Hades. Ἔν “Aidov, in Hades, Ἐἶμι eis ᾿Αγά-
θωνος, I am going to Agathon’s (Plat. Symp. 174*). Ἴτω eis ἐμοῦ, let him come
to my house (Ar. Lysistr. 1211).
2. In the expression ἐν ἡμετέρου [sc. οἴκου δώμασιν), in owr palace,
in our court (Hdt. 1, 35°; 7, 814), there seems to be a double ellipsis.
1280. Many feminine adjectives are used to express direction,
extent, condition, manner ; some. of these are adverbial accusatives
(1597), some are datives of manner (1810), and some are governed by
prepositions.
“O8 οὐ μακρὰν ἄπεστιν, he is not far away (Eur. Phoen. 906). “Hew τὴν
ταχίστην, to come as quickly as possible (Xen. Hell. 4, 58). So also τὴν ἄλλως,
in vain, as τὴν ἄλλως ἀδολεσχῶ, I am prating in vain (Dem. 6, 32). For more
examples of these adverbial accusatives, see 1597. --- Ἰδίᾳ, privately, δημοσίᾳ,
publicly, and many others, see 1810. Ἐξ évavrias, from an opposite direction,
in front (Xen. Hier. 6, 8).— Es μακράν, at a long extent (of time) off (Dem.
18, 36). ᾿Απὸ πρώτης (Thue. 1, 77%).
II. Nrurers
1281. Neuter substantives are often formed by attributes used
alone or with the article. Thus adjectives, participles, and pronouns,
with or without the article; and the neuter article (τό, τά) with an
adverb, with a preposition and its case, or with a dependent genitive,
often forms substantive ideas. In these cases, however, no definite
noun, to which the attribute is considered to belong, is understood.
Such neuter substantives are used to express a great variety of ideas,
often being in effect adverbial phrases.
1282. The neuter adjective, participle, or pronoun, may express a
general idea of space, locality, distance, direction, or measure.
20 ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 1988
Ἔν μέσῳ τῆς Ἑλλάδος, in the middle of Greece (Isoc. 4, 42). Πόσον
ἄπεστιν ἐνθένδε τὸ στράτευμα; how far off from here is the army ? (Xen. Cyr. 6, 3”).
Σικελοὶ τὰ μέσα καὶτὰ πρὸς Boppay τῆς νήσου ἔχουσιν, the Silicians hold
the central and northern parts of the island (Thuc. 6, 2). Σωκράτης ἀεὶ ἦν ἐν
τῷ φανερῷ, Socrates was always in public (Xen. Mem. 1, 1"). Ἐπὶ πλέον
οὗτοι καθεώρων ἢ οἱ ἐκ τοῦ ὁμαλοῦ ἀφ᾽ ὑψηλοτέρου καθορῶντες, these looked
out on a wider prospect from their higher perches than those others from the-level
ground (Xen. Hell. 6, 2”). ᾿Ἐπεδίωκον μέχριτοῦ ἱππασίμου, they pursued as
far as was practicable for cavalry (Xen. Hell. 7, 2"). Φρούρια ἐπὶ τῶν
καρτερῶν ἐγκοτοικοδομεῖται, forts were built on the strongest points (Thue. 3,
185). Ξυμφερομένους adrovs ἐς ὀλίγον καὶ πάντας ἐς τὸ αὐτό, being crowded.
together into a small space, and all at the same point (Thue. 7, 965).
1283. The neuter article with an adverb of place or with a prepo-
sition and its case is sometimes used in the same way.
Eis τὸ ἄνω ὁρᾶν, into looking upwards (Plat. Rep. 529"). Διέβη εἰς τὸ πέρᾶν,
he crossed over to the opposite coast (Xen. Hell. 1, 3"). Μουσικὴ καταδύεται εἰς
τὸ ἐντὸς τῆς Wixns, music sinks into the depths of the soul (Plat. Rep. 4014).
Ta μὲν κάτω τῆς ‘Agins...... , τὰ δὲ ἄνω αὐτῆς, the lower (= coast) regions of
ASV0...0 , the upper parts of Asia (Hdt. 1, 177). Ἔν τούτῳ τῷ μεταξύ, in
this strait (= place between) (Thuc. 4, 25'). Τὸ πέρᾶν rod ποταμοῦ, the
opposite side of the river (Xen. Anab, 3, 5"). Td πρὸς ἑσπέρᾶν, to the west (Xen.
Anab. 6, 4*). Ta περὶ τὴν χώρᾶν, the affairs of the country (Isoc. 7, 1). ᾿Αφεὶς
τὸ ἐς τὴν Χίον ἔπλει ἐς τὴν Καῦνον, giving up going to Chios, he sailed to
Caunus (Thue. 8, 41°).
1284. Norr.—Here belong also expressions like ἐπὶ πολύ, τὸ (or τὰ)
ἐπὶ θάτερα, ἐν ὑπηκόῳ, and the like.
Ἢ Ἑλλὰς ἐπὶ πολὺ ἐτυραννεύθη, Greece was for a long time ruled by
tyrants (Thuc. 1,18"). Εἰσβάλλειν ἐκ τοῦ ἐπὶ θάτερα, to make an incursion
from the opposite side (Xen. Anab. 5, 4"). "Es ra ἐπὶ θάτερα τοῦ ποταμοῦ:
παραστάντες, standing on the other side (bank) of the river (Thue. 7, 844). Eis ro
ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖν α τῆς γῆς ὁρμᾷ καὶ és τὸ ἐπὶ rade, it rushes that way over the earth,
and this way (Plat. Phaedo, 112°). Ἔν ἐπηκόῳ καθειστήκει, he stood within.
hearing (Xen. Anab. 7, 6°).
1285. Norr.—Figuratively such a neuter denotes standpoint, con-
dition, degree, and the like.
Ἔν τῷδε ἀεὶ peveir ἐν ᾧ καθέστατε, you will always remain in the same
condition in which you are (Eur. Bacch. 1261). Νῦν ὁρᾶτε δὴ ἐν οἵῳ ἐστέ,
now you see in what condition you are placed (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2”). δίδασκε
μέχρι ὅτου δέοι ἔμπειρον εἶναι ἑκάστου πράγματος τὸν ὀρθῶς πεπαιδευμένον, he
taught to what degree a well educated man ought to be versed in everything
(Xen. Mem. 4, 73).
1289 ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 91
1286. Norre.—Prepositions and such neuters are often to be
translated quite freely.
Eis μέσον φέρετε 6 τι ἕκαστος ἐπίστασθε ἀγαθόν, you contrizute to the
common fund whatever valuable each one knows (Xen. Symp. 3,3). Ἐν μέσῳ
κεῖται ταῦτα τὰ ἀγαθά, these advantages lie exposed as prizes (Xen. Anab. 3, 1").
Ei twa ἔχετε βελτίω, θέντες εἰς κοινὸν λέγετε, if you have anything better,
communicate it for owr common benefit (Plat. Leg. 796°). Τὸ τοῖς ἄρχουσι
πείθεσθαι πᾶσιν ἐν κοιν ᾧ κεῖται, obedience to our rulers is enjoined to all in
common (Xen. Cyr. 2, 3°). “Ev (τῷ) κοιν ᾧ ἔχομεν (se. χρήματα), we have
money in the public treasury (Thue. 1, 80°). Eis καλὸν ἥκεις, you have come in
the nick of time (Xen. Anab. 4, 7°). Νῦν ἐν καλῷ φρονεῖν, to be wise in good
time (Soph. El. 384). Ἕκαστον ἐν τῷ δέοντι πράττουσιν, they do everything
at the necessary moment (Isoc. 3, 19). Τὰς εὐπορίας...εἰς δέον ὑμῖν γιγ-
vopévas} δείξω, I will show that the affluence...is to your advantage (Dem.
20, 26). Ἔξ or ἀπὸ (τοῦ) ἴσου, on a level, in the same circumstances, equally
(Xen. Hier. 8, 5; Thuc. 4, 63'). "Ev τῷ ἐμφανεῖ (Xen. Anab. 2, 5); ἐκ
τοῦ ἐμφανοῦς (Xen. Hell. 2, 15); ἀπὸ or ἐκ τοῦ προφανοῦς (Thue. 1, 66'; 6, 73),
all meaning openly. Ἔν τῷ φανερῷ (Xen. Cyr. 8, 1°; Anab. 1, 3%); ἐκ τοῦ
φανεροῦ (Thuc. 4, 79°), openly. Ἔν τῷ ἀφανεῖ, in secret (Xen. Cyr. 8, 151).
"EE ἑτοίμου, at once (Xen. Mem. 2, 6"). ᾿Απὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου, spontaneously (Plat.
Euthyd. 282°).
1287. The neuter adjective or participle may express general ideas
of time.
Πολὺ πρὸ τῶν Τρωικῶν ἦλθον οἱ “Hpaxdéous παῖδες καὶ pix pdyv mpd τούτων
Αδραστος, a long time before the Trojan war, the children of Heracles came, and
a short time before, Adrastus (Isoc. 4, 54). Ἢ Λακεδαίμων ἐκ παλαιοτάτου
εὐνομήθη, Lacedaemon was well governed from the most ancient times (Thuc.
1, 18°). Διέτρῖβε τρεῖς μῆνας καὶ πλείω, he remained three months and more
(Xen. Hell. 2, 2"). Zavres μέχρι τῶν ἐσχάτων τοῦ βίου, living to the
utmost limits of life (Plat. Leg. 931°). Ἔν τῷ παρόντι, for the present time
Thue. 2, 64). Τὸ μέλλον, in the future (Thuc. 6, 69°). Τὸ ἀρχαῖον, anciently
(Thue. 2, 99). Ta πρῶτα, at first, ra λοιπά, for the rest (Dem. 2, 8).
1288, The neuter article with an adverb of time or with a pre-
position and its case, is also used in the same way.
Ἔν τῷ πρίν, formerly (Thue, 4, 355). Τὸ πάλαι, anciently (Plat. Phaedr.
251”). Ta viv, now (Plat. Soph. 239°). Τὸ μὲν αὐτίκα, for the present (Thuc.
6, 69°). Τάπὸ τοῦδε, henceforth (Soph. Aj. 1376). Τὸ ἐξαίφνης, the moment
(Plat. Parm. 156").
1289. Nore. —Demonstrative and relative pronouns with prepo-
sitions are most frequently thus used.
22 ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 1290
"Ev τούτῳ Kal ἔτι πρότερον τάδε ἐπράσσετο, in the meantime and even
earlier these negotiations were being carried on (Thuc. 8, 45'). Ἔν ᾧ περὶ
ἡγεμονίας Svemparrovto....... ἐν τούτῳ of Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐξήεσαν, while they were
deciding about the command, the Lacedaemonians in the meantime passed over
(Xen. Hell. 4, 2"). Ἔξ οὗ φίλος εἶναι προσποιεῖται, ἐκ τούτου πλεῖστα.
ὑμᾶς ἐξηπάτηκεν, since he pretended to be a friend, from that time he has
deceived you most (Dem. 23, 193). So also πρὸ τοῦ, formerly (Ar. Eccl. 224).
Πρὸ τούτων, before this (Thue. 2, 85). Μετὰ τοῦτο, μετὰ ταῦτα, after this (Xen.
Anab. 4, 64; 3, 3°). ᾿Απὸ τοῦδε, ἀπὸ τούτου, from this time (Thue. 4, 114°).
Μέχρι τοῦδε, μέχρι τούτου, till then (Thuc. 2, 72°). Μέχρι ὅσου, for so long a
time (Hdt. 8, 3*). Ἔς τόδε, ἐς τοῦτο, up to the present time (Thue. 1, 69';
8, 73°). Μέχρι του for a time (Thue. 4, 135). Ἔς 6, as far as (Thue. 5, 667).
1290. Norr.—Some expressions may be local as well as temporal.
Ἐπὶ πολύ, widely; ἐκ πολλοῦ, at a distance (Thue. 4, 32*).
1291. The neuter adjective or participle may express in a general
way an object or thing to which the attribute belongs.
Ἔστιν ἔχθιστα τὰ ἐναντιώτατα, Ψῦχρὸν θερμῷ, πικρὸν γλυκεῖ,
ξηρὸν ὑγρῷ, the most hostile things are the most opposite, the hot to the cold,
the bitter to the sweet, the dry to the moist (Plat. Symp. 186%*). Ὅμοιον
ὁ μοίῳ ἀεὶ πελάζει, like ‘ahaye approaches like (Plat. Symp. 195°). Πάντα χωρεῖ
καὶ οὐδὲν μένει, all things move and nothing is at rest (Plat. Cratyl. 4025). Τοῖς
μεγάλα ὑπισχνουμένοις οὐ πρέπει περὶ pix pa διατρίβειν, it does not become
those who promise great things to occupy themselves with little things (Isoc.
4,189). Τὸ σπάνιον τίμιον, what is rare is valuable (Plat. Euthyd. 304°).
Χαλεπὰ τὰ καλά, the beautiful is difficult (Plat. Rep. 435°). Ta ἐσσόμενα,
the future (Il. 1, 70). Td ξητούμενον ἁλωτόν, ἐκφεύγει δὲτἀμελούμενον,
what is searched may be obtained, but what is unregarded escapes (Soph. Oed.
Tyr. 110). So δεξιόν and εὐώνυμον or ἀριστερόν, the right and the left wing
(of an army), τὸ μέσον, the centre. For predicate neuters like καλὸν ἡ
ἀλήθεια (Plat. Leg. 663°), see 1309.
1292. The neuter article with an adverb is sometimes used in the
same way.
Τὸ εὖ καὶ τὸ καλῶς, the good and the noble Plat. Leg. 667°). Τὸ φανερῶς τοῦ
λάθρᾳ κρεῖττον, what is done openly is better than what is done secretly (Dem.
20, 74). Τὸ λίαν ἧσσον ἐπαινῶ τοῦ μηδὲν ἄγαν, I praise what is extreme less
than the sentiment ‘‘ nothing in excess” (Eur. Hipp. 264).
1293. The neuter denoting a class of objects often refers to persons,.
and some neuter plurals include persons and things.
Τὸ ἄρρεν πρὸς τὸ θῆλυ φύσει....... κρεῖττον, the male, compared with
the female, is by nature superior (Aristotle Pol. 1, 2). τΤυφλοῦται περὶ τὸ
1296 ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 23
φιλούμενον ὃ φιλῶν, the lover is blinded in regard to the beloved (Plat. Leg.
- 731°). Ta βαρβάρων ye δοῦλα πάντα πλὴν ἑνός, of barbarians all are slaves
but one (Eur. Hel. 276). Τὰ oxevodépa,-the beasts of burden in the train of an
army (Xen. Anab. 1, 3"). Ta αἰχμάλωτα, booty (Xen. Anab. 5, 9*). Μᾶλλον
᾿ μάχοιντ᾽ ἄν, εἰ ra φίλτατα παρείη, they fight better if their dearest objects are
present (Xen. Cyr. 4, 37).
1294. The neuter singular often has collective meaning.
Ἱππικόν, cavalry. Τὸ πολῖτικόν, the citizens. Μίνως τὸ λῃστικὸν καθῇρει
ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης, Minos swept piracy from the sea (Thuc. 1, 4). Τὸ παλαιὸν
“Ἑλληνικόν, the ancient Greeks, the old Greek world (Thue. 1, 64). Κρατεῖ ἐν
ἑκάστῃ πόλει τὸ ἄρχον, the ruling body in every city has the power (Plat. Rep.
338°). Ναυτικόν may mean fleet (Thuc. 1, 4), or naval affairs (Thue. 1, 142°).
1295. The neuter may denote a body or parts of a body or anything
perceptible by the senses.
“Hrrov ἀνατρέπεται πάντα τὰ πλατέα, broad objects are less easily over-
twrned (Xen. Cyr. 6,1”). Μαθεῖν δεῖ ἃ τότε τοῖς δεξιοῖς τοῦ σώματος ἐποίει,
τοῖς ἀριστεροῖς ποιεῖν, one must learn to do with the right part of the body
what one did previously with the left (Xen. Eques. 7,3). Ta δεόμενα σκέπης
τοῦ ἀνθρώπου σκεπάζει ὁ θώραξ, the corslet covers those parts of a man needing
protection (Xen. Mem. 3, 10°). Πικρῷ γλυκὺ μέμικται, the sweet is mixed
with the bitter (Plat. Phil. 46°). Ἡκόντιζον ἐκ πλαγίου παραθέοντες ἐς τὰ γυμνά,
they threw javelins, running from the side, at the exposed flanks (Xen. Hell.
4, 5”).
1296. The neuter attribute used substantively may expres; pro-
perty, means, power, concerns, affairs, interests, rights, party, and the
like. —
Δεῖ ἀπέχεσθαιτῶν δεσποσύνων, he must keep his hands from his master’s
property (Xen. Occ. 14, 2). Ἵνα... βραχεῖ μορίῳ ξυμπαραγενόμενοι μεγάλα
σώσητε, 80 that assisting with a small force, you may preserve great interests
(Thue. 6, 925). ᾿Αρκεῖ pot pixpa καὶ μειζόνων αἰσχρῶς οὐκ éeribipa, my
small property suffices me, and I have no shameful desire for a greater (Aeschin.
3, 218). Τὸ μὲν κοινὸν «-ξυνδεῖ, τὸ δὲ ἴδιον διασπᾷ τὰς πόλεις, public good
binds states together, but private distracts them (Plat. Leg. 875"). Ἐμὲ νῦν
νόμισον καὶ τὸ σὸν σπεύδειν, believe that I am zealous about your interest
(Plat. Gorg. 455°). Ἔν τοῖς περὶ τοῦ πολέμου, in matters concerning the war
(Dem. 4, 36). Τὰν βίῳ, human affairs (Men. Mon. 712). Td τῶν παρόντων, the
interests of those present (Plat. Gorg. 458”). Τὸ τῶν χρημάτων, money matters
(Dem. 4, 28). Td τῶν ἁλιέων, the habit of fishermen (Xen. Occ. 16, 7).
—Adi γυναῖκα σῴζειν τὰ ἔνδον, a woman ought to take care of what is at
home (Plat. Meno, 71°). Τὰ οἴκοι, domestic affairs (Xen. Cyr. 6, 1"). Τά re
ἐκεῖ εὐπορώτερα torat,.......kai τὰ ἐνθάδε οὐκ ἐπικωλύσει, the states in
24 : ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 1297
those parts will be easier to handle,.......and those here will wot be an
obstacle (Thuc. 6, 17°). οὐδὲν εἰδότες οὔτε τῶν τῇδε οὔτε τῶν παρ᾽
ὑμῖν, knowing nothing of what happened here or among yourselves (Plat. Tim.
23°). Ἕνα ἕκαστον ἕν δεῖ ἐπιτηδεύειν τῶν περὶ τὴν πόλιν, every one ought to
have some one occupation in the state (Plat. Rep. 433"). Πόλεων αἱ μὲν τὰ-
ἡμέτερα, ai δὲ ra Bpérepa φρονοῦσι, of the states some support our
views and some yours (Xen. Hell. 6, 3").—Kowa τὰ τῶν φίλων, things of
friends are common (Eur. Or. 758). ᾿Ανάγκη τὰ τῶν Ἑλλήνων φρονεῖν,
to feel disposed in favour of the interests of the Greeks (Dem. 14, 34). Τὸ τῆς
ἀνάγκης δεινόν, terrible is necessity (Eur. Tro. 612). Ἐΐλεσθε τὰ ᾿Α θη-
ναίων, you took the part of the Athenians (Thue. 3, 63°). ᾿Απολλύναι τὰ
αὑτῶν, to destroy their property (Plat. Rep. 555°). Τὸ ra αὑτοῦ mparrew,
to attend to one’s own business (Plat. 433"). Ταράττειτὰ τῶν Θετταλῶν,
he disturbs the affairs of the Thessalians (Dem. 1, 21).
1297. The neuter attribute used substantively may express con-
dition, feelings, behaviour, relations, services, actions, events, thoughts,
sayings, causes, influences, opinions, and the like.
Τὸ ἀκίνδῦνον ἡ εἰρήνη παρέχει, peace affords freedom from danger
(Thue. 5, 16°). ἘἙλπίέδος ἐν τῷ ἀπόρῳ ἡ ἰσχύς, the strength of hope is in
difficulties (Thuc. 2, 62°). Aéyov ἐν μὲν τῷ σφετέρῳ καλῷ, ἐν δὲ τῷ
ἐκείνων ἀπρεπεῖ τὸν πόλεμον ἀναβάλλεσθαι, saying that it was to their
own honour, and to their rivals’ discredit to postpone the war (Thue. 5, 46").
Ei μή καθέξεις γλῶσσαν, ἔσται σοι κακά, if you don’t hold your tongue, yow ll
have trouble (Men. Mon. 662). Td ἀκαίριον πανταχοῦ imnpdv, what is
unseasonable always is painful (Isoc. 1, 31). Μαθὼν ἀντὶ τοῦ βασιλικοῦ
τὸ τυραννικόν, having learned what is tyrannical instead of what is royal (Xen.
Cyr. 1, 3°). Τὸ μέλλον ἀόρᾶτον, the future is invisible (Isoc. 1, 29). Τῷ
ἀδοκήτῳ ἐξέπληξεν, he struck (them) with dismay at the wnexpected move
(Thuc. 4, 36°). Σωκράτης διὰ τῶν μάλιστα ὁμολογουμένων ἐπορεύετο,
Socrates proceeded wpon propositions most generally acknowledged (Xen. Mem.
4, 61). Οὐκ ἀμελήσει τῶν διδασκομένων, she will not disregard what is
taught (Xen. Oec. 7, 8). Μὴ ra rap ἐμοῦ οὕτως ἀποδέχου ὡς παίζοντος, do
not accept these statements of mine as if uttered in jest (Plat. Gorg. 500"). Ta
τῶν στρατιωτῶν, the condition of the soldiers (Xen. Anab. 3, 15). Ta μὲν
κατὰ Παυσανίᾶν, the fate of Pausanias (Thue. 1, 138"). So also in expressions
like : τὸ κατ᾽ ἐμέ, as far as I am concerned (Dem. 18, 247); τὰ περὶ Προξένου,
the fate of Proxenus (Xen. ἅπαν. 2, 5°”); τὸ τῶν ἁλιέων, the habit of fishermen
(Xen. Oec. 16, 7) ; δεδιέναι τὸ τῶν παίδων, to have the boyish fear (Plat. Phaed.
77°) ; τὸ τοῦ Σοφοκλέους, what is said by Sophocles (Plat. Rep. 329°); τὸ τῶν
πνευμάτων, the state of the winds (Dem. 49, 7).
1298. Nore.—The neuter plural, especially of adjectives in -txds,
denotes an aggregate or particulars or the whole mass.
1302 PREDICATE-NOUN AND ADJECTIVE 25
Ta Tpwixa, the events of Troy (Thue. 1, 3'). Ta mpd τῶν Μηδικῶν “Ἑλληνικά,
Greek history before the Persian wars (Thue. 1, 9732). Ta ναυτικά, naval affairs
(Thuc. 1, 1493). Mera ra ἐν Πλαταίᾳ τῶν ἐσελθόντων Θηβαίων γενόμενα, the
events at Plataea caused by the Thebans who entered it (Το. 2, 19}).
1299. Norz.—Names of festivals are thus in the plural.
Ta Διονύσια, the Dionysian festival. ᾿Ἐπινίκια, festival of victory. Evay-
γέλια, sacrifices for glad tidings.
1300. Norzr.—Sometimes an expression like those in 1296 and 1297
is merely a periphrasis.
Τὸ τῶν θεῶν εὐμενὲς καὶ τὸ τῆς τύχης συναγωνίζεται = οἱ θεοὶ εὐμενεῖς εἰσι Kai
ἡ τύχη συναγωνίζεται, the gods are propitious. and fortune aids (Dem. 4, 45).
1301. 1. The neuter singular of an adjective with the article is
often an abstract noun expressing natwre, essence, or quality.
Τὸ καλόν ( = τὸ κάλλος), beauty. Τὸ δ᾽ ἁπλοῦν καὶ τὸ ἀληθές, sim-
plicity and truth (Xen. Anab. 2, 6"). Τὸ χαλεπὸν τοῦ πνεύματος, the
' roughness of the wind (Xen. Anab. 4, 54), Τὸ γ᾽ ἐμὸν πρόθῦμον, my zal
Eur. Med. 178). ZuvéBn τὸν ἐμὸν λόγον ἐν τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἀσθενεῖ τῆς
γνώμης μὴ ὀρθὸν φαίνεσθαι, it happened that my advice did not seem straight
through your weakness of resolution (Thuc. 2, 61°). Td ἄπρᾶγμον ov
σῴζεται μὴ μετὰ τοῦ Δοᾶ στηρίου τεταγμένον, quietness is not safe unless
ranged with activity (Thuc. 2, 65°).
2. The neuter singular participle with the article is occasionally
used as an abstract noun, like-the infinitive.
Τὸ μὲν δεδιεὸς (= τὸ δεδιέναι) αὐτοῦ, his fear (Thue. 1, 36'). Td βουλό-
μενον (= τὸ βούλεσθαι), the wishing, desire (Thuc. 1, 905). Ἔν τῷ μὴ μελετῶντι
(= ἐν τῷ μὴ μελετᾶν), in the want of practice = lit. in the not practising (Thuc.
1, 142°). Τὴν ὀργὴν κωλύειν cis τὸ μεταμελησόμενον προϊέναι, to prevent
anger from going so far as to cause regret (Xen. Mem. 2, 63). This construc-
tion is confined chiefly to Thucydides.
PREDICATE-NOUN AND ADJECTIVE
1302. 1. A predicate-noun agrees in case with the substantive
to which it refers; a predicate-adjective agrees in case, number,
and gender.
Κῦρός ἐστι βασιλεύς, Cyrus is king. Τόμυρις βασίλεια ἦν, Tomyris was
queen. Κλέων ἡρέθη κατάσκοπος, Cleon was chosen scout (Thue. 4, 27).
Τύραννος ὁ "Epos λέγεται, Eros is called a tyrant (Plat. Rep. 573°). ‘H
πόλις φρούριον κατέστη, the city became a fort (Thuc. 7, 28'). Μέγας ὁ
Φίλιππος ηὐξήθη, Philip has grown great (Dem. 9, 31). Αὐτοὶ νομοθέται
26 PREDICATE-NOUN AND ADJECTIVE 1303:
κληθήσονται, they will be called law-givers (Plat. Leg. 681°). Εἴθε φίλος
ἡμῖν γένοιο, O that you may become a friend to us (Xen. Hell. 4, 1%). Ta
δάνεια δούλους τοὺς ἐλευθέρους ποιεῖ, loans make free men slaves (Men. Mon.
514). Νόμιζε ἀδελφοὺς τοὺς ἀληθινοὺς φίλους, consider true friends (to be)
brothers (Men. Mon. 377). Σωτῆρα τὸν Φίλιππον ἡγοῦντο, they regarded
Philip their preserver (Dem. 18, 49).
2. The predicate-noun may often be of different gender, sometimes.
also of different number.
Οὗτοί ye φανερά ἐστι λώβη τε καὶ διαφθορὰ τῶν συγγιγνομένων, these men
are a manifest dishonour and a corruption to their associates (Plat. Meno,
91°).
1303. Norz.—The predicate-nominative of passive verbs represents.
the predicate-accusative of the active form (1609—1614).
1304. Notr.—By a change of construction (anacoluthon), a predi-
cate-participle sometimes differs in case from its subject.
"Ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς (= ἐψηφίσαντο)...... , ἐπικαλοῦντες, it seemed best to
them (= they voted)...... , alleging (Thue. 3, 36'); other examples in Thue.
1, 62°; Eur. Hec. 970; Soph. El. 479.
1305. Norz.—For predicate-nouns and adjectives after the in-
finitive, see infinitive, 2186-2191.
For demonstrative, relative, and interrogative pronouns used as
predicate-adjectives, see 1487, 1510, 1548.
1306. Norr.-—(a) A predicate-adjective relating to several sub-
stantives is generally in the plural, or may be in the dual if it relates
to two. If the substantives denote a masculine and a feminine,
the adjective is masculine; if the substantives denote persons and
things, the adjective follows the gender of the person; if all the nouns
represent things of the same gender, the adjective follows their gender, ἡ
or else it is in the neuter plural; and if all the nouns denote things
of different genders (or persons regarded as things), the adjective is.
commonly in the neuter plural.
Εὐρυμέδων καὶ Σοφοκλῆς ἀφικόμενοι ἐς Κέρκῦραν ἐστράτευσαν, Hury-
medon and Sophocles, having come to Corcyra, carried on war (Thue. 4, 46}).
Καλλίᾶς τε καὶ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ἡκέτην ἄγοντε τὸν Πρόδικον, Callias and Alcibiades
came bringing Prodicus (Plat. Protag. 317°). Ἢ τύχη καὶ Φίλιππος ἦσαν τῶν
ἔργων κύριοι, fortune and Philip were masters of the actions (Aeschin. 2, 118).
Evyéverai re καὶ δυνάμεις καὶ τιμαὶ δῆλά ἐστι ἀγαθὰ ὄντα, good birth and
1310 PREDICATE-NOUN AND ADJECTIVE 27
power and honour are clearly good things (Plat. Euthyd. 279"). Ἢ καλλίστη:
πολιτεία τε καὶ ὁ κάλλιστος ἀνὴρ λοιπὰ ἂν ἡμῖν εἴη διελθεῖν, the noblest common-
wealth and the noblest man would be left for us to consider (Plat. Rep. 5625).
(6) But sometimes the predicate-adjective conforms in number and
gender with the nearest or most important noun.
Βασιλεὺς καὶ of σὺν αὐτῷ δι ὦ κω ν εἰσπίπτει eis τὸ στρατόπεδον, the king and
mis Followers pursuing break into the camp (Xen. Anab. 1,10'). Upédppitos
αὐτός, ἡ γυνή, τὰ παιδία κάκιστ᾽ ἀπολοίμην, may I perish most miserably, root
and branch, myself, my wife, my children (Ar. Ran. 587).
1307. Nore.—A predicate-participle may conform to the real
rather than to the grammatical bee or number of the noun to-
which it refers.
Ta μειράκια τάδε πρὸς ἀλλήλους οἴκοι διαλεγόμενοι θαμὰ ἐπιμέμνηνται
Σωκράτους, these lads talking to one another at home often speak of Socrates
(Plat. Lach. 180°). Ταῦτ᾽ ἔλεγεν ἡ μιαρὰ αὕτη κεφαλὴ, ἐξεληλυθώς, thus
spoke this pestilent fellow, having come out (Dem. 21, 117). Ὁ ὄχλος ἠθροίσθη.
θαυμάζοντες καὶ ἰδεῖν βουλόμεν οι τὸν ᾿Αλκιβιάδην, the crowd was assembled,
wondering and wishing to see Alcibiades (Xen. Hell. 1, 4.8). Τὰ τέλη κατα-
βάντας, the authorities having gone down (Thue. 4, 15").
1308. Norr.—In the participial construction, the participle of εἰμί
agrees in number and gender with the predicate.
Thy ἡδονὴν διώκετε ὡς ἀγαθὸν ὄν, you pursue pleasure as being something
good (Plat. Prot. 354°). Καταλαμβάνουσι Βρικιννίᾶς ὃν ἔρυμα ἐν τῇ Λεοντίνῃ,
they take Bricinniae, a fort in Leontine (Thue. 5, 43).
1309. Norr.—(a) A masculine or feminine noun may have its
predicate-adjective in the neuter, the adjective then has the force of
ἃ noun denoting a class.
| Καλὸν ἡ ἀλήθεια, truth is beautiful = a beautiful thing (Plat. Leg. 663°).
᾿Αθάνατον ἡ Wixn, the soul is immortal = something immortal (Plat. Phaedo,.
105°).
(6) Sometimes ri, something, is added to the predicate.
Τὴν ἀρετὴν καλόν τι φὴς εἶναι, you declare virtue to be something beautiful
(Plat. Prot. 349°).
(c) If the predicate-adjective is considered wholly a substantive,
it may also be qualified by an adjective.
Ἔρωτες κακὸν μέγα, love is a great evil (Eur. Med. 330).
1310. Norr.—lIf the subject of a verb is an infinitive or an in-
finitive phrase, a predicate-adjective is regularly in the neuter singular ;
_ but the neuter plural is sometimes used.
28 PREDICATE-NOUN AND ADJECTIVE 1811
Δίκαιον ἀπόλλυσθαι τοὺς ἐπιορκοῦντας, it is just that the perjurers perish
(Xen. Ἅπαν. 2, 5"). ᾿Αδύνατα ἦν τοὺς Λοκροὺς ἀμύνεσθαι, it was impossible
to resist the Locrians (Thue. 4, 1*).—So also the verbals -réov and -réa in their
impersonal construction; as τὴν πόλιν ὠφελητέον, we must aid the state
(Xen. Mem. 2, 155); ξύμμαχοι ἀγαθοί, ods οὐ tapadoréa τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐστίν,
good allies, whom we must not abandon to the Athenians (Thue. 1, 865). Com-
pare 2316.
1311. When the subject is a demonstrative pronoun, it is
usually assimilated in gender and number to its predicate-noun,
Mia αὕτη mapodds ἐστιν ἣν ὁρᾷς, this is the one appoach which you see (Xen.
Anab. 4, 7*). Οἶμαι ἐμὴν ταύτην πατρίδα εἶναι, I think this is my native
country (Xen. Anab. 4, 8.
1312. Norre.—The same assimilation occurs if the demonstrative
is the object.
Ταύτην ἐμαυτῷ μόνην ἡγοῦμαι σωτηρίαν, I consider this to be my only
-salwation (Lys. 1, 5).
1313. Norz.—1. The assimilation does not take place and the
-demonstrative is in the neuter, if this is wholly indefinite and general
and equivalent to this thing or this matter.
"Eywyé φημι ταῦτα φλυᾶρίᾶς εἶναι, I declare this to be nonsense (Xen.
Anab. 1, 3"). 3
2. Similarly in questions τί must be used when what ? is equivalent
to what kind of thing ?
Πυθαγόρας ἐρωτηθείς, τί ἐστι φίλος, ἀπεκρίνατο “ἄλλος eyo,” Pythagoras,
having been asked what is a friend, replied, ‘* another I” (Stobaeus, iv., 168, 15).
1314. The term predicate-adjective includes all adjectives and
participles which are not attributive. Where a predicate-adjective is
not connected with its noun by a copulative verb, the relation always
implies some part of the verb εἰμί; and the predicate force of such an
-adjective must often be expressed in English by a periphrasis.
᾿Αθάνατον τὴν μνήμην καταλείψουσιν, immortal is the memory they will
leave = lit. they will leave their memory immortal (Isoc. 9, 3). Πτηνὰς
διώκεις τὰς ἐλπίδας = ai ἐλπίδες ἃς διώκεις πτηναί εἰσιν, you pursue hopes which
are winged = lit. hopes being winged (Kur. Frag. 273). ψιλὴν ἔχων τὴν
κεφαλήν, having his head bare (Xen. Anab. 1, 8°). Tap’ ἑκόντων τῶν ξυμ-
_paxov τὴν ἡγεμονίαν ἔλαβον, they received the leadership from their allies
who were willing to confer it (Isoc. 7, 17). Διὰ φιλίας τῆς χώρᾶς ἀπ-
a&er, he will lead us through the country which will be friendly (Xen. Anab.
Ly): « Maas τῆς τύχης εὐδαίμονος τύχοιτε, {ΐ....... the lot you meet be
1318 ADJECTIVES WITH ADVERBIAL FORCE ὁ 29°
a happy one (Eur. Hel. 698). Ὅταν ἀκούω ἀνδρὸς περὶ ἀρετῆς dSiadeyopévov,.
χαίρω, when I hear a man discoursing about virtue, I rejoice (Plat. Lach. 188°).
Ταἀληθὲς ἰσχῦον τρέφω, I nowrish truth (being) strong (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 356).
Τοὺς συμμάχους προθύμους ποιεῖσθαι, to make the allies zealous (Xen. Cyr. 4, 2°).
1315. Norr.—The predicate-adjective can often be known from its.
position with regard to the article; see 1415, 1416. |
1316. The predicate frequently expresses the purpose, character,.
or quality in which a person or thing appears; especially where-
we use as or for or a similar word.
᾿Απέσταλκά σοι τοῦτον τὸν λόγον δῶρον, I have sent you this discourse as-
a gift (Isoc. 1, 2). “Exeiv@ αὕτη ἡ xopa δῶρον ἐκ βασιλέως ἐδόθη, this country:
was given to him as a gift by the king (Xen. Hell. 3, 15). Ἵπποι ἤγοντο θ ὃ pa:
τῷ ἡλίῳ, horses were brought .as an offering to the sun (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3%,
actively ἵππους ἄγειν θῦμα). Συμμάχους ἕξεις θεούς, you will have the
gods for allies (Men. Mon. 126). Tivos διδάσκαλοι ἥκετε; as teachers of
what are you come? (Plat. Euthyd. 2875). Ταῖς τέχναις. ταύταις παραπετά-.
σμασιν ἐχρῆτο, they use these arts as cloaks (Plat. Prot. 316°). Ἐπῳδῶν
προσδεῖσθαι μοι δοκεῖ μύθων ἔτι τινῶν, he seems to me to still need some words as
consolation (Plat. Leg. 903”).—So with ὡς prefixed; as ἔξεστι τῷ βουλομένῳ.
χρῆσθαι ἤδη τούτῳ ὡς ἀνδραπόδῳ, it is in the power of any one who wishes to use:
him as a slave (Xen. Cyr. 4, 2”). Compare also 1314, 1611, 1487, 1510, 1548.
ADJECTIVES WITH ADVERBIAL FORCE
1317. A predicate-adjective is often used where the English
would require an adverb or an adverbial phrase.
᾿Αφικνοῦνται τριταῖοι, they arrive on the third day (Xen. Anab. 5, 32).
Ὅρκιος δέ σοι λέγω, and under oath I tell thee (Soph. Ant. 305). "“Op@pios-
ἥκεις, you have come early (Plat. Prot. 313”). Οἱ στρατιῶται εἵποντο ἄσμενοι,
the soldiers followed gladly (Xen. Anab. 7, 2°). Bia re κοὐχ ἑκών, by force:
and not willingly (Soph. Oed. Col. 935). Πάρειμι ἄκων, I am present unwil-
lingly (Soph. Ant. 276). Τοὺς νεκροὺς ὑποσπόνδους ἀπήγοντο, they bore off their
dead under cover of truce (Xen. Hell, 4, 415...
1318. Norz.—The adjectives most frequently used in this way
are: (a) those expressing time, as δευτεραῖος, on the second day, τριταῖος,
on the third day, etc., ὄρθριος, early, σκοταῖος, after dark ; (b) those
expressing order, as πρῶτος, first, πρότερος, former, ὕστατος, last, ὕστερος,
later; (c) ἕκων and ἑκούσιος, willingly, ἄκων, unwillingly, ἄσμενος,
gladly ; (d) certain others, as ὑπόσπονδος, wnder treaty, ὅρκιος under
30 ; | APPOSITION 1319 ©
oath, etc. Adjectives expressing locality are seldom used in this way
in prose. —
Σκηνοῦμεν ὑπαίθριοι, we are encamped in the open air (Xen. Anab. 5, 5%).
1319. Norr.—The use of the adverb often gives a completely
different meaning.
᾿Αλέξανδρος πρῶτος ἔταξε τοὺς Widovs, Alexander was the first who drew wp
the light-armed troops, ᾿Αλέξανδρος πρώτους ἔταξε τοὺς yidovs the first troops
Alexander drew up were the light-armed. But Αλέξανδρος πρῶτον ἔταξε τοὺς
ψιλούς, first (of all he did) Alexander drew wp the light-armed troops, A
similar distinction exists with πρότερος, ὕστερος, ὕστατος, and μόνος, and their
adverbs. Thus πρῶτον μὲν édaxpie πολὺν χρόνον, εἶτα ἔλεξε τοιάδε, at first
he wept a long time, then he spoke as follows (Xen. Anab. 1, 85). But πρότερος
ἑωράκη αὐτὸν i) ἐκεῖνος ἐμέ, I saw him before he saw me (Plat. Rep. 336), here
πρότερον would be expected.
1320. Norr.—With the verbs ῥέω, flow, and πνέω, blow, the ideas
greatly or strongly, richly, against, referring to wind or water, are
expressed by the adjectives μέγας, πολύς, ἄφθονος, ἐναντίος.
Κρήνη ἄφθονος ῥέουσα, a spring richly flowing (Xen. Anab. 6, 43). Ἄνεμος
βορρᾶς ἐναντίος ἔπνει, the North wind blew against us (Xen. Anab. 4, 5°).
1321. Norz.—With other expressions πολύς is sometimes used
where the English idiom would use an adverbial expression.
Ὁ σῖτος ἐν τῇ πόλει πολὺς ἔνεστιν, the corn in the town was plentiful (Xen.
Hell. 5, 2").
APPOSITION
1322. A noun in apposition with another noun agrees with it
in case.
Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος, Socrates the philosopher. Θῆβαι πόλις μεγάλη, Thebes, —
a great city. Φιλήσιος καὶ Λύκων οἱ ᾿Αχαιοί, Philesius and Lycon, the Achaeans —
(Xen. Anab. 5, 6"). Sogaiverov τὸν Στυμφάλιον καὶ Σωκράτην τὸν ᾿Αχαιόν,
ξένους ὄντας καὶ τούτους, Sophaenetus the Stymphalian and Socrates the Achaean,
these being guest friends (Xen. Anab.1, 1"). Ἡμῶν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, of us the
Athenians. μᾶς τοὺς σοφούς, you, the wise ones. Θεμιστοκλῆς ἥκω (sc. ἐγὼ)
παρά σε, 1, Themistocles, am come to you (Thue. 1, 137°). Κόλακι, δεινῷ θηρίῳ,
to a flatterer, a terrible beast (Plat. Phaedr. 240"). Eis Πέλτᾶς, πόλιν οἰκου-
μένην, to Peltas, an inhabited city (Xen. Anab. 1, 2"). ‘H ἡμετέρα πόλις, ἡ
κοινὴ καταφυγὴ τῶν Ἑλλήνων, our city, the common refuge of the Greeks
(Aeschin. 3, 134). ‘O θάνατος τυγχάνει ὧν δυοῖν πρᾶγμάτοιν διάλυσις, THs ψυχῆς
καὶ τοῦ σώματος, death is a separation of two things, the soul and the body (Plat.
Gorg. 524°).
1328 APPOSITION 31
1323. Nore.—An adjective with the article may be an appositive
to a personal pronoun expressed or implied.
Ἢ τάλαιν᾽ ἐγώ, I, the wretched one (Soph. El. 1138). ‘O τλήμων... ἥκω,
I wretched one, have come (Eur. And. 1070). Tov ἀσεβῆ pe, the impious,
myself (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1441). ‘Opas με........ τὸν ἄθλιον, thou seest me the
wretched one (Eur. Hipp. 1395). 3v....... ὁ πρεσβύτατος, you, the eldest (Xen.
Oyr. 4, 5”).
_ 1324. Nore.—An appositive belonging to two or more nouns is
generally in the plural or dual.
᾿ Ὕγπνος πόνος τε, κύριοι ξυνωμόται, sleep and toil, powerful conspirators
({Aesch. Eum. 197). Θάρρος καὶ φόβον ἄφρονε ξυμβούλω, boldness and fear,
two senseless counsellors (Plat. Tim. 694).
1325. Norr.—A noun denoting place may have an apposition
denoting the inhabitants.
᾿Αφέκοντο εἰς Κοτύωρα, Σινωπέων ἀποίκους, they came to Cotyora, colonists of
the Sinopeans (Xen. Anab. 5, δ᾽).
1326. Nore.—The appositive may represent a part of its subject.
Oixia ai μὲν πολλαὶ πεπτώκεσαν, ὀλίγαι δὲ περιῆσαν, most of the houses had
fallen, but a few remained (Thue. 1, 894). Οὗτοι ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει, these men
- say different things (Xen. Anab. 2, 1:5. Ai τέχναι τὸ αὑτῆς ἑκάστη ἔργον
ἐργάζεται, the arts do each one its own work (Plat. Rep. 346°).
1327. Norz.—An adjective implying a genitive may have a geni-
tive in apposition to it.
᾿Αθηναῖος ὧν, πόλεως τῆς μεγίστης, being (a citizen) of Athens, the greatest
city (Plat. Apol. 294}.
1328. Norzr.—1. In Homer a noun or pronoun de-
noting a person often has an appositive denoting a part.
Antorirny οὔτασεν Spov, he wounded Deiopites in the
shoulder (Il. 11, 420). Kad δ᾽ ἄχος οἱ χύτο pipiov ὀφθαλμοῖσιν,
immeasurable sadness o’erspread his eyes, lit. him the eyes (Il.
20, 282). ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐκ ᾿Ατρεΐδῃ ᾿Αγαμέμνονι ἥνδανε θυμῷ, but he
was not pleasing to the spirit of Agamemnon, son of Atreus,
lit. to Agamemnon to his heart (Il. 1, 24). “Ados τέ μιν ἵκετο
θῦμόν, and satiety came to his heart, lit. to him, to his heart
(11. 11, 88).
2. For ὁ δέ followed by an appositive in Homer, see
1369.
32 THE ADJECTIVE 1329
1329. Norr.—An appositive may be made to agree in gender with
its subject. :
ΕΓ ΟΣ: 0000 πάντων λαμπρότατος, the sun, the brightest (sc. thing) of all
things (Xen. Mem. 4,7’). Here λαμπρότατον might have been used, conforming
to the gender of πάντων.
1330. Norn.—1l. When a noun is in apposition to a whole sentence,
it is in the nominative if it refers in a general way to the subject; and
in the accusative if it denotes the result of an action.
Keivra πεσόντες, πίστις οὐ opixpa πόλει, they lie prostrate—no small ground
of confidence to the city (Kur. Rhes. 415). EvdSammovoins, μισθὸν ἡδίστων λόγων,
mayest thou be happy, a reward for the sweetest words (Kur. El. 231).
2. Such expressions appositive to a whole sentence are: τὸ κεφα-
λαῖον, the chief point, τὸ τελευταῖον, last of all, τὸ λεγόμενον, the saying,
τὸ τῆς παροιμίας, the proverbial saying, αὐτὸ τοῦτο, this very thing, ταὐτὸ
τοῦτο, this same thing, σημεῖον, sign, τεκμήριον, evidence, and the like ;
—comparatives, as évapyéorepa, (what is) more clear (Plat. Phaedo, 96°) ;
—frequently superlatives, as τὸ μέγιστον, τὸ δεινότατον, τὸ θαυμαστότατον'
(see 1520) ;—so also δυοῖν θάτερον or δυοῖν θάτερα, one of two things.
Δυοῖν θάτερα, ἣ εὑρήσομεν, ἐφ᾽ ὃ ἐρχόμεθα, ἣ ἧττον οἰησόμεθα εἰδέναι, ὃ
μηδαμῇ ἴσμεν, one of two things; either we shall find what we seek, or we shall
be less likely to think we know what we do not know (Plat. Theaet. 187°).—And.
ἀμφότερον or ἀμφότερα, both; οὐδέτερον, neither of the two; πᾶν τοὐναντίον,
quite the opposite, ete.
1331. Norzs.—Names of rivers are inserted between the article and
ποταμός, a8 ὃ Εὐφράτης ποταμός, the river Euphrates. Names of moun-
tains, islands, and lakes (seldom cities and other places) may have the
same position if they are of the same gender as the appositive.
Τὸ Πήλιον ὄρος, Mount Pelion. Ai Κυκλάδες νῆσοι, the Cyclades. Ἢ Βόλβη:
λίμνη, Lake Bolbé. ‘H Μένδη πόλις, the city Μεπάδ. But with different
genders : Πάρνης τὸ ὄρος, Mount Parnes; ἡ Αἴτνη τὸ ὄρος, Mount Aetna; τὸ
ὄρος ἡ Ἰστώνη, Mount Istoné; ἡ Λευκίμμη τὸ ἀκρωτήριον, the promontory
Leucimme.
1332. Norr.—Observe also the fixed expression ἡ βουλὴ οἱ πεντα-
κόσιοι, the Council of the Five Hundred.
THE ADJECTIVE
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES
1333. Adjectives agree with their substantives in case, number,
and gender. This rule applies also to the article, adjective-pro-
nouns, and to participles. —
a a
1338 THE ADJECTIVE 33
‘O ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ, the good man, τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ἀνδρός, τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἀνδρί, τὸν
ἀγαθὸν ἄνρδα, τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀνδρῶν, etc. Αὕτη ἡ γυνὴ, this woman, ταύτης τῆς
γυναικός, ταύτῃ τῇ γυναικί, ταὐτᾶς τὰς γυναῖκας, etc. Παράδεισος μέγας ἀγρίων
θηρίων πλήρης, a large park full of wild beasts (Xen. Anab. 1, 27). Τοξότᾶς
Κρῆτας διᾶκοσίους, 200 Cretan archers (Xen. Anab. 1, 2°). Τὼ παῖδε ἀμφοτέρω,
both the children (Xen. Anab. 1, 1’).
For the agreement of predicate-adjectives, see 1302—1316.
1334. Norz.—aAn attributive adjective relating to several nouns
usually agrees only with the nearest or most important ; sometimes it
is repeated (for emphasis or clearness) with each noun ; sometimes it
is in the plural.
Τὸν καλὸν κἀγαθὸν ἄνδρα καὶ γυναῖκα, the honourable man and woman
(Plat. Gorg. 4109). κεῖνος 6 καιρὸς καὶ ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνη, that occasion and that
day (Dem. 18, 172). Σωφρόνων ἐστὶ καὶ ἀνδρὸς καὶ γυναικός οὕτω ποιεῖν, it is
the business of a right-minded man and woman to act thus (Xen. Occ. 7, 15).
1335. Notr.—Avo, two, is often used with a noun in the plural.
Παῖδες δύο, two children (Xen. Anab. 1, 1°).
1336. In poetry an attributive adjective may agree
with the real rather than the grammatical gender of its
noun.
Φίλε τέκνον, dear child (Il. 22, 84. Ὦ φίλτατ᾽, ὦ
περισσὰ τιμηθεὶς τέκνον, O, dearest child, O thow prized
above all things (Eur. Tro. 735). So when the noun forms a
periphrasis with the genitive with a genitive; as φίλτατ᾽
Αἰγίσθου Bia, dearest majesty of Aegisthus (Aesch. Cho. 893).
ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES USED AS NOUNS
1337. Adjectives and participles are often used as nouns,
generally with the article.
Ὁ σοφός, the wise man. Οἱ ἀγαθοί, the good. Φίλος, a friend. Καλή,
a handsome woman. Τῶν κακῶν, of the bad. Τοῖς σοφοῖς, to the wise. Τὸ
μέσον or μέσον, the middle. Τὰ θνητά, mortal things. Kaka, evils. ‘O λέγων,
the speaker. Τῶν ἀμῦνουμένων, of those defending. Οἱ γραψάμενοι Σωκράτην,
the accusers of Socrates. To λεγόμενον (the thing said), the common saying. Ta
Διονύσια, the festival of Dionysius. See also 1270—1300, 2241—2245, and 1301.
DEGREES OF COMPARISON
1338. The positive degree in Greek corresponds to the positive
degree in English. But with adjectives and adverbs denoting
3
34 THE ADJECTIVE 1339
non-jutness, non-ability, disproportion, and the like, the positive joined
to the infinitive (with or without ὥστε or ws) has comparative
meaning ; this is expressed 1 in English by too.
Τὸ ὕδωρ ψυχρὸν ὥστε λούσασθαί ἐστιν, the water is too cold for bathing
(Xen. Mem. 3, 13°). ᾿Ολίγοι ἐσμὲν ὡς ἐγκρατεῖς εἶναι τῶν πολεμίων, we are
too few to get the better of the enemy (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5”). Ταπεινὴ ὑμῶν ἡ διάνοια
ἐγκαρτερεῖν ἃ ἔγνωτε, your mind is too prostrated to persevere in what you have
resolved (Thue, 2, 61°). Μακρὸν ἂν εἴη γράφειν, it would take too long to write
(Xen. Ages. 7, 1).—So also with nouns ; as γέρων μὲν ἐκεῖνος ὥστε ἐμοὶ βοηθεῖν,
that person is too old a man to help me (Antiph. 5, 79). pais εἶ, ὡς πράγματα
τηλικαῦτα πράσσειν, you are too old a woman to do such great things (Plutarch,
Pericles, 10).
1339. Nore.—Observe also the idiomatic combination of an adjee-
tive with πολύς.
Πολλοὶ καὶ ἀγαθοὶ ἄνδρες, many good men.
1340, The comparative degree corresponds to the comparative
in English. Used alone, it often expresses excess or tendency, and
may be rendered by too, very, rather, somewhat.
Μὴ ἀγροικότερον ἦ TO ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν, lest it be too (rather) rude to tell the
truth (Plat. Gorg. 462°). Γελοιότερον, rather (somewhat) funny (Plat. Apol.
30°). Πλείω λέλεκται, too much has been said (Eur. Ale. 706).
1341. ‘The comparative cere 2 is followed by the genitive or by
ἤ, than.
᾿Εγὼ νεώτερός εἰμι σοῦ or ἐγὼ νεώτερός εἰμι ἢ σύ, I am younger than you.
Φοβούμεθα τοὺς ὀπλίτᾶς μᾶλλον ἢ τοὺς πελτάστᾶς or φοβούμεθα τοὺς ὁπλίτας
μᾶλλον τῶν πελταστῶν, we fear the hoplites more than the peltasts. ᾿Ανδρὸς
duvatwrépou ἣ ἐγὼ vids, son of a man more powerful than IT am (Xen. Cyr.
5, 25). Οὔπω τούτου ἡδίονι οἴνῳ ἐπέτυχον, they never met with wine sweeter than
this (Xen. Anab. 1, 9”). Ἔκ δεινοτέρων ἢ τοιῶνδε ἐσώθησαν, they have been saved
from greater dangers than these (Thue. 7, 77’). Ταῦτα τοῖς ὁπλίταις οὐχ ἧσσον τῶν
ναυτῶν (=i) τοῖς ναυταῖς) παρακελεύομαι, I enjoin these things no less to the hoplites
than to the sailors (Thue. 7, 63"). (Βλέπειν) εἰς τὴν ἐμπειρίᾶν μᾶλλον τῆς ἀρετῆς
(= # εἰς τὴν ἀρετήν), to look at skill more than at courage (Aristotle, Pol. 8, 9°).
—When 7 would be followed by any other case than the nominative or accusa-
tive without a preposition, as in the last two examples, the genitive is less
common.
1342. Nore.—For brevity the genitive denoting the possessor
instead of the thing possessed is sometimes placed after the compara-
tive.
1347 THE ADJECTIVE 35
"Eye οἰκίαν κέκτημαι οὐ χείρω σοῦ = ἢ σύ, I possess a house not inferior to
yours (cf. Xen. Cyr. 4, 3°). Οἱ Πελοποννήσιοι πλείοσι ναυσὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων
παρῆσαν = ἢ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, the Peloponnesians appeared with more ships than
the Athenians (Thue. 8, 52').
1343. Norr.—After comparatives, such dependent genitives as
ἐλπίδος, γνώμης, καιροῦ, Tod μετρίου, Tod δέοντος, and the like, must usually
be rendered by periphrasis.
Προσωτέρω τοῦ καιροῦ προϊόντες, advancing further than was advisable
(Xen. Anab. 4, 3"). Κρεῖττόν ἐστι τοῦ λύγου τὸ κάλλος τῆς γυναικός, the beauty
of the woman is greater than can be told = above description (Xen. Mem. 3, 11°).
Μεῖζον ἐλπίδος. above hope» Compare the Latin majus spe.
1344. Norr.—The comparative, usually with αὐτός, is followed by
the genitive of a reflexive pronoun (never 7) when anything is com-
pared with itself under different cirewmstanees.
᾿Ανδρειότερος γίγνεται αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ, he becomes more manly than he was
before (Plat. Rep. 411°). Similarly with the superlative, see 1357.
1345. Norr.—A comparative followed by ἢ κατά (sometimes ἢ πρός)
with an accusative denotes more than accords or is fitting to the maiter. -
Ἔτυχε σεμνοτέρᾶς ἢ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον ταφῆς, he obtained a burial more
magnificent than that of a mere man (Xen. Hell. 3, 8.). ᾿Ἐνδεεστέρως........ ἢ
πρὸς τὴν ἐξουσίαν, less than accorded with the resources (Thue, 4, 395). Compare
Latin quam pro.
1346. Nore.—After the adverbs πλέον or πλεῖν, more, and ἔλαττον
and μεῖον, less, 7 is sometimes omitted before a numeral without change
of case.
Πέμψω ὄρνεις πλεῖν ἑξακοσίους τὸν ἀριθμόν, I will send birds more than si.
hundred in number (Ar. Av. 1251). Instead of these adverbs, the corresponding
adjectives in the plural, with or without ἤ, or with the genitive are used.
᾿Αρκάδες καὶ ᾿Αχαιοὶ πλείους ἢ τετρακισχΐλιοι καὶ πεντακόσιοι, more than 4500
Arcadians and Achaeans (Xen. Anab, 6, 2"). "τη γεγονὼς πλείω ἑβδομήκοντα,
being more than seventy years old (Plat. Apol. 174). ‘Omdiras δὲ πεντακισχϊλίων
otk ἐλάσσοσιν, with no less than 5000 hoplites (Thuc. 6, 25%).
1347. Nors.—When two adjectives or adverbs are compared, ἤ is
| always used, and both are in the comparative.
Στρατηγοὶ πλείονες ἣ βελτίονες, generals more numerous than good (Ar, Ach.
1078). Συντομώτερον ἣ σαφέστερον περὶ αὐτῶν διαλεχθῆναι, to discourse more
briefly than clearly about them (Isoc. 6, 24).
36 THE ADJECTIVE 1348
1348. Norr.—In Homer and Herodotus sometimes,
in the Attic poets rarely, μᾶλλον is omitted (especially
with βούλομαι) before 7.
Βούλομ᾽ ἐγὼ λᾶὸν σόον ἔμμεναι ἢ ἀπολέσθαι, I wish the people
to be safe rather than perish (Il. 1, 117). Ἐμοὶ πικρὸς τέθνηκεν
ἢ κείνοις γλυκύς, his death has been more bitter to me than sweet
to them (Soph. Aj. 966); Hdt. 3, 124*; Eur. Andr. 350.
1349. Norr.—Instead of ἤ or the genitive, ἀντί or πρό with the
genitive, or παρά with the accusative, may be used with the compara-
tive.
Λυκοῦργος κατειργάσατο ἐν τῇ πόλει αἱρετώτερον εἶναι τὸν καλὸν θάνατον ἀντὶ
τοῦ αἰσχροῦ βίου, Lycurgus made a noble death more desirable in the state than
(lit. instead of) a base life (Xen. Rep. Lac. 9'). Μήτε παῖδας περὶ πλείονος
ποιοῦ μήτε TO ζῆν....... πρὸ τοῦ δικαίου, consider neither children nor life of more
account than (lit. before) justice (Plat. Crit. 54°). Χειμὼν μείζων mapa τὴν
καθεστηκυῖαν Spay, a cold more severe than (lit. in comparison with) the actual
season (Thue. 4, 6').
1350. Norze.—The second part of the comparison may be omitted.
Oi βελτίονες, the better (= those better than the others). “Ἀμεινόν ἐστι παντὶ
ὑπὸ θείου καὶ φρονίμου ἄρχεσθαι, it is better for every one to be governed by a
divine and intelligent being (Plat. Rep. 590°).—Note also νεώτερον (in poetry
also véov), something new, often in a bad sense, as in Plat. Prot. 310°;
alSo οὐ χεῖρον (Plat. Phaedo, 105*).
1351. Nore.—When the clause containing μᾶλλον is negative, ἢ οὐ
may follow in place of simple 7.
Οὐ περὶ τῶν ἐμῶν ἰδίων μᾶλλον τἴμωρήσεσθε Πολυκλέᾷ ἢ οὐχ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν
αὐτῶν, you will punish Polycles less for my private interests than for your own
good (Dem. 50, 66).
1352. Nore.—For μᾶλλον, we sometimes find πλέον (τι) and τὸ πλέον,
especially in Thucydides,
Mice: πλέον ἢ δίκῃ κρίναντες, having decided by hatred rather than by justice
(Thue. 3, 67°). Τοὺς νοῦν ἔχοντας πλέον τι τῶν ἄλλων περὶ πολλοῦ ποιοῦ,
esteem highly those who have judgment more than. other people (Isoc. 2, 53).
Δέει τὸ πλέον ἢ φιλίᾳ, by fear more than by friendship (Thue. 3, 12").
1353. Nore.—Our still with the comparative is ἔτι ; as ἔτι χαλεπώ-
repa, still more difficult (Plat. Polit. 298 ).—Much with the compara-
tive is πολύ Or πολλῷ ; aS πολὺ πλείους (Xen. Cyr. 5, 839); πολλῷ μεγίστους
(Hdt. 4, 82')—Other words qualifying the comparative are μακρῷ, ὀλίγῳ ;
.
4
!
d
ἱ
‘
1359 THE ADJECTIVE 37
πολλόν, old ani new Ion. ; μέγα, poetic ; πάντα, in all respects ; τι, some-
what ; οὐδέν (μηδέν), in no wise ; οὕτως, so much (late).
1354. ΝΟΤΕ.---Μᾶλλον is sometimes joined to the comparative.
Αἰσχυντηροτέρω μᾶλλον τοῦ δέοντος, more bashful than they ought to be
(Plat. Gorg. 4875). Similarly μάλιστα with the superlative, 1365.
1355. The superlative degree corresponds to the superlative in
English; as ὁ βέλτιστος πάντων τῶν πολιτῶν, the best of all the
citizens. Often it expresses a very high degree of the quality, it
then stands without the article; as ἀνὴρ φιλοτιμότατος, a very
(most) ambitious man.
1356. Norr.—The highest degree between two is expressed by the
comparative. Thus the Greek carefully distinguishes : πρότερος, former,
and πρῶτος, first ; ὕστερος, later, and ὕστατος, last ; ἑκάτερος, each of
two, and ἕκαστος, each.
Πότερος λέξει πρότερος ; which (of the two) is to speak first ? (Ar. Nub. 940).
1357. Norr.—The superlative, usually with αὐτός, is followed by a
genitive of the reflexive to denote that the subject possesses the quality
in a higher degree than ever.
Δεινότατος σαυτοῦ ταῦτα ἦσθα, you were at your best (lit. most skillful of
yourself) in those things (Xen. Mem. 1, 2"). Ἵνα αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ τυγχάνει Βέλτισ-
tos ὦν, where he is at his best (Eur. Frag. 183). See a similar use with com-
paratives 1344.
1358. Note.—The superlative may be strengthened by (παρὰ) πολύ,
much, also by πολλῷ, μακρῷ, by far.
Πολὺ κάλλιστος, much the handsomest (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3°). Πολλῷ κάλλιστος,
μακρῷ κάλλιστος, by far the handsomest.—Also by (ra) πάντα ; πολλόν, old and
new Ion. ; μέγα, poetic; πλεῖστον and μέγιστον, poetic.
1359. The superlative, strengthened by a prefixed ὡς or ὅτε,
less often ἡ, indicates the highest degree possible.
‘Qs βέλτιστος (Latin quam optimus), as good as possible. ‘Qs τάχιστα, as
quickly as possible (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6”). Ὅτι πλείστους, as many as possible
(Xen. Anab. 1, 15). “He ἄριστον καὶ ἥδιστον, as well and as agreeably as possible
(Xen. Cyr. 7, 5). Occasionally ὡς and ὅτι are used together ; as ὡς ὅτι βέλτισ-
tov ἐμὲ γενέσθαι, that I should become as good as possible (Plat. Symp. 3184).
If a preposition comes before the superlative, ὡς or ὅτι comes first; as ὡς μετὰ
πλείστων ἀγαθῶν, with as many good things as possible (Isoc. 3, 2); ὅτι ἐν
βραχυτάτῳ, in as short a time as possible (Thuc. 3, 46°).
38 THE ADJECTIVE 1360
1360. Nore.—The pronoun οἷος is similarly used.
Χωρίον οἷον κάλλιστον, a place as beautiful as possible (Xen. Anab. 7, 1™).
‘Op τὰ πράγματα οὐχ οἷα βέλτιστα ἐν τῇ πόλει ὄντα, I see that our affairs in the
city are not in the very best condition (Lys. 13, 23).
1361. Nore.—The poets sometimes use ὅσον and ὅπως ;
as ὅσον τάχιστα, as swiftly as possible (Kur. Rhes. 672) ;
ὅπως ἄριστα, as well as possible (Soph. Phil. 627).
1362. Norr.—Sometimes fuller expressions are formed with ὡς or
ἡ OF ὅσος, ὅπόσος, Seldom with ὅπῃ or érotos (never with ὅτι) and a verb
or expression of possibility.
Διηγήσομαι ὕμῖν ὡς ἂν δύνωμαι διὰ βραχυτάτων, I will discuss in
the briefest terms I am able (Isoc. 21,1). Επορεύοντο 7 ἐδύναντο τάχιστα,
they proceeded as fast as they were able (Xen. Anab 6, 3"). "Hye στρατιὰν
ὅσην πλείστην ἐδύνατο, he brought as large an army as he could (Thue.
7, 21"). “Hyayov....... ὁπόσους (συμμάχους) ἐγὼ πλείστους ἐδυνάμην,
I brought.......as many (allies) as I could (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5”). Ὑπισχνοῦνται
βοηθεῖν τρόπῳ ὁποίῳ ἂν δύνωνται ἰσχυροτάτῳ, they promise to help in
whatever strongest way they may be able (Thue. 5, 47°).
1363. Nore.—The numeral εἷς (usually in the expression εἷς ἀνήρ),
is sometimes used with the superlative for greater emphasis.
"Egjy Κύρῳ θησαυροὺς χρῦσοῦ πλείστους ἑνί ye dv δρὶ ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ κατα-
θέσθαι, to Cyrus it was possible to store wp in his house the most treasures of gold
of any one man (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2").
1364. Notr.—The expression ἐν τοῖς is sometimes prefixed to a
superlative ; it can usually be rendered by of all, by far.
Ἔν τοῖς πρῶτοι ᾿Αθηναῖοι, the Athenians first of all (Thue. 1, 6°). Ἔν τοῖς
πλεῖσται νῆες, by far most of the ships (Thuc. 3, 17). Ἔν τοῖς μάλιστα, most
of all (Plat. Crrito, 52%).
1365. Norr.—Occasionally μάλιστα (poetic also πλεῖστον or μέγιστονν)
is joined to the superlative.
Τῶν μάλιστα ἀνοητάτων, of the very stupidest (Plat. Tim. 92*). Similarly
μᾶλλον with the comparative, 1354.
1366. A strong superlative is obtained by adding the positive to the
superlative.
᾿Αγαθῶν ἱππέων κράτιστος ὦν ἱππεύς, being the best of good horsemen.
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 3"). A stronger form than this is obtained by doubling the
superlative, as ἐν τοῖς μεγίστοις μέγιστον, greatest among the greatest (Plat.
Cratyl. 427°). A less emphatic form is made by doubling the positive, as
ἄρρητ᾽ ἀρρήτων, horrible of the horrible (Soph. Θεά. Tyr. 465).
1369
THE ARTICLE
THE ARTICLE
I. THE ARTICLE IN POETRY AND THE
DIALECTS
1367. Originally the article was a demonstrative
pronoun. In Homer it is generally used as a demon-
strative or personal pronoun ; sometimes as a relative
pronoun (but for ὁ usually the relative ὅς, and for τοί
usually the relative οἵ).
ὋὉ yap βασιλῆϊ χολωθεὶς νοῦσον ἀνὰ στρατὸν ὦρσε, he in anger
at the king sent a plague upon the host (Il. 1, 9). Τὴν δ᾽ ἐγὼ
ob Adow, but I will not free her (Il. 1, 29). Τοῦ δ᾽ ἔκλυε
φοῖβος ᾿Απόλλων, and Phoebus Apollo heard him (Il. 1, 43).
"Hos ὁ τῷ πολέμιζε, while he fought with him (Il. 15, 539).—
As a relative pronoun: ἠπείλησεν μῦθον, ὁ δὴ τετελεσμένος
ἐστίν, he uttered a threat (lit. threatened a speech) which is now
accomplished (Il. 1, 388). Tevyea δ᾽ ἐξενάριξε, τὰ οἱ πόρε
χάλκεος *Apns, he seized the armour which brazen Mars had
given him (Il. 7, 146). ᾿Αέθλους πολλούς, τοὺς Φαίηκες
ἐπειρήσαντ᾽ ᾿Οδυσῆος, many contests at which the Phaeacians
tried Ulysses (Od. 8, 23). Πᾶσιν....... τοὶ Ἰλίῳ ἐγγεγάᾶσιν,
to all....... who are born in Ilium (Il. 6, 493).
1368. Norre.—With this use of the article compare
the uses of the German article der, die, das, which may
be employed as an emphatic demonstrative (its original
meaning); as “der mann’ =‘ that man”’; and as an
ordinary relative pronoun, as ‘‘ der mann den ich gesehen
habe,” ‘the man whom I saw’”’.
1369, In Homer the article used with a noun is
usually a demonstrative emphasizing it; in very
many cases the noun is an appositive to the article
(especially to ὁ δέ).
"Ἔδδεισεν δ᾽ ὁ γέρων, that old man became afraid (Π 1, 33).
Τὸν μῦθον ἐνισπήσω, I will relate the tale requested (Od. 5, 98).
Ὁ ξεῖνος, this stranger here (Od. 8, 388). Td σὸν μένος, this
your wrath (Il, 1, 207). Τὸν ἄριστον, him, the best (Il. 17,
80). ὋὉ δ᾽ ἔβραχε χάλκεος “Apns, and he, brazen Ares, roared
39
40
THE ARTICLE
(Il. 5, 859). ‘O δὲ ξύμβλητο γεραιός, but he, the aged man,
met them (Il. 14, 39).
1370. Norr.—The dative τῷ is equivalent to therefore
(so in a few places in Tragedy, as Aesch. Pro. 237 ; Soph.
Oed. Tyr. 510); sometimes to then.—The accusative τό
is sometimes used adverbially, wherefore, on which ac-
count ; aS τὸ καὶ κλαίουσα τέτηκα, therefore I pine away
weeping (Il. 3, 176).—See 1377.
1371. The article in Homer is, however, found in
a number of places used as the definite article proper
in Attic.
‘O γέρων, the old man (often). ‘O ξεῖνος, the stranger
(often). Οὐ μέν μοι δοκέεις ὁ κάκιστος ᾿Αχαιῶν ἔμμεναι, thou
dost not appear to me to be the worst of the Greeks (Od. 17, 415).
Oi πλέονες πατρὸς Kaxtous, the most are worse than their father
(Od. 2, 277). °Os ἤδη ra τ᾽ ἐόντα τὰ τ᾽ ἐσσόμενα, who knew
the things that are and those that are to be (Il. 1, 70). Ὃ vixn-
θείς, the vanquished (Il. 23, 663). Tods σούς, thine, i.e. thy
steeds (Il. 23, 572). Ta ἕκαστα, each of these things (Il. 11,
706). Oi ἄλλοι, the others (often). Tév ὄπιθεν, those left
behind (Od. 11, 66). Ta paxpdrara ἔγχεα, the longest spears
(Il. 14, 373). Ot ἔνερθε θεοί, the gods below (Il. 14, 274).
“H πΠρομάχοιο δάμαρ, the wife of Promachus (Il. 14, 503),
Andnv εἶδον, τὴν Tuvdapéov παράκοιτιν, I saw Leda the wife of
Tyndareus (Od. 11, 298). Maydove τῷ ᾿Ασκληπιάδῃ, Machaon
the son of Asclepius (Il. 11, 614). Ἐμὲ τὸν δύστηνον, me the
unhappy one (Od. 7, 223).
1372. Norr.—The transition to this ordinary use as
the definite article proper can be seen in some examples
in which the noun is in apposition to the article (1369) ;
also in cases where a pronominal dative is interposed
between the article and the noun.
Αὐτὰρ ὁ τοῖσι γέρων ὁδὸν ἡγεμόνευεν, but he, the old man,
showed them the way (Od. 24, 295).. Τὼ δὲ οἱ ὄσσε νὺξ ἐκάλυψε
μέλαινα, and black night covered his eyes (Il. 14, 438, 439).
1373. Note.—Commonly the article is omitted in
those cases where its ordinary ppplogment would be re-
quired in Attic.
1370
1377 THE ARTICLE 41
Πρόσθε δ᾽ ᾿Αλέξανδρος προΐει δολιχόσκιον ἔγχος, καὶ βάλεν
᾿Ατρεΐδᾶο κατ᾽ ἀσπίδα πάντοσ᾽ ἐΐσην, οὐδ᾽ ἔρρηξεν χαλκόν, ἀνε-
γνάμφθη δέ οἱ αἰχμὴ ἀσπίδι ἐν καρτερῇ, Alexander first threw
his long-shadowed spear against the shield of the son of Atreus,
equal on all sides, nor did it break the brass, for the point was
bent upon the strong shield (11. 3, 346—-349).
1374. Nore.—The use of the article with adjectives,
participles, pronouns, and adverbs, to form substantive
ideas (compare 1271) occurs alsoin Homer. The article
proper with the infinitive (as in 2230) does not occur
in Homer.
1375. Norr.—-The article has thus four uses in
Homer: as a personal pronoun, as a relative, as a de-
monstrative, and as the definite article proper. Of these,
the last-named is the least common, and often cannot
be distinguished exactly from its use as a demonstrative.
1376. 1. The lyric poets generally use the article as
it is used in Homer. The Attic tragic poets sometimes
use the article as a demonstrative or relative, especially
in the lyric parts.
2. Herodotus uses the article generally as it is found
in Attic prose. Of the relative he uses the forms ὅς, 7,
oi, af; for the other forms all beginning with 7, he uses
the article (τό, τοῦ, τῆς, τῷ, etc.).
Tov χῶρον τὸν καὶ νῦν οἰκέουσι, the place which also now
inhabit (Hdt. 1, 15. But he uses the other relative forms
after an elided preposition, as ἀπ᾿ ὧν, δι᾿ οὗ; and in certain
conjunctional expressions, as ἐν ᾧ, while, és 6 (ἕως οὗ, ἄχρι οὗ,
μέχρι ob), until, till, ἐξ ob, since.
3. In Doric and Aeolic the r- forms of the article
are sometimes found as relatives.
Il, THE ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK
(A) Use as Pronoun oR DEMONSTRATIVE
1377. In Attic prose, the pronominal use of the article is re-
tained in the following combinations :—
42, ; THE ARTICLE 1878
1. Ὃ μέν...ὁ δέ (in all cases and numbers), the one...the
other. |
Oi μὲν αὐτῶν ἐτόξευον, of δ᾽ ἐσφενδόνων, some of them shot with bows, and
others used slings (Xen. Anab. 3, 3’). Τῶν πόλεων ai μὲν τυραννοῦνται, ai δὲ
δημοκρατοῦνται, ai δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται, some of the states are ruled by tyrants,
others by democracies, and others by aristocracies (Plat. Rep. 338°).
2. ὋὉ δέ, ἡ δέ, τὸ δέ (in all cases and numbers), and he, but he, ete.
Κῦρος δίδωσι Κλεάρχῳ μῦρίους δᾶρεικούς" ὁ δὲ λαβὼν τὸ χρῦσίον στράτευμα
συνέλεξεν, Cyrus gave Clearchus 10,000 darics, and he (Clearchus) collected an
army with the money (Xen. Anab. 1, 1°). “Ivdpas... AOnvaious ἐπηγάγετο"
οἱ δ᾽ ἦλθον, Inaros called in Athenians ; and they came (Thue. 1, 104").
3. Καὶ τόν, καὶ τήν, as accusative subject of the infinitive.
Kai τὸν ἀποκρίνασθαι λέγεται, and it is said that he answered (Xen. Cyr.
4, 2"). Καὶ τὸν κελεῦσαι δοῦναι (sc. λέγεται), and (it is said) he commanded him
to give it (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3”).
_ 4. Tov καὶ τόν, this man and that; τὸ καὶ τό, this and that; τὰ
καὶ τά, these and those ; τὰ ἢ τά, these or those.
᾿Αφικνοῦμαι ὡς τὸν καὶ τόν, 1 come to this man and that one (Lys. 1, 23).
"Ἔδει yap τὸ καὶ τὸ ποιῆσαι, καὶ τὸ μὴ ποιῆσαι, for we ought to have done this and
that, and not to have done the other (Dem. 9, 68). Ta καὶ ra πεπονθώς (Dem.
21, 141).
5. Adverbially: τὸ μέν...τὸ δέ or τὰ μέν...τὰ δέ, partly...
partly (Plat. Symp. 211*; Xen. Anab. 5, 653); similarly τοῦτο μέν
οὐὐτοῦτο δέ (1475). :
So also: τῇ μέν....... τῇ δέ, here....... there, on the one hamnd....... on.
the other hand, partly.......partly (Plat. Leg. 839°; Xen. Anab. 4, 8!).—
Πρὸ τοῦ or προτοῦ, before this, formerly (Plat. Symp. 173"; Ar. Nub. 4).—
To, therefore (Plat. Theaet. 179°), very rare in prose (see 1370).
1378. Nore.—With prepositions, the expressions under 1377, 1
and 2 are usually inverted.
Ἔν μὲν τοῖς συμφωνοῦμεν, ἐν δὲ τοῖς οὔ, in some things we agree, in others
not (Plat. Phaedr. 263").
1379. Norr.—If ὁ pév.......6 δέ refer to no particular person, tis
may be added to make the expression more indefinite.
Ἔλεγον τοῦ Κύρου ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίᾶν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερΐαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν πρᾳότητα,
ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος, they were speaking, one of Cyrus’ wisdom, another of his
fortitude, another of his mildness, yet another of his beauty (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1”).
1380\Nére.—Rargly the article alone is used pron
a relative.
’Opéyerdi Tod 6 ἐστι ἴσον, he aims at that αὖ
1389 THE ARTICLE ; 43
1381. Norre.—Sometimes the singular of 6 μέν... ὁ δέ means one
part...the other part.
‘H ἄλλη στρατιὰ δίχα ἡ μὲν πρὸς τὴν πόλιν ἐχώρουν, ἡ ὃ ἐ πρὸς τὸ σταύ-
popa, the rest of the army advanced in two divisions, one part towards the city,
the other towards the stockade (Thue. 6, 100°).
1382. ΝΟΤΕ.---Τὸ δέ, without a preceding τὸ μέν, is sometimes used
adverbially to introduce an opposing statement, especially in Plato.
Οἴονταί pe σοφὸν εἶναι" τὸ δὲ κινδύνεύει τῷ ὄντι ὁ θεὸς σοφὸς εἶναι, they
think I am wise ; but in truth God only is wise (Plat. Apol. 23*).
1383. Norz.—O μέν is occasionally found without 6 δέ following,
as in Hdt. 1, 59}. ᾽
1384. Norr.—Often (6) μέν is wanting and ὁ δέ follows.
Avo λέγω εἴδη κινήσεως, ἀλλοίωσιν, τὴν δὲ περιφοράν, I say there are two
kinds of motion, ‘‘ change” and ‘‘ motion in place” (Plat. Theaet. 181°).
1385. Norr.—Instead of ὃ with μέν or δέ, some other word may
take its place.
Γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, a husbandman for one, then a house-
builder (Plat. Rep. 369°).
1386. Norr.—The forms ὃ, ἡ, oi, ai, when used pronommally (as:
above and in Homer) ought to be accented (6, 7, οἵ, ai); but this is.
generally not done.
1387. Nore.—For τό in expressions like τὸ πάντων θαυμαστότατον,
τὸ πάντων μέγιστον, see 1520,
1388. Nore.—For the relative ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ used in the oblique
cases like 6 piv.......6 δέ, see 1509; also for ὃς καὶ ὃς in Hdt.
(B) Use Aas ARTICLE PROPER
1389. 1. The Greek article ordinarily corresponds to the Eng-
lish definite article.
‘O ἀνήρ, the man. Τῶν γυναικῶν, of the women. Ταῖς πόλεσιν, to the
2. The article may be used in a generic sense, marking a singu-
lar noun as representative, or a plural noun as the totality, of a
class. Adjectives and participles are particularly used in this
way. The generic article must often be left untranslated.
‘O ἄνθρωπος, man. Οἱ γέροντες, the aged. ‘O σοφός, a wise man, Οἱ
44 THE ARTICLE 1390
ἀγαθοὶ ἄνθρωποι, good men. Οἱ ἀνδρεῖοι, the brave. Ὃ βουλόμενος, any one
who wishes.
1390. Norr.—At the beginning of a clause, the article is some-
times separated from its noun by μέν, δέ, τέ, γέ, γάρ, δή, οὖν ; and by
τὶς in Hdt.
Τῶν ris Περσέων, one of the Persians (Hdt. 1, 854),
1391. Norz.—Sometimes the article is found alone, its noun being
omitted through change of construction (anacoluthon) or by a sudden
or strong emotion.
Ἢ τῶν ἄλλων “EXgov ——, εἴτε χρὴ κακίᾶν εἴτε ἄγνοιαν...εἰπεῖν,
the ——, whether one should say cowardice or folly of the rest of the Greeks
(Dem. 18, 20). Ma rdv ——, οὐ σύ ye, not you, by ——, the name of the god
being omitted (Plat. Gorg. 466°).
1392. Norz.—For the use of the article in place of an unemphatic
possessive pronoun, see 1454.
1393. Norr.—Our English indefinite article a has no equivalent
and is not expressed in Greek; when it means a certain, it can be
rendered by ris, ri.
Ὁρῶ ἄνδρα, I see a man. But ὁρῶ ἄνδρα τινά, I see a certain man, or
simply J see a man.
(c) Use or ARTICLE IN ForRMING SUBSTANTIVES
1394. The article often unites with other parts of speech to
form substantives (1270—1301).
1. With adjectives and participles (1271). οἱ πλούσιοι, the rich. Οἱ
παρόντες, those present.
2. With possessive pronouns (1274). Οἱ coi, your people. Ta
ἡμέτερα, Our possessions, affairs.
3. With genitives (1273). Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὁλόρου, Thucydides the (son)
of Olorus. Κλέαρχος καὶ of ἐκείνου, Clearchus and his men. Eis τὴν ἑαυτῶν
(sc. ynv), into their own country.
4. With local datives (1271). Of Μαραθῶνι καὶ Σαλαμῖνι, those (who
Sought) at Marathon and Salamis.
5. With adverbs (1271). Οἱ viv, the people of to-day (lit. the now
people). Oi τότε, those of that time. Οἱ ἐκεῖ, the people over there. Ta οἴκοι.
affairs, things at home. ἫἪ αὔριον, the morrow. -
1396 THE ARTICLE . 45.
6. With prepositions and their cases (1271, 1272). Οἱ ἐν τῷ ἄστει,
those in the city. Ta πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον, the things (needful) for the war. Οἱ
ἐπὶ τῷ δεξιῷ κέραι, those on the-right wing.
7. The infinitive which is a verbal noun (2185) very often has the:
neuter article. Τὸ βαδίζειν, walking. To εἰδέναι, the knowing.
8. The neuter τό is prefixed to any word or part of speech con-
sidered merely as an expression. Td λέγει, the word “λέγει. Τὸ
ἄνθρωπος, the word “ἄνθρωπος. Td Ἕλλας, the word ‘‘’FA\as”.
_ Similarly with a whole sentence, as τὸ γνῶθι σαυτόν, the saying ‘‘know
thyself”.
1395. Norr.—For the great variety of meanings of the neuter
article with an attribute, see 1281—13401.
(D) INSERTION AND OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE
1396. The article is inserted in the following cases :—
1. Generally with names of countries, as these are adjectives by
Ἢ Ἑλλάς, Greece. ‘H ᾿Αττική, Attica. Also names of nations; as οἱ
Ἕλληνες, the Greeks.
2. With a cardinal number :—
(a) When it denotes a part or fraction of some number.
Τῶν πέντε τὰς δύο poipas, two-fifths, lit. the two parts of the five (Thuc..
1, 10%).
(6) With an approximate or round number, especially after ἀμφί,
περί, εἰς, ὑπέρ.
"Ἔμειναν ἡμέρας ἀμφὶ τὰς τριάκοντα, they remained about thirty days (Xen.
παν. 4, 8"). Tddavra πλείω τ ν τρισχιλίων, more than three thousand talents
(Xen. Cyr. 3, 1).
(c) When it denotes a number in the abstract.
Ta dis πέντε δέκα ἐστίν, twice five is ten (Xen. Mem. 4, 47).
3. Often with proper names if the person is already well-known or
mentioned, so also with things.
Ὁ Σωκράτης (the famous, well-known) Socrates. Οἱ Τρῶες ra δέκα ἔτη
ἀντεῖχον, the Trojans held out the ten years, i.e., the well-known ten years of the
siege (Thue. 1, 11°). Compare the Latin ille Socrates.
4. To denote a thing as particular, proper, or customary under the
circumstances.
Kpive: φίλους 6 καιρὸς ὡς χρῦσὸν τὸ πῦρ, the (particular) occasion tests friends
46 THE ARTICLE 1397
as fire does gold (Men. Mon. 276). Οἱ πλούσιοι τοῖς χρήμασιν ἐξωνοῦνται
τοὺς κινδύνους, the rich buy off dangers for money (Lys. 24, 17).
5. With appositions, especially if the apposition distinguishes the
person from another of the same name.
Σειληνὸς ὁ μάντις, Silanus the seer (i.e. no other Silanus) ; but Σειληνὸς μάντις,
Silanus, ὦ seer.
6. An apposition to the personal pronoun of the first or second
person has the article, if the same apposition would retain it as a third
person. /
Ἡμεῖς of στρατηγοὶ ἠχθόμεθα τοῖς γεγενημένοις, we generals are vexed at the
occurrences (Xen. Anab. 5, 7”).
7. When it has distributive force, where we use each or a.
Τρία ἡμιδάρεικα τοῦ μηνὸς τῷ στρατιώτῃ, three half-darics a month to each
soldier (Xen. ἅπαν. 1, 3”).
8. A noun with a possessive pronoun or a dependent possessive
genitive of a personal, demonstrative, reflexive, relative, or interrogative
pronoun, takes the article if it refers to a definite person or thing.
‘O σὸς μαθητής or ὁ μαθητής cov, your pupil; but ods μηθητής or μαθητής
σου, a pupil of yours. Ta τούτου. χρήματα, this man’s money. ‘O ἐμαυτοῦ
πατήρ, my own father; but παῖς ἑαυτοῦ, a child of his own. Tivos ἑὠρᾶκας
τοὺς μαθητάς ; whose scholars have you seen? Δία, ἐν ob τῷ ἱερῷ, Zeus, in whose
temple.
9. A noun qualitied by a demonstrative takes the article.
Οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ, this man. See 1479—1483.
1397. Norr.—Observe: πολλοί, many, οἱ πολλοί, the many, the
great mass ; ὀλίγοι, few, οἱ ὀλίγοι, the few, the minority, the oligarchs ;
οἱ πλείονες, the majority ; πλεῖστοι, the most numerous part; ἄλλοι,
others ; οἱ ἄλλοι, the others, the rest ; τὸ πολύ, the great part.
1398. Norze.—Names of nations denoting the people or state as a
whole often omit the article; as in Thue, 1, 144?.
1399. ΝΟΤΕ.---(α) Occasionally the article is prefixed to an inter-
rogative pronoun when the pronoun refers to an object before mentioned
or understood.
Tpvyaios. πάσχει δὲ θαυμαστόν. “Epyns. τὸ ri; T. A strange thing is
happening to him. H. (The what) what is it? (Ar. Pax, 696). 3. Νῦν δὴ
ἐκεῖνα ἤδη, ὦ Φαῖδρε, δυνάμεθα κρίνειν. Φ. Ta ποῖα; Soc. Now then,
Phaedrus, we can decide about that conclusion. Ph. About what conelusion ?
(Plat. Phaedr. 277°).
.
401 THE ARTICLE 47
(δ) So also before a personal or reflexive pronoun, especially in Plato.
Tov σὲ καὶ ἐμέ, (Plat. Phil. 59°). Δεῦρο δὴ εὐθὺ ἡμῶν. παρὰ τίνας τοὺς
ὑμᾶς; A. Come hither straight tous. B. (To the you being whom) who are
you that I must come to? (Plat. Lys. 203°). Τὸν ἑαυτόν (the himself) his great
self (Plat. Phaedr. 258").
(c) Similarly with a pronoun of quality or quantity, and even with
one already combined with the article.
Τὴν τηλικαύτην ἀρχήν, such an important office (Plat. Leg. 755"). To
τοιοῦτον ὄναρ, such a dream as this (Xen. Anab. 3, 1.5). Τό τε Oérepov καὶ τὸ
ταὐτόν. the other and the same (Plat. Tim. 44°).
1400. Nors.—In Attic poetry the article is often omitted
where it would be necessary in prose, especially with
demonstratives.
Θύματος ἐπιστάτης ἐπέστη τοῦδε παῖς ᾿Αχιλλέως, the son of
Achilles has advanced to be leader of the sacrifice (Eur. Hec. 224).
Keira κόνει φύρουσα δύστηνον Kapa, she lies defiling her ill-fated
head with the dust (Eur. Hec. 496). Μίασμα τοῦτο, this stain
(Soph. Ant. 1042). ‘O γεννήτωρ ἐμός for ὁ γεννήτωρ ὁ ἐμός,
my father (Eur. Hipp. 683).
1401. The article is omitted in the following cases:
1. Abstract nouns—especially names of virtues, qualities, arts,
sciences, occupations, and materials—generally omit the article.
᾿Αρετή, virtue. ‘Pnropixn, rhetoric. Χρῦσός, gold. But the article must
be used if the noun refers to a particular person ; as ἡ Σωκράτους ἀρετή, the
virtue of Socrates.
2. In many familiar designations of time and place, which probably
arose before 6 became the article.
“Hyépas, by day. Νυκτός, by night. "Ap ἕῳ, at dawn. “Ap ἡλίῳ ἀν-
ἔσχοντι, at sunrise. “Ad? ἑσπέρᾶς, in the evening. Méoa νύκτες, midnight.
"Ev δεξιᾷ, at the right. "Ev ἀγορᾷ, in the market-place. Kar ἀγρόν, in the
country. Kara γῆν, by land. Κατὰ θάλασσαν, by sea. “Emi δόρυ ἀναστρέφε-
σθαι, to wheel to the right (lit. spear). Tap’ ἀσπίδα ἄγειν, to lead to the left (lit.
shield). Also ἀκρόπολις, citadel, τεῖχος, wall, ὄρθρος, daybreak, δείλη, after-
noon, éap, spring, and others. See also 1401, 5.
3. The article is frequently omitted in specifications of dimension,
number, name, origin, and the like, whether they are accusatives of
specification (1595) or datives of similar meaning (1812).
Ποταμὸς, Κύδνος ὄνομα, εὖρος δύο πλέθρων, a river, Cydnus by name, of the
breadth of two plethra (Xen. ἅπαν. 1, 2”). Πλῆθος ὡς δισχίλιοι, about two
thousand in number (Xen. Anab. 4, 2"), Oi φύσει ἀσθενέστατοι, those weakest
48 THE ARTICLE 1402
by natwre (Xen. Mem. 1, 67). Γένει προσήκων βασιλεῖ, a relation by birth to
the king (Xen. Anab. 1, 6°).
4, Βασιλεύς, designating the king of Persia, is usually without the
article ; similarly, μέγας βασιλεύς, the great king ; πρυτάνεις, the prytanes,
often omits the article.
5. Frequently with ordinals and superlatives.
Καὶ τρίτον ἔτος τῷ πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα, and the third year of the war ended
(Thue. 2, 103"). is Ἰσσοὺς, τῆς Κιλικίᾶς ἐσχάτην πόλιν, to Issi, the last city
of Cilicia (Xen. Anab. 1, 4°).
6. The article is sometimes omitted before οὐρανός, sky, γῆ, earth,
ἥλιος, sun ; also θάλασσα when it means the sea in a general sense.
Similarly the article may be omitted before names of family relationship.
when one’s own relations are meant, before πατρίς, native country,
πόλις, native city, ἄστυ, town.
᾿Εἰπετρέψατε αὐτῷ πατρίδα καὶ παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας, you committed to him
your country, your children and your wives (Lys. 12, 69). Eis ἄστυ καταβαίνειν,
. to go to town. Note also ἐκ παίδός or ἐκ παίδων, from boyhood ; and θεός, the
divinity, but ὁ θεός, the (particular) God.
7. Names of festivals are usually without the article.
Ania ἐκείνου τοῦ μηνὸς ἦν, the Delian festival was in that month (Xen.
Mem. 4, 87).
8. A predicate-noun or adjective stands without the article. (For
exception, see 1403.)
Ἔκμπόριον δ᾽ ἦν τὸ χωρίον, the place was an emporiwm (Xen. Anab. 1, 45).
Ἔφη τὴν yewpyiav τῶν ἄλλων τεχνῶν μητέρα καὶ τροφὸν εἶναι, he said that agri-
culture is the mother and the nurse of the other arts (Xen. Occ. 5, 17).
1402. Norr.—Observe that possessive pronouns, comparatives
and superlatives, and ordinal numbers omit the article when they are
predicate.
Χαιρεφῶν ἐμὸς ἑταῖρος ἦν, Chaerephon was my friend (Plat. Apol. 215).
For 6 αὐτός, see 1423, 2.
1403. Norre.—When the predicate refers to a particular individual
or a class, it has the article.
᾿Ανεκάλουν Κῦρον τὸν εὐεργέτην, τὸν ἄνδρα τὸν ἀγαθόν, they called Cyrus the
(real, true) benefactor, the (really, truly) good man (Xen. Cyr. 8, 83). Eioi δ᾽
οὗτοι οἱ εἰδότες τἀληθές, and are these those (whom I mean) who know the truth ?
(Plat. Hipp. Maj. 284°).
1404. Norr.—So also the predicate participle takes the article
when it denotes the same particular individual as the subject.
"Eye εἰμι ὁ ὑμᾶς σώζων, I am your preserver (Xen. Mem. 2, 7").
1406 THE ARTICLE 49
1405. Norze.—When two or more substantives are connected by
and, and the first has the article, it may be omitted with the others.
Tods δ᾽ ἀγροὺς τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ καὶ oikias, his own lands and houses (Thuc. 2,
13°).
(ΕἸ Position oF ATTRIBUTES AND PREDICATE-ADJECTIVES
RELATING TO NOUNS WHICH HAVE THE ARTICLE
1406. 1. An attributive adjective qualifying a noun with the
article usually stands between the article and the noun, as in
English ; or it stands with greater emphasis after the noun with
the article repeated. In the latter case, the first article is some-
times omitted. Thus: ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ, or ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἀγαθός, or ἀνὴρ
ὁ ἀγαθός, the good man. These three positions of the article are
termed attributive positions.
Τὸ θῆλυ γένος, the female sex (Plat. Leg. 805°). Τοὺς κύνας rods χαλεπούς,
savage dogs (Xen. Anab. 5, 83). ᾿Ανθρώποις τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς (Xen. Mem. 2, 1533).
2. The same rule applies to all attributes (1207, 1265), to the
possessive pronoun, and to dependent genitives of pronouns
(except of personal pronouns).
Οἱ παρόντες πολῖται or οἱ πολῖται οἱ παρόντες, the present citizens. ‘H rod
πατρὸς oikia or ἡ οἰκίᾳ ἡ τοῦ πατρός, the father’s house. Ἢ ἄνω πόλις or ἡ πόλις
ἡ ἄνω, the upper city. Ἢ ἐν Μαραθῶνι μάχη or ἡ μάχη ἡ ἐν Μαραθῶνι, the battle
of Marathon. Ἢ τοῦ πατρὸς οἰκίᾷ or ἡ οἰκία ἡ τοῦ πατρός, the father’s house.
Ὁ ἐμὸς πατήρ or ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐμός, my father. Ἢ ἐμαυτοῦ μήτηρ or ἡ μήτηρ ἡ
ἐμαυτοῦ, my own mother. Ta τούτου χρήματα or τὰ χρήματα τὰ τούτου, this man’s
money. ἫἪ ὀνομαζομένη ἀνδρεία, the so-called bravery (Plat. Phaedo, 68°). 'Ῥοῖς
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγοῖς, with the generals of the Athenians (Thuc. 4, 132"),
‘H τοῦ ὑπὲρ τῶν ᾿Ηλείων ὄρους κορυφή, the summit of the hill which is over the
Eleians (Xen. Hell. 7, 4%). Τὸ ὁπλιτικὸν τό ye τῶν “Ἑλλήνων, the heavy-armed
troops of the Greeks (Plat. Lach. 191°). Tas ὠφελείας ras ἐκ τῆς orpareias τῆς
ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνον ἐσομέν ἃς, the advantages which will arise from the campaign against
him (Isoc. 4, 15). Τὸ τῷ ὄντι ψεῦδος, the real falsehood (Plat. Rep. 382°). Ἔν
τῷ ᾿Ελευσῖνι ἱερῷ, in the temple at Eleusis (Lys. 6, 4). Ἔν τῇ ἀναβάσει τῇ μετὰ
Κύρου, in the expedition with Cyrus (Xen. Anab, 5, 1"). Oi Χῖοι τὸ τεῖχος περιεῖλον
τὸ καινόν, the Chians throw down their new wall (Thue. 4, 51). Ἔν τῷ
πρόσθεν λόγῳ, in the previous narrative (Xen. Anab. 5, 1’). Τοῦ τότε βασιλέως,
of the then king (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6°). Τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ, the homeward route (Xen.
Anab. 3, 1%). Τοῦ ἐν Δελφοῖς χρηστηρίου, of the oracle in Delphi (Xen, Cyr.
7, 2"). ᾿Απὸ θαλάσσης τῆς Ἰώνων, from the Tonic sea (Hat. 5, 50'), "Eni
σκηνὴν ἰόντες τὴν Ξενοφῶντος, going " Xenophon tent (Xen. Anab, 6, 4”).
50 THE ARTICLE 1407
Ἡ ἐκείνων ὕβρις καὶ ἡ ἡμετέρα ὑποψία, their insolence and our suspicion (Xen.
Anab. 3,1). Tov βίον τὸν ἐμαυτοῦ, my own life (Plat. Gorg. 4885).
1407. Norr.—Several articles may thus stand together.
Ta τῆς τῶν πολλῶν Ψῦχῆς ὄμματα, the eyes of the soul of the many (Plat.
Soph. 254"). Insertion of a genitive is avoided (except occasionally in later
writers) if similar forms of the article would thus meet; thus, not περὶ τοῦ
τοῦ βίου τέλους, but περὶ rod τέλους τοῦ βίου, concerning the end of life.
1408. Norr.—The attributive genitive of a noun (but not the
partitive genitive) may have either the attributive or (less often) the
predicate position (1415).
Ἡ τοῦ πατρὸς oikia or ἡ οἰκίᾷ ἡ τοῦ πατρός, and ἡ οἰκίᾷ τοῦ πατρός or τοῦ
πατρὸς ἡ οἰκία, the father’s house. Ti τῶν βαρβάρων φιλίαν, the friendship of
the barbarians (Xen. Anab. 1, 3°) Τὴν θυγατέρα τὴν βασιλέως, the king's
daughter (Xen, ἅπαν. 2, 4°), “Emi σκηνὴν ἰόντες τὴν Ξενοφῶντος, going to the
tent of Xenophon (Xen. Anab. 6, 4).—Tod κύκλου ἡ περίοδος, the length of the
circle (Xen. Anab. 3, 4"). TH τελευτῇ τοῦ βίου, at the end of life (Xen. Anab.
1,9). Thy ye ὀρθότητα τῆς βουλήσεως, the righteousness of the purpose (Plat. —
Leg. 668°), Διὰ τὸν ὄλεθρον τῶν συστρατιωτῶν, by the death of their fellow-
soldiers (Xen. Anab. 1, 2). Sometimes the attributive genitive in predicate
position is rather partitive in meaning.
1409. Norr.—Occasionally a relative or temporal clause is inserted
as an attribute.
Τῆς ofa παρ᾽ ἡμῖν ἐστι πολϊτείᾶς, of such a state as there is among us (Dem.
19, 186). Οἱ οἷοίπερ ὑμεῖς ἄνδρες, men such as you (Xen. Cyr. 6, 2%). Ths
ὅπου βούλεσθε ὀλιγαρχίᾶς, of an oligarchy wherever you please (Dem. 22, 52;
24, 163).
1410. Norr.—1. The partitive genitive (1619, 6) of a noun is not an
attribute, and therefore does not have attributive position ; it takes
the predicate position (1415).
Τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων of yepairara (commonly) or of γεραίτατοι τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, the
oldest of the Athenians. Tév ᾿Αθηναίων ὁ δῆμος or ὁ δῆμος τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, the
common people of the Athenians (i.e., in distinction to the upper classes).
But ὁ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων δῆμος or ὁ δῆμος ὁ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, the Athenian people,
the Athenian state. So ἡ Σωκράτους φιλοσοφία or ἡ φιλοσοφία ἡ Σωκράτους, the
philosophy of Socrates = the Socratic philosophy, i.e., no other philosophy ; but
ἡ φιλοσοφία Σωκράτους or Σωκράτους ἡ φιλοσοφία, the philosophy of Socrates,
i.e., nothing else of him, the genitive being here partitive.
2. Yet the partitive genitive is occasionally found in attributive
position.
1412 THE ARTICLE 51
᾿ς οῖς ἐνθάδε ὃμ ὦ ν ἀδικουμένοις, to those of you here who were being injured
(Thue. 6, 877). To δ᾽ αὐτῶν μέγιστον, the great part of it, i.e., of the palace
(Hat. 1, 982. Tots Ἑλλήνων πλουσιωτάτοις, to the richest of the Greeks (Thue.
1, 25*).
1411. Νοτε.---Ἰ. When a noun with the article is qualified by two
or more words which have attributive position, they may all stand
between the article and its noun, or each may take an article and
stand in attributive position.
"Ἑπεμπον eis τὰς ἄλλᾶς ᾿Αρκαδικὰς πόλεις, they sent to the other Arcadian
cities (Xen. Hell. 7, 4%). Ἔν τῇ ἀρχαίᾳ τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ φωνῇ, in our old dialect
(Plat. Cratyl. 398°). Tov ἄλλον τὸν ἐμὸν βίον γιγνώσκειν, to know my other
life (Lys. 24, 5). Ta τείχη ra ἑαυτῶν τὰ μακρὰ, their own long walls (Thuc.
1, 1085). ‘O τόκος ὁ ἔγγειος ὁ ἔφεκτός, the interest on the land at the rate of
one-sixth of the principal (Dem. 34, 24). Φύσις ἡ ἀνθρωπίνη ἡ θήλεια, the
human female character (Plat. Rep. 452°). Eis τὸ μέγα πλοῖον τὸ Φοινϊκικόν,
into the large Phoenician ship (Xen. Oec. 8, 11). Τῆς ἐν Σαλαμῖνι πρὸς τὸν
Πέρσην ναυμαχίᾶς μεμνῆσθαι, to remember the naval battle at Salamis against
the Persian (Aeschin. 2, 74).
2. Occasionally one qualifying expression stands between the
article and the noun, while another follows the noun without the
article.
Tov αὑτοῦ ἔδωκεν ἀγρὸν “EXevoive, he gave his own land at Eleusis (Isae.
11, 41). Οἱ ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασίᾳ πόλεων “Ἑλληνίδων, those (coming) from the
Greek cities in Asia (Xen. Hell. 4, 3”). Μιμούμενοι τὴν ἐμὴν δύναμιν περὶ
τὴν ὑμετέρᾶν γένεσιν, imitating my power in your creation (Plat. Tim.
41°). ‘H viv ὑμετέρα ὀργὴ és Μυτιληναίους, your present anger against the
Mytilenaeans (Thuc. 3, 44’). Tis τῶν γυναικῶν φιλίας πρὸς τοὺς ἄνδρας, the
love of wives to their husbands (Xen. Hier. 3, 3).
1412. Nore.—1, With nouns denoting an action or condition, an
attribute consisting of a preposition and its case sometimes follows
the noun without repeating the article.
Ἡ ξυγκομιδὴ ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν ἐς τὸ ἄστυ, the gathering from the country into
the city (Thue. 2, 52").
2. Words qualifying a participle or adjective are often not inserted
between the article and these words, but are made to precede the
article ; this occurs generally for emphasis, but sometimes from
negligent construction.
Πλείους ἔσονται ὕ μἃ ς οἱ ἐλέγχοντες, there will be more accusers of you (Plat.
Apol, 39°). Πληρώσαντας ἔτι ras λοιπὰς τῶν νεῶν, manning their still remaining
ships (Thuc. 7, 72°).
δῶ THE ARTICLE 1413
1413. Norn.—l. When an attributive participle with words de-
pending on it qualifies a noun with the article, either the dependent
words or the participle may follow the noun.
‘O κατειληφὼς xivdivos τὴν πόλιν, the danger which has overtaken the
city (Dem. 18, 220). Tov ῥέοντα ποταμὸν δια τῆς πόλεως, the river which rums
through the city (Xen. Hell. 5, 2*). Αἱ ὑπὸ τούτου βλασφημίαι εἰρημέναι,
the slanders uttered by this man (Dem. 18, 126).
2. A predicate-noun connected with an attributive participle gen-
erally precedes it.
Td Κοτύλαιον ὀνομαζόμενον ὄρος, the mountain called Cotylaewm
(Aeschin. 3, 86). ;
1414. Norr.—For the position of article with possessive pronouns,
see also 1396, 8; and 1455, 1457 ; with the possessive genitive of per-
sonal, reflexive, and demonstrative pronouns, see 1455, 1460, 1468.
1415. An adjective which either precedes or follows the article
with its noun is always a predicate-adjective (see 1208 and 1314).
Ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός or ἀγαθὸς ὁ ἀνήρ (sc. ἐστιν), the man is good or good is the
man. Μεγάλῃ τῇ φωνῇ, with loud voice (Xen. Hell. 2, 3%). Ἱδροῦντι τῷ
ἵππῳ, with his horse sweating (Xen. Anab. 1, 8’). “Hyovpevor αὐτονόμων τῶν
ξυμμάχων, being leaders of allies who were independent (Thuc. 1, 97'). For
other examples, see 1310, 1514, 1316; compare also 1317—1321.
1416. 1. The adjectives ἄκρος, μέσος and ἔσχατος, when in predi-
cate position, mean the top or point, the middle, and the last or end of
the noun they qualify.
Td ὄρος ἄκρον or ἄκρον τὸ ὄρος, the top or point of the hill. Ἢ yelp ἄκρᾶ
or ἄκρᾶᾷ ἡ χείρ, the point of the hand ;—but τὸ ἄκρον ὄρος, the high hill (there
being others). ‘H νῆσος μέση or μέση ἡ νῆσος, the middle of the island ;—but
ἡ μέση νῆσος, the middle island (between other islands). Τὸ ὄρος ἔσχατον or
ἔσχατον τὸ ὄρος, the end of the mountain ;—but τὸ ἔσχατον ὄρος, the last
mountain (Thuc. 3, 107*); Xen. Ven. 3, 4; Dem. 29, 12; Hdt. 5, 101;
Xen. 1, 8"; Plat. Phaedo, 1094; Thuc. 4, 35'. Compare the Latin
summus, medius, extremus.
2. Πᾶς (strengthened also ἅπᾶς σύμπας), all, usually has the pre-
dicate position. |
Πᾶσα ἡ πόλις, all the city; πᾶσαι ai πόλεις, all the cities. —When it means
all together or the swm total, it takes the attributive position; as ai πᾶσαι
πόλεις, the cities all together; τὸ πᾶν πλῆθος, the collective mass; 6 πᾶς
ἀριθμός, the sum total; οἱ πάντες ἄνθρωποι, all mankind (Xen. Anab. 5, 67) ;
but πάντες ἄνθρωποι = everything belonging to the species ‘‘man,” all men,
1418 PRONOUNS 53
(Lys. 12, 60).—‘O πᾶς or οἱ πάντες with a numeral means in all ; as τριήρεσι
μὲν ταῖς πάσαις τέσσαρσι καὶ τριάκοντα καὶ ἑκατόν, with one hundred and thirty-
four triremes in all (Thuc. 6, 43").—Ias in the singular without the article
before a noun means every; as πᾶσα πόλις, every city. Similarly before a
participle or adjective having the generic article (1389, 2); as πᾶς ὁ ἄδικος,
every unjust person (Plat. Leg. 5, 731°). Πᾶς ὁ βουλόμενος, every one who wishes
(Plat. Rep. 416"). When πᾶς means all kinds of, completely, all that, the noun
does not take the article, it being then predicate; as πάντα κακὰ ἐργάζεσθαι
τὴν πόλιν, to do the city all manner of evil (Dem. 19, 314) ; ἐν πάσῃ ἀναρχίᾳ,
completely in anarchy (Plat. Rep. 575*).
3. Similarly, ὅλος, whole.
Ὅλη ἡ πόλις OF ἡ πόλις ὅλη, all the city. “H ὅλη πόλις, the whole city, the
city as one body. Ὅλη πόλις, a whole city.
4. Movos meaning alone has predicate position.
Μόνος 6 vids or ὁ vids μόνος, the son alone; when it means only, it takes
attributive position ; as ὁ μόνος vids or ὁ vids ὁ μόνος, the only son.
5. Ἥμισυς, half, usually has attributive position.
Tov ἥμισυν σῖτον, half as much corn (Xen. Hell. 5, 3"). See 1417.
6. Ἕκαστος, each, ἑκάτερος, each (of two), ἄμφω and ἀμφότεροι, both,
take the predicate position.
Ἕκαστος ὁ ἀνήρ, each man. Of these, ἕκαστος alone may omit the article.
7. Nouns qualified by the demonstratives οὗτος and ὅδε, this, and
ἐκεῖνος, that, always take the article ; the position of the demonstratives
is predicate.
Οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος, this man. Similarly αὐτός when means it
self ; as αὐτὸς ὁ ἀνήρ or 6 ἀνὴρ αὐτός, the man himself. See also 1479, 1489.
1417. Nore—The neuter ἥμισυ, half, as a noun, often stands
without the article, ἥμισυ τοῦ στρατεύματος, half of the army. The half
of a number of persons is usually expressed by οἱ ἡμίσεις, ai ἡμίσειαι
with the partitive genitive (1416, 5).
Τῶν ὀπισθοφυλάκων τοὺς ἡμίσεις, half of the rear-qguard (Xen. Anab. 4, 2°).
In other cases, even, ἥμισυς is sometimes assimilated in gender and number
with its dependent partitive genitive ; as ἔπεμπον τῶν ἄρτων τοὺς ἡμίσεις, they
sent half the loaves (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5*);—but ἄρτων ἡμίσεα, half-loaves (Xen.
παν. 1, 9”).
PRONOUNS
PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS
1418. The nominative of the personal pronouns is only used
for emphasis ; when not emphatic, it is omitted.
54 PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS 1419
"Eel ὑμεῖς ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἐθέλετε πείθεσθαι οὐδὲ ἕπεσθαι, ἐγὼ σὺν ὑμῖν ἕψομαι,
since you do not wish to obey me or to follow me, I will follow you (Xen. Anab.
1, 3°; 2, 1%), |
1419. 1. The forms ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ are used instead of the enclities
pov, μοι, με, Whenever they are emphatic, and generally after preposi-
tions ; in these cases σοῦ, σοί, σέ are accented.
"Oras δὲ καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐμὲ ἐπαινέσετε, ἐμοὶ μελήσει, it will be my care that you
shall commend me (Xen. Anab. 1, 415). Οὔτε σὺ exeivas φιλεῖς, οὔτε ἐκεῖναι σέ,
neither do you love them nor they you (Xen. Mem. 2, 7°). Tap’ ἐμέ, παρὰ σέ.
2. Πρός pe is used for πρὸς ἐμέ.
1420. Nore.—If two prepositions with the same dependent pro-
noun are contrasted, the enclitic form is used.
Ἐπί σε ἣ σύν σοι, against you rather than with you (Xen. Anab. 7, 7*).
1421. The oblique cases of αὐτός are the personal pronouns of
the third person; as ἐγὼ αὐτὸν εἶδον, I saw him, ἔδωκα αὐτῷ τὸ
βιβλίον, I gave him the book. In this case, it cannot stand at the
beginning of a sentence nor in emphatic position.
For the use of of, of, é, etc., see 14491453. For the possessive
genitive of the personal pronouns, see 1455. 7
1422. Norz.— When two verbs, which govern different cases, have
the same object, the case of the object depends on the first verb; and
no pronoun takes its place with the second verb (as in English).
Οὐχ ἑώρᾶκα Πρωταγόρᾶν πώποτε οὐδ᾽ ἀκήκοα οὐδέν, I have never seen
Protagoras nor ever heard anything of him (Plat. Prot. 310°). Τοῖς θεοῖσι χρὴ
θύοντας αἰτεῖν τἀγαθά, it behoves us, in sacrificing to the gods, to ask for good
things (Eur. Hel. 754).
1423. Αὐτός has three uses :—
1. In all cases, it may be an intensive adjective pronoun, him-
self, herself, itself, myself, thyself, themselves, etc. (Latin ipse). It
may stand alone, the noun or pronoun in agreement being under-
stood; or it may be joined to a pronoun; or it may qualify a
noun. As regards the article and noun, αὐτός intensive takes the
predicate position.
Αὐτὸς ὁ πατήρ or ὁ πατὴρ αὐτός, the father himself. ᾿Εγὼ αὐτός or αὐτὸς
ἐγώ, I myself. Αὐτὸς Μένων, Meno himself. Αὐτὸς ἔφη, (he) himself said it.
Airy τῇ ψυχῇ; with the soul itself (Plat. Phaedo, 66°). 'Ῥὴν ἀκρίβειαν αὐτὴν,
the literal accwracy (Thue. 1, 22"). Αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε, you yourselves know
1428 PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS 55
(Xen. Anab. 7, 6). Συνδιέσωσε καὶ τὰ ὅπλα καὶ αὐτὸν ἐμέ, he rescued both
me and my arms (Plat. Symp. 220°). Αὐτοὶ τὴν γὴν ἔσχον, they seized the
land themselves (Thuc. 1, 114°). ‘O Βρασίδας τῇ Θεσσαλῶν γῇ καὶ αὐτοῖς
(se. τοῖς Θεσσαλοῖς) φίλος ἦν, Brasidas was a friend to the country of the
Thessalians and to (the people) themselves (Thuc. 4, 78*). Πλευστέον eis ravras
αὐτοῖς ἐμβᾶσιν (sc. ὑμῖν), you must sail, embarking in these yourselves (Dem.
4, 16).
2. Preceded by the article, it means the same.
Ἔν τῇ αὐτῇ οἰκίᾳ, in the same house. ‘O αὐτὸς ἀνήρ, the same man. Τὴν
αὐτὴν μητέρα καὶ τὸν αὐτὸν πατέρα, the same mother and the same father. ᾿Ἐϊγὼ
μὲν ὁ αὐτός εἶμι, I am the same (Thue. 2, 61°). Ty δὲ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ, and on the
same day (Xen. Anab. 1, 5").
3. In the oblique cases, when not at the beginning of a sen-
tence nor in emphatic position, it is the personal pronoun of the
third person. See 1421.
4424. Norr.—In the sense of the same, Homer some-
times uses αὐτός without the article; αὐτὴν ὁδόν, the same
way (Od. 8, 107; 10, 263).
1425, Norr.—For the difference between the emphatic torms ἐμὲ
αὐτόν, σὲ αὐτόν, etc., and the reflexives ἐμαυτόν, σεαυτόν, etc., see 1440.
1426. Norz.—For the oblique cases of αὐτός used reflex-
ively in Homer, the personal pronoun being understood,
see 1447.
1427. Norr.—Airos after an ordinal numeral may denote a person
as the head of a given number.
Ἡιρέθη πρεσβευτὴς εἰς Λακεδαίμονα δέκατος αὐτός, he was chosen ambassador
as the head of ten (lit. himself the tenth) Xen. Hell. 2, 2").
᾿ 4428. Norr.—Airos intensive has various shades of meaning.
(a) Kai αὐτός = also, even he, of himself.
‘H γεωργία πολλὰ καὶ αὐτὴ διδάσκει, agriculture itself also (as well as other
pursuits) teaches many things (Xen. Occ. 19, 18).
(δ) Αὐτός often = just, the very, close to.
Ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ποταμοῦ, just over the river (Xen. Anab. 4, 1). ᾿Ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς
τοῖς αἰγιαλοῖς, on the very coasts (Thuc. 1, 7). Πρὸς αὐτῷ τῷ στρατεύματι, close
to the army (Xen. Anab. 1, 8"). Αὐτὸς οὗτος, just this man.
(6) Αὐτός sometimes = alone, by oneself, apart, of one’s own accord,
real or pure.
56 PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS 1429
Xwpei αὐτός, he goes alone (Xen. Anab. 4, 7"). Αὐτοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν, for we
are by ourselves (Plat. Leg. 836°). Αὐτοὺς τοὺς στρατηγοὺς ἀποκαλέσᾶς, having
called the generals apart (Xen. Anab. 7, 3”). Ἥξει yap αὐτά, for this will come
to light of itself = of its own accord (Soph. Oed, Tyr. 341). Αὐτοὶ Ἕλληνες,
ov pigoBdpBapa, pure Greeks, not half barbarian (Plat. Menex. 245°),
(4) Plato uses αὐτό with masculines and feminines, as well as
neuters, to designate the abstract idea of a thing.
Αὐτὸ δικαιοσύνην, justice in the abstract (Plat. Rep. 363°).
(6) Αὐτός is said of the master by a pupil or a slave.
Αὐτὸς ἔφη, the master (Pythagoras) said it.
1429. Norz.—For the dative of accompaniment strengthened by
αὐτός, see 1775.
1430. Nore.—For the personal pronoun used instead of the re-
flexives, see 1437.
For the personal pronouns used as accusative subject of the infini-
tive, see 1438.
1431. Norr.—Kai αὐτός denotes that a person is or does of his own
accord something which another already is doing or has done; it is
then translated by I myself also (you yourself also, etc.).
Ἐπειδὴ σαφῶς ἀπιόντας ἤδη (τοὺς βαρβάρους) ἑώρων οἱ “λληνες, ἐπορεύοντο
καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀναξεύξαντες, and now when the Greeks saw that the barbarians were
clearly going, they also broke up and pursued their march (Xen, Anab. 3, 4°),
But καὶ otros is used when a statement is made concerning one
person or thing, which has already been made concerning another ;
we then translate it by and this also.
Ῥεῖ ὁ Μαίανδρος διὰ τῆς πόλεως " ἔστι δὲ καὶ βασίλεια ἐν Κελαιναῖς ἐπὶ ταῖς
πηγαῖς τοῦ Μαρσύου ποταμοῦ" ῥεῖ δὲ καὶ οὗτος διὰ τῆς πόλεως, the Meander
flows through the city; there is also a palace in Celaenae on the sowrces sh the
Moret and this also flows through the city (Xen. Anab. 1, 2°).
1432. The indefinite English one or you (they), is variously ex-
pressed in Greek.
1. Most frequently by tis. οἴοιτό τις ἄν, Φετό τις ἄν (1553), one
would think, Ἔν τις with the subjunctive and εἴ τις with the optative,
if (any) one, or ὅστις ἄν with the subjunctive and, ὅ ὅστις with the optative
(2094).
2. Often by the participle with the generic article (1389, 2). 0
βουλόμενος, (any) one who wishes.
1435 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 57
3. By the third person plural active, especially with verbs of
saying ; a8 λέγουσι, they say.
4. By changing to the passive construction ; as λέγεται, it is said.
5. By impersonal verbs (1211—1213) ; as δεῖ, one must.
6. By the potential optative (2113), here the second person singular
is often used. Als ἐς τὸν αὐτὸν ποταμὸν οὐκ ἂν ἐμβαίης, you would not go
twice into the same river (Plat. Cratyl. 4025).
1433. Note.—For the omission of the accusative τινὰ with the
infinitive, see 2191.
1434. Norz.—They say = it is said, they report = it is reported,
can be expressed impersonally by passives, as λέγεται, ἀγγέλλεται
(1211, 3); but they went, they have come cannot be rendered by passive
impersonal forms, as in Latin itwr, ventwm est (1883).
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
1435. The reflexive pronouns refer to the subject of the sen-
tence. Often in a dependent clause, they refer to the subject of
the leading verb; they are then called indirect reflexives.
Γνῶθι σαυτόν, know thyself (Plat. Prot. 343°). Δίδωμί wor ἐμαυτὸν δοῦλον,
1 give myself to you as a slave (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6). ᾿Αφιππεύει ἐπὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ
σκηνήν, he rides back to his own tent (Xen. Anab. 1, 5"). Οἱ ἡττώμενοι ἑαυτούς
τε καὶ τὰ ἑαυτῶν πάντα ἀποβάλλουσιν, the vanquished lose both themselves
and all that belongs to them (Xen. Cyr. 3, 95). Παρέδοσαν οἱ πάντες σφᾶς
αὐτούς, they all surrendered themselves (Thuc. 7, 82°). Ta ἄριστα Bov-
λεύεσθε ὕμῖν αὐτοῖς, you advise the best for yourselves (Thuc. 1, 43*).—As
indirect refiexives: ἐβούλετο ὁ Κλέαρχος ἅπαν τὸ στράτευμα πρὸς ἑαυτὸν
ἔχειν τὴν γνώμην, Clearchus wished the whole army to be devoted to himself
(Xen. Anab. 2, 5”). Ἑϊσιέναι ἐκέλευσεν, εἰ μέλλοις σὺν ἑαυ τῷ ἐκπλεῖν, he bade
you come in, if you should wish to sail with him (Xen. Anab. 7, 1). "ἙἘπεισεν
᾿Αθηναίους ἑαυτὸν κατάγειν, he persuaded the Athenians to restore him (from
exile) (Thue. 1,111"). Τὴν Πολίχνην ἐτείχιζον, εἴ τι δέοι σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, they
began to fortify Polichna, in case it might be necessary to them (Thuc. 8, 14).
“Hyotpevos αὐτὰς ἐπιζημίους εἶναι σεαν τῷ, regarding them to be harmful to you
(Xen. Mem. 2, 7’). Τῶν ἐθνῶν τούτων ἦρξεν (sc. Κῦρος) 008 éautr@ ὁμο-
γλώττων ὄντων οὔτε ἀλλήλοις, (Cyrus) became ruler of the nations though they
were not of the same tongue with himself nor with each other (Xen. Cyr. 1, 1°).
Ta ναυάγια, ὅσα πρὸς τῇ ἑαυτῶν (γῇ) ἦν, ἀνείλοντο, they took up the wrecks, as
many as were close to their own land (Thue. 2, 92). Οἱ σοφισταὶ κατηγοροῦσι
58 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 1436
τῶν μαθητῶν ὡς ἀδικοῦσι σφᾶς αὐτούς, the sophists aceuse their pupils of
wronging them (Plat. Gorg. 519°).
For the possessive genitive of the reflexive pronoun, see 1460—1467,
1436. Norze.—Sometimes the reflexive refers neither to a leading
nor to a dependent subject, but to some dependent word. .
᾿Απὸ σαυτοῦ ᾽γώ σε διδάξω, I will instruct you from your own case =
from yourself (Ar, Nub. 385). Tov κωμάρχην τότε ᾧχετο ἄγων πρὸς τοὺς
ἑαυτοῦ οἰκέτας, Xenophon then went leading the governor to his own (i.e., the
governor's) people (Xen. Anab. 4, 5°); also Xen. Hell. 6, 5”, Lys. 32,16. τ-
1437. Norr.—(a) The personal pronouns are often used instead
of the reflexives.
"Yas κελεύω ἐμὲ pipeicOa, I enjoin you to imitate me (Xen. Cyr. 8, 6).
᾿Δοκῶ μοι αἰσθάνεσθαι, I seem (to myself) to feel (Xen. Hier. 1,6). Δοκῶ poe
is more frequent than δοκῶ ἐμαυτῷ.
(6) Similarly the oblique cases of αὐτός are often used instead of
- the indirect reflexives. |
Aéyovow, ὅτι μεταμέλοι αὐτοῖς, they said that they were sorry, lit. that it
repented them (Xen. Anab. 5, 6”).
1438. Norr.—aAs accusative subject of the infinitive, the personal
pronouns are used, not the reflexives (compare 2188).
᾿Ἐγὼ οἶμαι καὶ ἐ μὲ καὶ σὲ καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους τὸ ἀδικεῖν τοῦ ἀδικεῖσθαι
κάκ ov ἡγεῖσθαι, I believe that you and I and the rest of men believe it worse
to wrong than to be wronged (Plat. Gorg. 474°).
1439. Norr.—Sometimes the reflexive is rendered more emphatic
by prefixing to it αὐτός in agreement with its subject.
Οὐχ olds τέ ἐστιν αὐτὸς αὑ τῷ βοηθεῖν, he is not able (himself) to help him-
self (Plat. Gorg. 483°). Td γιγνώσκειν αὐτὸν ἑαυτόν, for one (himself) to know ~
himself (Plat. Charm. 165°). Φαίνεται τὰ μὲν αὐτὴ δ αὑτῆς ἡ ψῦχὴ
ἐπισκοπεῖν, the soul appears to view some things by itself (Plat. Theaet. 1853).
—When the noun belonging to the reflexive is preceded by the article, αὐτός
is occasionally inserted immediately after the article; as καταλέλυκα τὴν
αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ δυναστείαν, he has overthrown his own dominion (Aeschin.
3, 233).
1440. 1. The forms ἐμὲ αὐτόν or αὐτόν pe (or rarely αὐτὸν ἐμέ), σὲ
αὐτόν or αὐτόν oe, and the like, are not reflexive, but emphatic (see 1423).
Τοὺς παῖδας τοὺς ἐμοὺς ἤσχῦνε καὶ ἐμὲ αὐτὸν ὕβρισεν, he disgraced my —
children and insulted me myself (Lys. 1, 4). Ἡδέως ἂν πυθοίμην αὐτοῦ σοῦ,
I would gladly ascertain from you yourself (Dem. 56, 32).
1444 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 59
2. But ἑαυτοῦ, ἑαυτῷ, etc., are never separated into οὗ αὐτοῦ, etc. ;
the emphatic αὐτοῦ, αὐτῷ, etc., being used instead in emphatic position
(1421) or in contrasts. λαμβάνουσιν αὐτὸν καὶ γυναῖκα, they take the man
himself and his wife (Xen. Anab. 7, 8”).
3. The plurals ἡμῶν αὐτῶν, etc., are either reflexive or emphatic;
but αὐτῶν ἡμῶν, etc., are in most cases emphatic. Yet σφῶν αὐτῶν is
only reflexive ; while αὐτῶν σφῶν, etc., are never used.
ἴΑλλο τι ἡμῶν αὐτῶν τὸ μὲν σῶμά ἐστι, τὸ δὲ Wixi, is not one part of us
᾿ς body, and another part soul? (Plat. Phaedo, 19»). Οὐδὲν αὑτοῦ καταθήσει ἀλλὰ
τὰ ὑμέτερα ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς ἀποδώσει, he will not lay down any of his own
πα property, but will return to you your own (Lys. 29, 8). Ov δύναμαι πάντα περι-
λαβεῖν, GAN αὐτοὺς ὕμᾶς χρὴ καὶ τὰ περιλελειμμένα συνιδεῖν, I cannot embrace
everything (in my discourse), but you ought yourselves to reflect on what is omitted.
™~ (soe. 14, 63).
4. In Homer forms like of αὐτῷ, ὃ αὐτόν, etc., may be
reflexive or emphatic.
1441. The reflexive of the third person is sometimes used for that of ἡ
the first or second,
Aci ἡμᾶς ἀνερέσθαι Eavrovs, we must question owrselves (Plat. Phaedo, 78”)-
__ Arodaivere axaordrovs ἑαυτούς, you show yourselves most awkward (Lys. 8,
5). This occurs in poetry as well as prose.
1442. The plural of the reflexives is often used for the reciprocal
pronoun.
Ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς διαλεξόμεθα, we shall converse with one another, lit. among
ourselves (Dem. 48,-6). Φθονοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς μ'σοῦσιν ἀλλήλους, they hate each
other through envying each other (Xen. Mem. 2, 6”).
1443. For other reciprocal expressions, see 1875 and Part II. of the
Grammar.
1444, As the reflexive forms ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, and ἑαυτοῦ
do not occur in Homer, he uses instead the ortho-
tone personal pronouns alone, ἕο (elo, εὖ, ἕθεν), of, ἕ,
σφείων, σφίσι, σφέας; or the personal pronouns with
αὐτοῦ, αὐτῷ, etc. ; or αὐτοῦ, αὐτῷ, etc., alone.
᾿Ἐγὼν ἐμὲ λέσομαι, I will loose myself (Il. 10, 378).— Amd
ὅο (Il. 5, 343). Of (Od. 11, 433). Ἐπὶ of (Il. 8, 327).
"Appi € (Il. 15, 241). Ὦωσσαν ἀπὸ σφείων (Il. 4, 535).
Φύξιν βουλεύουσι μετὰ σφίσιν (Il, 10, 311). Κατὰ σφέας
μαχέονται (Il. 2, 366θ).---Ἐμεῦ αὐτῆς (Od. 19, 93). Ἐμοὶ
αὐτῷ (Od, 3, 49). Μαχόμην κατ᾽ ἔμ᾽ αὐτόν (Il. 1, 271)..---Σέθεν
60 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 1445
αὐτοῦ (Il. 23, 312). Σοὶ αὐτῷ (Od. 1, 279). Σ᾽ αὐτόν (Il.
10, 389).—"Eo αὐτοῦ (Il. 19, 384). Οὗ αὐτῷ (II. 5, 64). °E
αὐτήν (Od. 17, 587).---.Ημέας αὐτούς (Il. 8, 529). Σφῶν αὐτῶν
(Il. 12, 155). iow αὐτοῖς (Od. 20, 213). Σῴφέας αὐτούς
(Il. 12, 43).—Adrod for αὐτοῦ μου (Od. 22, 38). Αὐτῷ for
αὐτῷ σοι (Il. 17, 152). Αὐτόν for αὐτόν σε (Il. 2, 263).
Αὐτούς for ἡμᾶς αὐτούς (Od. 10, 26).—So reflexively : αὐτοῦ for
ἐμαυτοῦ (Od, 21, 249); αὐτῇ for ἑαυτῇ (Od. 2, 125); αὐτῶν
ἀπωλόμεθ᾽ ἀφραδίῃσιν, we were undone by our own folly (Od.
10, 27).
1445, Nore.—Enclitic forms of a personal pronoun
are also found before an oblique case of αὐτός. Mo αὐτῷ
(Od. 5, 179). Me...adrév (Il. 15, 722). οι... αὐτῇ (Il. 6, 272).
Οἱ.. αὐτῇ (Od. 4, 66). Mev αὐτόν (Il. 21, 245).
1446. Norr.—When αὐτῷ and αὐτόν come first, only
an enclitic form of a personal pronoun is used. Αὐτῷ μοι
(Il. 5, 459). Αὐτῷ τοι (Od. 22, 345). Αὐτῷ μέν οἱ (Od. 2,
190). Αὐτόν σε (Il. 9, 680).
1447, Nore.—tThe reflexive use of the personal pro-
noun of the first person is found mostly in the accusative
with the infinitive; of the second person there are per-
haps no examples ; of the third person there are many
examples of the singular, very few of the plural.—Ex-
amples of the personal pronoun with an oblique case of
αὐτός are not frequent.—Uncommon are the oblique
cases of αὐτός used reflexively.
1448. Nore.—For piv used reflexively, see 1453, 4.
1449, Of the old personal pronoun of the third person οὗ, the
forms of, σφεῖς, σφῶν, σφίσι, σφᾶς are used, in Attic prose, almost
always as indirect reflexives or in dependent clauses. Of these of
is enclitic.
᾿Ἐνταῦθα λέγεται ᾿Απόλλων ἐκδεῖραι Μαρσύᾶν νικήσᾶς €pifovra οἱ περὶ copias,
here Apollo is said to have flayed Marsyas, having vanquished him in a contest (with
himself οὗ of skill (Xen. Anab. 1, 2°). ᾿Ἐγκλήματα ποιούμενοι, ὅπως σφίσιν
ὅτι μεγίστη πρόφασις εἴη τοῦ πολεμεῖν, making charges that they might have the
strongest possible pretext for war (Thuc. 1, 126’). ᾿Ελεξαν ὅτι πέμψειε σφᾶς
ὁ Ἰνδῶν βασιλεύς, they said that the king of the Indians had sent them (Xen.
1453 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 61
Cyr. 2, 47). Aéyew re ἐκέλευεν αὐτοὺς, ὅτι οὐδὲν ἂν ἧττον σφεῖς ἀγάγοιεν, he
bade them say that they could lead no less (Xen. Anab. 7, 5°). Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὡς
- (ὁ ἾΑγις) παρῆλθε καὶ ἐξέκλινεν ἀπὸ σ ᾧ ὧν τὸ στράτευμα, καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν ἐσώθησαν,
:
the Athenians, as Agis passed by and withdrew from them, escaped at their
leisure (Thue. 5, 79).
1450. Norr.—The forms οὗ and € occur, in Attic. prose, only in a
few passages in Plato (in part, poetic).
Ἔφη δέ, ἐπειδὴ οὗ ἐκβῆναι τὴν Wixny, πορεύεσθαι, he said that his soul,
when it had gone out of him, travelled (Plat. Rep. 614”). Αλλους τινὰς ἔφη ὁ
᾿Αριστόδημος οἴχεσθαι ἀπιόντας, é δὲ (sc. ᾿Αριστόδημον) ὕπνον λαβεῖν, Aristodemus:
said that some others went away, that he himself fell asleep (Plat. Symp. 223°).
Οὗ also (Rep. 393° (epic), 617°; Symp. 174°). "E also (Rep. 327°, 617°; Symp.
175* *).—For οὗ is used ἑαυτοῦ or αὑτοῦ.
1451. Norr.—The form of occurs rarely in the Orators; except in
Antiph. 1, 16 and 5, 93; Lys. 23, 13; Andocides, 11 88, 40, αι, #2; 1586.
6, 27.—The Attics have it rarely accented ; ὁχοδρὲ Plat. Symp. 174°;
Xen. Hell. 7, 138. Rep. Ath. 2, 17.
4452. Norr.—The form σφῶν occurs often in Thucydides, now and
then in Plato (as in Rep. 618"), seldom in other Attic prose (as in Xen.
Cyr. 3, 255), perhaps never in the Orators ;—for σφῶν possessive ἑαυτῶν
or σφέτερος αὐτῶν is commonly used (1460, 1462).—The other forms be-
ginning with o¢- (without αὐτῶν, etc.) are seldom used by the Orators.
1453. 1. The personal pronoun of the third person
(οὗ, of, etc.) is generally used as a personal pronoun
in Homer. It is then enclitic. (For its reflexive
use, see 1449), The genitive singular is seldom found
as a personal pronoun; the nominative plural σφεῖς
is absent from Homer.
Otris εὖ ἀκήδεσεν, no one neglected him (Il. 14, 427). ᾿Επεὶ
οὐ θέν ἐστι χερείων, since she is not inferior to her (Il. 1, 114).
- ν οἱ πόρε Φοῖβος, which Phoebus gave him (Il. 1,72). Σὺν
δυοκαίδεκα νηυσί, ai οἱ ἕποντο, with twelve ships which followed
him (Il. 11, 228).—Kai € φύλασσε, and watch him (Il. 3,
408). Tiov δέ ἑ τεσσαράβοιον, they reckoned her at four
oxen (Il. 23, 705).—Tis τ᾽ ἄρ ogwe...éuvénce μάχεσθαι ; who
then engaged them to fight together? (11. 1,8). Ὅ σφωΐν
«(ἔλαιον χαιτάων κατέχευε, who poured oil over their manes
(Il. 23, 981), —Ex γάρ σφεων φρένας εἵλετο Παλλὰς ᾿Αθήνη,
62
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
for Pallas Athene bereft them of their senses (Il. 18, 311).—’Eru
yap spice κῦδος ὀρέξω, for I will still give them glory (Il.
17, 453). Οὔ ode θαλάσσια ἔργα μεμήλει, naval works were no
care to them (Il. 2, 614).---ἰΑλλά σφεας κρατερὸς Διομήδης
ἐξενάριξεν, but them the strong Diomedes slew (Il. 5,151). Kai
σῴφεας hovnocds ἔπεα πτερόεντα mpoonvda, and addressing
them, he spoke winged words (Il. 4, 284). Καὶ γάρ σφε...
εἶδεν, for he had seen them (Il. 11, 111).
2. In Herodotus the personal pronouns are used
as in Homer; but ed and of are never direct reflexives
nor orthotone; σφίσι is always reflex. Herodotus
has σφεῖς ; also a neuter plural σφέα; for ἕ he has
piv (1453, 4).
Δημοκήδης δὲ δείσᾶς, μή εὑ ἐκπειρῷτο Δαρεῖος, Democedes
fearing that Darius was making a trial of him (3,135°, the
only example of εὖ). Αὐτίκα δέ of εὕδοντι ἐπέστη ὄνειρος,
and soon a dream came to him in his sleep (1, 845). To πρόσω
ἐπορεύετο, σὺν δέ of ὁ πεζός στρατός, he proceeded forward, and
with him the land-army (7, 58'). Οἵ, ὅκως σ Φ εἴς καταγοίατο
τῇ νηΐ, φεύγεσκον, who fled whenever they came to land with
their ship (4, 43°). ᾿Αργεῖοι δέ σφεων εἰκόνας...ἀνέθεσαν, the
Argives dedicated statues of them (1, 315). "E&eumodnpévov σφι
σχέδον πάντων, when nearly all their goods had been sold (1, 14).
Σὺν δέ σφι, with them (2,85). Kai σφεας καταλαμβάνει, it
has befallen them (7, 38°). Aeydvrov...ds o pea (i.e. χρήμα-᾿
ta) ἀναγκαίως ἔχει SexatevOnva τῷ Ad, let them say that it is
necessary that they (= the things) be tithed to Zeus (1, 894).
Σ Φ encl. for σφέας or σφέα in Hat. is now rejected.
3. The form ot hardly ever occurs in Attic poetry (οὗ
orthotone, Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1257; ἕθεν orthotone, Aesch.
Supp. 66).—The dative οὗ is rare in Attic poetry (enclitic,
as in Aesch. Ag. 1147; orthotone παρ᾽ of, Kur, Hl. 924).
—The accusative ἕ is absent from the Dramatists ; it is
very rare in Pindar.—The nominative plural σφεῖς does
not occur in the Dramatists nor in Lyric poetry.—The
genitive plural σφῶν does not occur in the Dramatists.
—The dative plural σφίν is sometimes found in the
Dramatists (as Aesch. Pro. 252); also odiow.—The
accusative plural σφᾶς occurs a few times as enclitic in
the Dramatists (as Hur. Med. 1378)—The accusative
1453
1455 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 63
σφέ often occurs in Tragedy, sometimes as a singular
(as Aesch. Pro. 9 = him, Eur. Alc. 834 = her).—Even
σφίν is rarely singular (Hom. Hym. 30,9; Aesch. Pers.
759).
4. The accusative piv (never orthotone) is frequent in
Homer and Herodotus.
᾿Αρνειῷ piv ἔγωγε cicxw, I compare him to a ram (Il. ὃ,
197). ἹΠροσδεόμεθά σευ venvids συμπέμψαι ἡμῖν, ὡς ἄν μιν
ἐξέλωμεν ἐκ τῆς χώρης, we ask of thee to send with us young men
so that we may destroy it out of our land (Hat. 1, 36*).—Miv
is never reflexive in Homer, rarely indirectly reflexive in
Herodotus.
5. The Doric viv (enclitic) is used by the Tragedians
and by Pindar for all three genders, also as a plural; so
viv = him in Aesch. Pro. 333; = her in Eur. Hc. 515;
=it in Soph. Trach. 145; = them masc., fem., neut. in
Soph. Oed. Tyr. 868; Soph. Oed. Col. 43; Aesch. Pro.
55.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
1454. The possessive pronouns are not used as often in Greek
as in English. Where the ownership is obvious, the article is used
instead,
Κῦρος καταπηδήσᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ἅρματος τὸν Oapaxa évédv καὶ ἀναβὰς ἐπὶ τὸν
ἵππον τὰ πάλτα εἰς τὰς χεῖρας ἔλαβε, having leaped down from his chariot, Cyrus
put on his breastplate, and after mounting his horse, he took his javelins in his
hands (Xen. Anab. 1, 8°).
1455. Instead of the possessive pronouns ἐμός and σός, the en-
clitic possessive genitives of the personal pronouns, μου and σου,
are often used; less often ἡμέτερος and ὑμέτερος are replaced by
ἡμῶν and ὑμῶν; for the third person, his, her, its, their, the pos-
sessive genitives αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς, αὐτῶν are always used in Attic
prose. As regards the article, the possessive pronouns have the
_attributive position (1406, 1 and 2), the possessive genitives have
the predicate position.
Ἢ ἐμὴ olxia or ἡ οἰκίᾷ ἡ ἐμή or oixid ἡ ἐμή or ἡ οἰκίᾷ pov or (after another
word) μου ἡ οἰκία, my house. Οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ or αὐτοῦ οἱ παῖδες, his children.
Ὃ ὑμέτερος πατήρ or ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ὑμέτερος or πατὴρ ὁ ὑμέτερος or ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν or
64 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 1456
ὑμῶν ὁ πατήρ. ᾿Ωνόμασε pov THY πρόνοιαν δειλίαν, he called my foresight
cowardice (Ar. Plut. 207). ‘H γλῶσσα σου, thy tongue (Soph. Aj. 1124).
Ἡμῶν ὁ Bios, owr life (Kur. Supp. 550). Ταῖς ψῦχαϊς ἡμῶν, with our souls
(Plat. Leg. 808°). Τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ, for his body (Xen. Anab. 1, 935). Κατὰ
γνώμην τὴν ἐμήν, according to my opinion (Plat. Soph. 225°). Δέμας τὸ σόν
(Aesch, Pro. 1019). Ἢ ἡμετέρα ὑποψία, owr suspicion (Xen. Anab. 3, 1”),
Ταῖς ὑμετέραις πόλεσι (Plat. Leg. 836°).
For the use of the article with a noun qualified by a possessive
pronoun or by a possessive genitive of a personal pronoun, see
1396, 8.
1456. Norr.—1l. Poetic ὅς and éés, which are regularly
reflexive are occasionally used as simple possessives in
Homer. Mera οἷς ἑτάροισιν, with his companions (Od. 9,
369). “Hoy διὰ κάλλος, on account of her beauty (Od. 11,
282).
2. The Old Ionic also rarely uses εὖ and σφέων as
simple possessives. ἘΕ κράτος, whose strength (Il. 24, 293
and 311). Ὄσσε σφέων, their eyes (Od. 20, 348).
1457. Norn.—If the article is followed by an attribute, the posses-
sive genitive may stand between this and the noun.
‘H πάλαι ἡμῶν φύσις, our old nature (Plat. Symp. 189°). Ἢ δοκοῦσα
ἡμῶν πρότερον σωφροσύνη, what seemed before our prudence (Thue. 1, 32*).
Γνώσεσθε τὴν ἄλλην αὐτοῦ πονηρίᾶν, you will know his other villainy (Isoc. __
18, 52).
1458. Norr.—1. As the possessive pronoun implies a genitive of a
personal pronoun, it may have an adjective or appositive in the geni-
tive connected with it.
Taya δυστήνου κακά, the woes of me, unhappy one (Soph. Θεά, Col. 344),
Τὴν tyerépav τῶν σοφιστῶν τέχνην, the art of you Sophists (Plat. Hipp. Maj.
2814),
2. In poetry it may have a dative connected with it.
ΣΑμετέρου [= ἡμῖν] πότμου κλεινοῖς Λαβδακίδαισιν, the
doom for us, the famed race of Labdacus (Soph. Ant. 860).
’Epoiow (= ἐμοί) ὄσσοις ὁμίχλᾶ προσῇξε...εἰσιδούσᾳ, α
mist has suffused my eyes, beholding (Aesch. Pro. 144).
1459. Norr.—The possessive pronoun is sometimes equivalent ~|
the objective genitive (1619, 7), rarely to the swbjective genitive (1619, 8). -
Kivoa ἡ ἐμή, their good-will, rarely my good-will (to others). Ἐνοίᾳ καὶ
φιλίᾳ τῇ ἐμῇ, through their good-will and friendship to me (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1*).
1464 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 65
Σὴν χάριν, as a favour to thee = for thy sake (Plat. Soph. 242»). Φιλίᾳ τῇ σῇ,
love to you (Xen. Anab. 7, 7%).
_ 4460. The possessives are reflexive (as my own, thy own, etc.),
when the possessor is identical with the subject of the sentence.
My own is expressed by ἐμαυτοῦ, ἐμαυτῆς ; thy own by σεαυτοῦ,
σεαυτῆς; his or its own and her own by ἑαυτοῦ, ἑαυτῆς ; owr own
by ἡμέτερος αὐτῶν; your own by ὑμέτερος αὐτῶν; their own by
ἑαυτῶν or σφέτερος αὐτῶν (or rarely σφέτερος). These reflexive
| _possessives have the attributive position as regards the article.
Ὁ ἐμαυτοῦ vids or ὁ vids ὁ Epavrod, my own son. ‘H σεαυτῆς μήτηρ
OF} μήτηρ ἡ σεαυτῆ ς, thy own mother. ᾿Αστυάγης μετεπέμψατο τὴν ἑαυτοῦ
θυγατέρα, Astyages sent for his own daughter (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3). Πιστεύετε τοῖς
π ὑμετέροις αὐτῶν ὀφθαλμοῖς, trust to your own eyes (Lys. 24,14). Ἔ π᾿
ἐλευθερίᾳ τῇ τῶν ξυμπάντων τε καὶ τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ αὐτῶν κινδῦνεύσαντες, having
faced danger for the liberty of all and of ourselves (Thue. 6, 83°). Οἱ Aaxeda-
μόνιοι τῶν ἑαυτῶν συμμάχων κατεφρόνουν, the Lacedaemonians despised their
_own allies (Xen. Hell. 4, 4"). Oixéras τοὺς σφετέρους αὐτῶν ἐπικαλοῦσι
~ μάρτυρας, they call their own servants as witnesses (Antiphon, 1, 30). Tovs
σφετέρους ἀποίκους, their own colonists (Thue. 1, 34°).
For the use of the article with a noun qualified by a possessive
genitive of a reflexive pronoun, see 1396, 8.
1461. Norz.—The reflexive possessive may also refer to some other
word than the subject (1436).
1462. Nore.—For ἡμέτερος αὐτῶν and ὑμέτερος αὐτῶν we very rarely
find ἡμῶν αὐτῶν and ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ; for their own, also σφῶν αὐτῶν.
Ἡμῶν αὐτῶν τῆς δόξης ἐνδεεστέρους, falling short of owr own reputation
(Thue. 2, 11). Τὰ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ὅπλα, our own weapons (Xen. Cyr. 6, 3”).
— Τὰ ὀνόματα διαπράττονται σφῶν αὐτῶν προσγραφῆναι εἰς τὴν στήλην, they —
manage to have their own names added to the monwment (Lys. 13, 72).
1463. Norr.—Poetic are ἐμὸς αὐτοῦ, σὸς αὐτοῦ, and ὃς
αὐτοῦ or ἑὸς αὐτοῦ. These forms occur sometimes in
Homer, rarely in Attic poetry.
᾿Ἔμὸν αὐτοῦ χρεῖος, my own necessity (Od. 2, 45). 36 αὐτοῦ.
xpdart, with thy own head (Od. 22, 218). Ὧι αὐτοῦ θυμῷ, in
his own mind (Il, 10, 204). ‘Edy αὐτοῦ χρεῖος, some debt of
his own (Od. 1, 409).
1464. Nors.—When the genitives of reflexive pronouns are par-
titive, they take the predicate position.
5
66 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 1465
᾿Αποκαλέσαντες αὑτῶν τοὺς βελτίστους ἐπὶ τοῖς χειρίστοις τῶν πολιτῶν
γεγόνασιν, having driven away the best men of their number, they have fallen into
the power of the worst (Isoc. 6, 64); Thue. 4, 42+.
1465. 1. The simple possessive pronouns ἐμός, σός, ἡμέτερος, ὑμέ-
repos are sometimes used as reflexive possessives.
Τῶν κτημάτων co Trav ἐμῶν κίχρημι, I lend to thee of my own property
(Dem. 53,12). Πεποίηκας τοὺς σοὺ ς προγόνους εἰρηνικούς, you have represented —
your ancestors as pacific (Isoc. 12, 241). Ὑμεῖς rods ὑμετέρους παῖδας
ἀγαπᾶτε, you love your own children (Dem. 40, 8). Τοῖς ra σφέτερα σώζειν
βουλομένοις, to those willing to save their own (Lys. 24, 19). ᾿ξ
2. So also αὐτοῦ (with or without the addition of ἐκείνου) in attribu-
tive position.
Οὗτος ἐκόσμησε τὴν Wixhy οὐκ ἀλλοτρίῳ ἀλλὰ τῷ αὐ τῆ ς κόσμῳ, this man
adorned his soul not with foreign but with its (i.e., the soul’s) own ornament
(Plat. Phaedo, 1145). .--- Αὐτοῦ in these cases = Latin ipsius.
1466. Nore.—Poetic ὅς or ἑός is always reflexive.
Τῶν ὧν τέκνων, his own children (Soph. Trach. 266). “Hav
πέπλων, her own robes (Kur. El. 1206). And so often in
Epic poetry.—Herodotus has ὅς once (1, 205"),
1467. The genitives of the personal pronouns (μου, σου, etc.) are
seldom used as reflexive possessives.
γὼ ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τοῦ πατρός pov τεθνεῶτος αἰτοῦμαι, I appeal to you on behalf — -Ξ
of my dead father (Antiphon, 1, 23). Τοὺς ξυμμάχους ἐδεδίεσαν σφῶν, they
feared their own allies (Thuc. 5, 14"). Ar. Plut. 55; Hq. 565.—In late Greek
the reflexive use of these genitives is very common.
1468. The genitives of the demonstratives, especially of ἐκεῖνος, are
used instead of the ordinary reflexives of the third person for special
emphasis.
᾿Αφικνοῦνται παρὰ Apiaiov καὶ τὴν ἐκείνου στρατιάν, they came up to Ariaeus
and his army (Xen. Anab. 2, 2°).
Examples of the use of ὅς for ἐμός (as in Od. 9, 28) ;
éos for σφέτερος (as in Hes. Op. 58) ; σφέτερος for os (Hes.
Scut. 90) ; are very rare, and some are doubtful, Com-
pare 1456.
1469. 1. Synopsis of Simple Possessive Forms.—My, ἐμός or pov ;
thy, σός or cov; his, her, its, αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς ; sometimes in Homer ὅς or
éos; and Ionic eb; owr, ἡμέτερος Or ἡμῶν ; your, ὑμέτερος or ὑμῶν ; their,
αὐτῶν and Ionic σφέων.
——— Ὸ συν -
1472 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 67
2. Synopsis of Reflexive Possessive Forms.—My own, ἐμαυτοῦ (-ῆς),
js, Seldom μου (poetic ἐμός αὐτοῦ) ; thy own, σεαυτοῦ (-ἣς), σός, seldom
σου (poetic σός αὐτοῦ) ; his, her, its own, ἑαυτοῦ (-7s) (poetic ὅς and éds,
or ὅς αὐτοῦ and ἑὸς αὐτοῦ) ; Owr OWN, ἡμέτερος αὐτῶν, ἡμέτερος, seldom
ἡμῶν, very rarely ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ; your own, ὑμέτερος αὐτῶν, ὑμέτερος, seldom
ὑμῶν, very rarely ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ; their own, ἑαυτῶν, σφέτερος αὐτῶν, rarely
σφέτερος, rarely σφῶν, rarely σφῶν αὐτῶν,
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
1470. Οὗτος, this, that, refers back to something already men-
tioned; ὅδε, this (here), refers forward to what is near or present
in place or time; ἐκεῖνος, that (yonder), refers to what is remote.
Οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ, this man (just mentioned). “Ode ὁ ἀνήρ, this man (here,
before us). Ἥ δε ἡ πόλις, this (our) city. Ἥδε ἡ ἡμέρα, the present day.
κεῖνος ὁ ἀνήρ, that man (yonder). Ἐλεξε ταῦτα, he said this (just mentioned).
"Ελεξε rade, he spoke as follows. 'Γεκμήριον δὲ τούτου καὶ τόδε, proof of this
(just mentioned) is the following (Xen. Anab. 1, 9”).
1471. Nore.—But οὗτος (especially the neuter τοῦτο), sometimes
refers to a word or thought following.
Οὐ τοῦτο μόνον ἐννοοῦνται τί πείσονται, they think not of this alone, what
they shall suffer (Xen. Anab. 3, 1").—Rarely ὅδε is used to refer backward. —
—Occasionally ἐκεῖνος is used to refer to what follows; as ἐκεῖνο ἔτι ἀκούσατέ
pov, hear this yet of me (Dem. 20, 160).
1472. Nore.—1. Οὗτος used in a local sense differs somewhat from
ὅδε used locally. While ὅδε local refers to something in the immediate
proximity of the speaker, and may then be called a demonstrative of
the first person ; οὗτος local refers to something face to face with the
speaker, and may then be termed a demonstrative of the second person.
᾿Αλλ᾽, ὦ παῖδες, λέγετέ μοι, ὅδ᾽ ἐστὶ Σωκράτης, περὶ οὗ ἑκάστοτε μέμνησθε;
but tell me, boys, is this the Socrates, of whom you have so often spoken ?—upon
which the boys facing Socrates reply : Πάνυ μὲν οὖν, ὦ πάτερ, οὗτος, certainly
father, this is he (Plat. Lach. 181°).
In this way is explained the vocative use of οὗτος (1474), also the
use of οὗτος as equivalent to an adverb of place (1482); also the use
of οὗτος and οὗτοσί by an orator to denote the present antagonist (the
article being here omitted).
᾿Ασεβείᾶς φεύγω ὑπὸ Μελήτου rovrovi, I am prosecuted for impiety by this
Meletus here (Plat. Apol. 354).
68 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 1473
2. In tragedy ὅδε 6 ἀνήρ is sometimes equivalent to
ἐγώ; aS in Soph. 4). 78, 422, 446.
1473. Notr.—Oiros sometimes repeats emphatically a preceding
subject or object. ‘O yap τὸ σπέρμα παρασχὼν, οὗ ros τῶν φύντων αἴτιος, for
he who furnished the seed—that man is responsible for the harvest (Dem. 18, 159).
1474. Norr.—Oiros is sometimes used in calling out to a person.
Οὗτος, ri ποιεῖς; you there! what are you doing? (Ar. Ran. 198). Οὗτος
here has local force.
1475. Nore.—Toiro μέν ...(τοῦτο) δέ, partly...partly, first...secondly,
is practically the same as τὸ μέν...τὸ δέ (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 603). See
1377, 5.
1476. Norre.—Observe the colloquial expression τοῦτ᾽ ἐκεῖνο or τόδ᾽
ἐκεῖνο, that’s it, there it is ! (referring to something already mentioned
or understood), Eur. Med. 98.
1477. Nors.—For οὑτοσί, ὁδί, ἐκεινοσί, οὑτωσί, ὡδί, etc., see 1472 and
Part II. of the Grammar.—For οὑτοσί, in specifications of time, see 1601.
1478. Kai otros, and that too, is used predicatively to qualify
more definitely a person or thing ; καὶ ταῦτα, and that too, although,
and yet, and also, qualifies more definitely a verb, usually a participle.
Παντάπᾶσιν ἀπόρων ἐστὶ καὶ ἀμηχάνων καὶ ἀνάγκῃ ἐχομένων, Kal τούτων
πονηρῶν, οἵτινες ἐθέλουσι δι᾿ ἐπιορκίας τε πρὸς θεοὺς καὶ ἀπιστίας πρὸς ἀνθρώπους:
mparrew τι, it belongs to persons wholly without resources and held down by
necessity, and wicked also, to seek to do anything by means of perjwry to the
gods and faithlessness towards men (Xen. Anab, 2,5"). Σὺ δέ μοι δοκεῖς ov
προσέχειν τὸν νοῦν τούτοις, Kal ταῦτα σοφὸς ὦν, you do not seem to me to pay
attention to these things, although being wise (Plat. Gorg. 508*). For καὶ οὗτος
= and this also, see 1431.
1479. When the demonstrative pronouns οὗτος, ὅδε, and ἐκεῖνος:
qualify a noun; it takes the article and has the predicate position.
Οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος, this man. “Hde ἡ γυνή or ἡ γυνὴ ἥδε, this:
woman. ᾿Ἐκεῖνο τὸ βιϑλίον or τὸ βιβλίον ἐκεῖνο, that book. '᾿αύτης τὴς χώρης,
of this country (Hdt. 1, 73). Περὶ ἐκεῖνον τὸν τόπον (Plat. Leg. 638°). Tor
ἄνδρα τοῦτον (Xen. Anab. 1, 6°). Τὰς γυναῖκας ravras (Plat. Rep. 457°).
1480. Norz.—For the omission of the article here in
poetry, see 1400.
1481. Nors.—If some other qualifying word is added, the demon-
strative may stand between it and the noun.
1488 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 69
Τὴν μίαν ἐκείνην πολϊτείᾶν, that one polity (Plat. Polit. 297°). Ἢ στένη
αὕτη ὁδός, this narrow road (Xen. Anab. 4, 2°). Ai τῶν Πελοποννησίων αὗται
vives, these ships of the Peloponnesians (Thuc. 8, 80°). ᾿Επὶ τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦτον
λόφον, towards this very knoll (Xen. Hell. 3, 4"). To ἀφικομένῳ τούτῳ ξένῳ,
this stranger who has arrived (Plat. Prot. 313°).
1482. Nore.—The noun does not have the article if it is predicate.
Henze the article is omitted with οὗτος, ὅδε, and ἐκεῖνος. When the
demonstrative is equivalent to an adverb of place, as here, there, and
ealls attention to an object in sight.
ὋὉρῶμεν ὀλίγους τούτους ἀνθρώπους, we see few men here (Xen. Anab. 4, 7°).
Nijes ἐκεῖναι ἐπιπλέουσι, yonder are ships sailing towards us (Thue. 1, 51°).
Λαβὼν χιτῶνας τουτουσΐ, taking these coats here (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3°). Χώρης yap
τῆσδε ἔχω τὸ κράτος αὐτή, of this land here I have the power alone (Hat. 4, 9°).
1483. Nore.—The article is also often omitted with a proper name
and a demonstrative. Χαιρεφῶν ὅδε, Chaerephon here (Plat. Gorg. 447°) ;
Ἐϊθύδημος οὑτοσί, Euthydemus here (Xen. Mem. 4, 2°).
1484, Οὗτος is used as the antecedent of the relative pronoun
in the sense of he (who), those (who) ; in this case it is very often
omitted, especially when unemphatic (1522, 1523).
Οἱ ἄνθρωποι τούτοις μάλιστα ἐθέλουσι πείθεσθαι, ods ἂν ἡγῶνται βελτίστους
εἶναι, men are most willing to obey those whom they consider to be the best (Xen.
Mem. 3, 3"). Μακάριος ὅστις οὐσίᾶν καὶ νοῦν ἔχει, happy is he who has property
and sense (Men. Mon. 340).
1485, Note.—This use of οὗτος explains οὗτως---ὦὧστε, so—that =
in this way—that.
1486, Norz.—After a relative, an oblique case of αὐτός occasionally
takes the place of the antecedent οὗτος. Οὺς μὴ εὕρισκον, κενοτάφιον
αὐτοῖς ἐποίησαν μέγα, they placed a large cenotaph for those whom they did
not find (Xen. Anab. 6, 4°).
1487. The demonstratives are often used as predicates.
Σὺ ob ros εὑρέθης, you were found to be that man (Dem. 18, 282). Πάσ-
χουσι τοῦτο ταὐτὸν ταῖς τικτούσαις, they feel the same pangs as women in
childbirth (Plat. Theaet. 151"). Tas ἐλπίδας ἔχω τοιαύτας, these are the hopes
᾿ which 1 have (Isoc. 6, 69).
1488. The demonstratives τοσοῦτος and τοσόσδε, 80 much, so many,
τοιοῦτος and τοιόσδε, such (in quality), and τηλικοῦτος and τηλικόσδε, 80
old, so great, are distinguished like οὗτος and ὅδε.
70 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 1489
1489. Nors.—Nouns qualified by these demonstratives take the
article, in attributive position, if a definite person or thing is meant or
a noun is used generically (z.e., ἃ8 representative of the whole class).
‘O τοιοῦτος ἀνήρ, such a boy, i.e., the boy in question being such as he is ;
but such a boy = any such boy is παῖς τοιοῦτος.
1490. Note.—Toootros and τοσόσδε do not denote that a thing is
great in size, but only compare its size with that of another object ;
hence they often mean so little. Thus τοσοῦτον often means only so
much. The plural τοσοῦτοι (relative ὅσοι) is used to denote numerical
greatness as well as size (= Latin tanti—quanti or tot—quot).
4491. The demonstrative ἕτερος with the article means the other
(of two), with reference to the one already mentioned, as oi érepx, the
others, the other party ; or the one of the two, no matter which, hence
one or the other.
Πυλάδης ἐκλήζεθ᾽ ἅτερος πρὸς θατέρου, one of them was called Pylades by the
other (Kur. Iph. Tawr. 249).—"Erepos without the article means another, with
reference to some one already mentioned; or a second, as ἕτεροι τοσοῦτοι,
so many others, ἕτερος τοιοῦτος, another such, a second (= Sevrepos); or it may
mean a different, of another kind.
1492. Norr.—For ἕτερος used in the sense of besides, see 1562.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
PARTICULAR AND INDEFINITE RELATIVES
1493. The relative ὅς, who, refers to a definite antecedent;
ὅστις, whoever, refers to an indefinite antecedent. Similarly the
relative pronouns ὅσος, οἷος, ἡλίκος, and the relative adverbs οὗ,
ὅθεν, of, ὅτε, ἡνίκα, ἧ, ὡς. are related to ὁπόσος, ὁποῖος, ὁπηλίκος,
ὅπου, ὁπόθεν, ὅποι, ὅποτε, ὁπηνίκα, ὅπῃ, ὅπως.
"Ἔστιν δίκης ὀφθαλμός, ὃς τὰ πάνθ᾽ ὁρᾷ, there is an eye of justice which sees
all things (Men. Mon. 179). Συμβούλευσον ἡμῖν, 6 τι σοι δοκεῖ κάλλιστον καὶ
ἄριστον εἶναι, advise us whatever seems best and worthiest to you (Xen. Anab-.
2, 17). Ὅστις δὲ πλοῦτον ἣ εὐγένειαν εἰσιδὼν γαμεῖ πονηράν, μῶρός ἐστιν,
whoever looking to wealth or nobility marries a wicked woman is a fool (Eur.
Elect. 1097).
1494, Nots.—In Epic poetry the particle τέ is often
added to the relatives; as ds τε, οἷός τε, ὅσος τε, ὅθι
1501 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 71
* ze; it adds little or nothing to the meaning of the rela-
tive. This also occurs sometimes in lyric poetry, rarely
in tragedy.—In Attic Greek οἷός re means able, capable.
1495. Nore.—For ὅστις, the definite relative ὅς is sometimes used,
especially with μή and ἄν.
Obs ἑώρα ἐθέλοντας κινδύνεύειν, τούτους καὶ ἄρχοντας ἐποίει, whomsoever he
saw willing to incur danger, these he made governors (Xen. Anab. 1, 9“); ex-
amples with μή and ἄν in 2148.
1496. Nore.—The indefinite relative ὅστις is used with a definite
antecedent when who is equivalent to such as and is used to char-
acterise. :
‘Ikavoi ἐσμεν ὑμῖν πέμψαι vais τε καὶ ἄνδρας, οἵτινες ὑμῖν cuppayodvra
τε καὶ τὴν ὁδὸν ἡγήσονται, we can send you ships and men who will aid you in
Sighting and who will conduct you on the road (Xen. Anab. 5, 4°). Ὁρᾶτε δὲ
τὴν Τισσαφέρνους ἀπιστίαν, ὅστις déyov..., see the perfidy of Tissaphernes,
(a man), who saying...(Xen. Anab. 3, 2“).—Otherwise ὅστις is never used for ὅς
in classical writers.
1497. Nore.—For ὅστις in indirect questions, see 1545.
1498. Nore —Herodotus sometimes uses ὅστις for ds (as
in 1, 7*), sometimes ὅς for ὅστις (as in 1, 567).
1499. Norzr.—Observe also οὐδείς (ἐστιν) ὅστις, (there is) no one
who ; τίς ἐστιν ὅστις ; who is there who? ἔστιν ὅστις, there is one who ;
πᾶς ὅστις (plural usually πάντες ὅσοι), every one who.
1500. Norz.—(a) A simple relative is sometimes used for a relative
of quantity or quality.
"ExOipeiv τοιαύτης δόξης ἧ ς (= olds) πολλοὶ τυγχάνουσιν, to desire such
glory as (which) many obtain (Isoc. Epist. 2,10). Τηλικαύτης... ἥν (-Ξ τηλίκην),
80 great as (ibid.). “Ἑωσπερ ἂν ἧς ὃ ς (= τοιοῦτος οἷος) εἶ, as long as you are
what (= such as) you are (Plat. Phaedr, 243°).
(6) A relative of quantity or quality is sometimes used for a simple
relative.
Tadra...... χρὴ ποιεῖν, ὅσα (for ἃ) ὁ θεὸς ἐκέλευσεν, you must do these things
{τ as many as) which the god has commanded (Xen. Anab. 3, 1. Πᾶν,
ὅσον ἐγὼ ἐδυνάμην, all (= as much as) that I could (Xen. Anab. 7, 6”).
1501. Nors.—A relative adverb is sometimes used for a relative
pronoun, mostly in designations of place, time, and manner.
72 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 1502
His χωρίον, ὅθεν. ὄψονται θάλατταν, to a place (whence) from which they
would behold the. sea. (Xen, -Anab, 4, 7”). Τὸ αὐτὸ σχῆμα > feed Sense; the
same order as (Xen. Anab, 1, 10").
1502, Norz.—(a) Several relatives may belie to the same sen-
tence without a copula intervening.
Γνώσεται ὁ δῆμος οἷος οἷον θρέμμα ηὔξησεν (for οἷός ἐστι καὶ οἷον ἔπε τς the
people will know how feeble they are and what kind of nursling they have reared
(Plat. Rep. 569°). Διδάσκων ota οὖσα Pix? ὑφ᾽ οἵων λόγων δ ἣν airiav.
ἐξ ἀνάγκης πείθεται (for ofa ἐστι ψῦχὴ καὶ ὑφ᾽ οἵων λόγων καὶ δι᾿ ἥν), showing
how the soul is so constituted that it is persuaded by such particular kinds of
arguments and for what reason (Plat. Phaedr. 271”).—And so with relative
adverbs ; as ἐνθυμεῖσθε ὅθεν οἷ διέβη (for ὅθεν ἧλθε καὶ οἷ διέβη), observe from
what place he crossed and to what place (Dem. 23, 160).
(b) One relative may belong to a participle, and the other to a
finite verb.
Οὐκ ἀγνοῶ ἡλίκος ὧν ὅσον ἔργον ἐνίσταμαι, I am not unaware how great
a work I am undertaking for one so old as I am, lit. being how old, how great
a work (Isoc. 12, 36).
1503. Norr.—Sometimes ὡς with an adverb or with an adjective
is added to a relative and its noun,
Συνίεθ᾽ ὃν τρόπον ὁ Σόλων τοὺς νόμους ὡς καλῶς iki τιθέναι, you observe
in what manner, how admirably, Solon directs laws to be passed (Dem. 20, 93).
Ἴστε οἵων νόμων ὑμῖν κειμένων ὡς καλῶν καὶ σὼ φρόν ὦ ν τετόλμηκε Thuapyes
δημηγορεῖν, you know in spite of what laws, and laws so good and moral,
Timarchus has dared to play the demagogue (Aeschin. 1, 20),
1504, Nore.—The plural of ὅσος and ὁπόσος, as those of τοσοῦτος
and τόσόσδε, have also numerical signification: (as many)....,..a8.
Oi γονεῖς τοὺς παῖδας ἐποίησαν toa otra καλά ἰδεῖν καὶ τοσούτω ν ἀγαθῶν
μετασχεῖν ὅσα οἱ θεοὶ παρέχουσι, parents make their children view so many
beautiful things and share in so many blessings as the gods give (Xen. Mem.
2, 2°). Τοσαῦτα mpdypata ἐχούσης ὁπ όσα λέγεις τῆς τυραννίδος ὅμως mpo-
metas φέρεσθε εἰς αὐτήν, although royalty has so many troubles as you say,
yet you are strongly drawn towards it (Xen. Hier. 7, 2).
1505. Norz.—(a) A relative may depend on a participle alone.
Kivai τινάς φασιν ἐπῳδὰς &s οἱ ἐπιστάμενοι ἐπάδοντες οἷς ἂν βούλωνται φίλους
ἑαυτοῖς ποιοῦνται, they say there are certain incantations which those who know
them chant to those whom they wish and make them friends to themselves (Xen.
Mem. 2,6"). ᾿Ακολούθησον ἐνταῦθαι οἵ ἀφικόμενος εὐδαιμονήσεις, follow me
there, where on your arrival, you will be happy (Plat. Gorg. 527°).
1509 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 73
(δ) When a participle or a subordinate clause belongs to the rela-
tive clause, the relative is commonly made to depend on the participle
or on the verb of the subordinate clause.
Avénrov δ᾽ ἐπὶ τοιούτους ἰέναι, ὧν κρατήσᾶς....... μὴ κατασχήσει τις (for ods,
ἐπειδὰν αὐτῶν κρατήσῃ, μὴ κατασχήσει τις), it is foolish to go against men whom
one cannot keep down when one has conquered them (Thuc. 6,11"). (Αἱρούμεθα)
ἀνθρώπους τοὺς μὲν ἀπόλιδας, τοὺς δ᾽ αὐτομόλους, of s ὁπόταν τις πλείονα μισθὸν
διδῷ, μετ᾽ ἐκείνων ἀκολουθήσουσιν (for οἵ, ὁπόταν τις αὐτοῖ .-...... διδῷ), (we
are choosing) men, some homeless, some deserters, who will follow, whenever any
one offers them more pay (Isoc. 8, 44).
1506. Norz.—Sometimes qualifying words which belong to the
antecedent are drawn over to the relative clause.
Oi δὲ ἐς τὰς vais, ai ἐφρούρουν δύο, καταφυγόντες διασώζονται (for ἐς τὰς
δύο vais), some, having fled to the ships (there were two keeping guard), escaped
(Thue. 4, 113"). Eis ᾿Αρμενίαν ἥξειν, is Ὀρόντας ἦρχε πολλῆς καὶ εὐδαί-
povos (for ᾿Αρμενίᾶν πολλὴν καὶ εὐδαίμονα), they would come to Armenia, a
large and prosperous country of which Orontas was governor (Xen. Anab. 3, 5").
Τὸ τείχισμα ὃ ἦν αὐτόθι τῶν Συρᾶκοσίων, for rd τείχισμα τῶν Συρᾶκοσίων
(Thue, 7, 43*).—Compare 1362.
1507. Norr.—Os περ refers to eens known ; ὅς ye implies a
cause (= Latin quippe qui); as in Xen, Anabd. 1, 6°.
1508. Nore.—For οἷος and ὅσος with the infinitive, see 2088.
“Os AS A DEMONSTRATIVE
1509. 1. The demonstrative ὅς is to be distinguished from the
relative. Remains of this demonstrative are the following.
Kai ὅς, καὶ ἥ, καὶ οἵ, at the beginning of a sentence, and he, she, they; as
ἡγεῖσθαι ἐκέλευσε τοὺς Ὑρκανίους" καὶ ot ἠρώτων x.t.r., he ordered the Hyr-
canians to lead, and they asked....(Xen. Anab, 4, 2").
Ἦ δ᾽ ὅς, ἦ δ᾽ ἥ, said he, said she (4 imperfect of hui, say, inquam).
Ὃς καὶ ὅς, this man and that one (in Herodotus, 4, 68°).
Kai ὥς, even 80; οὐδ᾽ ὥς and μηδ᾽ ὥς, not even 80; ὡσαύτως, just 80; ὡς
ἀληθῶς. See Particles, 2371.
2. Also ὃς μέν......ὃς δέ in the oblique cases is occasionally used
for 6 pév......6 δέ, in late writers and even in Demosthenes.
Πόλεις “EAAnvidas, ἃς μὲν ἀναιρῶν, els ἃς δὲ rods φυγάδας κατάγων, destroying
some Greek cities, and restoring their exiles to others (Dem. 18, 71). Οἷς μὲν
δίδωσιν, οἷς δ᾽ ἀφαιρεῖται θεός, to some God aives and from others he takes (Men.
Mon, 428).
74 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 1510
3. Homer has a number of examples of the demon-
strative 6s; as καὶ ὅς, Il. 21, 198; Il. 22, 201; Od. 1,
286. ,
RELATIVE AS PREDICATE
1510. The relatives are sometimes used as predicates.
Οὐκ ἤδει οἵοις θηρίοις ἐπλησίαζε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις, he did not know
what kind of beasts these men were that he approached (Dem. 35, 8). Οὐδὲν.
δηλοῦντες ὁποῖόν τι τὸ μέλλον ποιήσουσιν, not at all showing what futwre
plan they would carry out (Thue. 7, 38°). “Emioracée περὶ οἵου τινὸς
ὄντος ἐμοῦ ψηφιεῖσθε, you know what kind of man I am concerning whom you
are to decide (Lys. 21,1). Otay ἔχιδναν τῆν δ᾽ épicas), what a viper is
this woman whom thow hast begotten (Eur. Ion 1262).
AGREEMENT OF RELATIVE
1511. A relative agrees with its antecedent in nwmber and
gender. Oi φίλοι obs εἶχον, the friends that I had. Ai γυναῖκας ds εἶδον, the
women that I saw. Ta πράγματα ἃ σὺ ἔπρᾶξας, the things that you did. Ὁ
κίνδῦνος ἐξ οὗ ἐσώθην, the danger from which I was saved.
Observe that when the relative is the subject of a sentence, it
has the person of its antecedent. Ἐγὼ ὃς τοῦτο ἔλεξα, I who said this.
Ὑμεῖς οἱ τοῦτο ἐποιήσατε, you who did this.
1512. Norn.—A relative referring to two or more antecedents
follows the rules given for the predicate-adjective (1306-1309).
Περὶ πολέμου καὶ εἰρήνης, ἃ ἔχει μεγίστην δύναμιν ἐν τῷ βίῳ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, |
concerning war and peace which have the greatest power in the life of men
(Isoc. 8,2). ᾿Απαλλαγέντες πολέμων καὶ κινδύνων καὶ ταραχῆς, εἰς ἣν νῦν πρὸς
ἀλλήλους καθέσταμεν, delivered from wars and dangers and confusion in which
we are now involved with one another (Isoc. 8, 20).
1513. Norr.—A relative referring to a collective noun may be in
the plural.
Τὸ ᾿Αρκαδικὸν ὁπλιτικόν, Sv ἦρχε Κλεάνωρ, the Arcadian heavy-armed force
which Cleanor commanded (Xen. Anab. 4, 8.5). Παρέσται ὠφελίᾳ ot τῶνδε
κρείσσους εἰσί, an auxiliary force will be at hand who are better than these
(Thue. 6, 80).
1514. Norr.—A singular antecedent may indicate a whole class
and thus take a plural relative.
1519 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 75
Θησαυροποιὸς ἀνήρ, ods δὴ καὶ ἐπαινεῖ τὸ πλῆθος, a money-making man,
just (one of those) whom the great mass praise (Plat. Rep. 554"), Πολέμον
γένεσιν εὑρήκαμεν, ἐξ Sv μάλιστα ταῖς πόλεσιν κακὰ γίγνεται, we have traced the
origin of war to sowrces from which very great evils to states arise (Plat. Rep.
373°).
1515. Nore.—On the other hand, a plural antecedent may have
its relative in the singular referring to any one of the number.
Ai γυναῖκες ἱκέτευον πάντας, ὅτῳ ἐντυγχάνοιεν, μὴ φεύγειν, the women
begged all whom they met not to flee (Xen. Cyr. ὃ, 3%). ᾿Ασπάζεται πάντας
ᾧ ἂν περιτυγχάνει, he greets all, whomsoever he happens to meet (Plat. Rep. 566°).
1516. Norz.—A masculine or feminine antecedent considered as
a thing may have its relative in the neuter (compare 1309).
‘H γῆ ἐγέννησεν ἄνθρωπον, ὃ συνέσει ὑπερέχει τῶν ἄλλων, the earth has
created man, a creature which surpasses all the others in understanding (Plat.
Menex. 237°). Tupavvida θηρᾶν, ὃ πλήθει χρήμασίν θ᾽ ἁλίσκεται, to pursue des-
potic power, a thing which is captured by numbers and wealth (Soph. Oed. Tyr.
542).
1517. ΝΟΤΕ.---(α) A relative subject of a verb may agree with its.
own predicate-noun or even with that of its antecedent.
Φίλον, ὃ μέγιστον ἀγαθὸν εἶναί φᾶσιν, a friend, which they declare to be
the greatest good (Xen. Mem. 2, 4). Οὐδέποτ᾽ ἂν εἴη ἡ ῥητορικὴ ἄδικον
πρᾶγμα, ὃ γ᾽ ἀεὶ περὶ δικαιοσύνης τοὺς λόγους ποιεῖται, rhetoric can never be an
unjust thing, since it is always making discourses opnesenng justice (Plat.
Gorg. 460°).
(6) The same assimilation may take place when the relative is the
object.
Adyo, ἂς ἐλπίδας ὀνομάζομεν, words which we call hopes (Plat. Phil.
40°). ῳὋὉ φόβος ὁ ἐκ τῶν νόμων γεγονώς, ἣν ald@ πολλάκις ἐν τοῖς ἄνω λόγοις
εἴπομεν, the fear which is born of the laws and which we often called reverence
in the preceding discourse (Plat. Leg. 699°).
1518. Nore.—The relative may also agree with the real, rather
than the grammatical gender of its antecedent.
Τὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ναυτικόν, of ὥρμουν ἐν τῇ Madéa, the Athenian fleet
which was anchored at Malea (Το, 3, 4°). Πλήθει οἵπερ δικάσουσι, by the
many who will judge (Plat. Phaedr, 2605).
1519. Norz,—The relative may agree with an antecedent implied
in a pronoun.
76 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 1520
Kal οἰκίᾷ ye πολὺ μείζων ἡ ὑμετέρα τῆς ἐμῆς, οἵ ye οἰκίᾳ χρῆσθε γῇ
τε καὶ οὐρανῷ, (your house) the house of you, who use the earth and the
sky as a house, is greater than mine (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2),—here ὑμετέρα implies
ὑμῶν.
1520. Νοτε.---(α) The neuter singular of the relative can refer to
a whole sentence. This is most frequent with 6 or ὅπερ and an ad-
jective without the copula in announcing something which follows ;
in this case τό in its demonstrative signification can be used (com-
pare 1330). |
Πίνειν οὐκ ἐθέλων, ὁπότε ἀναγκασθείη, πάντας ἐκράτει καί, ὃ πάντων θαυμασ-
τότατον, Σωκράτη μεθύοντα οὐδεὶς πώποτε ἑὠρᾶκεν ἀνθρώπων, though not willing
to drink, when he was compelled, he surpassed all,—and most wonderful of all!
no one has ever seen Socrates drunk (Plat. Symp. 220°). To πάντων θαυμαστό-
τατον, ἐπαινοῦσι μὲν πάντες τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐπιτηδεύματα, pipeicOa δ᾽ αὐτὰ οὐδεμία
πόλις ἐθέλει, and what is the most marvellous thing of all, while all praise such
remarkable institutions, no state wishes to imitate them (Xen. Rep. Lac. 10, 8).
Xen. Cyr. 5, 5%; 4, 1".
(Ὁ) The neuter relative 6 or ὅπερ or ἅ may be connected with a
verb, and announce something which follows.
Ὃ λέγω, τρυφᾷς ὑπὸ πλούτου τῆς copias, as I say, you give yourself airs
from wealth of wisdom (Plat. Euthyphr. 12"). Ὃ ἄρτι ἔλεγον, ζητητέον τίνες
ἄριστοι φύλακες, as 1 just said, we must find out who are the best guards (Plat.
Rep. 413°). Ὅπερ καὶ ἀρχόμενος εἶπον τοῦ λόγου, παρρησιασόμεθα πρὸς
ὑμᾶς, as I in beginning my remarks said, we will speak candidly to you (Plat.
Lach. 179°). Οὗ ἕνεκα ὁ λόγος ὡρμήθη, viv λέξομεν τὰς Κύρου πράξεις,
now we will relate the actions of Cyrus on whose account the narrative was
undertaken (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2). “A δ᾽ εἶπεν, ὡς ἐγώ εἰμι οἷος dei πότε pera-
βάλλεσθαι, κατανοήσατε, etc., but as to what he said, that I am such as to be
always changing, consider, etc. (Xen. Hell. 2, 3).
(c) After such an introductory relative expression, the principle
clause is occasionally introduced by ὅτι or γάρ. |
Ὃ μὲν πάντων θαυμαστότατον ἀκοῦσαι, ὅτι ἕν ἕκαστον ὧν ἐπῃνέσαμεν
τῆς φύσεως ἀποσπᾷ φιλοσοφίᾶς, what is strangest of all to hear, that each one of
the qualities of natwre which we approved, distracts from philosophy (Plat.
Rep. 491°). “Ὃ δὲ πάντων δεινότατον - τὴν yap πόλιν οὐχ οἵόστ᾽ ἐγένετο
χειρώσασθαι, and what was most remarkable, he was not able to subdue the city
(Isoc. 9, 64).—Similarly a principal clause is sometimes introduced as depend-
ent on an expression like ὡς λέγουσι, ὡς ἔοικε, ὡς ἤκουσα, etc. ; as ὡς γὰρ
πο ἤκουσά τινος, ὅτι Κλέανδρος ὁ ἐκ Βυζαντίου ἁρμοστὴς μέλλει ἥξειν, for as
ΕΣ I heard from some one (that) Cleander the governor at Byzantium, intends
to come (Xen. Anab. 6, 4"*).
Ι on ae oe
1524 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 77
GOVERNING PREPOSITION OMITTED
1521. When the same preposition governs both the antecedent
and the relative, it is usually expressed only with the antecedent.
᾿Απὸ τῆς αὐτῆς ἀγνοίᾶς ἧσπερ πολλὰ προΐεσθε τῶν κοινῶν, by the same sense-
lessness by which you sacrifice many of your public interests (Dem. 18, 134).
Ἔν τρισὶ καὶ δέκα οὐχ ὅλοις ἔτεσιν οἷς ἐπιπολάζει, in not quite thirteen years in
which he has been uppermost (Dem. 9, 25).
OMISSION OF ANTECEDENT
1522. The antecedent of a relative is often omitted when it is
indefinite or when it is easily supplied from the context.
Ὃν οἱ θεοὶ φιλοῦσιν ἀποθνήσκει νέος (for οὗτος ὃν, etc.), he whom the gods
love dies young (Men. Mon. 128). “Ἃ δρῶσιν οἱ κρατοῦντες οὐχ ὁρῶ (for ταῦτα
ἃ, etc.), I do not see what those in power do (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 530). Ἐγὼ καὶ
ὧν ἐγὼ κρατῶ μενοῦμεν (ὧν for οὗτοι ὧν), I and those whom I command will
remain (Xen. Cyr. 5,1”). Στυγῶν μὲν ἥ μ᾽ ἔτικτεν (ἣ for ἐκείνην ἣν), hating her
who bore me (Eur. Alc. 838). Καλὸν τὸ θνήσκειν οἷς ὕβριν τὸ ζῆν φέρει (for
τούτοις ois, etc.), death is agreeable to those to whom living bears shame (Men.
Mon. 291). Ἦ Oiyo δῆθ᾽ οἵ μ᾽ ἔφῦσαν (for τούτων oi), shall I touch those who
begot me? (Eur. Jon 560). Ὅσοις ἐπιτύχοιεν ξυνελάμβανον (for τόσους ὅσοις),
ἡ they seized all they met with (Thue. 8, 14"). Ἔστιν ὅτῳ πλείω ἐπιτρέπεις i) τῇ
γυναικί; (for ἔστι τις ὅτῳ, etc.), is there any one to whom you trust more affairs
than to your wife? (Xen. Oec. 8, 12). Τὸ μανθάνειν ἐστὶ τὸ σοφώτερον γίγνεσθαι
περὶ ὃ μάνθανει τις (for περὶ τοῦτο ὅδ), to learn is to become wiser in that which
we learn (Plat. Theaet. 145°). “Eyyiyverai po εὔνοια πρὸς ods ἂν ὑπολάβω
εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχειν πρὸς ἐμέ (for πρὸς τούτους οὕς), a kindly feeling springs wp in me
towards those whom I regard as kindly disposed toward me (Xen. Mem. 2, 6).
1523. Norz.—It should be noted that the omitted antecedent is
always unemphatic and corresponds to the English wnemphatic per-
sonal or demonstrative pronoun used as the antecedent of the relative.
In a sentence like ἃ εἶχον, αὐτῷ ἔδωκα, what I had I gave him, the
antecedent of 4 is indefinite and easily supplied from the context.
But in a sentence like ἃ εἶχον, ταῦτα αὐτῷ ἔδωκα, what things 1 had,
those (particular things) I gave him, ταῦτα is emphatic referring to
something definite, and is not, strictly speaking, the true antecedent
of a. a.
1524. Norz.—For the oblique cases of αὐτός sometimes used in
place of the omitted antecedent, see 1486.
78 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 1525
1525. Nore.—For attraction and assimilation of the relative to
the case of its omitted antecedent, see 1530—1539.
1526. Norr.—The relative adverbs very frequently omit the ante-
cedent.
Tov τάφον....... μετενεγκεῖν οὗπερ ἀπέθανεν (for ἐνταῦθα οὗπερ), to remove
the tomb where he died (Thue. 1, 1945). "Αξω ὑμᾶς ἔνθα τὸ πρᾶγμα ἐγένετο
(for ἐκεῖσε ἔνθα), I will lead you to the place where the affair took place (Xen.
Cyr. 5, 4"). “Aokxes ὁπόθεν δόξεις φρονεῖν (for τοῦτο ὁπόθεν, a pronoun here
being the antecedent), practise that from which you will seem to be wise (Plat.
Gorg. 486°).—For attraction in this case also, see 1533—1539.
1527. Norn.—(a) Observe the expression, ἔστιν οἵ (ὧν, οἷς, οὖς),
some, there are (some) who, more frequent than the regular εἰσὶν οἵ
which, however, is almost always preferred for the nominative; also
ἔστιν οἵτινες, some (especially in questions).
Elow ot διαλέγονται, there are some who discuss (Xen. Hell. 6, 4%). Ἦσαν
δὲ οἱ καὶ πῦρ προσέφερον, there were some who brought fire (Xen. Anab. 5. 2"),
Πλὴν ᾿Αχαιῶν καὶ ἔστιν ὧν ἄλλων ἐθνῶν, except the Achaeans and some other
peoples (Thue. 3, 927). Ἔστιν οἷς βέλτιον τεθνάναι ἢ ζῆν, there are persons to
whom it is better to be dead than to live (Plat. Phaedo, 62*). Ὕποπτοι ἐγένοντο
ἔστιν ἐν οἷς, they came to be suspected in some things (Thuc. 5, 25°). Ἔστιν
οὕστινας ἀνθρώπους τεθαύμακας ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ ; are there any men whom you admire
for their genius? (Xen. Mem. 1, 45).
(6) Occasionally the indefinite antecedent is added. εἰσί τινες οἱ
κωλύσουσιν, there are some who will hinder (Lys. 13, 17).
(c) Observe these expressions: ἔστιν οὗ or ὅπου and ἔστιν iva, some-
where ; ἔστιν ὅτε, sometimes ; ἔστιν ἧ, iN some way ; ἔστιν ὅπως, sOMe-
how ; οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως, NOhOW ; οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως ov, in every possible way.
See 2371, 62.
4528. Nore.—1l. Observe that ὅσον sometimes means about.
Πελτασταὶ ὅσον διᾶκόσιοι, about (or as many as) 200 targeteers (Xen. 7, 2*).
2. So ὅσον is often used substantively or adverbially. ᾿Ἐλείπετο τῆς
νυκτὸς ὅσον σκοταίους διελθεῖν, enough of the night remained for them to cross
in the dark (Xen. Anab. 4, 1°). Ὅσον ἀποζῆν, sufficiently to live (Thue. 1,
3. So τοῖον and τόσον are used in Epic poetry with-
out the corresponding relative. Τύμβον...ἐπιεικέα τοῖον,
a tomb such as is fitting (Il. 23, 246). “Os τὸ μὲν ἄλλοτόσον
φοῖνιξ ἦν, which in every other respect, was red (Il. 23, 454),
1530 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 79
ASSIMILATION AND ATTRACTION
1529. Assimilation of Case of Relative-—aA relative in the ac-
cusative as the object of a verb is usually assimilated to the case
of its antecedent if that is a genitive or dative.
Ἐκ τῶν πόλεων ὧν Τισσαφέρνης ἔτι ἐτύγχανεν ἔχων (for ἂς ἐτύγχανεν ἔχων),
from the cities which Tissaphernes still happened to hold (Xen. Anab. 1, 15).
Τῶν ἐθνῶν ὧν ἡμεῖς ἴσμεν (for ἃ iopev), of the nations which we know (Xen.
Mem. 2, 1"). Ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίᾶς ἧς κέκτησθε (for ἣν
κέκτησθε), see that you prove yourselves men worthy of the freedom which you
possess (Xen. ἅπαν. 1, 7). Τῷ ἡγεμόνι πιστεύσομεν ᾧ ἂν Κῦρος δῷ (for ὃν ἂν
δῷ, we shall trust the guide whom Cyrus may give us (Xen. Anab. 1, 5.5). Τὰς
πόλεις διοικεῖν τοιούτοις ἤθεσιν οἵοις Evaydpas εἶχεν (for ἃ εἶχεν), to govern the
cities by such natural gifts as Evagoras had (Isoc. 9, 48).
1530. Norr.—(a) If the antecedent, which would be a genitive or
dative, is omitted, the same assimilation takes place; and a preposi-
tion, which would govern the genitive or dative of the omitted ante-
cedent, passes over to the relative. Buta relative in the nominative
masculine or feminine or a relative depending on a preposition remains
unchanged.
᾿Αμελῶ ὧν pe δεῖ mpadrrew (for ἐκείνων a), I neglect what I ought to do
(Xen. σὺν. δ, 1°). Χειμῶνος ὄντος οἵου λέγεις (for τοιούτου οἷον), the bad weather
being as you say (Xen. Anab. 5, 8°). ᾿Αφ᾽ ὧν ἴστε αὐτοὶ τὰ πράγματα κρΐνειν
δεῖ (for ἀπὸ τούτων a), from what you know you must decide the case (Dem.
19, 216). Πάντας εἰσφέρειν ἀφ᾽ ὅσων ἕκαστος ἔχει (for ἀπὸ τοσούτων ὅσα), that
all shall contribute from such means as each one has (Dem. 2, 31).. Βλάπτεσθαι
ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἡμῖν παρεσκεύασται (for ad’ ἐκείνων a), to be injured by what has been
prepared by us (Thuc. 7, 67°). Τὸ μέγεθος ὑπὲρ Sv συνεληλύθαμεν τηλικοῦτόν
ἐστιν, 80 great is the magnitude of the things concerning which we have met to
discuss (Isoc. 8, 2). Ἐμμένειν ols ἄρτι ἔδοξεν ἡμῖν (for τούτοις a), to abide by
what we agreed just now (Plat. Prot. 353”). Σὺν ois εἶχεν ἤει πρὸς τὸ τεῖχος, he
marched against the wall with what troops he had (Xen. Hell. 3, 5'*).—But ἢ
θίγω δῆθ᾽ οἵ μ᾽ ἔφῦσαν ; (for τούτων οἵ), shall I towch those who begot me? (Eur.
Ton, 560). ᾿Αναγκαῖον αὐτοῖς διαλέγεσθαι παρ᾽ ὧν ἂν λάβοιεν τὸν μίσθον (for
τούτοις παρ᾽ dv), it is necessary for them to talk with those from whom they
receive pay (Xen. Mem. 1, 2°).
(6) An emphatic demonstrative may take the place of the omitted
antecedent in spite of the assimilation.
᾿ΑΦ᾽ ὧν προσαιτεῖ καὶ δανείζεται, ἀπὸ τούτων διάγει (for ἀπὸ τούτων a), on
what he begs and borrows, on that he gets along (Dem. 8, 26).
80 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 1581
(c) By this assimilation ὧν, av? ὧν and ἐξ ὧν are used where we
would expect τούτων ὅτι or some similar expression and mean for this,
that, or simply, because.
Προσήκει χάριν αὐτοῖς ἔχειν ὧν ἐσώθησαν ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν, vt is proper for them to
be grateful for this, that they were saved by you (Dem. 16, 13). Ὑμᾶς ποιήσω.
τήμερον δοῦναι δίκην ἀν θ᾽ Sv ἐμὲ ζητεῖτον ἐνθένδ᾽ ἀφανίσαι, I will make you give
satisfaction because you sought to drive me hence (Ar. Plut. 434). Οὐκ ἐξ ὃν
ἂν χαρίζησθε ἀκροῶνται ὑμῶν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐξ Sv ἂν ἰσχύι περιγένησθε, they obey you
not because you grant them any favours, but because you are superior to them
in power (Thue. 3, 37°).
(d) In the same way (as in (6) above) ὅσῳ is sometimes used with-
out a preceding τοσούτῳ, and means since, because, inasmuch as.
Φίλος dv ἱκανῶς ἂν ὠφελοίην, ὅσῳ τὰ μὲν ᾿Αθηναίων οἶδα, τὰ δ᾽ ὑμέτερα
ἤκαζον, being a friend, I could help you because I know the plans of the
Athenians while I only quessed yours (Thue. 6, 922).
(6) For ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε (= ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὥστε), on condition that, often with the
infinitive, see 2226.—Similar expressions are ἀφ᾽ οὗ and ἐξ οὗ, since ;
ἐν ᾧ, while; εἰς 6, till; μέχρι (ἄχρι) οὗ, wntil, also to where, and the
like.
1531. Norz.—Occasionally a relative which would be in the dative
is assimilated to the genitive of its antecedent.
ὯΩν ἐντυγχάνω μάλιστα ἄγαμαί σε (for τούτων ois), of those whom I meet, I
admire you most (Plat. Prot. 361°). Tap’ ὧν βοηθεῖς οὐκ ἀπολήψει χάριν (for
mapa ἐκείνων ois), you will get no thanks from those whom you help (Aeschin.
2, 117).
15382, Norz.—Cases in which assimilation (as in 1529 and 1530)
does not take place are not rare, and occur mostly for euphony or
clearness.
Τοῖς σοφισταῖς οὐκ ἐγχωρεῖ μέμφεσθαι τούτῳ τῷ πράγματι ὃ αὐτοὶ
παιδεύουσιν, it is not for the sophists to blame that thing which they themselves
teach (Plat. Gorg. 520"). Ap’ οἴει rods θεοὺς ὠφελεῖσθαι ἀπὸ τούτων ἃ rap”
ἡμῶν λαμβάνουσιν ; and do you imagine that the gods are benefited by the gifts
which they receive from us? (Plat. Huthyphr. 15*).
41533. Nore.—Assimilation also occurs with the relative adverbs,
ὅθεν for ἐκεῖθεν οὗ or ἐκεῖθεν ol.
Διεκομίζοντο εὐθὺς ὅθεν ὑπεξέθεντο παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας (for ἐκεῖθεν of), they
immediately brought over their children and women from the places to which
they had withdrawn them for safety (Thuc. 1, 89*).
1534 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 81
1534. Norr.—(a)_ A peculiar assimilation occurs with οἷος when
this relative is to be the predicate in a sentence with the copula εἰμί.
In this case the copula is omitted and its subject as well as the pre-
dicate οἷος are put in the case of the omitted antecdent τοιοῦτος.
Πρὸς ἄνδρας τολμηροὺς οἵους καὶ ᾿Αθηναίους (for οἷοι καὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοί εἰσιν),
against such bold men as the Athenians (Thue. 7, 213). Χαριζόμενον οἵῳ σοι
ἀνδρί (for τοιούτῳ οἷος σὺ εἶ), pleasing a man such as you are (Xen. Mem. 2, 9°).
Tov ἄρχοντα δεῖ αὐτὸν εἶναι οἷόνπερ τὸν ἀγαθὸν ἰδιώτην (for τοιοῦτον οἷόσπερ ὁ
ἀγαθὸς ἰδιώτης ἐστίν), it is necessary that the commander himself be just like a
good private (Xen. Cyr. 2, 15). Χαλεπὸν ἤρου καὶ σχεδὸν εἰπεῖν οἵῳ ἐμοί ye
παντάπᾶσιν ἄπορον (for τοιούτῳ οἷος ἐγω), you ask a hard thing, as, for a man
like me, almost altogether impossible (Plat. Soph. 237°). So also when the
antecedent of οἷος is not omitted ; as, οὐκ ἄν που περὶ τοῦ τοιούτου ὁ λόγος
εἴη οἵου τοῦ ἑνός, the hypothesis will not be concerning such a thing as the one
(Plat. Par. 161°).—The same peculiar assimilation occurs with ἡλίκος ; as,
ἐκεῖνο δεινὸν τοῖσιν ἡλίκοισι νῷν, that is alarming for such as we (Ar.
_ Eccl. 469).
Observe that in this peculiar assimilation of οἷος (and ἡλίκος), the
article may be prefixed to οἷος and ἡλίκος when the antecedent is
omitted ; as in τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν, to such as we are, and in the last ex-
ample.
(6) The nominative of the predicate ofos is sometimes not assimi-
lated in case to the antecedent. Τοὺς οἵους tyeis μῖίσῶν cixo-
φάντας (for ὑμᾶς), hating such informers like you (Antiphon, 5, 78).
(c) Sometimes neither the subject nor the predicate ofos is assimi-
lated. Σόλων ἐμίσει τοὺς οἷος οὗτος ἀνθρώπους, Solon hated men such as this
one (Dem. 19, 254).
(4) Ὥσπερ is also assimilated like οἷος. Ἔδει ῥοφοῦντα rivew ὥσπερ
βοῦν (for ὥσπερ βοῦς πίνει), he had to drink sipping up like an ox (Xen. Anab.
4, 5"; Cyr. 1, 4").
(ὁ) By the same assimilation ὁστισοῦν, ὅστις δή, even ὅστις alone,
are used as adjectives meaning any whatsoever.
᾿Εγὼ πάσχειν ὁτιοῦν ἕτοιμος (for τι ὁτιοῦν ἐστι), I am ready to suffer any-
thing whatsoever (Dem. 4, 29). Ἐς τὴν "Aorevdov ἧτινι δὴ γνώμῃ ἀφικνεῖται,
with whatever intention it may have been, he went to Aspendus (Thue. 8, 87°).
Other indefinite relatives have the same peculiarity.
(f) Similarly ὅστις in ὅστις βούλει, any one you please, is assimilated.
So: Περὶ Πολυγνώτου ἣ ἄλλου ὅτου βούλει τῶν γραφέων (for ὅντινα
βούλει), about Polygnotus or any other painter you please (Plat. Ion, 5335).
(g) Note the stock phrases: ὅσοι μῆνες, monthly (as if τοσαυτάκις
6
82 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 1535
ὅσοι μῆνές εἰσιν); ὅσαι ἡμέραι Or ὁσημέραι, daily; ὅσα ἔτη or δὁσέτη,
yearly.
1535. Regressive Assimilation of Case of Antecedent.—The ante-
cedent is sometimes assimilated to the case of the relative.
Τὴν δύναμιν ἣν ὑμεῖς pare ἔχειν pe, ταύτης δεσπότης γενήσομαι (τὴν δύναμιν
ἣν for τῆς δυνάμεως ἥν), I will become master of that power which you say I
have (Ar. Plut. 200). Τὴν οὐσίᾶν ἣν κατέλιπεν οὐ πλείονος akia ἐστί ἢ τεττάρων
καὶ δέκα ταλάντων (τὴν οὐσίᾶν ἥ for ἡ οὐσία ἥν), the property which he left is not
worth more than fourteen talents (Lys. 19, 47). Ἔλεγον ὅτι πάντων ὧν
δέονται πεπρᾶγότες εἶεν (πάντων ὧν for πάντα ὧν), they said that they had
gained all things which they needed (Xen. Hell. 1, 4°).—So with adverbs; as,
καὶ ἄλλοσε ὅποι ἂν ἀφίκῃ ἀγαπήσουσί σε (ἄλλοσε for ἄλλοθι), and in other
places, wherever you may go, they will love you (Plat. Crito, 45°). Compare
the Latin, wrbem quam statuo vestra est (Verg. Aen. 1, 573).
1536. Norn.—In this way, οὐδείς is regressively assimilated to
ὅστις in the expression οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐ (for οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅστις ov), everyone.
Οὐδενὸς ὅτου οὐ πάντων ἂν ὑμῶν καθ᾽ ἡλικίαν πατὴρ εἴην (= οὐδείς ἐστι
πάντων ὑμῶν ὅτου ἂν καθ᾽ ἡλικίᾶν πατὴρ εἴην), there is no one of you all of
whom according to age I might not be the father (Plat. Prot. 317°). Οὐδένι
ὅτῳ οὐκ ἀποκρίνεται (= οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅτῳ οὐκ ἀποκρίνεται), he answers every one
(Plat. Meno, 70°). Οὐδένα ἔφασαν ὅντιν᾽ οὐ δακρύοντα ἀποστρέφεσθαι
(= οὐδεὶς ἦν ὅντιν᾽ οὐκ ἔφασαν δακρόοντα ἀποστρέφεσθαι), they said that not
one twrned back without shedding tears (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4”). οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐκ
ἀφέξεται, there is no one who will not refrain (Xen. Ven. 12, 14).
1537. Norz.—(a) Similarly θαυμαστός (θαυμάσιός) ἐστιν ὅσος, ὅσου,
etc., passes by regressive assimilation into θαυμαστός ὅσος, θαυμαστοῦ
ὅσου, etc. ἴ
ἢ Θαυμαστὴν ὅσην περὶ σέ mpobipiav ἔχει, he has a wonderful amount of
will for you (Plat. Ale. IT. 1015). Mera ἱδρῶτος θαυμαστοῦ ὅσου, with much
perspiring (Plat. Rep. 350°). The same idiom occurs with several other
adjectives ; as ὑπερφυής, ἀμήχανος.
(6) In the same way θαυμαστόν (θαυμάσιόν) ὡς becomes θαυμαστῶς
ὡς OF θαυμασίως ws.
Θαυμαστῶς ὡς ἐπεθύμησα ταύτης τῆς σοφίας, I was wonderfully desirous of
that philosophy (Plat. Phaedo, 96"). Θαυμασίως ὡς ἄθλιος γέγονεν, he is extra-
ordinarily miserable (Plat. Gorg. 471*). Ὑπερφυῶς as χαίρω, I am immensely
pleased (Plat. Symp. 173°).
1538. Attraction of Antecedent.—The antecedent is often drawn
into the relative clause and then agrees with the relative in case.
‘
1540 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 83
Eis δὲ ἣν ἀφίκοντο κώμην, μεγάλη ἦν (for ἡ κώμη εἰς ἣν ἀφίκοντο), the
village at which they arrived was large (Xen. Anab. 4, 4). Μὴ ἀφέλησθε ὑμῶν
αὐτῶν ἣ ν διὰ παντὸς ἀεὶ τοῦ χρόνου δόξαν κέκτησθε καλήν (for τὴν καλὴν δόξαν
ἣν κέκτησθε), do not deprive yourselves of the good reputation which you have
always possessed through all time (Dem. 20, 142).—Observe that the article
is here regularly omitted with the attracted antecedent ; except sometimes
in Plato and in the poets.
1539. Attraction and Assimilation combined.—When an ante-
cedent in the genitive or dative is attracted into a relative clause,
the case of the relative is generally assimilated to that of the at-
tracted antecedent.
Τούτους ἄρχοντας ἐποίει ἣ ς κατεστρέφετο χώρᾶς (for τῆς χώρᾶς ἣν κατεστρέ.
pero), he made them governors of the country he subdwed (Xen. Anab. 1, 9"),
᾿Αμαθέστατοί ἐστε, ὧν ἐγὼ οἶα Ἑλλήνων (for τῶν Ἑλλήνων obs οἶδα), you
are the most ignorant of the Greeks whom I know (Thue. 6, 40"). Ἐξ ffs τὸ
πρῶτον ἔσχε γυναικός (for ἐκ τῆς γυναικὸς ἣν τὸ πρῶτον ἔσχε), from the wife
which he took first (Dem. 57, 97). Ἐπορεύετο σὺν ἡ εἶχε δυνάμει (for σὺν τῇ
δυνάμει ἣν εἶχεν), he marched with the force which he had (Xen. Hell. 4, 1°).
—Observe that here also the attracted antecedent Joses its article.
a
RELATIVE NOT REPEATED
1540. When two relatives belonging to the same sentence have
the same antecedent but would stand in different cases, the second
relative is commonly omitted and it is then usually replaced by a
personal, less often by demonstrative pronoun.
᾿Αριαῖος δὲ, ὃν ἡμεῖς ἠθέλομεν βασιλέᾷ καθιστάναι, καὶ ἐδώκαμεν καὶ ἐλάβομεν
πιστά (for ᾧ ἐδώκαμεν καὶ ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἐλάβομεν), and Ariaeus, whom we wished to
make king, and to whom we gave and from whom we received pledges, etc, (Xen.
Anab. 3, 35). Ti ἐστι τοῦτο ὃ φὴς σὺ μέγιστον ἀγαθὸν εἶναι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις καὶ
σὲ δημιουργὸν εἶναι αὐτ οὔ (for καὶ οὗ σὲ δημιουργόν) ; what is this which you say
is the greatest good to man and of which you are the creator ? (Plat. Gorg. 4024).
Ἧμᾶς, οἷς κηδεμὼν μὲν οὐδεὶς πάρεστιν, ἐστρατεύσαμεν δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν, ὡς
δοῦλον ἀντὶ βασιλέως ποιήσοντες, τί ἂν οἰόμεθα παθεῖν ; we who have no relation-
ship (with the king), and have marched against him intending to make him a
slave instead of a king, what do we expect to suffer at his hands? (Xen. Anab.
3, 1). “Ὃ δὴ διώκει μὲν ἅπᾶσα ix) καὶ τούτου ἕνεκα πάντα πράττει, this
which every soul pursues and for the sake of which does everything (Plat. Rep.
505° ; Lys. 25, 11).—In this way a demonstrative adverb takes the place of a
relative adverb ; as, ἔν θα βασιλεύς re μέγας δίαιταν ποιέεται, Kai τῶν χρημάτων
84 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 1541
οἱ θησαυροὶ ἐνταῦθά εἰσι, where the Great King has his residence and where
the treasuries of his money are (Hat. 5, 49").
1541. Norr.—But the relative is sometimes repeated, especially
if the second is in the same case as the first, also if the demonstrative
antecedent of the relative follows.
Ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίᾷς ἣ ς κέκτησθε καὶ ἧς ὑμᾶς εὐδαι-
μονίζω, see that you prove yourselves worthy of the liberty which you possess and
for which I account you happy (Xen. 1, 7. ον ἔφασκεν ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν ἠνδραπο-
δίσθαι καὶ wap οὗ τοσοῦτα χρήματα ἡμᾶς ἔχειν, τοῦτον ἐξαιρούμενος eis
ἐλευθερίαν, claiming this man as a freeman who, he said, was carried into
slavery by us, and from whom we had so much money (Isoc. 17, 14).
RELATIVES οἷος, ὅσος, AND ws IN EXCLAMATIONS
1542. The relatives οἷος, ὅσος, and ὡς are used in exclamations.
Oia ποιεῖς, ὦ ἑταῖρε ; what are you doing, O comrade? (Plat. Euthyphr. 15°).
“Ὅσα πράγματα ἔχεις, how much trouble you have! (Xen. Cyr. 1, 34). Ὡς ἡδὺς
εἶ, how sweet you are! (Xen. Cyr. 7, 3”). ‘Qs καλός μοι ὁ πάππος, how hand-
some my grandfather is! (Xen. Cyr. 1, 37).
1543. Sometimes these relatives are used where the sentence
on which they depend contains the idea of “considering,” “ regard-
ing’”’ (λογιζόμενος).
᾿Απέκλᾶον τὴν ἐμαυτοῦ τύχην οἵου ἀνδρὸς ἑταίρου ἐστερημένος εἴην, I
bewailed my own lot, considering what kind of man I had been deprived of as a
companion (Plat. Phaedo, 117°). Karéxavoe ras κώμᾶς, ὅπως φόβον ἐνθείη καὶ
τοῖς ἄλλοις οἷα πείσονται, he burned the villages in order to throw terror into
the others as to what they would suffer (Xen. Anab, 7, 4’). Ἐὐδαίμων μοι ἀνὴρ.
ἐφαίνετο ὡς ἀδεῶς καὶ γενναίως ἐτελεύτα, the man seemed to me to be happy,
considering how fearlessly and nobly he died (Plat. Phaedo, 58°).
1544, Nore.—The indefinite relatives ὁποῖος and ὁπόσος are seldom
used in exclamations, here some imperative like εἰπέ is understood
(Lys. 30, 4; Plat. Gorg. 522").
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
1545. The interrogative pronouns and adverbs are used in
direct questions; the indefinite relatives are used in indirect
questions; but the interrogatives are very often used in indirect:
questions.
i ee a ae eee
‘
1550 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 85
Tis λέγει; who is speaking? Ti βούλεται; what doeshe want? Toi ἦλθεν ;
whither did he go? ᾿ἩἨρόμην ὅστις (or τίς) λέγοι, I asked who was speaking.
*Hpdpnv 6 τι (or ri) βούλοιτο, I asked what he wanted. Ἤρόμην ὅποι (or ποῖ)
ἔλθοι, I asked whither he had gone. “Hpero 6 τι εἴη τὸ σύνθημα, he asked what
the signal was (Xen. Anab. 1, 8"). Ai γυναῖκες ἠρώτων αὐτούς, τίνες εἶεν, the
women asked them who they were (Xen. Anab. 4, 5). ἘἨρώτησε τοὺς mpo-
φύλακας ποῦ ἂν ἴδοι Πρόξενον, he asked the advanced guards where they could see
Proxenus (Xen. Anab. 2, 4°).
1546. Nors.—For interrogative pronouns with the article, see 1399,
1547. Norr.— When the question is repeated by the respondent,
he always uses the indefinite relative.
A. σὺ δ᾽ εἶ ris ἀνδρῶν ; B. ὅστις εἴμ᾽; ἐγὼ Μέτων, A. who of men art thou?
B. Who I am? I am Meton (Ar. Av. 997). A. πηνίκ᾽ ἐστὶν dpa τῆς ἡμέρᾶς;
B. ὁπηνίκα; σμῖκρόν τι μετὰ peonuSpiav, A. What time of day then is it? B.
What time? Ai little past noon (Ar. Av. 1498).
1548. An interrogative is often used as a predicate-adjective.
Ti τοῦτ᾽ ἔλεξας ; what is this that thou hast said? = lit. being what, hast
thou said this? (Eur. Bacch. 1033). Τίνας τούσ δ᾽ εἰσορῶ; who are these
that I see? (Eur. Or. 1347). Ποῖα ταῦτα λέγεις ; what is this that you
say ? (Plat. Cratyl. 391°). Tis οὗτος σῶμα τοὐμὸν οὐκ ἐᾷς κεῖσθαι ; who art
thou that dost not permit my body to lie? (Eur. Hec. 501). Tis ὁ πόθος
αὐτοὺς ἵκετο ; what is this longing which has come wpon them? (Soph. Phil. 601)
Πόσον τι ἄγει τὸ στράτευμα; how large is the army which he is leading? (Xen.
Cyr. 2, 15.
1549. The interrogative may belong to a participle or to some
other dependent word.
Ti ἀδικηθεὶς ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ viv τὸ τρίτον ἐπιβουλεύεις por; in what have you
been wronged by me that you plot against me now for the third time ? lit. having
been wronged in what ? (Xen. Anab. 1, 6°). "Hpora τὸν θεόν, ri ποιῶν ἂν
νίκην λάβοι, you asked the god what to do to obtain victory, lit. by doing what
(γοῦν. 99). Τοὺς πῶς διακειμένους λάβοιεν ἂν μαθητάς ; how would
the pupils that they get be disposed in character ? = lit. those how disposed (Isoc.
15, 222). Πὸθ᾽ ἃ χρὴ πράξετε; ἐπειδὰν τί γένηται; when will you do your
duty? what are you waiting for? = lit. when what has happened? (Dem. 4,
10). Κρέοντα toh...j£ovra..."Orws τί δράσῃ; know that Creon is coming. In
order to do what? (Soph. Oed. Col. 396).
1550. Nore.—An interrogative expression which belongs attribu-
tively to a noun with the article, stands between the article and the
noun.
86 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 1552
Τῆς περὶ τί πειθοῦς ἡ ῥητορική ἐστι τέχνη ; concerning what is rhetoric the
art of ρεγϑιιαβίον ? (Plat. Gorg. 4845). Τὸν ἐκ roids πόλεως στρατηγὸν προσδοκῶ
ταῦτα πράξειν ; from what city do I expect a leader to do this? (Xen. Anab-
3, 1").
1551. Norre.—For iva τί, see 2047.—For τί μαθών and τί παθών ;
why in the world ? see 2252.
1552. Two or more interrogative words can belong to the same
verb without a connective intervening.
Τίνας ὑπὸ τίνων εὕροιμεν ἂν μείζονα evepyernuévous ἢ παῖδας ὑπὸ γονέων ;.
whom could we find more benefited by any one (lit. by whom) than children by
their parents? (Xen. Mem. 2, 33). ᾿Αντὶ ποίων ποῖα μετατεθέντα εὐδαίμονα
πόλιν ἀπεργάζοιτ᾽ dv; what things substituted for other things (lit. for what
things) would make a state happy? (Plat. Leg. 683°). Tis πόθεν μολών σοι
μαρτυρήσει; who, and whence coming, will bear witness to you? (Soph. Trach.
421). Πᾶς οἶδεν ὁποῖα ὁποίοις δυνατὰ κοινωνεῖν; does every one know what
letters will unite with what? (Plat. Soph. 253°).
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS τὶς AND ἄλλος
1553. The indefinite pronoun τὶς, τὲ, some, any, often equivalent.
to a certain or simply a or an, may be used substantively or ad-
jectively. Being enclitic it never stands at the beginning of a
sentence.
Ξύλα tis σχισάτω, let some one split wood (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3%). Tay’ οὖν
εἴποι τις ἄν, perhaps, then, some one might say (Xen. Cyr. 5, 4”). "Hv τι τοῦ
τείχους ἀσθενές, some part of the wall was weak (Thue. 7, 45). "Ανθρωπός tis,
some man, any man, a certain man, or simply a (certain) man. Εἶδον ἄνθρω-
mov τινα, I saw a (certain) man.
1554. Norr.—(a) Sometimes τὶς, ri, means indefinitely, a sort of,
about, rather, somewhat, and the like, especially with adjectives and
numerals.
Ὃ σοφιστὴς πέφανται ἔμπορός τις, the sophist has appeared as a kind of
trader (Plat. Soph. 231°). Ἐγώ ris, ὡς ἔοικε, Sve padns, I am, as it seems,
a rather dull fellow (Plat. Rep. 358"). Τοιαῦτα ἄττα διελέχθησαν, things.
of some such kind were discussed (Plat. Symp. 174°). Ἐγὼ φιλέταιρός τις
εἶμι, 1 am somewhat fond of my friends (Plat. Lys, 211°). "Ev reve βραχεῖ
χρόνῳ, in a pretty short time (Plat. Leg. 698°). Πόσον τι πλῆθος συμμάχων ;
about how great a mass of allies? (Eur. Heracl. 668). ‘Extra τινας, about.
seven (Thuc. 7, 34°). Πόσοι τινες; about how many? (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1%).
1560 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 87
Ὀλέγοι τινες, some few (Xen. Hell. 6, 1°). Ov πολλοί τινες, some few
(Thue. 6, 51°).
(6) Similarly τὶ is joined to adverbs.
Διαφερόντως τι, particularly (Thue. 1, 138°). Σχεδόν τι, pretty nearly
(Thue 3, 68°; Plat. Charm. 1644). Μᾶλλόν τι, rather more (Xen. Anab. 4, 8%)
Οὐ πάνυ τι, even somewhat (Xen. Anab. 6, 1%).
1555. Norr.—Sometimes τὶς, ri, means somebody (something) of
importance.
Ηὔχεις τις εἶναι, thou didst vaunt thyself to be somebody (Eur. El. 939).
Λέγειν τι, to say something, of note, to the point (Plat. Lach. 195°). Ovovrai
τι εἶναι, ὄντες οὐδενὸς ἄξιοι, they think they are something, when they are worth
nothing (Plat. Apol. 41°).—Similarly οὐδέν is used ; as, οὐδὲν λέγειν οἶμαι σε,
TI believe you are saying nothing sensible (Ar. Av. 986).
1556. Norz.—Observe πᾶς τις and ἕκαστός τις, any one or every
one (you please).
1557. Norz.—Sometimes τὶς in the singular refers to more than
one person, and is then equivalent to many a or to each one.
Τῶν ἐν τῇ ὀλιγαρχίᾳ ἀποθανόντων ἴσως τις ἦν πονήρος, perhaps many a one
of those who perished in the oligarchy was bad (Lys. 80, 18). Χρὴ δειπνεῖν ὅ τι
τις ἔχει, whatever (every) one has he must dine on (Xen. Anab. 2, 24). Ed
μέν τις δόρυ θηξάσθω, let every one well sharpen his spear (Il. 2, 382).
1558. The indefinite ἄλλος means another, as ἄλλη πόλις, an-
other state. With the article, ὁ ἄλλος generally means the rest,
sometimes, the other.
Ἧ ἄλλη ‘Eas, the rest of Greece. Oi ἄλλοι σύμμαχοι, the other allies or
the rest of the allies.
1559. Norz.—The object with which ἄλλος is contrasted regularly
precedes it.
Ξενοφῶν καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι στρατηγοί, Xenophon and the other generals (Xen.
Anab. 6, 6°).—But if the contrasted object is emphatic, ἄλλος precedes ; as,
κατὰ ἔθνη δὲ ἄλλα τε καὶ τὸ Πὲλασγικόν, according to the different tribes,
and especially the Pelasgian (Thue. 1, 35). So also ἄλλως and τὰ ἄλλα used
adverbially ; as, καί με...τά τ᾽ ἄλλα ἐτίμησε καὶ pipiovs ἔδωκε dSapeixous, he
gave me ten thousand darics, besides honowring me in other respects (Xen. Anab.
1, 3°; Cyr. 1, 6").
1560. Norz.—The article is always omitted in the combination
ἄλλος ἄλλο, used like the Latin alius aliud, one one thing and another
88 NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE _ 1561
another or the one this and the other that; also in ἄλλος ἄλλοθι, alius
alibi, ἄλλος ἄλλοσε, alius. alio, ἄλλος ἄλλοθεν, alius aliunde, etc.
Οὗτοι ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει, these say, one one thing, and another another (Xen.
Anab. 2, 1”). Διέδωκα ἄλλα ἄλλοις ἄγειν, I distributed some to one man, some
to another (Xen. Anab. 5, 8").—But if the relation is reciprocal, the reciprocal
pronoun is used; as, κωλύσουσιν ἀλλήλους μάχεσθαι, they prevent each other
from fighting (Xen. Cyr. 6, 417).
1561. Νοτε.---Αλλος καὶ ἄλλος means one and then another, one
or two, several.
Μετὰ τοῦτον ἄλλος ἀνέστη ὁμοίως καὶ ἄλλος, after this man one man arose im
the same way and then another (Xen. Anab. 7, 6; Cyr. 4, 1°).
1562. Norz.—Often ἄλλος, and sometimes ἕτερος, are joined attri-
butively to a substantive, where the substantive is properly to be con-
sidered as an appositive to them; they are then to be translated by
besides.
Τοὺς ὁπλίτας καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἱππέᾶς (for τοὺς ἄλλους, τοὺς imméas), the
hoplites and the cavalry besides (Xen. Hell. 2, 4°). Ov γὰρ ἦν χόρτος οὐδὲ
ἄλλο οὐδὲν δένδρον, for there was no grass, neither any tree (Xen. Anab. 1, 5°).
Τέρων χωρεῖ μεθ᾽ ἑτέρου vedviov, an old man comes with a young man besides,
= with another person, a young man (Ar. Eccl. 849).—For μόνος τῶν
ἄλλων, see 1719.
THE CASES
1563. The original Indo-European language, from which the
Greek is descended, had eight cases, of which the Greek lost three;
the ablative, the locative, and the instrwmental. The functions of these
lost cases were assumed by the genitive and dative. . The Greek geni-
tive stands for the ablative with expressions of separation, sowrce, and
comparison. The Greek dative corresponds partly to the Latin dative,
partly to the Latin ablative. It is equivalent to a locative, in answer
to the question where ? and when ?—and to the instrumental in answer
to the question with what ?
NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE
1564. The nominative is used as the subject of a finite verb
(1209); and in the predicate after a finite verb signifying to be, to
become, to be called, ete. (1204, 1208). .
rs be ss
“κῃ
A ~*~
eS =~” - -
᾿ -
1572 NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE 89
1565. The nominative is used independently: (a) in names and
titles; as, Κύρου ᾿Ανάβασις, the Expedition of Cyrus ; Βιβλίον Πρῶτον,
Book First ;—(b) in speaking of names or words as such.
Προσείληφε τὴν τῶν πονηρῶν κοινὴν ἐπωνυμίᾶν, σῦ κοφάν τη ς, he obtained
the common appellation of the vile, ““ sycophant” (Aeschin. 2,99). Tapeyyia
ὁ Κῦρος σύνθημα, Ζεὺς ξύμμαχος καὶ ἡγεμών, Cyrus gave out as the
watch-word, ““ Zeus, owr ally and leader” (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3538).
1566. 1. The nominative is sometimes used in beginning a sentence,
although the construction is then changed.
"EmOipay ὁ Kipos..., ἔδοξεν αὐτῷ, Cyrus desiring,...it seemed best to
him (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5°”).
2. Similarly the nominative is occasionally used in specifications.
"AhXous δ᾽ ὁ μέγας... Νεῖλος ἔπεμψεν: Σουσισκἄνης, Unyaorayor, and others
the vast Nile hath sent, Susiscanes, Pegastagon (Aesch. Pers. 33).
Such changes of construction are called analcoluthon and occur
much oftener in poetry than in prose.
1567. The vocative, with or without ὦ, is used in addressing a
_ person or thing.
Ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, O men of Athens! (Plat. Apol. 30°). °Q κάκιστε ἀνθρώ-
πων ᾿Αριαῖε, O! most wicked of men, Ariaeus! (Xen. Anab. 2, 5”).
1568. Nore.—In exclamations, the nominative is used.
Ὦ radas ἐγώ, O wretched me! (Soph. Aj. 981).
1569. Norre.—An appositive to a vocative is in the nominative.
"2 ἄνδρες οἱ παρόντες, you gentlemen who are present (Plat. Prot. 337°).
"It μὲν οὖν σύ, ὁ πρεσβύτατος, go, then, you who are the eldest (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5").
1570. Norz.—When a nominative with the article appears to stand
in the vocative, it is to be considered as an appositive to ov or ὕμεῖϊς
understood.
"OQ Κῦρε καὶ of ἄλλοι Πέρσαι, Ὁ Cyrus and you other Persians (Xen. Cyr.
3, 3”). ‘O παῖς, ἀκολούθει δεῦρο, boy, follow straightways (Ar. Ran, 521).
1571. Nore.—Observe the use of οὗτος as a vocative, equivalent
to you there!
Οὗτος ᾿Απολλόδωρος, οὐ περιμένεις ; you there, Apollodorus, will you not
stay ? (Plat. Symp. 172*). Here also σύ is understood.
1572. Norz.—The nominative is occasionally used for the vocative,
especially in poetry.
90 ACCUSATIVE 1573
"OQ yn καὶ ἥλιε καὶ σύνεσις, O earth and sun and common sense (Aeschin.
3, 260). In prose the nominative of a name is probably never so used if it.
has a vocative form.
ACCUSATIVE
1573. The fundamental use of the accusative is to denote the direct
object of a transitive verb. Besides this, it is also employed adverbi-
ally and in various other functions which cannot be reduced to a single
system.
ACCUSATIVE OF DrrRECT OBJECT
1574. The direct object of a transitive verb is put in the ac-
cusative; as of “EdAnves ἐνίκησαν τὴν Ξέρξου στρατιᾶν, the
Greeks conquered the army of Xerxes.
When the sentence is changed to the passive construction, the
object-accusative becomes the nominative; as 7 Ξέρξου στρατιὰ ἐντκήθη,
ὑπὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων, the army of Xerxes was conquered by the Greeks.
1575. Nore.—In tragedy we sometimes find a noun
becoming a direct object by attraction from its proper
case. Δεσπόταν yous κατάρξω, I will begin lamentations
for my master (Eur, And. 1199).
1576. Nore.—Oceasionally an adjective or noun of verbal force
takes an object-accusative in the place of the regular object-genitive.
Ἐπιστήμονες ἦσαν Ta προσήκοντα, they were acquainted with their
duties (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3°). "Εξαρνοί εἰσι τὰ ὡμολογουμένα, they deny what
has been acknowledged (Isae. 5, 26). Ta μετέωρα φροντιστής, a ponderer on
the things above (Plat. Apol. 18”). ΣῈὲ..-φύξιμος, able to escape thee (Soph.
Ant. 788).
1577. Many verbs which govern a direct object in English take in
Greek the genitive or dative or a prepositional construction. On the
other hand, the accusative in Greek follows many verbs which in
English take different constructions. Among the latter the following
are specially important: ἀποδιδράσκω, run away from ; δύναμαι in the
sense of to be equivalent to ; ἐπιλείπω, fail, be wanting, give out ; ém-
opxéw, to swear falsely (by) ; λανθάνω, lie hid, escape the notice of ; μένω,
wait for ; ὄμνῦμι, swear or swear by ; σϊγάω and σιωπάω, be silent about;
φεύγω, flee from ; φθάνω, anticipate, catch up to; εὖ (κακῶς) λέγω, speak
well (alc) of ; εὖ (κακῶς) ποιέω, treat well (ill).
1580 ACCUSATIVE 91
Ὁ mais pe ἀπέδρα, the boy ran away from me (Plat. Prot. 316°). ‘Oo de
σίγλος δύναται ἑπτὰ ὀβολούς, the siglus is equivalent to seven oboli (Xen.
Anab. 1, 5°). Τὸ στράτευμα ὃ σῖτος ἐπέλιπε, the grain failed (gave out)
the army (Xen. Anab. 1, 5°). Obra θεοὺς ἐπιωρκήκᾶασιν, these men
have perjured themselves before the gods (Xen. Anab. 3,1”). Θεοὺς... «λανθάνειν,
to escape the notice of the gods (Plat. Rep. 365°). Oi...xa:pol οὐ μένουσι τὴν
ἡμετέρᾶν βραδυτῆτα, the times do not wait for our slowness (Dem. 4, 37).
"Ομνῦμι θεοὺς καὶ θεάς, I swear by gods and goddesses (Xen. Anab. 6, 6).
"“Qpnoce τὴν εἰρήνην, he swore the peace (Dem. 18, 32);—and passively,
Ζεὺς ὀμώμοται, Zeus has been invoked; ἡ εἰρήνη ὀμώμοται, the peace has been.
sworn. Τὰς ἐν μέσῳ σϊγῶ rixas, I am silent about the misfortunes which
intervened (Eur. Or. 16). Πένητα φεύγει mas τις ἐκποδὼν φίλος, every
friend flees away from a poor man (Eur. Med. 561). Φθάνουσιν ἐπὶ τῷ
ἄκρῳ γενόμενοι τοὺς πολεμίου ς, they arrived on the height before the enemy
(Xen. Anab. 3, 4”). Ed λέγειν τὸν εὖ λέγοντα, to speak well of one who speaks.
well himself (Xen. Mem. 2, 3°). Τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς εὖ ποιεῖν, treat well the good
(Isoc. 1, 29). Passive to εὖ (κακῶς) λέγειν and ποιεῖν are εὖ (κακῶς) ἀκούειν
and πάσχειν (see 1888, and 1617, 2).—For other cases in which the Greek
and English constructions differ, see the Genitive and Dative.
1578. Norr.—l. Λυμαίνεσθαί twa, or τινι, to maltreut, outrage, per-
secute.—'EvoyAetv twa or τινι, to trouble, molest, annoy.—Aovdopetv τινα,
but λοιδορεῖσθαί τινι, both meaning to ause, revile, rail αἱ.----Μέμφεσθαί
twa, to biame, disparage ; μέμφεσθαί τινι, to reproach any one (with
anything, τὶ).
2. Λυσιτελεῖν, to benefit, βοηθεῖν, help, ἕπεσθαι and ἀκολουθεῖν, follow,
govern the dative.— Ὠφελεῖν, to help, benefit, with the dative, is poetic
(also late).
1579. Norz.—Observe these expressions :—
Τύπτεσθαί twa, to mourn for a person by striking oneself
(in Herodotus, as 2, 132); so also κόπτεσθαί τινα (Eur. T'ro.
623). Τίὥλλεσθαί τινα, to mourn for a person by tearing one’s
hair (Il. 24, 711).—Similar to these are χορεύειν θεόν, to
celebrate a god by a choral dance (Pind. Isth. 1,7; Soph. Ant.
1152). Ἑλίσσειν θεόν, to celebrate a god by dancing (Eur.
Her. Fur. 690).
1580. Nore.—The poets sometimes use the imper-
sonal δεῖ, there is need, with the accusative of the person
and the genitive of the thing (thus ἐμὲ δεῖ τινος for ἐμοὶ
δεῖ τινος).
92, ACCUSATIVE 1581
Σὲ δεῖ Προμηθέως, you have need of a Prometheus (Aesch.
Pro. 86).—In epic poetry χρή is similarly used; as, οὔ oe χρὴ
ἔτ᾽ αἰδοῦς, thou hast no longer need of modesty (Od. 3, 14).—So
also χρεώ (which is sometimes combined with ἕκει, γίγνεται,
or ἐστί) ; as Od. 6, 136; Od. 4, 634; II. 21, 322.
1581. 1. Verbs signifying to feel shame before, to be afraid, and
to guard against are transitive and take an object-accusative.
Οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθε οὔτε θεοὺς οὔτε ἀνθρώπους, you feel no shame either before
gods or before men (Xen. Anab. 2, 855), Τοὺς ἐναντίους ἐκπεπληγμένος εἰμί, I am
in great dread of the adversaries (Thuc. 3, 824). Τὰς μάχᾶς θαρρεῖν, not to fear
battles (Xen. Anab. 3, 2”). Μᾶλλον εὐλαβοῦ ψόγον ἢ κίνδῦνον, guard against
reproach rather than danger (Isoc. 1, 43).
2. Such verbs are: αἰδέομαι, feel shame, respect ; αἰσχύνομαι, be
ashamed ; αἰσχύνομαι ὑπέρ τινος, be ashamed of any one ;----δέδια, φοβέο-
pat, be afraid of, fear ; ἐκπλήσσομαι, καταπλήσσομαι, be in great dread
of ; tpéw, dread, tremble before ; φυλάσσομαι, εὐλαβέομαι, guard against ;
Oappéw, take courage, fear not (θαρρέω τινι, confide in).
1582. Norr.—Here belongs the expression τεθνάναι τῷ δέει (Or
φόβῳ) τινά (ri), to fear any one (or anything) like death (as Dem. 4, 45;
19, 81).
1583. Some verbs are used both transitively and intransitively,
especially such as denote feeling and motion.
Πλεῖν, to sail; πλεῖν θάλασσαν, to sail the sea. Oixeiv, to reside; οἰκεῖν
οἰκίαν, to inhabit or to manage a house. ‘Oddy ἰέναι, πορεύεσθαι, to go (over)
aroad. Σπεύδειν, to be earnest; σπεύδειν τι, to hasten anything. Δακρύειν,
to weep; δακρύειν τὴν daruyiav, to weep over the misfortune. Δυσχεραίνω τὴν
ἀδικίαν, I bear my wrong grievously. Τρέχειν τὸ στάδιον, to run in the course.
1584. Norr.—Verbs signifying to lead can also take an accusative
of the way. ‘Padiav καὶ βραχεῖαν ὁδὸν ἐπὶ τὴν eddSapoviay ἄξω σε, I shall
lead you an easy and short road to happiness (Xen. Mem. 2, 1”).
1585. Many intransitive verbs become transitive by being com-
pounded with prepositions.
Διαβαίνειν ποταμόν, to cross a river. Διέρχεσθαι τὸ ὄρος, to go over the
mountain. Ὑπερβάλλειν τάφρον, to cross a trench. Παραπλεῖν νῆσον, to sail
along an island. Παραβαίνειν τοὺς νόμους, to transgress the laws. Μετέρχεσθαί
τινα, to go after any one. Περιΐστασθαι λόφον, to stand around a hill. Ὑπο-
δύεσθαι πόνον, to submit to labour. ᾿Ἐκβαίνειν τὰ τριάκοντα ἔτη, to pass beyond
thirty years.
——————
—_
1588 ACCUSATIVE 93
1586. Many verbs have as the direct object an accusative of
effect, which expresses the result of the action of the verb; as
γράφω ἐπιστολήν, I write a letter.
Τέμνειν ἱμάντας, to cut straps. Διώρυχα τέμνειν, to cut a canal. Σπονδὰς
τέμωμεν, let us make a truce (Eur. Hel. 1235). Πρεσβεύειν εἰρήνην, negotiate
a treaty, as ambassadors (Dem. 19, 134). Xopnyav...Avoviova, celebrating the
Dionysia (Dem. 21, 64). Νόμισμα κόπτειν μολύβδου, to strike coin of lead
(Hat. 3, 56”).—Compare such expressions as, to break a hole, to strike a bridge,
with to break a stick, to strike a man.
CoGNATE-ACCUSATIVE
1587. 1. Many verbs, transitive as well as intransitive, may
take an accusative of kindred meaning. Such an accusative,
usually with an attribute, repeats the signification of the verb.
2. The cognate-accusative becomes the nominative in the passive
construction. See 1882, 7. For the cognate-accusative and ordinary
object-accusative with the same verb, see 1615—1617.
1588. 1. The cognate-accusative may be of kindred meaning and
Sormation with the verb; as νέκην νικᾶν, to win a victory.
“Apxew ἀρχήν, to hold an office. Maynv μάχεσθαι, to fight a battle. TMopmiy
πέμπειν, to conduct a procession. ᾿Αγῶνα ἀγωνίζεσθαι, to undergo a contest.
Δικάζειν δίκην, to judge a law-suit. Φυλακὰς φυλάσσειν, to keep guard (Xen.
παν. 2, 6). Κοινῇ τὸν πόλεμον πολεμούντων, let them wage the war together
(Thue. 8, 587). Δουλεύειν δουλείᾶν αἰσχράν, to be subject to a shameful servi-
tude (Xen. Mem. 1, 5°). ᾿ἘἘτριηράρχησε τριηραρχίᾶς, he performed the duty of a
trierarch (Dem. 45, 85). Mavias μαίνεσθαι, to rage with madness (Ar. Thesm.
793). Οὐκ ἂν ἔπεσε τότε τοιοῦτον πτῶμα, it would not then have had such a fall
(Plat. Lach. 181°). Κινδυνεύων τὸν ἔσχατον κίνδῦνον, being in the greatest
danger (Plat. Apol. 34°). Zuvéduye τὴν φυγὴν ταύτην, he shared in this banish-
ment (Plat. Apol. 21"). Πάσας ἡδονὰς ἥδεσθαι, to enjoy all pleasures (Plat.
Phil. 63*).
2. The cognate-accusative may be merely of kindred meaning ;
as ζῆν βίον, to lead a life.
Μάχην vixay, to win a battle. Διώκειν δίκην, to prosecute a suit. Φεύγειν
δίκην, to defend a suit. Φεύγειν γράφην, to defend an impeachment. ‘Qs ἀκίν-
δῦνον βίον ζῶμεν, how secure a life we lead (Eur. Med. 248). Πάσᾶς νόσους
κάμνουσι, they are sick with all diseases (Plat. Rep. 408°). Ἐξῆλθόν τινας καὶ
MD ras ἐξόδους, they also went on other expeditions (Xen. Hell.1, 2"). Τὸν ἱερὸν
πόλεμον ἐστράτευσαν, they engaged in the Sacred War (Thue. 1, 112°).
94 ACCUSATIVE 1589
1589. Norr.—The attribute is required with the cognate-accusative
when its omission would cause a mere tautology; thus βασιλείαν
βασιλεύειν Or πόλεμον πολεμεῖν for simple βασιλεύειν or πολεμεῖν would
be inadmissable. But when the cognate-accusative alone is more
definite than the verb itself, the article may be omitted.
᾿Αρχὴν ἄρχειν, to hold an office. Φόρον αὐτοῖς ἔφερον, they paid them tribute
(Xen. Anab. 5, 5’). Οἱ τὴν πόμπὴν πέμψαντες, those who conducted the pro-
cession (Thue. 6, 56°).
1590. The cognate-accusative may limit the meaning of the
verb ; as νικᾶν ᾽Ολύμπια, to gain an Olympic victory (Thue. 1, 126°).
Νικᾶν δίκην, to win α suit. “Hrracda δίκην, to be beaten in a suit. Οἱ
νϊκῶντες Tas γνώμᾶς, those prevailing with their opinions (Plat. Gorg. 4965).
Ψήφισμα νικᾷ, he carries a decree = he wins with a decree (Aeschin. 3, 68).
Tdpous εἱστίᾶσεν, he celebrated a wedding-feast (Isae. 8,18). Βοηδρόμια πέμπειν,
to celebrate the Boedromia with a procession (Dem. 3, 31).—So also, ῥείτω γάλα,
let it flow milk (Theocr. 5, 124). Ἢ βουλὴ...ἔβλεψε varv, the Senate looked ἢ
mustard (Ar. Eq. 629), and the like.
1591. Nore.—Here belongs the poetic βαίνειν πόδα,
to step the foot (as in Eur. Heracl. 802), formed on the ©
analogy of βαίνειν βῆμα, to step a footstep. So also other
similar poetic expressions.
1592. The cognate-accusative may be a neuter adjective or
pronoun, the noun being understood or implied; as πηδᾶν μεί-
fova (sc. πηδήματα), to make greater leaps. .
Ὑβρίζειν δεινά (= ὕβριν δεινήν), to insult grievously (Xen. Anab. 6, 4°).
Βλάψαι μεγάλα, to injure greatly (Xen. ἅπαν. 3, 3%). Μέγα λέγων, speaking
loudly (Plat. Prot. 310”). Μεῖζον φθέγγεσθαι, to speak louder (Plat. Prot. 334"),
Κλέπτον βλέπει, he looks thievish = a thievish look (Ar. Vesp. 900). Τοιαῦτα
πεποίηκε, such acts he has committed (Xen. Anab, 1, 6°). Μηδὲν ψεύδεσθαι,
to utter no falsehood (Xen. Anab. 1, 9"). Ταὐτὰ λυπεῖσθαι καὶ ταὐτὰ χαίρειν, to
have the same griefs and the same joys (Dem. 18, 292). Ti βούλεται ἡμῖν χρῆ-
σθαι; what use (= τίνα χρείαν) does he wish to make of us? (Xen. ἅπαν. 1, 3").
Τοῦτ᾽ ἀγανακτεῖ, about this is he vexed (Aeschin. 3, 147).
1598. The Tragic poets sometimes use a cognate-
accusative with verbs of sitting, standing, or lying.
Καθῆσθαι ἕδραν, to sit on a seat (Eur. Heracl. 55). Θάκους
ods θάσσω, the seat which I ocewpy (Eur. Tro. 138). Ἕστηκε
πέτραν, stands on a rock (Kur. Suppl. 987). Τόπον..«ὅντινα
κεῖται, the spot wherein he lies (Soph. Ph. 144; Aesch. Ag. 183).
ῥά "νὰ
eS Se γ σα EEE EEE EEE LL ΤΠ
Ἢ " t
᾿
‘ -
1597 ACCUSATIVE 95
1594. The cognate-accusative is also used with adjectives and
even nouns.
Ταύτην (τὴν σοφίαν) εἶναι σοφός, to be wise with this wisdom (Plat. Apol.
Kaxovs πᾶσαν κακίαν, bad with all badness (Plat. Rep. 490°). Δοῦλος
τὰς peyioras...dovrcias, a slave to the direst slavery (Plat. Rep. 579°).
ACOUSATIVE OF SPECIFICATION
1595. The accusative of specification may accompany a verb
or adjective or noun, to specify the part or property or character to
which the expression is applied,
Τὸν δάκτυλον ἀλγεῖ, he has a pain in his finger (Plat. Rep. 4024). Βέλτιόν
ἐστι σῶμα γ᾽ ἢ ψῦχὴν νοσεῖν, it is better to be sick in body than in mind (Men.
Mon. 75). Οἱ τὰ σώματα εὖ ἔχοντες, those that are well in their bodies (Xen.
Mem. 3, 12". τυφλὸς τά τ᾽ ὦτα τόν τε νοῦν τά τ᾽ ὄμματα, thou art blind in ears,
and mind, and eyes (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 371). Δεινὸς τὴν τέχνην, skilled in the
art (Ar. Eccles. 364). Οἱ ἄριστοι τὰς φύσεις, the best in character (Plat. Rep.
526°). Τοιοῦτος τὴν φύσιν, such by nature (Isoc. 9, 24). Ποταμὸς Κύδνος
ὄνομα, εὖρος δύο πλέθρων, a river, Cydnus by name, of two plethra in breadth
(Xen. Anab. 1, 2”). “Are:pov τὸ πλῆθος, infinite in extent (Plat. Par. 143*).
Θαυμάσιαι τὸ κάλλος καὶ τὸ μέγεθος, wonderful in beauty and in size (Xen. Anab.
2, 95.
1596. Norr.—In late writers we find expressions like ὁ τὸν κάνδυν
(sc. ἔχων), he with the cloak (Lucian, Deorwm Conciliwm, 9).
ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE
1597. A large number of accusatives, having the force of ad-
verbs, are practically fixed adverbial expressions,
Τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, in this way. Τὴν ταχίστην (80. ὁδόν), in the quickest
way. Τὴν εὐθεῖαν (sc. ὁδόν), straightway. Τίνα τρόπον ; in what way? ον
τρόπον, in which manner.—(Tiv) ἀρχήν, at first. (Τὸ) πρῶτον, at first, for the
Sirst time, in the first place. Τὸ δεύτερον, τὸ τρίτον, in the second place, in the
third place. Td λοιπόν, henceforth (but τοῦ λοιποῦ, at some future time). Τὸ
τελευταῖον, finally. Τέλος, at the end, finally. (Τὴν) ἀρχὴν od or μή, not at
all. Τοὐναντίον, on the contrary.—Ti; why? in what respect? Ti, in some
somewhat. Οὐδέν, in no respect, not at all, in nothing. Τοῦτο, ταῦτα,
in this respect, therefore. Τοῦτο pév...rovro δέ, firstly...secondly, or partly...
partly. Τἄλλα, in other respects. Πολύ or πολλά, much, often. Ta πολλά,
mostly. Ta πάντα, in all respects, completely. Τοσοῦτον, so much, Ὅσον, as
Saras. Τυχόν, perhaps.—Maxpdy, afar off, far, at length, tediously. Πρόφασιν,
96 . ACCUSATIVE 1598
for a pretext.—IIpoixa, for nothing, gratis. Awpedv, as a gift.—Aixny (τινός),
in the manner (of). Χάριν (τινός), for the sake (of).
1598. Norz.—Some of these can be explained as accusatives of
specification (1595), others as cognate-accusatives (1587—1594), while
others are of uncertain origin.
ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT
1599. The accusative is used to denote extent of time or of space.
Ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινεν ἡμέρᾶς ἑπτά, there he remained seven days (Xen. Anab.
1, 2°). "Eddaxpte πολὺν χρόνον, he wept a long time (Xen. Anab. 1, 3"). At
σπονδαὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ἔσονται, the truce is to be for a year (Thue. 4, 118").—Ar-
έχει ἡ Πλάταια τῶν Θηβῶν σταδίου ς ἑβδομήκοντα, Platea is seventy stades
distant from Thebes (Thuc. 2, δ5). Μέγαρα ἀπέχει Συρᾶκουσῶν οὔτε πλοῦν
πολὺν οὔτε οδόν, Megara is not a long voyage or land-journey distant from.
Syracuse (Thue. 6, 49). Mix pov προϊόντες, advancing a short distance (Xen.
Anab. 2, 1°).
1600. Norz.—The question “how old?” is answered by γεγονώς:
(Lat. natus) with the accusative of the years.
Οὐδέπω εἴκοσιν ἔτη γεγονώς, not yet twenty years old (Xen. Mem. 3, 6°).
Compounds of ἔτος, year, can also be used; as rpidxovraerns, contr. Attic
τριᾶκοντούτης, thirty years old.
1601. Nore.—The question ‘“‘ since when ?”’ is generally answered
by the accusative with an ordinal number, counting in the current day,.
month, or year; οὑτοσί is sometimes added. The article is omitted.
Πρωταγόρᾶς ἐπιδεδήμηκε τρίτην ἤδη ἡμέρᾶν, Protagoras has been in town
now two days = since the day before yesterday or is now in town the third day
(Plat. Prot. 309°). Ἑβδόμην ἡμέραν τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτῷ τετελευτηκυίᾶς,
when his daughter had died six days before = was dead now the seventh day
(Aeschin. 3, 77). Tis orpareias, ἣν ἑνδέκατον μῆνα τουτονΐ Φίλιππος.
ἐν Θράκῃ ποιεῖτει, the campaign which Philip is now carrying on over ten months:
in Thrace, lit., this the eleventh month (Dem. 8, 2).
ACCUSATIVE OF OBJECT OF MOTION
1602. 1. In poetry the accusative without a pre-
position is often used to denote the object towards
which the motion is directed.
Kvion δ᾽ οὐρανὸν ike, the savour ascended to heaven (Il.
1, 317). Ἔβαν νέας, they went to the ships (Od. 3, 162). Τὸ
κοῖλον “Apyos Bas, going to hollow Argos (Soph. Θεά. Col.
1605 ACCUSATIVE “BE
378). Ἥβης τέλος μολόντας, coming to the end of youth
. (Eur. Med. 920).—Less often with persons, as Μνηστῆρας
adixero, she came to the switors (Od. 1, 332). Σ ἐ τόδε ἐλήλυθε
πᾶν κράτος, this whole power has come to thee (Soph. Phil. 141).
2. In prose we usually find εἰς, πρός, or ἐπί and the accusative for
places (also ἐπί with the genitive); and ἐπί, πρός, παρά, or ὡς with the
accusative for persons. With places the local endings -de and -ζε are
also used ; as Ἐλευσῖνάδε = εἰς Ἐλευσῖνα, ᾿Αθήναζε = εἰς ᾿Αθήνας.
ACCUSATIVE WITH ADVERBS OF SWEARING
1603. The accusative accompanies the adverbs of swearing v7,
and μά, by. Of these, νή introduces an affirmative oath; μά a
negative oath (unless accompanied by vai, yes).
Νὴ Δία, yes, by Zeus (Xen. Anab. 1, 75). Μὰ τοὺς θεούς, no, by the gods
(Xen. Anab. 1, 48). Ναὶ pa Δία, yes, by Zeus (Xen. Anab. 5, 8°).
1604. Norr.—1. Rarely a negative takes the place of μά. οὐ τόνδ᾽
"Ovproy, no, by this Olympus (Soph. Ant. 758).
2. Sometimes the name of the god is omitted for effect. Ma
ov σύ γε, by ——, not you (Plat. Gorg. 466°).
τόν
Two ACCUSATIVES WITH ONE VERB
1605. Double Object-Accusative.—1. Verbs denoting to ask, to
demand, to teach, to remind, to conceal, to convince, to clothe, to
unclothe, to deprive, take two accusatives, one of the person, and
the other of the thing.
2. Such verbs are: ἐρωτάω and ἔρομαι, ask ; airéw, ἀπαιτέω, demand ;
mparropar, collect (money) ; πράττω, εἰσπράττω, exact ; διδάσκω, teach ;
ἀναμιμνήσκω, ὑπομιμνήσκω, remind ; κρύπτω, ἀποκρύπτω, conceal ; πείθω,
convince ; ἐνδύω, ἀμφιέννυῦμι, Clothe ; ἐκδύω, unclothe ; ἀποστερέω, ἀφαιρ-
έομαι, deprive ; ciddw, rob.
Οὐ τοῦτ᾽ ἐρωτῶ σε, I am not asking you this (Ar. Nub. 641). Κῦρον αἰτεῖν
πλοῖα, to ask Cyrus for vessels (Xen. Anab. 1, 3"). Σωκράτης τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ
ἐπιθυμοῦντας οὐκ ἐπράττετο χρήματα, Socrates did not collect fees from those
desiring his company (Xen. Mem. 1, 2°). Τοὺς vnowras ἑξήκοντα τάλαντα
εἰσέπρᾶττον, they exacted sixty talents from the islanders (Aeschin. 2,71). Πόθεν
ἤρξατό σε διδάσκειν τὴν στρατηγίᾶν ; with what did he begin to teach you military
science * (Xen. Mem. 3, 1°). ᾿Αναμνήσω ὑμᾶς τοὺς τῶν προγόνων τῶν ὑμετέρων
κινδύνους, I will remind you of the a of your ancestors (Xen. Anab. 3,
98 ACCUSATIVE 1606
2"). Διογείτων τὴν θυγατέρα ἔκρυπτε τὸν θάνατον τοῦ ἀνδρός, Diogeiton concealed
from his daughter the death of her husband (Lys. 32, 7). Σὲ ταῦτα μὴ πείθων,
not convincing you of this thing (Soph. Oed. Col. 797). Τὸν ἑαυτοῦ (sc. χιτῶνα)
ἐκεῖνον ἠμφίεσε, he put his own (sc. tunic) on the other boy (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3%").
Ἐκδύων ἐμὲ xpnotnpiar ἐσθῆτα, stripping me of the oracular garment (Aesch.
Ag. 1269). Ἐκείνους ra ὅπλα ἀφῃρήμεθα, we have deprived those men of their
arms (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5”). Τὴν θεὸν τοὺς στεφάνους σεσῦυλήκᾶασιν, they have robbed
the goddess of her crowns (Dem. 24, 182).
1606. Norr.—In poetry some other verbs have the
double accusative.
Αἷμα xdOnpov...3aprnddva, wash the blood from Sarpedon (Il.
16, 667). Xpda νίζετο...ἅλμην, he washed the dried spray
from his skin (Od. 6, 224). Ei μή σ᾽ ἀδελφῆς αἷμα τἴμω-
pnoera, if he shall not avenge on you the blood of his sister
(Eur. Alc. 733). So also ξυρήσαντά μιν τὰς τρίχας, having
shaved off his hair (Hdt. 5, 35*), and a few other verbs.
1607. Norz.—Some verbs of this class admit also of other con-
structions. Thus αἰτεῖν τι παρά twos, to demand something of some one ;
εἰσπράττειν Or εἰσπράἄττεσθαί τι παρά tivos.—Verbs of depriving can take
a double accusative, as ἀφαιρεῖσθαι τινά τι; Or a genitive of the person
and an accusative of the thing, as ἀφαιρεῖσθαι τινός τι (1682); or less
often an accusative of the person and a genitive of the thing, as
ἀφαιρεῖσθαι τινά τινος (1682)—Verbs of reminding may take an accusa-
tive of the person and a genitive of the thing; as ἀναμιμνήσκειν τινά
twos (1655),
1608. Nore.—When the verb is changed to the passive construc-
tion, the personal object becomes the nominative, and the accusative
of the thing remains.
Μουσικὴν..-παιδευθείς, having been taught music (Plat. Menex, 236"). Τὴν
ὄψιν ἀφαιρεῖται, he is deprived of his sight (Xen. Mem. 4, 3"). Οἱ πλεῦνες τῶν
στρατηγῶν οὐκ ἐπείθοντο τὰ ἐξαγγελθέντα, the majority of the generals were not
convinced of the report (Hat. 8, 815).
1609. Object-Accusative and Predicate-Accusative.—1. Verbs de-
noting to call, to regard, to make, to choose, to appoint, to show oneself
as, can take a predicate-accusative belonging to the objective-ac-
cusative. .
2. Such verbs are: ὀνομάζω, καλέω, ἀποκαλέω, λέγω, προσαγορεύω,
to call, to name ; νομίζω, ἡγέομαι, κρίνω, to regard, to consider ; ποιέω,
> λυ.
1614 ACCUSATIVE 99
to make ; αἱρέομαι, to choose ; ἀποδείκιῦμι, καθίστημι, to appoint ; παρέχειν
ἑαυτόν, to show oneself as.
Πατέρα ἐμὲ ἐκαλεῖτε, you called me father (Xen. Anab. 7, 6*). Ti τὴν πόλιν
προσαγορεύεις ; what do you call the state? (Plat. Rep. 4284). οΟὺς οἱ Σύροι
θεοὺς ἐν ὀμιζον, whom the Syrians esteemed gods (Xen. Anab. 1, 45). Οὐδὲ οὗτος
ἐμὲ φίλον ἄν ποτε ἡγήσαιτο, nor would this man ever consider me a friend (Xen.
Cyr. 4, 6°). Δαρεῖος Κῦρον σατράπην ἐποίησε, καὶ στρατηγὸν δὲ αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξε,
Darius made Cyrus satrap, and appointed him general (Xen. Anab. 1, 1°).
Ὅστις δ᾽ ἂν ἑαυτὸν ἕληται στρατηγόν, whoever chooses himself general (Xen.
. Anab. 5, 73). Παρέχειν ἑαυτὸν εὐπειθῆ, to show himself ready to obey (Xen.
Cyr. 2, 1).
4610. Norz.—Sometimes the infinitive εἶναι connects the two ac-
cusatives.
Νομίζω yap ὑμᾶς ἐμοὶ εἶναι καὶ πατρίδα καὶ φίλους, for I deem you to be my
country and my friends (Xen. Anab. 1, 3°). Σοφιστὴν δή τοι ὀνομάζουσι. ..τὸν
ἄνδρα εἶναι, they name the man (to be) a sophist (Plat. Prot. 311°).
1611. Nore.—With many other verbs a predicate-accusative may
be used in connection with the object-accusative; as ἔδωκα δωρεὰν τὰ
λύτρα, I gave the ransom as a gift (Dem. 19,170). See 1316.
1612. Norr.—1. With verbs signifying to grow, to nourish, to lift
up, and the like, the adjectives μέγας, great, ὑψηλός, high, μετέωρος,
raised wp aloft, on high, and some others, can be added as a proleptic
predicate (prolepsis, πρόληψις = anticipation), showing the effect of the
action of the verb The active construction has two accusatives, the
passive two nominatives.
"Eva τινὰ ἀεὶ δῆμος εἴωθε τρέφειν τε καὶ αὔξειν μέγαν, the people always have
the habit of maintaining and exalting some one man to be great (Plat. Rep.
565°). Μέγας ἐκ pixpod Φίλιππος ηὔξηται, Philip has grown great from being
small (Dem. 9, 21). Μετεώρους ἐξεκόμισαν ras ἁμάξας, they carried the waggons
raised up (Xen. Anab. 1, 5°). “Hipero τὸ ὕψος τοῦ τείχους μέγα, the height of
the wall was made considerable (Thuc. 2, 75). Dem. 19, 249.
2. The proleptic predicate is seldom a noun; as Περικλῆς τοὺς vidas
as ἐδίδαξεν, Pericles taught his sons to be horsemen (Plat. Meno
94”).
1613. Norz.—When the verb is changed to the passive, both
accusatives become nominatives. Ὁ ποταμὸς καλεῖται Mapovas, the
river is called Marsyas (Xen. Anab. 1, 2°).
1614. Norz.—The passive of verbs meaning ¢o call is sometimes
100 ACCUSATIVE 1615
ἀκούω ; aS viv κόλακες... ἀκούουσιν, now they are called fawners (Dem.
18, 46).—So Aayxdvw serves as passive to κληρόω, choose by lot; as
ἔλαχον ἱερεύς, I was chosen (by lot) priest (Dem. 57, 47).
1615. Object-Accusative and Cognate-Accusative.—l. A transitive
verb may have a cognate-accusative in addition to the object-ac-
cusative.
Ἕκαστον εὐεργετεῖν τὴν μεγίστην εὐεργεσίαν, to do the greatest good to each
. one (Plat. Apol. 36°). Ἐμὲ yap ὁ πατὴρ τὴν τῶν παίδων παιδείαν αὐτὸς ἐπαίδευεν,
my father taught me the discipline of boys (Xen. Cyr. 8, 857), Καλοῦσί με τοῦτο
τὸ ὄνομα, they call me this name (Xen. Occ. 7,5). Πατάξαι τινὰ τὴν ἄτιμον
ταύτην πληγήν, to strike any one this shameful blow (Plat. Gorg. 527°). Μέλητός
pe ἐγράψατο τὴν γραφὴν ταύτην, Meletus brought this impeachment against me
(Plat. Apol. 19°). “Ὥρκωσαν πάντας τοὺς στρματιώτᾶς τοὺς μεγίστους ὅρκους, they
made all the soldiers swear the strongest oaths (Thue. 8, 755). Πάντα ἐψευσάμην
αὐτόν, I deceived him in all things (Xen. Anab. 1, 3"). Ἠδικήσαμεν τοῦτον
οὐδέν, we have done him no wrong (Xen. Anab. 7, 6”). “Orav,..d\dndous τὰ
ἔσχατα λέγωσιν, when they say the worst things of each other (Xen. Mem. 2, 2°).
2. Here belong verbs signifying to do anything to or to say
anything of a person or thing.
Tauri pe ποιοῦσιν, they do these things to me (Ar. Vesp. 696). Et ris τι
ἀγαθὸν ἢ κακὸν ποιήσειεν αὐτόν, if any one did him any good or evil (Xen.
Anab. 1,9"). Kak’ ἔρεξεν eiixvnpidas ᾿Αχαιούς, he did many evils to the well-
greaved Greeks (Od. 2, 72). Ἡδονή τις γυναιξὶ μηδὲν ὑγιὲς ἀλλήλᾶς λέγειν, to
women there is a certain pleasure to say nothing wholesome of each other (Eur.
Phoen. 200). Οὐ φροντιστέον 6 τι ἐροῦσιν οἱ πολλοὶ ἡμᾶς, we must not regard
what the multitude say of us (Plat. Crito 485). ‘O Θεμιστοκλέης κεῖνόν τε καὶ
τοὺς Κορινθίους πολλά τε καὶ κακὰ ἔλεγε, Themistocles said many bad things of
him and of the Corinthians (Hat. 8, 61).
3. Verbs signifying to divide also belong here. Κῦρος τὸ
στράτευμα κατένειμε δώδεκα μέρη, Cyrus divided the army into
twelve divisions (Xen. Cyr. 7, 518.
1616. Norr.—l. Verbs signifying to do anything to or to say
anything of a person often have εὖ and κακῶς instead of the cognate-
accusative ; aS τὸν... πειρώμενον ἐμὲ ἀνιᾶν οὐκ ἂν δυναίμην οὔτε εὖ λέγειν
οὔτε εὖ ποιεῖν, I should not be able to speak well of, or to treat well, one
who tries to vex me (Xen. Mem. 2, 38). |
2. Πράσσειν τινά τι is hardly ever used in the sense to do anything
to any one, but means to exact something from any one (1605). So εὖ
= = “ρ΄ ---
eS
ΨΥ [se
1618 GENITIVE 101
mpaccew and κακῶς πράσσειν are nearly always intransitive, meaning
to be well (badly) off or to be weil (ill).
3. The verbs ποιέω, ἐργάζομαι, and πράσσω, may have a dative of
the person and an accusative of the thing; as ἀγαθόν τι πρᾶξαι τῇ πόλει,
ty do something good to the city (Lys. 13, 48).
4. With verbs meaning to divide, μέρη, parts, is sometimes preceded
in Attic by εἰς, into, or κατά used distributively; as διαιρεῖν κατά in
Plat. Soph. 220” and Rep. 580°, εἰς in Aeschin. 3, 197.
1617. Norz.—1. When the verb is changed to the passive con-
struction the cognate accusative remains.
Tas ἐσχάτας λυπεῖται bras, he suffers the extremest pains (Plat. Gorg.-
494"). ‘H κρίσις, ἣν ἐκρίθη, the judgment which was passed upon him (Lys.
13, 50). Τοῦτο οὐκ ἐψεύσθησαν, they were not deceived in this (Xen. Anab. 2,
2%), Τυπτόμενος πολλᾶς (sc. πληγάς), struck many blows (Ar. Nub. 972).
Διήρηται αὕτη ἡ ἀγορά τέτταρα μέρη, this agora is divided into four parts (Xen.
Cyr. 1, 24
2. Passive to εὖ (κακῶς) ποιεῖν is εὖ (κακῶς) πάσχειν ; aS μεγάλα εὖ
παθόντες, greatly benefited.—Passive to λέγειν is ἀκούειν (poetic κλύειν).
Κακῶς ὑπὸ τῶν πολιτῶν ἀκούειν, to be ill spoken of by the citizens (Isoe. 4,
77). Πολλὰ καὶ παντοῖ᾽ ἀκουούσᾶς κακά, (women) called all kinds of abusive
things (Ar. Thesm. 388). Κακῶς κλύουσαν, being in evil repute (Soph. Trach.
721).—Compare 1888.
GENITIVE
1618. 1. The genitive case may be connected with nouns, adjectives,
adverbs, verbs, or may be used independently to express various rela-
tions. Its principal and most natural use is to limit the signification
ofa noun. But just as the accusative, which originally was used only
as the direct object of a transitive verb, came to denote also indirect
objects,—in the same way the genitive came to be used to limit the
meaning also of verbs and adjectives.
2. Every verb has in itself the idea of a noun; as ἐπιθυμέω, to
desire, implies ἐπιθυμίαν, a de ire; πλήσσω, to strike, implies πληγήν,
a blow. If the verbal idea prevails in the verb, it governs the accusa-
tive: as πλήσσειν twa, to strike any one. But if the nominal idea
prevails it governs the genitive; as ἐπιθῦμῶ τῆς ἀρετῆς. I desire virtue,
equivalent to ἐπιθυμῶ ἐπιθυμίᾶν τῆς ἀρετῆς, I have (lit. desire) a desire
for virtue. In some cases the same verb may govern either the
102 ‘ GENITIVE 1619
genitive or the accusative—In some constructions with verbs, as in
the partitive genitive, the genitive seems to depend on some omitted
word denoting some or a part (ris or μέρος).
3. Used as an ablative, the genitive case expresses also that from
which anything proceeds (the genitive of source), or is separated (genitive
of separation), or is distinguished (genitive of distinction and of com-
parison).—The genitive is also used in a looser way to express time and
place ; and in exclamations.
(A) GENITIVE wiTtH Nouns
1619. The genitive depending on a noun is called attributive,
and denotes the following relations.
1. Genitive of Possession, expressing ownership.
Ἢ τοῦ Περικλέους οἰκία, the house of Pericles. Σωκράτης ὁ Σωφρονίσκου,
Socrates the son of Sophroniscus. Ἡμῶν ὁ πατήρ, our father. Td Μένωνος
στράτευμα, the army of Meno. *A εἴληφε τῆς πόλεως ἀποδώσει, what of
the city he has taken, he will return (Dem. 19,151). Βοηθεῖν ἐβούλοντο τοῖς
ἑαυτῶν Evyyevéow, they desired to help their own kinsmen (Thuc. 6, 6). Tdde
αὐτῶν ov xapiev; is not this quality of theirs charming? (Plat. Rep. 426*).
2. Genitive of Sowrce or Cause.
ὋὉμήρου Ἰλιάς, Homer's Iliad. ἴλισμα Σιμωνίδου, a song of Simonides.
Γραφὴ ἀσεβείας, an indictment for impiety. Μεγάλων ἀδικημάτων ὀργή, anger
for great wrongs (Lys. 12, 20).
3. Genitive of Measure, to express size and time.
᾿Οκτὼ σταδίων τεῖχος, a wall of eight stades in length (Thue. 7, 2*). Ποταμὸς
εὖρος πλέθρου, a river of one plethrum in breadth (Xen. Anab. 1, 43). Τριῶν
ἡμερῶν 6dds, a journey of three days (Xen. Hell. 3, 2"). Μισθὸς τεττάρων
μηνῶν, pay for four months (Xen. Anab. 1, 2").
4. Genitive of Material or Contents.
ἔΛλλσος ἡμέρων δένδρων, a grove of cultivated trees (Xen. Anab. 5, 3”).
Body ἀγέλη, a herd of cattle (Xen. Mem. 3, 11°). Κρήνη ἡδέος ὕδατος, a spring
of fresh water (Xen. Anab. 6, 4). “Ayaka σίτου, waggons (= waggon-loads)
of corn (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4°). Srarnp xpicod, a stater of gold (Plat. Huthyd.
299°).
5. Genitive of Value.
Τριάκοντα ταλάντων οὐσία, an estate of thirty talents (Lys. 29, 2). Χιλίων
δραχμῶν δίκη, a swit for a thousand drachmae (Dem. 55, 25).
6. Partitive Genitwe, denoting the whole, the governing word
expressing the part.
i i ee al
1621 GENITIVE 103
᾿Ανὴρ τοῦ δήμου, a man of the people (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2"). “Hysov τοῦ ὅλου
στρατεύματος, half of the whole army (Xen. Anab. 6, 2). Μέσον ἡμέρᾶς, the
middle of the day (Xen. Anab. 1, 8°). Ἡμῶν οὐδείς, none of us (Xen. Anab.
3, 1). πολλὰ τῶν ὑποζυγίων, many of the draught-animals (Xen. Anab. 1,
5°). "Hy τι τοῦ τείχους ἀσθενές, a part (= something) of the wall was weak
(Thue. 7, 45). Ἔν τοῖς ἀρίστοις Περσῶν, among the best of the Persians (Xen.
Anab. 1, 6). °2 Pda γυναικῶν, O beloved of women (Eur. Alec. 460). Τοὺς
ἀγαθοὺς τῶν ἀνθρώπων, the good among men (Ar. Plut. 490). Σὺν τοῖς παροῦσι
τῶν πιστῶν, with those presert of his faithful attendants (Xen. Anab. 1, 5”).
Τοὺς μὲν αὐτῶν ἀπέκτεινε, τοὺς δ᾽ ἐξέβαλεν, slew some of them and banished
others (Xen. Anab. 1, 1’).
7. Objective Genitive, expressing the object of an action or feeling.
Ὁ φόβος τῶν πολεμίων, the fear of the enemy (which others feel toward
them). Διὰ τὸ Παυσανίου μῖσος, through the hatred of (= against) Pausanias
(Thue. 1, 96). Αἰδῶ... ἑαυτοῦ, respect toward himself (Xen. Anab. 2, 6°).
᾿Αρετῆς διδάσκαλος, a teacher of virtue (Plat. Meno, 93°). Πρὸς τὰς τοῦ
χειμῶνος καρτερήσεις, as regards endwrance of the winter (Plat. Symp. 2205).
Τοὺς τῶν θεῶν ὅρκους, the oaths (sworn in the name) of the gods (Xen. Anab.
3, 2"). Bia ἡμῶν, in spite of us (Thue. 1, 68*). Τὴν τῶν κρεισσόνων
δουλείᾶν, servitude to the stronger (Thuc. 1, 8°). Ac ἀμιξίαν ἀλλήλων,
through non-intercourse with each other (Thuc. 1, 3*). Ἐπὶ τὴν τῶν Bap-
βάρων στρατείᾶν, to a war against the barbarians (Isoc. 15, 57). Θεῶν
εὐχάς, prayers to the gods (Plat. Phaedr. 244°). Ἔν ἀποβάσει τῆς γῆς, ina
descent upon the land (Thuc. 1, 108*). Τῆς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων εὐνοίας, from
good will toward the Greeks (Xen. Anab. 4, 7”). Ἐγκράτεια ἡ δον ἢ ς, mode-
ration in pleaswre (Isoc. 1, 21).
8. Subjective Genitive, expressing the subject of an action or feeling.
Ὁ φόβος τῶν πολεμίων, the fear of the enemy (which they feel). Ἢ ἔφοδος
τοῦ στρατεύματος, the approach of the army (Xen. Anab. 2, 2").
The above list gives the most important classes of these genitives.
Many genitives are peculiar and hard to classify.
1620. Norz.—1. Such masculine and feminine participles as have
completely become nouns can thus govern the genitive; as ἄρχων,
archon ; προσήκων, relation.
2. Examples like ὁ ἐκείνου τεκών (for ὁ ἑκεῖνον τεκών),
his father (Bur., El. 335) are poetic.
1621. Nore.—The name of a locality may have a dependent geni-
tive denoting the country or people to which it belongs.
Πέργαμον καταλαμβάνουσι τῆς Μύῦσίᾶς, they take Pergamon im (= a
104 GENITIVE 1622
place in) Mysia (Xen. Anab. 7, 8°). Κορινθίων ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αμβρακίαν ἐλήλυθε; did
he not advance against Ambracia (a colony) of the Corinthians? (Dem. 9, 34).
1622. Norzr.—l1l. In poetry we find a genitive of specifi-
cation in examples like these: Τροίης πτολίεθρον, the city
of Troy, like Lat., wrbs Romae (Od. 1, 2); Ἰλίου πόλις,
the city of Iliwm (Aesch., Ag. 29); so in Hdt. Καμαρίνης
τὸ ἄστυ (Hdt. 7, 156). Here the genitive stands for an
apposition,
2. Similar are paraphrases like Πριάμοιο Bin, the powerful
Priamus, for Upiapos (Il. 8, 105). In prose as well as
poetry we find χρῆμα so used,
Suds χρῆμα μέγα, a big thing (or monster) of a wild boar
(Hdt. 1, 36"). Sevdovnrav πάμπολύ τι χρῆμα, a very large
body of slingers (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1°).
1623. Norz.—The Latin genitive or ablative of quality is expressed
in Greek by the accusative of specification (1595), or by an adjective
and an infinitive (2221).—A genitive of characteristic occurs some-
times in Greek, but only as a predicate-genitive (1634).
1624. Norz.—Expressions like the Latin quid novi? what new ?
are rendered in Greek by τί καινόν, not by τί καινοῦ. The adjective
must here agree with the pronoun.
1625. Norr.—An adjective generally agrees in gender with the
partitive genitive depending on it.
ὋὉ λοιπὸς Tod χρόνου, the rest of the time (Dem. 15, 16). Τῆς γῆς ἡ ἀρίστη,
the best part of the land (Thuc. 1, 2°). Sirov τὸν ἥμισυν, half of the corn
(Xen. Cyr. 4, 5').—But sometimes the neuter is used, μέρος, part, being
understood ; as τῶν πολεμίων τὸ πολύ (for of πολλοί), the greater part of the
enemy (Xen. Anab. 4, 6).
1626. Norz.—A substantive may have two genitiyes depending on
it; usually they are in different relations. .
Διὰ τὸ αὑτῶν δέος τοῦ θανάτου, through their own fear of death (Plat.
Phaedo, 805). Ἵππου δρόμος npépas, a day’s run for a horse (Dem. 19, 273).
Τῶν Ἰώνων τὴν ἡγεμονίην τοῦ πρὸς Δαρεῖον πολέμου, the leadership of
the Ionians in the war against Darius (Hdt. 6, 2'). ἤΛΑτοπος Διονύσου
mpeaButav χορός, a strange Dionysiac chorus of old men (Plat. Leg. 665°).
1627. Nore.—The partitive genitive depending on a neuter pronoun
or adjective is often used to denote the degree or extent.
it i
1631 of GENITIVE 105
Eis τοσοῦτόν εἰσι τόλμη ς ἀφιγμένοι, to so great a degree of boldness have
they arrived (Lys. 12, 22). Eis τοῦτο δ᾽ ἀμαθίας ἥκεις, thou art come to this
pitch of ignorance (Eur. Andr. 170). Ἐπὶ μέγα δυνάμεως ἐχώρησαν, they
advanced to a great degree of power (Thue. 1, 1185). Ἔν παντὶ ἀθὺμίᾶς, in the
extremity of despondency (Thuc. 7, 55*).
1628. Norr.—The partitive genitive alone seldom appears as the
subject of a verb.
"Edacay ἐπιμῖγνύναι σφῶν τε πρὸς ἐκείνους καὶ ἐκείνων πρὸς ἑαυτούς,
they said some of their own men had mingled with them, and some of them
with their own men (Xen. Anab. 3, 5"). Ἦσαν ἴΑνδριοι... καὶ Αἰγινητῶν τῶν
ἐποίκων, there were Andrians...and Aeginetans of the colonists (Thuc. 8, 69%).
—Here the genitives may be said to depend on ris or pépos understood.
1629. Norr.—Instead of the objective genitive, the dative is often
used (as in 1757, 1770); so also a preposition and its case.
Τὴν παρὰ θεῶν εὔνοιαν, the good will of the gods (Dem. 2, 22). Ὁ ἀπὸ τῶν
πολεμίων φόβος, the fear (which we have) of the enemy.
1630. Norz.—tThe attributive genitives take the attributive position
as regards the article (1406, 1408) ; but the partitive genitive (1410) and
the genitive of personal pronouns (1455) take the predicate position.
(B) PREDICATE-GENITIVE
1631. With copulative verbs (1205) a genitive may form a
predicate like a noun or an adjective. Such a predicate-genitive
stands in relations similar to those of the attributive-genitive.
1. Possessiwe Genitive.
Βοιωτῶν ἡ πόλις ἔσται, the city will belong to the Boeotians (Lys. 12,
58). “Hvicn τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐγίγνετο, the victory belonged to the Athenians
(Thue. 1, 63"). Τοῦτο τοὔνομά ἐστι εὐεργετοῦντος, this name belongs to a
benefactor (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2°).
2. Genitive of Source or Cause.
Ὁ νόμος ἐστιν οὗτος Δράκοντος, this law is Draco’s (Dem. 23,51). Τοιούτων
ἐστὲ προγόνων, from such ancestors are ye (Xen. Anab. 3, 2"). Σὺ πόλεως
μεγίστης εἶ, you are from a very great city (Xen. ἅπαν. 7, 3").
3. Genitive of Measwre, to express size and time.
Τὰ τείχη σταδίων ἦν ὀκτώ, the walls were eight stades in length (Thue.
4, 66°). Tod Μαρσύου τὸ εὖρός ἐστιν εἴκοσι καὶ πέντε ποδῶν, the
breadth of the Marsyas is twenty-five feet (Xen. Anab.1, 2°), Ἦν ἐτῶν ὡς
τριάκοντα, he was about thirty years old (Xen. Anab. 2, 6”). Tapeiv δεῖ
106 GENITIVE 1632
ἐπειδὰν ἐτῶν 7 τις τριάκοντα, one ought to marry when one is thirty years old
(Plat. Leg. 721*).
4. Genitwe of Material.
Οἱ στέφανοι οὐκ ἴων ἢ ῥόδων ἦσαν, the wreaths were not of violets or of
roses (Dem. 22, 70). oivixos ai θύραι πεποιημέναι, the doors being made of
the palm-tree (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5”).
5. Genitive of Value. |
Oi ἐξειργασμένοι ἀγρὸ πολλοῦ ἀργυρίου γίγνονται, well-cultivated
lands cost a great deal of money (Xen. Oec, 20, 25. Τριῶν δραχμῶν
πονηρόν ὄντα, being a villain for three drachmae (Dem. 19, 200).
6. Partitive Genitive.
Σόλων τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφιστῶν ἐκλήθη, Solon was called one of the seven.
wise men (Isoc. 15, 235). "Hv καὶ οὗτος καὶ Σωκράτης τῶν ἀμφὶ Μίλητον
στρατευομένων, both he and Socrates were of those who served at Miletus
(Xen. Anab. 1, 25. Τούτων yévou, become one of these (Ar. Nub. 107).
7. Objective Genitive.—Oi τῶν κακούργων οἶκτος, ἀλλὰ τῆς δίκης,
compassion is not for the evil-doers, but for justice (Eur. frag. 272).
1632. Norre.—Instead of a predicate-genitive of measwre to express
size, @ predicate-nominative may be used; as τοῦ Μαιάνδρου τὸ εὖρος
δύο πλέθρα (for δυοῖν πλέθροιν), the breadth of the Maeander is two
plethra (Xen. Anab. 1, 2°).
1633. Norz.—A peculiar expression is ἑαυτοῦ γίγνεσθαι, to be oneself,
im one’s right mind (Dem. 2, 30; 4,7). So οὐχ ἑαυτοῦ εἶναι or γίγνεσθαι,
to be no longer master of oneself, to be beside oneself, to be rapt (Plat.
Phaedr, 250*) ; similar to this are (οὐκ) ἐν ἑαυτοῦ εἶναι and (οὐκ) ἐντὸς
αὑτοῦ εἶναι and ἔξω αὑτοῦ εἶναι.
1634. Νοτε.---Ἰ. The possessive predicate-genitive is often used to
denote the one whose peculiarity, characteristic, business, or duty it is
to do anything. The subject is usually an infinitive.
Tov μὲν ἄρχοντός ἐστι τὸ προστάττειν 6 τι χρὴ ποιεῖν, τοῦ δὲ ἀρχομένου
τὸ πείθεσθαι, it is the business of a commander to order what it is necessary to
do, and that of the one commanded to obey (Xen. Mem. 3,9"). Δὶς ἐξαμαρτεῖν
ταὐὖτον οὐκ ἀνδρὸς σοφοῦ, it is not in the nature of a wise man to err twice in
the same thing (Men. Mon, 121). Τῶν νϊκώντων ἐστὶ καὶ τὰ ἑαυτῶν
σῴζειν καὶ τὰ τῶν ἡττωμένων λαμβάνειν, it is the privilege of the victors both
to save their own property and to take that of the vanquished (Xen. Anab.
3, 2%).
2. Note the possessive pronoun equivalent to my (thy) business ;
1639 GENITIVE 107
a8 σὸν λέγειν, τολμᾶν δ᾽ ἐμόν, ‘tis thine to speak, and mine to dare
(Eur. Ion, 1020).
1635. Norr.—The material of which anything consists or is made
may be expressed by ἐκ (as in Xen. Anabd, 2, 3!°); also by the dative
of means (as in Xen. Anab. 2, 413).
1636. Norr.—A genitive of quality (as Lat. vir summae sapientiae)
is occasionally used, but only as a predicate-genitive.
Τούτου τοῦ τρόπου πώς εἰμ᾽ ἀεί, I am always somehow of this turn
(Ar. Plut. 246). Ὅσοι τῆς αὐτῆς γνώμης ἦσαν, as many as were of the
same opinion (Thue. 1, 113°). Τοῦθ᾽ ὁρῶ πολλοῦ πόνου, I see this to be of
much difficulty (Eur. Phoen. 719).
1637. The predicate-genitive may relate to the object of a
verb.
: Οὐ σὺ Κριτόβουλον ἐνόμιζες εἶναι τῶν σωφρονικῶν ἀνθρώπων
μᾶλλον ἣ τῶν θρασέων; did you not regard Critobulus as one of the modest
rather than one of the forward? (Xen. Mem. 1, 38). Βασιλεὺς νομίζει καὶ ὑμᾶς
ἑαυτοῦ εἶναι, the King looks upon you as belonging to him (Xen. Anab. 2,
1). Δούλου τόδ᾽ εἶπας, what you mention belongs to a slave (Eur., Phoen.
392). Τὸν δίφρον τοῖς ἡνιόχοις ἐποίησεν ἰσχυρῶν ξύλων, the seat for drivers he
made of strong pieces of wood (Xen. Cyr. 6, 15). Ἐμὲ θὲς τῶν πεπεισ-
μένων, count me as (one) of those convinced (Plat. Rep. 424°). Δικαίον
πολίτου κρίνω τὴν τῶν πρἄγμάτων σωτηρίαν ἀντὶ τῆς ἐν τῷ λέγειν χάριτος
αἱρεῖσθαι, I think it is the duty of an upright citizen to prefer the advancement
of public business to the gratification given in making a speech (Dem. 3, 21).
Κάλλαρον éreypawaro trav ἐμῶν δούλων, he made Callarus, one of my
slaves, defendant (Dem. 55, 31).
(c) GENITIVE WITH VERBS
1638. Any verb whose action affects its object only in part may
take the genitive (1619, 6).
_ AaBévras τοῦ βαρβαρικοῦ στρατοῦ, taking a part of the barbarian army
(Xen. Anab. 1, 5"). Τῶν ἐκ τῆς στοᾶς ὅπλων καθελόντες, having taken down
some of the weapons from the portico (Xen. Hell. 5, 45). ᾿Αφτεὶς τῶν αἰχμαλώτων,
sending away some of the prisoners (Xen. Anab. 7, 4°). Τῆς γῆς ἔτεμον, they
ravaged part of the land (Thue. 1, 30°). Τῶν ἑαυτῶν κλέψονται, they will steal
of their own (Xen, Cyr. 7, 4.5).
1639. Νοτε.--- Ἐσθίω in the sense of to eat up has the accusative,
also when the object merely denotes the kind of food habitually taken ;
108 GENITIVE 1640
wares πίνω, to drink, Thus: πίνειν τὸν οἶνον, to drink up the wine ;
πίνειν οἶνον, to drink wine habitually ; πίνειν οἴνου, to drink some wine.
1640. Norr.—Here belong the expressions κατεᾶγέναι τῆς κεφαλῆς,
to have one’s head broken, and συντρίβειν τῆς κεφαλῆς, to bruise one’s
head ; as Ar. Ach. 1180, Paw, 71; Isoc. 18, 52. For the genitive the
accusative may be used; as Lys. 3, 14 and 18.
1641. 1. Verbs of sharing and enjoying have their object in the
genitive.
2. Such verbs are μετέχω and κοινωνέω, to have or to take a share ;
μεταλαμβάνω, to get a share; KAnpovopéw, obtain a share, inherit ;
μεταδίδωμι, to give a share; μεταλαγχάνω, to have or to get a share;
μέτεστί (μοί twos), to have a share ; προσήκει (μοί twos), to have concern
in ;---ἀπολαύω, enjoy ; ὀνίναμαι, to enjoy, to have advantage of a thing ;
εὐωχέομαι to feast on; répropa, to delight in, enjoy. Aayxavw twos, to
obtain by lot a share in anything, but λαγχάνω τι, to obtain by lot the
whole of anything.
Mereiyov τῆς ἑορτῆς, they shared in the festival (Xen. Anab. 5, 3%). Τῶν
εὐφροσυνῶν μεταδιδόντες, imparting owr joys (Xen. Oec. 9, 12). Πολέμου καὶ
μάχης οὐ μετὴν αὐτῇ, of war and battle there fell to her no share (Xen. Cyr. 7,
2%), Οὐκ wero προσήκειν οὐδενὶ ἀρχῆς, he believed no one to have concern in
government (Xen. Cyr. 8, 1°"). —Oi ἀπολαύοντες τῶν σῶν ἀγαθῶν, those enjoying
your good fortune (Xen. Oec. 12,7). οναισθε τούτων, may you enjoy these
(Dem. 28, 20). Εὐωχοῦ τοῦ λόγου, feast on the discourse (Plat. Rep. 352°).
1642. Norr.—When the whole object is referred to, these verbs
have the accusative (μέτεστι and προσήκει the nominative).
Οὐ μετέλαβε τὸ πέμπτον μέρος τῶν ψήφων, he did not get the fifth part of —
the votes (Plat. Apol. 36"). ᾿Απολαύειν πάντα, to enjoy all things. Ἔν ~o
κρατίᾳ μέτεστι πᾶσι τὸ ἴσον, in a democracy there is equality for all (Thue. 2
37’),
1643. Notre.—l. To this class belong some poetic
verbs.
"Eppope τιμῆς, he obtained honour (Il. 1, 278). Τιμᾶς ἀμείρειν,
to deprive of honour (Pind. Pyth. 6, 27). Πάσασθαι...σίτου,
to be fed with food (Il. 19, 161). “Iva πάντες ἐπαύρωνται
βασιλῆος, that all may enjoy their king (Il. 1, 410).
2. Κοινοῦσθαι (τινί) τινος, to partake (with some one) of
anything, in Euripides (Andr. 933).—OvivacOai (τι) τινος, to
have profit from any one or anything ; as Il. 16, 31.
1647 GENITIVE 109
1644. 1. Verbs signifying to touch, to take hold of, to tread upon,
to begin, to try, are followed by the gemitive of the object.
2. Such verbs are: θιγγάνω and ψαύω, to touch ; ἅπτομαι, to touch,
to engage in; καθάπτομαι, ἀνθάπτομαι, λαμβάνομαι, ἐπι-, ἀντι-, συλ-λαμ-
βάνομαι, to take hold of ; ἔχομαι, to hold on to, to border on; ἐπιβαίνω,
to tread on; ἄρχω and ἄρχομαι, to begin; πειράω and πειράομαι, to
try.
Πυρὸς ἔστι θιγόντα μὴ εὐθὺς καίεσθαι, it is possible for any one touching
fire not to be burned immediately (Xen. Cyr 5, 1"). Οὐδενὸς σπουδαίου ἔργου
...dWarba, to touch (engage in) no serious work (Xen. Hell. 1, 4). ἘἘλάβετο
τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ, he took hold of his hand (Xen. Hell. 4, 155). ᾿Αντιλάβεσθε
τῶν πρᾶγμάτων, take hold of affairs (Dem. 1, 20). Νόμων ἔχεσθαι, to hold on
to the laws (Men. Mon. 380). Ἔν τῇ ἐχομένῃ ἐμοῦ κλίνῃ, on the couch next
to (= touching) me. (Plat. Symp. 217°). Τῶν ὅρων τῆς χώρᾶς...ἐπιβαίνειν, to
tread upon the borders of the country (Plat. Leg. 778°). Τοῦ λόγου ἤρχετο, he
began his speech (Xen. Anab. 3, 2"). φυγῆς ἄρχειν, to begin flight (Xen.
Anab. 3, 2"). πΠειράσαντες τοῦ χωρίου, having made an attempt on the
place (Thue. 1, 61°). Πειρώμενοι ταύτης τῆς τάξεως, trying this order of march
(Xen. Anab. 3, 255.
1645. Notr.—To begin with anything is ἄρχομαι ἀπό or ἔκ τινος
(Plat. Symp. 186”; Xen. Cyr. 2, 2?).
1646. Nore.—Poetic and Ionic δράσσομαι, to grasp,
and Epic τεταγών (ray-), taking hold of, also govern the
genitive ([/. 13, 393; Il. 1, 591),—Poetic λάζομαι, grasp,
takes the accusative ; so also the Attic poetic λάζυμαι.----
In Pindar θιγγάνω and ἅπτομαι are also found with the
dative.
1647. Norn.—l. The actives λαμβάνω, ἔχω, and aipéw,
are found in poetry (especially in Homer) with the
genitive of the part held or grasped.
AaBeiv twa ποδός, to take any one by the foot (Jl. 10,
490). “Enciv τινα χειρός (Il. 1, 323). Χειρὸς ἔχειν τινα (ll. 4,
154).
2. Similarly ἄγω, to lead, and verbs of pulling.
Βοῦν ἄγειν κεράων, to lead an ox by the horns (Od. 3, 439).
Ἕλκειν τινὰ ποδός, to drag any one by the foot (Il. 17, 289).
Ἐρύειν (Od. 17, 479). Κόμης ἐπισπᾶν (Eur. Tro. 882). Tév-
ovtos ἁρπάσᾶς (Eur. Cycl. 400). Δεῖν ποδός, to bind by the
foot (Il, 23, 854).
110 GENITIVE 1648
3. Such poetic constructions as above are very rare in
prose.
Ἔλαβον τῆς ζώνης τὸν Ὀρόντᾶν, they seized Orontes by
the girdle (Xen. Anab. 1, 610). Αγειν τῆς ἡνίᾶς τὸν ἵππον,
to lead the horse by the bridle (Xen. Eques. 6,9). Τὰ νήπια
παιδία δέουσι τοῦ ποδός σπάρτῳ, they tie the infants by the
foot with a cord (Hat. 5, 16°).
4. In cases like γέροντα χειρὸς ἀνίστη, he raised the old
man by his hand (Il. 24, 515), a verb of grasping, like
ἑλών, is implied.—Similarly with verbs of swpplicating
(λίσσομαι, λιτανεύω, γουνάζομαι).
Ἐμὲ λισσέσκετο γούνων, she implored me by (clasping)
my knees (Il. 9, 451). Λιτανεύω (Od. 10, 481). ΤΓουνάζομαι
(Il. 22, 345). Here are also counted such cases as λίσσομαι
ἠμὲν Ζηνὸς ᾿Ολυμπίου ἠδὲ Θέμιστος, I implore by Olympian Jove
and by Themis (Od. 2, 68).
1648. 1. Verbs signifying to desire, to aim at, to claim, to attain,
to hit, to miss, are followed by the genitive of the object.
2. Such verbs are: ἐπιθυμέω, ἐφίεμαι, to desire ; πεινάω, to hunger
after ; διψάω, to thirst after ; στοχάζομαι, to aim at; ὀρέγομαι, to reach
after ; γλίχομαι, to strive after; ἀντιποιέυμαι, μεταποιέομαι, to claim;
τυγχάνω, to attain, to hit upon; ἐξικνέομαι, ἐφικνέομαι, to hit, to arrive
at; ἁμαρτάνω, ἀποτυγχάνω, to miss; ἀτυχέω, to fail, to fail to obtain;
σφάλλομαι, to be mistaken ; ψεύδομαι, to be deceived.
Τῆς καλλίστης ἀρετῆς ehiera, you desire the most exalted accomplishment
(Xen. Mem. 4, 2"). Πεινῶσι χρημάτων, they hunger after money (Xen.
Symp. 4, 36). ᾿Ανθρώπων στοχάζεσθαι, to aim at men (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6”).
Ἥκιστα τῶν ἀλλοτρίων ὀρέγονται, they are furthest from reaching after other
men’s goods (Xen. Symp. 4, 42). Οὐκ ἀντιποιούμεθα βασιλεῖ τῆς ἀρχῆς, we do
not pretend to the dominion against the king (Xen. Anab, 2,3”). Τῆς ξυνέσεως
μεταποιεῖσθαι, to lay claim to sagacity (Thuc. 1, 140°). Νίκης re τετυχήκαμεν
καὶ σωτηρίᾶς, we have attained victory and safety (Xen. Cyr. 4,1"). Τῶν καλῶν
τε κἀγαθῶν ἔργων ἐξικνεῖθαι, to arrive at noble and good works (Xen. Mem.
2,1”). οὐκ ἐφικνοῦμαι τοῦ μεγέθους τῶν πρᾶγμάτων, I do not attain (with my
speech) the greatness of the matter (Isoc. 4, 187). Οὐδεὶς ἡμάρτανεν ἀνδρός, no
one missed a man (Xen. Anab, 3, 4). Τῶν δικαίων οὐδενὸς ἀτυχήσεις, you
will not fail in getting what is right (Xen. Hell. 3,1™). Σφαλεὶς τῆς adnGeias,
having missed (= having been mistaken in) the truth (Plat. Rep. 451°). Ἐψεῦ-
σθαι τῆς ἀληθείας, to be cheated out of the truth (Plat. Rep. 413*).
oe i ee i i i mil
—-- σὺὺῪ
;
—F
6 Gee ss SE re *.
1653 GENITIVE 1
6049. Norr.—The compounds ἐν-, παρα-, περι-, συν-τυγχάνω, hit
upon, meet, take the dative (1776); so mostly ἐπι-τυγχάνω.---- Ἐράω,
love, takes the genitive of the object; φιλέω, love, and ποθέω, long for,
take the accusative.
1650. Νοτε.---Τυγχάνω is rarely found with an object-accusative ;
as Xen. Hell. 6, 816; Plat. Rep. 431°; Eur. Phoen. 1666.—Verbs of
aiming at, desiring, and missing occasionally have the accusative of
8. neuter pronoun in connection with the genitive.
Oi ἀρετῆς τι μεταποιούμενοι, those laying claim to something of virtue
(Thue. 2, 51"). So also ἐράω, as τῶν ἀγαθῶν τί ἐρᾷ; what of good things does
he love? (Plat. Symp. 204°). Similarly ἁμαρτάνω τι, ἔργον, etc.; as Men.
Mon. 724.
1651. Nore.—1.- A number of poetic verbs of this class
govern the genitive. |
᾿Ανδρῶν τοξάζεαι, you shoot (with the bow) at men (Od. 22,
27). ᾿Οἰστευσον Μενελάου, shoot arrows at Menelaus (Il. 4,
100). “Exupoas...o0xdzov, thou hast hit the mark (Aesch. Ag.
628). δΔαιτὸς ἠντήσατε, you have met with the feast (Od. 3, 44).
᾿Αντιόω πολέμοιο, I oppose battle, lit. meet (Il. 12, 368).
Ἐπιμαίεο νόστου, you strive for the homeward journey (Od. 5,
344). Λιλαιόμενοι πολέμοιο, being eager for war (Il. 3, 133).
Τιτύσκομαι, avm at (Il. 13, 159). ᾿ἙἝλδομαι, long for (Od. 5,
210). ‘Ipeipw, yearn for (Aesch. Ag. 940).
2. Some prose verbs are thus used with the genitive
only in poetry.
Τοξεύετ᾽ ἀνδρὸς τοῦδε, you discharge your shafts at this one,
i.e. me (Soph. Ant. 1033). Αὐτομέδοντος ἀκόντισε, he hurled
the javelin at Automedon (Il. 17, 525). ὋὉρμάομαι, to rush at
(11. 21, 595). Ῥίπτω, throw at (Eur. Cycl. 51).
1652. Norze.—Kvpéw is also found with the accusa-
tive of a neuter pronoun; as Eur. Heracl. 374; Soph.
Oed. Tyr. 1298.—K.xdvw, find, to light upon, has the
accusative in Homer, and mostly in tragedy.—The Ionic
and poetic ἀντιάζω, to meet, usually has the accusative,
sometimes the genitive or dative.
1653. 1. Verbs signifying to remember, to forget, to care for, to
neglect, to despise, are followed by the genitive of the object.
112 GENITIVE 1654
2. Such verbs are: μιμνήσκομαι, to call to mind; μέμνημαι, to
remember ; μνημονεύω, to call to mind ; ἐπιλανθάι ona, forget ; φροντίζω,
κήδομαι, mpovoew ANd προνοέομαι, ἐπιμέλομαι, to care for, to take care of ;
ἐνθυμέομαι, to lay to heart, to take concern for ; ἐντρέπομαι, to give heed
or care to; μέλει (μοί τινος), it is a care (to me); μεταμέλει (μοί τινος),
to repent ; ἀμνημονέω, to be unmindful of ; ἀφροντιστέω, to be heedless
of ; ἀμελέω, to neglect; ὀλιγωρέω, to regard lightly; xaradpovéw, to
despise.
Τούτων οὐδεὶς μέμνηται, no one remembers these things (Xen. Anab. 5, 855).
Τῆς ἀρχῆς μνημονεύομεν, we call to mind the beginning (Isoc. 1, 47). Δέδοικα
μὴ ἐπιλαθώμεθα τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ, I am afraid lest we may forget the way home
(Xen. Anab. 3, 2”). Τῶν ἐπιεικεστάτων... «φροντίζειν, to take into consideration
the excellent persons (Plat. Crito, 44). Ἕ αὐτοῦ κήδεται ὁ προνοῶν ἀδελφοῦ,
he who cares for a brother cares for himself (Xen. 8, 7). ᾿ἸἘνθυμεῖσθαι τῶν
τόπων, to take heed of the localities (Xen. Ven. 9,4). Τῶν νόμων ἐντρέπει;
do you pay heed to the laws? (Plat. Crito, 52°). Ti ἡμῖν τῆς τῶν πολλῶν
δόξης μέλει ; what care is there to us of the opinion of the many? (Plat. OCrito,
44°). Τῶν ἀγαθαθῶν ἀμνημονεῖν, to be wnmindful of the good (Lys. 31, 25).
Τῆς ἀρετῆς ἀμελεῖν, to neglect virtue (Isoc. 1, 48). Μηδένος ὀλιγωρεῖτε μηδὲ
καταφρονεῖτε τῶν προστεταγμένων, do not regard lightly or despise any of my
injunctions (Isoc. 3, 48).
1654. Norr.—With verbs of remembering and forgetting, the
object may be in the accusative, and is always so if a neuter pronoun,
᾿Ἐὰν τὰ παρεληλυθότα μνημονεύῃς, if you remember the past (Isoc. 2, 35).
Εἴθε.. τὰς τύχᾶς τὰς κακὰς ἐπελάθοντο, would that they had forgotten the evil
chances (Eur. Hel. 262-265). Ti γάρ, ὦ παῖ, μέμνησαι ἐκεῖνα ; do you remember
these things (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6°).
1655. Norz.—The active dva-, ὑπο-μιμνήσκω, remind, usually governs
a double accusative (1605) ;—occasionally an accusative of the person
and a genitive of the thing; as μή μ᾽ ἀναμνήσῃς κακῶν, do not remind
me of tills (Kur. Alc. 1045). See 1607.
1656. Νοτε.----Ἐνθυμέομαι governs the accusative when it means
to take into consideration ; as in Thue, 5, 32}.
1657. Νοτε.---Μέλει sometimes has the nominative instead of the
genitive, but rarely in prose.
‘Eoprai πᾶσι μέλουσιν, festivals wre the care of all (Plat. Leg. 835°). Ταῦτα
ἴσως ἄλλῳ μελήσει, these things will be an object of attention to another (Xen.
Hell. 7, 5%). So also μεταμέλει, repent (impersonal); as τῷ ᾿Αρίστωνε τὸ
———— oe
ye ἊΝ
1663 GENITIVE 118
εἰρημένον μετέμελε for τοῦ εἰρημένου, Ariston repented of what he had said
(Hat. 6, 63).
1658. Norz.—Verbs of this class sometimes govern accusatives
like τὶ, οὐδέν, μικρόν, πολλά, and the like (1654).
1659. Norn.—For φείδομαι, spare, and ἀφειδέω, not to spare, see
1680.
1660. Norz.—To the poetic verbs of this class (1653)
we add also those whose simple forms only are poetic,
and forms of other verbs which are not used in prose.
Τῶν viv pw μνήσᾶσα παρέζεο, of these things now
reminding him, sit beside him (Il. 1, 407). Μήπω tis...
νόστοιο λάθηται, lest any one should forget the return (Od.
9, 102). Μεδώμεθα θούριδος ἀλκῆς, let us be mindful of im-
pe valour (Il. 4, 418). Μὴ σαυτοῦ ἀκήδει δυστυχοῦντος,
do not disregard thyself in thy distress (Aesch. Pro. 508).
᾿Αλέγω, to have a care of (Od. 9, 275). Merarpéropa, care for
(Il. 9, 630). Τημελέω, to take care of (Eur. Iph. T'awr. 311).
—In Il. 6, 222, we find μέμνημαι with the acc.: Tidéa od
μέμνημαι ; similar examples are rare.
1661. Norr.—tTragic are μέλω and μέλομαι, to care for ;
in poetry both also in the sense, to be a care to.
Βροτῶν μέλειν, to care for mortals (Aesch. Ag. 370). Σέτων
μέλεσθε, prepare (= have a care of) the viands (Eur. Hipp.
109). Ἐμοί κε ταῦτα peAnoera, these things shall be my concern
(Il. 1, 523).—In Homer μεμηλώς, caring for (Il. 13, 297).—
Μεληθείς, active in Soph. Aj. 1185.
1662. Norz.—Occasionally prose verbs meaning to care
for, which regularly take the accusative are found with
the genitive
Οὐκ ἂν στραφείην (Soph. Aj. 1117). ἘἘννοέομαι (Eur. Med.
47).
1663. 1. Verbs of mental or sensory perception, as to perceive,
to understand, to hear, to smell, to taste, govern the genitive.
2. Such verbs are: αἰσθάνομαι, to perceive ; συνίημι, to wnderstand ;
ἀποδέχομαι, accept (a statement) from; ἀκούω, ἀκροάομαι, to hear ;
ὀσφραίνομαι, to smell (active); ὄζω, to smell of ; γεύομαι, taste.—Tedvw,
to give a taste of, has the accusative of the person and the genitive of
8
114 GENITIVE 1664
the thing, as in Plat. Leg. 634*; so sometimes ἑστιάω, to entertain, to
feast any one (Plat. Phaedr. 227°).
Τῆς κραυγῆς ἤσθοντο, they perceived the shouting (Xen. Hell. 4, 43).
᾿Αλλήλων συνΐεσαν, they understood each other (Thue. 1, 3°). Θορύβου ἤκουσε,
he heard the murmur (Xen. Anab. 1, 816). Τῶν μαρτύρων ἀκηκόατε, you have
heard the witnesses (Lys. 1, 48). Λόγου ἀκροᾶσθαι, to listen to a speech (Thuc.
6, 17%). ᾿Ακροώμενοι τοῦ adovros, hearing the singer (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3”).
Κρομμύων ὀσφραίνομαι, I smell onions (Ar. Ran. 654). “Ofovor ἀμβροσίᾶς καὶ
νέκταρος, they smell of ambrosia and nectar (Ar. Ach. 196). ᾿Ολίγοι otrov
ἐγεύσαντο, few tasted of food (Xen. Anab. 3, 1°). Οὐκ ἀποδέξομαί σου, I will
not take this from you (Plat. Rep. 337”).
1664. Norr.—The same construction is found with many other
verbs expressing to see, to know, to find out, to consider, to say, and
the like; often such a genitive may be rendered by about, concerning.
Διαθεώμενος αὐτῶν, ὅσην χώρᾶν ἔχοιεν, contemplating about them
what a great country they had (Xen. Anab. 8, 1.9). Ἔγνω ἄτοπα ἐμοῦ
ποιοῦντος, he knew about my doing absurd things (Xen. Cyr. 7, 2%). “Ayvo-
odvres ἀλλήλων, 6 τι λέγομεν, misunderstanding what we say, lit. each
other in what we say (Plat. Gorg. 517°). Ἐπύθοντο τῆς Πύλου κατειλημ-
μένης, they found out about Pylus being taken (Thuc. 4, 6'). Tod οἴκαδε
πλοῦ διεσκόπουν ὅπῃ κομισθήσονται, concerning their homeward voyage,
they were considering by what way they should return (Thue. 1, 52°) Ἔν-
θυμοῦ τῶν εἰδότων ὅ τι λέγουσι καὶ 6 τι ποιοῦσιν, contemplate those who
have knowledge, what they say and what they do (Xen. Mem. 8, 6"). Τοῦ
_ τοξότου ov καλῶς ἔχει λέγειν, ὅτι..., it would not be right to say of a
bowman that... (Plat. Rep. 439°),—These genitives may usually be considered
as depending on an omitted τοῦτο or τόδε, which is actually found in some
examples; as τοῦτο... ἐπαινεῖν τῶν ἀν δρῶν, to praise this in (of) the men
(Plat. Menex. 241”). We thus have a possessive genitive (1631, 1).
2. So the genitive may depend on an interrogative or relative.
Ti δὲ τῶν ἵππων οἴει; what then do you think of horses? (Plat. Rep. 459°).
Τῆς μητρὸς... «φράσων ἐν οἷς νῦν ἐστιν, about to tell of my mother, in what
circumstances she now is (Soph. Trach. 1122).
1665. Norz.—Verbs signifying to perceive, to learn, to hear, and
the like, often take the accusative of the thing. Τί ἃ word denoting
the person from whom anything is heard, learned, etc., is also given,
it is in the genitive of source (1631, 2).
τος Τί χαλεπὸν ἤσθησαι τοὐμοῦ βίου ; what have you perceived disagreeable in
my mode of life? (Xen. Mem. 1, 6*). Πεπύσμην ταῦτα τῶν σάφ᾽ εἰδότων, I
had learnt this from those that clearly know (Ar. Thesm. 596). Μάθε μου καὶ
————— ——_— — a
1669 GENITIVE 115
τάδε, learn also these things from me (Xen. Cyr. 1, 613). Ἥδομαι ἀκούων σου
φρονίμους λόγους, I rejoice in hearing from you sensible words (Xen. Anab. 2,
5%). Τῶν Κορινθίων ἀπεδέξαντο τοὺς λόγους, they admitted the arguments of
the Corinthians (Thue. 1, 44").
2. A sentence may stand for the object-accusative.
Οὐκ αἰσθάνομαί cov ὁποῖον νόμιμον λέγεις, I do not understand what you
call conformable to law (Xen. Mem. 4, 413). Τούτων πρότερον ἄκουε τί λέγουσιν,
hear of these first what they say (Plat. Lach. 1818). Τούτων πυνθάνομαι ὅτι
οὐκ ἄβατόν ἐστι τὸ ὄρος, from them I learn that the mountains are not im-
passible (Xen. Anab. 4, 6").
1666. NotE.—Axovw with the genitive of the person may also
mean to obey; aS Σμέρδιος βασιλῆος ἀκούειν, to obey King Smerdis
(Hat. 3, 62).
1667. Norr.—Ow, to smell of, may take a second genitive of the
source of the odour; as τῆς κεφαλῆς ὄζω μύρου, I smell of perfume from
the head = my head smelis of perfume (Ar, Eccl. 524).
1668. Norr.—A number of verbs of perception are
poetic or dialectic. They may take a genitive of the
person or of the thing or of both; but κλύω, to hear,
has only the accusative of the thing (except in the
formula κέκλυτέ μεν μύθων, hear my speech, as Od. 10,
189).
Τίνος κλύοντες; obeying whom? (Eur. Cycl. 119). ᾿Ακου-
ἄζονται ἀοιδοῦ, they listen to the bard (Od. 9, 1). Κέκλυτέ ped
μῦθον, hear my speech (Il. 3, 86). Αιέ σου πατρός, obey your
father (Ar. Nub. 1166). Πατρὸς οὐκ ἀνηκούστησεν, he did not
disobey his sire (Il. 15, 236; but with dat., Hdt. 6, 143).
Νηκούστησε θεᾶς, he hearkened not to the goddess (Il. 20, 14).
1669. 1. Verbs signifying to rule and to lead are followed by
the genitive.
2. Such verbs are: ἄρχω, to rule ; βασιλεύω, to be king over, to rule ;
τυραννεύω, tupavvew, to be absolute ruler (tyrant) over ; Kipredw, δεσπόζξω,
to be lord or master over ; xparéw, to be master of ; ἡγέομαι, ἡγεμονεύω,
to lead ; στρατηγέω, to command, to be general ; vavapxéw, to command
(ships), to be admiral.
᾿Ανθρώπων ἄρχειν, to rule men (Xen. Cyr. 1, 15). "Ἔρως τῶν βασιλέων
βασιλεύει, Love is king of the gods (Plat. Symp. 195°), Πολυκράτης Σάμου
τυραννῶν, Polycrates being ruler of Samos (Thuc. 1, 13°). ‘O Μίνως τῆς viv
116 GENITIVE 1670
Ἑλληνικῆς θαλάσσης...ἐκράτησεν, Minos became master of what is now the
Greek sea (Thue. 1, 4). ‘Hyeiro rod στρατεύματος, he led the army (Xen.
Anab. 4, 1°). Λάχης ὁπλιτῶν καὶ ἱππέων ἐστρατηγεῖ, Laches commanded the
hoplites and cavalry (Thue. 5, 61"). Adopédwv πλοίων ἐναυαρχεῖ, Laomedon
commanded the ships (Dem. 18, 77).
1670. Norr.—These verbs sometimes have the accusative of
kindred meaning (1587).
‘Op@ βροτοῖς τὴν γλῶσσαν, οὐχὶ τἄργα πάν θ᾽ ἡγουμένην, I see among
mankind the tongue and not the deeds bearing rule in everything (Soph. Phil.
99). (Medias) τὰς πομπὰς ἡγεῖτο, Meidias conducted the processions (Dem. 21,
174).
1671. Norr.—1l. Kparéw with the accusative means to conquer.
Κρατήσαντες τοὺς βαρβάρους, having conquered the barbarians (Isoc. 4, 35).
Πάντας ἐκράτει, (Socrates) vanquished all (Plat. Symp. 220°). But with the
genitive it means be become or to be master of ; as κρατεῖν χωρίου, τῆς xopas,
θυμοῦ, τῶν ἐναντίων.
2. Ἡγέομαι with the dative means to be a leader, to govern.
Οἱ τοιοῦτοι ἄνδρες ἡγοῦντο ταῖς πόλεσιν (Plat. Meno, 99”).—So ἐπιστατέω,
have charge of, be set over; as ἡ Ψῦχὴ τῷ σώματι ἑπιστατεῖ, the soul is set
over the body (Plat. Gorg. 465*).
1672. Norzn.—These govern the genitive on account of the pre-
position they contain.
Προΐστημί τινά twos, to set over (Plat. Lach. 197*)., Προΐσταμαί τινος
(Dem. 24, 3). Προστατέω or προστατεύω τινός, to be set over, to preside over
(Plat. Lach. 197°; Xen. Hier. 11, 7).
1673. Norn.—1l. The chief poetic verb of this class
is dvacow, to be lord, to rule over ; as ᾿Αργείων ἤνασσεν,
he ruled over the Argives (Il. 10, 33).
2. In Homer, ποὺ often in other poets, some verbs
of this class occasionally govern the dative.
“Apyet παντὶ ἀνάσσειν, to be lord of all Argos (Il. 2, 108).
Τρωσὶν ἡγεμόνευε, he leads the Trojans (Il. 2, 816).
1674. 1. Verbs of plenty and want govern the genitive of
material (1619, 4) ; verbs signifying to fill take an object-accusative
of the thing filled and a genitive of material.
2. Such verbs are: yéuw, πλήθω, to be full (of); εὐπορέω, to be well
off, to be provided ; πλουτέω, to be rich ;—dei, there is need of (1677);
δέομαι, ἐνδέομαι, to need, to lack ; ἀπορέω, to be in want of ; ἐλλείπω, to
——
1677 GENITIVE 117
lack, to come short of ; σπανίζω, to be in want of ; πένομαι, to be needy,
to have need of ;---πληρόω, πίμπλημι, ἀναπίμπλημι, ἐμπίμπλημι, to fill ;
γεμίζω, to fi'l, to freight ; σάττω, to load ;----πλεονεκτέω, to have too much
of ; μειονεκτέω, to have too little of.
Κώμᾶς πολλῶν καὶ ἀγαθῶν yepovoas, villages stored with many excellent
provisions (Xen. Anab. 4, 6”). Φίλιππος χρημάτων εὐπορεῖ, Philip has plenty
of treasure (Dem. 18, 235). Οὐ χρῦσίου, ἀλλὰ... «ζωῆς ἀγαθῆς. to be rich, not in
gold, but in a good life (Plat. Rep. 521"). σφενδονητῶν....δεῖ, there is need of
slingers (Xen. Anab. 3, 3"). Δεήσεται δορυφόρων, he will have need of guards
(Xen. Hier. 10,1). ᾿Ανθρώπων ἀπορῶν, wanting in men (Xen. Anab. 1, 7°).
Τούτου ἐλλείπομεν, we are deficient in this (Thuc. 1, 804). Ἐπαίνου... οὔποτε
σπανίζετε, you never lack praise (Xen. Hier, 1,14). ᾿Ανδρῶν τὰς ναῦς πληροῦν,
to furnish (= fill) the ships with men (Xen. Hell. 6,1"). Σεσαγμένος πλούτου
τὴν Wixnv ἔσομαι, I shall have my mind loaded with wealth (Xen. Symp. 4, 64).
Μειονεκτεῖν σίτων καὶ ποτῶν, to have less of food and drink (Xen. Hier. 2, 1).
1675. Norr.—The genitive is also found with μεθύσκομαι, to get
drunk, and péw, to flow.
Μεϑθυσθεὶς τοῦ νέκταρος, intoxicated with the nectar (Plat. Symp. 203°).
Ἧ πηγὴ ῥεῖ μάλα Wixpod ὕδατος, the spring runs with very cold water (Plat.
Phaedr. 230°).
1676. Νοτε.----Δέομαι, to beg, to request, may take a genitive of the
person (from whom) and a cognate-accusative of the thing ; as δεήσομαι
ὑμῶν perpiav δέησιν, I shall ask of you a moderate request (Aeschin. 3,
61). . :
1677. Norz.—1. The active δέω, used personally, occurs only with .
genitives expressing quantity (πολλοῦ, ὀλίγου, μικροῦ, τοσούτου, also
τοσοῦτον), and means to be far, little, etc., from; as τῆς παιδείας...
τοσούτου δέω καταφρονεῖν, I am so far from despising the education
(Isoc. 12, 26).
2. Similarly with the impersonal δεῖ,
Πολλοῦ δεῖ, it is far from it. ᾿Ολίγου δεῖ, it lacks little of it. Παντὸς δεῖ,
it wants everything (Plat. Lys. 215°).
3. So ὀλίγου δεῖν, μικροῦ δεῖν, almost (Xen. Mem. 3, 1018, Dem. 18,
269); see 2228.—The genitives alone are used as adverbs, meaning
almost. ᾿Ολίγου πάντας, almost all (Plat. Rep. 552°). Μικροῦ (Dem. 19, 234).
4. Demosthenes has the phrases οὐδὲ πολλοῦ δεῖ (lit. nor does it
want much) and οὐδ᾽ ὀλίγου δεῖ (lit. nor does it want little, i.e. it wants
all) ; both expressions mean far from it, not at all (Dem. 54, 40; 19,
184).
118 GENITIVE 1678
1678. Norz.—l. Aéw appears personally in Homer
only in J/. 18, 100, impersonally δεῖ only in Il. 9, 337.
2. For δεῖ with an accusative of the person (instead ᾿
of the dative) and a genitive of the thing, see 1580.
3. The expression χρή μέ τινος, I have need of some-
thing, is epic.
Ti pe χρὴ μητέρος aivod; what need have I of praise for my
mother ? (Od, 21, 110); so the equivalent χρεώ μέ τινος (some-
times with fke or γίγνεται or ἐστί) ; as Il. 9, 608, and Od. 4,
634.
1679. Norn.—Examples of poetic verbs of this
class :—
Νόστοιο χατίζων, wishing for a return (Od. 8, 156). Οὐ
πόνων κεχρήμεθα; do I not experience cares? (Eur. Med. 334).
ἔλσεσθε κλαυθμοῖο, sate yourselves with wailing (Il. 24, 717).
Ἐγώ σε... αἵματος κορέσω, I will satiate you with blood (Hat.
1, 214). Δεύομαι, to lack (Il. 1, 602). Βρύω, to be full of
(Soph. Oed. Col. 16).
GENITIVE OF SEPARATION
1680. The genitive of separation denotes that from which
anything is separated, and follows verbs signifying to separate,
to remove, to free, to hinder, to restrain, to deprive, to yield, to spare,
to cease, to be distant, to be different, and the like.
2. Such verbs are: χωρίζω, to separate ; νοσφίζω, to remove ; iw,
to loose, to free; ἀπαλλάσσω, ἐλευθερόω, ἀπολύω, to free; κωλύω, εἴργω,
to hinder, to restrain; εἴκω, ὑπείκω, παρα- and ὑπο-χωρέω, to yield, to
make room for (τῆς ὁδοῦ) ; ἔχω, ἐπέχω, to hold off ; ἀπέχομαι, to refrain
from ; φείδομαι, to spare, and ἀφειδέω, not to spare; παύω, to cause to
cease, to stop; λήγω, παύομαι, to cease; μεθίεμαι, ὑφίεμαι, to abate ;
λωφάω, to have relief from; στερίσκω, ἀποστερέω, ἀφαιρέομαι, to deprive
(1682) ; στέρομαι, to be deprived ; κενόω, γυμνόω, povdw, to deprive, to
bereave ; ἄπειμι (ἀπό, εἰμί), ἀπέχω, διέχω, to be distant ; διαφέρω, diiorapat,
to be different ; καθαίρω, to cleanse from; καθαρεύω, to be pure, free
from. |
Ἐπιστήμη χωριζομένη ἀρετῆς, knowledge separated from virtue (Plat.
Menex. 246°). ᾿Απηλλαγμένοι τούτων (τῶν πόνων), released from these toils
(Xen. Anab. 4, 3°). ᾿Απολύω ὑμᾶς τῆς airias, I free you from blame (Xen.
—a
1684 GENITIVE 119
Anab. 6,6). Oi Θετταλοὶ ἐκώλῦον τὸν ᾿Αγησίλᾶον τῆς παρόδου, the Thessalians
hindered Agesilaus from the march (Xen. Ages, 2,2). Ei θαλάττης εἴργοιντο,
if they should be excluded from the sea (Xen. Hell. 7, 1°). Οδοῦ rapa-
χωρῆσαι. .τῷ πρεσβυτέρῳ καὶ λόγων ὑπεῖξαι, to yield the path to the
elder, and to give place in conversation (Xen. Mem. 2, 3). Τούτους τῆς
ἄγαν κολακείας ἐπισχήσετε, restrain these people from their adulation (Dem.
45, 88). Ἔπεσχον τῆς τειχίσεως, they ceased from building the wall (Xen.
Hell. 6, Ὁ). Χρὴ μήτε χρημάτων φείδεσθαι μήτε πόνων, it is necessary to spare
neither money nor toil (Plat. Phaedo, 785). ᾿Ἔπαυσαν Τιμόθεον τῆς στρητηγίᾶς,
they deposed Timotheus from the command (Xen. Hell. 6, 2"). "Ἐληξε τῆς
Onpas, he ceased from the hunt (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4"). Od παύεσθε τῆς μοχθηρίας,
you do not cease from your rascality (Ar. Lysist. 1160). Γυμνασίων pedievra,
they leave off bodily exercise (Plat. Rep. 537°). Λωφᾷ τῆς ὀδύνης, it rests from
pain (Plat. Phaedr. 251°). ‘H νῆσος od πολὺ διέχει τῆς ἠπείρου, the island is
not far distant from the mainland (Thue. 3, 51°). Οὐδὲν διοίσεις Χαιρεφῶντος,
you will not differ at all from Chaerephon (Ar. Nub. 503).
1681. Norr.—Instead of the genitive alone, ἀπό with the genitive
is sometimes used.
1682. Nore.—repicxw and ἀποστερέω, to deprive, usually have the
accusative of the person and the genitive of the thing, seldom the
reverse, sometimes a double accusative (1605).
᾿Αποστερεῖ με τῶν χρημάτων, he deprives me of my money (Isoc. 17, 35).
Πόσων ἀπεστέρησθε; of how much have you been deprived? (Dem. 8, 63).
Στέρομαι, to be deprived, has only the genitive.—’Agaipéoua, to take away,
usually takes the double accusative (1605); sometimes the genitive of
the person and the accusative of the thing, seldom the reverse; as τῶν
ἄλλων ἀφαιρούμενοι χρήματα, taking away property from others (Xen. Mem.
1, 5°). .
1683. Norz.—The poets (chiefly Homer) use the
genitive of separation with verbs of motion in cases
where a preposition would be necessary in prose.
Οὐλύμποιο κατῆλθομεν, we descended from Olympus
(Il. 20, 125). ᾿Οδυσῆα διώκετο οἷο δομοῖο; he wished to
drive Ulysses from his own home (Od. 18, 8). Βάθρων ἵστασθε,
rise from the steps (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 142). Πυθῶνος ἔβᾶς, thou
didst come from Pytho (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 152).
1684. Norz.—1. Some verbs which govern a genitive
of separation are poetic,
Χάξζοντο κελεύθου, they retired from the way (ll. 11,
120
GENITIVE
504). Οὐκ ἀλύξετον μόρου κακίστου, they shall not escape
a most wretched fate (Soph. Ant. 488). Μήπω tis ἐρωείτω
πολέμοιο, let no one ever retire from the battle (Il. 17, 422);
so épvoua, defend (Il. 5, 456), and others.
2. Some prose verbs govern a genitive of separation
only in poetry or in dialectic prose.
Σχήσεσθε “Apnos, ye shall be restrained from war (Il.
13, 630), Αἴ κεν Τυδέος ὑιὸν dm do yx'\n "Ἰλίου ἱρῆς, if she will
restrain the son of Tydeus from sacred Iliwm (Il. 6, 277).
"Ea xovro τῆς ἀγωγῆς, they abstained from the carrying-off
(Hdt. 6, 85). Ζεὺς κῆρας ἄμῦνεν παιδὸς ἑοῦ, Zeus averted
the fate from his son (Il. 12, 402). Σωθῆναι πόνων, to be
saved from troubles (Eur. Tro. 684). Tov ye Oeoi βλάπτουσι
κελεύθου, the gods hinder him from his jowrney (Od. 1, 195).
So ἀποκουφίζω, to relieve, to set free (Eur. Or. 1341); δέω, to
bind (Od, 4, 380); ὁρίζω, separate (Hdt. 2, 16); μονόω, deprive
(Hat. 8, 62); χωρέω, withdraw (Il. 15, 655).
3. In poetry verbs compounded with ἀπό sometimes
govern the simple genitive where in prose the preposition
with the genitive would be used.
So μεθίστημι, to remove, to liberate, in tragedy (also Thuc.
2, 67'). Mediu, to let go (Hom., Hdt.). Ὑπιέναι, to let go
(Hdt.). ᾿Ανΐημι (Eur., Ar. ; also Thue. 7, 437).
4, Homeric ἀναπνέω with the genitive, to rest from,
lit. to breathe again ; as οὕτω κεν Τρῶες ἀνέπνευσαν κακό- ἡ
τητος, thus would the Trojans have had a respite from
destruction (Il. 11, 382).
1685. Norr.—l. Λήγω, to cease from, also has the
accusative in Homer, besides the genitive or participle.
2. Some verbs of depriving which govern the genitive
are only poetic. Kéxadov, deprived (Od. 21, 153). ᾿Αμείρω,
(Od. 8, 64). ᾿Αλαόω, to blind (Od. 9, 516). ᾿Ατέμβω,
disappoint (Od. 9, 42).
3. ᾿Απ-αυράω, to deprive, to rob, is used by Homer
with two accusatives (J/. 6, 17), sometimes also with a
dative of the person and an accusative of the thing (ZI.
21, 296). He uses ἐναρίζω and ἀπορραίω, to despoil, with
two accusatives.
1685
1688 ‘ GENITIVE 121
GENITIVE OF DISTINCTION
1686. 1. Verbs signifying to surpass, to be surpassed, or to be
inferior, and those derived from comparatives are followed by the
genitive.
2. Such verbs are: περίειμι (περί and εἰμί), to be superior; περι-
γίγνομαι, to overcome ; ὑπερέχω, προέχω, to surpass (ὑπερβάλλω has the
accusative) ; προφέρω, to excel ; ἡσσάομαι, to be worsted, to be inferior ;
vixdopat, to be vanquished ; λείπομαι, to be inferior, to be left behind ;—
πλεονεκτέω, to have or to gain an advantage (more) ; μειονεκτέω, to have
less, too little ; ἐλασσόομαι, μειόομαι, to fall short of, to be inferior to ;
ὑστερίζω, ὑστερέω, to be behind, to be late, to be worsted.
Τῶν ἰδιωτῶν περιεῖναι, to be superior to private individuals (Xen. Ag. 5,
(2). Περιγενέσθαι τῆς βασιλέως δυνάμεως, to overcome the power of the king
(Xen. Anab. 2, 1°). Ἐμπειρίᾳ πολὺ προέχετε τῶν ἄλλων, in experience you
far excel the others (Xen. Hell. 7, 14). ‘H Νάξος εὐδαιμονίᾳ τῶν νήσων
προέφερε, Naxos surpassed the other islands in wealth (Hdt. 5, 28"). Τούτου
οὐχ ἡττησόμεθα εὖ ποιοῦντες, we shall not be outdone by him in kind offices
(Xen. Anab. 2, 333). οὐδὲν πλήθει ye ἡμῶν λειφθέντες ὑπεῖξάν σοι, when they
were not at all inferior to us in numbers, they submitted to you (Xen. Anab.
7, 7*).—Tod δικαίου πλεονεκτεῖν, to go beyond (obtain more than) a just man
(Plat. Rep. 349°). Μειονεκτοῦσι τῶν ἰδιωτῶν, they: have less than private
individuals (Xen. Hier. 1, 18). Σωκράτης θυσίας θύων μικρὰς οὐδὲν ἡγεῖτο
μειοῦσθαι τῶν μεγάλα θυόντων, when Socrates made small sacrifices, he thought
he was not at all inferior to those who offered great ones (Xen. Mem. 1, 3°).
Παυσανίᾶς ὑστέρησεν ἐς ᾿Αλίαρτον τοῦ Λυσάνδρου, Pausanias arrived later than
Lysander at Haliartus (Xen. Hell. 3, Ὁ35), Ὑστερίζουσι τῶν πρᾶγμάτων, they
are too late for the business (Isoc. 3, 19).
1687. Nore.—'Hocdopa and νἴκάομαι may have three different
_ constructions: with the genitive, as above; with the dative, as κέρδεσι
vixwpevos, conquered by lucre (Aesch. Ag. 342); with ὑπό and the
genitive, as τὸ ἄλλο στρατόπεδον ἡσσᾶτο ὑπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, the remaining
army was beaten by the Athenians (Thue. 1, 62°).
GENITIVE OF CAUSE OR REGARD
1688. 1. The genitive of cause follows some verbs expressing
an emotion, as to wonder, to admire, to pity, to envy, to congratulate,
to be vexed, to forgive, and the like. The genitive here denotes
on account of or in regard to.
122 GENITIVE 1689
2. Such verbs are: ἄγαμαι, θαυμάζω, to wonder, to admire (1690) ;
οἰκτείρω, ἐλεέω, to pity; φθονέω, to envy; ζηλόω, to emulate, to envy ;
εὐδαιμονίζω, to congratulate, to esteem happy; συγχαίρω, to rejoice ;
ἐπαινέω, to praise; μέμφομαι, to blame ; ὀργίζομαι, to be vexed ; μνησι-
κακέω, to bear ill-will or a grudge; συγγιγνώσκω, to forgive.
Τοὺς θέλοντας θεραπεύειν Tas πόλεις οὐκ ἄγασαι τῆς avdpeias τε καὶ εὐχερείᾶς ;
do you not admire those willing to serve the cities for their cowrage and
dexterity ? (Plat. Rep. 4204). Τοὺς περιφόβους ὑμᾶς ποιοῦντας τῆς μὲν τόλμης:
οὐ θαυμάζω, τῆς δὲ aévveoias, I wonder at those making you terrified, not for -
their audacity, but for their folly (Thue. 6, 36"). Τούτους οἰκτείρω τῆς ἄγαν
χαλεπῆς νόσου, I pity these for their very severe disease (Xen. Symp. 4, 37).
Μή μοι φθονήσῃς τοῦ μαθήματος, do not grudge me the knowledge (Plat. Euthyd.
297"). Πολλάκις σε...εὐδαιμόνισα τοῦ τρόπου, I often esteemed you happy on
account of your character (Plat. Crito, 43°). Συγχαίρω τῶν γεγενημένων, I
share the joy for what has happened (Dem. 15, 15). οΟὔποτ᾽ ἀνδρὶ τῷδε
knpoxevpdrov μέμψῃ, never shalt thow censwre me for my tidings (Aesch-.
Sept. 653). Τῶν ἀδικημάτων ὀργίζεσθαι, to be angry at wrongs (Lys. 31, 11).
Οὐ μνησικακήσει βασιλεὺς αὐτοῖς τῆς ἐπιστρατείᾶς, the king will not bear them
ill-will on account of the expedition (Xen. Anab. 2, 4'). Συγγιγνώσκειν αὐτοῖς
χρὴ τῆς ἐπιθυμίας, we must forgive them for their desire (Plat. Euthyd. 306°).
4689. Norz.—Here belong verbs of disputing, the object of con-
tention being in the genitive.
Εὔμολπος ἠμφισβήτησεν Ἐρεχθεῖ τῆς πόλεως, Ewmolpus disputed with
Erechtheus for the city (Isoc. 12, 193), Οὐκ ἀντιποιούμεθα βασιλεῖ τῆς ἀρχῆς,
we do not dispute with the king for his dominion (Xen, Anab. 2, 333). So
διαφέρομαί τινι (Dem. 40, 29); ἐναντιόομαί τινι (Thue. 1, 136°).
1690. Norr.—Ayapa and θαυμάζω may have various constructions :
(1) the accusative of the person alone, or of the thing alone, as ἐθαύ-:
patov τοὺς Κορινθίους, they wondered at the Corinthians (Thue. 1, 615) ;
—(2) the genitive of the person and the accusative of the thing, to ἡ
admire (or wonder at) anything in any one; a8 Topyiov μάλιστα ταῦτα
ἄγαμαι, I admire this especially in Gorgias (Plat. Meno, 95°) ;—(3) the
genitive of the thing with a dependent genitive of the person; as
θαυμάζω μάλιστα τούτου τῆς διανοίας, I wonder at his sentiment (Lys. 3,
44) ;—-(4) the accusative of the person and the genitive of the thing
(seldom), as above (1688) ;—(5) θαυμάζω may take the accusative of
the person and ἐπί τινι (1852, 2 (d)) ;—(6) θαυμάζω may take the
genitive of the person and a dependent clause with εἰ or ὅτι expressing
the cause (2074).
1693 GENITIVE 123
4691. Norz.—l. The genitive of cause is very
_ frequent in Homer; the other poets also use it freely.
2. Examples with poetic verbs :—
᾿Αχνύμενοί περ ἑταίρου, though grieved for their comrade
(Il. 15, 651). Χωόμενος᾽ Σαρπηδόνος, enraged on account of
Sarpedon (Il. 16, 552). Τῆσδ᾽ ἀπάτης κοτέων, angry on
account of this deceit (Il. 4, 168). Τῆς δὲ δειλίᾶς στυγῶ, I
abhor thy cowardice (Soph. El. 1027). So ἀσχαλάω, to be
vexed (Od. 19, 534), μηνίω, to be wroth (Soph. Ant. 1177), and
others.
3. Ordinary prose verbs, which could not take such
a genitive of cause in prose, are occasionally so used ;
@S παιδὸς οὐκ ἀλγεῖν δοκεῖς; do you not think I suffer
for my child ? (Eur. Hec. 1256).
GENITIVE OF SOURCE
_. 1692. 1. A genitive of sowrce accompanies many verbs.
Ταῦτα δέ σοῦ τυχόντες, obtaining this of you (Xen. Anab. 6, 6). οὗ δὲ
δὴ πάντων οἰόμεθα τεύξεσθαι ἑπαίνου, which prarse we expect to obtain from
all (Xen. Anab. 5, 733). Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο, of
Darius and Parysatis are born two sons (Xen. Anab. 1, 1’). For more
examples see 1665. \
2. In poetry the genitive is sometimes found with a
few passive participles denoting the agent; σᾶς ἀλόχου
σφαγείς, slain by thy wife (Eur. El. 123).—So with the
verbal διδακτός ; as νουθετήματα κείνης διδακτά, admonitions
taught by her (Soph. El. 848).
GENITIVE OF PRICE OR VALUE
1693. 1. With verbs denoting to buy, to sell, to value, to exchange,
and the like, the price or value is in the genitive.
2. Such verbs are: ὠνέομαι (ἐπριάμην), dyopalw, to buy; πωλέω,
πιπράσκω, ἀποδίδομαι, to sell; ἀξιόω, tiudw, to estimate; ἀλλάσσομαι,
ἀνταλλάσσομαι, to exchange.
Δόξα δὲ χρημάτων οὐκ ὠνητή, glory is not to be bought for money (Isoc. 2,
32). Πρίασθαι ταλάντου, to buy for a talent (Xen. Mem. 2, δ). Τῶν πόνων
πωλοῦσιν ἡμῖν πάντα τἀγαθὰ οἱ θεοί, the gods sell us all good things for labour
(Xen. Mem. 2, 1%). οὐκ dv ἀπεδόμην πολλοῦ τὰς ἐλπίδας, I would not
have sold my hopes for a great price (Plat. Phaedo, 98"). Oi βάρβαροι
124 GENITIVE : 1694
Θεμιστοκλέᾷ τῶν μεγίστων δωρεῶν ἠξίωσαν, the barbarians esteemed Themistocles
worthy of the highest gifts (Isoc. 4, 154). Μείξονος αὐτὰ ripovra, they
value them more (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1.5). Μηδὲ ἀνταλλάξασθαι μηδεμιᾶς χάριτος
μηδ᾽ awereias τὴν εἰς τοὺς Ἕλληνας εὔνοιαν, nor to barter your good-will to
the Greeks for any favour or benefit (Dem. 6, 10).
1694, Norr.—The genitive of price occurs also with other verbs.
Τριῶν δραχμῶν πονηρός ἐστι, he is a villain for three drachmae (Dem. 19,
200). Τάξαντες ἀργυρίου πολλοῦ, rating (the food) at a high price (Thue.
4, 26°). Μισθοῦ στρατεύονται, they serve for money (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2"). οἱ
τύραννοι μισθοῦ φύλακας ἔχουσιν, tyrants keep guards for pay (Xen. Hier. 6,
10). Mndevds κέρδους...προέσθαι, to abandon for no gain (Dem. 6,10). Πόσου
διδάσκει; Πέντε μνῶν, for how much does he teach? For five minae (Plat.
Apol. 20°). πΠροπέποται τῆς παραυτίκα χάριτος τὰ τῆς πόλεως πράγματα, the
interests of the city have been complimented away for immediate favour (Dem.
3, 22).
1695. Norz.—The thing bought is sometimes in the genitive.
Πολλὴν χάριν ὀφείλω τῆς Θεαιτήτου γνωρίσεως, I owe you many thanks for
the acquaintance (Plat. Pol. 2575). Οὐδένα τῆς συνουσίᾶς ἀργύριον πράττῃ
you exact no money of anybody for your society (Xen. Mem. 1, 6").
1696. Norz.—Observe the judicial expressions ripav τινί τινος (used
of the judge), to estimate the penalty for any one, and ripaiobai τινί
twos (used of any one of the litigants), to propose a penalty for any
one.
Τρία ἔτη δεδέσθω, ἐὰν μὴ τὸ δικαστήριον πλείονος αὐτῷ χρόνου ripnon,
he shall be imprisoned for three years, unless the court assign him a longer
term (Plat. Leg. 880°). Τίμᾶται δ᾽ οὖν μοι ὁ ἀνήρ θανάτου, so the man proposes
for me the death-penalty (Plat. Apol. 36”). ᾿Ἐὰν μὲν ἦ τῳ θανάτου τετιμημένον,
if the death-sentence has been decreed against any one (Plat. Leg. 946°).—
Compare 1702.
1697. Norr.—To estimate highly, etc., is usually περὶ πολλοῦ
(πλείονος, πλείστου) ποιεῖσθαί τι (1856, 1 (c)); and so περὶ ὀλίγου
(ἐλάττονος, οὐδένος) ποιεῖσθαί τι, to estimate a thing as little (less,
nothing). Similarly πρὸ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαι (1857, 1 (c)), παρ᾽ ὀλίγον
ποιεῖσθαι (1855, 3 (f)), παρ᾽ οὐδὲν ἡγεῖσθαι.
1698. ΝοΤΕ. The genitive of price or value seems to lie in these
two passages in Demosthenes :—
Τῆς τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐλευθερίας καὶ cwrnpias, for the liberty and
safety of the Greeks (Dem. 18, 100). Tod περὶ Φωκέας ὀλέθρου, for the de-
== ΨΥ Eee
1699 GENITIVE 125:
struction of the Phocians (Dem. 19, 76).—’Evexa, for the sake of, is naturally
expected here before the genitives. Similarly in the genitive of the infinitive
with τοῦ (2235). In all these cases the idea seems to be that of an equivalent
or else of a purpose or object aimed at (1693).
GENITIVE OF CRIME
1699. 1. The genitive of crime accompanies verbs of judicial
procedure (not compounded with κατά) denoting to accuse, to indict,
to prosecute, to condemn, to convict, to acquit, and the like; also to
revenge or to punish.
2. Such verbs are: αἰτιάομαι, ἐπαιτιάομαι, to accuse; εἰσάγω, brayo,.
to bring before court, to prosecute ; διώκω, to prosecute ; ἐπέξειμί (τινι),
ἐπεξέρχομαί (τινι), ἐπισκήπτομαί (τινι), to proceed against, to prosecute ;
προσκαλέομαι, to summon, to accuse; Aayxdvw (τινί τινος), to sue any
one for something, to prosecute ; κρίνω, δικάζω, to judge; γράφομαι, to
indict ; δικάζομαι, to go to law (about) ; φεύγω, to be accused or prose-
cuted ; aipéw, to convict ; ἁλίσκομαι, to be convicted ; ὀφλισκάνω, to lose
@ suit; ἀπολίω, ἀφίημι, to acquit (1680); εὐθύνομαι, to be called to
account (for) ;—ripwpéw τινί twos, to avenge some one for something ;
Tipwpéouai τινά twos, to avenge oneself on (or to punish) any one for
anything (τιμωρεῖν τινι θάνατον, to avenge any one’s death).
Αἰτιᾶσθαι ἀλλήλους τῶν γεγενημένων, to accuse each other of what
has happened (Xen. Ages. 1, 33). Διώξομαί σε δειλίας, I will prosecute you
for cowardice (Ar. Eq. 368). Ἐπεξίτω φόνου τῷ κτείναντι, let him proceed
against the slayer for murder (Plat. Leg. 866”). Προσκαλοῦμαί σε βλάβης,
I swmmon you for injury (Ar. Vesp. 1407). (Οἶμαι) φόνου ἂν εἰκότως
ἐμαυτῷ Aaxeiv,, I might fairly institute proceedings against myself for
murder (Dem. 21, 120). Arxdfovor...dxapiorias, they go to law for
ingratitude (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2"). δώρων ἐκρίθησαν, they were found guilty
of bribery, lit. gifts (Ins. 27, 3). Ἐμὲ ὁ Μέλητος ἀσεβείας ἐγράψατο,
Meletus indicted me for impiety (Plat. Euthyphr. 5°). "Awe Beias φεύγοντα
ὑπὸ Μελήτου, brought to trial (or accused) by Meletus of impiety (Plat. Apol.
35"). (Κλέωνα) δώρων ἑλόντες καὶ κλοπῆς, having convicted Cleon of
bribery and theft (Ar. Nub. 591), Ψευδομαρτυριῶν ἁλώσεσθαι προσ-
δοκῶν, expecting to be convicted of false testimony (Dem. 39, 18). Κἂν
darpareiads tis ὄφλῃ, and if any one is convicted of shunning military
service (Dem. 24, 103), ᾿Αδικημάτων εὐθύνθη, he was censured for wrongs
(Thuc. 1, 95°). Τιίμωρήσειν σοι τοῦ παιδὸς τὸν φονέᾶ ὑπισχνοῦμαι, I
promise to take vengeance for you on the murderer of your son, lit. on the
murderer for your son (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6°). ᾿Ἐὰν.. «τοὺς παρόντας τῆς ἐξαπάτης
126 GENITIVE 1700
Tipwpnodpeba, if we take revenge on those present for their deception (Xen.
Anab. 7, 1*°).
1700. Norr.—The genitive of crime sometimes dopants upon a
cognate-accusative (1587) like δίκην or γραφήν.
Tpavparos ἐκ mpovoids γραφὰς γραφόμενος, making charges for injuries
committed with premeditation (Aeschin. 3, 212). ᾿Οφλὼν γὰρ ἁρπαγῆς τε
καὶ κλοπῆς δίκην, having been cast in the penalty for abduction and theft
(Aesch. Ag. 534),—The usual omission of this cognate-accusative gives rise
to the genitive of crime.
1701. ΝΟΤΕ.---Οφλισκάνω, to lose a suit, may have other accusa-
tives; aS μωρίᾶν ὀφλισκάνω, I am convicted af folly (Soph. Ant, 470).
1702. Norz.—With verbs of this class θανάτου is the genitive of
price.
Καὶ θανάτου δὲ οὗτοι κρίνουσιν, they take cognisance of matters of life and
death (Xen. Cyr, 1, 2"). Ὑπαγόμενος θανάτου, tried for his life (Xen. Hell,
1, 3"), οἱ ἔφοροι τὸν Σφοδρίᾶν ὑπῆγον θανάτου, the ephors indicted Sphodrias
on a capital charge (Xen. Hell. 5, 453.
1703. Norx.—For verbs of this class compounded with κατά, see
1709-1713.
GENITIVE WITH COMPOUND VERBS
1704. Many compound verbs govern the genitive through
prepositions they contain ; ἀλλ τι those; compounded with
ἀπό, ἐξ, πρό, and ὑπέρ.
"Ar orpé wee pe τούτου, it turns me away from this (Plat. Apol, 31°),
Οὐδενὸς χρὴ πράγματος τὸν εὖ πονοῦντα dmoyva@vai ποτε, one who
works well ought never to despair of anything (Men. Mon. 133).—Ta φαλάγγια
τοῦ φρονεῖν ἐξίστησιν, tarantulas deprive men of their reasoning power
(Xen. Mem. 1, 3"). Ἔ ξηρτήμεθα τῶν ἐλπίδω ν, welare dependent wpon
hopes (Isoc. 8, 7).—T péxettac τῆς xopas ἡμῶν ὄρη μεγάλα, high mountains
lie in front of our land (Xen. Mem. 3, 5*). Πολλοῖς ἡ γλῶττα m pot péxet
τῆς διανοίας, in many the tongue runs ahead of the thought (Isoc. 1, 41).—
Ὑπερεφάνησαν τοῦ λόφου, they appeared above the hill (Thue. 4, 933).
᾿Αγεσίλᾶος οὐκ ἀνθρώπων trepeppover, Agesilaus did not exult more
than becomes men (Xen. Ages. 11, 2). Οὕτως ὑμῶν ὑπεραλγῶ, so do I
grieve for you (Ar. Av. 466). Χρὴ ὑπερδικεῖν τοῦ λόγου, τέ is neces-
sary to plead for the principle (Plat. Phaedo, 86°).
1705. Νοτε.---Απογιγνώσκω with the genitive, to despair of ; with
A aa —_— - Fr =
1709 GENITIVE ; 127
the accusative, to give wp as useless (Xen. Hell. 7, 5°).—Yrepopdw and
ὑπερφρονέω, to despise, to disdain, may take the accusative (Plat. Crit.
120°; Thue. 3, 39°). So also ἀποστρέφομαι, to turn oneself away from,
abhor, a8 οὐκ ἀπυστρέφει pe, you will not turn away from me (Xen.
Cyr. 5, 5°).
1706. Nore.—Less often do we find compounds of other preposi-
tions, as ἀντί, with the genitive, unless they fall under the previous
rules (so ἐπιβαίνω, to tread upon, 1644); as τῆς viv dpaprias
ἀντιθεῖναι τὴν τότε προθυμίαν, to set against our present error our
former zeal (Thuc. 3, 56°). Still less often compounds of prepositions
which may govern more than one case.
1707. Norzr.—In Homer some compounds of διά,
ἀμφί, and περί are found with the genitive; as διῆλθεν
(Il. 20, 100); ἀμφιμάχονται (Ll. 18, 20); περιδείδια (LI.
10, 93).
1708. Norz.—In general, with verbs like the above. (1704), the
repetition of the preposition (or some similar one) before the genitive
prevails ; especially with verbs whose component parts still strongly
retain their original meaning and have not acquired a new sense, like
ἀπο-γιγνώσκω, to despair of, irep-opdw, to despise.
1709. 1. Compounds of κατά which express a judgment or a
feeiing against take a genitive of the person. Some may also take
in addition an accusative of the thing (the crime or punishment).
2. Such verbs are: καταγελάω, to laugh at, to deride; καταφρονέω,
to despise ; κατηγορέω, to accuse, to indict ; κατειπεῖν, to denounce ;
κατακρίνω, καταγιγνώσκω, καταδικάζω, to pass judgment against, to con-
demn ; καταψηφίζομαι, to vote against, in condemnation of ; καταψεύδομαι,
to tell lies against ; καταβοάω, to cry against, to decry.
Μένων πολεμίου οὐδενὸς κατεγέλα, Menon laughed at (despised) no enemy
(Xen. Anab. 2, 6"). Οὐ καταφρονῶ ᾽γὼ τῶν θεῶν, I do not despise the gods
(Eur. Bacch. 199). Κατεφρόνησαν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ddvvaciav, they despised the
Athenians for their weakness (Thuc. 8, 8°). Οὐδεὶς αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ κατηγόρησε
πώποτε, no man ever accused himself (Dem. 38, 26). Οὐκ ἂν τὰ τῶν τριάκοντα
ἁμαρτήματα ἐμοῦ κατηγόρουν, they would not accuse me of the offences of the Thirty
(Lys. 25,5). Μή μου κατείπῃς, do not report it against me (Plat. Theaet. 149").
Τὸ τελευτῆσαι πάντων ἡ πεπρωμένη κατέκρϊνειν, fate has condemned all
to die (Isoc. 1, 43). Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι θανάτου κατέγνωσαν αὐτοῦ, the Athenians
128 GENITIVE 1710
condemned him to death (Thue. 6, 61°). Ὑμῶν δέομαι μὴ καταγνῶναι δωροδοκίᾶν
ἐμοῦ, I beg of you not to declare me guilty of bribery (Lys. 21, 21). “Ὑμῶν
αὐτῶν καταψηφίσασθαι, to condemn yourselves (Lys. 12, 91). Ἐνίων ὑμᾶς
ἀκρίτων θάνατον καταψηφίσασθαι, (they persuaded) you to condemn some
to death without trial (Lys. 25, 26). Av ἔχθρᾶν καταψεύδονταί pov, they tell
lies against me through hatred (Dem. 21, 136). Τῶν ἄλλων καταψεύδει
τοιοῦτο πρᾶγμα, you tell this lie about others (Plat. Huthyd. 283°). Κατεβόων
...Tav ᾿Αθηναίων, they decried the Athenians (Thue. 1, 67).
1710. Norr.—1l. The genitive of the crime or punishment with
these verbs is rare. :
Ilapavdpor...avtov κατηγορεῖν, to accuse him of an unconstitutional measure
(Dem. 21, 5). Κατεψηφίσθησαν θανάτου ἢ φυγῆς, they have been condemned to
death or exile (Plat. Rep. 558*).
2. But those meaning to condemn may take, in addition to the
genitive of the person and the accusative of the penalty, also a
genitive of the crime; as πολλῶν οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν μηδισμοῦ θάνατον
κατέγνωσαν, our jathers condemned many to death for favouring the
Persians (Isoc. 4, 157).
3. For the genitive of value with other verbs expressing the
punishment, see 1699—1703.
1711. Norr.—The accusative of the person with these verbs is
rare; a8 τὸ καταφρονεῖν τοὺς ἐπιόντας, to despise the assailants (Thue.
6, 348).
1712. Norr.—In Herodotus καταγελάω often governs
the dative; as Hdt. 3, 37°—Other examples of com-
pounds of xara with the dative also occur in Herodotus
and Homer.
1713. Norz.—In the passive construction of the verbs in 1709,
the genitive of the person becomes the nominative (1882, 2); as κἂν
νόμῳ τις καταγνωσθῇ, and if any one is condemned by law (Xen. Hell.
4, 4"). Butif the active verb governs at the same time a genitive of
the person and an accusative of the thing, the accusative becomes the
nominative of the passive construction.
‘Ardvrev θάνατος κατεγιγνώσκετο, the death penalty was pronounced
against all (Lys. 13, 38). Κατηγόρηται ’Emixpdrovs ἱκανά, enough has been
charged against Epicrates (Lys. 27, 1).
1714 ; GENITIVE 129
(D) GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES
1714. The objective genitive accompanies adjectives which are
of similar derivation or meaning to verbs that govern the genitive,
1. Adjectives of sharing and their opposites, especially those
compounded with a privative.
Thus μέτοχος, sharing ; ἰσόμοιρος, sharing equally ; ἄμοιρος, ἄκληρος,
having no share in ; ἄγευστος, not tasting ; ἀνήκοος, not hearing ; ἀθέᾶτος,
not seeing ; very many other compounds of 4 privative ; ;—also ἐπήβολος,
haviny attained, possessed of.
Sopias μέτοχος, partaking of wisdom (Plat. Leg. 689°). Ἰσόμοροι τῶν
πατρῴων, sharing equally their patrimony (Isae. 6, 25). Τῶν καλῶν καὶ
ἀγαθῶν ἄμοιρος, not sharing in the fair and good things (Plat. Symp. 202°).
“Ayevotos κακῶν, not having a taste of evils (Soph. Ant. 582). Τῶν τριηραρχιῶν
ἀτελής, exempt from the trierarchies (Dem. 20, 27).—Iadeias ἐπήβολος,
possessed of education (Plat. Leg. 724°).
2. Adjectives denoting mindful, experienced, and their opposites,
Thus μνήμων, mindful ; ἀμνήμων, unmindful ; ἔμπειρος, ἐπιστήμων,
experienced in; ἄπειρος, ἀνεπιστήμων, unskilled in ; ἐπιμελής, careful ;
dpeAns, careless.
᾿Αμνήμων τῶν κινδύνων, unmindful of dangers (Antiphon, 2a,7). Πολέμων
ἔμπειρος, experienced in wars (Thuc. 1, 801). Ἐπιμελεῖς σμῖκρῶν, attentive to
little things (Plat. Leg. 900°). Plat. Phaedo, 1175.
3. Adjectives denoting power and capability, especially those in
-tKOS.
Thus ἐγκρατής, mester of ; ἀκρατής, having no control over, im-
moderate 7n ; αὐτοκράτωρ, master of ; κύριος, having popes or authority ;
and very many in -tKxos.
Πάντων κυρία, mistress of all (Aeschin. 2, 131). Τῶν ἡδονῶν πᾶσῶν
ἐγκρατέστατος, most perfect master of all pleaswres (Xen. Mem. 1, 2").
Γλώσσης ἀκρατής, having no control over my tongue (Aesch. Pro, 884).
‘Eavrov ἀκράτωρ, not master of himself (Plat. Rep. Ὁ795).---Παρασκευαστικὸς
τῶν eis τὸν πόλεμον, capable of procuring the necessaries of war (Xen. Mem.
3, 1°). Διδασκαλικὸς τῆς αὑτοῦ codias, capable of teaching his own science
(Plat. Euthyphr. 3°), Xen. Mem. 3, 1°
4. Adjectives denoting possession and some expressing con-
nection.
Thus ἴδιος, οἰκεῖος, belonging to, peculiar to ; κοινός, common to ;
ἱερός, sacred to ; ἀλλότριος, foreign to, another's ; συγγενής, related to ;
9
130 GENITIVE 1714
ἀδελῴός, brother to; ἐπώνυμος and ὁμώνυμος, namesake, named after ;
ἀκόλουθος, following.—For the dative with these, see 1756.
Ἴδιος αὑτῶν, belonging to themselves alone (Aeschin. 3, 3). Ἑκάστου
οἰκεῖος, peculiar to each (Plat. Gorg. 506°). Κοινὸν πάντων, common to all
(Plat. Symp. 205*). Ἱερὸς τῆς ᾿Αρτέμιδος, sacred to Artemis (Xen. Anab. 5,
3). Δημοκρατίᾶς ἀλλότρια, foreign to democracy (Lys. 31, 34). Συγγενὴς
dxodagias, related to wantonness (Plat. Rep. 403°). Τούτων ἀδελφά, similar -
to these (Xen. Hier. 1, 22). ‘Opovupos Σωκράτους, a namesake of Socrates
(Plat. Soph. 218). ᾿Ακόλουθα ἀλλήλων, connected with each other (Xen.
ec. 11, 12).
5. Adjectives of plenty and want.
Thus πλέως, πλήρης, μεστός, full οὔ; πλούσιος, rich; ἄπληστις,
insatiate ; ἐνδεής, ἐπιδεής, ἐλλιπής, lacking ; πένης, poor ; κενός, empty.
Θηρίων πλήρης, full of animals (Xen. Anab. 1, 27). Μεστὸν κακῶν, full
of evils (Men. Mon, 334). πΠλουσιώτερος φρονήσεως, richer in good sense
(Plat. Pol. 261°). Πλείστων ἐνδεέστατος, most lacking in most things (Plat.
Rep. 579°). Χρημάτων πένητες, poor in treasure (Eur. El. 37). Ἐπιστήμης
κενός, void of knowledge (Plat. Rep. 486°).
6. Adjectives of value.
Thus τέμιος, valued, esteemed ; ἄξιος, worth or worthy; ἀντάξιος,
worth just as much ; vos, purchasable ; ἀνάξιος, unworthy.
᾿Αξίᾷ δέκα μνῶν, worth ten minae (Xen. Anab. 7, 3”). "Αξιος ἐπαίνου,
worthy of praise (Plat. Leg. 762°). ᾿Ανάξιος τῆς πόλεως, unworthy of the city
(Lys. 20, 35). Αἵματος via, purchasable for blood (Aesch. 3, 160). ᾿Αντάξιον
εἶναι τῶν πάντων χρημάτων, worth all riches (Xen. Hell. 4, 155).
7. Adjectives of separation and distinction.
Thus γυμνός, naked, uncovered, stripped; ψιλός, bare, Preece |
καθαρός, pure, clean, free from; ἐρημός, destituie ; ὀρφανός, orphan,
bereft ; ἐλεύθερος, free; φειδωλός, sparing ; διάφορος, different ; ἄλλος,
other ; ἕτερος, the other, different from ; ἀλλοῖος, of a different kind ;
ἀλλότριος, another's, of different kind ; also μέσος, middle.
Γυμνὴ τοῦ σώματος, stripped of the body (Plat. Cratyl. 403°). Καθαρὸς
φόνου, innocent of murder (Plat. Leg. 864°). ᾿Αρετῆς ἐρημός. destitute of
virtue (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5%). ᾿Ανδρῶν ὀρφανή, bereft of men (Lys. 2, 60).
Αἰδοῦς ἐλεύθερος, free from shame (Plat. Leg. 699°). Φειδωλοὶ χρημάτων,
sparing of money (Plat. Rep. 548°). Ἐπιστήμη ἐπιστήμης διάφορος, knowledge
distinct from knowledge (Plat. Phil. 614). "AdAa τῶν δικαίων, things other
than the just (Xen. Mem. 4, 4"). Ἕτερον τὸ ἡδὺ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ, the »οαρυν ἢ is
different from the good (Plat. Gorg. 500°).
8. Adjectives of accountability and liability.
— νυ
᾿ 1718 GENITIVE 131
Thus αἴτιος, guilty, blameworthy, causiny ; ὑπόδικος, subject to
trial ; ἔνοχος, chargeable; ὑπεύθῦνος, liable to give an account, respons-
thle ; ὑποτελής, subject to taxes.
Τούτου αἴτιος, responsible (causative) of this (Xen. Anab. 2,5”). Φόνου
ὑπόδικος, subject to trial for murder (Dem. 54, 25). Ἔνοχος δειλίᾶς, chargeable
with cowardice (Lys. 14,5). Τῆς ἀρχῆς ὑπεύθῦνος, liable to give an account
of his office (Dem. 18, 117). Ὑποτελεῖς φόρου, subject to tribute (Thue. 1,
19’).
9. Adjectives of feeliny and sensation.
Thus εὐδαίμων, happy ; dvcepws, passionately in love with; ovy-
γνώμων, forgiving ; τυφλός, blind ; and especially ἐπ-, κατ-, ὑπ-, συν-,
ἀν-ήκοος, from ἀκούω, hear.
Εὐδαίμων τοῦ τρόπου, happy in his disposition (Plat. Phaedo, 58°). Συγ-
γνώμων τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων, forgiving in human affairs (Xen. Cyr. 6, 151).
Τυφλὸν τοῦ μέλλοντος, blind to the future (Plut. Solon, 12). Λόγων καλῶν
ἐπήκοοι, listening to fine discourses (Plat. Rep. 499"). Ὑπήκοος τῶν γονέων,
obedient to one’s parents (Plat. Rep. 463°).
1715. Norr.—In some cases an adjective with a dependent genitive
is to be considered a noun.
1716. Norzr.—1. To these adjectives belong natur-
ally some which are entirely poetic ; as ἐπίληθος, causing
forgetfulness ; ἔμμορος, partaking of, fortunate ; dxpnvos,
fasting, without food ; ebvis, bereaved ; and others.
2. The poets freely join adjectives to the genitive in
ways inadmissible in prose.
Αὐθάδης φρενῶν, self-willed in mind (Aesch. Pro. 908).
Ξυνετὸς πολέμου, skilled in war (Eur. Or. 1406). Ὕποπτος...
Τρωικῆς ἁλώσεως, suspecting the capture of Troy (Kur. Hee.
1135).
1717. Norr.—For ἐναντίος, opposite, with the genitive, see 1768, 2.
—Herodotus has τοῦ Πόντου ἐπικάρσιαι, at an angle with the Pontos
(Hat. 7, 36.).
1718. Norz.—Compounds of 4 privative occasionally govern a
_ genitive of kindred meaning.
Tov ἡδίστου ἀκούσματος ἀνήκοος, not hearing the sweetest sound (Xen.
Mem. 2, 1"). “Anas ἀρρένων παίδων, childless in regard to male children
(Xen. Cyr. 4, θ᾽). Χρημάτων ddwpdraros, most free from accepting bribes
(Thue. 2, 65°).
132 GENITIVE 1719
1719. Norr.—1l. Observe the expression μόνος τῶν ἄλλων, altogether
alone, i.e. separated from the rest (Xen. Cyr. 1, 459),
2. Similar to this are inaccurate expressions in Homer,
like :-—
ἔλριστοι τῶν ἄλλων, the bravest of the rest (Il. 12, 104).
᾿Ωκυμορώτατος ἄλλων, most short-lived of others, i.e. of all (Il.
1, 505).
1720. Nore.—Karyxoos, ὑπήκοος, and ἐπήκοος, in the sense of
obedient to, may also have the dative.—For the genitive with ἐναντίος,
see 1768, 2.
1721. 1. Some adjectives similar in meaning to transitive
verbs govern the genitive.
Such are: κακοῦργος, doing evil ; σύνεργός (τινί twos), working
with ; φιλομαθής, fond of learning ; ὀψιμαθής, late in learning ; σύμ-
ψηφός (τινί τινος) voting for (with any one) ; dporabys, feeling th: same.
Κακοῦργος τῶν ἄλλων, doing evil to others (Xen. Mem. 1, 5*). Φιλομαθὴς
ἁπάντων, fond of learning all (Xen. Cyr. 1. 6). ᾿οΟψιμαθὴς τῆς ἀδικίᾶς, late
in learning about injustice (Plat. Rep. 409”). Σύμψηφός σοί εἰμι τούτου τοῦ
νόμου, I vote with you for this law (Plat. Rep. 380°). Ὁμοπαθεῖς λύπης τε
καὶ ἡδονῆς, feeling the same pain and pleasure (Plat. Rep. 464°).
2. In poetry such examples are much more frequent;
often the adjective is really used as a noun; as ἐκ τῶν
ἀλιτηρίων τῶν τῆς θεοῦ, from those sinful towards the
goddess (Ar. Hq. 448).
1722. Some adjectives govern the genitive by virtue of the noun
which they imply.
Τάμου ὡραίη, ripe for marriage (Hdt. 1, 196; like Spa γάμου). Τέλειος
τῆς τοῦ πράγματος ἀρετῆς, perfect in the excellence of the thing (Plat. Leg.
6438),
1723. 1. The comparative degree is often followed by the
genitive (see 1341—1343),
2. The genitive follows also δεύτερος, second to ; ὕστερος, later or
too late; ἡ mporepaia, the day before; ἡ ὑστεραία, the day after ;
περισσός, above the average, above measure (also περισσεύω, to be over
and above, more than) ; multiplicatives in -πλά ros, -πλοῦς, and -στός.
Οὐδενὸς δεύτερος, second to none (Hat. 1, 23°). Ὕστεροι τῆς συμβολῆς, too
late for (= later than) the engagement (Hdt. 6, 120°). Τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ τῆς μάχης,
ao > eer eae ee -.“-
a Φωντ
1729 GENITIVE 133
on the day after the battle (Plat. Menex. 240°). Τῶν ἀρκούντων περιττά, more
than is sufficient (Xen. Cyr. 8, 25). Περισσεύοντα τῆς δαπάνης, more than
the expenditure (Xen. Symp. 4, 35). Πολλαπλήσιον τοῦ ἡμετέρου (Sc. στρατεύ-
ματος), many times our army (Hat. 7, 48°).
1724. The partitive genitive occurs with adjectives as with nouns.
See 1619, 6.
(E) GENITIVE WITH ADVERBS
1725. Adverbs derived from adjectives which govern the
genitive also govern the genitive.
Διαφερόντως τῶν ἄλλων ἀνθρώπων, differently from the rest of men (Xen.
Hier. 7,4). “Agios ἡμῶν, in a manner worthy of us (Xen. Cyr. 7, 3%). Τῶν
μεγίστων παιδευμάτων ἀπείρως ἔχουσιν (= ἄπειροί εἰσιν), they are inexperienced
in the most important lessons (Xen. Cyr. 1, 5").
1726. The genitive is also found with adverbs of place (as ποῦ,
ποῖ, πανταχοῦ, etc.), of time (as πηνίκα, πρῴ, ὀψέ, etc.), of manner
and condition (especially with ἔχω); and with ἅλις and ἅδην,
enough, abundantly.
Ποῦ γῆς; where in the world? (Soph. Trach. 236). °Evradéa τοῦ οὐρανοῦ,
there in the sky (Xen. Mem. 4, 3°).—IInvixa ἐστὶ τῆς ἡμέρᾶς ; what time (lit.
when) of the day? (Ar. Av. 1498). "Owe τῆς Spas, late in the day (Dem. 21,
84).—Ed σώματος ἔχειν, to be well in one’s body (Plat. Rep. 404°). Πῶς
ἔχεις δόξης; what is your opinion? (Plat. Rep. 456°). Ἔπλεον ὡς εἶχε
τάχους ἕκαστος ἐπὶ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, they sailed as fast as each could against
the Athenians (Thuc. 2, 90. Ἱκανῶς ἐπιστήμης ἕξει, he will have
enough of knowledge (Plat. Phil. 62*).—Totvrav ἅλις, ἅδην, enough of this
(Plat. Polit. 287°).
1727. Notr.—Here belong also a number of adverbs which have
been classed as Improper Prepositions (1862) and of which all except
ἅμα and ὁμοῦ and ὡς govern the genitive.
1728. Norr.—In cases like the following the genitive is partitive.
Πρόδικος τῶν σοφιστῶν κάλλιστα τὰ ὀνόματα διήρει, Prodicus, of all
the sophists, most skilfully pulls the words to pieces (Pat. Lach. 1974).
Μάλιστα πάντων, above all (Thuc. 4, 52*).
(F) GENITIVE IN LOOSER CONSTRUCTIONS
1729. Genitive of Time.—The genitive is often used to denote
the time at some part of which something takes place.
134 GENITIVE 1730
Κλέαρχος καὶ nue pas καὶ νυκτὸς ἦγεν ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους, Clearchus
used to march day and night against the enemy (Xen. Anab. 2, 67). Δήλια
ἐκείνου τοῦ μηνὸς ἦν, the Delian festival took place in that month (Xen.
Mem. 4, 83). Βασιλεὺς od μαχεῖται δέκα ἡμερῶν (= ἐν δέκα ἡμέραις or
ἐντὸς δέκα ἡμερῶν), the king will not fight within ten days (Xen. Anab. 1, 715).
Τοῦ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος, during the following winter (Thue. 8, 29"). Οὔπω
πολλοῦ χρόνου τούτου ἡδίονι οἴνῳ ἐπέτυχε, he has not for a long time met
with pleasanter wine than this (Xen. Anab. 1, 9). Tatra τῆς ἡμέρᾶς
ἐγένετο, this happened during the day (Xen. Anab. 7, 4"). Tpia ἡμιδάρεικα
τοῦ μηνὸς, three half-darics each month (Xen. Anab. 1, 3"). Plat. Prot.
310".
1730. Norr.—Without the article, such a genitive as ἡμέρᾶς means
simply by day, in the day ; with the article, as τῆς ἡμέρις, it means
within the day (mentioned) or every day. So with other genitives of
time.
1731. Nore.—Tod λοιποῦ, in the future, or more exactly, at some
time in the futwre ; but τὸ λοιπόν, for the future, throujzhout the future.
The genitive of time thus means only a part of the time mentioned ;
while the accusative means during the whole of the time mentioned,
1732. Genitive of Place——In poetry the genitive is
sometimes used to denote the place in which anything
occurs. : .
Νέφος δ᾽ οὐ φαίνετο πάσης γαίης, but no cloud appeared
over (in) the whole land (Il. 17, 372). Ἦ οὐκ ἔΑργεος ἦεν
᾿Αχαιικοῦ ; was he not in Achaean Argos? (Od. 3, 251). “I¢ev
«τοίχου τοῦ ἑτέρου, he was me on the outer wall (1. 9,
218).
1733. Nora.—80 we sometimes find in Homer ὁδοῖο,
on the way.
Ἐπείγεσθαι ὁδοῖο, to hasten on the journey (Od. 1, 309).
᾿ AvarpiBew (Od. 2, 404).—Much oftener πεδίοιο, on the plains ;
as θέειν πεδίοιο, to run on the plain (Il. 6, 507). Διώκεσθαι
(11. 21, 602).
1734. Νοτε.--- Τῆς ὁδοῦ, on (over) the road, is found in the drama-
tists, in Herodotus and in Thucydides.
"Emerdxvvov τῆς ὁδοῦ τοὺς σχολαίτερον ἐπιόντας, they hurried on the
way those coming up more slowly (Thuc. 4, 47*). So τοῦ a further,
onward; as ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω, to march further (Xen. Anab. 1 , 3') ;—and
Sees =
1740 DATIVE 135
ἀριστερῆς χερός, on the left hand (Hat. 2, 169*).—Other similar expressions
are very rare even in poetry; as προλαμβάνοντες τῆς φυγῆς, getting in a start
in the flight (Thue. 4, 33*). Γῆς τῆσδε, in the land (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 236).
1735. Norr.—Homeric are expressions like λούεσθαι
ποταμοῖο, to bathe in the river (Il. 6, 508); πρῆσαι
πυρός, to burn in fire (Il. 2, 415); and the like.
1736. Genitive in Exclamations.—The genitive is used in ex-
clamations of surprise, vexation, and the like, to express the cause
of the feeling.
Τῆς popias, what folly! (Ar. Nub. 818). Ὦ Zed βασιλεῦ τῆς λεπτότητος
τῶν φρενῶν, O King Zeus, what subtlety of mind! (Ar. Nub. 153). Φεῦ τοῦ
ἀνδρός, alas! for the man (Xen. Cyr. 3, 159). Ar. Plut. 389.
1737. Occasionally the genitive is used to express im regard to ; as
ἱππὸς ἢν κακουργῇ» τὸν ἱππέα κακίζομεν: τῆς δὲ γυναικός, εἰ κακοποιεῖ,
«ν.ἴσως δικαίως ἂν ἡ γυνὴ τὴν ai fav ἔχοι, if a horse is mischievous, we
blame the r.der ; but as toa wife, if she conducts herself badly, perhaps
she ought justly to bear the blame (Xen. Oec. 3, 11).
1738. Genitive Absolute—1. The genitive of a noun with a
participle in agreement is used absolutely, i.e. as grammatically
independent of any other word in the sentence, like the Latin
ablative absolute; as ταῦτα ἐπράχθη Κόνωνος στρατηγοῦντος,
this was done while Conon was general = Conon being general (Isoc.
9, 56).
2. The genitive absolute is treated in detail in 2259—2264.
DATIVE
1739. The dative case is primarily the case of the indirect or
remote object (as the accusative is that of the direct object) and
expresses that to or for which anything exists or is done. Besides
this it is also used as an instrumental case denoting by or with which
anything is done ; and as a locative case to express the time at which,
and (in poetry) the place in which, anything takes place.
Dative or InprrREctT OpJEcCT
1740. With Transitive Verbs—Many transitive verbs may take,
besides an accusative of the direct object, also a dative denoting
136 DATIVE 1741
the indirect object. Such verbs are especially those meaning to
give, to’ say, to send, to promise, to advise, and the like; in English
such an indirect object is usually preceded by to.
Τῇ στρατιᾷ τότε ἀπέδωκε Κῦρος μισθὸν τεττάρων μηνῶν, Cyrus then
gave the army four months’ pay (Xen. Anab. 1, 213). Δίδωμί σοι ἐμαυτόν,
I offer myself to you (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6). Οὗτος Κύρῳ εἶπεν, this man said
to Cyrus (Xen. Anab. 1, 6°). Πέμπων αὐτῷ ἄγγελον, sending a messenger
to him (Xen. Anab. 1, 35). Ὑπίσχεσθαι δῶρα τῇ στρατιῆ, to promise gifts to
the army (Hat. 5, 30). Ὑμῖν συμβουλεύω ἐγὼ γνῶναι ὑμᾶς αὐτούς, I advise
you to know yourselves (Xen. Hell. 2, 4*°).—So in passive constructions ; as
θώρᾶκες αὐτοῖς ἐπορίσθησαν, breast-plates were furnished to them (Xen.
Anab. 3, 3”).
1741. Norr.—Verbs of saying may also take πρός twa, to or
against any one.
1742. With Intransitwe Verbs.—Many intransitive verbs govern
the dative.
Here belong verbs signifying to seem, to befit, to be becoming, to
be permitted, to be a concern to, to be a regret, to be possible, to belong,
to be necessary ;—to help, to benefit, to satisfy, to defend ;—to please,
to trust, to favowr, to fo'low, to obey, to serve, to yield ;—to pray to,
to enjoin ;—to reproach, to be angry with, to revile, to threaten, to
envy ;—also their opposites. Many of these take in English a direct
object or a prepositional construction.
Ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς ὑπουργεῖν τοῖς Συρᾶκοσίοις, it seemed best to them to
help the Syracusans (Thue. 6, 88'). Ty ἡλικίᾳ ἔπρεπε, it suited his age
(Xen. Anab. 1, 9°). νῦν σοι ἔξεστιν ἀνδρὶ γενέσθαι, now it is possible for
you to become a great man (Xen. Anab. 7,1"). Hdt. 1, 138'; Aesch. Zum.
899. Ti ἡμῖν τῆς τῶν πολλῶν δόξης μέλει; what do we care about the
opinion of the many? (Plat. Crito 44°). Απᾶσι προσήκει περὶ πολλοῦ
ποιεῖσθαι τὴν φρόνησιν, it befits all to set high value on wisdom (Isoc. 9, 80).
Δεῖ σοι τῆς aitns ἐρωτήσεως, you need the same question (Plat. Meno 79°).
—Tois ἀδικοῦσι βοηθοῦντες, helping those who do wrong (Lys. 14, 22).
Λυσιτελεῖ τῷ ἔχοντι, it benefits the possessor (Plat. Rep. 392°). ᾿Αμόνειν τῇ
πόλει, to defend the city (Thuc. 2, 60*).—Tois πλέοσιν ἀρέσκοντες,
pleasing the majority (Thue. 1, 38°). Αὑτοῖς χαρίζεσθαι, to gratify themselves
(Lys. 14, 22). Ἐπίστευον αὐτῷ ai πόλεις, the cities trusted him (X-n.
Anab. 1, 9°). Τοῖς πονηροῖς ἀπιστεῖν, to distrust the bad (Isoc. 1, 22).
ἝΜψΨονται tpiv, they will follow you (Xen. Anab. 3, 138), Τοῖς νόμοις
πείθονται, they obey the laws (Xen. Mem. 4, 4'*). - Μηδεμιᾷ δούλευε τῶν
1744 DATIVE 137
ἡδονῶν, serve none of the pleaswres (Isoc. 2, 29). ᾿Αρετῇ ὑπείκει, it yields
to virtue (Plat. Menex. 240°*).—Tois θεοῖς etyoua, I pray to the gods (Dem.
18, 1). Παρακελεύονται τοῖς πολίταις ὁμονοεῖν, they enjoin the citizens to
be of one mind (Xen. Mem. 4, 4'°).—Ti ἐγκαλῶν ἡ μῖν ἐπιχειρεῖς ἡμᾶς ἀπολ-
Awa; what fault do you find with us that you attempt to destroy us? (Plat.
Crito 50°). Οἱ στρατιῶται ἐχαλέπαινον καὶ ὠργίζοντο ἰσχυρῶς τῷ Κλεάρχῳ,
they showed great resentment and were angry with Clearchus (Xen. Anab.
1, δ). Ἐπηρεάζουσιν ἀλλήλοις καὶ φθονοῦσιν ἑαυτοῖς, they revile one
another and are envious to themselves (Xen. Mem. 3, 816).
1748. Norr.—1l. The verbs of this class are numerous, as: δοκεῖ,
seem ; πρέπει, be becoming ; προσήκει, it concerns ; δεῖ, be necessary ;
μέλει, it is a care; μεταμέλει, it repents, rues, is a regret ; ἔξεστι, it ἐδ
possible ;—Bonbéw, ἐπικουρέω, ὑπηρετέω, ὑπουργέω, tiuwpéw, help ; λυσι- ᾿
τελ w, συμφέρω, benefit (but ὠφελέω and ὀνίνημι govern the accusative) ;
ἀρκέω, satisfy ἢ τιμωρέω, ἀμίνω, defend j—apéckw, please, gratif : 4 χαρί-
ζομαι, please, favour ; ἁρμόττω, to fit ; ἀπαρέσκω, displease ;---πιστεύω,
πείθομαι, trust (but πείθω, persuade, governs the accusative); ἀπιστέω,
distrust ; ἀκολουθέω, ἕπομαι, follow ; πείθομαι, πειθαρχέω, ὑπακούω, obey ;
ἀπειθέω, disobey ; λατρεύω, δουλεύω, serve; εἴκω, ὑπείκω, παραχωρέω,
yield, make room for ;---εὔχομαι, pray to, vow to; παρακελεύομαι, ἐν-
τέλλομαι, enjoin ; ὑποτίθημι, ὑποτίθεμαι, suggest, advise, enjoin ; ἐγκαλέω,
ἐπιπλήττω, éritiudw, ὀνειδ' ζω, (ἐπι) μέμφομαι, reproach, blame ; μνησικακέω,
bear a grudge ; ὀργίζομαι, χαλεπαίνω, θυμόομαι, be angry with ; λοιδο-
ρέομαι, ἐπηρεάζω, revile ; ἀπειλέω, threaten; φθονέω, envy (but ζηλόω
governs the accusative).
2. Poetic and dialectic are dvddvw, to please; pnviw,
xoAdopar, χώομαι, to be wroth or angry ; κοτέω, κοτέομαι,
to bear a grudge, to envy ; ἀγάασθαι (from ἄγαμαι) in the
sense to be indignant at, to envy ; σκύζομαι, to be angry
at; νεμεσάω, νεμεσάομαι, νεμεσίζομαι, to be angry, dis-
pleased.—Homeric (Iliad) is βούλεσθαί τινι νίκην, to wish
any one victory (Il. 16, 121).
1744. Norr.—1. Verbs of enjoining and commanding also take the
dative in connection with an infinitive.
πέταξαν τῷ Θηραμένει ἀνελέσθαι τοὺς vavayors, they commanded
Theramenes to rescue the men on the wrecks (Xen. Hell. 1, 711).---Βαῦ a
participle in the accusative may be added; as τοῖς πελτασταῖς πᾶσι
παρήγγειλε διηγκυλωμένους ἰέναι, he directed all the peltasts to advance
138 DATIVE 1745.
holding their javelins by the thong (Xen. Anab. 5, 2),—For the ordinary
accusative subject of the infinitive after these verbs, see 2207.
2. Kedevw, to order, always takes the accusative with the infinitive
in Attic (for the poetic construction, see 1753, 2).
1745. Nore.—For λυμαίνομαι, ἐνοχλέω, Aowdopéw and λοιδορέομαι,
μέμφομαι, ὠφελέω, See 1578.—For tipwpew and rivwpeopa, see 1699. -
1746. Νοτε.---Εὔχεσθαι, to wish any one, also takes the dative of
the person; with the dative θεοῖς, it means to pray to the gods for
something, or to vow something to the gods; in the sense to pray for
som:thing, it may also take πρός with the accusative and an infinitive.
Evxovro αὐτῷ πολλὰ καὶ ἀγαθά, they wished him many blessings (Xen.
Hell. 5, 1°). Τοῖς θεοῖς εὔχονται πολυκαρπίᾶν, they pray to the gods for
abundance of frwit (Xen. Mem. 3, 145). Ἢ μήτηρ πολλὰ τοῖς θεοῖς εὔχεται
ἀγαθὰ ὑπὲρ σοῦ, your mother entreats the gods for many blessings on your
behalf (Xen. Mem. 2, 310). Σωκράτης εὔχετο πρὸς τοὺς θεοὺς ἁπλῶς τἀγαθὰ
διδόναι, to the gods Socrates simply prayed that they would give him yr
things (Xen. Mem. 1, 3°).
1747. Norse.—®6ovéw, to envy, takes the adatie of the person aiid
may have a genitive of the thing; as μή po. φθονήσῃς τοῦ μαθή-
ματος, do not begrudge me the lesson (Plat. Huthyd. 297°).
1748. Νοτε.---Ἰ. Aci and χρή regularly take the accusative when
connected with an infinitive. oa
2. We oceasionally find δεῖ with the dative (instead of the accusative)
and infinitive; δεῖ ἐπισάξαι τὸν ἵππον ἸΠέρσῃ ἀνδρί, it is necessary for a
Persian to saddle his horse (Xen. Anab. 3, 4*). |
8. Χρὴ ἐμοί (for ἐμέ), with the infinitive is rare in the
dramatists.—For δεῖ μέ twos and χρή μέ twos, see 1580
and 1678, 3.
1749. Norr.—Yzraxovw is also found with the genitive, to heed, to
give ear to; asin Xen. Oec. 14, 3; Anab. 4, 159.---πΠείθεσθαί τινος (for
tu), to obey, is very rare in Attic (Thue. 7, 73°), and also occurs in
Herodotus (1, 126°). |
1750. Nore.—Eropua and dxodovbéw, to follow, may also have σύν
τινι OY μετά twos instead of the dative; as Xen. Cyr. 5, 2°; Hell. 5,
919.
1751. Nore. —Eyxaréw τινί τι, to bring a charge against some one,
to censure some one for something. So ἐπιτιμάω, to censure, and ὀνειδίζω,
1754 DATIVE 139
to reproach, may take the dative alone, or the dative of the person
and the accusative of the thing.
1752. Notr.— Apécxw, to please, and ἀπαρέσκω, to displcase, are
also found with the accusative in Plato and in the dramatists.
_ 1753. Norr.—1. Certain poetic verbs and constructions
require mention. Epic is χραισμέω τινί τι, to ward off
anything from any one, and χραισμέω τινι, to defend, to
help any one (Il. 7, 143; Il. 3, 54); similarly the poetic
second-aorist ἄλαλκον (from ἀλέξω), which may also take
the construction τινός τὶ (Il. 10, 288). ᾿Αλέξω and sipxéw
in the sense to ward off, also have the construction τινί
τι in poetry.—So also ἀμύνω which may also take τινός
τι, to ward off anything from any one, and τινά τινος, to
hold off any one from anything (Il. 18, 128; Il. 4, 10;
Tl. 15, 181). ᾿Αρήγω may also take τινί τι in. poetry.—
Epic is ὀπάζειν τινά τινι, to cause to follow (Od. 20, 364),
and ὀπάζειν τινα, to foliow hard upon (Il. 8, 103).
2. Poetic κέλομαι, to command, to exhort, takes the dative
in Homer, so also κελεύω (Il. 12, 274; Od. 17, 193).
With a dependent infinitive, κέλομαι has the accusative
(Od. 9, 100); κελεύω oftener the dative than the accusa-
tive (Il. 2, 151; Il. 14, 62).
3. For the dative with verbs of ruling, see 1671, 2 and
1673, 2.
1754. With Adjectives and Adverbs.—Many adjectives (and
adverbs) similar in meaning to the verbs in 1742 are followed by
the dative.
Such are adjectives meaning faithful, friendly, hostile, agreeable,
useful, necessary, and the like.
Πᾶσι... πιστοί, faithful to all (Xen. Cyr. 8, 7). ᾿Αλλήλοις ἐχθροί,
hostile to each other (Xen. Mem, 2, 6). Φίλος βασιλεῖ, friendly to the king
(Xen. ἅπαν. 2, 1”). ᾿Ανθρώποις χρήσιμον, useful to men (Plat. Rep-
389”). Φύλαξιν ἀπρεπέστατον, most unbecoming to guardians (Plat. Rep.
398°). Βλαβερὰ σώματι, harmful to the body (Plat. Rep. 559”). Ὕποχος τοῖς
θεοῖς, subject to the gods (Xen. Anab. 2, 5"). —‘Eropévas τῷ νόμῳ, conformably
to the law (Plat. Leg. 844°). Πρεπόντως... «αὑτῷ, in a manner worthy of
himself (Plat. Symp. 198°).
140 DATIVE 1755
1755. ΝΟΤΕ.---Φίλος, friendly, ἐχθρός and πολέμιος, hostile, may be
nouns and then take the genitive.-—So δοῦλος, a slave.
1756. Norzr —The adjectives mentioned in 1714, 4: ἴδιος and
οἰκεῖος, κοινός, ἱερος, ἀλλότριος, συγγενής, ἀδελφός, ὁμώνυμος, ἀκόλουθος have
the dative or genitive.—So ὑπήκοος and κατήκοος, and ἐπήκοος (1720).
1757. With Nouns.—Some nouns similar in meaning to the
verbs in 1740 and 1742 may take this dative,
Ta παρ᾽ ἡμῶν δῶρα τοῖς θεοῖς, the gifts (given) by us to the gods (Plat.
Euthyphr. 15"). Τὴν ἐμὴν τῷ θεῷ ὑπηρεσίᾶν, my service to the divinity (Plat.
Apol. 30"). Βοήθεια ἑαυτῷ, defence of oneself (Plat. Gorg. 522"). Τοῖς θεοῖς
Sovrciav, service to the gods (Plat. Leg. 762°).—So also with a dependent
objective genitive; as ἐπὶ καταδουλώσει τῶν Ἑλλήνων ᾿Αθηναίοις,
Sor the subjugation of the Greeks to the Athenians (Thue. 3, 103).
DATIVE OF ASSOCIATION AND RESEMBLANCE
1758. The dative of association and resemblance follows all —
words expressing association (friendly or hostile), likeness, near-
ness, and approach.
1759. With Verbs.—Here belong verbs meaning to wnite, to mia,
to associate with, to communicale, to approach, to meet, to converse
with, to attack, to agree with, to reconcile, to differ with, to quarrel,
to contend or to war, to make like, to equalise, to resemble, and the
like.
"YSap plyvipevoy πᾶσι τοῖς τρέφουσιν ἡμᾶς, water mixed with all
things that nourish us (Xen. Mem. 4, 3°). Ο ἵν ῳ κεράσᾶς τὴν κρήνην, having
mingled the spring with wine (Xen. Anab. 1, 2). Κακοῖς ὁμῖλῶν, asso-
ciating with bad men (Men. Mon. 274). ἙἘκοινώνησαν τῶν κινδύνων ἡ μῖν,
they shared in the dangers with us (Isoc. 6, 43). Πλησιάζειν τοῖς πολεμίοις,
to draw near to the enemy (Xen. Anab. 4, 6°). Πελάσαι...τῇ εἰσόδῳ, to
get near the entrance (Xen. Anab. 4, 2°). ᾿Απαντᾷ τῷ Ξενοφῶντι Ἐὐκλείδης,
Euclides meets Xenophon (Xen. Anab. 7, 8'). Διαλεχθῆναι τοῖς ἄρχουσιν,
to speak with the commanders (Xen. Anab. 4, 45). Τοῖς τελευταίοις
ἐπέθεντο, they attacked the hindmost (Xen. Anab. 4, 1%). Προσέβαλλε τῷ
τείχει, he attacked the wall (Xen. Hell. 1, 2”). Νόμους....σ φίσιν αὐτοῖς
ὁμολογουμένους, laws agreeing with each other (Isoc. 2, 17). Xpz...caradXa-
γῆναι πόλιν πόλει, it is necessary for city to be reconciled to city (Thue. 4,
615). Τοὺς φεύγοντας συναλλάξαι σφίσιν, to reconcile their exiles to them
(Thue. 1, 24°). Τοῖς πονηροῖς διαφέρεσθαι, to be at variance with the bad
1761 DATIVE 141
(Xen. 2, 9). ᾿Αμφισβητοῦσι μὲν καὶ δι᾽ εὔνοιαν οἱ φίλοι τοῖς φίλοις, ἐρίζουσι
δὲ οἱ διάφοροί τε καὶ ἐχθροὶ ἀλλήλοις, friends dispute in good-nature with
friends, but enemies quarrel with one another (Plat. Prot. 337°). Οὐκ ἀντι-
ποιούμεθα βασιλεῖ τῆς ἀρχῆς, we do not contend with the king for his
dominion (Xen. Anab. 2, 3533). Οὐδεὶς αὐτῷ ἐμάχετο, no one fought with
him (Xen. Anab. 1, 8*). Ταῖς ed rpayiars πολεμοῦσιν, they war against
good conduct (Isoc. 15, 142). Td ὁμοιοῦν ἑαυτὸν ἄλλῳ, to make himself like
another (Plat. Rep. 393°). Εἴπερ τοῖς βελτίστοις εἰκάζω αὐτόν, if I liken
him to the best (Xen. Symp. 6, 9). ὋὉ σίδηρος ἂν ἰσοῖ τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς τοῖς
ἰσχῦροῖϊς ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ, iron may equalise the weak to the strong in battle
(Xen. Cyr. 7,5"). Φιλοσόφ ῳ ἔοικας, you resemble (are like) a philosopher
(Xen. Anab. 2, 3:3).
1760. Nore.—1l. Verbs of this class are the following: κεράννῦμι
and piyvipi (τί τινι), to mix (one thing with another) ; ὃμιλέω, συνεῖναι,
to associate with ; μετέχω, κοινωνέω (τινί twos), to share with, to com-
municate ; avaxowdw (τινί τι), to communicate (anything to any one) ;
ἀνακοινόυμαί (τινι περί tw.s), to consult (any one about anything) ;
πλησιάζω, πελάζω, to approach ; ἀπαντάω, év-, ἐπι-, παρα-, περι-, συν-
τυγχάνω, to meet, to come across ; διαλέγομαι, to converse with ; ἐπιέναι,
προσβάλλω, ἐπιτίθεμαι (mid.), to attack ; ὁμονοέω, ὁμολογέω, to agree with
(see 1771); &-, κατ-, συν-αλλάσσω, to reconcile ; σπένδομαι, συντίθεμαι,
to make a treaty or truce with ; διαφέρομαι, to differ with; ἐρίζω,
ἀμφισβητέω, διαγωνίζομαι, to quarrel, to contend with ; ἀντιποιέομαί (τινί
twos), to lay claim to (anything against any one), to contend for ;
δικάζομαι, to be at law with; ἁμιλλάομαι, to vie with; πολεμέω τινι, to
war against ; μάχομαί tut, to fight against ; στασιάζω, to revolt against,
to quarrel with ; διασκώπτομαι, to contend in jests with ; διαλογίζομαι,
to balance accounts with ; ὁμοιόω, to make like, to liken to; εἰκάζω, to
compare, to make like ; ἰσόω, ἀνισόω, to equalise ; ἔοικα, to resemble,
2. Some are poetic or dialectic: μάρναμαι, to contend ;
πολεμίζω, to fight; ἀντιόομαι, oppose; ἀντάω, ἀντιάω,
ἀντιάζω, to meet; ἀντιβολέω, to meet with, to hit wpon ;
ἴσκω, ἐΐσκω, to liken ; ἀντιφερίζω, to match oneself with.
1761. Norz.—1. Here belong also many phrases with ἔρχομαι and
εἶμι.
Τῷ ᾿Αλκιβιάδῃ τινὲς ἐς λόγους ἦλθον, certain persons had an
interview with Alcibiades (Thue. 8, 48"). Εἰς χεῖρας ἐλθεῖν (or ἰέναι) τινι, to
put oneself in the power of any one (Xen. ἅπαν. 1, 2%; Xen. Cyr. 8, 8°).
Διανοούμεθα διὰ πολέμου αὐτοῖς ἐέναι, we propose to be at war with
142 DATIVE 1762
them (Xen. Anab. 3, 28). Βουλευόμεθα αὐτοῖς διὰ Pirias ἰέναι, we
intend to be on friendly terms with them (Xen. Anab. 3, 2°).
2. Phrases formed with ποιέομαι more commonly take πρός with
the accusative ; as σπονδὰς (συμμαχίαν, εἰρήνην, φιλίᾶν, πόλεμον) ποιεῖσθαι
πρώς τινα, to make a truce (alliance, peace, friendship, war) with
some one ; less often σπονδὰς (συμμαχίοδν, ete.) ποιεῖσθαί τινι. Similarly
ἡ πρός Twa συμμαχία, the alliance with some one.
1762. Norr.—Instead of the dative, some of the verbs in 1760
often take πρός with the accusative, especially verbs of contending
(ἀγωνίζομαι almost regularly). Πρὸς ἰδιώτᾶς ἀγωνίζεσθαι, to contend with
private individuals (Xen. Hier. 11, 6). Πολεμεῖν (Thue. 2, 165).
1763. ΝΟΤΕ.---Πολεμεῖν τινι, to make war against some one; but
πολεμεῖν σύν τινι OF πολεμεῖν μετά τινος, to make war in alliance with
some one = συμπολεμεῖν τινι OF συμμαχεῖν τινι.
1764. Nore.—IleAd{w, to approach, rarely has the genitive; as
ἐπλησίαζον τῶν ἄκρων, they approached the heights (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2°).
1765. Norz.—l. Several other verbs expressing ap-
proach are also found in poetry with the genitive of a
thing, especially the poetic ἀντιάω in the sense to go in
quest of.
Νεώτεροι ἀντιοώντων ἔργων τοιούτων, let younger men go in
quest of such deeds (Il. 25, 643). Koirns ἐμπελασθῆναι, to
approach the bed (Soph. Trach. 16). For ἀντάω, see 1651, 1.
2. Several are also found with the accusative in poetry
and late prose; so regularly ἀντιάζω in Herodotus.
Thus ἀντιάω (Il. 1, 31); ἀντιάζω (Hdt. 4, 118%).
1766. With Adjectives.—1. Adjectives similar in meaning to
the verbs in 1759, govern the dative; especially such as denote
Sriendly or hostile disposition, nearness, likeness, and compounds of
ὁμοῦ.
2. Such adjectives are εὔνους, εὐμενής, well-disposed ; κακόνους,
δυσμενής, tl-disposed ; διάφορος, at variance with (1768, 1); ἐναντίος,
in opposition to (1768, 2); ἴσος, equal to; ὅμοιος, παραπλήσιος, like ;
ἀνόμοιος, Unlike ; ὅμορος, neighbouring, bordering on ; ὃ αὐτός, the same ;
and others.
Kaxovovoraros ἦν τῇ πόλει, he was most ill-affected toward the city
ee
1768 DATIVE 143
(Lys. 12, 59). Ἴσους τοὺς λόγους τῷ μεγέθει τῶν ἔργων ἐξευρεῖν, to find
words equal to the greatness of the subject-matter (Isoc. 4, 13). ἊἪ ὁμοίου
ὄντος τούτοις ἢ ἀνομοίου, being like or unlike these (Plat. Phil. 74°). “Ὅμοροι
τοῖς Sixadvois, neighbours of the Sicanians (Thuc. 6, 2°). Τὸ αὐτὸ τῷ
ἠλιθίῳ, the same thing as foolishness (Xen. Anab. 2, 6”).
1767. Nore.—For φίλος, ἐχθρός, πολέμιος, and others which take
the genitive or dative, see 1755 and 1756.—For the dative with some
compound adjectives, see 1781.
1768. Norre.—l. Arddopos with the dative denotes opposition ;
with the genitive, different from.
Ὁ Ῥηγίου τύραννος διάφορος τοῖσι Ζαγκλαίοισι, the despot of Rhegium
being in opposition to the Zanclaeans (Hat. 6, 295). Διάφορον τοῦ ἑτέρου,
different from the other (Plat. Rep. 360°).
2. Similarly ἐναντίος, opposite, opposed to, against, contrary, takes
the dative or genitive, but the latter rarely in Attic prose.
Νόμοις ἐναντίος, opposed to the laws (Dem. 6, 25). ἜἘναντίοι ἔσταν
᾿Αχαιῶν, they stood opposite the Achaeans (Il. 17, 343). Td ὅσιον τοῦ
ἀνοσίου παντὸς ἐναντίον, the holy is opposed to everything unholy
(Plat. Euthyphr. 5*).
3. Poetic and Ionic ἀντίος, and the adverbs ἀντίᾶ (poetic
and Ionic) and ἀντίον have the same meanings. Hero-
dotus uses these, in the sense of opposite, with the
genitive.
‘H Abyurtos...Kidexins...avtin κέεται, Egypt lies opposite
to Cilicia (Hdt. 2, 8345). ᾿Αντίον Κύπρου (Hat. 1, 72°).
*Avria τῆς ἵππου (Hdt. 1, 80°).—In the sense of opposed
to, contrary, ἀντίος with the dative ; as μὴ λεχθεισέων γνωμέων
ἀντιίων ἀλλήλῃσι, πὸ Opinions contrary to each other
having been said (Hdt. 7, 10*).—Avrios, dvria, and ἀντίον
with the dative also when they form, as it were, a kind of
cumpound with their verbs ; as ᾿Αργεῖοι ἵζοντο ἀντίοι τοῖς
Λακεδαιμονίοισι, the Argives encamped opposite to the
Lacedaemonians (Hat. 6,77'). “Hv ἴωσι dvria Πέρσῃσι
és μάχην, if they come to stand against the Persians (Hat. 7,
236"). Τῷ Ἴστρῳ....ἀντίον κέεται (Hdt. 2, 34°).—In poetry
ἀντίος is found with the genitive and dative, in Homer usually
with the genitive: J/. 11, 219; Eur. Or. 1461; Eur. Supp.
667 and 198; probably the genitive is quite regular when it
means opposite, and the dative when it means opposed to,
contrary. Homer uses the adverbs ἀντίον and ἀντίά with the
144 DATIVE 1769
genitive : Il, 7, 160; Jl. 20, 88. Pindar has avria with dative
in Pyth, 4, 507.
1769. Nore.—After adjectives of ὑλ θέαι and equality ὁ a αὐτός,
ἴσος, ὅμοιος, παραπλήσιος), ἃ Condensed form of comparison is often
found.
Ὁμοίᾶν ταῖς δούλαις εἶχε τὴν ἐσθῆτα (for ὁμοίᾶν τῇ τῶν δουλῶν
ἐσθῆτι), she had her dress like (the dress of) the slave-girls (Xen. Cyr. 5, 14).
᾿Ὡπλισμένοι πάντες Hoay....Tots αὐτοῖς Κύρῳ ὅπλοις, they were all armed
with the same weapons as Cyrus (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1°). Tas io as πληγὰς ἐμοί,
the same number of blows with me (Ar. Ran. 636).—See also 2371, 44
1770. With Nowns.—The dative of association and resemblance
may even follow nouns.
Ἐπιδρομὴν τῷ τειχίσματι, an assault on the wall (Thue. 4, 23?).
Kowovia τοῖς ἀνδράσι, participation with men (Plat. Rep. 466°). ‘H
πόλεων ἐπιμιξία πόλεσιν, the intercourse of cities with cities (Plat. Leg.
949°). Τὰς τοῖς λῃσταῖς ἐντεύξεις, meetings with pirates (Plat. Polit. 298*).
Μουσικὴ ἔχει τὴν ὁμοιότητα TO τοῦ καλοῦ pipnparts, music has the resemblance
to an imitation of the good (Plat. Leg. 668"). ᾿Ἐπανάστασις μέρους τινὸς τῷ
ὅλῳ τῆς ψυχῆς, α revolt of one part of the soul against the whole (Plat. Rep.
444°),
14771. With Adverbs.—Adverbs similar in meaning to the
adjectives in 1766, are followed by the dative. Here belong also
ἅμα, at the same time; ὁμοῦ, together ; and ἐφεξῆς, next in order.
Ἐναντίως ἔχει τῷ σώφρονι ὁ ἀκόλαστος, the intemperate man is the
opposite of the moderate (Plat. Gorg. 507°). ᾿Αλλήλοις ἀνομοίως, in a
manner unlike one another (Plat. Tim. 36°). Ἐμποδὼν τῇ atrovopia,
obstructive to independence (Xen. Hell. 6, 3°).—"Apa τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, at daybreak
(Xen. Anab. 2, 1°). Td ὕδωρ ἐπίνετο ὁμοῦ τῷ πηλῷ, the water was drunk
along with the mud (Thue. 7, 84°). Ta τούτοις ἐφεξῆς ἡμῖν λεκτέον, we must
say what comes next to this (Plat. Tim. 30°).
1772. Nore.—The adverbs ἅμα, ὁμοῦ, ἐφεξῆς are also classed as
Improper Prepositions (see 1838).
1118. Dative of Accompaniment.—The dative of accompaniment
is used chiefly to denote an accompanying military or naval force
employed.
Ἡμεῖς καὶ ἵπποις τοῖς δυνατωτάτοις καὶ ἀνδράσι ΕΓ let us go
with the most powerful horses and with men (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3°°). Ot Λακεδαι-
μόνιοι TO τε κατὰ γὴν στρατῷ προσέβαλον τῷ τειχίσματι καὶ ταῖς ναυσὶν
1778 DATIVE 145
ἅμα, the Lacedaemonians attacked the wall both with their land army and
with their ships at the same time (Thue. 4, 115). ᾿ὈΟλίγῳ στρατεύματι od
τολμήσει ἐφέπεσθαι, he will not venture to follow with a small army (Xen:
Anab, 2, 2°).
Norr.—In Homer a personal accompaniment is seldom
so used; as Jl. 21, 45; Od. 11, 161.
1774. Norr.—For this dative (which may also be considered a
dative of means) ἔχων with the accusative may be used ; as πολὺν ἔχων
στόλον, having a large force (Xen. Anab. 2, 213).
1775. Norr.—The dative is sometimes preceded by an emphatic
αὐτοῖς OF αὐταῖς. :
“Τέτταρας ναῦς ἔλαβον αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν, they took four ships, men and all,
lit. with the men themselves (Xen. Hell. 1, 2”). Xen. Cyr. 3, 3%; Xen.
παν. 1, 3; Il. 20, 482.—The preposition σύν is here seldom inserted.
DATIVE with CoMPoUND VERBS (AND ADJECTIVES)
1776. The dative follows many verbs compounded with σύν,
ἐν, ἐπί; some compounded with πρός, παρά, περί; and a few
compounded with ὑπό.
Οἱ θεοὶ ἡμῖν συνεργοῦσιν, the gods work with us (Xen. Mem. 4, 3%).
Συνεπολέμει Kip@ πρὸς αὐτόν, he joined Cyrus in the war against him (Xen.
Anab. 1, 45). Τοῖς νόμοις ἐμμένων, abiding by the laws (Xen. Mem. 4, 4*).
Ἤδη μοι ἐπιβουλεύουσι τὴν μεγίστην βουλήν, they make the vilest (greatest)
plot against me (Dem. 53, 16). Πολλάκις πονηροῖς ἐπιχειροῦσι πράγμασιν,
they enter upon evil deeds (Xen. Mem. 4, 13). Ταύτῃ τῇ 68@ οἱ πολέμιοι
προσέχουσι Tov νοῦν, to this way the enemy turn their attention (Xen. Anab.
4, 35). Προσιέναι τῷ δήμῳ, to come before the people (Xen. Mem. 3, 7').
Παρέστω ἡ μῖν Τολμίδης ὁ κῆρυξ, let Tolmides the herald be with us (Xen.
Anab. 3,1"). Παρίστασθαι ἀλλήλοις, to stand by one another (Xen. Hell.
6, 5°). Ταύταις ταῖς συμφοραῖς περιέπεσεν, he fell into these misfortunes
(Isoc. 4, 101). Ἔκ τῶν μεγίστων κινδύνων καὶ πόλει καὶ ἐδι ὦ τῃ μέγισται
τιμαὶ περιγίγνονται, from the greatest dangers the greatest honours arise both to
the individual and to the state (Thue. 1, 1444). Ὑπόκειται τὸ Kippaiov πεδίον
τῷ ἱερῷ, the Cirraean plain lies below the temple (Aeschin. 3, 118).
1777. Nore.—With some of these compounds the dative depends
on the general meaning of the verb, especially with compounds of ἐπί
and πρός ; with others the dative depends on the preposition.
1778. Norz.—The compounds of ἐν may also express motion.
10
146 DATIVE 1779
Ἐλπίδας ἀγαθὰς ἐμποιεῖν ἀνθρώποι:, to give good hopes to the men:
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 6). Of ἐνέδραις ἐμπίπτοντες, those that fall into an
ambuscade (Xeu: Hipparch. 8, 20).
1779. Norr.—1. When the compounds of ἐν are used simply with
a local reference, they are not followed by the dative alone, but by
ἐν with dative, or eis with the accusative ; as ἐμμείναντες ἐν ty ᾿Αττικῇ
(Thue. 2, 23%); ἐσέβαλε στρατιὴν... ἐς Μίλητον (Hdt. 1, 145).
2. Similarly the compounds of σύν, ἐπί, πρός, παρά, περί are often
followei by the same (or another) preposition and the required case
instead of the simple dative.
1780. Nore.— Σύνοιδά τινί τι, 1 know something as well as (with)
another ; σύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ τι, I am aware or conscious of something.
Οὐδὲ ξυνήδει σοί τις ἔκθεσιν τέκνου; did no one know with you the
exposure of the child? (Eur. lon 956). Συνειδὼς αὑτῷ πολλὰ καὶ πονηρά,
being conscious of many crimes (Xen. Mem. 2, 9°).
1781. Nore.—Some adjectives compounded with prepositions,
especially with ἐν, σύν, πρός, are followed by the dative.
Vix7 βίαιον οὐδὲν ἔμμονον μάθημα, no forced study remains rooted in
the mind (Plat. Rep. 536°). ᾿Αλλήλοις σύμφωνα, agreeing with each other
(Plat. Leg. 746°). ,
1782. Norr.—The compounds of ὁμοῦ (1766) are followed by the
dative.
1783. Norz.—lIn epic poetry we occasionally find com-
pounds of μετά used like the verbs compounded with ἐν.
Merémpere Μυρμιδόνεσσιν, he was distinguished among the
Myrmidons (11. 16, 596). MeradSaivura ἡμῖν, he feasts with us
(Il. 22, 498). In the oldest Greek μετά was sometimes
synonymous with ἐν.
1188. Norr.—1l. The tragic poets only seem to have
ἐπιστρατεύω With the accusative, as Soph. Trach. 75; see
also Thuc. 4, 60? and 4, 92°.—Isolated examples of
compounds of ém- with the accusative also in Homer
and Herodotus; as ἐφορμᾶσθαι (Ll. 15, 691) ; ἐπιφοιτᾶν
(Hat. 7, 1619}; ἐπαΐσσειν (Il. 12, 808).
2. Several poetic compounds of πρός also have the
accusative; as zpoocirvw (tragic), to fall down ere
to supplicate (Kur. Supp. 10). —
i .- ς -ῊάουἊκἝ«-“ SC CUCU lS
1789 DATIVE 147
1785. Nore.—1. Compounds of εἰς do not often take the dative,
the compound of ἐν being then preferred; as ἐμβάλλω for εἰσβάλλω.
With εἰσιέναι and εἰσέρχεσθαι the accusative is preferred to the dative,
but a personal accusative or dative occurs in Attic prose only when
these verbs mean to come into one’s mind ; as Plat. Phaed. 58° and
59", Otherwise these and other compounds of εἰς generally repeat the
preposition. |
2. In the above sense, the poets have εἰσιέναι and .
εἰσέρχεσθαι usually, and the equivalent ὑπέρχεσθαι always,
with the dative: Jl. 17, 157; Eur. Med. 931; Il. 20, 44.
—We also find εἰσέβη po in this sense (Soph. Trach,
298).
DATIVE OF INTEREST
1786. The dative is used to express that for which anything
is or is done.
1787. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage.-—The person or
thing for whose advantage or disadvantage anything occurs is put
in the dative.
Οὐ τῷ πατρὶ καὶ τῇ μητρὶ μόνον γεγενήμεθα, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῇ πατρίδι,
we are born not only for our father and mother, but also for our country
(Dem. 18, 205). Aira σοφός, wise for himself (Men. Mon. 332). Πᾶς ἀνὴρ
αὑτῷ πονεῖ, every man toils for himself (Soph. Aj. 1366), Μεγάλων mpay-
μάτων καιροὶ mpocivra τῇ πόλει, Opportunities for great deeds have been
thrown away for (= to the disadvantage of) the city (Dem. 19, 8). "AAA
ὁ τοιοῦτος πλουτεῖ, οὐχ ἑαυτῷ, such a man is rich for another's benefit, not
for himself (Plat. Menex. 246°). Οὐχ ἅπᾶσιν ἡμῖν of αὐτοὶ νόμοι yeypap-
μένοι εἶσιν ; have not the same laws been made for us all? (Dem. 35, 45). οἱ
ἵπποι αὐτοῖς dédevra, the horses are tied for them = they have their horses
tied (Xen. Anab. 3, 455).
1788. Norr.—This dative is also found with nouns; as Φίλιππον
ἐᾶτε πόλεις Ἑλληνίδας ἀνδραποδίζεσθαι δὲ ἀπορίαν ἐφοδίων τοῖς
στρατευομένοις, you let Philip enslave Greek cities for lack of
provisions to the soldiers (Dem. 3, 20).
1789. Norz.—Observe the expressions στεφανοῦσθαί τινι, to crown
oneself in honour of some one, and κείρεσθαί τινι, to shear one’s hair for
some one.
148 DATIVE 1790
Ἐκέλευε στεφανοῦσθαι πάντας τῷ θεῷ, he ordered all the men to crown
themselves in honour of the god (Xen. Hell. 4, 3). Κόραι κόμᾶς κεροῦνταί
σοι, the maidens shall shear their hair to thee (Kur. Hipp. 1425).
1790. Norr.—1l. In poetry the dative of advantage or
disadvantage is used more freely than in prose; as
τοῖσιν pvOwv ἦρχεν, he began to speak for (= before)
them (Od. 3, 68).
2. Poetic and especially Homeric is δέχεσθαί τινι, to
receive (or take) from any one: as δέξατό οἱ σκῆπτρον,
he took the sceptre from him, lit. for him (Il. 2, 186).
1791. Dative of Possessor.—With εἰμί, γίγνομαι, ὑπάρχω, and
similar verbs, the dative denotes the possessor, or the person for
whose use anything is or is placed.
Ἐνταῦθα Kip@ βασίλεια ἦν, here Cyrus had a palace (Xen. ἅπαν. 1, 2").
Ἦσαν ἡμῖν ἔνδον ἑπτὰ μναῖ, we had at home seven minae (Lys. 19, 2).
Αὐτόματα τἀγαθὰ τῷ φιλουμένῳ γίγνεται, all blessings come (are) spon-
taneously to him who is beloved (Xen. Hier, 3, δ). Οἰκεῖα τά τε σὰ ἡμῖν
ὑπάρξει, καὶ σοὶ τὰ ἡμέτερα, your relations with us will again revive, and
ours with you (Plat. Lach. 181"). Ἦν vids τῷ Σφοδρίᾳ, Sphodrias had a
son (Xen. Hell. 5, 4%°).—With the verb sometimes omitted; as in Xen. Cyr.
7, δὴν,
1792. Nore.—Sometimes ἐστί or εἰσί is omitted.
Oi πόνοι ὄψον τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς, labowrs are a relish to good things (Xen. Cyr.
7,5). Τῷ πατρὶ Πυριλάμπης ὄνομα, the father’s name is Pyrilampes (Plat.
Parm, 126°).
1793. Norr.—The expression τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί (ἐστιν); means what
have I to do with you? Thus ti ἔστ᾽ "EpexOet καὶ κολοιοῖς καὶ κυνί;
what has Erechtheus to do with jackdaws and a dog ? (Ar. Eq. 1022).
1794. Norr.—Occasionally we find a possessive dative used with
nouns instead of a possessive genitive.
Tod ξένου ἡμῖν, of our guest (Plat. Soph. 216°), Ἕν τῶν κτημάτων
τοῖς θεοῖς, one of the possessions belonging to the gods (Plat. Phaedo 62”).
---This construction is more frequent in Herodotus and in poetry.
1795. Ethical Dative-—The dative of personal pronouns is
sometimes used in familiar language with mere expletive force,
or for liveliness of expression, to denote some one as interested.
Sometimes it cannot be conveniently translated.
OO ———E— υσΌεςς
1797 DATIVE 149
Ti σοι μαθήσομαι; what am I to learn for you? (Ar. Nub. 111). Τούτῳ
πάνυ μοι προσέχετε τὸν νοῦν, to this, I pray, give your close attention (Dem.
18, 178). Ἢ μήτηρ ce ἐᾷ ποιεῖν 6 τι ἂν βούλῃ, ἵν’ αὐτῇ μακάριος ἧς, your
mother permits you to do anything you wish so that you may be happy for her
(Plat. Lys. 208°). Οὕτως ἡ μῖν of ῥήτορες δέξιοί εἰσιν, thus are our rhetoricians
skilful (Plat. Menex. 235°). Οὕτως ἔχει σοι ταῦτα, thus rests the matter to
you (Soph. Ant. 37).
1796. Dative of Relation or Standpoint.—1. The dative is often
used to denote the person from whose standpoint (view) or in
relation to whom a statement is made.
Τέθνηχ᾽ ὑμῖν πάλαι, I am long dead to you (Soph. Phil. 1030). ἽὝἌπαντα
τῷ φοβουμένῳ ψοφεῖ, everything sounds to one who is in fear (Soph. Frag.
58). ‘O μὲν yap ἐσθλὸς εὐγενὴς ἐμοί γ᾽ ἀνήρ, the honest man is noble in my
opinion (Eur. Frag. 345). Ὑπολαμβάνειν δεῖ τῷ τοιούτῳ ὅτι εὐήθης ἐστι, in
regard to such a man, we must suppose that he is simple (Plat. Rep. 982).
2. Such a dative often has a participle in agreement expressing
feeling ; especially βουλομένῳ (poetic also ἐθέλοντι), ἡδομένῳ,
ἀσμένῳ, and ἀχθομένῳ.
Εἰ ἐκείνῳ βουλομένῳ ταῦτ᾽ ἐστίν, if that is according to his wish =
lit. if that is to him wishing (Xen. Hell. 4, 1). ᾿Ἐπανέλθωμεν, εἴ σοι
ἡδομένῳ ἐστίν, let ws go back if that pleases you (Plat. Phaedo 78°). ᾿Ασμένοις
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἐκ τοῦ σκότους τὸ φῶς ἐγίγνετο, to the joy of men does light come
after darkness, lit. to men rejoicing (Plat. Cratyl. 418*).
3. This dative, especially with a participle in agreement, may
also be used in connection with a statement of time or place; the
participle alone may be so used.
"Hy ἡμέρᾶ πεμπτή ἐπιπλέουσι τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, it was the fifth
day since the Athenians sailed out, lit. it was the fifth day for the Athenians
sailing out (Xen. Hell, 2,1”). Ἑὑρήσει....δέκα θέρη....τῷ πρώτῳ πολέμῳ
διαγεγενημένα, he will find that there were ten summers to the first war (Thue.
5, 20°). Ἐπίδαμνός ἐστι πόλις ἐν δεξιᾷ ἐσπλέοντι τὸν Ἰόνιον κολπον,
Epidamnus is a city on the right as you sail (= to one sailing) into the Ionian
gulf (Thuc. 1, 24’). Of ὑπερβάντι Αἷμον Γέται, the Getae beyond the
Haemus (Thue. 2, 96").
1797. Norez.—When no noun is used in agreement with the
participle, τινί or ἀνθρώπυις is understood. Thus is explained the
phrase ὡς συνελόντι εἰπεῖν Or συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, to speak briefly (lit. for me
to say it, having made the matter brie!) ; συνελόντι alone may be 80
150 DATIVE 1798
used, as in 1586. 4, 22.—Note also ὡς ἐμοί, im my opinion, for a man
like me.
1798. Νοτὲ .---- Τἱμιός τινι, honoured or prized in any one’s estimation
(Eur. Phoen. 439).—Agws τινί twos, deserving of anything in any one’s
estimation (Xen. Mem. 1, 2°).
1799. Norr.—The dative of any participle may be used with
impersonal expressions signifying it 7s proper, useful, good, agreeable,
acceptab/e, and their opposites, also such as express fear and the like,
seldom with other impersonal expressions (compare 1796, 2).
Τοῦτο καὶ πρέπειν μοι δοκεῖ...οἷομέν ῳ οὕτως ἔχειν, it seems to me to
be fitting to think it is so (Plat. Phaedo 1144). οἷς οὐδὲ ἅπαξ ἐλυσετέλησε
πειθομένοις, to whom it did not profit to obey even once (Lys. 25, 27).
Εἰ τόδ᾽ αὐτῷ φίλον κεκλημένῳ, if it is agreeable to him to be thus called
(Aesch. Ag. 156). Ei λῷον καὶ ἄμεινον εἴη ἂν τῇ πόλει οὕτω κατα-
σκευαζομένῃ, if it were better and more advantageous to the state regulat-
ing itself in this way (Xen. Vect. 6,2). Ὧι μή ᾽στι δρῷντι τάρβος, οὐδ᾽
ἔπος φοβεῖ, him who has no fear of doing, a word does not frighten (Soph.
Oed. Tyr. 296).
But the infinitive is more common with such impersonal expressions.
1800. Dative of Agent.—1. The dative is sometimes used instead
of ὑπό with the genitive to express the agent with the perfect
and pluperfect passive. This dative expresses that the thing done
by the agent is ready at his disposal.
Ta τούτῳ mempaypéva, the things done by him (Dem. 29, 1). Ἐπσειδὴ
αὐτοῖς παρεσκεύαστο, when preparation had been made by them (Thue. 1,
46"). Πολλαὶ θεραπεῖαι καὶ παντοδαπαὶ τοῖς ἰατροῖς εὕρηνται, many and
varied cwres have been discovered by physicians (Isoc. 8, 39).
2. With other passive tenses this dative is rare; as τἀληθὲς
ἀνθρώποισιν οὐχ εὑρίσκεται, truth is not found by men (Men. Mon.
511).
3. In the personal construction of verbals, the dative of agent is
regular; see 2315.
DATIVE OF INSTRUMENT, CAUSE, MANNER, MEASURE OF
DIFFERENCE
1801. Dative of Instrwment or Means.—The dative is used to
denote the means or instrument with which anything is done.
<<. “
1805 DATIVE 151
Γνωσθέντες TH σκευῇ τῶν ὅπλων, recognised by the fashion of their arms
(Thue. 1, 85). Τοῖς ἤδη γεγενημένοις τεκμαίρεσθαι, to judge by what has
already happened (Isoc. 6, 59). Κακοῖς.. ἰᾶσθαι κακά, to cure evils by evils
(Soph. Frag. 75). Syediacs διαβαίνοντες, crossing with rafts (Xen. Anab.
1, δ). Κινήσεις τῷ σώματι, movements with the body (Plat. Leg. 631°).
1802. Nore.—1. With ζημιόω, to punish, to fine, and κολάζω, to
punish, the punishment or fine is in the dative; as Plat. Rep. 492°;
Xen. Cyr. 6, 85:1, For other verbs of punishing, see 1699-1703, 1709-
1713.
2. Δωρεῖσθαί twa τινι, to present any one with anything, for the
regular δωρεῖσθαί τινί τι, to present anything to any one, probably does
not occur in Attic prose.
1803. Norr.—1. The verb χράομαι, to wse (properly to serve one’s
need by), to associate with, takes the dative of means ; sometimes a
predicate dative is added. '
Ἐχρῆτο τοῖς ξένοις, he employed the foreigners (Xen. Anab. 1, 3%). Ti
βούλεται ἡμῖν χρῆσθαι; for what does he wish to use us? (Xen. Anab. 1,
3%). Ξύλοις ἐχρῶντο τοῖς re οἰστοῖς καὶ yéppors, they used the arrows
and wicker shields as fire-wood (Xen. Anab. 2, 1°). Σοὶ φίλῳ χρήσομαι καὶ
ἀδελφῷ, I will use you as a friend and a brother (Xen. Anab. 7, 2%).—
Similarly many idiomatic expressions ; as χρῆσθαι τέχνῃ, to follow a trade;
ὀργῆ χρῆσθαι, to indulge in anger.
2. Sometimes νομέζω is used in the same way. Φωνῇ...νομίζουσι, they
use the language (Hdt. 4, 117'). Θυσίαις... ἐνόμιζον, they observed sacrifices
(Thue. 2, 38°).
1804. Dative of Cause-—The dative is used to express cause,
᾿Αποθνήσκει νόσῳ, he dies through disease (Xen. Anab. 7, 2). Οὐχ
ὕβρει, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνάγκῃ λαμβάνομεν τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, we take provisions, not from
wanton violence, but from necessity (Xen. Anab. 5, 5"). ᾿Αγνοίᾳ...ἐξαμαρ-
τάνουσι, they err from ignorance (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1%). Βιαζόμενοι....τοῦ πιεῖν
ἐπιθυμίᾳ, forced by the desire to drink (Thue. 7, 84'). Πάντες ἥδοντο τῇ
εἰρήνῃ, all rejoiced on account of the peace (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3°). Ἠχθόμεθα
τοῖς γεγενημένοις, we were vered at what has happened (Xen. Anab. 5,
7). Αἰσχένομαΐ τοι ταῖς πρότερον ἁμαρτίαις, I am ashamed of my former
faults (Ar. Eq. 1355),
1805. Nore.—TéprecOai τινι, to delight in anything, is
very rare in Attic prose.—In poetry the dative of cause
with this verb is occasionally a person; as τέκνοισι
τερφθείς, being delighted with the children (Soph. Oecd.
Col. 1139). Od. 14, 244.
152 DATIVE 1806
1806. Norz.—1. With βαρέως φέρειν and χαλεπῶς φέρειν, to be
distressed, to bear grievously, either the dative or accusative may be
used; as Plat. Mener. 248°; Xen. Hell. 3, 4°; Xen. Rep. Ath. 2, 6;
Xen, Anab. 1, 3°.
2. When dyardw and orépyw mean to be satisfied, they may also
take the dative or accusative; as ἀγαπῶντες τῇ σωτηρίᾳ, being content
with their safety (Lys. 2, 44); στέργειν (with dat., Plat. Hipp. Maj.
295”; with acc., Lys. 33, 4).
1807. Norr.—1. With verbs of feeling, the cause may be expressed
by ἐπί with the dative; as ἐπὶ τοῖς κακοῖς δυσχεραίνοντας, being grieved
at ils (Isoc. 1, 26). See 1852, 2(d).
2. For the genitive of cause with some verbs of this class, see 1680.
1808. Norr.—An external cause is often expressed by ὑπό with
the genitive ; as οὐκ ἐδύναντο καθεύδειν ὑπὸ λύπης, they could not sleep
from sorrow (Xen, Anab. 3, 1°).
1809. Norr.—The cause on account of which anything happens is
expressed by διά with the accusative (1842, 2); the cause for the sake of
which anything occurs is expressed by évexa with the genitive (1862, 4).
1810. Dative of Manner.—The dative is used to express manner.
Κραυγῇ πολλῇ ἐπίᾶσι, they advance with loud outery (Xen. Anab. 1,
73). Ὥσπερ ὀργῇ ἐκέλευσε, he commanded as in anger (Xen. Anab, 1, 5%).
Τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ ἐπορεύθησαν, in this way they proceeded (Xen. Anab. 3,
433). ᾿Ατελεῖ τῇ νίκῃ ἀνέστησαν, they withdrew with their victory incomplete
(Thuc. 8, 27°).—Thus many adverbial expressions ; as δρόμῳ, on a run;
φυγῇ, in flight; Bia, by force; σπουδῇ, with difficulty, scarcely, earnestly ;
σιγῇ, silently ; τῇ ἐμῇ γνώμῃ, according to my opinion; (τῷ) λόγῳ, in word ;
προφάσει, in pretext ; τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, in truth; τῷ ὄντι, τῷ ἔργῳ, in reality, in
fact; ταύτῃ, this way; mp; which way? δημοσίᾳ, publicly; ἰδίᾳ, privately ;
κοινῇ, in common ; πεζῇ, on foot ;—these datives are used without a qualifying
word,
1811. Norr.—Otherwise, when the dative of manner would have
no attribute, a prepositional phrase is usually preferred; as pera δίκης,
with justice ; δι ἀκριβείας, with accwracy ; πρὸς βίαν, by force; κατὰ
κράτος, with all one’s might. |
1812. Nore.—Sometimes the dative of manner is a dative of
respect, and is then practically equivalent to the accusative of specifi-
cation. ᾿
1816 DATIVE 153
Τῇ φωνῇ τρᾶχύς (--τὴν φωνήν), rough in voice (Xen. Anab. 2, 6°). Oi
φύσει ἀσθενέστατοι, those weakest by natwre (Xen. Mem. 1, 6"). πλήθει
ἡμῶν λειφθέντες, having been inferior to us in number (Xen. Anab. 7, 7").
Πρότερον τῇ δυνάμει καὶ κρεῖττόν ἐστιν, tt is before it and superior in power
(Dem. 3,15). Διαφέρειν ἀρετῇ, to be distinguished in virtue (Plat. Charm.
1075). Πόλις... Θάψακος ὀνόματι, a city Thapsacus by name (Xen. Anab. 1,
4"),
1813. Nore.—A peculiar dative of manner occurs with δέχομαι, to
admit to; as τῶν πόλεων οὐ δεχομένων αὐτοὺς ἀγορᾷ, the cities not
admitting them to market (Thue. 6, 443}.
1814. Dative of Measure of Difference.—The dative is used to
denote the degree of difference, especially with comparatives.
Βραχεῖ χρόνῳ ὕστερον, a short time later (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3°). Τῇ
κεφαλῇ μείζων, a head taller = taller by a head (Plat. Phaedo 101*).
Τέχνη δ᾽ ἀνάγκης ἀσθενεστέρᾷ μακρῷ, and art is weaker than necessity by far
(Aesch. Pro. 514). Τοσούτῳ ἥδιον ζῶ ὅσῳ πλείω κέκτημαι; do you think
that I live so much happier the more I possess ? (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3%). Ἐνιαυτῷ
πρεσβύτερος, older by a year (Ar. Ran. 18). Πόλϊ Aoyipe ἡ Ἑλλὰς γέγονε
ἀσθενεστέρη, Greece has become weaker by an illustrious city (Hdt. 6, 1063).
Δέκα ἔτεσι πρὸ τῆς ἐν Σαλαμῖνι vavpayias, ten years before the sea-fight at
Salamis (Plat. Leg. 698°). Maxp@ κάλλιστα, by far the best (Plat. Leg.
858°).
1815. Norr.—Often the adverbial accusatives ὀλίγον and πολύ are
found for the dative; as Plat. Prot. 317°; Men. Mon. 782.—Note that
ti; by how much ? τὶ, somewhat ; οὐδέν and μηδέν, by no amount, are
always used,—never the dative.
DaTIVE ΟΕ TIME AND PLACE
1816. Dative of Time.—The dative without a preposition is
used to denote time at which anything takes place. So are used
chiefly the nouns denoting day, night, month, and year, when they
have an attribute; and names of festivals.
Τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ), on the following day (Xen. Anab. 2, 5”).
Τῇ πρώτῃ δὲ ἡμέρᾳ ἀφίκοντο, they came on the first day (Xen. ἅπαν. 4,
8). (Ἑρμαῖ μιᾷ νυκτὶ of πλεῖστοι περιεκόπησαν, most of the Hermae were
mutilated in one night (Thuc. 6, 27'). Τῷ ἐπιόντι μηνί, in the coming month
(Plat. Leg. 767°). Τετάρτῳ ἔτει ξυνέβησαν, in the tenth year they came to
an agreement (Thuc. 1, 103'). ᾿ἤὈὈρχεῖσθαι Παναθηναίοις, to dance at the
Panathenaea (Ar. Nub. 988).
154 DATIVE 1817
1817. Norz.—When the above datives have no attribute, ἐν is:
always prefixed. |
, Ἔν νυκτί, at night (Men. Mon. 150). Ἔν τῷ χειμῶνι, in the winter (Xen.
Oec. 17, 3).—The exceptions are only apparent; as νουμηνίᾳ (on new-moon. —
day), on the first of the month (the adjective is here in the pire " ς 5.
χειμῶνος ὥρᾳ, in the winter season (the genitive serving as attribute).
1818. Nore.—1l. When the attribute of the temporal dative is
ὅδε, οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, OF 6 αὐτός, the preposition ἐν may be inserted or
omitted. Thus τῇδε (ταύτῃ, ἐκείνῃ) τῇ ἡμέρᾳ or ἐν τῇδε (ταύτῃ, ἐκείνῃ) TH
ἡμέρᾳ; and 7 ἡμέρᾳ or ἐν ἡ ἡμέρᾳ. But we have regularly ἐν τούτῳ
(ἐκείνῳ) τῷ χρόνω Or καιρῷ, at this (that) time or moment ; ἐν τῷ πρότερον
(πρόσϑεν) χρόνῳ, at the former time; and usually ἐν τῷδε τῷ or τούτῳ τῷ
or τῷ αὐτῷ μηνί. (θέρει, summer, χειμῶνι, winter, ἐτει and ἐνιαυτῷ, year).
Yet we find ὑστέῤῳ χρόνῳ with ἐν (τῷ) ὑστέρυ χρόνῳ.
2. But ἐν is never omitted in phrases like ἐν ὑστέρῳ, ἐν τῷ παρέντι,
ἐν τούτῳ, ἐν τῷ τότε, etc., When χρόνῳ is understood.
1819. Norn.—Alongside of μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ and the like, we find also ἐν
μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ. With greater cardinal numbers as well as adjectives like
πολύς, ὀλίγος, etc., the temporal dative regular takes ἐν.
Ἐν ἅπαντι τῷ χρόνῳ, in the whole time (Lys. 2, 54). Ἔν ἑβδομήκοντα
ἔτεσι (Lys. 19, 60). Ἔν πολλῷ (μῖκρῷ) χρόνῳ.
1820. ΝΟΤΕ .---Υ θη nouns that in themselves do not express time
(as πόλεμος, εἰρήνη) are used as femiporat datives, mee are negplarly
preceded by ἐν.
Ta ἐπιτηδεύματα κοινὰ ἐν πολέμῳ τε καὶ εἰρή vn εἶναι δεῖ, thane
ought to be community of pursuits both in peace and in war (Plat. Rep. 543%).
Ἔν τῇ προτέρᾳ πρεσβείᾳ, at the time of the previous embassy (Aeschin. 2, 123).
—A few examples occur without ἐν, especially in Thucydides; as’ ἐκείνῃ τῇ
ἐσβολῇ, during that incursion (Thue. 2, 20'). Thue. 1, 128°.
1821. Nore.—Kard τινα, in any one’s time (see 1853, 2(b)); ἐπί
τινος, in any one’s time, under the rule of any one (see 1852, 1(b)).—
For the genitive of time, see 1729—1731.
1822. Nore.—In poetry we sometimes find ἐν inserted
(except with names of festivals) where in prose it would
be omitted, and the reverse. In a few cases vu«ri is found
alone; as Od, 15, 34; Eur.*Hipp. 106.
~~
—
—E————
εν i se “““
1829 PREPOSITIONS 155
1823. Dative of Place.—In prose the dative of place occurs
only with the names of Attic demes, very ἀφρὸν ὁ with names of
other places.
Ta τρόπαιατάτε Μαραθῶνι καὶ Σαλαμῖνι καὶ Πλαταιαῖς, the trophies
at Marathon, at Salamis, and at Plataea (Plat. Menex. 245*). Ἰσθμοῖ καὶ
Νεμέᾳ, at Isfheves and Nemea (Lys. 19, 63).—But ἐν ᾿Αθήναις.
1824. Norr.—Here belong old locatives or datives like οἴκοι, at
home ; κύκλῳ, all around, in a circle; also adverbs like ταύτῃ, τῇδε,
here. See the Locative Case in Part II of the Grammar.
1825. Several isolated cases of the dative of a place for eis or κατά
with the accusative occur with ἔχειν, to land at ; as Thue. 3, 29).
1826. In poetry the dative without a preposition is
often used to denote the place where. This occurs
mostly in Homer, much less often in the ὙΜΕΙ͂Σ; and
lyric poets.
‘EAA GS« οἰκία ναίων, inhabiting ΓΉΣΤΗ ἐς in Hellas αι
16, 595). Εὗδε μύχῳ κλισίης, he slumbered in a corner of
the tent (Il. 9,663). Μίμνει ἀγρ ᾧ, he remains in the country
(Od. 11, 187). “Hoa δόμοις, to sit at home (Aesch. Ag.
862). Νῦν ἀγροῖσι τυγχάνει, now he happens to be in the
country (Soph. El. 313).
1827. Norr.—Sometimes in poetry the dative denotes
the object towards which a motion is directed.
Θαλάσσῃ hoa ᾿Αχαιούς, to drive the Achaeans toward
the sea (Il. 18, 294). Πέπτειν πέδῳ, to fall to the ground
(Soph. El. 747).
PREPOSITIONS
1828. Prepositions as Adverbs.—1. The prepositions were all
originally adverbs and as such could be used alone without a
dependent case.
2. The only remnants of this use in Attic prose are the expressions
πρὸς δέ (or πρὸς δὲ καί) and καὶ πρός, and besides (Dem. 20, 112; Plat.
Gorg. 469”).
1829. Norr.—Herodotus has besides πρὸς δέ and καὶ
πρός, also ἐπὶ δέ, and therewpon (Hat. 7, 75"); μετὰ δέ,
156
PREPOSITIONS
and next (Hdt. 8, 67?) ; and ἐν δέ, and among them (Hat.
2, 433),
1830. Norz.—In poetry, especially in Homer, the ad-
verbial use of the prepositions is more frequent.
1. Homer has πρὸς δέ (as Il. 5, 307); ἐν δέ (as Il. 16,
551); pera δέ, equivalent to and next or and then (as II.
2,446; Od. 21, 231); σὺν δέ, and at once, and therewith,
and besides (as Il. 8, 86).—So other prepositions are
used by him adverbially ; as περί, arownd, exceedingly
(Il. 19, 362; 21, 65); ὑπό (Od. 11, 527); πρό (Il. 13,
799); παρά (Od. 4, 636); ἀμφί (Od. 17, 208).
2. In tragedy we find πρὸς δέ and καὶ πρός (rarely τε
πρός); also ἐν δέ; σὺν δέ (παρὰ δέ, Eur. Iph. Aul. 201);
ἐπί, and besides (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 188).
3. Homer sometimes joins two prepositions either ad-
verbially or with a case; as περί τ᾽ ἀμφί τε τάφρο", arownd
and about the trench (Il. 17, 760); ἀμφιπερί (Ll. 2, 305 ;
21, 10); ἀποπρό (Il. 7, 333); διαπρό (Il. 5, 281); περιπρό
(Il. 16, 699); διέκ (7. 15, 124); and others.—In tragedy
this sometimes occurs in lyric passages.—Herodotus
has ὑπέκ in 3, 116.
18381. Nore.—Tmesis.—1. The preposition of a com-
pound verb may be separated from its verb. This is
called tmesis, and occurs frequently in poetry (especially
in Homer), occasionally in Herodotus, and very rarely
in Attic prose.
Ἐπὶ δ᾽ ἔψονται ἄλλοι θεοί (ἐφέψονται), the other gods
will follow (Il. 4, 63). Kar ἄρ᾽ ἕξετο (καθέζετο), he indeed
sat down (Il. 1, 68). Ἐπὶ κνέφας ἦλθεν (ἐπῆλθεν), dark-
ness came on (Il. 1, 475). πΠολέμοιο νέφος περὶ πάντα
καλύπτει (περικαλύπτει), the cloud of war overshadows
everything (Il. 17, 243). Ἔ ξ αὐτὸς pera τοὺς δόμου ἤλυθεν
δῖος ᾿Οδυσσεύς (ἐξήλυθεν), after them the divine Ulysses himself
went out of the house (Od. 21,190). Ολέσας ἄπο πάντας
ἑταίρους (ἀπολέσᾶς), having lost all thy companions (Od, 13,
340).—Aca δ᾽ ὄλλυσαι = διόλλυσαι (Eur. Hipp. 594). Σὺν δ᾽
ἐλίσσεται = συνελίσσεται (Soph. Hl. 746). Ἐπὶ δὲ κάλεσον
(Ar. Lysist. 1280). Μετά που χωρεῖτε (Aesch. Pro. 1000).
i830
1834 ’ PREPOSITIONS 157
"Ex τοί pe τήξεις (Eur. Or. 1047). Ἐπ᾿ ἀχλὺς πεπό-
ταται (Aesch. Pers. 667).—Avda re ἔδραμον (Hdt. 1,
66"). Oftener with ὧν intervening in Herodotus, as av’ ὧν
ἐφάνη (Hdt. 3, 82°).
2. When a compound verb which has undergone tmesis
would be repeated, Homer repeats only the preposition ;
as σύν ῥ᾽ ἔβαλον ῥινούς, σὺν δ᾽ ἔγχεα (sc. ἔβαλον),
they dashed together their ox-hide shields and their
spears (Il. 4, 447).—Similarly Herodotus usually repeats
only the preposition with δέ when a preceding μέν has
intervened between the preposition and the verb; as
κατὰ μὲν ἔσῦραν Φαληρον, κατὰ δὲ.... πολλοὺς δήμους,
they devastated Phalerum and many demes (Hat. 5, 81°).
3. In Attic poetry and in Herodotus, cases of tmesis
with the preposition following the verb probably never
occur. In Homer such cases are sometimes found.
4. In Attic prose examples of tmesis are exceedingly rare,
and the reason for them is always obvious. Thus
παρεσκευασμένοι, ἂν μέν τις εὖ ποιῇ, ἀντ᾽ εὖ ποιεῖν,
prepared if any one does us a service, to do him a service
in return (Xen. Anab. 5, 831); there being no such verb
as ἀντευποιεω, a tmesis is resorted to so as to form an
antithesis to εὖ ποιεῖν.
1832. Place of Prepositions.—In prose prepositions regularly
precede their cases. But ἕνεκα (1862, 4) often follows its case ; some-
times περί which is then accented πέρι (see anastrophe in Part I.
of the Grammar); and occasionally ἄνευ (1862, 2) with a relative
(Xen. Heil. 7, 1°).
1833. Norr.—In Attic prose a preposition is seldom inserted
between an adjective and its noun ; as τοιᾷδε ἐν τάξει, in the following
manner (Plat. Critias 115°).
1834. Nore.—Attic prose admits only the insertion of words
qualifying the noun between the preposition and its substantive; but
postpositive conjunctions (as μέν, δέ, γέ, οὖν, etc.) are usually placed
immediately after the preposition. Sometimes οἶμαι, 1 think, is found
inserted (Dem. 20, 3).
158 PREPOSITIONS 1835
1835. Norr.—In poetry the prepositions often stand
after their cases.
Maxnv es (Il. 15, 59). ᾿Αρτέμιδι ξύν (Od. 15, 410). Φίλων
ἄπο (Od. 7, 152). ᾿Αληθείας ὕπο (Eur. And. 321). For the
change of accent, as ὕπο for ὑπό, see anastrophe in Part I of
the Grammar.
1836. Nore.—Besides postpositive conjunctions and
words qualifying the dependent case, other words are
often inserted between the preposition and its case in
poetry, especially in Homer.
Mera γάρ τε καὶ ἄλγεσι (Od. 15,.400). Ἔκ δόρυ γαίης
(Od. 6, 167). Διά τοι σ ἐ πύνους ἔχω (Ar, Eccl. 976).—Note
the frequent insertion of σέ between πρός and its genitive
with a verb of supplicating expressed or understood ; as πρός
σε τῶνδε γονάτων (sc. ἱκετεύω), by thy knees I entreat thee
(Eur. Hipp. 607).
1837. Preposition used for a Compound Verb.—1. In Attic prose
ἔνι is found for ἔνεστι, it is possible.
2. Homer has ἔνι for ἔνεστι and ἔνεισι (Ll. 18, 53; Od.
11, 367) ;---πάρα for πάρεστι and πάρεισι, ts (are) at hand
(Il. 5, 603; Od. 4, 559) ;—ire for ἔπεστι (Od. 11, 367);
—yera for μέτεστι (Od. 21, 93).—Ava, up! is found in
poetry (chiefly in Homer) for ἀνάστηθι.
3. Herodotus has ἔνι for ἔνεστι, rapa for πάρεστι, μέτα
for pérestt.—The Attic poets have é and πάρα (also
for πάρειμι). For the accent, see anastrophe in Part I
of the Grammar.
1838. Improper Prepositions.—The prepositions proper may all
be compounded with verbs. The improper prepositions are never used
in composition and are really adverbs, several are nouns (1862—1864).
GENERAL USE OF THE PREPOSITIONS
1839. When a preposition with its case is used in a local sense,
the dative denotes in general rest in or near ; the accusative denotes
motion towards, along, or wpon ; the genitive denotes that from which
anything starts.
Στῆναι παρὰ τῷ βασιλεῖ, to stand by (or im the presence of) the king.
Ἰέναι παρὰ τὸν βασιλέᾶ, to go to the king. Ἐλθεῖν παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως, to come
————eS ὐϑυὐνγυλύπτύ στ “ τ“
ΤΟΥ ι--- es ee eee
4, ° ‘
1840 PREPOSITIONS " 159
from the king. ᾿Απὸ (ἐκ) he πόλεως ἐλθεῖν, εἰς τὴν πόλιν ἰέναι, ἐν τῇ πόλει
οἰκεῖν.
4840. 1. (a) With verbs of motion the Greek ἐὐμμόδοναι uses ἐν
with the dative with reference to the rest which follows the completion
of the action of the verb. Here we naturally would sno eis with
the accusative.
Ἐν τῷ ποταμῷ ἔπεσον, they fell (into and thus ee in the river
(Xen. Ages. 1, 32). Ἐν Acuxadia ἀπήεσαν, they had gone to (and were in)
Leucadia (Thue. 4, 42°). So often τίθημι ἐν for τίθημι εἰς ; as Xen. Cyr. 8,
7*.—So are found occasionally ἀμφέ, περί, ἐπί, προς, and (rarely) παρά, with
the dative where the accusative would be expected.
(δ) In Attic Greek this construction is found principally with the
perfect and pluperfect; as ἐν τούτῳ τῷ τόπῳ καταπεφευγέναι, to have
made one’s escape in that region (tlat. Soph. 260*).
In poetry (especially Homer) it occurs more frequently
and also in forms different from those in prose; as ἐν
Τρωσὶ... ὄρουσαν, they rushed on the Trojans (Il. 16, 258).
2. With verbs meaning to arrive, to assemble, to land, and the like,
the Greek often uses εἰς with the accusative, thus referring to the
motion denoted or implied by the verb. Here ἐν with the dative
would be expected.
Συλλεγόμενοι ἕωθεν εἰς τὸ δικαστήριον, assembled at daybreak in the
court of justice (Plat. Phaedo 59*). Παρῆσαν εἰς Σάρδεις, they (came to
and) were in Sardis (Xen. Anab. 1, 35). Bris és μέσον, having come into -
the middle and standing there = tanking? in the middle (Hdt. 3, 62").
3. With verbs meaning to sit, to stand, to hang (up), to tie (on), to
depend, and the like, the Greek uses the prepositions ἀπό and ἐκ when
the verb expresses or involves the idea of a motion or a removal from
the object of the preposition.
Kane? ἄκρων ἐκ πάγων, we sat on (and looke. down from) the
top of a hill (Soph. Ant. 411). Ἔκ τῶν ἀξόνων δακτύλιοι κρεμάννυνται,
rings ure suspended from the two parts of the bit (Xen. Eq. 10,9). Karédnoav
ἀπὸ δένδρων τοὺς ἵππους, they tied the horses to trees (Xen. Hell, 4, 4°).
Ἔκ τῆς θαλάσσης ἅπᾶσα ὑμῖν ἤρτηται ἡ σωτηρία, all our safety depends
on the sea (Xen. Hell. 7, 15).
4. In some phrases answering to the question where ? the Greek
uses ἐκ, thus expressing a direction from the object to the observer.
Thus ἐκ δεξιᾶς, (a dextra) on the right, ἐξ ἀριστερᾶς, on the left, ἐκ
πλαγίου, on the flank, and the like.
160 ; PREPOSITIONS ; 1841
5. By an anticipation of local relation we find ἀπό, ἐκ, and παρά
with the genitive instead of ἐν or παρά with the dative, when the verb
of the sentence expresses a removal of the thing in question from the
place in which it is.
Διήρπαστο καὶ αὐτὰ τὰ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν ξύλα (for ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις), even
the very timbers in the houses (lit. from the houses) had been carried off (Xen.
Anab. 2, 2°). Oi ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς καταλιπόντες τὰ Ga ἔφυγον (for ἐν τῇ
ἀγορᾷ), the market-people (the people in the market) left their goods and fled
(Xen. Anab. 1, 215). Οἱ rap’ "ABpox dpa μισθοφόροι Ἕλληνες ἀποστάντες
ἦλθον παρὰ Κῦρον (for παρὰ ᾿Αβροκόμᾳ), the Greek mercenaries having deserted
from Abrocomas came over to Cyrus (Xen. Anab. 1, 4*).—Similarly εἰς is
occasionally found for ἐν ; as ὁ ἀπόστολος ἐς τὴν Μίλητον ἦν, the messenger -
was in Miletus (Hdt. 1, 21%).
1841. Norz.—The above constructions are termed constructio
pregnans and occur sometimes with adverbs which may be similarly
interchanged.
Κεῖνος δ᾽ ὅπου (for ὅποι) βέβηκεν, οὐδεὶς οἶδε, where he has gone (and
remains) no one knows (Soph. Trach. 40). Ὅ ποι (for ὅπου) καθέσταμεν,
where we (have arrived and) are standing (Soph. Oed. Col. 23). Tis ἀγνοεῖ
τὸν ἐκεῖθεν (for ἐκεῖ) πόλεμον δεῦρο ἥξοντα; who do not know that the war
in that quarter will come hither (Dem. 1, 15). Τοὺς ἔν δοθεν (for ἔνδον)
πάντας ἐξῆγε, he brought out all who were within (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2°). So
ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, on this side and on that; ἑκατέρωθεν, on either side.
4842. Construction of Prepositions.—1. The prepositions proper
are construed in Attic prose as follows :—
With the genitive only: ἀντί, ἀπό, ἐκ (ἐξ), πρό.
With the dative only: ἐν and σύν.
With the accusative only: ἀνά and εἰς or és.
With the genitive and accusative: ἀμφί (rarely), διά, κατά, μετά, ὑπέρ.
With the genitive, dative, and accusative: ἐπί, παρά, περί, πρός, ὑπό.
For the improper prepositions, see 1862—1864.
2. In poetry we find ἀμφί, ἀνά, and μ'τά also with the
dative; Herodotus also uses ἀμφί with the dative.
THE PREPOSITIONS IN DETAIL
1843. In the following sections the principal uses of the prepositions
are illustrated by examples. For further details the Lexicon must be
consulted.
“
1845 “ PREPOSITIONS 161
1844. ἀμφί (Lat. amb-, compare ἄμφω, both): original meaning on
both sides ; hence about.
1. Wirs Genitive, about in local sense (very rare and
poetic, once in Hdt.); about = concerning (very rare in
prose).
"Audi ταύτης τῆς πόλιος, about this city (Hdt. 8, 104*).—’Audi
ὧν εἶχον διαφερόμενοι, quarrelling about what they had (Xen.
Anab. 4, 5%).
2. Wirx Dative (only Ionic and poetic), about, con-
cerning, on account of.
᾿Αμφ᾽ ὥμοισιν, about his shoulders (Il. 11, δ27).--- ἀμφὶ τῷ
θανάτῳ αὐτῆς, concerning her death (Hat. 3, 32').—’ Audi φόβῳ,
on account of fear (Eur. Or. 825).
3. Wits Accusative, about (mostly of place, time, number, also other
relations).
᾿Αμφὶ πῦρ καθημένους, seated about the fire (Xen. Anab. 4, 2°). - Ἀμφὶ μέσᾶς
νύκτας, at about midnight (Xen. Anab. 2, 25).--- ἀμφὶ τὰ πεντήκοντα ἔτη, about
Jifty years (Xen. Anab. 2, 6°).— Audi δεῖπνον εἶχεν, he was at supper (Xen.
Cyr. 5, 5**).—Eiva ἀμφὶ ra ἱερά, to be engaged in the sacrifices (Xen. Cyr. 7,
1’).—Ta ἀμφὶ τὸν πόλεμον, the things relating to war (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1").—0i
ἀμφί τινα (as Xen. Mem. 1, 115) means the same as οἱ περί τινα (see περί,
1856, 3).
4. IN COMPOSITION, about, on both sides: ἀμφί-λογος, ἀμφι-λέγω,
ἀμφι-γνοέω, ἀμφι-έννῦμι.
5. Homer also has the form ἀμφίς which he also uses
adverbially.
6. In Attic prose περί (1856) is generally found in most of the uses of
ἀμφί.
1845. ἀνά (compare ἄνω, above), originally up ; opposed to κατά.
1, Wrra Dartve (only epic and lyric), wpon.
"Ava σκήπτρῳ, upon a staff (Il. 1, 15). “Ava ναυσίν (Eur.
Iph. Aul. 754).
2. Wirxa Accusative, up along, over (of motion), through (of ath
time); also in distributive and in a few other expressions (compare
κατά with the acc.).
(a) Of Place.
"Ava τὸν ποταμόν, up the river (Hdt. 1, 194"), ᾿Ανὰ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, over the
whole land (Xen. Ages. 9,7). Πλανᾶσθαι ἀνὰ τὰ ὄρη, to wander through the
mountains (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4”). i
162 PREPOSITIONS : 1846
(6) Of Time. το:
᾿Ανὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέρᾶν, every day (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2°). ᾿Ανὰ τὸν πόλεμον τοῦτον,
through this war (Hat. 8, 1251). ᾿Ανὰ χρόνον, in the cowrse of time (Hat. 1,
1739).
(c) Distributive Expressions.
"Ava ἑκατόν, by hundreds (Xen. Anab. 5, 4). "Ava πέντε παρασάγγας Ths
ἡμέρᾶς, five parasangs daily (Xen. Anab, 4, 6*). :
(d) Other Expressions.
᾿Ανὰ κράτος (up to one’s power), with all his might (Xen. Anab, 1, 8'). “Ava
(τὸν αὐτὸν) λόγον, according to the same proportion (Plat. Phaedo 1104). "Ava
στόμα ἔχειν, to have in one’s mouth, to talk about (Eur. El. 80). ᾿Ανὰ μέρος,
by turns.
3. IN COMPOSITION, up, back, again: dva-Baivw, ἀν-άγω, dva-
χωρέω, dva-ppovew.
1846. ἀντί, instead of, for (the original meaning against, opposite,
remains only in composition).
1. Wirx GENITIVE only.
᾿Αντ᾽ ἀργυρίου ἀλλάξασθαί τι, to exchange anything for silver (Plat. Rep.
371°). ᾿Αντὶ πολέμου εἰρήνην ἑλώμεθα, instead of war let us choose peace (Thue.
4, 205). ᾿Αντὶ ἀγαθῶν κακοὶ γεγένηνται, they have become bad instead of good
(Thue. 1, 86"). ᾿Ανθ᾽ ὧν, because, lit. for that which (Xen. Anab. 1, 3*).
2. IN COMPOSITION, against, in opposition to, in return, stead :
ἀντι-τάσσω, ἀντι-δίδωμι.
1847. ἀπό (Lat. ab), from, off from, away from ; denoting separation
from anything.
1, Wits GENITIVE only.
(a) Of Place. :
“Qpparo ἀπὸ Σάρδεων, he set out from Sardis (Xen. Anab. 1, 23). ᾿ΑΦ᾽ ἵππου
θηρεύειν, to hunt (from a horse) on horseback (Xen. Anab. 1, 2"). Πόλις....
κεῖται ἀπὸ τῆς θαλάσσης, α city lies at a distance from the sea (Thuc. 1, 46%).
(b) Of Time.
"Amd τούτου τοῦ χρόνου, from (since) this time (Xen. Anab. 7, 5°). ᾿ΑΦ᾽ οὗ,
since (Xen. Anab. 3, 2").
(c) Of Cause, Source, Material, Means.
᾿Απὸ τούτου τοῦ τολμήματος ἐπῃνέθη, for this act of boldness he was praised
(Thue. 2, 25°). ᾿Απὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ σημείου, on the same signal (Xen. Anab. 2,
833). ᾿Απὸ τῶν Σικανῶν Sixavia τότε ἡ νῆσος ἐκαλεῖτο, the island was called
Sicania from the Sicanians (Thue. 6, 2°). Οἱ ἀπὸ τοῦ Δημαράτου, the descend-
ants of Demaratus (Xen. Hell. 3, 1°). Καί τινος τῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ δήμου ἀντειπόντος,
SS Sa =a ————“—S”S”SSC—~™”
1848 - PREPOSITIONS 163
one of the popular faction replying (Thuc. 4, 1309). ᾿Απὸ στάσεων, on account
of factions (Thuc. 1, 12°). ᾿Απὸ ξυνθήματος, by agreement (Thuc. 6, 615).
Εἵματα ἀπὸ ξύλων πεποιημένα, garments made of tree-wool = cotton (Hat. 7,
65). Ζῆν ἀπὸ τῶν ἐλαχίστων χρημάτων, to live on the smallest means (Xen.
Mem. 1, 2").
(d) Partitively and Possessively.
*Odiya ἀπὸ πολλῶν, few of many (Thue. 1, 110"). Φθόνῳ ἀπὸ τῶν πρώτων
ey” through hatred (on the part) of the most prominent men (Thue. 4,
(ὁ) Of Agent with passives (seldom): ἐπράχθη am αὐτῶν οὐδὲν ἔργον
ἀξιόλογον, no noteworthy deed has been accomplished on their part
(Thue. 1, 173).
(f) Vartous Phrases,
᾿Απὸ σκόπου, away from the mark, amiss (Plat. Theaet. 179°). ᾿Απὸ τοῦ
πράγματος, foreign to the subject (Dem. 24, 6). ᾿Αφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, on one’s own
account, of one’s self, voluntarily, unforced (Thue. 5, 60"). ᾿Απὸ ταὐτομάτου,
of itself, without cause (Thuc. 2, 77*). ᾿Απὸ γλώσσης, orally (Thue. 7, 10).
᾿Απὸ στόματος εἰπεῖν, to repeat by heart, lit. from the mouth (Xen. Mem. 3,
6°). ᾿Απὸ τοῦ προφανοῦς, openly (Thuc. 1, 66°).
(g) For ἀπό with verbs meaning to sit, to hang (up), to tie (on), etc.,
see 1840, 3.
2. In ComPosiTion, from, away, in return: ἀπο- βάλλω, ἀπο-τίθημι,
ἀπ-ιέναι, ἀπο-δίδωμι, give in return, pay ; ἀπ-αιτέω, demand back,
1848. διά (Lat. di-, dis-), through ; originally through between
(related to δύο, two).
1, Wirs GEnITIveE.
(a) Of Place.
ἘἘπορεύοντο διὰ χίονος πολλῆς, they set forward through deep snow (Xen.
Anab. 4,5). Διὰ τοῦ θώρᾶκος, through the breastplate (Xen. Anab, 1, 8”), ΄
(b) Of Time.
Av ἡμέρᾶς, through the day (Ar. Nub, 1052). Διὰ παντὸς τοῦ βίου, throughout
his whole life (Xen. Mem. 1, 2").
(c) Of Intervals of Place or Time.
Διὰ δέκα ἐπάλξεων πύργοι ἦσαν, at intervals of ten battlements there were
towers (Thuc. 3, 215). Διὰ τετρακοσίων ἐτῶν, after (an interval of) fowr
hundred years (Isoc. 6, 27).
(d) Of Means.
“Ἔλεγε δι᾽ ἑρμηνέως, he spoke through an interpreter (Xen. Anab. 2, 3”), Ae
ἐπιορκίας, by means of perjwry (Xen. ἅπαν. 2, 5”).
164 PREPOSITIONS 1849
(e) Various Expressions.
Διὰ φιλίᾶς ἰέναι τινί.....διὰ παντὸς πολέμου ἰέναι τινί, to be in friendship with
any one.....to be in constant war with any one (Xen. Anab. 3, 25). Διὰ φόβων
γίγνεσθαι, to get to be in a state of fear (Plat. Leg. 791°). Διὰ στόματος ἔχειν,
to have in one’s mouth, to mention always (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4”). Διὰ χειρός
ἔχειν, to hold in one’s hand (Thue. 2, 13"). Διὰ μακρῶν......διὰ βραχυτάτων τοὺς
λόγους ποιεῖσθαι, to make the speeches long.....very brief (Plat. Gorg. 449°).
Διὰ ταχέων, quickly = by quick ways (Xen. Anab. 1, 5°). Διὰ μακροῦ, at a
great interval (Plat. Theaet. 193¢). Διὰ χρόνου, some time later (Xen. Mem.
4, 4°). Διὰ τέλους, thoroughly, through to the end (Soph. Aj. 685).
2. WirxH AccusATIVE.
(a) Of Cause or Agency = through, by the help of, on account of.
Διὰ καῦμα, through (on account of) the heat (Xen. Anab. 1, 7°). Σῴζεσθαι δι᾽
ἡμᾶς, to be saved by us (Xen. Anab. 5, 8). Διὰ μεγάθῦμον ᾿Αθήνην, by the
help of great-souled Athene (Od. 8, 520). Διὰ τοῦτο, διὰ ταῦτα, διό, through
this, for this reason. Διὰ τί; why ?—With the accusative of a person, διά
denotes that the person acts of his own impulse; with the genitive, the
person acts under command or request.
(b) Of Place or Time, through (poetic, mostly epic and
lyric).
Διὰ δώματα, through the halls (Il. 1, 600). Διὰ νύκτα, through
the night (Il. 2, 57).
3. IN COMPOSITION, through, thoroughly, asunder or apart (Lit. di-,
dis-): δια-μένω, δι-άγω, δια-φθείρω, δια-δίδωμι, δια-φέρω.
1849. εἰς or és, into, to, wp to ; originally to a point within anything,
as opposed to ἐκ, owt of. Of Attic prose writers, Thucydides uses és
(so also Herodotus); other Attic prose writers have εἰς, The poets
use both indifferently. Both forms are from original and Cretan évs
(see ἐν).
1. Wirx Accusative only.
(a) Of Place.
Διέβησαν ἐς τὴν Σικελίᾶν, they passed over into Sicily (Thuc. 6, 24). Eis
Kapdovxous ἐμβάλλειν, to make an incursion into the land of the Carduchi
(Xen. Anab. 3, 5"). Eis Φωκέας. ..ἐπορεύετο, he went to the Phoceans, i.e. into
their country (Dem. 9,11). Οἰκοδομεῖν τείχη ἐς θάλασσαν, to build walls down
to the sea (Thue. 1, 107').—The accusative of a person here implies the land
or dwelling.
But in Homer, seldom in other poetry, εἰς is also found used
like ὡς or πρός with a person; as εἰς ᾿Αχιλῆα, to Achilles (Il.
15, 402).
es
a ese Garey Ὁ
1850 PREPOSITIONS 165
With the accusative of a person, εἰς may also mean among, against or towards,
before (with notions of speaking) ; as τὸν κάκιστον πλοῦτος εἰς πρώτους ἄγει,
wealth brings the worst among the highest (Eur. Alemena frag. 8). Ov yap
és σ᾽ ἁμαρτάνω, against thee I err not (Eur. Hipp. 323). λέγειν eis ὑμᾶς, to
speak to you (Xen. Anab. 5, 6*).—For εἰς with verbs meaning to assemble,
to arrive, etc., see 1840, 2. ;
(δ) Of Time,
Ἐς ἠῶ, till dawn (Od. 11, 375). Μνημεῖον εἰς ἅπαντα χρόνον, a memorial
for all time (Isoc. 11, 10). Eis ἐνιαυτόν, for a year (Od. 4, 595). ἘἜς ὅ,
until.—So of an expected future date, as εἰς τὴν ὑστεραίᾶν οὐχ ἧκεν, on the
following day he did not come (Xen. Anab. 2, 3”).
(c) Of Number.
Εἶχε τοξότᾶς καὶ σφενδονήτας εἰς τετρακοσίους, he had archers and slingers to
the number of four hundred, about four hundred (Xen. Anab. 3, 3°).—So dis-
tributively in military expressions ; as és δύο, by twos (Xen. Anab. 2, 4”),
(4) Of Purpose, of Regard to, of Extent.
Ta εἰς τὸν πόλεμον ἔργα, the exercises of war (Xen. Anab. 1, 95). Παιδεύειν
ἀνθρώπους εἰς ἀρετήν, to train men for virtue (Plat. Gorg. 519°). Εὐδοκιμωτάτη
εἰς σοφίαν, (a city) most famous for wisdom (Plat. Apol. 29°). Els δύναμιν,
up to one’s strength (Xen. Anab. 2, 335). Eis τοῦτο θράσους, to this point of
boldness (Dem. 21, 194). Ἔς τέλος, finally (Eur. Jon 1621).
2. IN COMPOSITION, into, in, to: εἰσ- βάλλω, εἰσ-άγω.
1850. ἐν (Poetic often ἐνὶ; sometimes εἴν, rarely «ivi), in, corres-
ponding to Lat. in with the ablative.
1. Wirx Dative only.
(a) Of Place.
Ἔν τῇ πόλει, in the city. Ἔν Σπάρτῃ, in Sparta, Πόλιν...ἐν τῷ Εὐξείνῳ
πόντῳ, a city on the Euxine Sea (Xen. Anab, 4, 8).—With words implying
a number of persons, among; as ἐν Μήδοις, among the Medes (Xen. Cyr. 1,
3*); ἐν πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις, among all men (Xen. Cyr. 8, 5). And so also
before = in the presence of ; as λέγειν ἐν ὑμῖν, to say before you (Xen. Anab,
5, 7°).—For ἐν with verbs of motion, see 1840, 1.
(b) Of Time.
Ἔν τούτῳ τῷ χρόνῳ, at that time (Xen. Anab. 4, 2"). Ἔν τῷ χειμῶνι, in the
winter (Xen. Oec. 17, 3). Ἔν πέντε ἡμέραις, in five days (Xen. Mem. 3,
13°). Ἔν ταῖς σπονδαῖς, during the truce (Xen. Anab, 3, 1’). Ἔν 6, while ;
ἐν τούτῳ, meanwhile (Xen. Hell, 5, 2”),
(c) In Various Relations.
Ἐν ὅπλοις παρεῖναι, to be present in arms (Ken. Ages. 1, 33). Ἔν σοὶ πάντα
ἐστί, everything is in your hands (Xen. Oec. 7,14). Ἐν παρασκευῇ εἶναι, to
be occupied in preparation (Thue. 2, 805. "Ev ἐλπίδι εἶναι, to be in hope
166 PREPOSITIONS 1851
(Thue. 4, 70°). Ἐν αἰτίᾳ ἔχειν τινά, to hold any one (in fault) responsible
(Thue. 1, 354). Ἔν ὀργῇ ἔχειν τινά, to be angry with any one = to hold any
one in anger (Thuc. 2, 18°),
2. Ἔν was used in Aeolic also with the accusative, like εἰς.
So occasionally in Pindar; as ἐν θ᾽ ἅρματα (Pind. Pyth.
2, 11).
3. IN COMPOSITION, in, on, ἐμ- βάλλω, ἐν-οικέω.
1851. ἐξ or ἐκ (Lat. ex, 6), out of, from, properly ap within
(opposed to εἰς).
1. Wir GENITIVE only.
(a) Of Place.
Ξέρξης ἐκ τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἀπεχώρει, Xerxes was returning from Greece (Xen.
‘Anab. 1, 2°). Τὰ ἐκ τῆς γῆς φυόμενα, the productions of the earth (Xen.
Mem. 4, 3*°).—For ἐξ with verbs of hanging (up), tying (on), etc., see 1840, 3.
(δ) Of Time.
Ἔκ παλαιοῦ, from ancient times (Xen. Mem. 3, 5°). Ἔκ παιδός, from a boy,
from boyhood (Xen. Cyr. 5, 1°). Ἔξ οὗ, ἐξ ὅτου, since (Xen. Anab. 5, 75;
7, 8). So ἐκ τοῦ ἀρίστου, after dinner (Xen. Anab. 4, 6); λόγον ἐκ λόγου
λέγειν, to make one speech after another (Dem. 18, 313).
(c) Of Origin or Source, Cause, Means.
Ἔξ αὐτῶν τῶν θεῶν γεγονότες, born of the gods themselves (Isoc. 12, 81). Ἔκ
τοιοῦδε dveideos, on account of such a disgrace (Hdt. 6, 671). Ἔκ πολέμου
εἰρήνη μᾶλλον βεβαιοῦται, by war peace is made more stable (Thuc. 1, 124*),—
So of agent with passive verbs (for ὑπό), the agent regarded as the source; as
ἐκ βασιλέως δεδομέναι, (the cities) given by the king (Xen. Anab. 1, 1°).
(d) According to: ἐβουλεύοντο ἐκ τῶν παρόντων, they took counsel ac-
cording to the present state of affairs (Thue. 3, 29°).
(e) Various Expressions,
Ἔκ δεξιᾶς, on the right (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3%). Ἔκ παντὸς τρόπου, in every way —
(Lys. 16, 1). Ἔκ πολλοῦ, at a great distance; ἐξ ἴσου, in equal condition
(Xen. Anab. 3, 447).
2. IN COMPOSITION, out of, from, away: ἐκ- βάλλω, ἐκ-βαίνω.
᾿ 4882. ἐπί, on, wpon.
1. ΊΤΗ GENITIVE.
(a) Of Place where or whither.
Ἐπὶ τῶν οὐρέων, on the mountains (Hadt. 7, 111°), Ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς φέρειν τι,
to carry anything on the head (Xen. Anab. 4, 35). Ἐπὶ γῆς, on the earth
(Plat. Menex. 2464). Πόλεις ἐπὶ Θράκης, cities in Thrace (Dem. 9, 26).
Meiva ἐπὶ τοῦ ποταμοῦ, to remain at the river (Xen. Anab. 4, 335).--Ἔπλεον
EEE «ἕω ΟΝ»
1852 PREPOSITIONS 167
ἐπὶ Λέσβου, to sail toward Lesbos (Xen. Hell. 1, 2"); here the idea of
reaching the destination or the desire to do so is involved ; ἐπὶ Λέσβον simply
expresses the direction of the motion. ᾿Αναχωρεῖν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου, to return to the
house (Dem. 9, 48).
(6) Of Time when or during.
Ἐπὶ τῶν ἡμετέρων προγόνων, in our forefather’ ὁ time (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6%).
Ἐπ᾿ ἐμοῦ, in my time (Dem. 3, 3). Ἐπ᾿ εἰρήνης, in time of peace (Il. 2, 797).
Emi κινδύνου, in time of danger (Thuc. 6, 34°).
(c) Of Various Relations.
Αὐτοὶ ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν ἐχώρουν, they began to march by themselves (Xen. Anab. 2,
4). ᾿ἘἘτάχθησαν ἐπὶ τεττάρων, they were drawn wp four deep (Xen. Anab. 1,
2). Τὰ ὡμολογημένα ἐπὶ τοῦ δικαστηρίου, the things admitted before the court
(Isae. 5,1). Ἐπὶ μαρτύρων, before witnesses (Xen. Hell. 6,5). Καλεῖσθαι
ἐπί τινος, to be named for (after) something (Hdt. 7, 40*). Ἐπί τινος λέγειν,
to speak with reference to some one (Plat. Charm. 155°). Τοὺς ἐπὶ τῶν mpay-
μάτων, those in charge of (publie) affairs (Dem. 18, 247). Ἐπὶ σχολῆς, at
leiswre (Plat. Theaet. 1724). Ἐπ’ ἀληθείας, truthfully (Dem. 18, 17).
2. ΊΤΗ Dative.
(a) Of Place.
Μίμν᾽ ἐπὶ πύργῳ, remain ‘on the tower (Il. 6, 431). KAnpovxous ἐπὶ τῇ χώρῃ
λείπουσι, they leave in the land holders of allotments (Hat. 5, 77%). Πόλιν
ἐπὶ τῇ. θαλάττῃ οἰκουμένην, a city situated upon (oy) the sea (Xen. Anab.
1, 4’).
(6) Of Succession in Time or Place.
᾿Ανέστη δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ Φεραύλας, Pheraulas stood up after him (Xen. Cyr. 2, 37),
Ἐπὶ τούτοις, thereupon (Xen. Cyr. 5, 5"). Φόνος ἐπὶ φόνῳ, murder on murder
(Eur. Iph. Tawr. 197).
(c) Of Time (mostly poetic): ἐπὶ νυκτί, in t the mght (II.
. 8, 259).
(d) Of Condition, Purpose, Cause.
Ἐπὶ τούτοις ἔλαβον καὶ ἔδοσαν πάντες τὰ πιστά, on these conditions all received
and gave asswrances of friendship (Xen. Cyr. 8, 25). Ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, on
condition that.—Aavei{ew ἐπὶ τόκῳ, to lend on interest (Plat. Leg. 742°).
Ἔπ᾽ ἀγαθῷ ἐκόλασά twa, I punished some one for his (own) good (Xen. Anab.
5, 8). οὐχ ἐπὶ τέχνῃ ἔμαθες, you did not learn for the sake of a profession
(Plat. Prot. 312”).—Emi τίνι μέγιστον φρονεῖς ; on what do you value yourself
most? (Xen. Symp. 3,7). "Ent ἐπῶν ποιήσει Ὅμηρον μάλιστα τεθαύμακα, 1
admire Homer the most for epic poetry (Xen. Mem. 1, 43).
(e) Of Various Relations.
"Emi σοί ἐστι λέγειν, it is in your power to say (Xen. Mem. 2, 6"). Ἐπὶ τῷ
ἀδελφῷ, in the power of his brother (Xen. Anab. 1, 13). Oi ἐπὶ τοῖς mpdy-
168 PREPOSITIONS 1858
μασιν, those at the head of affairs (Dem. 8, 76). Ἐρεῖ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀποθανοῦσι, he
will speak over the dead (Plat. Menex. 234°). Τὸν νόμον ἐφ᾽ ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς...
θήσετε, you will make the law against yourselves (Thue. 1, 40°).
3. ΔΊΤΗ ACOUSATIVE.
(a) Of Place (to, upon, towards, against).
᾿Αναβῆναι ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον, to mount the horse (Xen. Anab. 3, 4%). Ἐπὶ δεξιά,
toward the right (Xen. Anab. 6, 4"), Ἰέναι ἐπὶ ras βασιλέως θύρᾶς, to go to
the gates of the king (Xen. Anab. 2, 1°). Ἰέναι ἐπὶ rods πολεμίους, to march
against the enemy (Xen. Anab. 3, 1%).
(b) Of Extension over Space or Time.
Ἐπὶ πᾶσαν Ἑῤρώπην, throughout or over all Europe (Plat. Critias 1195,
Ἐπὶ τρεῖς ἡμέρᾶς, for three days (Xen. Anab. 6, 638).
(c) Of an Object or Purpose: ἴτω τις ἐφ᾽ Sep, let some one go for water
(Xen. Cyr. 5, 3°).
(d) Various Expressions.
Ἐπὶ πολύ, widely. Td ἐπὶ πολύ, for the most part. Διαφέρων ἐπὶ πρᾶξιν,
differing in practical ability (Plat. Rep. 370°). Τὸ ἐπ᾽ ἐμέ or τὸ ἐπ᾽ ἐμέ εἶναι,
as far as I am concerned (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4°; Thue. 4, 28°).
4, IN COMPOSITION, upon, over, after, toward, at, against, moreover :
ἐπι-γράφω, ἐπ-έρχομαι, ἐπι-βουλή, ἐπίτορκος, ἐπι-γίγνομαι.
1853. κατά (compare κάτω, below), originally down (opposed to ἀνά).
1. WitH GENITIVE,
(a) Down from, down upon, underneath.
᾿Αλάμενοι κατὰ τῆς πέτρᾶς, jumping down from the rock (Xen. Anab. 4, 211).
Mupov κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαντες, pouring perfume on his head (Plat. Rep.
398"). Κείσομαι κατὰ χθονός, I shall lie beneath the earth (Eur. Heracl. 1033).
Tov κατὰ γῆς, the one buried (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6°),
(Ὁ) Against (of speaking, and the like).
Ὃ τελευταῖον κατ᾽ ἐμοῦ εἶπε, what he last said against me (Xen. Hell. 2, 335),
Madprupas παρέχεσθοι κατά τινος, to offer witnesses against any one (Plat. Gorg.
472"). Aéyew κατά τινος, to speak against any one (Xen. Hell. 1, 5*).—Rarely
in a favourable sense, concerning; as μέγιστον... καθ᾽ ὑμῶν ἐγκώμιον, the
greatest encomium on you (Dem. 6, 9).
(c) Various Hapressions.
"Odds οἰκίας καὶ πόλεις κατ᾽ ἄκρᾶς ἐξαιρεῖν, to quadhives utterly whole houses
and cities, i.e. from the top down (Plat. Leg. 909"). Κατὰ παντός, καθ᾽ ὅλου,
wholly, in general. Kara νώτου, in the rear of an army (Thue. 1, 62%).
*Opviva κατά ἱερῶν τελείων, to swear by full-grown victims (Thuc. 5, 47).
2. Wirx Accusative: downwards (of motion) ; of motion or extension,
over, throughout, among, against, at, on; also for = in search of,
\
1854 PREPOSITIONS 169
according to, relating to, during, by (in distributive expressions), nearly
(of number).
(a) Of Place.
Kara ποταμόν, down stream (Hat. 4, 445). Kara γῆν καὶ κατὰ τὴν θάλατταν, by
land and by sea (Xen. Anab. 3, 2"). Αἱ ἔχιδναι κατὰ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν εἰσι,
vipers are distributed throughout the whole earth (Hat. 3, 109°). Προελθεῖν
κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν, to proceed on the road (Xen. Anab. 4, 2.5). Παίει αὐτὸν κατὰ τὸ
στέρνον, he strikes him on the breast (Xen. Anab. 1, 8”). Kara Σινώπην
πόλιν, opposite the city Sinope (Hdt. 1, 76"). Τοὺς κατὰ ras πύλας φύλακας
κτείνουσι, they kill the guards (standing) at the gates (Thuc. 4, 67°).
(6) Of Time.
Kara τὸν πρότερον πόλεμον, at the time of the former war (Hat. 1, 67'). οἱ
καθ᾽ αὑτόν, the people of his time (Xen. Hell. 6, 4%).
(c) Distributively.
Kara φῦλα, by clans (Il. 2, 362). Kar’ ἐνιαυτόν, yearly (Thuc. 2, 13°). Καθ᾿
ἡμέρᾶν, daily (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3”). Κατὰ μίαν καὶ δύο (Dem. 20, 77).—Similarly
κατὰ σφᾶς αὐτούς, by themselves, apart (Thue. 1, 79°).
(d) According to, relating to, etc.
Kara τὸν νόμον, according to the law (Xen. Anab. 7, 3%). Κατὰ πάντα τρόπον,
in every way (Xen. Anab. 6, 6). Kara σπουδήν, with zeal (Thue. 2, 94°).
Kar’ ἡσυχίην, quietly (Hdt. 1, 95). Κατὰ κράτος, with all one’s might (Xen.
Anab. 1, 8%). Κατὰ πάντα, in all respects (Dem. 24, 108). Τὸ κατ᾽ ἐμέ, as
regards myself (Dem. 18, 247).—Ka@ ἁρπαγήν, for (in search of) plunder
(Xen. Anab. 3, 5*).—Kara ἑξακισχιλίους καὶ τετρακοσίους, nearly 6400 (Hat.
6, 117’).
3. IN COMPOSITION, down, against (often it merely strengthens or
intensifies the meaning of the simple verb): xara-Baivw, κατα-κόπτω,
κατα-καίω, κατ-εσθίω, κατα-γελάω.
1854, μετά, amid, among ; with (compare σύν).
1. Wrrs Genitive: With (implying association, wnion, or aid).
Mera Βοιωτῶν ἐμάχοντο, they fought in alliance with the Boeotians (ll. 18,
700). Καθῆσθαι μετὰ τῶν ἄλλων, to sit down among the others (Plat. Rep.
35%). Αὐτός re καὶ οἱ per αὐτοῦ, both he himself and those with him (Xen.
Hell. 3, 3"). Μετὰ ἀδικίᾶς, with (by means of) injustice, wrongfully (Xen.
«παν. 2, 6). Ἱκετεύειν μετὰ πολλῶν δακρύων, to supplicate with many tears
(Plat. Apol. 34°). Ὑπέρβολον ἀποκτείνουσι μετὰ Xappivov, they kill Hyperbolus
by the aid of Charminus (Thue. 8, 73°).
2. Wirn Dative, poetic (chiefly epic), among, with:
Ἕκτωρ....μετὰ πρώτοισι φάνεσκε, Hector appeared among
the first (11. 11, 64).
170 PREPOSITIONS 1855
3. ΊΤΗ AccusATIvE.
(a) A fter (in time or order),
Δεκάτῳ ἔτει pera αὐτήν (i.e. τὴν ἐν Μαραθῶνι μάχην), in the tenth your after the
battle at Marathon (Thue. 1, 183). Πόλιν... τὴν πλουσιωτάτην...μετὰ Βαβυλῶνα,
a city the richest after (or next to) Babylon (Xen. Cyr. 7, 212).
(ὁ) Among or into or after, of motion (poetic).
“Ikovro para Τρῶας, they came among (into the midst of) the
Trojans (Il. 3, 264). Ἔρχεο....μετὰ Ἕκτορα, go after Hector
(Il. 15, 221).
(c) In quest of = after (poetic): πλέων.... μετὰ χαλκόν,
sailing in quest of (after) copper (Od. 1, 184).
(d) Phrases.
Μεθ᾿ ἡμέρᾶν, by day, after daybreak (Xen. Anab. 4, 6). Μετὰ χεῖρας ἔχειν,
to have in hand (Acschin. 1, 77).
4. In COMPOSITION, with (of sharing), among, after: μετ-έχω, per-airvos,
μετ-αίχμιος, μετα-πέμπομαι.----Τ also denotes change, pera-voew, to change
one’s mind ; μετα-τίθημι, to put into another place; μετα-ποιέω, to re-
model,
1855. παρά (Hom. also πάρ and παρα), beside, alongside of, near,
by ; from near ; toward, etc.
1, ΊΤΗ GENITIVE.
(a) From, from beside.
Παρὰ βασιλέως πολλοὶ... ἀπῆλθον, many went away from the king (Xen. Anab.
1, 9). Ταῦτα παρὰ σοῦ ἐμάθομεν, we learnt this from you (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2°).
lap’ ἑαυτοῦ προστιθέναι τι, to advance anything from one’s self = from one’s
own means (Xen. Hell. 6, 1°).
Rarely and only in poetry it may denote alongside of =
παρά With dat., as Soph. Ant. 1123.
(Ὁ) Of Agent, as source, with passives for ὑπό with gen. (not frequent)
τὰ παρὰ σοῦ λεγόμενα, the things said by you (Xen. Cyr. 6, 1%). Com-
pare 1858, 1 (e).
2. Wirx Dative, with, beside.
Oi παρὰ βασιλεῖ ὄντες, those with the king (Xen. Anab. 1, δ᾽). (Sirodvra)
παρὰ τῷ διδασκάλῳ, they dine with the teacher (Xen. Cyr. 1, 25). Τὰ map”
ἐμοὶ, affairs with me (Xen. Anab. 1, 7*).—With things, mostly poetic, as Od.
6, 97.—Note expressions like παρ᾽ ἡμῖν, in owr opinion (Soph. Trach, 589).
3. Wirxn Accusative, to, to (a point) near ; alon7, beside ; beyond or
beside, except ; contrary to; during ; in comparison with ; on account
of.
1856 PREPOSITIONS 171
(a) Of Place.
᾿Απεκόμενοι παρὰ Κροῖσον, Ἔσο come to Croesus (Hdt. 1, 36). Πέμπει παρὰ
τοὺς Ἕλληνας πρέσβεις, he sends ambassadors to the Greeks (Ken. Anab. 6, 1°).
Ἴτην παρὰ νῆας, they (two) went to the ships (Il. 1, 347). *"Hoay κῶμαι πολλαὶ
παρὰ τὸν ποταμόν, there were many outages along the river (Xen. Anab. 3, 5*).
(δ) Of Time: παρὰ πάντα τὸν χρόνον, throughout (during) the whole time
(Plat. Phaedo 116°).
(c) Of Comparison.
Παρὰ ra ἄλλα (oa, in comparison with the oaker animals (Xen. Mem. 1, 4").
ἜἘπόνει παρὰ τοὺς ἄλλους, he toiled more than the others (Xen. Ages. 5, 3).
(4) Of Cause: οὐ παρὰ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ῥώμην, not on account of his own-
strength (Dem. 4, 11).
(e) Contrary to, besides.
Tlapa τοὺς νόμους, contrary to (= beyond) the laws (Xen. Mem. 4, 4). Οὐκ
ἔστι παρὰ ταῦτ᾽ ἄλλα, there are no others besides these (Ar. Nub. 698).
(7) Various Expressions.
Tapa μῖκρόν, within a little, by a a little (Isoc. 7, 6). Παρὰ πολύ, by Ts by
a great deal (Thue. 1, 295). Tap’ ὀλίγον BOATS to regard lightly (Xen.
Anab. 6,6"). Tap’ οὐδὲν ἡγεῖσθαι, to consider as nothing (Dem. 18, 164).
4, Ἢ COMPOSITION, beside, passing by, aside ; hither; wrongly,
amiss ; beyond (of laws): παρ-εῖναι, παρ-έρχομαι, παρα-καλέω, παρα-πλέω,
παρα- “fein παρά-νομος.
1856. περί, arownd (on all sides), about (compare ἀμφί).
1, ΔΝΊΤΗ GENITIVE.
(a) Concerning = about, on account of.
Κήρῦκας ἔπεμψε περὶ σπονδῶν, he sent heralds concerning the truce (Xen.
Anab. 2, 3"). Περὶ ὀνομάτων διαφέρεσθαι, to differ about names (Lys. 11, 3).
᾿Εφοβοῦντο περὶ τῆς χώρᾶς, they were in fear about the country (Xen. Anab.
5, 5"). ;
(Ὁ) Around or about locally (rare and poetic): περὶ
σπείους, around the grotto (Od. 5, 68).
(c) Above, superior to, surpassing (Homeric) : περὶ πάντων
ἔμμεναι, to be swperior to all others (Il. 1, 287).—In prose
this use survives in the common phrases περὶ πολλοῦ
(πλείονος, πλείστου, ὀλίγου Or σμϊῖκροῦ, ἐλάττονος, ἐλαχίστου,
αντὸς, οὐδενὸς) ποιεῖσθαι Or ἡγεῖσθαί τι, to think much
(more, most, little, ete.) of anything, - esteem highly,
etc. (Xen. Mem. 2, 3; Anab. 1, 97; 1, 916: Lys. 31,
31).
172 PREPOSITIONS 1857
2, Wrrn Dative (uncommon in Attic prose).
(a) Around or about locally: Odpaxa ἔχει περὶ τοῖς στέρνοις, he has a
cuirass round his breast (Xen. Cyr. 1, 215).
(b) About = concerning.
Ζεὺς ἔδεισε περὶ τῷ γένει ἡμῶν, Zeus eo about our race (Plat. Prot. 322°).
Note πταίειν or σφάλλεσθαι περί τινι, to get a fall over anything, to fail, to
make a mistake (Thue. 1, 69°).
3. Wirx AccusaTIvE (nearly the same as ἀμφί), about.
Θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα περὶ τὴν σκηνήν, to arrange their arms around the tent (Xen.
Anab. 1, θ᾽). Περὶ τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον, about (near) the Hellespont (Dem. 8, 3).
—Ilepi τούτους τοὺς χρόνους, at about those times (Xen. Hell. 1, 2°*).—Iepi
πεντήκοντα καὶ διᾶκόσιους, about 250 (Xen. Hell. 4, 5'”).—TDepi ταῦτα ἦσαν,
they were occupied with this (Xen. Hell. 2, 23). Μαθεῖν ra περὶ τὴν yewpyiay,
to learn what relates to husbandry (Xen. Oec, 20, 1).—For the expression οἱ
περί (ἀμφί) τινα, see 1272.
4, IN COMPOSITION, around, about, very or exceedingly (like Lat.
per- in per-magnus) : περι- βάλλω, περι-γίγνομαι, περι-καλλής.
1857. πρό (Lat. pro), before, for,
1. Wirn GENITIVE only.
(a) Of Place. Πρὸ τῶν πυλῶν, before the gates (Xen. Hell. 2, 494). Πρὸ
ὁδοῦ, well forward on the way (Il. 4, 382).
(0) Of Time. Πρὸ τῆς μάχης, before the battle (Xen. Anab. 1, 7'*). se
ἡμέρᾶς (Xen. Cyr. 4, 44). Πρὸ τοῦ, formerly.
(c) Of Preference or Exchange.
Αἱρεῖσθαι mpd" ἥττης τε καὶ δουλείᾶς θάνατον, to choose death in preference to
defeat and slavery (Plat. Rep. 386”), Πρὸ τῶνδε, for this (Soph. El. 495).
Πρὸ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαι, to regard highly, to consider important (1806. 5, 14).
(4) Of Protection: in behalf of.
Μάχεσθαι πρὸ παίδων, to fight for their children (Il. 8, 57). Πρὸ tyav
ἀγρυπνήσᾶς, having watched in your behalf (Xen. Anab. 7, 635).
2. IN COMPOSITION, before, forth, forward, in defence, in preference :
προ-τάσσω, προ-βάλλω, προ-τρέχω, προ-κινδυνεύω, προ-οαιρέομαι.
1858. πρός (Hom. also zpori and ποτί), at or by (properly in front
of); related to πρό.
1. WitH GENITIVE.
(a) Looking towards = in front of.
Πρὸς τῆς Βοιωτίας κεῖται, it lies over against Boeotia (Dem. 23, 182). Τὸ πρὸς
Σικυῶνος τεῖχος, the wall facing Sicyon (Xen. Hell. 4, 48).
1858 PREPOSITIONS 173
(δ) Of Origin and Characteristic.
᾿Αλκιβιάδης λέγεται πρὸς πατρὸς ᾿Αλκμαιωνιδῶν εἶναι, Alcibiades is said to be of
the Alemaeonidae on his father’s side (Dem. 21, 144). Πρὸς γυναικὸς ἦν, it
was the way of a woman (Aesch. Ag. 1619).
(c) On the side of (of partisanship), for the benefit or advantage of.
Καλλίας μοι δοκεῖ πρὸς Πρωταγόρου εἶναι, Callias seems to me to be on the side
of Protagoras (Plat. Prot. 336°). Σπονδὰς ἐποιήσατο.... πρὸς Θηβαίων, he made
a truce for the advantage of the Thebans (Xen. Hell. 7, 1").
(d) In swearing (by), of opinion (in the eyes of).
Πρὸς θεῶν, by (before) the gods (Xen. Anab. 5, 7°). Δίκαιον.... πρὸς θεῶν καὶ
πρὸς ἀνθρώπων, just in the eyes of gods and men (Xen. Anab. 1, 6°).
(e) From.
Ἔχων ἔπαινον πολὺν πρὸς ὑμῶν, having much praise from you (Xen, Anab. 7,
6**).—So occasionally (rarely in Attic prose) of agent with passive verbs (like
ὑπό). ᾿Αδοξοῦνται πρὸς τῶν πόλεων, they are held in no esteem by the states
(Xen. Occ. 4, 2).
(7) Occasionally in Homer, under the protection of, as
Od. 6, 207.
2. Wirs Dative.
(a) At, near.
Πρὸς τῇ οἰκίᾳ, near the house (Xen. Rep. Lac. 15, 6). Πρὸς Βαβυλῶνι ἦν ὁ
Κῦρος, Cyrus was at Babylon (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5"). Πρὸς τοῖς πράγμασι γίγνεσθαι,
to be occupied with affairs (Dem. 8, 11).
(δ) In addition to, besides : πρὸς τούτοις, besides this, furthermore (Xen.
Cyr. 1, 28).
3. Wire AccusaTIVE.
(a) To ; against ; towards (of time, direction).
Ἥκω πρὸς σέ, I am come to you (Xen. Mem. 2, 1%"). Πρὸς Φίλιππον πρέσβεις
πέμπειν, to send ambassadors to Philip (Dem. 18, 24). Λέξατε πρός pe, say to
me (Xen. Anab. 3, 3*).—lévae πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους, to go against the enemy
(Xen. ἅπαν. 2, 6}2).---πρὸς éorépay, towards evening (Xen. Hell. 4, 3”).
Πρὸς βορρᾶν, towards the North (Thue. 6, 2*).
(6) Towards (of disposition friendly or hostile).
Τὴν εὔνοιαν τὴν πρὸς ἡμᾶς, the good-will towards us (Isoc. 3, 61). Πρὸς τοὺς
᾿Αθηναίους φιλικῶς (ἔχειν), to be disposed in a friendly way to the Athenians
(Xen. Hell. 4, 8). Συνθήκᾶς ποιεῖσθαι πρὸς ἀλλήλους, to make agreements
_ with each other (Aeschin. 1, 161).
(c) With a view to; with regard to ; in relation to, in comparison with,
according to.
Πρὸς ri με ταῦτ᾽ ἐρωτᾷς; to what purpose to do ask me this? (Xen. Mem. ὃ,
7). Πεπαιδεύμεθα πρὸς τὴν ἀρετήν, we have been educated for valour (Isoc. 6,
174 PREPOSITIONS 1859.
102).—-Tods ἄριστα πρὸς ἀρετὴν πεφυκότας, those best by nature in regard to
virtue (Isoc. 15, 284). Πρὸς ra πάροντα ἔλεξε τοιάδε, with regard to the
present subject he spoke thus (Thuc. 6, 41’). Ta πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον, what
pertains to the war (Xen. Anab. 4, 3"°).—Mé{o...mpos πᾶσαν χώρην, greater
in comparison with any country (Hdt. 2, 35").—Ovdé πρὸς ἀργύριον τὴν εὐδαι-
poviay éxpivov, nor did they judge of happiness according to money (Isoc. 4,
76). Πρὸς αὐλὸν ὠρχήσαντο, they danced to the flute (Xen. Anab. 6, 1°).
(4) Various Eapressions.
Πρὸς χάριν or ἡδονήν, with the object of pleasing (Isoc. 8, 10, and 8, 9).
Πρὸς Biav, by force (Soph. frag. 701). Πρὸς ὀργήν, in anger (Ar. Ran. 998).
Πρὸς φιλίαν, in friendship (Xen. Anab. 1, 3). Οὐδὲν πρὸς ἐμέ, nothing to
me (Dem. 18, 21).
4. IN COMPOSITION, to, towards, by, besides: προσ-άγω, προσ-ιέναι,
προσ-τίθημι.
1859. σύν or older Attic ξύν (Lat. cwm), with, in company with, in
union with, Except in the expression σὺν (τοῖς) θεοῖς, with the help of
the gods, σύν is confined almost wholly to the poets and to Xenophon ;
the other prose writers use pera.
1. Wrrx Dative only.
(a) In company with: ἐπαιδεύετο σὺν τῷ ἀδελφῷ, he was educated with
his brother (Xen. Anab. 1, 9*).—So of help: σὺν θεοῖς (Xen. Cyr. 6, 41).
(Ὁ) In conformity with: σὺν τοῖς νόμοις, in conformity with the laws
(Xen. Mem. 4, 4?).
(c) Sometimes of Instrument like the dative alone: τὸ σῶμα γυμνα-
στέον σὺν πόνοις, the body must be exercised by toil (Xen. Mem. 2, 138).
(4) Sometimes of Manner ; προϊέναι σὺν κραυγῇ, to advance with a shout
(Xen. Anab. 1, 217).
2. In COMPOSITION, with, together, at the same time: civp-paxos,
συλ-λέγω, συν-άγω.
1860. ὑπέρ (Hom. also ὑπείρ; Lat. swper), over.
1. WirH GENITIVE.
(a) Of Place, also of Motion.
Ὁ ἥλιος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πορευόμενος, the sun journeying above us (Xen. Mem. 3,
8°). Ὑπὲρ τῆς κώμης γήλοφος ἦν, above the village was a hill (Xen. Anab. 1,
10"),
(6) In behalf of, for,.on account of.
Ὑπὲρ τῆς πόλεως ἀποθνήσκειν, to die for the state (Isoc. 4, 77). Πονεῖν ὑπὲρ
σοῦ, to toil in your behalf (Xen. Anab. 7, 85), Ὑπὲρ τῶν πρᾶγμάτων φοβοῦμαι,
I.am in fear on account of public affairs (Dem. 9, 20). .
1861 PREPOSITIONS 175
(c) Concerning = περί (mostly in the orators): τὴν ὑπὲρ τοῦ πολέμου
γνώμην ἔχοντας, having such an opinion about the war (Dem. 2, 1).
2. Wirn AccusaTIvE: over or beyond (of place or measure).
*Ewodépe τοῖς Θρᾳξὶ τοῖς ὑπὲρ Ἑλλήσποντον οἰκοῦσι, he waged war against the
Thracians living beyond the Hellespont (Xen. Anab. 1, 1°). Of ὑπὲρ ra
στρατεύσιμα ἔτη γεγονότες, those beyond the years of military service (Xen.
Cyr. 1, 33). Ὑπὲρ δύναμιν, beyond one’s strength (Dem. 21, 69).
3. IN COMPOSITION, over, beyond, excessively, for the sake of: ὑπερ-
βαίνω, ὑπέρ-μετρος, ὑπερ-αλγέω.
861. ὑπό (Hom. also ὑπαί; Lat. sub), wnder.
1, Wrrn GENITIVE.
(a) Of Place.
Ta ὑπὸ γῆς, the things under the earth (Plat. Apol. 18»). —Oceasionally from
under (mostly in poetry), (τούσδε) ὑπὸ χθονὸς ἧκε φόωσδε, them he sent to the
light from under the earth (Hes. Theogon. 669).—Also of musical accompani-
ment, as ὑπὸ σαλπίγγων, accompanied by trwmpets (Hdt. 1, 17°).
(δ) Of Cause.
Ὑπὸ λύπης, through grief (Xen. Cyr. 6, 1%). Ὑπὸ λιμοῦ, through hunger
(Xen. Anab. 1, 5°). Ὑπὸ τῆς ἡδονῆς, through joy.
(c) Of Agent with passive verbs.
Eriparo ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου, he was honowred by the people (Xen. Hell. 2, 3%),
᾿Απέθανεν ὑπὸ Νικάνδρου, he was slain by Nicander (Xen. Anab. 5, 1).
2. Wirx Dative, wnder.
Ὑπὸ τῷ τείχει, under the wall (Xen. Hell. 5,2"). Ὑπὸ τῇ ἀκροπόλει, under
the acropolis (Hdt. 6, 1054). Ὑπὸ βασιλεῖ ὄντες, being wnder (in the power
of) the king (Xen. Cyr. 8, 1°).
For ὑπό with dative as agent in poetry, see 1868.
3. Wrrx AccusaTIvE.
(a) Of Place, wnder (of motion towards).
᾿Απῆλθον ὑπὸ τὰ δένδρα, they went under the trees (Xen. Anab. 4, 78). Ὑπὸ
πόντον ἐδύσετο, he dived under the sea (Od. 4, 425). Πόλεις re καὶ ἔθνη
ἀνθρώπων id’ ἑαυτοὺς ποιεῖσθαι, to bring cities and races of men under their
dominion (Plat. Rep. 348*).
(b) Of Time, towards, occasionally at or during.
Ὑπὸ νύκτα, sub noctem, towards night (Thue. 1, 115°).
νύκτα, during the past night (Hdt. 9, 58%). ᾿
4. In COMPOSITION, under, by degrees, slightly, secretly: ὑπο-βαίνω,
ὑπο-στράτηγος, ὑπ-άγω, to advance by degrees or unnoticed ; ὑπο-πέμπω,
to send secretly.
Ὑπὸ τὴν παροιχομένην
176 PREPOSITIONS 1862
IMPROPER PREPOSITIONS
WITH THE GENITIVE
1862. 1. ἄχρι and μέχρι, wntil, as far as.
Μέχρι τοῦ Μηδίᾶς τείχους, as far as the wall of Media (Xen. Anab. 1, 7).
"Axpt τῆς τελευτῆς, until the end (Dem. 18, 179).
2. ἄνευ, without, apart from.
"Avev πλοίων, without boats (Xen. Anab. 2, 2°). “Avev rod καλὴν δόξαν
ἐνεγκεῖν, apart from (in addition to) bringing good reputation (Dem. 18, 89).
3. πλήν, except: πλὴν Διός, except Zeus (Aesch. Pro. 50). Πλήν
may also be a conjunction and be followed by some other case; as
Xen. Hier. 1,18. See 2131, 2234 and 2371.
4, ἕνεκα or ἕνεκεν (Ionic εἵνεκα or εἵνεκεν), on account of, for the sake
of, as regards, generally placed after the noun. :
Τίνος ἕνεκεν ; on account of what? (Xen. Anab. 2, 330), Δένδρα θεραπεύειν
τοῦ καρποῦ ἕνεκεν, to raise trees for the sake of the fruit (Xen. Mem. 2, 47).
᾿Ασφαλῶς ἔζων ἕνεκά ye τῶν συκοφάντων, he lived in safety as far as the
sycophants were concerned (Isoc. 15, 163).—The dramatists also have οὕνεκα.
5. Examples of other improper prepositions of frequent use :-—
Εῤθὺ Λυκείου, straight towards the Lycewm (Plat. Lys. 203*).—Ey yids
ἀγαθοῦ, near the good (Men. Mon. 400); in the sense of related to, akin, it
takes the dative, as ἐγγύτερον τῷ θανάτῳ, more akin to death (Xen. Cyr.
_8, 73).--Πλησίον τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου, near the prison (Plat. Phaedo, 59°); in
poetry seldom with the dative.—Meraév σοφίᾶς καὶ ἀμαθίας, between wisdom
and ignorance (Plat. Symp. 202*).—Qv ἐντός, inside of which (Thue. 1,
46°).—"Ex rds τῶν ὅρων, outside of the boundaries (Plat. Leg. 8043).---Ἑ ἴσω
τοῦ ἐρύματος ἐλθεῖν, to go within the fortification (Xen. Hier. 2, 10).—Exapour
ἔξω τοῦ τείχους, they came without the wall (Thuc. 3, 22%).—Evavrioyr
πολλῶν, in the presence of (before) many (Xen. Mem. 2, Ὁ). -Πρόσθεν
τοῦ στρατοπέδου, in front of the camp (Xen. Hell. 4, 1”); so ἔμπροσθεν
(Plat. Prot. 8404).---Καταντικρὺ Κυθήρων, opposite Cythera (Thue. 7, 26%).
-ΞὍπισθεν τοῦ στρατοπέδου, behind the camp (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3%); so
κάτοπιν (Plat. Gorg. 547*).—"AvawOev κεφαλῆς, above the head (Xen. Eques.
5, 4).--ἰαμφωτέρωθεν τῆς ὁδοῦ, on both sides of the road (Xen. Hell, 5,
2°).—ExarépwOev αὐτοῦ, on each side of it (Thuc. 7, 785).--Ἔν θεν καὶ
ἔν θεν τῆς ὁδοῦ, on this side and that of the way (Xem Cyr. 8, 3°).—Ilépar
τοῦ ποταμοῦ, across (on the other side of) the river (Thuc. 6, 1015).--ἰὰ ν τ -
πέρᾶς Ἤλιδος, over against Elis (Thuc. 2, 661); so ἀντιπέρᾶν and
καταντιπέρας, over against (Xen. Anab. 1, 153). -Πέρα or πέρᾳ,
further than, beyond: πέρᾳ τοῦ μετρίου, beyond measure (Dem. 14, 35).—
.
eS eS ea a ey
1867 THE VERB 177
Πόρρω and πρόσω, far into, advanced, far from: πόρρω τοῦ βίου,
advanced in life (Plat. Apol. 38°); πρόσω τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου, far from the
Hellespont (Hdt. 5, 13*).—X @ pis, without, apart from: χωρὶς rod σώματος,
apart from the body (Plat. Phaedo 66°).
"Arep (poetic) = ἄνευ (Il. 15, 292).
Ad@pa or λάθρα, secretly, without the knowledge of: λάθρᾳ τῶν
στρατιωτῶν, without the hnowledge of the soldiers (Xen. Anab. 1, 3°); so
κρύφα (as Thuc. 1, 138°).—Xadpiv (acc. of χάρις), for the sake of, on
account of: πατρὸς χάριν, for his father’s sake. Similarly δίκην (acc. of
δίκη), after the manner of, like: δίκην κρατῆρος, like a bowl (Plat. Leg. 773%).
These two are really adverbial accusatives.—There are a number of other
similar adverbs used, like prepositions, with the genitive.
WITH THE DATIVE
1863. ἅμα, ὁμοῦ, and ἐφεξῆς, see 1771. Ἐφεξῆς is occasionally found
with the genitive, as in Plat. Tim. 55°; similarly ἑξῆς (Plat. Cratyl.
399°; gen. Ar. Ran. 765).
WITH THE ACCUSATIVE
1864. ds, to, used only with the accusative of a person, like πρός or
eis. Πορεύεται ὡς βασιλέᾷ, he goes to the king (Xen. Anab. 1, 24), Πέμψουσιν
ὡς αὐτοὺς πρέσβεις, they will send ambassadors to them (Thuc. 1, 905).
ADVERBS
1865. As in English, adverbs relate to verbs, adjectives, or other
adverbs.—For adverbs used as attributes, see 1265.—For adverbs
governing the genitive, see 1725—1728; the dative, see 1771.—For
adverbs used prepositionally, see the Improper Prepositions, 1862.—
For adjectives used where the English uses adverbs, see 1317—1321.
THE VERB
THE VOICES
ACTIVE
1866. The active voice simply represents the subject as acting ;
as ὁ παῖς τρέχει, the boy runs ; γράφω, I write.
1867. 1. The active of some verbs is used transitively as well as
intransitively. “
178 VOICES . 1868
᾿Ελαύνω, tr. to drive, intr. to ride, to march ;—aipw, to raise, intr,
to set out, to depart ;—éyw, to have, to hold, intr. to steer towards a
place ; ἔχε (δή), stop now ; with an adverb, ἔχει = to be, as καλῶς or εὖ
ἔχει, it is well, Lat. bene se habet ;—ayw, to lead, intr. to advance ;—
mpatrw, to do, intr. (εὖ, κακῶς), to do (well, badly) ;----τελευτάω, to end,
intr. to die ;---ἐκλείπω, to abandon, intr. to cease ;---ἀπαγορεύω, to forbid,
intr. to grow weary ;---καταλύω, to dissolve, to destroy, intr. to halt.—
The original object can often be easily supplied.
2. The intransitive meaning sometimes belongs only to certain
tenses. See Mixture of Transitive and Intransitive Meanings, in Part
II. of the Grammar.
3. Some transitive verbs are used intransitively only in certain
compounds.
| Pépw, to bear, to carry, διαφέρω, to differ ;---- βάλλω, to throw, pera-
βάλλω, to become changed, εἰσβάλλω and ἐμβάλλω, to make an incursion,
to empty (of rivers), προσβάλλω, to advance against ;—inu, to send,
ἀνίημι, to relax, to give over ;---δίδωμι, to give, ἐπιδίδωμι, to improve, to
make progress, ἐνδίδωμι, to give in, to give way ;—piyvim, to mia,
προσ-, συμμίγνῦμι, to meet with, to encounter.
4. Some. intransitive verbs become transitive in composition; see
1585.
5. For the active of some verbs used as passive to others, see 1888.
6. The active sometimes has causative meaning. Κῦρος ἐξέκοψε τὸν
παράδεισον, Cyrus had the park destroyed (Xen, Anab, 1, 4").
MIDDLE
1868. The middle voice represents the subject as acting upon
himself, or with some regard or concern to himself.
1869. Direct Middie.—In the direct middle, the subject is
represented as acting directly on himself. This use of the middle
is confined only to certain verbs, mostly such as denote an action
performed on one’s own body.
Such verbs are: Aovoua, to wash one’s self ; ἀλείφομαι, χρίομαι, to
anoint one’s self ; γυμνάζομαι, to exercise one’s self ; ἀπάγχομαι, to hang
on.’s self; κείρομαι, to cut one’s hair; κοσμέομαι, to deck one’s self ;
στεφανόομαι, to crown one’s self ; καλύπτομαι, to cover one’s self ; τύπτο-
μαι, κόπτομαι, to beat one’s self (esp. for grief); τρέπομαι, to turn one’s
“4
πα τὰν» ὙΥ
1874 : VOICES 179
self ; ἀπέχομαι, to restrain one’s self ; ἵσταμαι, to set one’s self ; τάσσο-
μαι, to draw one’s self up in the ranks; ἐπιδείκνυμαι, to show one’s
self ; παρα-, συ-σκευάζομαι, to prepare one’s self.—So γεύω, to let (any
one) taste, γεύομαι, to let one’s self taste, to tasté ;----παύω, to stop;
παύομαι, to stop one’s self, to cease.
1870. Nore —The direct middle may have causative meaning ; as
ἐκέλευον ἀπογράφεσθαι πάντας, he ordered all to have their names written
down (Xen. Hell. 2, 4°),
1871. Norz.—1l. Ordinarily the reflexive action is expressed by
the active with a reflexive pronoun; as ἐκεῖνος ἀπέσφαξεν ἑαυτόν, he
killed himself (Dem. 9, 62). Plat. Apol. 33”.
2. For the sake of clearness, the reflexive pronoun is sometimes
added to the middle; as ἑαυτὸν ἀποσφάξασθαι, (some say) that he slew
himself (Xen. Anab, 1, 8).
1872. Indirect Middle.—The middle is most frequently used to
express an action performed for one’s self, or with regard to one's
self, or on something belonging to one's self.
Thus peraréuropai twa, I seni for some one to come to me: ἀπ᾽-
πέμπομαί twa, I send some one away from me; προβάλλομαι τὴν ἀσπίδα,
I throw before me a shield for protection ; apivopa πολέμιον, I ward
off an enemy from me; κλαίομαι τὰ πάθη, I bewail my sorrows ; ἵσταμαι,
I set wp for myself ; εὑρίσκομαι, I find for myself, procure ; καταλέγεσθαι,
to pick out for one’s self ; τίθεσθαι τὴν ψῆφον, to give one’s vote ; τρέπε-
σθαι τοὺς πολεμίους, to turn the enemy from one’s self ; ἀποφαίνομαι τὴν
γνώμην, I exp ess my opinion ; ἀπο-, ἐπιδείκνυμαι τὴν παιδείᾶν, I show
my education ; ποιέομαί twa φίλον, I make some one my friend ; ἄγεσθαι
γυναῖκα, to take a wife,
1873. Norse.—The indirect middle sometimes has causative mean-
᾿Ἐγὼ γάρ σε ταῦτα ἐδιδαξάμην, for I had you taught these things (Xen.
Oyr. 1, 6). Τράπεζαν Περσικὴν παρετίθετο, he had a Persian table set for
him (Thue. 1, 130"). Ποιήσασθαι χιθῶνα ἣ πρίασθαι, to have a coat made or
to purchase one (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3").
1874. Norz.—In contrasts, the reflexive pronoun is added to the
indirect middle for clearness; as τί τὴν πόλιν, Αἰσχίνη, προσῆκε ποῖειν,
ἀρχὴν καὶ τυραννίδα τῶν Ἑλλήνων ὁρῶσαν ἑαυτῷ κατασκευαζόμενον
180 VOICES 1875
Φίλιππον ; what, Aeschines, should the commonwealth have done when
she saw Philip preparing for himself empire and tyranny over Greeks ?
(Dem. 18, 66). .
1875. Norr.—The middle may have reciprocal meaning when the
subject is in the plural; as τὴν ἀφανῆ οὐσίᾶν ἐνείμαντο οἱ ἀδελφοί, the
brothers divided the personal property among themselves (Lys. 32, 4).
1876. Subjective or Dynamic Middle.—The Middle sometimes
denotes an action performed with one’s own powers or means.
Παρέχω, I furnish, παρέχομαι, I furnish from my own means ;—
λύω, I lose, λύομαι, I ransom with my money ;---συμβάλλομαι, I con-
tribute from my own ;—AapBavew, to take, λαμβάνεσθαι and ἐπιλαμ-
βάνεσθαί τινος, to grasp, to take hold of anything ;—Oiew, to sacrifice,
θύεσθαι, to take the auspices ;---σκοπεῖν, to view, σκοπεῖσθαι, to look at
closely, to examine ;----ἐκδίδωμι, I give out, ἐκδίδομαι θυγατέρα, I give
away a daughter in marriage ;--ττπόλεμον ποιεῖν, to cause a war (as &
third party), πόλεμον ποιεῖσθαι, to carry on a war ; 80 ἀπολογίᾶν, δεῖπνον,
εὐχὴν, ἐπιμέλειαν, ποιεῖσθαι.
1877. ΝΟΤΕ.---ΤῊὴθ passive to the subjective middle ποιεῖσθαι is
γίγνεσθαι; aS ὅλην τὴν ἡμέρᾶν ἡ ἀνάβασις αὐτοῖς ἐγένετο, the going-up
lasted the whole day (Xen. Anab. 4, 110).
1878. Norr.—Some intransitive verbs have a dynamic middle:
στρατεύω, to undertake an expedition, of the general (Xen. Anab. 2,
14), στρατεύομαι, to perform military service, to serve, of the soldier
(Xen. Anab. 3, 119) ;---πολϊτεύειν, to be a citizen (Xen. Anab. 3, 27°),
πολιτεύεσθαι, to perform the duties of a citizen, to take part im the
government (Xen. Cyr. 1, 1');—apeoBevew, to be ambassador (Xen.
Anab. 7, 2”), πρεσβεύεσθαι, to negotiate as ambassador, also (of the
state) to negotiate through ambassadors (Thuc. 1, 677) ;---ῸΑ βουλεύω, to
take counsel, to be counsellor (Xen. Mem. 1, 118), βουλεύεσθαι, to take
one’s counsel, to form plans.
1879. Some verbs acquire, in the middle, meanings quite
different from those of the active. The following are especially
important from their frequency :—
Aipéw, to take, αἱρέομαι, to choose = to take for myself ;----ἀποδίδωμι,,
to give back, ἀποδίδομαι, to sell = to give away for one’s interest ;—
ἅπτω, to fasten, ἅπτομαί twos, to cling to = to fasten one’s self to, to
i i Ν
C20 πὸ joo SI! Fe
..
1882 VOICES 181
engage in ;—dpxw, to rule, to begin, without regard to continuation of
the action which another may take up (Xen. Anab. 1, 6°), ἄρχομαι, to
begin one’s own work, or for one’s self (Xen. Anab. 3, 2°) ;—yapéw
twa, to marry (of the man), γαμέομαί τινι, to marry (of the woman),
γαμέομαι θυγατέρα τινί, to give a daughter in marriage to any one (of
ἃ parent) ;—ypadew νόμους, to write or to propose laws, γράφεσθαί
νόμους, to pass laws (of the people), γράφεσθαί τινα, to indict, to bring
a law-suit against any one = to write any one down in a document of
prosecution ;—daveifw, to lend, δανείζομαι, to borrow = to have another
lend to one ;---δικάζω, to gudge, to pronounce decision, δικάζομαι, to go
to law, to plead ;—éxw, to have, to hold, ἔχομαί twos, to hold on to
anything, to be close to, or to border on ;---λανθάνω, to lie hid, ἐπιλαν-
θάνομαί twos, to forget ;----μισθόω, to let out for hire, μισθόομαι, to hire =
to have another let to one ;---περαιόω, to convey over, περαιόομαι, to go
across ;---στέλλω, to send, στέλλομαι, to set out, to travel ;—ripwpéw τινί,
to avenge α person, tipwpéopai τινα, to avenge one’s self on a person, to
punish ;—doBéw twa, to frighten any one, φοβέομαί τινα, to fear any
one ;—rivw, to pay a penalty or debt, τίνομαι, to make another pay, to
avenge one’s self on, to punish ;---φυλάττω twa, to guard any one,
φυλάττομαί twa, to be on guard against any one.
1880. 1. In many cases the middle or active may be employed ©
indifferently ; the reflex action being sufficiently clear, the active will
often answer quite as well; as Παφλαγόνας ξυμμάχους ποιήσεσθε....
φίλον ποιήσομεν τὸν Παφλαγόνα, you will make the Paphlagonians
allies,....we will make the Paphlagonian a friend (Xen. Anab. 5, 5**).—
In some verbs the use of the middle form is poetic, mostly epic.
2. For passive deponents, see Part II. of the Grammar.—For the
future middle used passively, see Part II. of the Grammar.
PASSIVE
1881. The passive voice represents the subject as acted upon;
as φιλοῦμαι, I am loved ; ὁ παῖς τύπτεται, the boy is struck.
1882. 1. The direct object of the active verb becomes the
subject of the passive.
2. A personal passive can also be formed from verbs which govern
a genitive or dative; the indirect object (genitive or dative) here
182 VOICES 1882
becomes the subject of the passive. In this way a personal passive
can be formed from dpyw, to rule, καταφρονέω, to despise, καταγελάω, to
laugh at, ἀμελέω, to neglect, which verbs govern an object-genitive ;
πιστεύω, to trust, ἀπιστέω, to distrust, φθονέω, to envy, ἐπιβουλεύω, to
plot against, ἀπειλέω, to threaten, ἐγκαλέω, to censure, πολεμέω, to war
against, these governing the dative.
Ὑπὸ δούλου ἄρχεσθαι, to be ruled by a slave (Plat. Lys. 208°). “Qpa
βουλεύεσθαι,...μὴ καταφρονηθῶμεν, it is time to deliberate lest we be
despised (Xen. Anab. 5,7"). Πιστεύεσθαι ὑπὸ τῆς πατρίδος, to be trusted
by one’s country (Xen. Symp. 4, 29). Φθονηθεὶς ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾿Οδυσσέως,
envied by Odysseus (Xen. Mem. 4, 333), ‘Yn’ ᾿Αθηναίων ἐπιβουλευόμεθα,
we are conspired against by the Athenians (Thue. 1, 82"). Οὐκέτι ἀπειλοῦμαι,
I am no longer threatened (Xen. Symp. 4, 31). Οὐκ εἰκότως πολεμοῦνται,
they are not rightly warred against (Thue. 1, 37").
3. When the active has two objects, a dative of the person and an
accusative of the thing, the accusative of the thing generally. remains
and the dative becomes the nominative of the passive.
Οἱ ἐπιτετραμμένοι τὴν φυλακή ν (actively ἐπιτρέπειν τούτοις τὴν φυλακήν),
those entrusted with the quard (Thuc. 1, 126"), Αλλο τι μεῖξον εὐθὺς
ἐπιταχθήσεσθε (actively ἐπιτάττειν ὑμῖν ἄλλο τι μεῖζον), you will straightway
have some other greater command imposed upon you (Thuc. 1, 1409).---Βαῦ
sometimes the dative is retained and the accusative of the thing becomes the
nominative ; as πρᾶγμα δεινὸν...ὃ τοῖς θεοῖς ἅπᾶσιν ἐπιβουλεύεται, a terrible
thing which is being plotted against all the gods (Ar. Pax 403).
4, With verbs governing a double object-accusative, the accusative
of the thing remains, the accusative of the person becomes the
nominative of the passive. See 1608.
5. When the active has a part of a person as its object-accusative,
the passive may have the person as the subject, and the part remains
in the accusative.
᾿Αποτμηθέντες τὰς κεφαλᾶς, having had their heads cut off (Xen. Anab. 2,
6"); this accusative thus becomes an accusative of specification.—Actively
τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ἀπέτεμε τὴν κεφαλήν (Xen. Anab. 3, 117), which could become
ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἀπετμήθη τὴν κεφαλήν.
6. With verbs governing an object-accusative and ἃ cognate-
accusative, the cognate-accusative remains and the object-accusative
becomes the nominative of the passive. See 1617.
7. A cognate-accusative is sometimes found as the subject of a
passive. ‘O κίνδῦνος κινδυνεύεται (actively τὸν κίνδῦνον κινδῦνεύειν), the risk
is run (Plat. Lach, 187°). Etriynra (Thue. 7, 775).
1888 VOICES | 183
8. In this way passive neuter participles from intransitive verbs
are used substantively.
Ta σοὶ κἀμοὶ BeBiopéva, the lives led by you and by me (Dem. 28, 265).
Μικρὰ ἁμαρτηθέντα, small errors (Xen. Anab. 5, 8”). Ai τῶν πεπολιτευμένων
εὔθῦναι, the accounts of their public acts (Dem. 1, 28). Ta ἠσεβημένα, the
acts of impiety committed (Lys. 6, 5). Ta xevdvvevOévra, the risks which
were run (Lys. 2, 54). Ta δυστυχηθέντα, the misfortunes suffered (Lys. 2,
70).
1888. Norz.—An impersonal passive from intransitive verbs, like
the Latin itwr, curritur, ventum est, does not occur in Greek.
1884. In changing from the active construction to the passive, the
subject of the active, if a person, is usually expressed by ὑπό with the
genitive (1861, 1(c)); if the subject is a thing, it is put in the dative.
1885. Norre.—For the dative of personal agent, especially with
the perfect and pluperfect, see 1800.—For the agent expressed by
παρά with the genitive, see 1855 1(b); by ἀπό or ἐξ with the genitive,
see 1847, 1(6) and 1851, 1(c) ; by zpos with the genitive, see 1858, 1(e).
—For the agent with verbals, see 2818,
1886. Norr.—In poetry the agent is often expressed Ὁ
by ὑπό with the dative.
᾿Ἐφόβηθεν ὑφ᾽ Ἕκτορι, they were put to flight by Hector
(1. 15, 637).—In Attic prose this occurs only with verbs
meaning to bring up or to educate; as ὑπὸ παιδοτρίβῃ ἀγαθῷ
πεπαιδευμένος, having been educated wnder a good master
(Plat. Lach. 184°).
1887. For future-middle with passive meaning, for deponents
with passive meaning, for passive aorists with reflexive or middle
meaning (middle passives), see Part II. of the Grammar (Irregularities
of Meaning).
1888. 1. Some intransitive active (or middle) verbs serve as
passives to some other verbs and are construed as such (with ὑπό).
_ 2. These are especially important: εὖ πάσχω (lit. “to suffer well’),
to be treated well, passive to εὖ ποιῶ ;----εὖ ἀκούω, poet. εὖ κλύω (lit. “ to
hear well”’), to be praised or to be well spoken of, passive of εὖ λέγω ----
ἐκπίπτω (‘to fall out’’), to be cast out, expelled, passive to ἐκβάλλω ;—
φεύγω (“to flee’), to be banished or to be prosecuted, passive to διώκω ;
--ἀποφεύγω, to be acquitted, passive to ἀπολύω ;---ἁλίσκομαι, to be
184 TENSES 1889
captured, passive to aipéw ;---ἀποθνήσκω (“ to die’’), to be killed, passive
to ἀποκτείνω ;---δίκην δίδωμι (‘to give satisfaction”), to be punished,
passive to ζημιόω.
Ed παθόντες tr αὐτῶν, having been well treated by them (Plat. ont
519°). Κακῶς ἀκούειν ὑπὸ τῶν πολιτῶν, to be ill spoken of by the citizens
(Isoc. 6, 41). ᾿Αλκμαιονίδᾶς φᾶσιν ὑπὸ τῶν τυράννων ἐκπεσεῖν, they say
that the Alemaeonidae were expelled by tyrants (Dem. 21, 144). ᾿Ασεβείᾶς
φεύγω ὑπὸ Μελήτου, I am prosecuted for impiety by Meletus (Plat. Apol.
904). ᾿Απέθανεν ὑπὸ Νικάνδρου, he was slain by Nicander (Xen. Anab.
5, 1). ‘Ym αὐτῶν τούτων δίκην ἐδίδοσαν, by these very ones they were
punished (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6*).
1889. Norz.—The passive to τίκτω, to bring forth, to bear, is
γίγνομαι ἐκ (Xen. Hell. 6, 4°°),—The passive to τέθεικα, I have placed,
is often κεῖμαι, to lie (Isoc. 1, 36).—For λαγχάνω as passive to κληρόω,
to choose by lot, see 1614.
1890. Norr.—There is some tendency also to use an active verb
like ἔχω or τυγχάνω or λαμβάνω with an object, instead of a passive.
Πολλὴν τὴν airiayv εἶχον ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιώτων, they were severely blamed
by the soldiers (Thuc. 6, 46°). Τοσαύτης ἔτυχε tipwpias ὑπὸ θεῶν, he
obtained so much honour from the gods (Xen. Ven. 1, 11. πληγὰς
λαβὼν ὑπ᾽ ἄλλου, receiving blows from another (Xen. Rep. Lac. 6, 2).
‘THE TENSES
1891. 1. In English the tenses simply express the time of an
action. In Greek the tenses not only express the time when an
action takes place, but they also qualify the action as being in progress
or goimg on, as simply taking place or occurring, or as actually com-
pleted.
2. The distinction of time always occurs with the indicative mood,
and somewhat in the other moods and in the participle. The quali-
fication of the action as going on or taking place or actually completed,
belongs to all the moods and to the participle.
1892. 1. The aorist and future express the action of the verb as
simply taking place or performed ; the present and imperfect as going
on ; the perfect, pluperfect, and future-perfect as completed.
2. It is often difficult to render in English the different shades of
meaning denoted by this three-fold character of the action; but the
following examples will make this distinction clear :—
EE —
1893
Aorist.
ποιῆσαι, to do.
φυγεῖν, to take to flight,
to flee, to be banished.
ἀποθανεῖν, to die.
γνῶναι, to form an opin-
ion, to decide upon.
ἀνθῆσαι, to blossom forth.
φοβηθῆναι, to take fright.
xekodetes, to get, to ac-
quire.
κληθῆναι, to get a name.
“πεῖσαι, to prevail upon,
to persuade success-
_ fully.
πιστεῦσαι, to put faith
in.
θαυμάσαι, to be struck
with wonder.
TENSES
Present.
ποιεῖν, to be occupied
with, to be in the act
of doing
φεύγειν, fe ‘be in Hight,
to be in exile.
ἀποθνήσκειν, to be dying.
γιγνώσκειν, to get to
know, to gain know-
ledge of.
ἀνθεῖν, to bloom.
φοβεῖσθαι, to fear, to be
afraid.
κτᾶσθαι, to be getting.
καλεῖσθαι, to be called.
πείθειν. to be persuading,
to talk over.
'πιστεύειν, to trust.
θαυμάζειν, to wonder at,
to admire.
185
Perfect.
πεποιηκέναι, to be done
with anything.
πεφευγέναι, to be in safe-
ty, to have escaped.
τεθνηκέναι, to be dead.
ἐγνωκέναι, to know, to
be aware of.
ἠνθηκέναι, to be in blos-
som.
πεφοβῆσθαι, to be in
terror.
κεκτῆσθαι, to possess, to
have acquired.
κεκλῆσθαι, to have a
name, to be called.
πέπεισμαι, I am per-
ed, I believe.
πεπιστευκέναι, to have a
fixed confidence.
τεθαυμακέναι, to be ina
state of wonder or
admiration.
4893. 1. The three-fold character of the time is shown in the
following table :— ,
PRESENT TIME. Past Time. Fourure Time.
ACTION TAKING PLACE. Aorist. Future.
ἀπέθανε, he ἀποθανεῖται, he
died, will die.
ἔγραψα, I wrote. γράφω, I shall
write,
ACTION GOING ON. Present. Imperfect.
gi ah he | ἀπέθνῃσκε, he
is dyi was dying.
cing t am | ἔγραφον, I was
writing.
ACTION COMPLETED. Perfect. Pluperfect. Future-perfect.
τέθνηκε, he is ἐτεθνήκει, he was | τεθνήξει, he will
dead, he has dead, he had be dead, he
died. died. will have died.
γέγραφα, I have ἐγεγράφη, Thad | γεγράψεται, it
written. written. will be written.
186 TENSES 1894.
2. We should expect special forms to express an action simply
taking place in the present, and an action going on in the future.
But the former is hardly ever required; and the simple future will
answer for the second, as ἀπθανεῖται, he will be dying, γράψω, I shall
be writing.—For the (gnomic) aorist, the present, and the perfect to
denote a general truth, see 1914, 1899, 1933.
TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE
PRESENT
1894, The present tense denotes an action going on now:
γράφω, I write or I am writing.
1895. Historical Present.—1. In lively narrative the present is
often used for the aorist, and interchanged with past tenses.
Αἱ δὲ τριάκοντα vies τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἀφικνοῦνται ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ Θράκης,
the thirty ships arrived at the towns lying towards Thrace (Thue. 1, 59").
Adpeiov καὶ Παρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο, of Darius and Parysatis are
born two sons (Xen. Anab. 1, 1’).
2. The historical present is absent from Homer. It is
often found in tragedy, sometimes in a rather unusual
way; as Soph. El. 99.
_ 1896. Present for Futwre.—The present is sometimes used for the
future, as in English. The future action is thus conceived as already
present.
Ἐπί ye τούτους ἐγὼ αὐτὸς παρέρχομαι, I am going to those myself (Xen.
Cyr. 7, 1%); so Dem. 19, 32; Thuc. 6, 91°.—The verb εἶμι has this future
sense, am about to go, quite regularly in Attic and Ionic prose in the indicative ; —
the infinitive and participle may also have present meaning. In Homer eiye |
sometimes has present signification.
1897. Present of Attempted Action.—The present is sometimes -
used to express an attempted action.
Ta θηρία δίδωμί σοι, I offer you the animals (Xen. Cyr. 1, 34). Πεί-
θουσιν ὑμᾶς, they are trying to persuade you (Isoc. 6, 12). Τοὺς per
Λακεδαιμονίους ἀν αἱρεῖ, ods δ᾽ ἀπώλεσαν Φωκέᾶς, viv σᾧ ζει, the Lacedae-
monians he is trying to overthrow, and the Phocians whom he destroyed he is
now trying to preserve (Dem. 6, 15); so with the infinitive (as διδόναι, Dem.
18, 103), and the participle (as διδόντες, Thuc. 4, 19').—For the corresponding
use of the imperfect, see 1907.
1902 TENSES 187
1898. Present of Customary Action.—The present is often used to
denote an action which is habitual or repeated.
Οὗτος μὲν yap ὕδωρ, ἐγὼ δ᾽ οἶνον πίνω, he drinks water, but I wine (Dem.
19, 46).—For the corresponding imperfect of customary action, see 1908.
1899. Present in General Truths.—The present is used to express
a general truth.
Τίκτει κόρος ὕβριν, satiety breeds insolence (Theog. 153).—For a similar
use of aorist (gnomic) and the perfect, see 1914 and 1933.
1900. Present with Force of Perfect—1. Some presents may
denote an action already begun, and continuing in the present time.
A present so used is practically equivalent to a perfect.
_ So especially νϊκάω, I am victorious = I have conquered (lit. I
conquer) ; ἡττάομαι, I am beaten = I have been beaten; ἀδικέω, I do
wrong = I have done wrong ; ἀκούω and πυνθάνομαι, I hear = I have
heard ; γιγνώσκω, I know = I have found out; διώκω or γράφομαι
αὐτόν, I am prosecuting him = I have brought an action against him ;
φεύγω, I have been banished or I have been accused.—For the cor-
responding use of the imperfect with the force of a pluperfect, see
1909.
2. The presents ἥκω, I am come, and οἴχομαι, I am gone, always
have perfect meaning. Their imperfects ἧκον and ὠχόμην serve as
pluperfects or (usually) as aorists.
3. An adverb or expression of past time joined to the present
gives it the force of a continued perfect action prolonged into present
time. In prose, πάλαι, of old, long ago, is chiefly so used. Thus:
οὗτος πάλαι λέγει, he has long been saying (Plat. Meno 91°; Gorg. 489°).
—The imperfect here may be used as the pluperfect (Xen. Oec. 19,
ys
IMPERFECT
1901. The imperfect denotes an action going on in past time:
ἔγραφον, I was writing.
1902. Norz.—1. Some actions are preferably regarded as going on
rather than as fully past. So in narrative, the imperfect is often used
in speaking of actions fully past; sometimes imperfects and aorists
being used alongside each other. This use of the imperfect is
especially frequent with verbs of going (running, hastening) and
188 TENSES 1908
sending ; with verbs of saying and asking, the imperfect and aorist
are used in narrative without any difference; the imperfect of φημί
usually has aoristic meaning, as also the infinitive φάναι in indirect
discourse. Ἔλεγεν ὅτι, he said that (Xen. Anab. 1, 4"). Ἢρ ὠτᾶ, ri
πάθοιεν, he asked what had happened to them (Xen. Cyr. 2, 3395).
2. In Homer this use of the imperfect occurs also with
other verbs; as βάλλετο and βάλετο (Il. 2, 43 and 45) ;
λίπε and λεῖπε (Il, 2, 106 and 107), δῶκε and δίδου (II.
7, 303 and 305).
1903. ΝΟΤΕ.---Ἰ. In narrative the imperfect is often used to
describe the gradual development of an action; frequently such an
imperfect can be rendered by began or proceeded to.
᾿Εποιήσαντο τὴν συμμαχίᾶν, τοῦ χειμῶνος τελευτῶντος ἤδη καὶ πρὸς ἔαρ καὶ
τὸ Πάνακτον καθῃρεῖτο, they concluded the alliance when the winter was
now closing towards spring, and Panactum immediately began to be destroyed
(Thue. 5, 39%).
2. Similarly an action performed by a number of persons, but not
simultaneously, is usually expressed by the imperfect; see Xen.
Anab, 4, 7 ὲ 5, 4°26; 5, 82,
1904. Nore.—(a) An action which was going on at the same time
or before some other past action took place, is expressed by the
imperfect.
Ἐπεὶ δὲ ἠσθένει Δαρεῖος καὶ ὑπώπτευε τελευτὴν τοῦ βίου, ἐβούλετο
τὼ παῖδε ἀμφοτέρω παρεῖναι, when Darius was sick and suspected the end of
his life near, he wanted both of his sons to be present (Xen. Anab. 1, 1).
Ξενίας ὁ ᾿Αρκὰς τὰ Λύκαια ἔθῦσε καὶ ἀγῶνα €6nxe.....e0eaper δὲ τὸν ἀγῶνα καὶ
Κῦρος, Xenias the Arcadian celebrated the Lycaean sacrifices and held public
games....Cyrus was a spectator at the games (Xen. Anab. 1, 2”). Ἐπεὶ εἶδον —
αὐτὸν οἵπερ πρόσθεν προσεκύνουν, καὶ τότε προσεκύνησαν, when those
saw him who had previously been used to bow to him, they bowed before him
then also (Xen. Anab. 1, 6").
(b) So we often find the imperfect for the present in geographical
expressions, with reference to the time of the narrative.
᾿Αφίκοντο ἐπὶ τὸν ποταμόν, ds Spice (for ὁρίζει) τήν τε τῶν Μακρώνων
χώρᾶν καὶ τὴν τῶν Σκυθινῶν, they arrived at the river which separates the
territory of the Macrones from that of the Scythini (Xen. Anab. 4, 8").
1905. Norr.—The imperfect is sometimes found instead of the
present to denote that the truth of a present statement was not
formerly recognised, but is now admitted. .
eee a es Δὲ
a ci i rl
i δυγρϑδοφῤ το"
1908 TENSES 189
Οὐ τοῦτ᾽ ἦν εὐδαιμονίᾶ,... κακοῦ ἀπαλλαγή, this thing—deliverance from
evil—is not happiness, as we formerly imagined (Plat. Gorg. 478°). Οὐκ ἄρ᾽
ἀγαθὸς τὰ πολϊῖτικὰ Περικλῆς ἦν ἐκ τούτου τοῦ λόγου, then according to this
view, Pericles was not a good statesman (Plat. Gorg. 516°).
1906. Norr.—For imperfects like ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, εἰκὸς ἦν, etc., denoting
obligation or possibility, and referring to present time, see 2105—2108.
1907. Imperfect of Attempted Action.—Corresponding to the pre-
sent of attempted action (1897) is the imperfect of attempted action.
Νέων ἔπειθεν αὐτοὺς ἀποτρέπεσθαι οἱ δὲ οὐχ ὑπήκουον, Neon tried to
persuade them to turn back, but they did not heed him (Xen. Anab. 7, 37).
Κλέαρχος τοὺς αὑτοῦ στρατιώτᾶς ἐβιάζετο οἱ δὲ αὐτὸν ἔβαλλον, Clearchus
tried to force his soldiers to march, but they began to stone him (Xen. Anab.
1, 3’). ‘Piyee ἀπωλλύμεθα, we were in danger of perishing (= we were
perishing) from cold (Xen. Anab. 5, 87). ᾿Αλόννησον ἐδίδου, he offered
(tried to give) Halonnesus (Aeschin. 3, 83). ὋὉμήρους οὐκ ἐδίδοσαν, they
were not willing to give (= tried not to give) hostages (Xen. Anab. 6, 39).
1908. Imperfect (and Aorist) of Customary Action.—1. Corre-
sponding to the present of customary action (1898) is the imperfect
of customary action.
Σωκράτης ὥσπερ ἐγίγνωσκεν, οὕτως ἔλεγεν, as Socrates thought, so he
used to speak (Xen. Mem. 1, 1*).—Compare below a similar use of the aorist
with πολλάκις.
2. The imperfect of customary action with the particle ἄν denotes
that the action used to take place under certain circumstances.
᾿Αναλαμβάνων αὐτῶν τὰ ποιήματα διηρώτων ἂν αὐτούς, τί λέγοιεν,
taking up their poems, I would often ask them (or I used to ask them) what
they meant (Plat. Apol. 22).—For a similar aorist with ἄν, see below.
This use of the imperfect with ἄν must be particularly distinguished
from the apodosis with ἄν in conditional clauses (2102, 2113).
3. The repeated occurrence of a single act is expressed by the
aorist with πολλάκις. Σὺν γέλωτι πολλάκις ἠπείλησε κρεμᾶν αὐτούς,
with laughter he often threatened to hang them (Plutarch, Caesar 3).
4. The aorist indicative with dv is used of customary actions like
the imperfect with dv, to express what used to take place under
certain conditions.
Πολλάκις ἠκούσαμεν ἄν... ὑμᾶς, we often used to hear you (Ar. Lysist.
510). Ei reves Body που τοὺς σφετέρους ἐπικρατοῦντας, ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν,
if any saw their own men victorious anywhere, they would be encouraged
190 TENSES 1909
(Thue. 7, 71*).—This aorist with dv must also not be confounded with
the apodosis with ἄν in conditional clauses.
5. The Ionic has also iterative forms in -σκον and
-σκομὴν in the imperfect and aorist (see Part ILI. of the
Grammar). In customary actions, Herodotus some-
times adds ἄν also to these forms (as in Hdt. 3, 119+).
1909. Imperfect with Force of Pluperfect.—The. imperfects of
presents frequently used as perfects (1900) are correspondingly used
as pluperfects.
So ἐνίκων, I was victorious = I had conquered ; ἡττώμην, etc. (see
1900).—For ἧκον and ὠχόμην used as pinpartante or (generally) as
aorists, see 1900, 2.
AORIST
1910. The aorist indicative simply represents an action as
taking place in past time; as ἔγραψα, I wrote.
1911. Nore.—For the aorist of customary action, see 1908.
1912. Norz.—The name aorist, ἀόριστος (indefinite, indeterminate),
is a compound from 4-, without, and ὅρος, boundary, and denotes that
the tense simply expresses a past event without any regard to its
development or completion or repetition. It is the tense of narration,
and is thus used like the Latin perfect or the English simple imperfect
(preterite), as ἔγραψα, scripsi, I wrote,
Ἐν Κελαιναῖς ἔμεινε Κῦρος ἡμέρᾶς τριάκοντα, Cyrus remained thirty days at
Celaenae (Xen. Anab. 1, 39). Ἦλθον, εἶδον, ἐνίκησα, veni, vidi, υἱοὶ (Plutarch,
Caesar, 50).—The Greek imperfect is equivalent to the compound form οὗ
the English imperfect : ἔγραφον, I was writing.
1913. Norz.—With τί οὐ the indicative aorist is used in impatiently
asking why something has not already happened, and is thus equi-
valent to a present exhortation or command.
Ti οὖν οὐ... ἔλεξάς por; (lit. why did you not tell me?) tell me (Xen. Cyr.
2,14), Τί οὖν οὐ καὶ Πρόδικον ἐκαλέσαμεν ; (lit. why then did we not call also
Prodicus ?) let us then call also Prodicus (Plat. Prot. 317¢).—The present may
also be thus used ; as τί οὖν οὐκ ἐρωτᾷς ; (Plat. Lys. 2114).
1914. Gnomic Aorist.—1. The aorist indicative is often used to
express a general truth or maxim, It is then called the gnomic aorist
and is to be translated by the English present,
i le eee
1918 TENSES 191
“Hy τις τούτων τι παραβαίνῃ, ζημίᾶν αὐτοῖς ἐπέθεσαν, if any one trans-
gress any of these precepts, they impose a penalty (Xen. Cyr. 1, 25). Tas τῶν
φαύλων συνηθείᾶς ὀλίγος χρόνος διέλῦσ ε, a short time dissolves the intimacies
of the bad (Isoce. 1, 1).
2. The aorist is so used on the principle that what happened once
can happen again under the same circumstances, It is called gnomic
from its frequent use in proverbs and maxims (yv@po.).—For the
present and perfect in general truths, see 1899 and 1933.
1915. Norz.—In poetry, especially in Homer, this
aorist is frequent in similes ; as ἤριπε δ᾽ ὡς ὅτε τις δρῦς
ἤριπεν, he fell as when some oak falls, lit..as when
some oak fell (Il. 18, 389).
1916. Ingressive or Inceptive Aorist.—With verbs whose presents
denote a state of being, the aorist may denote the entrance into that
state; as πλουτῶ, am rich, ἐπλούτησα, I became rich. This use occurs
in all the moods and in the participle.
Thus ἔχω, I have, ἔσχον, I got, took possession of ;—xpopa, I use,
ἐχρησάμην, took into use ;—dpyw, I rule, ἦρξα, obtained dominion or
office ;--- βασιλεύω, am king, ἐβασίλευσα, became king ;—orparnye, am
general, ἐστρατήγησα, became general ;---δουλεύω, am a slave, ἐδούλευσα,
became α΄ slave ;—Bovrieiw, am a member of the council, ἐβούλευσα,
became a member of the council ;—so ἐδυνήθην and ἐδυνάσθην, obtained
the power or ability to do a thing; ἥβησα, arrived at man’s estate ;
ἔσχῦσα, became strong; ἐνόσησα and ἠσθένησα, fell sick ; ἐπολέμησα,
began war ; ἐπεδήμησα, came home ; ἐκοιμήθην, fell asleep ; εὐδοκίμησα,
became famous ; ἐσχόλασα, obtained leisure ; ἐγέλασα, burst out laugh-
ing ; édxpioa, burst into tears ; ἐσίγησα, became silent ; ἠράσθην, fell
in love; ἐθάρσησα, took courage ; ὑπώπτευσα, became suspicious ; évo-
pura, ἡγησάμην, ὠφήθην, became of the opinion ; ἠχθέσθην, got angry ;
ἐφοβήθην, ἔδεισα, got afraid.
1917. Norr.—The same aorist sometimes has the ordinary meaning,
sometimes the ingressive; as ἐπολέμησα, sometimes means waged war,
sometimes began war.
1918. Norze.—In conversation, the first person singular of the aorist
indicative is sometimes used to express a feeling or emotion which,
although now in progress, just began before it is mentioned. In English
we use either the present or the auxiliary verb must or an equivalent.
192 TENSES 1919
’EyéAaoa, I must laugh or I can’t ‘help laughing (Lucian, Deorum Dialogi
16, 2). ’Emnveo’ ἔργον καὶ πρόνοιαν ἣν ἔθου, I praise the deed and foresight
which you exercised (Soph. Aj. 536).
1919. Aorist Equivalent to Perfect or Pluperfeot —Often the
aorist is used where the perfect or pluperfect is expected. Especially
in temporal and relative clauses, the aorist indicative is equivalent to
a pluperfect.
Τῶν οἰκετῶν οὐδένα κατέλιπεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἅπαντας πέπρᾶκεν, of his servants
he (left) has left none, but has sold them all (Aeschin. 1, 99). Ἐπεὶ Κῦρος
Τισσαφέρνει ἐπολέμησε, πᾶσαι ai πόλεις ἑκοῦσαι Κῦρον εἵλοντο ἀντὶ Τισσα-
φέρνους, after Cyrus had begun to wage war against Tissaphernes, all the
cities willingly preferred Oyrus to Tissaphernes (Xen. Anab. 1, 9°). Ἐπορεύ-
ovro ἐπὶ τὸ χωρίον, ἀφ᾽ οὗ τῇ προτεραίᾳ οἱ βάρβαροι ery σαν, they
proceed toward the place from which the barbarians had been repulsed the
day before (Xen. Anab. 5, 4**).—So πολλάκις ἐθαύμασα, I have often wondered
(Xen. Mem. 1, 1’); οὔπω εἶδον, I have not yet seen.
1920. Epistolary Aorist.—In letters the writer sometimes places
himself into the time of the reader and thus considers the time of
writing as past.
Mer’ ᾿Αρταβάζου..., ὅν σοι ἔπεμψα, πρᾶσσε, arrange with Artabazus,
whom I send (sent) to you (Thue. 1, 129*).—The perfect is sometimes thus
used; as ἀπέσταλκά σοι τόνδε τὸν λόγον, I send (have sent) you this
discourse (Isoc. 1, 2).
FUTURE
1921. 1. The future denotes an action that will occur or will
be in progress ; as γράψω, I shall write or I shall be writing.
2. With verbs whose presents denote a state of being, the future
(like the aorist) may denote the entrance into that state; as ἄρχω, I
rule, ἄρξω, I shall rule or I shall attain dominion or office.
1922. Norz.—The second person of the future sometimes ex-
presses a permission; aS tpagets οἷον ἂν θέλῃς, you (will) may do
as you please (Soph. Oed. Col. 956). |
41923. ΝΟΤΕ.---Ἰ. The second person of the future sometimes
expresses a mild command ; with negatives a mild prohibition.
Πάντως δὲ τοῦτο δράσεις, but (you will) do this, by all means (Ar. Nub.
1352). Χειρὶ δ᾽ od Ψψαύσεις ποτέ, but (you will) touch me not with your hand.
(Eur. Med. 1320).
————E7=—_
— ....»
1997 TENSES 193
2. The second person of the future with the negative sometimes
appears as a strong command; as οὐκ ἀξεθ᾽ ὡς τάχιστα ; (will you not)
carry (her) away instantly (Soph. Ant. 885).—For a similar future
with οὐ μή, see 1985,
1924. Norr.— Herodotus uses the second person singular
of the future in geographical and other descriptions, as
though directing a future traveller; as τὴν λίμνην διεκ-
πλώσᾶς és τοῦ Νείλου τὸ ῥέεθρον 7 ἕξεις, etc., having
sailed through the lake, you will come to the stream of
the Nile (Hdt. 2, 29°).
1925. Norr.—In Homer the future indicative sometimes
takes ἄν or κέ, with very slight change of meaning.
Kai κέ τις ὧδ᾽ ἐρέει, and some one will (or may) speak
thus (Il. 4, 176). Tap’ ἔμοιγε καὶ ἄλλοι of κέ pe Tipn-
σουσιν, there are also others with me who will (perhaps)
honour me (Il. 1, 174). Οὐδέ κέ τις θάνατον καὶ Kijpas
ἀλύξει, nor will (can) any one escape death and the Fates
(Od. 19, 557). “Av (11. 9, 167).—A few rare cases of ἄν with
the future indicative occur in Attic, but they are disputed
(Xen. Anab. 2, 5'*); see 1967.
1926. Periphrastic Futwre—1. An immediate future action is
expressed by μέλλω, am about to, with the infinitive present or future
or (less often) aorist. Such a future expresses an action immediately
expected or intended.
Μέλλω ὑμᾶς διδάξειν ὅθεν μοι ἡ διαβολὴ γέγονε, I am about to show
you whence this calumny has arisen against me (Plat. Apol. 21”). Ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς
μέλλω ἄγειν eis Φᾶσιν, I am going to lead you to Phasis (Xen. Anab. 5,
7). Ei μέλλει κακὸς γενέσθαι, if he is to become bad (Plat. Prot.
3450),
2. Of the other tenses of μέλλω, only the imperfect is frequent.
Ὁ σταθμὸς ἔνθα ἔμελλε καταλύειν, the station where he was about to halt (Xen.
Anab. 1, 8"). ᾿ἘἘμέλλησεν ἐκπλεῖν, he was about to sail away (Isoc. 6, 44).
1927. Nore.—Observe the expression πῶς οὐ μέλλω ; οὐ τί οὐ μέλλω ;
how (why) should I not ? with the infinitive present (which often has
to be supplied),
Πῶς οὐ μέλλει τὸ σοφώτερον κάλλϊον φαίνεσθαι; why should not
that which is wiser appear better? (Plat. Prot. 309). Τί οὐ μέλλει
γελοῖον εἷναι; it would surely be ridiculous? (Plat. Rep. 530°). Xen.
Hell. 4, 1°.
13
194 TENSES 1928
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT
1928. The perfect represents an action as eget in present
time; γέγραφα, I have written.
1929. Norr.—For periphrastic perfect forms, see 2980, 2281.
1930. Perfect with Present Meaning.—1. Some perfects denote
that the action which has been completed has passed into a present
continued condition ; such perfects thus have present meaning. (For
the pluperfects, see 1935, 2).
Thus κέκλημαι (καλέω), have acquired a name = am called ;—
μέμνημαι (μιμνήσκω), have called to mind = remember, Lat. memini ;
---κέκτημαι (κτάομαι), have acquired = possess ;—éyvwxa (γιγνώσκω),
have recognised = know ;—dédenar (δέω), have been bound = lie bound ;
---Οἠμφίεσμαι (ἀμφιέννυμι), have clothed myself in = have on ;----τέθνηκα
(θνήσκω), have died = am dead ;----τέθαπται (θάπτω), has been buried =
lies buried ;—oeatynxa (ctydw), have become silent = am silent ;—
BeByxa (Baivw), have stepped = stand, also have gone ;—éornxa (ἵστημι),
have set myself = stand ; répixa (φύω), have been produced = am by
nature ;---- πέποιθα (πείθω), have put faith in = trust ;---κέχρημαι (xpao-
μαι), have taken in use = wse.—So κέκλαγγα (κλάζω), clang ;—xéxpaya
(κράζω), cry out, and others.
2. Some have no regular corresponding present forms. So οἶδα,
know, Lat. novi ;—eiwba, am accustomed ;—éorxa, am like ; δέδοικα and
δέδια, fear.
3. The perfect of verbs denoting a feeling or condition, denotes
that the subject continues in that feeling or condition.
Ἐντεθύμημαι, I am strongly considering (Xen. Anab. 3, 14%).—EmureOdpnxa, —
I am full of desire (Plat. Phaedr. 227¢).—TeOopiSnua, I am in perturbation
(Aeschin. 2, 4).---ζήλωκε, he is zealous (Dem. 2, 15). Τεθαύμακας ; do you
not admire? (Xen. Mem. 1, 4’).
1931. Norr.—A past action, which has already ceased but whose
consequences are still noticeable in the present, may be expressed by
the perfect.
Σωκράτης διέφθαρκε τοὺς νέους, Socrates has corrupted the young men
(Plat. Apol. 33°). Here the perfect expresses, from the standpoint of the
writer, that either Socrates or the young men may be still living.
1932. Norr.—The perfects γεγένημαι and γέγονα (from γίγνομαι) may
mean to have become or to be now, to have happened or to have been,
ri i
1937 TENSES 195
1938. Gnomic Perfect—Sometimes the perfect is used to express
a general truth, like the aorist (1914). Πολλοὶ διὰ δόξαν καὶ πολιτικὴν
δύναμιν μεγάλα κακὰ πεπόνθᾶσιν, many suffer great misfortunes through fame
and political power (Xen. Mem. 4, 2°°).
1934. Perfect as a Vivid Futwre.—1l. The perfect is sometimes
used emphatically to express a certain future action.
Διέφθορας, it is all over with you (Il. 15, 129). Ei με..«αἰσθήσεται,
ὄλωλα, if she perceives me, I am undone (Soph. Phil. 75).
2. The aorist is occasionally so used; as ἀπωλόμεσθ᾽ ap, «i
κακὸν προσοίσομεν νέον παλαίῳ, we are undone, then, if to the old we
add a new ill (Eur. Med. 78).
1935. Pluperfect.—1. The pluperfect denotes an action as
completed in past time; as ἐγεγράφη, I had written.
2. With verbs whose perfects have present meaning (1930), the
pluperfect has imperfect meaning; as ἐμεμνήμην, I remembered ;
ἐκεκτήμην, 1 possessed, ἤδη, I knew, etc.
FUTURE-PERFECT
1936. The future-perfect represents an action as completed in
future time; as γεγράψεται, it will have been written ; ἐγνωκὼς
ἔσομαι, I shall have recognised.
1937. Future-Perfect equivalent to Futwre-—1. When the perfect
has present meaning (as in 1935, 1), the future-perfect has simple
future meaning. Thus κεκλήσομαι, shall be called; μεμνήσομαι, shall
remember ; κεκτήσομαι, shall possess ; ἑστήξω, shall stand; τεθνήξω,
shall be dead, etc.
2. The future-perfect is sometimes emphatically used for the
future to denote that something will positively occur.
Σοὶ δ᾽ ἐξερέω, ὡς καὶ τετελεσμένον ἔσται, but I will declare it to thee
and it shall swrely be brought to pass (Il. 8, 286). pate, καὶ πεπράξεται,
speak, and it shall immediately be done, lit. shall have been done (Ar. Plut.
1027). So xaraxexovores ἐσόμεθα (Xen. Anab. 7, 6"), κατεᾶγὼς ἔσται and
διεσχισμένον ἔσται (Plat. Gorg. 4694).
3. The future-perfect of some verbs is regularly used in Attic for
the simple future. Thus πεπράσομαι, shall be sold (πρᾶθήσομαι is late) ;
πεπαύσομαι, shall cease (παυθήσομαι rare in Attic); δεδήσομαι, shall be
bound (δεθήσομαι less often); κεκόψομαι, shad be cut per tropes late or
Attic in composition).
196 . TENSES 1988.
TENSES IN THE OTHER Moops
(A) NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
1938. 1. The tenses of the subjunctive, imperative, also of
the optative and infinitive,—when these two latter do not stand in
indirect discowrse,—do not express time.
2. The aorist here simply denotes that the action takes place,
without any reference to time; as ποιῆσαι, to do. The present
here expresses the action as going on or continued or attempted ; as
ποιεῖν, to be doing, to be occupied with, or to try todo. The perfect
(which is not often found in these moods, except in the indireet
discourse) expresses the action as already completed ; as πεποι-
ηκέναι, to have done anything or to be done with anything. See 1892.
3. The actual time of the action is not denoted in these con-
structions by the tense itself, but must be inferred from the
context,
᾿Ακούσωμεν τοῦ ἀνδρός, let us hear the man (Plat. Prot. 314°).
Εἴπωμεν ἢ σϊγῶμεν; shall we speak or shall we remain silent (Eur.
Ion 758). Τὰ πλοῖα... κατέκαυσεν, iva μὴ Κῦρος δια B87, he burned the ships
80 that Cyrus might not cross (Xen. Anab. 1, 415). Δέδοικα μή po βεβήκῃ
ὁ πατήρ, I fear lest my father may prove to have died (Soph. Phil. 493).
Ἐὰν ζητῇ ς καλῶς, εὑρήσεις, if you seek well you will find (Plat. Gorg. 503%).
Πατρὶς γάρ ἐστι πᾶσ᾽, ἵν᾽ ἂν πράττῃ τις εὖ, one’s fatherland is everywhere
wherever one does well (Ar. Plut. 1151). ‘Hvix’ ἄν τις Buds ἀδικῇ, ἡμεῖς ὑπὲρ
ὑμῶν μαχούμεθα, whenever any one attempts to wrong you, we will fight for
you (Xen. Cyr. 4, 4").
Ti ἄν σ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ὠφελοῖμ᾽ ἐγώ; how can I help you? (Soph. Ant. 552).
Φίλος ἡμῖν γένοιο, may you become a friend to us (Xen. Hell. 4, 1%).
Δῆλος ἢἦν....ἐπιθυμῶν δὲ ἄρχειν, ὅπως πλείω λαμβάνοι, he was clearly
desirous of ruling, so that he might get more (Xen. Anab. 2, 6"). Ei δ᾽
ἀναγκαῖον εἴη ἀδικεῖν ἢ ἀδικεῖσθαι, ἑλοίμην ἂν μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθαι, if it
should be necessary to do wrong or to suffer wrong, I would prefer to suffer
wrong (Plat. Gorg. 469°). Οὐκ ἂν....εἶεν εὐθὺς δεδωκότες, they would
not have proved to have paid at once (Dem. 30, 10).
Τοὺς μὲν θεοὺς φοβοῦ, τοὺς δὲ γον ἐᾶς τίμα, fear the gods, honowr your
parents (Isoc. 1, 16). Βλέψον πρὸς τὰ ὄρη, look towards the mountains
(Xen. Anab. 4, 1%). Μὴ θαυμάζετε ὅτι χαλεπῶς φέρω τοῖς παροῦσι
πρᾶγμασι, do not be surprised that I am vexed at the present affairs (Xen.
Anab. 1, 3°). ᾿Αναγίγνωσκε τὴν μαρτυρίαν, proceed (or continue) to read
the testimony, but ἀνάγνωθι τὰς paprupias, read (once) the testimony
(Isae. 3, 14 and 15).
*
λέ δὰ δι ee
1 ear « =e _nr eS
hy ah cient tom ho
ee >
ae |
1945 TENSES 197
*"Héiov δοθῆναι οἱ ταὐτᾶς τὰς πόλεις μᾶλλον ἢ Τισσαφέρνην ἄρχειν
αὐτῶν, he demanded that these cities be given to him rather than that Tissa-
phernes should rule them (Xen. Anab. 1, 1°). Ὁπόσοι ἱκανοὶ ἦσαν τὰς ἀκρο-
πόλεις φυλάττειν, as many as would be necessary to garrison the citadels
(Xen. Anab. 1, 2"). Νῦν οὖν μάλα σοι καιρός ἐστιν ἐπιδείξασθαι τὴν ra-
δείᾶν, now indeed there is an opportunity for you to show your education (Xen.
Anab. 4, 6"). Οὐ βουλεύεσθαι ἔτι Spa, ἀλλὰ βεβουλεῦσθαι, there
is no longer time to be planning, but to have a plan made (Plat. Crito 46*).
1939. Norr.—Except in indirect discourse, the aorist infinitive
seldom expresses past time.
Πρὸς φιλίᾶν μέγα μὲν ὑπάρχει τὸ ἐκ τῶν αὐτῶν φῦναι, μέγα δὲ τὸ ὁμοῦ
τραφῆναι, it conduces greatly to friendship to have been born of the same
parents, and to have been brought up together (Xen. Mem. 2, 3*).
1940. Norz.—For the perfect imperative, see 1982.
1941. Norz.—The perfect infinitive sometimes denotes that a thing
shall be positive and permanent; as εἶπον τὴν θύραν κεκλεῖσθαι,
they commanded the door to be (kept) closed (Xen. Hell, 5, 4°).
1942. Norre.—The future optative is found only in the indirect
discourse corresponding to the future indicative of the direct discourse
(2016); and in final clauses introduced by ὅπως when these follow a
past tense (2050).
1943. Norr,—The future infinitive is used in the indirect discourse
to represent the future indicative of the direct discourse (2193),—It is
also used with verbs of promising, swearing, and hoping (2195).—For
μέλλω With the future infinitive, see 1926.
1944, Norz.—Occasionally the future infinitive is found for the
present or aorist infinitive after verbs expressing intention or wish or
ability.
Τὸν πόλεμον διενοοῦντο προθύμως οἴσειν, they desired to carry on the
war with spirit (Thuc. 4, 121'). ᾿Εβούλοντο τὶμωρήσεσθαι, they wished to
avenge themselves (Thuc. 6, 57"). Thuc. 6, θ᾽; 1, 27%; Soph. Phil. 1394.—
This makes the idea of futurity more emphatic, and occurs oftenest in
Thucydides.
(B) OPTATIVE AND INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
1945. When the words or thoughts of a person are quoted and
made to depend, as a dependent clause, on a verb of saying or thinking
or the like, they are said to stand in indirect discowrse. The original
198 TENSES 1946
words or thoughts would be the direct discourse. Thus οἶδα, I know,
is direct discourse. But ἔλεγε ὅτι εἰδείη, he said that he knew, or
φησὶ εἰδέναι, he says that he knows, is indirect discourse.
1946. When the optative and infinitive are used in indirect
discourse, they express time, and their tenses stand for the cor-
responding tenses of the direct discourse.
"Edeyev ὅτι τοῦτο ποιοίη, he said that he was doing this (he said “" τοῦτο
maa,” “1 am doing this”). ᾿Ἔλεγεν ὅτι τοῦτο ποιήσοι, he said that he
would do this (he said “‘ τοῦτο moujow,” “1 will do this”). "EXeyev ὅτι τοῦτο
ποιήσειε, he said that he had done this (he said ‘‘ τοῦτο ἐποίησα). Ἔλεγεν
ὅτι τοῦτο πεποιηκὼς εἴη, he said that he had already done this (he said
“ἐτοῦτο πεποίηκα ᾽).
Φησὶ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he says that he is doing this (he says “τοῦτο rod”).
Φησὶ τοῦτο ποιήσειν, he says that he will do this (he says ‘‘ τοῦτο ποιήσω ᾽.
Φησὶ τοῦτο ποιῆσαι, he says that he did this (he says “τοῦτο ἐποίησα). Φησὶ
τοῦτο πεποιηκέναι, he says that he has already done this (he says “τοῦτο
πεποίηκα ᾽).-- Ἔφη τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he said that he was doing this (he said ‘‘ τοῦτο
ποιῶ). "Edn τοῦτο ποιήσειν (ποιῆσαι, πεποιηκέναι), he said that he would do
this (had done this, had already done this). "Ἔφη τοῦτο πεπράξεσθαι, he said
that this will already have been done at that time (‘‘ τοῦτο πεπράξεται Ἶ.
1947. Norn.—tThe indirect discourse is explained in 2320—2333.—
For the participle in indirect discourse, see 2300, 2301.
1948. Norz.—The present optative and infinitive of indirect dis-
course may also stand for the imperfect of the direct discourse; while
the perfect infinitive may stand for the pluperfect. See 2018, 2193.
TENSES OF THE PARTICIPLE
1949. The tenses of the participle denote the same time as the
corresponding tenses of the indicative. But the time expressed
by the participle is relatively present, past, or future, in respect
to the time of the verb to which it belongs.
Teddy λέγει, laughing he says; γελῶν ἔλεγε (and ἔλεξε), laughing he
said; γελῶν λέξει, laughing he will say; γελῶν εἴρηκε, laughing he has
said. Here γελῶν is always present with regard to verb.
γράψας λέγει, having written, he says; γράψας ἔλεγε (or ἔλεξε),
having written, he said; ypawas λέξει, having written, he will say ; "Ἔρχεται
τοῦτολέξων, he is coming to say this; ἀπῆλθε τοῦτο λέξων, he came to say
this.
—— ee — —
= —— Oe ἾΨ..ΝὟἉἍ
1957 TENSES 199
Οἶδα αὐτὸν ἀποθνήσκοντα (ἀποθανοῦντα, ἀποθανόντα, τεθνηκότα), I know
that he is dying (will die, died, is dead).
1950. Norz.—In some cases the aorist participle does not express
time past with regard to the leading verb, but coincidenc2; see 2296.
1951. Norr.—The aorist participle may have inceptive meaning
(1916); as Κῦρος ἐπιγελάσας εἶπεν, bursting out into laughter,
Cyrus said (Xen. Cyr. 1, 657).
1952. Norr.—The present participle may denote an attempted
action (1897). ᾿Αποδιδράσκοντα μὴ δύνασθαι ἀποδρᾶναι, trying to
escape and not to be able to get away (Plat. Prot. 317*). ᾿Απολλύμενος, in
danger of perishing (Lys. 13, 61).
- 1953. Norr.—The present participle may express customary action
(1898). λέγουσιν ὡς ἐγὼ ὕδωρ river εἰκότως δύστροπος καὶ δύσκολος εἰμί τις
ἄνθρωπος, they say that as I drink water (habitually), 1 am a rather stubborn
and peevish fellow (Dem. 6, 30).
1954. Norr.—The present participle may also have the force of
the perfect (1900) ; so νικῶ, am victorious = have conquered, ot νικῶντες,
those victorious = those having conquered.
1955. Norr.—Like the present and perfect of the infinitive and
optative (1948), the present and perfect participles may stand for an
imperfect and pluperfect indicative respectively.
Oi Κύρειοι πρόσθεν σὺν ἡμῖν ταττόμενοι (= οἱ ἐτάττοντο), the Cyreans
who formerly stood wp with us (Xen. Anab. 3, 2"). "Qs φᾶσιν οἱ παρόντες
(ot παρῆσαν, thus speak those who were present (Dem. 8, 14). Σωφρονοῦντε
(Xen. Mem. 1, 2").—T@ πρόσθ᾽ ἐμοῦ κεκτημένῳ, to him who owned before
me (Soph. Phil. 778).
1956. Norre.—For the future participle, see also 2243 and 2256.
PRIMARY AND SECONDARY 'T'ENSES
1957. The present, perfect, future, and future-perfect are
called primary or principal tenses; the imperfect, aorist, and
pluperfect are called secondary or historical tenses. But the
gnomic aorist (1914) is a primary tense, and the historical present
(1895) is a secondary tense. We must also regard as equivalent
to primary tenses all forms of the verb which do not express past.
time (2012, 3).
200° THE MOODS 1958
THE MOODS
GENERAL VIEW OF THE Moops
1958. 1. The moods are those forms of the verb which indicate
how the action of the verb is related to reality.
(a) The indicative is the mood of reality and indicates an actual fact,
that something is taking place, took place, or will take place.—(b) The
imperative mood expresses a command or prohibition.—(c) The sub-
junctive is the mood of expectation (1986-1992), expressing the ez-
pectation that something will happen.—(d) The optative is the mood of
simple conception and indicates that the action of the verb is merely
conceived in the mind,—(e) The past tenses of the indicative serve
also as the mood of wnreality, and imply that the action expressed by
the verb does not or did not take place.
2. There are two principal classes of sentences: (1) declarations or
assertions ; and (2) commands or wishes. The negative of the former
is od; that of the latter is μή.
3. The subjwnetive, optative, and the mood of unreality take the
particle ἄν when these moods are used to express a declaration or
assertion ; when these moods express a command or wish, they do not
take ἄν.
1959. Norr.—Yet the (Homeric) subjunctive in declarations (1991)
generally does not take adv.—A protasis expressing an unreal condition
does not take ἄν (2102).—Final clauses occasionally take ἄν (2045).
THE PARTICLE ἄν
1960. The participle av (Epic κέ, Doric κά) is used to represent
a statement as conditional or contingent. It is employed in
various constructions, of which a synopsis is here given.
1961. “Av in Independent Clauses.—1. With the secondary tenses
of the indicative, ἄν is used to denote that something would happen
or would have happened, but actually does not or did not happen,
because the condition (expressed or implied) is not or was not
fulfilled. See 2102. 7
Ἐποίουν ἂν τοῦτο, I would do this (sc. if 1 could); the opposite is
implied, but I do not do this because I cannot. ᾿Ἐποίησα ἂν τοῦτο, I would
*
a i Ἀν .5“- ".
λυ.
—— ee |
1964 THE MOODS 201
have done this (sc. if I had been able); the contrary being implied, but I
did not do this because I was unable. Οὐκ ἂν ἦλθον, εἰ μὴ ἐκάλεσας, I
should not have come if you had not called (hence = I did come because you
called).
2. For ἄν with the imperfect and aorist indicative to express
customary action, see 2099.
3. With the present and perfect indicative ἄν is never used.
For the use of dy with the future indicative, see 1925.
4. With the optative ἄν is used to denote that something might
or would happen, if some condition (expressed or implied) should
be fulfilled. See 1993.—The future optative never takes ἄν.
Ei τοῦτο πράξειε, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι, if he should do this it would be well.
Ἴσως ἄν τις εἴποι, perhaps some one might say. Τοῦτο οὐκ ἂν γένοιτο, this may
(or might) not happen, as a mild future statement. So λέγοις ἄν, you may
say (= λέγε), as a mild command.
5. For av with the subjunctive in Homer, as equivalent toa
future indicative, see 1991.
1962. Norre.—In the above uses, ἄν is rendered by words like
may, would, should. In the use with the subjunctive mentioned in
1964, it cannot be translated.
1963. Nore.—For the omission of ἄν with the indicative in certain
cases, see 2105—2108.
1964. “Av in Dependent Clauses.—1. The particle ἄν is used
with the subjunctive in all kinds of subordinate clauses. In
these clauses it does not belong so closely to the verb, but rather
to the introducing particle or relative.
2. In conditional clauses, ἄν unites with εἰ, if, forming ἐάν (ἤν or
ἄν). In temporal clauses, ἄν unites with dre, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, forming
ὅτάν, ὁπόταν, ἐπάν or ἐπήν (Hdt. ἐπεάν), ἐπειδάν ;—with other particles it
is simply added, as ἡνίκ᾽ dv, ἕως ἄν, ἔστ᾽ dv, ete. In relative clauses ἄν
is added to the relative, as ὃς dv, ὅστις dv, οἷος dv, ὡς dv, ὅπου ἄν, etc.—
In final clauses it is occasionally added to ὡς, ὅπως, (poetic) ὄφρα,
never to iva; as ὡς dv, ὅπως dv, ὄφρα ἄν (never iva: ἄν, which means
wheresoever).
"Edy τοῦτο ποιῇς, if you do this. Ὅταν τοῦτο ποιῇς, when you do this.
Obs ἄν λάβῃ, whom he may take. “Ὡς ἂν μάθῃς, ἀντάκουσον, hear me in turn
that you may learn (Xen. Anab. 2, 5'°; here ἄν is unnecessary).
202 THE MOODS 1965.
1965. Nore.—For ἄν occasionally omitted in such clauses,
see 2101, 2110.—For rare Homeric εἰ κέ with the opta-
tive, see 2115.
1966. “Av with the Infinitive and Participle.—1. The particle ἄν
is joined to the infinitive or participle when they represent a
finite verb which would take ἄν. See 2193, 2194, 2300, 2301.
Ei τι ἔχοι, ἔφη δοῦναι ἄν, if he should have anything, he says he would
give it (Soin ἄν). Ei τι εἶχεν, ἔφη δοῦναι ἄν, if he had anything, he
says he would have given it (ἔδωκεν ἄν). Et τι ἔσχεν, ἔφη δοῦναι ἄν, if
he had had anything he would have given it (ἔδωκα av).—Oida αὐτὸν τοῦτο
ποιοῦντα ἂν εἰ ἐκέλευον, I know that he would do this if I commanded
(ἐποίει ἄν). Οἶδα αὐτὸν τοῦτο ποιήσαντα ἂν εἰ ἐκέλευσα, I know that he
would have done this if I had commanded (ἐποίησεν ἄν). Οἶδα αὐτὸν τοῦτο
ποιοῦντα ἂν εἰ κελεύσαιμι, I know that he would do this if I should
command.—Whether the infinitive or participle with ἄν stands for an in-
dicative with ἄν or for an optative with ἄν must be determined by the
context. The protasis will usually decide it.
2. The infinitive with ἄν is used chiefly in indirect discourse;
the participle with ἄν is used chiefly as supplementary to a verb
(2300). But in other constructions the participle with dy occurs
more frequently than the infinitive with ἄν (2125—2127).
3.—The infinitive with dv is found very rarely in early
poetry, once only in Homer (J/. 9, 684), and only several
times in Pindar. The participle with ἄν is absent from
both Homer and Pindar.
1967. Norr.—Corfesponding to the very rare and perhaps wholly
Homeric future indicative with ἄν (1925), we find (but only in Attic) a
few cases of the future infinitive of indirect discourse with dy; as in
Thue, 2, 80'%. In such passages, ἄν is considered suspicious by many
scholars, even in spite of the MS. Pindar has κλείξειν with κέν in Ol.
1, 113.—A few cases of dv with the future participle are also found in
Attic, as Plat. Apol. 30”.
1968. Position of dv.—l. "Av never bégins a clause.
2. Generally ἄν follows its verb; as ἤλθον ἄν, doin ἄν, ἔγραψα ἄν.
3. But ἄν precedes its verb in subordinate clauses with the subjunctive ;
also usually after an interrogative and after a negative or other
(accented) particle.
ee eo «-
1973 THE MOODS. 203
Ods ἂν ὁρῶσι. ᾿Ἐπειδὰν τοῦτο yévnra.—Ti ἂν φαίης; Πῶς ἂν τοῦτο γένοιτο;
- Τοῦτο οὐκ ἂν γένοιτο. Ἴσως ἂν ἀποκρίΐναιντο. Τάχ᾽ ἄν, ῥᾳδίως ἄν, εἰκότως
ἄν, μάλιστ᾽ ἄν, ete.
1969. Notr.—Sometimes ἄν is drawn out of a subordinate clause
and joined to the verb of the principal clause ; so especially with οὐκ
οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ or οὐκ ἂν ofd εἰ. Thus οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι, πειρᾶσθαι δὲ χρή
(Eur. Med. 941); so Plat. Tim. 26".
1970. Repetition of dv.—Sometimes ἄν is repeated emphatically
with the same verb; this occurs in long sentences or when some other
word than the verb is also to be qualified by it.
Ποίαν rw’ οὖν ἥδιστ᾽ ἂν oixotr ἂν πόλιν ; what sort of city would you then
like best to inhabit? (Ar. Av. 127). Lys. 20, 15; Soph. fr. 608; Thuc. 2,
41! (ἄν three times).
1971. “Av belonging to two Verbs.—With two or more co-ordinate
verbs which require ἄν, the particle may be joined to the first and be
understood with the next one or more; as βίᾳ οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἕλοις οὔτε
κατάσχοις φίλον, by force you can neither gain nor keep a friend
(Xen. Mem. 3, 1111. ἄν is understood with xatdc yous).
1972. "Av with Verb omitted.—’Av may stand alone, with its verb
understood.
Οἱ οἰκέται ῥέγκουσιν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. ἔρρεγκον), the slaves are
snoring, but they wouldn’t have done so before (Ar. Nub. 5). So πῶς γὰρ ἄν
(se. εἴ), how can it be? (Plat. Soph. 237°).—For ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ, see 2130.
FINITE MOODS IN SIMPLE OR INDEPENDENT
CLAUSES
1973. The following are the different kinds of independent
clauses :—
(a) ASSERTIONS
1. Indicative (οὐ): see 1974,
2. [Homeric Subjunctive with (or without) ἄν (ov): see 1991.]
3. Optative with ἄν (od): see 1993—1995.
4. Past Tense of Indicative with ἄν (od): see 1976.
(8) COMMANDS OR WISHES (DESIRES)
1. Imperative (μή) : see 1979-1984,
2. Subjunctive without ἄν (μή) : see 1983.
3. Optative without ἄν (μή) : see 1999—2003, 2007.
4, Past Tense of Indicative without ἄν (μή): see 2004,
204 THE MOODS 1974
INDICATIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES
1974. The indicative mood is used in making a direct statement
and in asking questions; as λέγει, he says ; γράψει, he will write ;
οὐκ ἦλθεν, he did not come ; τί λέγεις ; what do you say ?
1975. Norr.—For the imperfect and aorist indicative of customary
action with dv, see 2099.—For the future indicative in final clauses,
see 2050 —For the indicative in wishes, see 2004—2006.—For the in-
dicative in conditional sentences, see Conditional Sentences.—For the
indicative (and subjunctive) with μή or μὴ οὐ in independent clauses,
see 1977.
1976. Potential Indicative—The past tenses of the indicative
with ἄν are used to express what would happen or would have
happened, if some condition (expressed or implied) were fulfilled or
had been fulfilled. See Conditional Clauses,
1977. A strong denial in future time may be expressed by the
double negative od μή followed by the subjunctive (generally
aorist) or by the future indicative.
Οὐ μὴ παύσωμαι φιλοσοφῶν, I shall never cease philosophising (Plat. Apol.
294), Οὐδὲν μὴ δεινὸν πάθητε, you will surely suffer no harm (Dem. 6, 24).
Οὔ σοι μὴ μεθέψομαί ποτε, never will I follow thee (Soph. El. 1052). Οὐ μὴ
εἰσίῃς, you will not enter (Isae. 8, 24).
1978. Norre.—For the same constructions used as a strong pro-
hibition, see 1985.
IMPERATIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES
1979. 1. The imperative expresses a command; as λέγε, speak ;
ἐλθέ, come ; ἀκουσάτω, let him hear.
2. For the difference in meaning between the tenses, see 1938,
—For the infinitive used imperatively, see 2229.
1980. Norr.—In dramatic poetry an imperative is some-
times found connected by an object-relative with a
question, especially after οἶσθα; do you know? Thus
οἷσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσον ; do you know what you must do ? lit. do—
you know what (Eur, Hec. 225). Soph. Oed. Tyr. 543.
Eur, Iph. Tawr, 1904.
1981. Nore.—The imperative is often preceded by ἄγε (δή), φέρε
1986 THE MOODS 205
(δή), or ἴθι, come’ These expressions are used indifferently for the
singular or plural, and for the second or third person.
1982. Perfect Imperatwe.—1. The perfect active imperative occurs
only in verbs whose perfects have present meaning; as ἴσθι, know
thou ; κεχήνατε, gape (ye).
2. The second person singular imperative middle, which seldom
occurs, expresses an emphatic or urgent command to be immediately
fulfilled ; as πέπαυσο, cease (Dem. 24, 64); πιστὰ θεῶν πεποίησο, give
at once the pledge (Xen. Cyr. 4, 2°).
3. The third person singular perfect imperative passive usually
expresses that something shall be positive and permanent.
Εἰρήσθω po, let it have been said by me once and for all (Xen. Mem. 4,
2). Τετάχθω, let him have been definitely placed or let him take his place
(Plat. Rep. 562"). Ταῦτα πεπαίσθω tyiv, let this joking of yours now be
finished (Plat. Euthyd. 278°).
1983. Prohibitions.—1. Prohibitions are expressed by μή with the
present imperative or aorist subjunctive ; a8 μὴ ypade or μὴ ypawns,
do not write ; μὴ φοβοῦ, be not afraid ; μὴ φοβηθῆς, do not take fright.
2. For the difference between the present and the aorist, see 1938.
1984. Norz.—In prohibitions the third person of the aorist im-
perative with μή is sometimes found; as καὶ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν προσδοκη-
σάτω ἄλλως, and let no one of you expect otherwise (Plat. Apol. 17°).
—The second person of the aorist imperative with μή occurs very
rarely; as Jl. 4, 410; Aeschin. 1, 161.—The present subjunctive in
prohibitions occurs only in a few doubtful passages.
1985. Norr.—The dramatists sometimes use the second
person singular of the future indicative (also of the aorist
subjunctive) precedei by οὐ μή to express a strong
prohibition.
Οὐ μὴ λαλήσεις, don’t’ prattle (Ar. Nub. 505). Eur. Hipp.
498. Οὐ μὴ σκώψῃς, do not jeer (Ar. Nub. 296).—These are
considered by some to be questions ; compare 1923, 2.
SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES
1986. Hortative Subjunctive-—1. Exhortation is expressed by
the first person of the subjunctive (usually plural, seldom singular) ;
the negative is μή. Thus ἴωμεν, let us go; ἀναλογισώμεθα, let us
206 THE MOODS 1987
reckon wp ; μὴ τοῦτο ποιῶμεν ; λέγε δή, ἴδω, come, let me see (Plat.
Rep. 457°).
2. This subjunctive (like the imperative) is often preceded by dye
(δή), φέρε (δή), or ἴθι, come! In the singular it is always preceded by
one of these or an equivalent expression.
1987. Deliberative or Interrogative Subjunctive.—The first person
of the subjunctive (not often the third) can be used in questions
expressing doubt as to an action; as ἔωμεν ; shall we go? The
negative is μή. Often βούλει or βούλεσθε precedes (in post-
Homeric poetry also rarely θέλεις or θέλετε).
Φῶμεν οὕτως ἢ μὴ φῶμεν; shall I speak thus or not? (Plat. Gorg.
4804). Ti ἔρωμαι; what shall I ask? (Plat. Gorg. 447°). Βούλει σοι εἴπω ;
do you wish me to tell you? (Plat. Gorg. 521¢).—Moi τις οὖν φύγῃ; whither
can (or shall) one flee? (Soph. Aj. 404).
1988. Norr.—The first person of the future indicative is sometimes
used in the same way; as εἴπωμεν ἢ σϊγῶμεν ἢ τί δράσομεν; shall
we speak or be silent, or what shall we do? (Kur. Ion 758).
1989. Norz.—A deliberative spain is-expressed in past time by
periphrasis.
Ti ἔδει pe ποιῆσαι; or τί Pe ey ποιήσειν; what was I to
do?—A periphrasis is often used for the present; as ἡμεῖς δὲ προσμένωμεν ;
ἣ τί χρὴ ποιεῖν ; shall we still wait? or what must we do? (Soph. Trach. 390).
1990. Norze.—The expression τί πάθω ; what will become
of me ? is chiefly poetic (Aesch, Sept. 1057; Od. 5, 465;
Ar. Plut. 603; Hdt. 4, 118*; Plat. Huthyd. 302").
Compare 1991.
1991. Subjwnctive equivalent to Future Indicative (in
Homer).—In Homer the subjunctive (with or without
ἄν or κέ) is sometimes used like the future indicative,
and indicates an expectation that something will
happen.
Οὐ γάρ τοίους ἴδον ἀνέρας, οὐδὲ ἴδωμαι, for never yet saw 1,
nor shall I see, such men (Il. 1, 262). Καί ποτέ τις εἴπῃσι,
and some one will (or may) hersifier say (Il. 7, 87). οὐκ
ἄν τοι χραίσμῃσι βιός, nought will (or can) i bow
avail (Il. 11, 387). .
ES “πῇ Δ
1994 THE MOODS 207
4992. The above is evidently the primitive use of the subjunctive ;
namely to denote an expectation that something will happen. In its
other uses the subjunctive mostly contains the idea of futurity—The
ordinary future tense originally expressed the same idea of expectation.
This is manifest in the use of the future in final clauses with ὅπως
(2050), in relative clauses (2142), and in the use of the future participle
with the generic article (1389).
Ποιμένα δεῖ ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, ὅπως σῶαι ἔσονται ai oles, the shepherd
must take care that his flock be safe (Xen. Mem. 3, 21), or rather, the shepherd
must take care so that we may expect that his flock will be safe.—Edogev τῷ
δήμῳ τριάκοντα ἄνδρας αἱρεῖσθαι, of τοὺς πατρίους νόμου. συγγράψουσι,
the people resolved to choose thirty men to compile (or who should compile)
the laws of the country (Xen. Hell. 2, 3°), i.e. thirty men who would be
expected to compile the laws, or who are fitted to compile the laws.—‘O
ἡγησόμενος, one who will lead (Xen. Anab. 2, 4°), 1.6. one who is expected
to lead or fitted to lead.
OPTATIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES
1993. Potential Optative-—1. The optative with ἄν is used to
express a future (or present) action conceived as possible. Thus
λέγοι av, he may speak (might, could, would speak).
Δὶς és τὸν αὐτὸν ποταμὸν οὐκ ἂν én Bains, you could not (or cannot) step
twice into the same river (Plat. Cratyl. 402*). Ἔνθα πολλὴν σωφροσύνην
καταμάθοι ἄν τις, there one might observe many an instance of self-control
(Xen. Anab. 1, 95). Ti dv σ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ὠφελοῖμ᾽ ἐγώ; how may I benefit thee ?
(Soph. Ant. 552). Ἡδέως ἂν ὑμῶν πυθοίμην, I would gladly learn from you
(Dem. 50, 67). Tay’ οὖν εἴποι τις ἄν, perhaps, then, some one may say
(Xen. Cyr. 5, 4%). Tis οὐκ ἂν ὁμολογήσειεν; who would not admit ?
(Xen. Mem. 1, 1°). Βουλοίμην ἄν, I should like = velim (compare ἐβουλόμην
ἄν = vellem, 2102).
2 The potential optative often appears as the apodosis of a
conditional sentence (2113). Thus, λέγοι ἄν, εἰ ἐροίμην, he might speak
if I asked him. In all examples a condition may be conceived as
understood.
1994. Nore.—1l. The potential optative which regularly refers to
the futwre, sometimes expresses what may turn out to be so; as ποῦ
δῆτ᾽ ἂν εἶεν οἱ ξένοι; where may the strangers be 7 1.6. where will the
strangers prove to be when looked for? (Soph. Εἰ. 1450).
2. In the same way the potential optative may express what may
208 _THE MOODS 1995
turn out to have been so in the past. This occurs occasionally in
Herodotus, very rarely in Attic writers.
Einoav δ᾽ ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες, these were probably Cretans, i.e. would
prove to have been Cretans (Hdt. 1, 27). Αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἴησαν, these
were probably not many (Thue. 1, 9°).
1995. Norz.—In poetry the potential optative is some-
times found without ἄν, especially in Homer; as οὔ τι
κακώτερον ἄλλο πάθοιμι, I could not suffer anything else
that is worse (Il. 19, 821). Aesch. Ag. 620.
1996. Norz.—For the potential optative in Homer used
with reference to past time, see 2104, 2.
1997. Norz.—The potential optative of the second person is
sometimes used as a mild imperative. Thus, χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω,
go in or you may go in (Soph. El, 1491); οὐκ ἄν μιν.... αἰτιόῳο, do not
accuse her (Od. 20, 135).
1998. Norr.—There is no optative future with dv; compare 1926,
1967. :
1999. Optative of Wishing.—1. The optative is used to express
a wish referring to the future. The negative is μή.
Ὑμῖν μὲν θεοὶ δοῖεν ἐκπέρσαι Πριάμοιο πόλιν, may the gods grant to you
to destroy the city of Priamus (Il. 1, 18). Τούτους οἱ θεοὶ ἀποτίσαιντο,
may the gods requite them (Xen. Anab. 3, 2°). Μηκέτι ζῴην, may I no
longer live (Ar. Nub. 1255).—For the difference in the meaning of the tenses,
see 1938.
2. This optative is mostly introduced by εἴθε or εἰ yap, O that.
Eide σὺ... φίλος ἡμῖν γένοιο, O that you may become our friend (Xen.
Hell. 4, 138), Ei yap γένοιτο, O that it might be (Xen. Cyr. 6, 155).
2000. Norzr.—In Homer the optative is found a few
times expressing a permission rather than a wish; as
Ἑλένην Μενέλᾶος ἄγοιτο, let Menelaus carry away Helen
or Menelaus may carry away Helen (Il. 4,19). In such
cases the optative is equivalent to our English may.
This was probably the original use of this mood. Com-
pare 1998,
2001. Norzr.—l. Homer introduces wishes also with
αἴθε and ai ydp.—In poetry «i alone sometimes occurs
(Kur. Hec, 836).
a ee ee = >
7
2004 THE MOODS - 209
2. In poetry, especially in Homer, a wish is sometimes
introduced by ὡς ; as ὡς ἔρις.... ἀπόλοιτο, O that strife
would perish (Il. 18, 107).
3. A wish is occasionally expressed by πῶς dv with the
optative ; this is always a question in form. It occurs
in Homer, oftener in dramatic poetry, very rarely in
prose. Thus πῶς ἂν ὀλοίμην ; how can I perish! = O
that I would perish! (Bur. Alc. 864). Od. 15, 195.
Plat. Rep. 430°.—Very seldom we find ris ἄν with the
optative so used; as τίς ἂν θεῶν σοι τόνδ᾽ ἄριστον ἄνδρ᾽
ἰδεῖν Soin; O that some god would grant thee to see
this most excellent man (Soph. Oed. Cos. 1100).
2002. Norr.—For the present optative in unattainable
wishes in Homer, see 2007.
2003. Nore.—In Ji. 10, 536, we find an aorist optative
used to express the wish that something may prove to
have occurred; al γὰρ... ἐλασαίατο μώνυχας ἵππους,
O that they may (prove to) have driven away the
single-hoofed horses.
2004. Unattainable Wishes.—1. A wish referring to the present
or the past and conceived as wnattainable, is expressed by a
secondary tense of the indicative with εἴθε or εἰ γάρ. The
negative is μή. The imperfect here refers to present time, the
aorist to past, as in the protasis in 2102.
Εἴθε εἶχες βελτίους φρένας, O that thou hadst better understanding
(Eur. ΕἸ. 1061). Ei yap τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον, O that I had so great
a power (Eur. Alc. 1072). Εἴθε σοι τότε συνεγενόμην, O that I had
then been with you (Xen. Mem. 1,2”). Εἴθε σε μήποτ᾽ εἰδόμᾶν, O that I had
never seen thee (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1218).—In all these the contrary is, of
course, implied.
2. Such an unattainable wish is also expressed, but chiefly in
poetry, by the aorist ὥφελον (ὥφελες, ὥφελε, etc. from ὀφείλω,
owe), ought, with the present or aorist infinitive. The negative
is μή.
"“Qpere μὲν Κῦρος ζῆν, would that Cyrus were now alive (Xen. Anab.
2, 1*), lit. Cyrus ought to be alive, but is not. Μήποτ᾽ ὥφελον λιπεῖν
τὴν Σκῦρον, O that I had never left Scyrus (Soph. Phil. 969), lit. 1 ought
never to have left Scyrus.
14
210 THE MOODS 2005
2005. Norzr.—The negative with ὥφελον and the infinitive is wy.—
Sometimes the particles of wishing εἴθε and «i yap are prefixed to
ὥφελον ; as in Eur. Med. 1; Plat. Crito 44°).
2006. Norr.—Forms like εἰ γὰρ εἶχον and εἴθε συνεγενόμην (2004),
also εἰ yap γένοιτο (1999, 2) and the like, were originally protases (2089)
equivalent to if I had, if I had been, if it might be.
2007. Norr.—1. Homer expresses a present unattainable
wish by ὥφελον with the present infinitive (as JJ. 1, 415).
He also uses the present optative (generally with εἴθε
or εἰ ydp); as εἰ yap οὕτω ye Διὸς πάις αἰγιόχοιο εἴην, O
that I were the son of aegis-bearing Zeus (Il. 13, 825).
2. For past unattainable wishes Homer uses ὥφελον
with the aorist or (rarely) perfect infinitive ; as in I/. 19, ©
59; Il. 24, 253.
3. Homer does not use the past tenses of the indicative
in unattainable wishes.
4, Homer sometimes has the imperfect ὥφελλον for
ὥφελον ; as in Il. 6, 350.
5. Often in Homer, rarely in Attic poetry, ὡς precedes
ὥφελον ; as in Jl, 3, 428; Od. 14, 68; Ar. Ran. 955.
THE MOODS IN INDEPENDENT OR DIRECT QUESTIONS
2008. Direct Interrogative Particles—1. Questions are expressed
by interrogative pronouns or adverbs (see 1545) or by inter-
rogative particles.
The interrogative particles used in direct simple questions are dpa,
ἦ;; ἄρα ov, οὐκοῦν, οὐ, μῶν οὐ; ἄρα μή, μή, μῶν (from μὴ οὖν), μῶν μή.
Of these dpa and ἦὖ simply ask for information (like Latin -ne) ; dpa ov,
οὐκοῦν, Simple οὐ, and μῶν οὐ expect the answer yes (like Latin nonne) ;
dpa py, Simple μή, μῶν, and μῶν μή expect the answer no (like Latin
num). Simple dpa or 7 may be omitted, the question is then indicated
by the tone of voice.—For ἄλλο τι 7 or ἄλλο τι, see 4 below.
2. Direct double or alternate questions are introduced by πότερον
(or zorepa)....9, whether....or (Lat. utrwm....an) ; but πότερον may be
omitted. For ἢ μή and ἢ οὐ, see 2349, 2.—For disjunctive or alternate
questions (direct and indirect) in Homer, see 2024, 3.
2010 THE MOODS 211
3. The moods used in direct questions are the same as in
direct statements ; i.e. the indicative (1977), the potential optative
- (1993—1995), and the potential indicative (1976).—For the inter-
rogative subjunctive, see 1987.
"Apa ἐθελήσειεν ἂν ἡμῖν διαλεχθῆναι; would he be willing to start a
discussion with us? (Plat. Gorg. 447°). Ἦ οὗτοι πολέμιοί εἰσιν; are these
enemies? (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4). Ap’ οὐκ ἂν ἐπὶ πᾶν ἔλθοι; would he not
resort to every means? (Xen. Anab. 3, 1). Οὐκοῦν σοι δοκεῖ σύμφορον
εἶναι; does it not seem to you to be advantageous? (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4%). οὐχ
οὕτως ἔλεγες ; did you not say so? (Plat. Rep. 334). Μῶν οὐχ spas;
dost thou not see? (Soph. Oed. Col. 1729). Ap’ οὖν μὴ ἡμῖν ἐναντιώσεται ;
will he, then, oppose us ? = he will not then oppose us, will he? (Xen. Anab.
7, 6). Mn σοι δοκοῦμεν ; do we seem to you? = we do not seem to you, do
we? (Aesch. Pers. 344). Μῶν (Soph. Phil. 734). Μῶν μή (Plat. Lys. 208°).
Direct Double Questions :—
Πότερον ἐᾷς ἄρχειν ἣ ἄλλον καθίστης ; do you let him rule or do you
appoint another? (Xen. Cyr. 3, 113). ᾿Ἐγρήγορας ἢ καθεύδεις ; are you awake
or asleep? (Plat. Prot. 310°).
4. The interrogative expression ἄλλο τι 7; (lit. is it anything else
than 7) or more commonly ἄλλο τι; is used in simple direct questions
and expects the answer yes.
"“AAXo re ἣ ὁμολογοῦμεν ; do we not agree? = are we doing anything
else than agreeing? (Plat. Gorg. 470°). ἼΑλλο re φιλεῖται ὑπὸ θεῶν ; is it
not loved by the gods? (Plat. Euthyphr. 10°). Xen. Anab. 2, 5%; 4, 7°.
Plat. Rep. 3434,
2009. Norr.—Occasionally we have an interrogative sentence
with πότερον (πότερα) and the second clause with 7 is wanting or
understood : Soph. 4). 460; Thuc. 1, 803,
2010. Nore.—Answers.—Questions like the above can be answered
1. By repeating the emphatic word of the question, with or without
some confirmative adverb. Thus λέγεις οὖν τοῦτο οὗτως ἔχειν ; do you
then say that this is true? Answer: “dé€yw” or “otrw δή (éxe),”
I do say it (= yes).—Apa σύ ye ἔλεξας τοῦτο; Answer: οὔκ ἔλεξα.
2. By φημί, ἐγώ, éywye,—negatively by οὐ φημί, οὐκ ἐγώ, οὐκ ἔγωγε.
Thus dpa σύ γε ἐποίησας τοῦτο; did you do this? Answer: ἔγωγε (yes),
οὐκ ἔγωγε (πο).
3. By affirmative or negative words or phrases; as vai, yes ; πάνυ
γε, κάρτα ye, σφόδρα ye, most surely ; πάνυ μὲν οὖν, of course ; νὴ τὸν
-
212 THE MOODS 2011
Δία, yes, by Zeus! ἀληθῶς (ὀρθῶς) λέγεις, yes (lit. you say truly) ;
μάλιστα (= maxime), certainly ;---οὐ (μή), no; οὐ δῆτα, no truly ;
οὐδαμῶς (μηδαμῶς), by No means ; ἥκιστα, ἥκιστά ye (minime), least of
all, not at all.
FINITE MOODS IN DEPENDENT OR SUBORDINATE
CLAUSES
2011. In the following sections (2012—2184), besides the finite
moods in dependent clauses, these infinitive and participial construc-
tions are conveniently mentioned :—
1. Infinitive with μή after verbs of caution (2056, 1).
2. Infinitive with or without τό or τοῦ for ὅπως and the future
indicative (2056, 2).
3. Infinitive as object of a verb of fearing (2065, 2, and 2070, 1
and 2; with ὥστε, 2070, 3).
4. Infinitive in consecutive clauses (2077, 2080, 2081, 2082, 2086,
2087, 2088). |
5. Infinitive as apodosis after verbs of declaring, thinking, per-
ceiving, commanding, desiring (2125, 2126).
6. Infinitive with πρίν (2176, 1; 2177; 2179; 2182, 4) ;—with
πρότερον ἤ (2182, 1) ;—with ὕστερον 7 (2182, 2) ;—with πάρος (2182, 5);
—with πρὶν 7 (2182, 6).
7. Participle after verbs of fearing (2070, 7).
8. Participle preceded by ὥστε or ὡς and depending on a supple-
mentary participle (2084).
9. Participle standing for a protasis (2121, 2122).
10. Participle standing for an apoddosis after verbs of declaring,
thinking, perceiving, and the like (2125, 1).
11. Participle standing for an apodosis and not depending on
another verb (2127).
OBLIQUE OPTATIVE
2012. 1. In‘order to indicate that a dependent clause represents
the words or thoughts of another and not of the speaker (or
writer), the Greek sometimes uses the optative. This is called
the oblique optative or optative of indirect discourse. But this
oblique optative is used only to a limited extent.
2. The oblique optative is only used when the verb of the
2013 THE MOODS 213
principal clause is in a past (historical) tense; and éven then it
is only used in place of the indicative of direct statement (2016)
and the interrogative subjunctive (2026); the interrogative sub-
junctive may also be changed to the optative when the verb
of the leading clause is in the optative (2033). Other forms of the
verb in subordinate clauses remain unchanged in indirect discourse.
8. Not only is the gnomic aorist (1914) a primary tense, but we
must also count as equivalent to primary tenses all forms of the verb
which do not express past time; thus also, the aorist subjwnctive, the
optative aorist in conditions (with or without ἄν), the aorist optative
in wishes, and the aorist imperative. As the optative is often used
after secondary tenses, but is not allowed after primary tenses, the
grammarians sometimes speak of a sequence of mood. But the
following sections will show that this sequence of mood is by no
means an absolute rule. A sequence of tense, as in Latin, does not
exist in Greek.
I. DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS
2013. 1. A statement or assertion may be made directly or
indirectly. A direct statement or assertion is one given in the
original words of the speaker or writer (oratio recta). An indirect
assertion is one in which the original words of the speaker are
incorporated in a sentence as a subordinate clause dependent on
some verb of saying, knowing, thinking, also showing, hoping, ap-
pearing, and the like (oratio obliqua).
Thus γράφω ἐπιστολήν, I am writing a letter, is a direct
assertion; while in λέγει ὅτι γράφει ἐπιστολήν, the original
words are indirectly quoted as a clause dependent on λέγει, and are
said to stand in indirect discourse.
2. When an indirect assertion does not pass into the infinitive
construction (2192), it is introduced by ὅτι or ὡς, that. The
negative in such dependent assertions is ov. After verbs of
believing and quite regularly after φημί, the infinitive construction
is used (2198).
3. Verbs of saying introducing clauses with ὅτι or ὡς are: λέγω,
εἶπον, say ; διηγέομαι, narrate ; ἀπαγγέλλω, annownce ; ἀποκρΐνομαι,
reply ; βοάω, ἀνακράζω, cry out; δηλόω, show; διδάσκω, to teach.—
214 THE MOODS 2014
But a clause with ὅτι or ὡς may also follow verbs of perception (see
2302) and feeling or emotion (see 1688, 1690).
2014. Nors.—Sometimes ὅτι introduces a direct quotation and is
then practically equivalent to our comma or colon.
Πρόξενος εἶπεν ὅτι αὐτός εἶμι ὃν ζητεῖς, Proxenus said, “1 am the
one whom you seek’’ (Xen. Anab. 2, 415). Thuc. 1, 1374. Dem. 8, 31.—
With later writers ὡς is also used thus; as Plutarch, Themistocles 2.
2015. ΝΟΤΕ.---Ἰ. The conjunction ὅτι is properly the accusative
neuter of ὅστις, while ὡς properly means as or how ; but both ὅτι and
ὡς, that, are used indifferently, except that és seems to be preferred
when the assertion is made less positively, especially after a verb of
denial or opinion or hope (ἀντιλέγειν, ὡς in Dem. 8, 31; ὑπολαμβάνεις,
ὡς in Xen. Cyr. 8, 3%; οἴεσθαι, os in Xen. Mem. 3, 814; ἐλπίζειν, ὡς in
Thue. 5, 9°).
2. Occasionally ὅπως is used in the sense of ὡς, that, seldom in Attic,
but oftener in Herodotus (after a negatived verb); as τῶνδε μη κέτ᾽
ἐλπίσῃς ὅπως τεύξει ποτ᾽, take no longer any hope that thou shalt
gain these things (Soph. El. 963); Xen. Cyr. 3, 39°; Hdt. 2, 497.
3. Διότι (= διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι), which is mostly a causal conjunction,
because, is occasionally used declaratively like ὅτι, that, in Herodotus
and the Orators, often in later writers; as in Hdt. 2, 50'; Isae. 3, 50;
Isoc. 4, 48.
4, Poetic οὕνεκα (from of ἕνεκα) and tragic ὁθούνεκα (from
ὅτου ἕνεκα, both causal conjunctions, are also occasionally
found used declaratively like as; as (οὕνεκα) in Od. 15,
42; Soph. Oed. Tyr. 708; (δθούνεκα) in Aesch. Pro.
330; Soph. Oed. Col. 944.
5. Homer seldom has 6 (neuter of ὅς) for ὅτι, that; as
ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν, 6 τοι κλυτὰ τεύχε᾽ ἔχονται, We know that they
possess thy famous armour (Il. 18, 197); Od. 4, 206;
Tl. 1, 120.
2016. The rule for simple dependent declarative clauses intro-
duced by ὅτι or ὡς is as follows :—
1. If the verb of the leading clause is a primary tense, the
dependent declarative clause retains the same mood and tense it
would have in direct discourse.
2016 THE MOODS 915
2. If the leading verb is a past tense, an indicative (without
av) may be changed to the corresponding tense of the optative,
but very often the original indicative is retained as a more vivid
form of expression. The potential indicative, potential optative,
and indicative of unreal condition (2021) remain unchanged.
Λέγει ὅτι γράφει, he says that he is writing (he says ‘‘ ypapo”’).
Λέγει ὅτι ἔγραφεν, he says that he was writing (he says ‘‘ éypadov ”’).
Λέγει ὅτι γράψει, he says that he will write (he says ‘‘ ypaWo”).
Aéyet ὅτι ἔγραψεν, he says that he wrote (he says “‘ éypawa’’).
Λέγει ὅτι γέγραφεν, he says that he has written (he says ‘‘ γέγραφα ἢ).
ἔγει Ore ἐγεγράφειν, he says that he had written (he says “‘ ἐγε-
γράφη ”).
Λέγει ὅτε γεγράψεται, he says that it will have been written (he says
γεγράψεται ἢ.
The same construction also if the leading verb has λέξει, he will
say, εἴρηκε he has said, λελέξεται, it will have been said (at that time).
Εἶπεν ὅτι γράφει or γράφοι, he said that he was writing (“ γράφω ἢ.
Εἶπεν ὅτι ἔγραφον (or γράφοι), he said that he was writing (2018)
at the time (he said “‘ ἔγραφον ”).
Εἶπεν ὅτι γράψει or γράψοι, he said that he would (will) write (he
said “γράψω ᾽).
Εἶπεν ὅτι ἔγραψεν or γράψειεν, he said that he wrote (he said
{ς ἔγραψα Ψ
Εἶπεν ὅτι γέγραφεν or γεγραφὼς εἴη, he said that he had written
(he said ““ γέγραφα," I have written).
Εἶπεν ὅτι ἐγεγράφειν, he said that he had written (2018) at the time
(he said “ ἐγεγράφη ἢ.
Εἶπεν ὅτι γεγράψεται or γεγράψοιτο, he said that it will have
been written (he said ‘‘ γεγράψεται ᾽᾽).
The same construction also if the leading verb is any other past
tense.
τ
Indicative unchanged.—
Λέγει ὡς ὑβριστής εἶμι, he says that I am insolent, i.e. “ὑβριστὴς εἶ"
(Lys. 24,15). Λέγει yap ὡς οὐδέν ἐστιν ἀδικώτερον φήμης, for he says that
nothing is more unjust than rumour, i.e. ““οὐδέν ἐστιν" (Aeschin, 1, 125).—
"Eda ὅτι βασιλεὺς προσέρχεται, he shouted that the king was advancing
(Xen. Anab. 1, 81), he said ‘‘ προσέρχεται," which might have been changed to
προσέρχοιτο. ᾿Ανέκραγον οἱ παρόντες ὅτι ζῇ ὁ ἀνήρ, the persons present cried
out that the man was living (Xen. Anab. 5, 8.5), “ἢ might have been
216 THE MOODS 2017
changed to ζῴη. ᾿Ἐτόλμᾶ λέγειν ὡς ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐχθροὺς ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν εἵλκυσ ε,
he dared to assert that he drew enemies upon himself on your account (Dem.
22, 59), ‘‘eiAxvoe’’ might have been changed to éAxioee. “He δ᾽ ἀγγέλλων
τις ὡς Ἐλάτεια κατείληπται, some one came announcing that Elatea (has
been) had been taken (Dem. 18, 169), ‘‘ κατείληπται ᾿᾿ might have been changed
to the optative. ᾿Αποκρϊνάμενοι ὅτι πέμψουσι πρέσβεις, εὐθὺς ἀπήλλαξαν,
having replied that they would send ambassadors, they immediately dismissed
them (Thue. 1, 905), πέμψοιεν might have been used.
Indicative changed to Optative.—
Οἱ Θαψακηνοὶ ἔλεγον ὅτι οὐπώποθ᾽ οὗτος ὁ ποταμὸς διαβατὸς γένοιτο, the
Thapsacenes said that this stream had never before been fordable (Xen. Anab.
1, 415), they said “‘éyévero’’ which might have remained unchanged. Κῦρος
ἔλεγεν ὅτι 680s ἔσοιτο πρὸς Baorea, Cyrus said that the march would be
against the king (Xen. ἅπαν. 1, 4"), he said “ἔσται which might have
remained. “Eyvecay οἱ στρατιῶται ὅτι κενὸς ὁ φόβος εἴη, the soldiers perceived
that the fear was groundless (Xen. Anab. 2, 231), the direct form κενὸς 6
φόβος ἐστί might have remained. ᾿Επειρώμην αὐτῷ δεικνύναι, ὅτι οἴοιτο μεν
εἶναι σοφὸς, εἴη δ᾽ οὔ, I tried to show him that he imagined himself to be
wise, but was not so (Plat. Apol. 21°), ““ otera” and ‘‘ ἔστι δ᾽ od’? might have
remained. ἘἘλέχθη ὡς of Πελοποννήσιοι φάρμακα ἐμβεβλήκοιεν ἐς τὰ
φρέᾶτα, it was said that the Peloponnesians had thrown (“ ἐμβεβλήκᾶσι ᾽
poison into the wells (Thuc. 2, 48"). Optative after historical present in
Xen. Cyr. 8, 2".
2017. Norz.—Very often one of two subordinate clauses retains
the indicative and the other is changed to the optative; as ἔλεγον ὅτι
Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν; ᾿Αριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς εἴη. they said that
Cyrus was dead and that Ariaeus had fled (Xen. Anab. 2, 14),
2018. Nore.—l. The imperfect and pluperfect indicative are
seldom changed in indirect discourse to the optative (present and
perfect), lest, if they were so changed, they might be supposed to
represent the present or perfect indicative (compare 2193). Thus
εἶπεν ὅτι γράφοι would regularly be equivalent to εἶπεν “ ypddw,” and
εἶπεν ὅτι γεγραφὼς εἴη for εἶπεν “ yéypada”’; very seldom would εἶπεν
ὅτι γράφοι Stand for εἶπεν “ ἔγραφον ᾿᾿.
2. Very seldom do we find such an imperfect indicative changed
to the optative, and only when the context makes it clear that the
optative does not represent the present or perfect.
Διηγοῦντο ὅτι αὐτοὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους πλέοιεν, they stated that they
themselves had been (or were) sailing against the enemy (Xen. Hell. 1, 7).
2021 THE MOODS 217
Here the context shows that πλέοιεν stands for ἐπλέομεν and not for πλέομεν ;
so in Dem. 30, 20, the context shows that παρείη represents παρὴν and not
πάρεστι.
2019. Norr.—Observe that εἶπεν ὅτι γράφει (γράφοι) and εἶπεν ὅτι
ἔγραφεν are both rendered in English by ‘he said that he was writing,’’
there being apparently only one way in English of translating the
Greek present and imperfect of the indirect discourse ; although εἶπεν
ὅτι ἔγραφεν may be expressed by “‘he said that he was writing at the
time”. Similarly εἶπεν ὅτι γέγραφε (γεγραφὼς εἴη) and εἶπεν ὅτι ἐγεγράφειν
are both translated by ‘‘he said that he had written’’; the latter can
also be expressed by “‘he said that he had (already) written at that
time.”
2020. Norz.—1. Very seldom, after secondary tenses, a present
or perfect indicative is changed to an imperfect or pluperfect (as in
English) instead of remaining unchanged or becoming an optative.
Ἔν πολλῇ δὴ ἀπορίᾳ ἦσαν οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἐννοούμενοι μέν, ὅτι ἐπὶ ταῖς βασιλέως
θύραις ἦσαν, .....προὐδεδώκεσαν δὲ αὐτοὺς οἱ... βάρβαροι, the Greeks were
in great despair, reflecting that they were at the gates of the king,...and that
the barbarians had betrayed them (Xen. Anab. 3, 1°). Here ἦσαν stands for
“ἐσμέν "δια προὐδεδώκεσαν for ‘‘ προδεδώκᾶσι,᾽᾽ which might have been
retained (ἐσμέν naturally becoming εἰσί) or changed to the optative. The
imperfect and pluperfect may be considered as expressive of the writer’s
opinion that all this was the case at that time.
2. In Homer this is the regular construction with
indirect assertions ; as Il. 13, 674; Il. 5,433. Homer
does not use the oblique optative in indirect assertions ;
but he uses it in indirect questions (2024, 3).
2021. Norze.—The potential optative, potential indicative, indicative
in unreal conditions (2102), and optative with εἰ remain unchanged.
Λέγει (or ἔλεγεν) ὅτι ἔγραψεν ἄν, he says (or said) that he would have
written. Λέγει (or ἔλεγεν) ὅτι yp aor ἄν, he said that he would write. ‘O
Θεμιστοκλῆς... . ἀπεκρίνατο, ὅτι οὔτ᾽ dv αὐτὸς Σερίφιος dv ὀνομαστὸς ἐγέν ero,
οὔτ᾽ ἐκεῖνος ᾿Αθηναῖος, Themistocles replied that he would not have become
famous himself if he had been a Seriphian, nor would the other if he had been
an Athenian (Plat. Rep. 329°). ᾿Απεκρίνατο ὅτι πρόσθεν dv ἀποθάνοιεν
i τὰ ὅπλα παραδοίησαν, he replied that they would rather die than give
up their arms (Xen. Anab. 2, 1'”), direct πρόσθεν ἂν ἀποθάνοιμεν --- Ἐδόκει,
ei μὴ ἔφθασαν (unreal condition) ξυλλαβόντες τοὺς ἄνδρας, προδοθῆναι ἂν
τὴν πόλιν (infin. with ἄν), it appeared (to them) that if they had not seized the
218 THE MOODS 2022
men beforehand, the city would have been betrayed (Thue. 6, 61). ἘΕἶπεν ὅτε
ἔλθοι ἂν eis λόγους εἰ ὁμήρους λάβοι, he said that he would come to a
conference with him if he could receive hostages (Xen. Hell. 3, 1”), direct
ἔλθοιμι ἂν εἰ ὁμήρους λάβοιμι.
2022. Norr.—For the treatment in detail of dependent verbs of a
complex sentence which is put into indirect discourse, see Indirect
Discourse,
Il. DEPENDENT QUESTIONS
2023. Dependent or indirect questions are of the nature of
dependent or indirect assertions (2013). Thus τί γράφει ; what
is he writing ? is an independent question; while ἐρωτῶ τί γράφει,
I ask what he is writing, is a dependent question.
2024. Indirect Interrog uiwe Particles.—1. Indirect single questions
are introduced by «i, whether (if), occasionally by dpa.
2. Indirect double or alternate questions are introduced by πότερον
..«ἥ, εἰ....ἥ, εἴτε. ... εἴτε, Whether....or ; πότερον is occasionally omitted.
—For ἢ μή and ἤ οὐ, see 2349, 2—For pronouns and adverbs in
indirect questions, see 1545.
3. Homer seldom introduces an indirect single question
by ἤ (ἠέ); aS ᾧχετο πευσόμενος μετὰ σὸν κλέος, ἥπου ἔτ᾽
εἴης, he went to ask for news of thee, if thou wert yet
alive (Od. 18, 415)—Homer never uses πότερον. For
direct double questions (2008, 3), he has 7 (ἦε)... ἦ (He), a8
in Od. 4, 632. For indirect double questions, he has 7
(ἠέ)... ἢ (He), as in Il. 5, 86; the first member may stand
without any particle, as in Od. 11, 464.
2025. Norr.—After verbs expressing uncertainty, doubt, or inquiry,
the Greek uses only «i, whether, even where the English idiom has
whether not and the answer yes is expected.
Σκέψασθε εἰ dpa τοῦτο καὶ μωρότατον πεποιήκᾶσιν οἱ βάρβαροι, see whether
the barbarians have not done this most foolishly (Xen. Anab. 3, 35). The
answer, yes, they have, is here expected.
2026. The rule for dependent questions is the same as for
dependent assertions (2016).
1. If the verb of the leading clause is a primary tense, the depend-
2026 THE MOODS 219
ent interrogative clause retains the same mood and tense it would
have in direct discourse.
2. If the verb of a leading clause is a past tense, an indicative
(without av) and an interrogative subjunctive (1987) may be changed
to the corresponding tense of the optative, but very often the original
indicative or interrogative subjunctive is retained. The potential
optative, potential indicative, and indicative of unreal condition remain
unchanged. ;
Ἐρωτῶ τί γράφει, I ask (him) what he is writing (direct, I ask τί
ypapeas;). So ἐρωτῶ τί ἔγραφεν (γράψει, ἔγραψεν, γέγραφεν,
ἐγεγράφει), I ask him what he was writing (will write, wrote, has written,
had written); ἐρωτῶ τί γεγράψεται, I ask what will have been written.—
The same construction if the leading verb is any other primary tense.
ἪἨρόμην τί γράφει or ypagdor I asked him what he was writing (i.e.
I asked ri γράφεις ;). So ἠρόμην τί ἔγραφεν (or γράφοι, see 2018, 1);
ἠρόμην τί γράψει Or γράψοι; ἠρόμην τί ἔγραψεν or γράψειε ; ἠρόμην
τί γέγραφεν or γεγραφὼς ein; ἠρόμην τί ἐγεγράφει (ο᾽ γεγραφὼς
εἴη, see 2018, 1); ἠρόμην τί γεγράψεται or γεγράψοιτο.
᾿Αγνοῶ τί ποιῶ (subj.) or ποιήσω (subj.), I know not what I am to
do (directly ri ποιῶ or ποιήσω, subj.). Οὐκ οἶδα εἰ 5156 ἀεί, I know
not if I am to give always (directly διδῶ dei;). Οὐκ οἶδα εἰ ταῦτα εἴπω,
1 know not whether I should say this (directly εἴπω ταῦτα ;).
᾿Ἐβουλεύοντο εἰ ἀπίωσι or ἀπίοιεν, they were deliberating whether
they should depart (directly ἀπίωμεν ;). ᾿Ἐβουλεύοντο εἰ τοῦτο ποιήσωσι or
ποιήσειαν, they were deliberating whether they should do this (directly
τοῦτο ποιήσωμεν ;).
Indicative unchanged.—
Οἶσθα Εὐθύδημον ὁπόσους ὀδόντας ἔχει, you know how many teeth Euthy-
demus has (Plat. Euthyd, 294°), direct ‘‘ πόσους ὀδόμτας ἔχει; ᾿ Μάθε πρῶτον,
τίνες εἰσιν, find out first who they are (Xen. Anab. 4, 8°), direct “ τίνες εἰσιν ; ἢ
Φράσαι, εἴ με σαώσεις, consider whether you will preserve me (Il. 1, 83), direct
σαώσεις; Οὔτε τῷ στρατηγικῷ δῆλον (sc. ἐστι), εἰ συμφέρει στρατηγεῖν,
nor is it clear to one fit to be general whether it is expedient to be a general
(Xen. Mem. 1, 1°), direct “ cvppépa;” Ἴδωμεν ἄρ᾽ οὑτωσὶ γίγνεται πάντα,
let us see whether everything is so produced (Plat. Phaedo 70*), direct ‘‘ dpa
γίγνεται ;”—Hrdpovy τί ποτε λέγει, I was at a loss what he meant (Plat.
Apol. 21°), direct ‘‘ri more λέγει; Ξενοφῶν ἠπορεῖτο 6 τι ποιήσει,
Xenophon was at loss what he should do (Xen. Anab. 7, 3”), direct “τί
ποιήσω ;"’ future indicative for interrogative subjunctive. In these two last
examples we might have had λέγοι and ποιήσοι.
220 THE MOODS 2027
Indicative changed to Optative.—
Ἢ μήτηρ Sinpora τὸν Κῦρον πότερον βούλοιτο μένειν ἢ. ἀπιέναι, the
mother asked Cyrus whether he wished to remain or go away (Xen. Cyr. 1,
3), she asked ‘‘ βούλει ; ᾿ for which βούλεται might have stood. “Hpero 6 τι
ein τὸ σύνθημα, he asked what was the watchword (Xen. Anab. 1, 8"),
?
“‘ri ἐστι; might have remained unchanged. Ἐπυνθάνοντο...., τί τὰ πυρὰ
κατασβεσειαν, they enquired why they had put out the fires (Xen. Anab.
6, 3”), ‘‘ri κατεσβέσατε ; "ἢ might have changed simply to the third person
κατέσβεσαν. ᾿ρώτησαν εἰ ἤδη ἀποκεκριμένοι εἶεν, he asked whether
they had already given an answer (Xen. Anab. 2, 115), ““ ἀποκέκρισθε ;
might have become simply ἀποκέκρινται. Ὅ τι δὲ ποιήσοι, ov διεσήμηνε,
but what he would do he did not indicate (Xen. Anab. 2, 1533), here ποιήσει
might have stood.—This change also in Homer (as Od. 17, 368).
Interrogative Subjunctive unchanged.—
Οὐκ ἔχω τί εἴπω, I know not what I should say, Lat. non habeo quid
dicam (Dem. 9, 54), direct ‘‘ri εἴπω; Ἐρωτᾷ ὁ Κρίτων, πῶς pe θάπτῃ,
Crito asks how he should bury me (Plat. Phaedo 115°), direct “πῶς σε
Oarro;” Ta δὲ ἐκπώματα οὐκ οἶδ᾽ εἰ Χρύσάντᾳ τούτῳ δῶ, I do not know
whether I should give the drinking-cups to Chrysantas here (Xen. Cyr. 8, 45),
direct ‘‘do;’’—EBovdevovro εἴτε κατακαύσωσι τοὺς OnBaiovrs....€ire τι
ἄλλο χρήσωνται, they consulted whether they should burn the Thebans or
do anything else with them (Thuc. 2, 4°), direct “‘ xaraxatowpev;” and
“χρησώμεθα ;" for which κατακαύσειαν and χρήσαιντο might have been used.
Interrogative Subjunctive changed to Optative.—
᾿Ἐβουλεύετο, εἰ πέμποιέν twas ἣ πάντες ἴοιεν, he consulted whether
they should send some or all should go (Xen. Anab. 1, 105), direct ‘* πέμπω-
pev” and ‘iopev;”’ which might have become simply πέμπωσι and ἴωσι.
Tov θεὸν ἐπήροντο εἰ παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴν πόλιν, they asked the god
whether they should give up the city to the Corinthians (Thue. 1, 251), direct
** παραδῶμεν ;;᾿ for which παραδῶσι might have stood.—This change also in |
Homer (as JI. 1, 188—91).
2027. Norz.—Observe that εἰ (not ἐάν), whether, stands before
these interrogative subjunctives.
2028. Norr.—Very often the construction varies (as in 2017), one
of two subordinate questions retaining its original mood, and the
other changed to the optative.
’EruvOdvero αὐτῶν καὶ ὁπόσην xopav διήλασαν καὶ εἰ οἰκοῖτο ἡ χώρᾶ,
he asked of them what distance they had gone over and if the country was
inhabited (Xen. Cyr. 4, 44). So Hdt. 1, 53" has one interrogative a
retained and another changed to the optative.
OT Ea ee
————— a δ»
——— τὰν
2034 THE MOODS 221
2029. Norre.—For the imperfect and pluperfect indicative, see
2018, 1.—For the rare change of a present and perfect indicative to the
imperfect and pluperfect, see 2018, 1, and 2020.
2030. Norre.—As the oblique optative may stand for the indicative
as well as for the interrogative subjunctive, an ambiguity of meaning
may arise. Thus ἠγνόουν 6 τι ποιοῖεν or 6 τι ποιήσειαν (like
Latin ignorabant quid facerent) may mean they knew not what they
were doing or what they did, as well as they knew not what they should
do. The subordinate clause “ ὅ τι ποιοῖεν (ποιήσειαν) ᾿᾿ may stand for
the direct question “τί ποιοῦμεν (ἐποιήσαμεν) ;᾿᾿ as well as for “ri
ποιῶμεν (ποιήσωμεν) ;””
2031. ΝΟΤΕ.---ΤῊΘ potential optative, the potential indicative, and
the indicative in unreal conditions (2012) remain unchanged (compare
2021).
Ἢρώτησε τοὺς προφύλακας, ποῦ ἂν ἴδοι Πρόξενον ἢ Κλέαρχον, he asked
the advanced guards where he could see Proxenus or Clearchus (Xen. Anab.
2,4). Οὐκ of ὅ τι ἂν ἐποίησεν, I know not what he would have done
(Isae. 5, 20). Ἡδέως ἂν ὑμῶν πυθοίμην, τίν᾽ ἄν ποτε γνώμην περὶ ἐμοῦ.
εἴχετε, εἰ μὴ ἐπιτριηράρχησα, I would gladly find out from you
what opinion you would have of me if I had not been trierarch beyond the
legal time (Dem. 50, 67).
2032. Nore.—For the treatment in detail of dependent verbs of a
complex interrogative sentence which is put in indirect discourse, see
Indirect Discourse, 2320—2333.
2033. Norz.—If the leading verb is an optative, an interrogative
subjunctive may be changed by assimilation of mood to the optative.
Οὐκ ἂν ἔχοις...ὅ re χρῷο σαυτῷ, you would not know what to do with
yourself (Plat. Crito 45°); similarly Plat. Gorg. 486”. So also χαρίεντα γοῦν
πάθοιμ᾽ ἂν, εἰ μὴ ᾽χοιμ᾽ ὅποι ταῦτα καταθείην, I should be nicely off if
I should not know any place to put these down (Ar. Eccl. 794). As we
regard the optative in conditional clauses as equivalent to a primary tense
(1957), this change is contrary to the general rule that the optative (without
ay) follows only secondary tenses.
2034. Dependent Clauses after Implied Inquiry.—1. A dependent
question may depend on a verb which does not of itself signify, but
really implies, an inquiry. Such a dependent question has the form
of a protasis of a conditional clause (2089), with ἐάν or εἰ, Some idea
222 THE MOODS 2035
like in order to find out or in case that, is here implied; the force of
the particle ἐάν or εἰ may also be rendered by if perchance.
2. After primary tenses, ἐάν with the subjunctive is generally
found (but also εἰ with the optative); after secondary tenses «i with
the optative (but ἐάν with the subjunctive may be retained).
᾿Αναμιμνήσκεσθε, ἐὰν ἀληθῆ λέγω, call to mind if I speak the truth
(Andocides, 1, 37). Παρεληλύθαμεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν,...ἣν δυνώμεθα παρ᾽
ὑμῶν ἀγαθόν τι εὑρίσκεσθαι, we have come into the city.....to see if we could
obtain some service from you (Xen. Anab. 7, 1%). Σκέψαι ἐὰν καὶ σοὶ
ἐυνδοκῇ, consider if you also agree (Plat. Phaedo 64°), ἘΕἶμι yap és
Σπάρτην...«νόστον πευσόμενος πατρὸς φίλου, ἦν που ἀκούσω, I am going .
to Sparta to ask about my father’s return, if (or to see if) I can hear
anywhere about him (Od. 2, 360). Θέτιδος εἰς ἀνάκτορον θάσσω τόδ᾽ ἐλθοῦσ᾽,
ἤν pe κωλύσῃ θανεῖν, having come to the temple of Thetis here, I sit here
to see if (or in the hope that) she will hinder me from being put to death
(Eur. And. 43).—‘Ixérat....dptypeOa, εἴ τινα πόλιν φράσειας ἡμῖν εὔερον,
we have come as suppliants, to see if, perchance, you could tell us of some
city of good wool (Ar. Av. 120), or we have come in the hope that, etc. Tov
δύστηνον οἴομαι, εἴ πόθεν ἐλθὼν ἀνδρῶν μνηστήρων σκέδασιν...θείη, 1 am
expecting the unhappy man to see if perchance he should come and scatter
the suitors (Od, 20, 224).
Ἐδόκει καλέσαι ἐκείνους, εἰ βούλοιντο cuppayiay ποιήσασθαι, it was
resolved to call them to inquire if they wished to make an alliance (Xen.
Anab. 5, 45). Πέμψαντες παρ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίους πρέσβεις, εἴ πῶς πείσειαν μὴ...
νεωτερίζειν, they sent ambassadors to the Athenians to see if they could
persuade them not to take any new measures (Thuc. 1, 58). ᾿Ἐδέοντο τοῦ
᾿Αρισταγόρεω, εἴ κως αὐτοῖσι παράσχοι δύναμιν, they besought Aristagoras
if he could in any way furnish them with a force (Hdt. 5, 30'). “Horo κάτω
ὁρόων, ποτιδέγμενος εἴ τί μιν εἴποι, he sat looking down, waiting if she
would speak to him (Od. 23, 91).—Subjunctive with ἐάν retained after
secondary tense: ἥδ᾽ ἡ κωμῳδίᾷ ζητοῦσ᾽ ἦλθ᾽, ἤν που ᾿᾽πιτύχῃ θεᾶταῖς οὕτω ᾿
σοφοῖς, this comedy has come seeking, if perhaps it meet with spectators so
clever (Ar. Nub. 534).
2035. Norr.—These dependent clauses are really protases of
conditional sentences (2089); but they resemble indirect questions
so closely that they are introduced here.
2036. Norr.—1. Such dependent clauses are especially
frequent and varied in Homer, who has εἴ κε (ai xe) and
nv (= ἐάν).
2. Rarely Homer has εἴ xe with the optative in such
C—O
~ 2040 THE MOODS 223
clauses; aS ἠνώγει.... εἰπέμεν, εἴ KE περ ὕμμι φίλον...
γένοιτο, he bade me speak, rf perchance it should be
agreeable to you (Il. 7, 387).—And rarely he has εἰ with
the subjunctive; as in Jl. 15, 16 (οὐ μὴν οἶδ᾽ ei...
ἐπαύρηαι).
III, FINAL CLAUSES
2037. Final clauses express purpose. They are introduced by
iva, ὡς, ὅπως, and (Epic and Lyric) ὄφρα, that, in order that = Lat.
ut; and by.iva μή, ὡς μή, ὅπως μή, ὄφρα μή, or simple μή, that
not, in order that not = Lat. né.
2038. Nore.—The origin of ἵνα is uncertain. ‘Qs is originally a
relative adverb of manner, in which way, how. Ὅπως is by origin an
indefinite relative adverb of manner. “Od¢pa is originally a temporal
particle, meaning while, wntil (2172).
2039. Final clauses are of two kinds: those expressing absolute
purpose (2040), and object-clauses after verbs of effort, care, or
attention (2050). For object-clauses after verbs of fearing, see
2062.
2040. Final Clauses of Absolute Purpose.—Final clauses take
the subjunctive after primary tenses, and the optative after
secondary tenses; but the subjunctive is very often retained after
secondary tenses. Thus γράφω ἵνα μάθῃς, I write that you
may learn; ἔγραψα iva μάθοις (or μάθῃς), I wrote that you
might learn.
Kivas τρέφεις, ἵν α σοι τοὺς λύκους....ἀπερύκωσιν, you rear dogs, that
they may keep off wolves for you (Xen. Mem. 2, 95). Παρακαλεῖς ἰατροὺς,
ὅπως μὴ ἀποθάνῃ, you call in physicians, that he may not die (Xen.
Mem. 2, 105). Ἐμοὶ δὸς αὐτὰ, ὅ πω ς....δια ὃ ὦ, give them to me, that I may
distribute (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4°). Εἴπω τι δῆτ᾽ κἄλλ᾽, ἵν᾽ ὀργίσῃ πλέον ; shall
I say still more, that you may be=more angry? (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 364). Οὐχ
ὅσον τάχος δῆτ᾽ αὐτὸν ἄξεις δεῦρο, μή τις...«ἀναρπάσῃ; will you not bring
him here as quickly as possible, lest some one may seize him? (Soph. A).
987). Κατανεύσομαι, ὄφρα πεποίθῃς, 1 will nod that thou mayest have
confidence (Il. 1, 524).—Tovrov ἕνεκα φίλων ᾧετο δεῖσθαι, ὦ ς συνεργοὺς ἔχοι,
for this purpose he thought he needed friends, that he might have co-workers
(Xen. Anab. 1, 9”). Elodye (historical present) δόμους, ἵν᾽ ἄλλος μή τις
924 THE MOODS 2041
εἰδείη rade, she led me into the tent, that no one else might know it (Eur.
Hec. 1148). Φίλος ἐβούλετο εἶναι τοῖς μέγιστον δυναμένοις, ἵνα ἀδικῶν μὴ
διδοίη δίκην, he wished to be a friend to the most powerful, that he might
do wrong and not suffer punishment (Xen. Anab. 2, 6*).—Subjunctive
retained: Τὰ mdoia...xaréxavoev, iva μὴ Κῦρος διαβῇ, he burned the
vessels, that Cyrus might not cross (Xen. Anab. 1, 4,5). Ναῦς οἱ Κορίνθιοι
ἐπλήρουν, ὅπως ναυμαχίᾶᾷς ἀποπειράσωσι, the Corinthians manned
ships, that they might try a naval battle (Thue. 7, 172).
2041. Norzr.—The subjunctive in final clauses is the subjunctive
of desire (2064, 1986) ; the optative is the oblique optative.
2042. Norn.—1. The retention of the subjunctive in final clauses
(also with verbs of fearing) after secondary tenses is much preferred
by Thucydides (especially), Herodotus, and Aeschines; somewhat by
Lysias and Isocrates. The optative is much preferred by Homer,
Pindar, the Attic dramatists, Isaeus, Plato, and especially Xenophon.
In Demosthenes the usage is about equally divided.
2. The optative and subjunctive may be used in the same sentence ;
as in Thue. 6, 96}.
3. The few rare cases of the optative in final clauses
after a primary tense (as in Jl, 1, 344), are perhaps
doubtful.
2043. Norr.—l1. “Iva final is almost exclusively used in Plato and
the orators, and mostly in Comedy. Ὅπως final is largely preferred by
Thucydides and Xenophon. ‘Qs is by far the favourite final particle
in Tragedy ; it is rare in Aristophanes and Herodotus ; it is less common
than ὅπως or ἵνα in Xenophon; while it is almost entirely absent from
other Attic prose.—In Homer ὄφρα is greatly preferred as a final
particle.
2. For that not in final clauses, simple μή is largely preferred to
iva μή, ὡς μή, etc., by Homer, Hesiod, and the lyric poets; simple μή
is also somewhat preferred in Tragedy. Herodotus and Aristophanes
decidedly prefer iva μή, etc. In Attic prose iva μή, ὡς μή, and ὅπως μή
are the final negative particles in regular use. Simple μή in final
clauses is rare in Attic prose: Plato and Xenophon together have over
thirty examples; Thucydides only about five; in the orators it hardly
ever occurs.
2044, Nors.— Assimilation of Mood.—A final clause may be in the
optative when it depends on an optative.
—=—- rr ?- |. —_— , —_ =
2046 THE MOODS 225
Οὐκ ἐπιστάμεθα, ὅτι βασιλεὺς ἡμᾶς ἀπολέσαι περὶ παντὸς ἂν ποιήσαιτο,
iva καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις Ἕλλησι φόβος εἴη; do we not know that the king would,
above all, like to destroy us, so that the Greeks might be afraid? (Xen. Anab.
2, 4°). Compare 2033 and 2048.
2045. Norr.—Addition of ἄν (xé).—The final particles ὡς, ὅπως,
and ὄφρα sometimes add ἄν (κέ), which hardly modifies their meaning.
But iva final and μή final never add ἄν. “Iva ἄν means wherever (1964,
2), and μή can be used with the potential optative with ἄν after verbs
of fearing (2066).
1. Ὡς dy with the subjunctive occurs in Xenophon (almost never
in other Attic prose); as ὡς δ᾽ ἂν μάθῃ ς,...ἀντάκουσον, that you
may learn, hear the other side (Xen. Anab. 2, 51).
2. Ὅπως av with the subjunctive occurs in Attic prose and poetry ;
as ἄξεις ἡμᾶς, ὅπως ἂν εἰδῶμεν, you shall lead us, that we may
know (Xen. Cyr. 5, 27); Soph. Hl. 41; Ar. Lys. 1223; Dem. 19, 298.
3. Ὡς ἄν and ὡς κέ with the subjunctive are more
common in Homer than ὡς alone; as Od. 5, 144; Jl. 1,
32.—Herodotus also has ὡς av; as in 1, 36+.
4. "Οφρ᾽ ἄν and ὄφρα κέ rarely occur in Homer; as Od.
3, 359; 17, 10.
5. ‘Os av and ὡς κέ sometimes occur in Homer with the
optative after secondary tenses, rarely after primary
tenses; as Jl. 12, 26; Od. 2, 53. "Οφρα κέ and ὀφρ᾽ ἂν
hardly ever occur. Herodotus has ὡς dv and ὅκως ἄν
with the optative in a few cases after secondary tenses ;
as 1, 99%; 7, 176’ (after a primary tense in 1, 1104). In
all these cases the optative with ἄν is potential rather
than final—So also ws ἄν and ὅπως ἄν with the optative
(after secondary tenses) are very rare in Attic prose: ὡς
ἄν with the optative occurring mostly in Xenophon (as
Cyr. 7, 5°"); ὅπως ἄν occurring very rarely in Xenophon
(Hell, 4, 815), and only once in Thucydides (7, 65%).
2046. Norz.— Future Indicative for Subjunctive—With
ὅπως, and very rarely with ὡς, ὄφρα, and μή, the future
indicative is also used in final clauses. This occurs very
rarely, and only several times in prose ; as otya@’, ὅπως
μή πεύσεταί τις, be silent, that no one may hear
(Aesch, Cho. 265).
15
226 THE MOODS 2047
2047. Norr.—Ellipsis of the leading verb occasionally occurs with
iva, rarely with os; aS ἵνα συντέμω ταῦτα, to cut this short (Dem.
45, 5); ὡς συντέμω (Eur. Tro. 441); some expression like I (wish to)
say this, is understood. So iva ri, that what (should happen)? (Ar.
Nub. 1192).
2048. Unattainable Purpose.—In Attic Greek iva, and sometimes
also ὅπως and ὡς, are used with past tenses of the indicative to
express a purpose which is not or was not attained. Such an
imaginary purpose depends on some unreal condition or state-
ment (2102, 2004) or unattainable wish, or on some unperformed
action ; the tenses of the final clause here have the same force as
in unreal conditions (2102). Thus ἔγραψα ἂν, iva ἔμαθες, I
should have written, that you might learn, implying I did not write
and you did not learn.
Πρὸ πολλοῦ ἂν ἐποιησάμην ἐπιστεῖλαι σοι ταῦτα, ἵν᾽, εἰ ἐπείσθης, μὴ
τηλικούτῳ κινδύνῳ περιέπεσες, I should have esteemed it as very important
to have sent you this little, so that, if you had been persuaded, you might not
have fallen into so great a danger (Isoc. Epist. 2,12). Ei yap ὥφελον οἷοί re
εἶναι of πολλοὶ τὰ μέγιστα κακὰ ἐξεργάζεσθαι, iva οἷοι τ ἦσαν αὖ καὶ ἀγαθὰ
τὰ μέγιστα, O that most persons were able to accomplish the greatest mischief,
that they might be able to accomplish the greatest good (Plat. Crito 443),
implying that they cannot. Ti μ᾽ οὐ λαβὼν ἔκτεινας εὐθὺς, ὡς ἔδειξα
μήποτε ἐμαυτόν ; why did you not seize and instantly slay me, that I might
never have shown myself? (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1391), implying but you did not
slay me and I have shown myself. Ἐχρῆν oe Πηγάσου ζεῦξαι πτερὸν, ὅπως
ἐφαίν ου...-«τραγικώτερος, you ought to have saddled the wing of Pegasus,
that you might appear (Ar. Pax 135), implying but you did not, and
therefore did not appear. Plat. Leg. 959. Eur. frag. 442. Lys. 3,21. Dem.
29, 17.—In prose ὡς is so found only in Xen. Anab. 7, 1”; and ὅπως in
Dem. 36, 20.
This construction is an assimilation of mood, as in 2033, 2044.
2049. Norn.—In several instances we find ἄν added after ἵνα and
ὅπως, to these indicatives : Isae. 11,6; Plat. Leg. 959° (ὅπως ἂν ἐγίγνετο) ;
Pseudo-Plat. Sisyph. 387". The ἄν probably does not belong here.
2050. Object-Clauses after Verbs of Effort, etc.—1. After verbs
denoting effort, care, or attention, object-clauses are introduced by
ὅπως and ὅπως μή, and regularly take the future indicative after
primary and secondary tenses. After secondary tenses the future
2053 THE MOODS 227
op‘ative is occasionally used. Thus φροντίζω ὅπως τοῦτο
γενήσεται, I take care that this may happen; ἐφρόντιζον
ὅπως μή τοῦτο γενήσεται (Or γενήσοιτο), I took care
that this should not happen.
Tov ποιμένα ἐπιμελεῖσθαι δεῖ, ὅπως σῶαι ἔσονται ai oles, a shepherd
must take care that the flock be safe (Xen. Mem. 3, 2'). Φρόντιζε ὅπως μὴδεν
ἀνάξιον τῆς tipns ταύτης πράξεις, take care that you do nothing unworthy
of that rank (Isoc. 2, 37). Ἐκεῖνο μόνον ἐτήρουν, ὅπως μηδὲν τῶν πατρίων
καταλύσουσι, for that only they cared, not to abolish any of the institutions
of their fathers (Isoc. 7, 30). "Empaocov ὅπως tis βοήθεια ἥξει, they were
trying to effect that some help should come (‘Thuc. 3, 4°).—Optative Future :
ἐπεμελεῖτο ὅπως μὴ ἄσϊτοί ποτε ἔσοιντο, he took care that they should
never be without food (Xen. Cyr. 8, 1**), here ἔσονται would be more usual.
—For ὅπως and ὅπως μή with the future indicative in commands, see 2058.
2. Such object-clauses may also take the subjunctive present
or aorist, but this is much less common. The optative present or
aorist occasionally stands after secondary tenses.
"“Erpacoov ὅπως πόλεμος γένηται, he was trying to effect that a war
might be brought about (Thue. 1, 57*). Dem. 6, 25.—Optative Present and
Aorist: Xen. Symp. 3,5; Anab. 1, 8".
3. For object-clauses after verbs of caution, see also 2055.
2051. Norze.—Such verbs of effort, attention, and care are: ém-
μελέομαι, μέλει μοι, φροντίζω, to take care, to strive for ; τηρέω, to give
heed to ; προθῦμέομαι, σπουδάζω, to be eager or zealous ; πράσσω, to do,
to effect ; παρασκευάζομαι, to prepare, to work for; pnxavdoua, to
contrive ; ὁράω, σκοπέω, to see to it, to consider ; and the like.—The
future after these verbs is the future of expectation (1992).
2052. Norr.—As ὅπως is properly a relative, how, in such a way
as, it is occasionally replaced by ὅπῃ or ὅτῳ τρόπῳ, or ἐξ ὅτου τρόπου
(Thue. 1, 657; 4, 128°; Dem. 16, 19). We occasionally find οὕτως,
thus, so, with the leading verb, corresponding to ὅπως with the
subordinate (Xen. Cyr. 1, 67).
2053. Norz.—1. In Attic Greek we occasionally find ὅπως dv with
the subjunctive in object-clauses, but very rarely except in Xenophon,
Aristophanes, and Plato. The original relative force of ὅπως, how,
is here more apparent, Thus τῶν ἄλλων ἐπιμελεῖται ὅπως ἂν θηρ ὥ-
σιν, he takes care that the others hunt (Xen. Cyr. 1, 310); Ar, Εᾳ.
917; Plat, Rep. 433°,
228 THE MOODS 2054
2. In a few cases Xenophon has ὡς or (very rarely) ὡς ἄν with the
subjunctive in object-clauses; as ἐπιμελοῦνται ὡς ἔχῃ οὕτως, they
take care that this may be done (Xen. Oec. 20, 8); Hipparch. 9, 2 (ὡς
dv). He has ὡς (like ὅπως) with the future indicative twice, once with
the future optative (Cyr. 3, 218; Hell. 2, 1", opt.).
3. Cases of ὅπως ἄν with the optative, which are occasionally found
in Xenophon and almost never in other Attic writers, are potential
optatives ; as in Xen. Oec. 2,9; Cyr. 7, 5%.
4. Herodotus has ὡς with the future indicative in two or
three places (as in 3, 84!); ὡς ἄν with subjunctive only
in 3, 85°. He has ὅκως ἀν with the optative several
times (as in 2, 1265), ὅκως ἄν with subjunctive in 1, 203,
2054. Norz.—1. In Homer object-clauses with ὅπως or
ὡς nearly always take the subjunctive after primary
tenses, and the optative (not future) after secondary
tenses. The particle κέ usually accompanies és and
the subjunctive, sometimes also ὅπως.
Πείρᾷ ὅπως κεν δὴ σὴν πατρίδα γαῖαν ἵκηαι, try to reach
at length thy native country (Od. 4, 545). Φραζόμεθα ’Apyei-
oow ὅπως by ἄριστα γένοιτο, we were deliberating how
the best might ocewr for the Greeks (Od. 3, 129). Φράσσεται
ὥς κε vénrat, he will devise that he may come home (Od.
1, 205). Τοῖσι δὲ πόλλ᾽ ἐπέτελλε.....πειρᾶν ὡς πεπίθοιεν
ἀμύμονα Πηλεΐωνα, he gave them many orders to try how they
might persuade the blameless son of Peleus (Il. 9, 179).
_2. Rarely does an object-clause in Homer take the
future indicative: Od. 1, 57 (ὅπως) ; 4, 162 (ὄφρα) ; 17, .
6 (6 bpa).
3. Where ὅπως is found with the future indicative, it is
mostly an indirect interrogative (“‘how’’) ; as φράζεο νῦν
ὅππως κε πόλιν...σαώσεις, See now how you are to
save the city (Il. 17, 144).
δ, te i ὦ... ee ee
2055. Nore.—Obyject-Clauses with pyn.—1. After verbs expressing”
caution, Attic writers and Herodotus sometimes use simple μή with
the subjunctive (rarely future indicative), as well as the regular ὅπως
μή with the future. Such clauses belong also under 2065.
Τοὺς δὲ ἀνθρώπους αὖ φυλάξη, μή σε...ἀτιμάσωσιν, you will also
have regard to the opinion of men, lest they should despise you (Xen. Mem.
2058 THE MOODS 229
2, 2). Hdt. 7, 103*.—Future: ὅρᾷ μὴ πολλῶν ἑκάστῳ χειρῶν δεήσει,
take care lest each one of us may need many hands (Xen. Cyr. 4, 18).—
Compare the occasional use of ὅπως μή for μή after verbs of fearing (2068).
2. In Homer μή with the subjunctive or optative is
always used in object-clauses for the regular Attic ὅπως
py: see Il. 5, 411; and 21, 517.
2056. Norr.—l. Verbs of cawtion may also be followed by the
infinitive with μή (2070, 1); as εὐλαβοῦντο μηδέποτε ἐμποδὼν...
εἶναι, they took care never to be in the way (Plat. Prot. 315").
2. Sometimes the infinitive with or without τό or τοῦ takes the
place of ὅπως with the future indicative, especially after ἐπιμελέομαι.
*Aci τινα ἐπεμέλοντο σφῶν αὐτῶν ἐν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς εἶν αι, they always took
care that one of themselves should be vn the offices (Thue. 6, 54°). ᾿Αναγκάζονται
τὸ ὑπὸ οἴνου μὴ σφάλλεσθαι ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, they are obliged to take care
not to stagger from the effects of wine (Xen. Rep. Lac. 5, 7). ᾿Ἐπιμελοῦμαι
τοῦ ἀρέσαι τῷ ἀρέσκοντί μοι, I take care to please him who — me
(Xen. Mem. 2, 6%), See the syntax of the infinitive.
2057. Norzr.—Some verbs which regularly take an infinitive, are
sometimes followed by an object-clause. These are verbs of desiring,
contrwing, requesting, commanding, and the like.
Παρεσκευάζοντο ὅπως ἐσβαλοῦσιν ἐς τὴν κάτω Μακεδονίᾶν,
they prepared to make an incursion into lower Macedonia (Thuc. 2, 991).
Ἐδέοντο τῶν στρατηγῶν ὅκως ἀπάγοιέν σφέας ὀπίσω, they requested
the commanders to lead them home (Hdt. 9, 117). Πειρᾶσθαι ὅπως....σωζώμεθα,
to try to save ourselves (Xen. Anab. 3, 2°). Οἱ ἕνδεκα παραγγέλλουσι
ὅπως ἂν τῇδε τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τελευτήσῃ, the Eleven commanded him to die on
this day (Plat. Phaedo 59°), Διακελεύονται ὅπως, ἐπειδὰν ἀνὴρ γένηται,
τ᾽ μ.ωρήσεται πάντας τοὺς τοιούτους, they exhort him to take vengeance on
all such when he becomes a man (Plat. Rep. 549).
2058. “Ὅπως and Ὅπως μή in Commands (Fut. Indic.).—In
Attic Greek the future indicative with ὅπως or ὅπως μή is some-
times used independently in commands or exhortations, or even
warnings. This occurs mostly in the second person. Sometimes
φέρε or ἄγε, come now, introduces these clauses.
Ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίᾶς, (prove yourselves to) be
men worthy of freedom (Xen. Anab. 1, 7). Ὅπως μοι μὴ ἐρεῖς ὅτι ἔστι
τὰ δώδεκα δὶς ἔξ, (see to it that you) do not tell me that twice six are twelve
(Plat. Rep. 337°). Φέρε δὴ ὅπως μεμνησόμεθα ταῦτα, come now, let us
remember this (Plat. Gorg. 495"). Ὅπως ταῦτα μηδεὶς πεύσεται, let no
one find this out (Lys. 1, 21).—In Hat. an example (3, 142°).
230 THE MOODS 2059
2059. Norr.—This construction is probably due to the omission
of some imperative like σκόπει (σκοπεῖτε) or φυλάττου (φυλάττεσθε) and
occurs only in conversation.
2060. Norr.—Rarely ὅπως μή is so used with the subjunctive ; as
in Xen. Symp. 4, 8.
2061. Norr.—In several cases ὅπως μή is used independently with
the subjunctive to express warning; aS ὅπως ye μὴ ὃ σοφιστὴς...
ἐξαπατήσῃ ἡμᾶς, don’t let the sophist deceive us (Plat. Prot. 313°).
IV. CLAUSES AFTER VERBS OF FEARING
2062. After verbs and expressions denoting fear, the object of
the fear is introduced by μή, that, lest, or μὴ οὐ, that not, lest not.
2063. If the fear is expresssed that something may happen or
may not happen, the object of the fear takes the subjunctive with
μή or μὴ ov after primary and secondary tenses; but after
secondary tenses the optative may be used. Thus φοβοῦμαι μὴ
τοῦτο γένηται, I fear that this may happen ; ἐφοβούμην μὴ od
τοῦτο γένηται (or γένοιτο), I feared that this might not happen.
Φοβεῖται μὴ τὰ ἔσχατα πάθῃ, he is afraid that he may suffer the
severest punishment (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1%). Δέδοικα μὴ οὐ ὅσιον 7j....dmayopev-
ev, I fear it may be sinful to lose heart (Plat. Rep. 368°). ᾿Εφοβήθησαν μὴ
καὶ ἐπὶ σφᾶς ὁ στρατὸς χωρήσῃ, they feared that the army might also advance
against them (Thuc. 2, 1015. Thue. 1, 91°.—Subjunctive changed to
Optative : Οὐκέτι ἐπετίθεντο of πολέμιοι..., δεδοικότες μὴ ἀποτμηθείησαν,
the enemy no longer made attacks, fearing that (or lest) they might be cut off
(Xen. Anab. 3,4”). ᾿Ἔδεισαν μὴ λύττα τις ὥσπερ κυσὶν ἡμῖν ἐμπεπτώκοι,
they feared that some madness like that of dogs may have seized our men
(Xen. Anab. 5, 735).---Δέδοικα μή μοι βεβήκῃ ὁ πατήρ, I fear my father may.
prove to have passed away (Soph. Phil. 493). Dem. 18, 33.
2064. Nore.—The subjunctive is originally a subjunctive of desire
(1986 and 2041). Thus φοβοῦμαι μὴ τοῦτο γένηται would mean ““ I am
afraid: this must not (or should not) happen”. The optative is the
oblique optative.
2065. Νοτε.---1. Verbs and expressions denoting caution, danger,
or the like, are also followed by this construction, as they imply fear.
Such are φροντίζω, dxvéw, ἀθυμέω, ἀπιστέω, ὑποπτεύω, φυλάττομαι, ἐνθῦ-
. Κ΄ Δ... δ᾽ ὁ eee μα νὰ.
5067 THE MOODS 231
peopat, εὐλαβέομαι, ἐννοέομαι, ὁράω, σκοπέω, αἰχύνομαι, κίνδῦνός ἐστι, and
others.
Φροντίζω μὴ κράτιστον ἦ μοι avyav, I am anxious lest it may be best for me
to be silent (Xen. Mem. 4, 2°). ᾿Οκνῶ μή μοι 6 Avoids ταπεινὸς hav ἢ,
I am afraid that Lysias appears tame (Plat. Phaedr. 257°). Ἠθύμησάν
τινες, ἐννοούμενοι μὴ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, εἰ καίοιεν, οὐκ ἔχοιεν ὁπόθεν λαμβάνοιεν,
some were disheartened, being apprehensive that if they should burn them they
would have no place whence to get supplies (Xen. Anab. 3, 5°). Ὑπώπτευε
μὴ ἀπάτης ἕνεκα λέγοιτο, he suspected that it might be said for the sake
of deception (Xen. Hell. 6, 251), EvAaBod μὴ φανῇς κακὸς γεγώς, beware, lest
you appear to be born of base spirit (Soph. Trach. 1129). “Opa μὴ περὶ τοῖς
φιλτάτοις κυβεύῃς, see that you do not gamble for your dearest interests
(Plat. Prot. 8145). Σκοπῶ μὴ δόξαν ὑμῖν παράσχωμαι περὶ pixpod πολλὰ
λέγειν, I am considering lest I offer the appearance of talking too much on a
small subject (Plat. Leg. 641°). Ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν αἰσχύνομαι, μὴ δόξῃ τὸ πρᾶγμα
ἀνανδρίᾳ τινι πεπρᾶχθαι, I am ashamed of you lest the thing appear to have
occurred through cowardice (Plat. Crito 45°). Κίινδῦνός ἐστι, μὴ pera-
βάλωνται, there is danger lest they change (Isoc. 14, 38).
2. For the construction of αἰσχύνομαι, see also 2294 ; of Kivdives
ἐστι, see also 2206.—When verbs of fearing express fear or hesitation
to do anything, they take the infinitive; φοβοῦνται πανταχοῦ λέγειν,
they are everywhere afraid to say (Xen. Cyr. 8, 213).
2066. ΝΟΤΕ.---Α verb of fearing may be followed by a potential
optative; as in Thue. 2, 93?.
2067. Nore.—Leading Clause Omitted.—The verb or expression
of fear, caution or danger, may be wanting, and the subjunctive (or
indicative) with μή or μὴ οὐ be used independently.
1. Most commonly such an independent subjunctive with μή or μὴ
ov expresses an apprehension that something may or may not be so, or
is equivalent to a careful or mild assertion. It is properly a desire,
may this not happen (as I fear it may).
Μὴ ἀγροικότερον ἦ τὸ ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν, (I am afraid or I suspect) it may be
too rude to say what is true (Plat. Gorg. 462°). Μὴ od τοῦτ᾽ ἦ χαλεπὸν,
θάνατον ἐκφυγεῖν, (I suspect) this may not be the hard thing, to escape death
(Plat. Apol. 39*).—This construction is frequent in Plato and occurs also in
Aristotle (in Hdt. only 5, 79°, in Dem. only 1, 26).—Very rarely ὅπως μή
with the subjunctive is so found, as in Plat. Cratyl. 430°.—Rarely Plato
uses μή with the subjunctive as a question with the answer no expected ; as
in Rep. 603°. ;
232 THE MOODS 2068 °
2. Not often do we find - μή or μὴ οὐ with the indicative to denote
an apprehension or mild statement that something is taking place or
took piace (compare 2069); as μὴ οὐ τοιαύτην λαμβάνεις σου τὴν
μάθησιν ἔσεσθαι, (1 suspect) you do not imagine your learning will be .
like this (Plat. Prot. 312"); Plat. Meno 89°.
8. In Homer independent clauses with μή and the *
subjunctive may express apprehension (as above, 2067,
1), but the idea of a desire is also prominent; as μή τι
χολωσάμενος ῥέξῃ κακὸν vias ᾿Αχαιῶν, (I am afraid) he
may in his wrath do some harm to the sons of the
Achaeans or may he not do harm, as I fear he may (Il.
2, 195).
2068. Nore.—l. Occasionally a verb of fearing or the like is
followed by an object-clause (2050) with ὅπως μή and the future
indicative, or the subjunctive (optative).
Δέδοικα ὅπως μὴ ἀνάγκη γενήσεται, I fear that a necessity may
arise (Dem. 9, 75). Ὁρᾶτε ὅπως μὴ αἴσχϊον...πράξωμεν, see that we
do not come off more disgracefully (Thuc. 1, 82°). Xen. Mem. 2, 9? (opt.).
2, Very rarely do we find μή alone with the future indicative after
verbs of fearing; as δέδοικα μὴ.....«μεθέξω, I fear that I shall have a
share....(Xen. Cyr. 2, 3°) ;—so with future optative after past tenses
(Isoc. 17, 22).
2069. If the fear relates to something present or past, the
indicative is used with μή and μὴ ov.
Ὁρῶμεν μὴ Νικίᾶς οἴεταί τι λέγειν, let us be careful lest Nicias is
thinking that he says something (Plat. Lach. 196°). Ar. Nub. 493.—"Opa
μὴ παίζων ἔλεγεν, be careful lest he was speaking in jest (Plat. Theaet. 145).
Od. 5, 800.---Φοβούμεθα μὴ ἀμφοτέρων ἅμα ἡμαρτήκαμεν, we fear that
we have missed both together (Thuc. 3, 53%).
2070. Other Constructions with Verbs of Fearing.—
1. Object-Infinitive.—(a) A verb of fearing may take an object-
infinitive (2207), sometimes with the article, to express the object of
the fear; as φοβοῦμαι διελέγχειν σε, I am afraid to refute you (Plat,
Gorg. 457°), different from φοβοῦμαι μὴ διελέγχω (Subj.) σε, which would
mean I am afraid that I may refute you ; δείσᾶς τὸ ζῆν, becoming afraid
to live (Plat. Apol. 28*)—(b) After verbs of caution this infinitive often
has μή (2351); as φυλάξεται συνάπτειν μάχην, he will guard against
joining battle = φυλάξεται μὴ συνάπτῃ μάχην (Xen. Mem. 3, 4");
2071 THE MOODS 233
φυλαττόμενος τὸ ἀπεχθάνεσθαι, taking care not to become hated or being
anxious not to incur enmity (Xen. Cyr. 3, 157); ἐφυλάξατο μὴ ἄπιστος
γενέσθαι, he guarded against being distrusted (Xen. Ag. 8, 5).—
When the infinitive is here used without the article, the verb of
fearing expresses unwillingness or hesitation to do anything (see
2065, 2).
2. Future Infinitive.—A verb of fearing may be used with the
future infinitive to express a fear that something may happen; as
οὐ φοβούμεθα ἐχλασσώσεσθαι, we do not fear that we may get the
worst of it (Thue. 5, 105°).
3. The infinitive with ὥστε may be used after verbs of fearing to
express the result (2080) of the fear or of the cause of the fear.
Δεδιέναι δὲ φασκόντων Κερκυραίων ἔχειν, ὥστε Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ ᾿Αθη-
ναίοις ἀπέχθεσθαι, the Corcyraeans alleged that they were afraid to keep
him, on account of the danger of becoming hated by the Lacedaemonians and
Athenians (Thuc. 1, 136°).
4. A causal clause with ὅτι, because (2072), may follow a verb
of fearing ; as in Xen. Hell. 3, 5”.
5. An interrogative clause with εἰ, τίς, or ὅπως, or other interroga-
tive, occasionally follows a verb of fearing ; as οὐ δέδοικα, εἰ Φίλιππος
ζῇ, I have no fear whether Philip is alive (Dem. 19, 289); Plat.
Theaet. 195° (6 τι); Eur. Iph. Tawr. 995 (ὅπως); Xen. Cyr. 4, δ᾽"
(was).
6. A declarative clause (2013 ; 2015, 2) with ὡς or ὕπως occasion-
ally takes the place of μή with the subjunctive, but usually only the
verb of fearing is negatived.
Μὴ φοβοῦ ὡς ἀπορήσεις, do not fear that you will want (Xen. Cyr.
5, 2). Μὴ δείσητε, ὡς οὐχ ἡδέως καθευδήσετε, do not fear that you
will not sleep comfortably (Xen. Cyr. 6, 2°). Μὴ rpéons, ὅπως σέ τις....
ἀποσπάσει, do not fear that any one will tear you away (Eur. Heracl.
248).
7. A participle is rarely used; as δέδοικα (σε) λίᾶν ἡδονῇ νῖκω-
μένην, I am afraid about you, because you are too much conquered by
joy (Soph. El. 1272).
Vv. CAUSAL CLAUSES
2071. 1. Causal clauses express a cause or reason. They are
introduced by the causal particles ὅτι, διότι, διόπερ, ὡς, because ; ἐπεί,
ἐπειδή, ὅτε, ὁπότε, since.
234 THE MOODS 2072
2. Poetic are οὕνεκα and (tragic) δθούνεκα, because (Il. 1,
111; Soph. Ay. 123); εἶτε, since (Soph. Oed. Col. 84).
Homeric are 6 or 6 re, because (Il. 18, 197; 1, 244).
New-lIonic is ὅκου (= ὅπου), since (Hdt. 1, 68?).
2072. 1. Causal clauses are dependent assertions (2016) and
take, according to the sense, the indicative, the potential Se .
or the potential indicative. The negative is ov.
᾿Ἐνόμιζον ἡσσᾶσθαι, ὅτι ov πολὺ ἐνίκων, they thought they were beaten
because they were not decidedly victorious (Thuc. 7, 34"). Συνήδετο τῷ
Ξενοφῶντι ὅτι ἐσέσῳστο, he congratulated Xenophon because he had
escaped (Xen. Anab. 7, 8'). Xen. Mem. 1, 2° (διότι). Plat. Huthyd.
2804 (ὡς). Xen. Mem. 4, 81 (διόπερ). Οὐ γὰρ ἡμεῖς ἐκείνου ἔτι στρατιῶταί
ἐσμεν, ἐπεί γεοὐ συνεπόμεθα αὐτῷ, for we are no longer soldiers of his,
since we no longer follow him (Xen. Anab. 1, 3°). Dem. 1, 1 (ére).—
POTENTIAL OpraTIVE or INDICATIVE: Xen. Mem. 2, 7.5 ; Soph. Phil. 1037.
2. After a secondary tense, the optative (of indirect discourse)
may be used to denote that the reason given is not the speaker’s,
but some other person’s.
"Exdxefov τὸν Περικλέᾶ, ὅτι στρατηγὸς ὧν οὐκ ἐπεξάγοι, they abused
Pericles, because being general he did not lead them out (Thue. 2, 215); this
is the Athenians’ reason, and not that of Thucydides. Thue. 4, 65°.—The
oblique optative in causal sentences is absent from Homer.
2073. Norr.—Sometimes ἐπεί is used in the sense of although ; as
ἐγὼ δὲ τὰ μακρὰ ταῦτα ἀδύνατος, ἐπεὶ ἐβουλόμην ἂν οἷός τ᾽ εἶναι, 1 am
unable to master these long speeches, although 1 would wish to be able
to (Plat. Prot. 335°).
2074. Use of εἰ for 6r.—1. After verbs of emotion,—expressing
wonder, delight, vexation, approval, satisfaction, shame, and the like,
—the cause of the emotion is often expressed by the protasis
(2089) of a conditional clause introduced by εἰ The negative is
here μή, but οὐ is occasionally found.
Θαυμάζω δ᾽ ἔγωγε εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ᾽ evOdpeira μήτ᾽ ὀργίζεται, but I am
surprised that (lit. if) no one of you is either concerned or angry (Dem. 4,
43). ᾿Αγανακτῶ εἰ οὑτωσὶ ἃ νοῶ μὴ οἷός τ᾽ εἰμὶ εἰπεῖν, I am vexed that I
am so unable to say what I mean (Plat. Lach. 1945). Οὐκ ἀγαπᾷ εἰ μὴ
δίκην δέδωκεν, he is not satisfied that he has not been punished (Aeschin.
3, 147). Κατεμέμφετο καὶ αὐτὸν καὶ τοὺς σὺν αὐτῷ, εἰ οἱ ἄλλοι ἀκμάζειν μᾶλλον
ἑαυτῶν ἐδόκουν, he was angry with himself and with those with him,
2078 THE MOODS 235
because the others seemed to outshine them (Xen. Cyr. 4, 3*).—With οὐ for
μή: Dem. 15, 23.—For the optative after past tenses, see Indirect Discourse
(2329).
2. The verbs after which this construction is found are chiefly:
θαυμάζω, wonder ; χαίρω, rejoice ; συνήδομαι, congratulate ; ἀγαπάω, to
be satisfied ; ἀγανακτέω, to be vexed ; χαλεπαίνω, to be angry ; χαλεπῶς
φέρω, to bear impatiently ; αἰσχύνομαι, to be ashamed ; δεινόν ἐστι,
αἰσχρόν ἐστι.
2075. ΝΟΤΕ.---ΕῸΥ ἐπὶ τῷ and an infinitive with these verbs, see
2231.—For the participle, see 2291.
2076. Other Ways of expressing a Cause.—
1. Frequently by διὰ τό or ἐπὶ τῷ and an infinitive; see 2234, 2231.
2. By a participle; see 2251, 2252.
3. By a relative clause; see 2138, 2139.
4. By a genitive absolute; see 2259.
VI. CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES
2077. 1. Consecutive clauses express result, They are intro-
duced by ὥστε or (seldom) ὡς, so as, so that, and have either the
infinitive or a finite verb (usually the indicative). We tind ὡς
consecutive mostly in Aeschylus, Sophocles, (Herodotus), and
Xenophon ; rarely in other Attic writers.
2. Homer has ὥστε (better ὥς re) only twice with the
infinitive: 1. 9, 42 and Od. 17, 41; elsewhere it means
as (= like).
2078. 1. With Finite Mood.—If the consecutive clause expresses
a result which actually does occur in consequence of the action
of the leading verb, it takes the indicative. The negative is ov.
Thus πᾶν ἐποίησεν, ὥστε ἐβασίλευσεν, he did everything so that he
became king.
Ἐμὲ δὲ οὕτως ὀξέως κατεῖδεν, ὥστε ἀσεβείᾶς ἐγράψατο, he looked at
me 80 sharply that he has indicted me for impiety (Plat. πεν]. 5°).
Οὕτως ἀγνωμόνως ἔχετε, ὥστε... ἐλπίζετε, you are so senseless that you
expect (Dem. 2, 26). Xen. Anab. 7, 4°. Isoc. 12, 103.—With as: Hat. 2,
135°; Xen. Cyr. 5, 4"; Aesch. Pers. 730.
2. The potential indicative may be used with ὥστε, also an
imperative.
236 THE MOODS “ 9079
Παθὼν μὲν ἀντέδρων, ὥστε, εἰ φρονῶν ἔπρᾶσσον, οὐδ᾽ ἂν ὧδ᾽ ἐγιγνόμην
κακός, having suffered, I retaliated, so that if I had done it in consciousness,
I should not have been thus reprobate (Soph. Oed. Col. 271). “Ὥστε θάρρει,
so take courage (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3"). “Ὥστε... μὴ θαυμάσῃς, so do not wonder
(Plat. Phaedr. 274").—So also the potential optative; as πλοῖα δὲ ὑμῖν
πάρεστιν, ὥστε....ἐξαίφνης dv ἐπιπέσοιτε, there are ships here for you
so that you might suddenly make a descent (Xen. Anab. 5, 6”). But ὥστε
with the infinitive is usually preferred to the potential optative (2080).
2079. Norr.—Very rarely do we find ὥστε with the optative of
indirect discourse after a past tense; see Xen. Hell. 3, 5%; Isoc. 17,
11.
2080. With the Infinitive—lIf the consecutive clause denotes a
result which is possible or necessary or intended, in consequence
of the action indicated by the leading verb, it is expressed by
ὥστε (or ws) and the infinitive. The negative is μή Wveether
the possible result actually does or does not take place, is not
indicated. Thus πᾶν ἐποίησεν ὥστε βασιλεῦσαι, he did everything
so as to become king (ἐβασίλευσεν would mean that he really did
become king).
Οὐκ ἔχομεν ἀργύριον ὥστε ἀγοράζειν ra ἐπιτήδεια, we have no money
to buy necessaries (Xen. Anab. 7, 35). Κραυγὴν πολλὴν ἐποίουν καλοῦντες
ἀλλήλους, ὥστε καὶ rods πολεμίους ἀκούειν, they made a great noise calling
each other, so that the enemy could hear (Xen. Anab. 2, 217). Οὐδεὶς πώποτ᾽
εἰς τοσοῦτ᾽ avadeias ἀφίκετο ὥστε τοιοῦτόν τι τολμῆσαι ποιεῖν, NO one
ever arrived to so great a degree of shamelessness as to dare to do such a thing
(Dem. 21, 62). Πᾶν ποιοῦσιν ὥστε δίκην μὴ διδόναι, they do everything
so as not to be punished (Plat. Gorg. 479°). Mnxavas εὑρήσομεν Gor ἐς τὸ
πᾶν σε τῶνδ᾽ ἀπαλλάξαι, we will find devices so as to free you entirely
from these troubles (Aesch. Eum. 82). Βραχύ τι λελωφήκαμεν, Sore καὶ
χρήμασι καὶ σώμασι ηὐξῆσθαι, we have recovered a little, so as to have
improved both in money and in our bodies (Thuc. 6, 12). Hdt. 3, 146" (ὡς).
2081. Norz.—Sometimes ὥστε with the infinitive expresses a
condition (= on condition that).
Χρήματα ἐδίδοσαν, ὥστε μὴ ἐμβάλλειν τὸν ᾿Αγησίλᾶον, they offered
money on condition that Agesilaus should not enter their country (Xen. Hell.
5, 3'4).—But ἐφ᾽ 6 or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε is here more common (see 2226).
2082. Norn.—After a negative leading clause, ὥστε always takes
the infinitive; as in the first example in 2080 above (Xen. Anab. 7,
4
2087 THE MOODS 237
3°).—So also after a comparative, we always have ἢ ὥστε or ἤ ὡς ; see
2224. For ἢ ὥστε or ἤ ὡς after a positive with comparative meaning,
see 1338.
2083. Nore.—For consecutive relative clauses, see 2140.
2084. Norr.—We sometimes find ὥστε or ὡς with a participle
depending on a supplementary participle.
Ta τοῦ πολέμου τοιαῦτα ἐγίγνωσκον ὄντα ὡς μὴ ὑστερίζειν δέον τὸν
ἄρχοντα, I knew the affairs of war to be of such a nature that a commander
ought not to be behindhand (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5*°). Dem. 3,1. Plat. Rep. 519.
2085. Norr.—For ὥστε sometimes used redundantly before subject-
infinitives, object-infinitives, adjectives, and nouns, see 2203, 2210,
2223, 2225.
2086. Νοτε.---Ὥστε (ὡ-) and the Infinitive with dv. We sometimes
find a consecutive infinitive clause with ἄν ; such an infinitive may
correspond to a potential optative or potential indicative.
Ἔν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ ἤδη ἔσομαι, ὦ ς μηδὲν ἂν ἔτι κακὸν παθεῖν, I shall then
be in safety so as no longer to suffer any ill = οὐδὲν ἂν ἔτι πάθοιμι (Xen. Cyr.
8, 737). ᾿Αποτετειχισμένοι ἂν ἦσαν, ὥστε μηδ᾽ εἰ μετέπεμψαν ἔτι ὁμοίως ἂν
αὐτοὺς ὠφελεῖν, they would have been walled in so that, even if they had
sent for them, it would no longer anyway have helped them = οὐδ᾽ ἔτι ὁμοίως
ἂν ὠφέλουν (Thuc. 7, 42°).—This consecutive infinitive with ἄν is usually
found in indirect discourse (see 2087).
2087. Norn.—1l. Ὥστε and the Infinitive in Indirect Discourse.—
A consecutive infinitive clause may stand in indirect discourse (2193) ;
the infinitive here takes ἄν if the finite verb (either indicative or
optative) would have ἄν in direct discourse. See Xen. Cyr. 1, 3°; 8,
177, Compare 2086.—A consecutive clause with a finite verb is very
commonly changed to the infinitive in indirect discourse.
2. The negative is naturally μή but οὐ is found when a single word,
and not the whole clause, is to be negatived (2337); as ὥστ᾽ οὐ δ᾽
ἴχνος ye τειχέων εἶναι σαφές, 80 that there is not a clear vestige of the
walls (Kur. Hel. 108); Aeschin. 3, 96 (fut. inf.); Dem. 18, 283.—
Yet we sometimes find ὥστε οὐ with the infinitive even if the negative
does refer to the whole clause ; apparently the original οὐ of the direct
discourse is here retained with ὥστε and the infinitive in the indirect
discourse; as in Thue. 5, 403,
3. Very rarely do we find ὥστε ἄν with the infinitive ; as in Dem,
9, 67.
238 THE MOODS 2088
2088. 1. After the demonstratives τοσοῦτος, so great, so much, and
τοιοῦτος, such, of such kind, the corresponding relatives ὅσος and οἷος
with the infinitive are often used instead of dare. The case of ὅσος
and οἷος is assimilated to that of τοσοῦτος or τοιοῦτος (compare 1529).
The subject of the infinitive is the person or thing denoted by τοσοῦτος
or τοιοῦτος ; but the infinitive may have its own subject, which is then
always in the accusative. The demonstrative may be omitted; ὅσος
then means sufficient or enough, οἷος, fit for, such as,
᾿Απήγγελλον..., ὅτε τοσαῦτα εἴη ἔνδον ἀγαθά, ὅσα ἐπ᾽ ἀνθρώπων yeveity
«μὴ ἂν ἐπιλείπειν τοὺς ἔνδον ὄντας, they reported that thére was such a store
of provisions within as could not in a generation of men fail those within
(Xen. Cyr. 5, 2"). Τοιοῦτος ὁ Στάσιππος ἦν, οἷος μὴ βούλεσθαι πολλοὺς
ἀποκτιννύναι τῶν πολιτῶν, Stasippus was a man of such character as to be
unwilling to put many of the citizens to death (Xen. Hell. 6, 5’).—®oBodpa
ὑπὲρ τούτου, μή τινι ἄλλῳ ἐντύχῃ, οἵῳ τοῦτον διαφθεῖραι, I fear on his
behalf, lest she should meet some other person able to corrupt him; here οἵῳ
is assimilated to τοιούτῳ understood (Plat. Theag. 127°). ᾿Ἤκουον ἀνδρὸς
οὐδαμῶς οἵου τε ψεύδεσθαι, I heard from a man not at all capable of telling
falsehoods, for τοιούτου οἷου (Dem. 2, 17). Ἐλείπετο τῆς νυκτὸς ὅσον σκοταί-
ους διελθεῖν τὸ πεδίον, enough of the night remained for them to cross the
valley wnder cover of darkness, for τοσοῦτον ὅσον, the subject of διελθεῖν is
αὐτούς understood, which agrees with oxoraiovs (Xen. Anab. 4, 1°).
2. In this way arises the expression olds τέ εἰμι, to be able.
Ti οἷοί τε ἔσεσθε ἡμῖν συμπρᾶξαι; in what will you be able to co-operate
with ws (Xen. Anab. 5, 45). Οὐχ οἷόν τε ἦν διώκειν τοὺς βαρβάρους, it was
impossible to pursue the barbarians (Xen. Anab. 3, 3°).
VIL, CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
2089. In a conditional sentence, the clause containing the
condition (that is, the ¢f-clause) is called the protasis ; the clause
containing the conclusion is called the apodosis.
2090. 1. The protasis is introduced by εἰ or ἐᾶν (also ἤν or ἄν), i,
The protasis is in the indicative or optative if it is introduced by εἰ;
and in the subjunctive if it is introduced by ἐᾶν (ἤν or dv).—The particle
ἄν is regularly added to the apodosis with the optative ; and also to the
apodosis when non-fulfilment of a condition is implied,
2. Attic writers use ἐάν, ἤν, and ἄν (all from εἰ av); but the trage-
dians and Thucydides probably never use ἄν, 4/.
3. Herodotus has ἤν (never ἐᾶν or av).—For εἰ the Doric .
OO ee ee
2093 THE MOODS 239
and Aeolic dialects have ai, which occurs also in Homer.
For ἄν Homer also has κέ; Doric xa. For ἐάν Homer
has εἴ xe (ai xe) or ἤν; he has εἰ δ᾽ ἄν once (Il. 3, 288);
εἴ wep av twice (Il, 5, 224 and 232); and ἢν...κέ (κ᾽) in
Od. 18, 318. |
4, For Epic ἄν or κέ with the future indicative in the
apodosis, see 2117, 4 (b).—For Homeric κέ with the
subjunctive in the apodosis, see 2110, 3.—For simple εἰ
with the subjunctive in Homer, also in tragedy, see
2110, 1.—For εἴ κε with the optative in Homer, see 2115.
—Various other peculiarities are also given in their
proper places,
2091. The negative of the protasis is μή, that of the apodosis is οὐ.
If the protasis has οὐ, the negative refers only to a single word and
not to the whole clause (see 2337),
2092. Particular and General Suppositions—The supposition
expressed by the protasis may be either particular or general.
1. A particular supposition relates to a definite act done at a
definite time. Thus: if he is doing this (now), it is well or it will be
well; if he did this (then), it was well ; if he had done this (then), it
would have been well ; if he shall do this (at that time), it will be well ;
if he should do this (at that time), it would be well.
2. A general supposition relates to any act or acts belonging toa
class or series of acts, any one of which may happen or may have
happened at any time; in these cases εἰ or ἐάν is equivalent to if ever
or whenever. Thus: if (ever) he has money, he (always) gives it ; if
(ever) he had money, he (always) gave it ; if-(at any time) he had had
money, he would (always) have given it; if (ever) any one shall wish
to go, he will (always) be permitted ; if (ever) any one should wish to
go, he would (always) be permitted.
3. The distinction between particular and general suppositions
influences the form of construction only in present and past supposi-
tions with nothing implied as to the fulfilment of the condition,
2093. Four Classes of Conditional Sentences.—Suppositions may
refer (a) to the present or past, or (b) to the future. The distinction
of time, that of particularity or generality, and the implication as
to fulfilment, are the grounds of classification,
240 THE MOODS 92094
There are four classes of conditional sentences: both the two
first classes are for present and past suppositions; the two last
classes are both for fuwtwre suppositions. This first class has two
special forms for general suppositions. There are thus six regular
forms,
2094. Synopsis of Conditional Forms.—The following is a syn-
optical view of the conditional forms :—
I. Present or Past Swpposition with nothing implied as to reality.
(a) Particular: Protasis has εἰ with indicative...Apodosis any
form of the verb.
Εἴ τι ἔχει, δώσει, if he has anything, he will give it = Lat. st
quid habet, dabit.
So also εἴ τι ἔχει, λέγε μοι, tf he has anything, tell me (imper.) ;
or δοίη ἡμῖν, may he give it (opt. of wish) ; or ἀπαιτῶμεν, let us
ask it of him (subj. of exhortation); or δοίη ἄν, he might (or
may) give it (pot. opt.); or ἔλεξεν ἄν, he would have said (pot.
ind.).—See 2095—2097.
(b) General :
1. Protasis has ἐάν with subjunctive...Apodosis present in-
dicative.
‘Edy τι ἔχῃ, δίδωσι, if he (ever) has anything, he (always) gives it.
—See 2098—2101.
2. Protasis has εἰ with optative...Apodosis imperfect indicative.
Ei τι ἔχοι, ἐδίδου, if he (ever) had anything, he (always) gave it.—
See 2098—2101.
II. Present or Past Supposition implying non-reality of condition.
Protasis has εἰ with past indicative...Apodosis a past indicative
with ἄν.
Ei τι εἶχεν, ἐδίδου ἄν, if he had anything, he would give it.
Bi τι ἔσχεν, ἔδωκεν av, if he had obtained anything, he would
have giwen it.
Lat. si quid haberet, daret ; si quid habuisset, dedisset.—See
2102—2108.
Ill. Future Supposition of more distinct form.
Protasis has ἐάν with subjunctive...Apodosis any form of the
verb referring to future.
2096 THE MOODS 241
Ἐάν τι λάβῃ (λαμβάνῃ), δώσει, if he (shall) receive anything, he
will give it = Lat. si quid acceperit, dabit.
So also ἐάν τι λάβῃ (λαμβάνῃ), λέγε μοι Or δοίη ἡμῖν or ἀπαιτῶμεν
or δοίη av.—See 2109—2112.
IV. Future Supposition of less distinct form.
Protasis has εἰ with optative...Apodosis optative with ἄν.
Ei τι ἔχοι, δοίη av, if he should have anything, he would give
it = Lat. st quid habeat, det. So other forms may be in
the apodosis.—See 2113—2116.
(A) SIMPLE PRESENT OR PAST CONDITIONS (NOTHING IMPLIED)
(a) Particular Suppositions
2095. The protasis here simply expresses a particular supposi-
tion referring to the present or past, without implying anything
as to its reality. The scheme then is :—
Protasis : εἰ with the indicative ; :
Apodosis: any form of the verb.
Thus εἰ τοῦτο λέγεις, καλῶς ἔχει, if you say this, it is well.
Ei θεοί τι δρῶσιν αἰσχρόν, οὐκ εἰσὶ θεοὶ, if gods do anything shameful
they are not gods (Eur. fr. 294). Ei θεοῦ ἦν, οὐκ ἦν αἰσχροκερκής, if he was
the son of a god, he was not avaricious (Plat. Rep. 408°). Κλέαρχος εἰ mapa
τοὺς ὅρκους ἔλῦε τὰς σπονδάς, τὴν δίκην ἔχει, if Clearchus, contrary to his
oaths, was trying to break the truce, he has his punishment (Xen. Anab. 2,
54).—"AAN εἰ δοκεῖ σοι, στεῖχε, if thou art resolved, go (Soph. Ant.
98).—Kdxwr ἀπολοίμην, ZavOiav εἰ μὴ φιλῶ, may I perish miserably
if I do not love Xanthias (Ar. Ran. 579).— AAW εἰ δοκεῖ, πλέωμεν,
but if it seems good to you, let us sail (Soph. Phil. 526).—TloAA) ἄν tis
εὐδαιμονίᾷ εἴη περὶ τοὺς νέους, εἰ els μὲν μόνος αὐτοὺς διαφθείρει, οἱ δ᾽
ἄλλοι ὠφελοῦσιν, there would be a happy condition for young men, if
only one person corrupted them and the others benefited them (Plat. Apol.
25°). Il. 6, 128.—Ei οὕτω ταῦτ᾽ ἔχει, πῶς Av πολλοὶ μὲν ἐπεθύμουν
τυραννεῖν ; if this is so, why should many be desirous of reigning? (Xen.
Hier. 1, 9).
2096. Norz.—1. When the future indicative is used in the protasis
in this form, it expresses a present purpose or necessity. Thus: alpe
πλῆκτρον εἰ μαχεῖ (= εἰ μέλλεις μάχεσθαι), raise your spur if you are
going to fight (Ar. Av. 759). Xen. on 2, 11",
1
242 THE MOODS 2097
2. This uncommon use of the future indicative of present intention
or necessity, is entirely different from its ordinary use as a futwre
condition equivalent to ἐάν with the subjunctive (see 2111).
2097. Norr.—For a potential optative or indicative rarely used as
a protasis, see 2117, 1.
(δ) General Suppositions
2098. The apodosis here expresses what regularly takes (or
took) place, if ever the condition expressed by the protasis takes
(or took) place. The scheme then is :—
1, For present genera] suppositions :—
Protasis: ἐάν with the subjunctive ;
Apodosis: present indicative or some equivalent expressing
present repetition.
2. ¥or past general suppositions :—
Protasis: εἰ with optative ;
Apodosis: imperfect indicative or some equivalent express-
ing past repetition.
Thus ἐάν tis τοῦτο ποιήσῃ, κολάζεται, if any one ever does this,
he is punished ;—éav τις τοῦτο ποιήσειε, ἐκολάζετο, if any one ever
did this, he was punished.
“Hy ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνήσκειν, if death comes
near, no one is ever willing to die (Eur. Alc. 671). Ἔ ἂν τις τὸν ἥλιον
ἀναιδῶς ἐγχειρῇ θεᾶσθαι, τὴν ὄψιν ἀφαιρεῖται, if any one recklessly
tries to gaze on the sun, he is deprived of his sight (Xen. Mem. 4, 81:9).
Σωκράτης οὐκ ἔπῖνεν, εἰ μὴ διψῴη, Socrates did not drink if he was
not thirsty (Xen. Mem. 1, 3°). Et του φίλων βλέψειεν οἰκετῶν δέμας,
ἔκλαιεν, if ever she saw the form of one of her beloved slaves, she wept
(Soph. Trach. 908).
2099. Norr.—Equivalent forms for the present indicative are the
gnomic aorist (1914) and perfects with present meaning; for the
imperfect indicative, we may have the imperfect or aorist with ἄν
(1961), a pluperfect with imperfect meaning, or rarely an aorist
indicative. |
“Hv δέ τις τούτων τι παραβαίνῃ, ζημίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπέθεσαν, if any
one transgresses in any of these matters, they always impose a penalty
(Xen. 1, 2°).—Ei δέ τις αὐτῷ περί του ἀντιλέγοι,...ἐπὶ τὴν ὑπόθεσιν
ΔΝ ἐς "ἃ νυν αν Αἰ... ὰ ee
2102 THE MOODS 243
ἐπανῆγεν ἂν πάντα τὸν λόγον, whenever any one contradicted him on any
point, he would recall the whole argument to the first proposition (Xen.
Mem. 4, 6"). Xen. Anab. 2, 3"! (ἔπαισεν ἄν).---Εἴ tis ἀντείποι, εὐθὺς
τεθνήκει, if any one refused, he was instantly put to death (Thue. 8, 66°).
—Simple aorist in Xen. Anab. 1, 9".
2100. Norr.—Indicative in Protasis.—Occasionally the indicative
is found in the protasis in general suppositions; the form of a parti-
cular supposition (2095) is thus used in a general sense,
Ei γάρ tis...rok pa βοηθεῖν τοῖς παράνομα γράφουσιν, καταλύει τὴν πολῖ-
τείᾶν, if any one ventures to help those proposing unlawful measures, he is
trying to destroy the state (Aeschin. 3, 196). Ἐμίσει οὐκ εἴ τις κακῶς πάσχων
ἠμύνετο, ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τις εὐεργετούμενος ἀχάριστος φαίνοιτο, he hated not
a man if, when injured, he defended himself, but if, when benefited, he
showed himself ungrateful, here both forms occur together (Xen. Ag. 11, 3).
Xen. Anab. 5, 1.6: 5, 5™.
2101. Norz.—1. In Homer the subjunctive in general
suppositions usually has «i; besides this we find jv
(twice), εἴ κε (twice), and εἴ περ ay (once).
Ei περ yap τ᾽ ἄλλοι ye κάρη κομόωντες ᾿Αχαιοὶ δαιτρὸν
πίΐνωσιν, σὸν δὲ πλεῖον δέπας αἰεὶ ἔστηχ᾽, even though the
other long-haired Greeks drink by measure, thy cup always
stands full (Il. 4, 262).—This is very rare in Attic poetry;
as in Soph. Ant. 710; Oed. Tyr. 198.—Compare εἰ with the
subjunctive in future conditions,
2. Homer has «i with the optative in a past general
condition only in J/. 24, 768.
(B) PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS WITH SUPPOSITION
CONTRARY TO REALITY
2102. The protasis here expressly implies that the condition
is not or was not fulfilled (mood of unreality). The scheme then
is :—
Protasis: εἰ with past tense of the indicative ;
Apodosis: past tense of indicative with ἄν.
The imperfect here refers to an action taking place in present
time, sometimes to an action going on or performed repeatedly
in past time (2102); the aorist refers to an action simply taking
place in past time; and the uncommon pluperfect to an action
244 THE MOODS 2108
completed in present or past time. The tenses of the protasis
and apodosis may naturally be different.
Thus εἰ ἔγραφε, καλῶς av ἐποίει, if he were writing, he would do
well; εἰ ἔγραψε, καλῶς ἂν ἐποίησεν, if he had written, he would
have done well; εἰ ἔγραψε, καλῶς ἂν εἶχεν, if he had written, it
would be well.
Φῶς εἰ μὴ εἴχομεν, ὅμοιοι τοῖς τυφλοῖς ἂν ἦμεν, if he had no light, we
should be like the blind (Xen. Mem. 4, 3°). Ταῦτα οὐκ ἂν ἐδύναντο,
ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ καὶ διαίτῃ μετρίᾳ ἐχρῶντο, they would not be able to do this if
they did not lead an abstemious life (Xen. Cyr. 1, 216). Hdt. 1, 120% Οὐκ
ἂν ἐποίησεν ᾿Αγασίᾶς ταῦτα, εἰ μὴ ἐγὼ αὐτὸν ἐκέλευσα, Agasias would
not have done this if I had not bidden him (Xen. Anab. 6, 615). Λυκοῦργος
οὐδὲν ἂν διάφορον τῶν ἄλλων πόλεων τὴν Σπάρτην ἐποίησεν, εἰ μὴ τὸ
πείθεσθαι τοῖς νόμοις μάλιστα ἐνειργάσατο αὐτῇ, Lycurgus would not have
made Sparta at all different from other states, if he had not established in it
particularly obedience to the laws (Xen. Mem. 4, 4'°). Ei μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε,
ἐπορευόμεθα ay ἐπὶ τὸν βασιλέᾷ, if you had not come, we would now be
marching against the king (Xen. Anab. 2, 13). Ei τριάκοντα μόναι μετ-
έπεσον τῶν ψήφων, ἀπεπεφεύγη ἄν, if only thirty of the votes had
fallen differently, I should have been acquitted (Plat. Apol. 36). Dem. 1, 9;
3, 14. Lys. 24, 11.
2103. Norz.—1l. The imperfect sometimes expresses continuance
or repetition in past time.
Οὐκ ἂν νήσων...ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν, he (Agamemnon)
would not have been master of islands, if he had not also possessed some naval
force (Thue. 1, 9°), implying he did have a navy and really was master of
islands. So Plat. Gorg. 516°.
2. After a protasis with the imperfect, an aorist of the apodosis
may have inceptive meaning (1916) and then refer to present time; as
εἰ. ἐπεθύμεις ταύτης τῆς codias,.....ti ἂν ἀπεκρίνω; if you desired
this wisdom,.....what answer would you give? (Plat. Theag. 123°); so
Plat. Huthyphr. 12°.
2104. Norz.—1. In Homer, who has the ordinary con-
struction in unreal conditions as in Attic, the imperfect
always refers to the past.
Ἔνθα κε λοιγὸς Env... μὴ ἄρ᾽ ὀξὺ νόησε, then there would
have been ruin if he (Zeus) had not quickly perceived it (Il. 8,
130). Kai νύ xe δὴ προτέρω ἔτ᾽ ἔρις yéver’ ἀμφοτέροισιν, εἰ μὴ
᾿Αχιλλεὺς αὐτὸς ἀνίστατο καὶ κατέρῦκεν, and now
2105 THE MOODS 245
surely the strife would have gone further for both, if Achilles
himself had not risen and restrained them (Il. 23, 490).—
Only once does Homer have εἴ xe with a past (aorist) in-
dicative in an unreal condition (J/. 23, 526).
2. In very few cases Homer expresses a past unreal
apodosis by the optative with κέ.
Kai νύ κεν ἔνθ᾽ ἀπόλοιτο ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Αἰνείᾷς, εἰ μὴ ap
ὀξὺ νόησε Διὸς θυγάτηρ ᾿Αφροδίτη, and here Aeneas, lord of
men, would have perished if Aphrodite, child of Zeus, had
not quickly observed him (Il. 5, 311). Ἔνθα κε ῥεῖα φέροι ᾿
κλυτὰ τεύχεα, εἰ μή of ἀγάσσατο Φοῖβος ᾿Απόλλων, he would
easily have carried away the famous armour, if Phoebus
Apollo had not grudged him (Il. 17, 70); here ἀπώλετο and .
épepe would have been the regular Homeric construction.
With a past indicative in the protasis only in the above
examples, in J/. 5, 388, and in Od. 1, 236.—Occasionally Homer |
has potential optatives expressing past time (without a cor-
responding protasis); as οὐδέ xe φαίης, nor would you have
said (Il, 3,392); οὐκ ἂν γνοίης, you would not have known (II.
5, 85). The context must here show whether the potential
-optative can be translated as referring to the past.
2105. Omission of dv.—1. When the apodosis is an imperfect
expressing an unfulfilled necessity, propriety, or possibility, with an
infinitive, the particle ἄν is omitted. A present infinitive here
refers to present action or to an action going on or repeated in
the past ; while an aorist infinitive refers to past time
2. Such imperfects are ἔδει, χρῆν or ἐχρῆν, προσῆκεν, ἐξῆν, ἐνῆν ; καιρὸς
ἦν, ἄξιον ἦν, εἰκὸς ἦν, δίκαιον ἦν, οἷός τ᾽ ἦν, αἰσχρὸν ἦν, καλῶς εἶχεν, and
others ; also verbals in -τέος with ἦν.
Thus: ἔδει σε τοῦτο ποιεῖν, you ought to do this (but do not) or you
ought to have done this (but did not), both equivalent to ἐποίεις ἄν τοῦτο,
you would do this or you would have done this, if you did (or had
done) your duty ;—ée σε τοῦτο ποιῆσαι, you ought to have done this
(but did not), equivalent to ἐποίησας ἂν τοῦτο, you would have done this,
if you had done your duty. The real apodosis in such cases is the
infinitive, the contrary of which is implied.
Χρῆν δέ ce, εἴπερ ἦσθα χρηστός,...μηνῦτὴν γενέσθαι, if you had been
honest, you ought to have laid an information (Lys. 12, 32). Εἰ ἦσαν ἄνδρες
ἀγαθοί,....ἐξἣν αὐτοῖς τὴν ἀρετὴν δεικνύναι, if they were honest men,
they could show their virtue (Thue. 1, 37°), Καλὸν δ᾽ ἦν, εἰ καὶ ἡμαρ-
246 THE MOODS 2106
τάνομεν, τοῖσδε μὲν εἶξαι τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ ὀργῇ, even if we were wrong, it would
have been honourable for them to yield to our temper (Thue. 1, 584). οὐδ᾽
οὕτως ἀποστατέον τῇ πόλει τούτων ἦν, εἴπερ ἢ δόξης ἢ mpoydvev...eiye
λόγον, not even then should the commonwealth have given wp her intention,
if she had any regard for glory or ancestors (Dem. 18, 199). Dem. 9, 6;
28,10. Plat. Crito 44°. Eur. Med. 586.
For examples without a protasis, see 2119, 3.
2106. Norr.—As such imperfects originally express a past necessity
or propriety or possibility, they may have three possible meanings.
Thus: ἔδει σε τοῦτο ποιεῖν, May mean you were obliged to do this (and
therefore you did do it) ; or it may mean you ought to do this (but do
‘ not); or you ought to have done this (but did not).
2107. Norr.—If it is implied that the obligation or propriety or
necessity is not or was not true, the particle ἄν is very generally added.
Thus: εἰ οὕτως εἶχεν, ἔδει σε τοῦτο ποιεῖν, if this were so, you ought to
do this (but you do not do this) ; but ἔδει ἄν σε τοῦτο ποιεῖν means there
would be necessity for you to do this (but there is no necessity). In
the latter example the necessity is denied ; in the former, the action of
the infinitive is denied.
Ei γὰρ ἐγὼ ἔτι ἐν δυνάμει ἦν τοῦ ῥᾳδίως πορεύεσθαι πρὸς τὸ ἄστυ, οὐδὲν ἄν
σε ἔδει δεῦρο ἰέναι, if I still had the power to go easily to town, there would
be no necessity for you to come hither, implying that there is necessity (Plat.
Rep. 328°). Xen. Anab. 5, 1°; Cyr. 3, 81, Dem. 19, 58.
2108. Norn.—1l. A few other imperfects with the infinitive are
occasionally used in this way without dv. So ἐβουλόμην, I would wish
(for ἐβουλόμην av), ἠσχῦνόμην, I would be ashamed, and ἔμελλον.
Ἐβουλόμην μὲν οὖν τὴν βουλὴν....ὀρθῶς διοικεῖσθαι, 1 would (wish)
that the Senate were properly managed, implying that it is ποῦ (Aeschin. 3,
2). Ἠισχῦνόμην, I should be ashamed (Xen. Anab. 7, 6"). Ei ye παρ᾽
Ἑλλήνων ἔλαβον οὔνομά rev δαίμονος, τούτων..«μάλιστα ἔμελλον μνήμην
ἕξειν, if they had received from the Greeks the name of any divinity, they (the
Egyptians) would have preserved the memory of these most of all (Hdt. 2,
434). Dem. 19, 159. Od. 13, 384.
2. The aorist ἐκινδύνευσα, I ran a risk, is also used thus; as 7
πόλις ἐκινδύνευσε πᾶσα διαφθαρῆναι, εἰ ἄνεμος ἔγενετο, the city ran
the risk of being wholly destroyed if a wind had arisen (Thue. 3,
74°).
3. In Homer we find the imperfect ὥφελλον or ὄφελλον
———— ll
2110 THE MOODS 947
and the aorist ὥφελον or ὄφελον, ought (from Epic ὀφείλω
= Attic ὀφέλλω, owe), used in this way.
Τιμήν πέρ por ὄφελλον ᾿Ολύμπιος ἐγγυαλίξαι Ζεύς, Olympian
Zeus ought to have conferred honour on me (Il. 1, 353). This
is the origin of ὥφελον with the infinitive in unattainable
wishes (2004, 2).
(C) FUTURE CONDITIONS OF MORE DISTINCT FORM
2109. The protasis here expresses a future condition which
may possibly be realised (like the English if you shall do this or
if you do this), and then has ἐάν with the subjunctive (mood of
expectation). The scheme then is :—
Protasis: ἐάν with the subjunctive ;
Apodosis: future indicative or some form expressing future
time.
Thus ἐάν γράφῃ (ypdwn), καλῶς ἕξει, if he (shall) write, it will
be well.
Ἐὰν ζητῇς καλῶς, εὑρήσεις, if you shall seek well, you will find (Plat.
Gorg. 503°). Χάριν εἴσομαι, ἐὰν ἀκούητε, I will be grateful if you will listen
(Plat. Prot. 310°), *Av δέ τις ἀνθιστῆται, σὺν ἡμῖν πειρᾶσόμεθα χειροῦ-
σθαι, if any one shall oppose us, with your help we will try to subdue him
(Xen. Anab. 7, 3"). Xen. Anab. 4, ὅδ. Isoc. 8, 18.—Hyv πύλεμον
αἱρῆσθε, μηκέτι ἥκετε δεῦρο ἄνευ ὅπλων, if you choose war, do not come
here again without arms (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2)*).—"Hy σε...«ἀφέλωμαι,...
ἀπολοίμην, if I deprive you of them, may I perish (Ar. Ran. 586).—E ay
κατὰ μέρος φυλάττωμεν καὶ σκοπῶμεν, ἧττον ἂν δύναιντο ἡμᾶς θηρᾶν
οἱ πολέμιοι, if we watch and keep guard by turns, the enemy will be less able
to catch us (Xen. Anab. 5, 1°).—So also in the apodosis a subjunctive of
exhortation (as in J/. 3, 283); a present referring to the future (as Plat.
Rep. 473°; Xen. Cyr. 5, 5"); or a perfect equivalent to a future perfect (as
Xen. ἅπαν. 1, 813).
2110. Norz.—1, Homer occasionally has εἰ alone with
the subjunctive instead of εἴ xe or mv; εἴ περ γάρ σε
κατακτάνῃ, if he kill you (Il. 22, 86). This also
occurs in a few cases in Attic poetry ; as in Aesch, Pers.
791; Soph. Oed. Col. 1442; Eur. Iph. Aul.. 1240; Ar.
Eq. 698.—The rare examples in Attic prose are doubtful ;
as Thue, 6, 21},
248 THE MOODS 2111
2. In Homer we find εἴ κε or ai xe several times with
the future indicative; as εἴ κ᾽ ἔτι σ᾽ ddpaivovta κιχή-
copat..(Il, 2, 258).
3. Homer sometimes used the subjunctive with κέ for
the future indicative in the apodosis; as εἰ δέ κε μὴ
δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι, and if he does not give
her up, then I will seize her myself (Il. 1, 324).—For κέ
or ἄν with the future indicative in the apodosis in Homer,
see 2117, 4 (d).
9111. Future Indicative with εἰ in Protasis.—1. The future
condition is very often expressed by εἰ with the future indicative.
This form of future condition does not differ from the form of
ἐάν with the subjunctive; except, perhaps, that it is somewhat
more distinct.
Ei μὴ καθέξεις γλῶσσαν, ἔσται σοι κακά, if you do not hold your tongue,
you will have trouble (Eur. fr. 5). Ei τμωρήσεις Πατρόκλῳ τῷ ἑταίρῳ
τὸν φόνον καὶ Ἕκτορα ἀποκτενεῖς, αὐτὸς ἀποθανεῖ, if you shall avenge
the murder of your companion Hector, you yourself will be slain (Plat. Apol.
28°). Od. 12, 382. Hdt. 1, 32%. Aesch. Cho. 683.
2. This use of the future indicative in future suppositions must —
not be confounded with its occasional use to express a present purpose
or necessity (2096).
2112. In indirect discourse, both the subjunctive and the future
indicative of the protasis may pass into the oblique optative (without
dv) after a secondary tense. ‘Thus, direct discourse: ἐὰν τοῦτο
ποιήσῃς (or εἰ τοῦτο ποιήσεις), καλῶς ἕξει. Indirect discourse :
ἔφη καλῶς ἕξειν εἰ τοῦτο ποιήσειας (Opt. aor.) or ποιήσοις (opt. fut.), he
said that it would be well, if you should do this ; but ἐάν τοῦτο ποιήσῃς
or εἰ τοῦτο ποιήσεις could be retained.
(D) FUTURE CONDITIONS OF LESS DISTINCT FORM
2113. The protasis here expresses a possible future case less
distinctly, as if you should do this; such a vague supposition is
properly only conceived by the speaker. The scheme then is :—
_ Protasis: εἰ with the optative (never future) ;
- Apodosis: optative with dy (never future),
This form is especially frequent with Attic writers, who use this
NS i a 4 αὶ
2116 THE MOODS 249
form to politely intimate that a future statement or supposition,
even if quite true, is only conceived by the speaker and thus
holds good only for him.
Thus εἰ γράψειε, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι, if he should write, it would be
well.—The optative with ἄν in the apodosis is the Potential
Optative (1993).
Ei δ᾽ ἀναγκαῖον εἴη ἀδικεῖν ἢ ἀδικεῖσθαι, ἑλοίμην ἂν μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθαι,
if it should be necessary to do wrong or to suffer wrong, I should prefer to
suffer wrong (Plat. Gorg. 469°). Ἐπιλίποι ἂν ἡμᾶς ὁ πᾶς χρόνος, εἰ
πάσᾶς τὰς ἐκείνου πράξεις καταριθμησαίμεθα, all time would fail us
if we were to enumerate all his doings (Isoc. 1, 11). Οἶκος δ᾽ αὐτὸς, εἰ
φθογγὴν λάβοι, σαφέστατ᾽ ἂν λέξειεν, the house itself, if it should find
@ voice, would tell most plainly (Aesch. Ag. 37). Xen. Anab. 5, 6°; 7,
τς Od. 3, 223. Dem. 57, 44.—The future optative is never so used; see
1942.
2114. Norz.—1. Other forms of apodosis may also occur (2117).
In indirect discourse after past tenses, an optative of the protasis may
represent an original indicative or subjunctive of direct discourse ; see
Indirect Discourse, 2324.
2. The potential optative is sometimes found without ἄν ;
see 1995.
3. Homer rarely uses an optative with κέ in unreal
apodoses ; see 2104, 2.
2115. Norr.—Homer sometimes has εἴ xe with the
optative in protasis; as πῶς ἂν ἐγώ σε δέοιμι..., εἴ Kev
"Apys οἴχοιτο, how could I bind you, if Ares should
escape (Od. 8, 352). Once he has εἴ περ ἄν (Il. 2,
597).
VARIOUS PECULIARITIES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
2116. 1. The regular forms of ordinary conditional sentences
are given above in 2094 and 2095—2113. The following sections,
2117—2132, treat of various peculiarities which cannot conven-
iently be grouped under the typical forms.
2. For dependent clauses with ἐάν or ei after verbs of implied
inquiry, see 2034,—For εἰ used for ὅτι, because, see 2074, 2329.
250 THE MOODS 2117
MIXED FORMS
2117. The apodosis sometimes does not correspond in form to the
protasis. The following are the possible cases (of these 1 and 2 were
already given in 2095, 2109) :—
1. The protasis may be a present or past indicative, and the
apodosis a potential optative or potential indicative.
EZ πολέμιός ye dv σφόδρα ἔβλαπτον, κἂν φίλος dv ἱκανῶς ὠφελοίην,
if as an enemy I injured you greatly, I could also benefit you sufficiently as a
friend (Thuc. 6, 92"). Il. 6, 128. Dem. 18, 223. See also the two last
examples under 2095. | Ξ
2. The protasis may be a subjunctive or future indicative, and the
apodosis a potential optative.
Φρούριον εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος, if they
shall build a fort, they might injure some part of the land (Thue. 1, 1425).
See also Xen. Anab. 5, 1°, given in 2109.
3. A protasis is occasionally expressed by εἰ and a potential
optative (with ἄν) or a potential indicative (with ἀν).
Εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἂν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι, if I would
trust any man, I trust you (Plat. Prot. 329°). Ei τοίνυν ἂν ἐμοὶ τότε Op yi-
Cea Oe, ὅτι οὐκ ἐπετριηράρχησα, πῶς οὐχὶ viv προσήκει τοῦτον εἰσπρᾶξαί μοι τὰ.
ἀναλώματα, if you would have been angry with me then, for not serving as
trierarch beyond the legal time, why ought you not now to compel this man to
pay me for the expenses (Dem. 50, 67).—Such forms are really present or
past suppositions with the real verb of the protasis suppressed: ¢f (it is 30
that) or if (it was so that) you would, ete.
4. (a) A protasis with the optative is occasionally followed by a
future indicative, also by a present indicative (with or without future
meaning). This is not frequent in poetry and very uncommon in
prose.
Ei --Bovdoipedd τῳ ἐπιτρέψαι ἢ παῖδας ἄρρενας παιδεῦσαι ἢ θυγατέρας.
παρθένους διαφυλάξαι ἢ χρήματα διασῶσαι, ἄρ᾽ ἀξιόπιστον εἰς ταῦτα ἡγησόμεθα
τὸν ἀκρατῆ; if we should wish to commit to any one our sons or unmarried
daughters or our money to take care of, would we think an intemperate man
worthy of confidence for that purpose ? (Xen. Mem. 1, 5*). Thuc. 2, 39°. Hadt.
1, 32°. Il. 10, 222.
(6) Homer occasionally has κέ with the future indicative
(2110, 3); as Od. 17, 540.—For the future indicative,
he also has the subjunctive with ἄν (2110, 3); as Jl. 11,
386 ; 2, 488.
,.." a ie τ Ύυοαον κι μμιι i σσσιτ τ , -θοθ
2190 THE MOODS . 251
DISJUNCTIVE CONDITIONAL CLAUSES
2118. Disjunctive suppositions are introduced by <ire....cire and
ἐάν τε.... ἐάν te, whether....or. Their construction is like that of other
conditional clauses.
Τὸ φιλούμενον ἄρα τῷ φιλοῦντι φίλον ἐστίν, ἐάν τε φιλῇ, ἐάν τε pion, the
beloved is dear to the lover, whether it love or hate (Plat. Lys. 212e). Xen.
Hell. 1, 6°; Cyr. 3, 3".
*’ ELLIPSIS AND SUBSTITUTION IN THE PROTASIS
2119. 1. The protasis may be completely suppressed. When an
apodosis of the fourth form (optative with dv) thus stands alone, we
have the potential optative ; as λέγοι ἄν, he may (might, could, would)
speak. See 1993.
2. When an apodosis of the second form (indicative with dv) stands.
alone, we have the potential indicative. This expresses a past possi-
bilaty.
Ἐπερρώσθη δ᾽ ἄν tis κἀκεῖνο ἰδών, any one seeing that would have
been encowraged (Xen. Hell. 3, 418). "Ἔδωκε yap τότε ye ὁ θεὸς αὐτοῖς ἔργον,
οἷον οὐδ᾽ εὔξαντό ποτ᾽ ἄν, the gods then gave them such occupation as they
could not even have wished for (Xen. Hell. 4, 413). Soph. Oed. Tyr. 523.
Il. 4, 421. "Owe ἦν, καὶ τὰς χεῖρας οὐκ ἂν καθεώρων, it was late, and they
could not have seen the raising of the hands (Xen. Hell, 1, 77). Tis dv ποτ᾽
ῴετο; who could have thought (Soph. Aj. 430). Ἔνθα δὴ éyv ὦ τις ἄν, there
one might have perceived (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3”). Eur. Iph. Aul. 1582. Xen.
Anab. 1, δ᾽.
3. Similarly the imperfects ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, ἐξῆν, etc., without ἄν.
Ἔ ξῆν abvrois....undéva λιπεῖν, they might have left not one of us (Xen.
Hell. 2,3"). οὐκ ἀποκρίνεσθαι χρῆν, one ought to be answering (Plat. Rep.
343"). “Αξιόν γ᾽ ἦν ἀκοῦσαι, it would have been worth while to hear (Plat.
Euthyd. 8044). Xen. Anab. 7,7”. Dem. 20, 63.
2120. Norr.—1. The imperfect with dv here refers to present time
chiefly in the.expression ἐβουλόμην ἄν, I would wish, Lat. vellem (Xen.
Cyr. 7, 2°; Aeschin. 3, 115).
2. With the potential indicative, compare such Latin subjunctive
imperfects as putares, crederes, diceres, videres, you might (would)
have thouyht, believed, said, seen. The presents putes, credas, etc.,
correspond to the potential optative ; as ἴδοις dv, you could (might) see.
3. For the periphrastic forms ἔδει, etc., with the infinitive, see
2105—2108.
252 THE MOODS 9191
2121. The protasis may be represented by a participle or it
may be implied in some word or phrase. The tense of the
participle is the same as the finite verb would have had; the
present representing also the imperfect, and the perfect also the
pluperfect. The negative is, of course, μή.
Thus ἔχων τι May represent εἴ τι ἔχω (ἔχεις, ἔχει) Or ἐάν τι ἔχω OF εἴ
τι ἔχοιμι or εἴ τι εἶχον.
Σὺ δὲ κλύων εἴσει τάχα, but if you will listen, you will soon know, i.e.
ἐὰν κλύῃς (Ar. Av. 1390). Ταῦτ᾽ ἂν....ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνὴρ μὴ δια φθαρ εὶ ς ἐτόλμη-
σεν εἰπεῖν ; would this same man have dared to say this, if he had not been
corrupted ? i.e. εἰ μὴ διεφθάρη (Dem. 19, 308). Xen. Mem. 1, 44. Nix a@v-
τες μὲν οὐδένα ἂν κατακάνοιεν, if they were victorious they could not kill one
of them, i.e. εἰ νῖκῷεν (Xen. Anab. 3, 15). Andoc. 1,5. Xen. Cyr. 8, 7%;
Ag. 10, 2.—T&év ἀθλητῶν Sis τοσαύτην ῥώμην λαβόντων οὐδὲν ἂν πλέον
γένοιτο τοῖς ἄλλοις, if athletes should acquire twice as much strength, no benefit
would accrue to others, here the genitive absolute stands for εἰ of ἀθληταὶ
λάβοιεν (Isoc. 4, 2). Od. 1, 390.-- Ἄν εὖ rod τὰ τοιαῦτα ἔχειν, οὐκ ἂν οἷός
τ᾽ ἦν, without having such things, I should not be able, i.e. εἰ μὴ... εἶχον (Plat.
Phaedo 99%). Οὕτω yap πρὸς τὸ ἐπιέναι τοῖς ἐναντίοις εὐψύχότατοι ἂν εἶεν, for
in this way, they would be most full of cowrage in attacking the enemy, here
οὕτω = εἰ οὕτως ἔχοιεν (Thuc. 2, 11°), Διά ye μᾶς αὐτοὺς πάλαι ἂν
᾿ἀπολώλετε, by yourselves (if it had depended on yourselves) you would have
been ruined long ago (Dem. 18, 49).
2122. Norr.—The future participle is only so found in the sense of
a present intention or necessity (2243, 2256), and does not stand for εἰ
with the future indicative in future suppositions, because the present
or aorist participle may always represent a future supposition with
éav and the subjunctive.
2123. Norze.—Observe the Homeric εἰ δ᾽ dye, come now |
(Il. 1, 524),
ELLIPSIS AND SUBSTITUTION IN THE APODOSIS
2124. 1. The apodosis is sometimes suppressed in vehement or
passionate language; as εἴποτε δ᾽ αὖτε χρειὼ ἐμεῖο γένηται---, but if ever
any need of me should arise,—very well (Il. 1, 340).—In Attic this is
specially frequent when two suppositions are introduced; one by «i
(ἐάν) μέν, and the other by εἰ (ἐὰν) δὲ μή. The apodosis of the first ἃ is
then sometimes omitted.
—_——————s
2196 THE MOODS 253
Ἐὰν μὲν ἑκὼν πείθηται εἰ δὲ μή,....εὐθύνουσιν ἀπειλαῖς καὶ πληγαῖς, if he
obeys willingly,—well and good, but if not, he is straightened by threats and
blows (Plat. Prot. 325°). Xen. Cyr. 4, 5%.
2. In wishes with εἰ or εἴθε or εἰ γάρ with the indicative or eanitee
the apodosis is of course suppressed.
2125. 1. The apodosis may be an infinitive or participle
depending on some verb of declaring, thinking, perceiving or the
_like (2192, 2193; 2300, 2301). If the finite verb represented by
the infinitive or participle would have taken ἄν, the infinitive or
participle in indirect discourse also takes it. The present and
perfect infinitive or participle may here represent also the imper-
fect and pluperfect (1948, 1955).
Φησὶν, εἰ τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, καλῶς ἔχειν, he says that it is well if you do this,
“ἐ καλῶς ἔχει. Φησὶν ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιῆτε (ποιήσητε), καλῶς ἕξειν, he says
that if you shall do this, it will be well, i.e. ““ καλῶς ἕξει". ᾿Ἔφην εἰ τοῦτο
ἐποιήσατε, καλῶς ἂν ἔχειν, he said that if you had done this, it would be well,
ie. ““καλῶς ἂν εἶχεν ᾽᾿.--Οἶδα πάντα, ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιῶσι (ποιήσωσι), καλῶς
ἕξοντα, I know that if they do this, all will be well. Οἶδα πάντα, εἰ τοῦτο
ποιοῖεν (ποιήσειαν), καλῶς ἂν ἔχοντα (= καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι), I know that if they
should do this, all would be well.
2. The infinitive may depend on a verb of commanding or
desiring ; this is the regular form of indirect command (2207).
Ei μοι τοῦτο λέγετε, κελεύω ὑμᾶς ἀπελθεῖν, if you tell me this, I bid you
to depart.
2126. Norr.—Sometimes the infinitive with ἄν is found where it
evidently does not stand in indirect discourse. In such cases a
protasis is expressed or implied, and the infinitive with av represents
an indicative or optative with ἄν.
Kai μοι οἱ θεοὶ οὕτως ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς ἐσήμηναν, ὥστε καὶ ἰδιώτην ἂν γνῶναι,
and the gods gave me such signs in the sacrifices, that even an untaught person
would have understood (Xen. Anab. 6, 151 ; like εἴ τις ἰδιώτης ἦν, ἔγνω dy).
Ἔν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ ἤδη ἔσομαι, ὡς μηδὲν Av eri ‘deities παθεῖν, I shall then be in
safety, so as not to suffer any evil (Xen. Cyr. 8, 7°"; like οὐδὲν ἃν ἔτι κακὸν
πάθοιμι). Thue. 2, 49*; 7, 42°. Plat. Meno 944. ("OyA@) ναυμαχίᾶν
ποιούμενοι ἐν πελάγει οὐκ ἂν ἐχρώμεθα διὰ τὸ βλάπτειν τὸ THs ἐπιστήμης
ἃ τῇ βαρύτητι τῶν νεῶν, in fighting a naval battle in the open sea, we could
not use the multitude, through the interference with our skill by the weight of
our ships (Thuc. 7, 62; like ὅτι ὁ ὄχλος ἔβλαπτεν ἂν εἰ αὐτῷ ἐχρώμεθα). Plat.
Symp. 174,
254 THE MOODS | 9197
2121. Notr.—1. The apodosis may be a participle not depending
on another verb.
Σωκράτης ῥᾳδίως ἂν Abed εὶς ὑπὸ τῶν δικαστῶν, εἰ καὶ μετρίως τι τούτων
ἐποίησε, προείλετο... ἀποθαν εἶν, whereas Socrates might easily have been ac-
quitted (ἀφείθη ἄν), by the judges if he had done any of these things even
moderately, he preferred to die (Xen. Mem. 4, 44). Πάντα τἄλλ᾽ εἰπὼν ἂν
ἡδέως, ἐάσω, although I would gladly say everything else, I will omit it (Dem.
8, 52; like εἶπον ἄν). Δυνηθεὶς ἂν αὐτὸς ἔχειν, εἴπερ ἐβουλήθη, παρέδωκε,
although he would have been able to hold it (Potidaea), if he had wished, yet
he gave it up (Dem. 23, 107). Plat. Crito 48°. Xen. Anab. 6, 47; Mem.
4, 2°: Anab. 1, 1.
2. Such participles are either circumstantial or attributive.
OMISSION OF THE VERB ONLY
2128. The verb of the protasis or apodosis is sometimes omitted
when the sense makes the omission sufficiently clear.
Εἴπερ τινὲς καὶ ἄλλοι, ἄξιοι νομίζομεν εἶναι τοῖς πέλας ψόγον ἐπενεγκεῖν, We,
if any, believe we are worthy of administering a rebuke to οὐ neighbours
(Thue. 1, 70'). With the verb of the apodosis omitted, Plat. Apol. 29°.
2129. 1. In this way arise conditional clauses of comparison or
simile introduced by ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ, as, just as if, even as.
Παραπλήσιον οἱ τοιοῦτοι πάσχουσιν ὥσπερ ἂν εἴ τις ἵππον κτήσαιτο
καλὸν κακῶς ἱππεύειν ἐπιστάμενος, such persons are affected nearly in the same
way as any one (would be) who acquired a good horse and knew only how to
vide badly (Isoc. 1, 27). Διεφθάρησαν ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ πρὸς ἅπαντας ἀνθρώ-
πους ἐπολέμησαν, they perished just as if they had fought against the whole
world (Isoc. 4, 69).
In such conditional clauses of comparison, av (with optative or
past indicative) really represents an apodosis with the verb suppressed.
The full forms would be πάσχουσιν ὥσπερ ἄν tis πάσχοι εἰ κτήσαιτο,
and διεφθάρησαν ὥσπερ ἂν διεφθάρησαν εἰ ἐπολέμησαν.
2. So in Homer ὡς εἰ and ὡς εἴ τε; as in Od. 9, 314.
2130. Norz.—l. With ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ both the protasis and apodosis
may be suppressed; ὥσπερ ἂν «i (also written ὡσπερανεί) then means
simply as or like. Thus φοβούβενος, ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς, τὸ τέμνεσθαι,
fearing, like a boy, to be cut (Plat. Gorg. 419"). The full form would
be φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβεῖτο εἰ παῖς ἦν.
2. So in poetry, especially in Homer, we find ὡς εἰ or ὡς
εἴ re, as or like (Od. 7, 36). |
ie A ii i ee ε..
2133 THE MOODS 255
2131. Ei μή, εἰ μὴ διά, πλὴν εἰ (εἰ μὴ ei).—These expressions arise
from the (conscious or unconscious) omission of a verb.
1. Ei μή without a verb, except ; as πρίασθαι οὐκ ἦν, εἰ μὴ ἐν τῇ
Λυδίᾳ ἀγορᾷ, it was impossible to buy any except in the Lydian market
(Xen. Anab. 1, 5°); Xen. Anab. 2, 115: Ar. Nub. 229.
2. Bi μὴ διά, except for; as εἰ μὴ διὰ τὸν πρύτανιν, ἐνέπεσεν ἄν,
except for the Prytanis (= had it not been for the Prytanis) he would
have been thrown into the pit (Plat. Gorg. 516°). Dem. 19, 74.
3. Πλὴν εἰ standing without a verb, except (like εἰ μή); as οὐδεὶς
οἶδεν τὸν θησαυρὸν τὸν ἐμὸν πλὴν εἴ τις ἄρ᾽ ὄρνις, NO one knows of
the treasure except some bird (Ar. Av. 601).
4, Ei μὴ «i, except if, is rare; as in Thue. 1, 17!; Plat. Gorg.
480".
2132. Νοτε.---Εἰ δὲ μή, but if not, otherwise, follows a preceding
assertion or condition or command, which it negatives. Ei δὲ μή can
be used even if the preceding clause was introduced by ἐὰν μέν ; and
it may even stand after negative clauses, when εἰ δέ would rather be
expected. So «i δέ is sometimes found where εἰ δὲ μή is more logical.
Ei βούλεσθε συναπιέναι, ἥκειν ἤδη κελεύει τῆς νυκτός: εἰ δὲ μή, αὔριον
πρωὶ ἀπιέναι φησίν, if you desire to return with him, he bids you to come this
very night, but if not, he says he will set out early in the morning (Xen. Anab.
2, 91}. Δεῖ.... πειρᾶσθαι, ὅπως, ἣν μὲν δυνώμεθα, καλῶς νϊκῶντες σῳζώμεθα-
εἰ δὲ μή, ἀλλὰ καλῶς γε ἀποθνήσκειν, we must try, if we can, to save owrselves
by conquering gloriously ; but if (we can) not, then to die nobly (Xen. Anab.
3, 35). Μὴ οὕτω λέγε, εἰ δὲ μή, οὐ Oappodvra pe ἕξεις, do not speak thus;
otherwise (if you do speak thus), you will not find me confident (Xen. Cyr. 3,
1*).—Ei μὲν BovAc,...< δέ, if you wish,...but if not (Plat. Symp. 212°).
VIII. CONCESSIVE CLAUSES
2133. A conditional clause becomes concessive if καί is pre-
fixed or added to εἰ or ἐάν. Thus εἰ καί or ἐὰν καί, if even,
although, Lat. quamquam; καὶ εἰ or καὶ ἐάν (κἄν), even if, Lat.
etiamsi. The construction is the same as that of conditional
clauses, The apodosis often contains the adversative particle
ὅμως, nevertheless, yet.
Ta μὲν δίκαια πάντες, ἐὰν καὶ μὴ βούλωνται, ...αἰσχύνονται μὴ πράττειν,
all persons are ashamed not to do what is just even if they do not wish to do
so (Dem. 16, 24). Ἡγούμενος ἀνδρὸς εἶναι ἀγαθοῦ ὠφελεῖν τοὺς φίλους, καὶ
256 THE MOODS 2134
εἰ μηδεὶς μέλλοι εἴσεσθαι, regarding it to be the duty of a good man to help
his friends, even if no one should find it out (Lys. 19, 59). Ei καί (Soph.
Oed. Tyr. 302, with ὅμως in apodosis). Καὶ ἐάν or κἄν (Plat. Menex. 248°;
Men. Mon. 19).
2134. Notr.—1. Kai «i or καὶ ἐὰν emphasises rather the condition ;
but often there is hardly any difference between εἰ (ἐὰν) καί and καὶ εἰ
(ἐάν). , ᾽
2. Sometimes with εἰ καί the καί does not belong to «i, but to the
next or oftener to some following word; as in Soph. Ant. 90, Aj.
1127; Xen. Mem. 1, 613,
2135. Nore.—Concession is more frequently expressed by a parti-
ciple with or without καίπερ (or καί) ; see 2258, 2274. Ἔπεί may also
express concession (Plat. Protag. 333°).
IX. RELATIVE CLAUSES
2136. 1. Relative clauses are introduced by relative pronouns
or relative adverbs.
2. The antecedent of a relative is said to be definite, when the
relative refers to a definite person, thing, place, or manner. It
is said to be indefinite when the relative does not refer to a definite
person, thing, place, or manner. The antecedent may be under-
stood.
2137. Explanatory Relative Clauses —The antecedent is here
definite. Such clauses may have the construction of any simple
sentence.
Παρὴν ὁ Μηδοσάδης τῷ Σεῦθῃ, ὅσπερ ἐπρέσβευεν αὐτῷ πάντοσε,
Medosades, who acted as ambassador for him on all occasions, was present with
Seuthes (Xen. Anab. 7, 2°). Dem. 18, 35.—Potential Indicative : Ἱπποκράτης
παρ᾽ ἐμὲ ἀφικόμενος ov πείσεται, ἅπερ ἂν ἔπαθεν ἄλλῳ τῳ συγγενόμενος
τῶν σοφιστῶν, Hippocrates coming to me will not have the experience which
he would have in meeting with any other of the philosophers (Plat. Prot. 318*).
—Potential Optative: ὁ Παρθένιος ποταμὸς ἄβατός ἐστιν, ἐφ᾽ ὃν ἔλθοιτε
ἄν, εἰ τὸν ἽΔλυν διαβαίητε, the river Parthenius, to which you would arrive if
you should cross the Halys, is wnfordable (Xen. Anab. 5, 6°).—Hortative
Subjunctive : “Avuros ὅδε παρεκαθέζετο, 6 μεταδῶμεν τῆς ζητήσεως, Anytus
has sat down here, to whom let us give a share in the inquiry (Plat. Meno 89°).
—Imperative: πιστεῦσαι...τῷ χρόνῳ ὃ ν ὑμεῖς σαφέστατον ἔλεγχον τοῦ ἀληθοῦς
νομίσατε, to trust to time, which I enjoin that you consider the clearest
πα τ συ eeeEeeeEEEeEeEeE—aEe——eE= πΠΝμΠΕοΕΓ
9140 THE MOODS 257
test of truth (Lys. 19, 61).—Optative in Wishes: οἴομαι γὰρ ἂν ἡμᾶς τοιαῦτα
παθεῖν, οἷα τοὺς ἐχθροὺς of θεοὶ ποιήσειαν, I believe we should be so
treated, as I pray the gods may treat our enemies (Xen. Anab. 3, 2°).
2138. Causal Relative Clause.—A relative clause expressing a
cause has the same construction as an ordinary causal clause.
Θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, Os ἡμῖν οὐδὲν δίδως, you do a strange thing in that you
give us nothing (Xen. Mem. 2, 7). Xen. Anab. 3, 111,
2139. Norr.—When the negative is μή, the cause is considered
as conceived rather than absolutely true; as ταλαίπωρος... ἄνθρωπος
εἶ, ᾧ μήτε θεοὶ πατρῷοί εἰσιν μήτε ἱερά, a wretched being are you to whom,
as appears, there are neither ancestral gods nor shrines (Plat. Euthyd.
302”).
2140. Consecutive Relative Clauses.—1. A relative clause may
express result. It then has any tense of the indicative, sometimes
also the potential optative or potential indicative.
Tis οὕτως εὐήθης (ἐστιν) ὑμῶν, ὅστις ἀγνοεῖ τὸν ἐκεῖθεν πόλεμον δεῦρ᾽
ἥξοντα; who of you is so simple as not to know that the war in that part will
come hither? (Dem. 1,15). ΔΛόγων.. τοιούτων οἷς ἂν ὑμᾶς ἔπεισα, of words
such as I could have persuaded you with (Plat. Apol. 38°). Dem. 18, 43.
Τοιοῦτος yiyvov περὶ τοὺς γονεῖς, οἵους ἂν εὔξαιο περὶ σεαυτὸν γενέσθαι
τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ παῖδας, be such toward your parents as you would pray for your
own children to become toward yourself (Isoc. 1, 14). Isoc. 8, 52.—In such
cases the consecutive relative clause is used like ὥστε with a finite verb (2078).
2. If the consecutive relative clause denotes a result which is
possible or necessary or intended in consequence of something
mentioned in the leading clause, it takes the future indicative.
The negative is μή. Such a consecutive relative is equivalent
to ὥστε with the infinitive (2080). For the future indicative
we sometimes have the potential optative.
‘Ixavoi ἐσμεν ὑμῖν πέμψαι vais re καὶ ἄνδρας, οἵτινες συμμαχοῦνταί
τε καὶ τὴν ὁδὸν ἡγήσονται (= ὥστε συμμάχεσθαι), we are able to send you
both ships and men, who will be your auwiliaries and will guide you on the
way (Xen. ἅπαν, 5, 4"). Ἐκεῖ od πλοῖα ἔστιν, οἷς ἀποπλευσούμεθα
(= ὥστε ἀποπλεῦσαι), there are no vessels there by which we can sail away
(Xen. ἅπαν. 6, 3"). Παῖδες δέ μοι οὔπω εἰσὶν of pe θεραπεύσουσιν,
I have no longer children who (= such as) might support me (Lys. 24, 6).
“Ἔδει ψήφισμα νϊκῆσαι τοιοῦτο, δι οὗ Φωκεῖς ἀπολοῦνται, it was necessary
for a decree to pass by which the Phocians would be destroyed (Dem. 19, 43).
17
958 THE MOODS 2141
Χρὴ.....διελθεῖν τοσοῦτον μέρος τοῦ λόγου, ὅσον μὴ AUTH GEL τοὺς πάροντας,
it is necessary to run over such a part of the discourse as will not weary the
spectators (Isoc. 15, 12). Plat. Huthyd. 306". Isoc. 4, 89 (pres. for fut.).—
Potential Optative: οὐκ ἔχομεν ἄνδρας, obs dvaBiBdoatpev ἂν ἐπὶ
τούτους τοὺς ἵππους, we have no men to mount upon these horses (Xen. Cyr.
4, 5°°),
2141. Norr.—Instead of a relative clause with the future indicative,
the future participle with the generic article (1389) may be used.
2142. Final Relative Clauses.—When a relative clause expresses
purpose, it takes the future indicative. The negative is μή.
"Edofe τῷ δήμῳ τριάκοντα ἄνδρας ἑλέσθαι, οἱ τοὺς πατρίους νόμους ovy-
γράψουσιν, the people resolved to choose thirty men to compile the ancestral
laws (Xen. Hell. 2, 33). Θαλάσσιον ἐκρίψατ᾽, ἔν θα μήποτ᾽ εἰσόψ εσθ'
ἔτι, throw me out into the sea, where ye may never more see me (Soph. Oed.
Tyr. 1410). Πάντα ποιεῖν ἐξ Sv μὴ λειτουργήσεις μεμάθηκας, you have
learned to do everything so as not to perform public duties (Dem. 42, 23).
2143. Nore.—For the future indicative, μέλλω and an infinitive
may be used; as in Xen. Cyr. 1, 416; 2, 1”.
2144. Norz.—lInstead of a final relative clause, the future participle
is much oftener used (2243, 2256).
2145. Norr.—1l. Rarely is the indicative changed to the future
optative after past tenses; as Xen. Hell. 2, 3".
2. So rarely do we find the optative aorist or present after
secondary tenses or after another optative; as in Ar. Ran. 96) Soph.
Trach. 903.
2146. Norr.—l. In Homer final relative clauses take
the subjunctive (usually with κέ) after primary tenses,
and the optative (not future) after secondary tenses.
Thus ἐπιθήσει φάρμαχ᾽ & κεν παύσῃσι, he will apply
remedies to give relief (Il. 4, 191); ἄγγελον ἧκαν, ὃς
ἀγγείλειε, they sent a messenger to announce (Od. 18,
458); Il. 3, 287.
2. Homer perhaps never uses the future indicative here.
9147. Conditional Relative Clauses.—1. When a relative clause
has an indefinite antecedent, it is of the nature of a conditional
2149 THE MOODS 259
clause, and is then called a conditional relative clause. The
negative is*47. A conditional relative clause can be changed to
an ordinary conditional clause with εἰ or ἐάν.
2. Conditional relative clauses have the four regular forms
of conditional sentences (2094).
2148. First Class.—({1) Simple Present or Past Particular Sup-
positions. The relative clause (protasis) has a present or past tense
of the indicative; the antecedent clause (apodosis) may have any
form of the verb. Compare 2095.
“A μὴ οἶδα, οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι, what I do not know (= εἴ τινα μὴ οἶδα), I do
not even think I know (Plat. Apol. 21°). Τῶν ἙἭ λλήνων ot μὴ ἔτυχον ἐν ταῖς
τάξεσιν ὄντες, εἰς τὰς τάξεις ἔθεον, those who did not happen to be in the ranks
= εἰ τινες μὴ ἔτυχον ἐν ταῖς τάξεσιν ὄντες), ran to their places (Xen. Anab. 2,
2'4),—The conditional character of the relative clause is only recognised by
The conditional relative clause may also have the future indicative
to express present purpose or necessity (2096) ; as in Thue. 2, 8°.
(2) General Suppositions. If the general supposition is present,
the relative clause (protasis) takes the subjunctive with ἄν, and the
antecedent clause (apodosis) takes the present indicative or some
equivalent form. If the general supposition is past, the relative clause
(protasis) takes the optative, and the antecedent clause (apodosis)
takes the imperfect indicative or some equivalent form. Compare
2098.
Oi Πέρσαι ὃν ἂν γνῶσι δυνάμενον μὲν χάριν ἀποδιδόναι, μὴ ἀποδιδόντα
δέ, κολάζουσιν ἰσχυρῶς, whomever the Persians find able to return a benefit
and not returning it, they pwnish severely (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2"). οὗ ἄν τις ὑπ᾽
ἄρχοντος ταχθῇ, ἐνταῦθα δεῖ μένοντα κινδὺῦνεύειν, wherever a man has been
placed by his commander, there he ought to remain and bear dangers (Plat.
Apol. 28°). Πατρὶς γάρ ἐστι πᾶσ᾽ ἵν᾽ ἂν (wherever) πράττῃ tis εὖ, his
country is every country wherever a man is well off (Ar. Plut. 1101). Κῦρος
οὕστινας μάλιστα ὁρ ῴη τὰ καλὰ διώκοντας, τούτους πάσαις Tipais ἐγέραιρεν.
whomever Cyrus saw the most zealously following noble pursuits, these he
rewarded with all kinds of honowrs (Xen. Cyr. 8, 1%). Οἱ πολέμιοι καὶ ὅπῃ
εἴη στενὸν χωρίον προκαταλαμβάνοντες ἐκώλῦον τὰς παρόδους, wherever there
was a narrow place, the enemy by pre-occupying it, obstructed the advance
(Xen. Anab. 4, 2%).
2149. Nore.—General relative suppositions sometimes have the
indicative instead of the subjunctive or optative (2100).
260 THE MOODS 2150
᾿Αγησίλαος ὅπου ᾧετο τὴν πατρίδα τι ὠφελήσειν, οὐ πόνων ὑφΐετο, whenever
Agesilaus thought that he could benefit his country in anything, he did not
shrink from toils (Xen. Ages. 7,1). Thue. 2, 64°.
2150. Norre.—Occasionally we find the optative instead of the
subjunctive, when the relative clause belongs to an infinitive depending
on a verb in the present.
Tov μὲν αὐτὸν λέγειν ἃ μὴ σαφῶς εἰδείη, εἴργεσθαι δεῖ, it is necessary for
him to be restrained from saying what he does not clearly know (Xen. Cyr.
1, 6"). Dem. 3,14. Soph. Oed. Tyr. 134.—This is against the general rule
2012.
2151. Norz.—In general relative conditions with the
subjunctive, Homer usually omits ἄν or κέ; as οὐ dy-
vais, ὅς ἀθανάτοισι μάχηται, he is not long-lived who
fights with the immortal gods (Il. 5, 407). This occurs
sometimes in other poetry ; as in Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1231.
Examples in prose are rare and doubtful.
2152. Second Class.—Present and Past Suppositions contrary to
Reality. The relative clause (protasis) has a past tense of the in-
dicative, and the antecedent clause (apodosis) a past tense of the
indicative with ἄν. Compare 2102.
Οὐ yap ἂν αὐτοὶ ἐπεχειροῦμεν πράττειν ἃ μὴ nae ¢ die we.
should not ourselves be trying to do (as we are) what we did not wnderstand
(Plat. Charm. 171°). Eur. Iph. Aul. 1213. Lys. 32, 23.
2153. Third Class.—Future Condition of more Distinct Form.
The relative clause (protasis) takes the subjunctive with dv; the
antecedent clause (apodosis) has the future indicative or some form
referring to the future. Compare 2109.
Τῷ ἀνδρί, ὃν ἂν ἕλησθε πείσομαι, whatever man you select, I will obey
(Xen. Anab. 1, 815). ᾿Απόκρῖναι 6 re ἄν σε ἐρωτῶ, answer whatever I shall
ask you (Lys. 12, 24).
2154. Nore.—In indirect discourse, the subjunctive with ἄν may
be changed to the optative without ἄν, after secondary tenses.
2155. Nore.—The future indicative is not used here for the
subjunctive with av as in 2111.
2156. Norr.—In Homer we occasionally find the sub-
junctive without ἄν or κέ here also (2110); as κατάλεξον
γήμασθ᾽, Ss τις ἄριστος ἀνὴρ καὶ πλεῖστα πόρῃσιν,
“ὦ. ΙΝ αὐ Gene
2161 THE MOODS 261
tell her to marry whoever may be the best man and may
offer the most (Od. 20, 335).
2157. Fourth Class—Future Condition of less Distinct Form. ᾿
The relative clause (protasis) has the optative, and the antecedent
clause has the optative with ἄν. Compare 2113.
Ὀκνοίην ἂν eis τὰ πλοῖα ἐμβαίνειν ἃ ἡμῖν δοίη, 1 should be reluctant to
embark in any vessels that he might give us (Xen. Anab. 1, 3). Xen. Mem.
2, 95.
2158. Norze.—In Homer a relative clause depending on
an optative of wishing, takes the optative; after an
optative with κέν (dv), such a dependent clause takes
the optative with or without κέν. See 2183.
" Μὴ θάνοι ὅς τις ἐμοί ye φίλος εἴη, may not any one die who
is a friend to me (Od. 15, 359). Od. 18, 149.---Ανδρὶ x’ οὐκ
εἴξειεν Aids ὃς θνητὸς εἴη, Ajax will yield to no man who
may be (= is) mortal (Il. 13, 321). Od. 13, 291.—'H δέ κ᾽
ἔπειτα ynpad ὅς κε πλεῖστα πόροι, and she then would
marry whoever might bring the most gifts (Od. 16, 392). Od.
21, 162, same sentence.
2159. Peculiarities of Conditional Relative Clauses.—Most of the
various peculiarities of conditional clauses (2116—2132), as mixed forms
and substitutions, occur also in conditional relative clauses.
2160. Assimilation of Mood.—For assimilation of mood both in
relative and temporal clauses, see 2183, 2184.
X. TEMPORAL CLAUSES
2161. 1. Temporal clauses are introduced by the following tempo-
ral particles : (a) ὅτε, ὁπότε, ὡς, ἡνίκα, ὁπηνίκα, when, as ; ὁσάκις, ὁποσάκις,
as oftenas ; ἐν ᾧ, while, as long as; μέχρι, ἄχρι, ἔστε, ἕως, while,
as long as ; (b) ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, when = after, since ; ἐξ ob, ἐξ ὅτου, ἀφ᾽ οὗ,
ἐξ ὧν, after, since ; ὡς τάχιστα, ἐπεὶ τάχιστα, ἐπειδὴ τάχιστα, ἐπειδὴ πρῶτον,
as soon as; (6) πρίν, πρὶν ἤ, also πρότερον ἤ, before; μέχρι, ἄχρι,
ἔστε, ἕως, μέχρι οὗ or ἄχρι of, wntil.
2. Add also: Ionic εἶτε = ὅτε; ὥσπερ = ὡς (Hdt.); ὅπως
(Hat. ὅκως), Ionic, also Attic poetic ; ἦμος = ὅτε, Ionic,
tragic, lyric; ὄφρα, as long as, until, Epic, lyric, tragic
in lyric parts; ἐπείτε, Ionic = ἐπεί; πρὶν ὅτε, Hom. =
πρίν; πάρος = πρίν, Hom. but only with inf.; ἕως of,
262 THE MOODS 2162
until, Hdt.; és 6, és ot, Hdt.; Hom. εἰς 6 κε or εἰσόκε,
as long as, until; Hom. εἵως or εἷος for ἕως. Ἔστε is
not in Homer.
2162. Temporal clauses have in general the same construction
as relative clauses; but those introduced by particles meaning
until or before, have peculiarities of their own (2172—2182).
2163. Norr.—The correlatives to the temporal particles are seldom
expressed ; oftenest τότε, then, corresponding to ὅτε or ὅταν, and πρότερον
to πρίν. So éws...réws (poet.) ; ἦμος (ροθί.)... τῆμος (poet.) ; ὄφρα (poet.)
οὐ Toppa (poet.) ; ἡνίκα... τηνίκα (poet.) or τηνικαῦτα ; ἐν ᾧ... ἐν τούτῳ ; ὡς
...@s (Hom.) ; ete.
2164. Temporal clauses which express an actual ocewrrence
take the indicative. The negative is οὐ.
Ὅτε δὲ ἐγγύτερον ἐγίγνοντο, τάχα δὴ καὶ χαλκός τις ἤστραπτε, when they
approached nearer, brazen armour began to flash (Xen. Anab. 1, 8°). Ἤρκεε
τῇ πόλει τὰ τείχη διασῴζειν, ὁπότε οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐνέβαλον, it was
sufficient for the city to save its walls when the Lacedaemonians imvaded
(Xen. Hipparch. 7,4). “Hvixa δὲ δειλὴ eyiyvero, ἐφάνη κονιορτός, when
it was afternoon, there appeared dust (Xen. Anab. 1, 85. Ἔν ᾧ ὡπλί-
ζοντο, ἧκον of προπεμφθέντες σκοποί, while they were arming themselves, the
scouts that had been sent forward returned (Xen. Anab. 2, 2"). Ἕως ἐστὶ
καιρός, ἀντιλάβεσθε τῶν mpayparev, while there is a chance, take hold of the
business (Dem. 1, 20). Ἐπεὶ ἠσθέν εἰ Δαρεῖος. ..,ἐβούλετό of τὼ παῖδε ἀμφο-
τέρω παρεῖναι, after Darius had fallen sick, he wanted both of his sons to
attend him (Xen. ἅπαν. 1, 1). Ἔξ ὅτουπερ ἐγεν όμην, κατεψηφισμένος
ἣν μου ὑπὸ τῆς φύσεως ὁ θάνατος, from the moment that I was born, death was
decreed for by natwre (Xen. Apol. 27). ‘Qs εἶδον τάχιστα τοὺς πολεμίους,
συνέρραξαν, as soon as they saiv the enemy, they engaged with them (Xen.
Hell. 7, 5'*). So ὡς (Hdt. 7, 7"); ἐπειδή (Thuc. 1, 18'; Xen. Cyr. 2, 1’);
ἐξ οὗ (Il. 1, 6; Od. 2, 27); ἀφ᾽ οὗ (Thue. 1, 18") ; ἐπεὶ (ἐπειδὴ) τάχιστα, as soon
as (Xen. Anab. 7, 2°; Plat. Prot. 310°); μέχρι, ἄχρι (οὗν), ἔστε, while (Thue.
3, 10'; Xen. Hell. 6, 4°7; Xen. Anab. 3, 1); ὁσάκις (Xen. Mem. 3, 4°).
So also εὖτε (Od. 13, 93); ὥσπερ (Hdt. 6, 41°); ὅπως or ὅκως
(Hat. 7, 2292); ἦμος (Il. 11, 86); ὄφρα, as long as (II. 4, 220);
ἐπείτε (Hdt. 7, 8°); és 6, wntil (Hdt. 1, 1154); és of, until
(Hdt. 1, 67°) but some prefer to read ἐς ὅ in Hat.
2165. Norz.—Observe the use of ὅτε with verbs of remembering ;
as μέμνημαι ὅτε, I remember when for I remember that (as Thue. 2, 21").
See 2303.
—
2166 THE MOODS 263
2166. When temporal clauses (apart from those introduced by
before or until) do not express an actual occurrence, they have
the construction of ordinary conditional clauses. When ἄν is
required, it is either added after the temporal particle, or it
coalesces with it, forming regularly ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπάν or ἐπήν
(Hat. ἐπεάν), ἐπειδάν, also ἡνίκ᾽ ἄν.
1. The temporal clause may be general, expressing a repeated
occurrence ; it then takes the subjunctive with dy after the present
tense, and the optative (without ἄν) after a past tense (2098). The
negative of the temporal clause is μή. | ;
2. The temporal clause may express an unreal condition; it then
takes a past tense of the indicative; the antecedent clause has a past
tense of the indicative with ἄν (2102). The negative of the temporal
clause is μή. This form is very uncommon with temporal clauses.
3. The temporal clause may express an expected future occurrence
of the more distinct form. It then takes the subjunctive with dv; the
antecedent clause has the future indicative or some form referring to
future time (2109). The negative of the temporal clause is μή. This
form is very common.
4, The temporal clause may express an expected future occurrence
of the less distinct form. It then takes the optative (2113); the
antecedent clause has the optative with dv. The negativeis μή. This
form is not common.
1. Οἱ Χαλδαῖοι μισθοῦ στρατεύονται, ὁπόταν tis αὐτῶν δέηται, the
Chaldaeans perform military service for hire, whenever any one requests it
of them (Xen. Cyr. 3,2"). Ἣν κ᾽ ἂν οἴκοι γένωνται, δρῶσιν οὐκ ἀνασχετά,
whenever they are at home they do intolerable things (Ar. Pax 1179). Σωκράτης
πΐνειν οὐκ ἐθέλων, ὁπότε dvayKxac bein, πάντας ἐκράτει, Socrates, although
unwilling to drink, always vanquished all when he was compelled to drink
(Xen. Symp. 220). “Ore ἐκ τοῦ δεινοῦ γένοιντο, πολλοὶ τὸν Κλέαρχον
ἀπέλιπον, whenever they were out of danger, many would desert Clearchus
(Xen. Anab. 2, 6"). "“Eor ἂν ἣ χειμῶνα ἣ πολεμίους δείσωσιν,...τὰ
κελευόμενα πάντα ποιοῦσιν, as soon as they begin to dread a storm or enemies,
they obey all orders (Xen. Mem. 3, 5°). Plat. Phaedo 108°. Od, 8, 147.
2. Kai ὁπηνίκα ἐφαίνετο ταῦτα πεποιηκὼς, wpodoyeir ἂν ἡ Karnyopia
τοῖς ἔργοις αὐτοῦ, and whensoever (= if ever) he appeared to have done these
things, his accusation would agree with his acts (Dem. 18, 14).
3. ι'οπόταν καιρὸς ἧ, ἥξω, when it shall be the proper time, I will come
(Xen. Anab. 7,3"). Ἐπειδὰν δὲ διαπράξωμαι ἃ δέομαι, ἥξω, as soon as
264 THE MOODS 2167
I have accomplished what I wish, I shall come (Xen. Anab. 2, 339), Ἣν ἐκ᾽
ἄν tis ὑμᾶς ἀδικῇ, ἡμεῖς ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν μαχούμεθα, whenever any one shall wrong
you, we will fight for you (Xen. Cyr. 4, 4"). Κῦρος ὑπέσχετο ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ
δώσειν πέντε ἀργυρίου μνᾶς, ἐπὰν εἰς Βαβυλῶνα ἥκωσι, Cyrus promised to give
to each man five minae of silver when they should arrive at Babylon (Xen.
Anab. 1, 41. Ἕωσπερ ἂν ἐμπνέω καὶ olds τε ὦ, οὐ μὴ παύσωμαι
φιλοσοφῶν, as long as I live and am able, I shall never cease to philosophise
(Plat. Apol. 29"). Xen. Oec. 1, 23. Od. 2, 124.—In indirect discourse the
subjunctive with ἄν may pass into the optative without ἄν, after past tenses.
4. ᾿Απίοιμεν ἂν ὁπότε τὸν μισθὸν ἔχοιεν οἱ ταῦτα ὑμῖν καταπράξαντες, when
those who have effected these services for you have received their pay, we shall
be ready to depart (Xen. Anab. 7, 7"). Xen. Cyr. 1, 3"; 3, 116,ὺ. Ἕως
ἴσον εἴη αὐτὰ ἑαυτῷ, as long as it should remain equal to itself (Plat. Theaet.
155°).
2167. Norr.—Observe that ὡς ἄν with the subjunctive is never
temporal in meaning; ὡς ἄν means either in what way soever (1964, 2),
or in order that (2045, 1). .
2168. Norr.—In general temporal clauses, the indicative is seldom
used ; as in Xen. Anad. 4, 7°; Xen. Cyr. 2, 328. Compare 2100.
2169. Norr.—As with conditional relative clauses,
conditional temporal clauses have certain poetic pecu-
liarities,
1. In general temporal conditional clauses, Homer
usually omits ἄν or κέ; as in Jl, 1, 163. This occurs
rarely in other poetry.
2. Homer occasionally has the subjunctive without ἄν
or κέ in future conditions ; as in Od. 18, 132.
3. In Homer the optative occasionally has ἄν or κέ in
temporal clauses ; as in 1). 9, 304.
2170. Nore.—Homeric Similes with ὡς or ὥς τε, 48, ὡς
ore (rarely ὡς ὁπότε), as when.—l. In Homer similes
introduced by these particles often take the subjunctive
like general relative clauses.
‘Os δὲ γυνὴ κλαίῃ σι...,ὡς ᾿Οδυσεὺς.. «δάκρυον εἶβεν, as a wife
weeps..., 80. Ulysses shed a tear (Od. 8, 523). Ὥστε μέγα
κῦμα.. ὑπὲρ τοίχων καταβήσεται (for καταβήσηται), ὁππότ᾽
ἐπείγῃ is ἀνέμου, as a mighty wave....dashes over the sides of
a ship when the force of the wind urges it (Il. 15, 382). ‘Qs
δ᾽ ὅτε πορφύρῃ rédayos...., ds ὁ γέρων ὥρμαινε, as when the
2173 ᾿ THE MOODS 265
sea swrges,....so meditated the old man (Il. 14, 16). ‘Qs ὁπότε
(Od. 4, 335).—The subjunctive has ἄν several times with os
ὅτε, as in Jl. 10, 5; otherwise neither ἄν nor κέ.
2. The simile sometimes begins with the subjunctive
and continues with the indicative ; as in Jl. 6, 506-514.
2171. Norr.—Conditional temporal clauses are also liable to the
various peculiarities mentioned in 2116—2132; but they occur much
less frequently.
TEMPORAL CLAUSES INTRODUCED BY ‘“‘ UNTIL”
2172. 1. The particles μέχρι, ἄχρι, ἔστε, ἕως (epic and lyric ὄφρα,
epic εἰς 6 xe or εἰσόκε, Herodotean és 6), are all used both in the sense
of while, as jong as, and in the sense of wntil. After a negative leading
clause ἕως and πρίν have the same meaning (Xen. Mem. 4, 83; Plat.
Phaedo 58’).
2. When these particles are used in the sense of while, as long as,
their clauses have the ordinary constructions of temporal clauses
(2162). The tense used is mostly the present. |
2173. When these particles mean wntil, they have the following
constructions, mostly with the aorist :—
1. When they refer to an actual occurrence, they have the indicative,
mostly aorist.
Ταῦτα ἐποίουν μέχρι σκότος ἐγένετο, they did this till darkness came
_on (Xen. Anab. 4, 2"). Od, 1, 363. Xen. Hell. 1, 1°; Cyr. 7, 5°. Hat. 6,
83'. This is like a relative clause with a definite antecedent.
2. When the temporal clause with wntil depends on a clause
implying non-reality, it takes a past tense of the indicative without
ἄν (2102). :
Οὐκ ἂν ἐπαυόμην, ἕως ἀπεπειράθην, I should not cease until I had
made an attempt (Plat. Cratyl. 396°). Ἐβασάνιζον ἂν μέχρι οὗ αὐτοῖς
ἐδόκει, they would question them wnder torture as long as they pleased
(Dem. 58, 25). Ἡδέως ἂν Καλλικλεῖ τούτῳ ἔτι διελεγόμην, ἕως αὐτῷ τὴν τοῦ
᾿Αμφίονος ἀπέδωκα ῥῆσιν, I would gladly have gone on discussing with
Callicles here until I had given him back the saying of Amphion (Plat. Gorg.
506"). Compare 2184. ᾿
3. When the temporal clause with until expresses an expectation,
it takes the subjunctive with ἄν after a primary tense or its equivalent ;
and the optative (without dv) after a past tense. But the subjunctive
with ἄν may be retained after past tenses.
266 THE MOODS ᾿ 9174.
Περιμένετε, ἔστ᾽ ἂν ἐγὼ ἔλθω, wait till I come (Xen. Anab. 5, 14).
Σπονδαὶ ἔσονται μέχρις ἂν βασιλεῖ τὰ παρ᾽ ὑμῶν StayyerOhH, the truce.
will last till what you say be reported to the king (Xen. Anab. 2, 87). Xen.
Cyr. 3, 38; Anab. 2, 3%. Il. 15, 332; 2, 332. Hdt. 2,115’. Compare 2109.
Ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς ἐξοπλισαμένοις προιέναι εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν, ἕως Κύρῳ συμ-
μίξειαν, it seemed best to them to pack up their baggage and to march
forward till they could effect a junction with Cyrus (Xen. Anab. 2,1*). Xen.
Anab. 1,9". Od. 12, 437. This is on the principle of indirect discourse,
2324. With subjunctive retained after past tense: Xen. Hell. 5, 3*.
4. When the temporal clause with wntil expresses repeated or
customary action, it has the construction of present and past general
suppositions (2098).
Τὸ τεττίγων yévos...dde ἕως ἂν τελευτήσῃ, the race of grasshoppers
sings until it dies (Plat. Phaedr. 259°). πΠεριεμένομεν οὖν ἑκάστοτε, ἕως
dvotx Gein τὸ δεσμωτήριον, we used to wait each day wntil the prison was
opened (Plat. Phaedo 59*).
2174. Norr.—1. Thucydides occasionally omits ἄν with the sub-
junctive in clauses introduced by μέχρι, μέχρι οὗ, and ἄχρι ob, until ;
as μηδένα ἐκβῆναι μέχρι πλοῦς γένηται, that no one should leave
the ship until she sailed (Thuc. 1, 137%; 4, 46; 3, 28). Compare the
similar omission with πρίν (2178).
2. This occurs with the same particles in Herodotus,
also with és 6 and és οὗ ; and with ἕως and other particles
in tragedy; as Hdt. 4, 119°; 1, 1174; 3, 31%; Soph.
Oed. Col. 77; Aj. 1183. This occasional omission of
ἄν occurs mostly in Tragedy. ξ
2118. Norr.—Clauses introduced by wntil and taking the sub-
junctive with ἄν or the optative (after past tenses) without ἄν (as in
2173, 3 and 4) often resemble final clauses and have a similar con-
struction, except that the final clauses regularly take the simple
subjunctive, and the temporal clauses with wntil take the subjunctive
with ἄν. After past tenses, the original construction may pass into
the optative without ἄν ; with the temporal clause this is usual; with
final clauses the usage varies (2040, 2042).
TEMPORAL CLAUSES INTRODUCED BY ‘‘ BEFORE”’
2176. The temporal particle πρίν, before, wntil, has the follow-
ing constructions :—
1. If the leading clause is affirmative, πρίν, before, usually takes
2177 THE MOODS 267
the infinitive. Whether the action expressed by the temporal clause
really occurs, is not indicated (as in ὥστε with the infinitive, 2080).
2. If the leading clause is negative or interrogative, πρίν, before,
until, usually has the same constructions as ἕως (2173).
Ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον ἀναβαίνει Χειρίσοφος, πρίν τινα αἰσθέσθαι τῶν πολεμίων,
Cheirisophus mounted the summit before any of the enemy perceived it (Xen.
Anab. 4, 1%). Πρὶν τόξευμα ἐξικνεῖσθαι, ἐκκλίνουσιν οἱ βάρβαροι καὶ
φεύγουσιν, before an arrow could reach them, the barbarians gave way and
fled (Xen. Anab. 1, 8). Μεσσήνην εἵλομεν πρὶν Πέρσας λαβεῖν τὴν
βασιλείαν, we took Messene before the Persians acquired their kingdom (Isoc.
1, 6). Πρὶν ἡμᾶς ἀπιέναι, μάχη ἐγεγόνει ἐν τῇ Ποτιδαίᾳ, before we came
away, a battle took place at Potidaea (Plat. Charm. 153°). Ναῖε δὲ Πήδαιον,
πρὶν ἐλθεῖν vias ᾿Αχαιῶν, he dwelt in Pedaewm before the sons of the
Greeks came (Il. 13, 172). Hdt. 6, 119°. sLys. 16, 4.
Οὐκ ἤθελε Κύρῳ εἰς χεῖρας ἰέναι, πρὶν ἡ γυνὴ αὐτὸν ἔπεισε, he did not
wish to go into the power of Cyrus before his wife persuaded him (Xen. Anab.
1, 2%). Od πρόσθεν ἐπαύσαντο πρὶν ἐξεπολιόρκησαν τὸν ἴολουρον, they did not
cease before they had reduced Olurus by siege (Xen. Hell. 7, 418). Dem. 8, 65.
This form is like that of a relative clause with a definite antecedent.
Χρῆν Λεπτίνην μὴ πρότερον τιθέναι τὸν ἑαυτοῦ νόμον, πρὶν τοῦτον ἔλῦσε
γραψάμενος, Leptines should not have passed his law before he had indicted
and repealed this one (Dem. 20, 96). This form (2173, 2) depending on an
unfulfilled condition is very uncommon.
Ἐγώ σε οὐκέτι ἀφήσω, πρὶν ἄν μοι ἃ ὑπέσχησαι ἀποδείξης, I
will never let you go before you have shown me what you have promised (Xen.
Oec. 3,1). Μὴ ἀπέλθητε πρὶν ἂν ἀκούσητε, do not go away before you
have heard (Xen. Anab. 5, 713). Eur. Med. 276. Hat. 1, 327. This form
is very common; compare 2173, 3.
᾿Απηγόρευε μηδένα βάλλειν, πρὶν Κῦρος ἐμπλησθείη θηρῶν, he forbade
any one to shoot until Cyrus should be satisfied with the hunt (Xen. Cyr. 1,
4%), Il. 21, 580. Soph. Phil. 551. Xen. Hell. 6, 5; Anab. 1, 2%. This
is the optative of indirect discourse, as in 2173, 3; the original subjunctive
with ἄν is often retained.
Οὐ πρότερον οἷός τε ποιεῖν (Sc. ποιητής), πρὶν ἂν ἔνθεος γένηται, a
poet is not able to compose before (until) he is inspired (Plat. Ion 534).
Antiphon, 1, 29. Compare 2098.—The optative is perhaps never used with
πρίν in such general suppositions.
2177. Norr.—When the leading clause is an optative with or
without ἄν, the clause with πρίν very rarely takes the optative by
assimilation.
268 THE MOODS 2178
Οὐ yap ἂν εἰδείης ἀνδρὸς νόον οὐδὲ γυναικὸς, πρὶν πειρηθείη ς, you
cannot know the mind of a man or a woman before (until) you have tried it
(Theog. 125). Soph. Phil. 961 (after an optative of wishing). But oftener
the infinitive is used (2179, 3 (c)).
2178. Norn.—Like ἕως, etc. (2174), πρίν occasionally has the
subjunctive without ἄν in Herodotus and Attic Greek, even in prose. ~
Μὴ orévate πρὶν μάθῃς, groan not ere you have learnt (Soph. Phil. _
917). Eur. Ale. 848. Ar. Ran. 1281. Hat. 4, 1574. Thue. 6, 10°; 8, 9°.
Xen. Oec. 12, 1. Plit. Theaet. 169°. Some editors consider the omission _
of dy in prose suspicious, and restore it in the texts.
2179. Norr.—(a) Occasionally πρίν, before, takes the infinitive
after negative clauses.
1. So for a past indicative :—
Ov, πρὶν πάσχειν,...«τοὺς ξυμμάχους τούσδε παρεκαλέσατε, not before we
suffered have you called in the allies here (Thue. 1, 683). Dem. 30,33. Lys. 19, 55.
2. For a subjunctive with av :—
Kai μοι μὴ θορυβήσῃ μηδείς, πρὶν ἀκοῦσαι, and let no one cry out
before hearing me (Dem. 5, 15). Soph. Aj. 1418. Eur. Med.94. Dem. 3, 12.
3. For the optative :—
Ἱκέτευον μηδαμῶς ἀποτρέπεσθαι, πρὶν ἐμβαλεῖν eis τὴν τῶν Λακεδαι-
μονίων χώρᾶν, they entreated them on no account to return before they had
made an incursion into the territory of the Lacedaemonians (Xen. Hell. 6, 5%).
(5) Πρίν is also found with an infinitive for a past indicative after
an unattainable wish or a clause implying unreality.
Ὡς Sedov πάροιθεν ἐκλιπεῖν βίον, πρὶν ἐς ξένην σε γαῖαν ἐκπέμψαι,
would that I had quitted life before I sent thee out to a foreign land (Soph.
El. 1133). Kai μ᾽ οὔθ᾽ ὁ Πλούτωνος κύων οὔθ᾽ οὑπὶ κώπῃ Ψῦχοπομπὸς ἂν Χάρων
ἔσχον, πρὶν εἰς φῶς σὸν καταστῆσαι βίον, neither the dog of Pluto ποῦ
the Charon at his oar, the ferryman of departed spirits, should stay me before
1 had brought thy life into the light (Eur. Alc. 362).
(c) After a leading optative clause, πρίν generally takes the infinitive.
Οὐκ ἂν μεθεῖτο, πρὶν καθ᾽ ἡδονὴν κλύειν, he would not let him go up
before hearing (or until he had heard) to his satisfaction (Soph. Trach. 197).
"Odotro..., πρὶν ἐμὸν ἐσθορεῖν δόμον, may he perish before he burst
into my dwelling (Aesch. Sept. 451—54). For the rare assimilation to the
optative, see 2177.
(4) In Homer πρίν, before, wntil, regularly takes the
infinitive after both affirmative and negative clauses.
Οὐ λήξω πρὶν Τρῶας ἄδην ἐλάσαι πολέμοιο, I will not
cease before the Trojans are fully satiated with war (Il. 19,
ΝΕ), δ... ; rT
2189 THE MOODS | 269
423 ; here the Attic would have πρὶν ἄν with the subjunctive).
See also 2180, 2181.
2180. Norz.—1. [pév with the indicative is found after affirmative
clauses in Thuc. 7, 715; Aeschin. 1, 64; so Thue. 7, 39; 1, 512; 1, 118?;
3, 291; 3, 104°. But in several of these a negative idea is implied.
2. Πρίν with the indicative is absent from the Iliad and
Odyssey. Except in the Homeric Hymn Apol. Pyth.
178, in Pindar (Ol. 9, 57; 13, 65; Nem. 4, 28), and in
Herodotus ; we do not find zpiv with the indicative
before the Attic authors.
3. Πρίν with the indicative is found in Attic poetry very
rarely; as in Aesch. Pro. 481; Soph. Oed. Tyr. 777
(after affirmative); Ar. Av. 700; Hur. Iph. Aul. 489.
4. Ilpiv γ᾽ ὅτε, until, occurs with the indicative in Homer
in Il. 9, 588; 12, 436; Od. 13, 322; 23, 43; 4, 180 ;—
Hom. Hymns Apol. Del. 49; Cer. 96, 195, 202.
2181. Nore.—l. In Homer and Hesiod the few cases
of πρίν with the subjunctive have neither ἄν nor κέ.
They are J/. 18, 135 and 190; 24, 781; Od. 10, 175;
13, 336; 17, 7;—Hes. Theogon. 222; Op. 738.
2. Homer has πρίν γ᾽ ὅτ᾽ ἄν (= πρίν) with the subjunctive
in Od. 2, 373 and 4, 477.
2182. Norz.—1. Πρότερον 7 (= πρὶν 7), sooner than, before, occa-
sionally occurs in Thucydides and Herodotus: with the infinitive after
past tenses; with the subjunctive without ἄν ; and with the indicative.
Ἐπὶ τοὺς πομπέᾶς τοὺς ὁπλίτᾶς πρότερον ἣ αἰσθέσθαι αὐτοὺς... εὐθὺς
ἐχώρησεν, he proceeded immediately to the armed men in the procession before
they perceived it (Thue. 6, 58'). Hdt. 7, 2°.—(Xp)) μὴ πρότερον ἀξιοῦν
ἀπολύεσθαι, ἣ τοὺς... ὁπλίτας ἀπαράξητε, it is necessary to determine not to
separate before you have swept off the soldiers (Thuc. 7, 63', his only c:se).
Hadt. 4, 1965.--ὀοαὐδὲ ἤδεσαν ἐοῦσαν (τὴν ἄτραπον) πρότερον ἤ περ ἐπ v-
θοντο Τρηχινίων, they did not know of the existence of the path before they
found it out from the Trachinians (Hdt. 7, 175°). Thue. 2, 65'*.—But
πρότερον ἤ is also in general use when it merely connects two independent
verbs.
2. Thucydides once has ὕτερον 7, later than (Thuc., 6, 45).
3. In Attic Greek we often find πρότερον or πρόσθεν in the leading
clause, with πρίν in the temporal clause.
270 THE MOODS 2183
Οὐ πρότερον κακῶν παύσονται ai πόλεις, πρὶν ἂν αὐταῖς οἱ φιλόσοφοι
ἄρξωσιν, the cities will not have relief from troubles before the philosophers
rule them (Plat. Rep. 487°). Xen. Anab. 3, 11°; 6, 177.
4. So Homer often has zpiv...rpiv (as in Il. 7, 481).
He very rarely has πάρος... πρίν.
5. Homer uses πάρος like πρίν, but only with the in-
finitive; as tapos δόρποιο μέδεσθαι, before taking
thought of swpper (Il. 18, 246).
6. Πρὶν 7, sooner than, before, is found twice in Homer
(Il. 5, 287, and 22, 266, with infinitive) and often in
Herodotus, who uses it in the same constructions as
πρότερον 7 above (2182).
Οὐ πρότερον παύσομαι πρὶν ἢ ἕλω τε καὶ πυρώσω τὰς
᾿Αθήνᾶς, I shall not cease until I take and burn Athens (Hat.
7, 8°); 2, 2' (inf.); 6, 45? (indic.).—Although πρὶν 7 is found
occasionally in Attic prose, the # is usually eliminated by
editors.
ASSIMILATION OF MOOD IN RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL CLAUSES
2183. A conditional relative or temporal clause, depending on a
subjunctive or optative, is usually assimilated in mood to its leading verb.
Ἔλεγχος δέ (Sc. ἐστιν), ὅταν ὧν ἂν εἴπῃ τις τἀληθὲς ὁμοῦ δείξῃ, it is a
proof whenever any one shows the truth of what he says (Dem. 22, 22, here
ὧν ἂν εἴπῃ is assimilated to ὅταν δείξῃ). Οὐδ᾽, ἐπειδὰν Sv av πρίηται
κύριος γένηται, τῷ προδότῃ συβούλῳ περὶ τῶν λοιπῶν ἔτι χρῆται, nor, when he
has got possession of what he has bought, does any one use the traitor as an
adviser concerning future matters (Dem. 18, 47). Ei ἀποθνήσκοι μὲν πάντα
ὅσα τοῦ tv μεταλάβοι, ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀποθάνοι,...καὶ μὴ πάλιν ἀναβιώσκοιτο,
dp’ οὐ πολλὴ ἀνάγκη (εἴη ἂν) τελευτῶντα. πάντα τεθνάναι; if all things that
partake of life were to die, and after they had died did not come to life again,
would not necessarily all things at last be dead? (Plit. Phaedo 72*).—Such
examples fall also under the general principles of 2109 and 2113; and are
like ordinary protases.
TeOvainv ὅτε po μηκέτι ταῦτα μέλοι, may I die when these are no
longer my care (Mimnermus 1, 2). Ar. Vesp. 1431.—See 2157 and 2158
for Homeric usage.
2184. A relative or temporal clause, depending on a clause
implying non-fulfilment, takes. by assimilation a similar form of
verb, i.e., a past tense of the indicative.
> , , cA > > > , ed - 4 = ’
Ξυνεγιγνώσκετε δήπου ἄν μοι, εἰ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ φωνῇ τε καὶ τῷ τρόπῳ ἔλεγον,
2186 THE INFINITIVE 271
ἐν οἷσπερ ἐτεθράμμην, you would no doubt pardon me, if I were
speaking in that language and manner in which I had been brought up (Plat.
Apol. 17°). Xen. Rep. Ath. 1,16. Dem. 8, 1. Xen. Mem. 3, 5°.—Ei περὶ
καινοῦ τινος πράγματος προὐτίθετο λέγειν, ἐπέσχον ἂν ἕως οἱ πλεῖστοι τῶν
εἰωθότων (sc. λέγειν) γνώμην ἀπεφήναντο, if the question for discussion
were anything new, I should have waited till most of those accustomed to
speak had expressed their view (Dem. 4, 1).—Such examples have the form
protases implying non-fulfilment (2102 ; compare also 2173, 2).
THE INFINITIVE
2185. Nature of the Infinitive-—1. The infinitive is a verbal
neuter noun and as such can stand with or without the article.
It may be the subject or object of a verb, and may have the same
general government as nouns.
2. It shows its verbal nature by the following characteristics :
(a) it can be qualified only by adverbs, as τὸ καλῶς μάχεσθαι,
{the act of) fighting well or to fight well ;—(b) it retains the govern-
ment of its verb; as (τὸ) ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τέχνης, the caring for an
rt; (τὸ) χρῆσθαι τέχνῃ, the using of an art; (τὸ) ἀσκεῖν τέχνην,
the practising of an art ;—(c) it may have a subject in the accusa-
tive; as τὸ ἁμαρτάνειν ἀνθρώπους οὐδὲν θαυμαστόν, for men to
err is nothing wonderful ;—(d) each verb has various infinitives
according to voice and tense;—(e) the infinitive may take ἄν
and represent a finite verb with ἄν. :
3. The infinitive with the article τό often corresponds to the
English participial noun in -ing; as nom. τὸ γράφειν, writing ;
gen. τοῦ γράφειν, of writing; dat. τῷ γράφειν, to or for or by
writing ; acc. TO γράφειν, writing.
4. Often the infinitive is translated by an ordinary English
noun ; as τὸ θανεῖν, death ; τὸ ἀδικεῖν, injustice.
I. SusJEcT AND PREDICATE-NOUN WITH THE INFINITIVE
2186. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed when it is
identical with the subject of the leading verb and is not emphatic.
A predicate-noun or predicate-adjective belonging to the infinitive
is here put in the same case as the subject of the leading verb:
thus usually in the nominative.
272 THE INFINITIVE 9187
᾿Αδικεῖσθαι νομίζει ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν, he believes he is wronged by us (Xen.
Anab. 1, 3"). Ta πυρὰ οὐκ ἔφη ἰδεῖν, he declared not to have seen the
watch-fires (Xen. Anab. 4, 4"°). ‘Opodroyeis οὖν περὶ ἐμὲ ἄδικος γεγεν ἢ-
σθαι; do you then admit to have been unjust to me? (Xen. Anab. 1, 68).
Πέρσης ἔφη εἶναι, he said he was a Persian (Xen. Anab. 4, 4'7).—So
when a participle takes the place of the subject: ἀπαλλαγεὶς τούτων τῶν
φασκόντων δικαστῶν εἶναι, being rid of those professing to be judges (Plat.
Apol. 41*). Isoc. 15, 221.
So with the infinitive and article: Ἔκ rod πρότερος λέγειν, ὃ
διώκων ἰσχύει, by speaking first the prosecutor gains strength (Dem. 18, 7).
Xen. Cyr. 5, 3%. Thue. 7, 281. Περικλῆς πρὸς τῷ εὐφυὴς εἶναι ἐκτήσατο
τὸ ὑψηλόνουν, Pericles, in addition to being naturally gifted, acquired loftiness
of thought (Plat. Phaedo 270°). Thuc. 1, 34’. Ἢ τῆς ψῦχῆς φιλίᾳ διὰ τὸ
ἁγνὴ εἶναι καὶ ἀκορεστοτέρᾷ ἐστιν, the love of mind, through being pure,
is also less liable to satiety (Xen. Symp. 8, 15).
9187. Nore.—An interposed δεῖν or χρῆναι does not prevent this
assimilation of case.
Ἐκεῖνοι ἐπὶ τῷ σίτῳ οἴονται δεῖν φρόνιμοι καὶ μέτριοι φαίνεσθαι,
they think they ought to appear discreet and temperate at their meals (Xen.
Oyr. 5, 217). Lys. 25,18. Dem. 51, 1.
2188. Norr.—lIf the subject is emphasised, especially in contrast
with other persons, the nominative or accusative of the personal pronoun
is inserted for the first and second persons, and the nominative of
αὐτός for the third. ;
Ἐγὼ εὔχομαι, πρὶν ταῦτα ἐπιδεῖν ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν γενόμενα, pipids ἐμέ ye κατὰ
τῆς γῆς ὀργυιὰς γενέσθαι, I pray that before I see this done by you, I may
be ten thousand fathoms below the earth (Xen. Anab. 7, 1°). Ei δ᾽ οἴεσθε
Χαλκιδέᾶς τὴν Ἑλλάδα σώσειν ἣ Meyapéds, ὑμεῖς δ᾽ ἀποδράσεσθαι τὰ
πράγματα, οὐκ ὀρθῶς οἴεσθε, if you think that the Chalcideans or the Megarians —
will save Greece, and that you will escape the trouble, you do not think right
(Dem. 9,74). Κλέων οὐκ ἔφη αὐτός, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνον στρατηγεῖν, Cleon said that
not he himself, but that man (Nicias) was commander (Thue. 4, 28').—The
emphatic, and not the enclitic, forms of the personal pronoun are here used.
2189. If the subject of the infinitive is not identical with that
of the leading verb, it stands in the accusative. A predicate-noun
or predicate-adjective referring to the subject of the infinitive is
also in the accusative.
"Quuny τὴν ἐμαυτοῦ γυναῖκα πᾶσῶν σωφρονεστάτην εἶναι τῶν ἐν
τῇ πόλει, I believed wy wife to be the most prudent of all in the city (Lys.1,
10). Τὸν καλὸν κἀγαθὸν ἄνδρα καὶ γυναῖκα εὐδαίμονα εἶν αἰ φημι,
2190 THE INFINITIVE 273
1 assert the virtuous man and the virtuous woman are happy (Plat. Gorg.
4702). Kpavyiy πολλὴν ἐποίουν καλοῦντες ἀλλήλους, ὥστε καὶ τοὺς πολεμίους
ἀκούειν, they made so much noise in calling each other that even the enemy
could hear them (Xen. Anab. 2, 2'").—The subject of an infinitive may be
another infinitive ; as δοθῆναι αὐτῷ σῴζειν τοὺς Ἕλληνας, that it should be
granted to him to save the Greeks (Xen. Anab. 2, 3%; here σῴζειν is the
subject of δοθῆναι).
2190. When the subject of an infinitive is identical with an
object in the leading clause, it is here also omitted. A predicate-
“noun or predicate-adjective referring to such an omitted subject
of the infinitive, is either assimilated in case to the object in the
leading clause, or else it takes the accusative. But the assimila-
tion to the genitive occurs only with adjectives, very rarely with
nouns,
Κύρου ἐδέοντο ὡς προθῦμοτάτου πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον γενέσθαι,
they begged of Cyrus to be as favowrable to the war as possible (Xen. Hell. 1,
03). Isoc. 4, 71.—With accusative: Διαθρυπτόμενος ὑπὸ τῶν δεομένων pov
προστάτην γενέσθαι, corrupted by those requesting of me to be leader
(Xen. Cyr. 7, 253). Δέομαι ὑμῶν μεμνημένους τῶν εἰρημένων τὰ δίκαια
ψηφίσασθαι, I beg of you to be mindful of (lit. remembering) what has been
said and to vote what is just (Isoc. 19, 51). ᾿Ανδρῶν ἀγαθῶν ἐστιν
ἀδικουμένους ἐξ εἰρήνης πολεμεῖν, it is the part of brave men, when
injured to go from peace to war (Thue. 1; 120°).—Rarely with a predicate-
noun assimilated to a genitive; as in Hadt. 5, 80°: Αἰγῖνητέων δέεσθαι...
τ᾽μωρητήρων γενέσθαι, to ask the Aeginetans to become our helpers.
Nov σοι ἔξεστιν ἀνδρὶ γενέσθαι, now it is in your power to become
a (great) man (Xen. Anab. 7, 1"). Οὐκ ἐνδώσομεν πρόφασιν οὐδενὶ κακῷ
γενέσθαι, to no one will we give a pretext to be a coward (Thue. 2, 87").
Xen Cyr. 6, 4°. Hdt. 6, 11°, Dem. 3, 23.—With accusative: Συμφέρει
αὐτοῖς φίλους εἶναι μᾶλλον ἢ πολεμίους, it behoves them to be friends
rather than enemies (Xen. Occ. 11, 23). “Egeorw tyiv..cdepyéras
φανῆναι τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων, it is in your power to show yourselves the
benefactors of the Lacedaemonians (Xen. Hell. 4, 8*). Plat. Polit. 274".
Xen. Anab. 1,3°; Hell. 4, 1%. ;
Ἐκεῖσε ἄλλους πέπεικα συμμαθητάς μοι φοιτᾶν, there I persuaded
others to go as my fellow-pupils (Plat. Euthyd. 272°).
So after participles assimilation is regular: Βουλομένων ὑμῶν προ-
θύμων εἶναι, if you will be zealous, lit. you willing to be zealous (Thue.
1,71’). ᾿Ανεγέλασεν ἐπι τῷ κρείττονι τοῦ Ἔρωτος φάσκοντι εἶναι,
he laughed at him who declared he was stronger than Love (Xen. Cyr.
6, 1%),
18
974 THE INFINITIVE 2191
2191. An infinitive often has a predicate-accusative with no
subject-accusative expressed ; some indefinite subject of the infinitive,
like τινά (any one) or ἀνθρώπους, is then understood.
Φιλάνθρωπον εἶναι dei, one ought to be a lover of mankind (Isoc. 2, 15).
Δρῶντας ἢ μὴ δρῶντας ἥδιον θανεῖν, ’tis sweeter for men to die acting than not
acting (Eur. Hel. 814).
Il. IneinitiveE WitHoutr THE ARTICLE
(a) INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
2192. The infinitive is used in indirect discourse after verbs
of saying and thinking and the like-—The verb φημί, say, regularly
has the infinitive; λέγω passively in the sense, is said, regularly
has the infinitive, but actively it usually takes a clause with ὅτι
or ws. Other verbs of saying usually take ὅτε or ὡς. See 2198.
—For verbs of promising, hoping, expecting, and swearing, see 2195.
2198. When a dependent assertion is expressed in indirect
discourse by an infinitive, the tense of the infinitive represents
the tense of the finite verb which would be used in direct dis-
course ; the present and perfect infinitive may here represent the
imperfect and pluperfect respectively (compare 1955, 2018, 2300).
If the verb in the direct discourse would take dy (potential
optative or potential indicative), the infinitive must also take ἄν.
The negative is οὐ (but see 2341—2344).
Oi ἡγεμόνες οὔ φασιν εἶναι ἄλλην ὁδόν, the guides declare that there is
no other road (Xen. Anab. 4, 1"; direct οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλη ὁδός). ᾿Α κούω καὶ
ἄλλα ἔθνη πολλὰ τοιαῦτα εἶναι, I hear that there are many other such nations
(Xen. Anab. 2, δ᾽"; direct εἰσι). Τοὺς δ᾽ αἰχμαλώτους οὐδ᾽ ev OtpnOqvai
φησι λύσασθαι, he says he did not even think of ransoming the prisoners
(Dem. 19, 39; direct οὐδ᾽ ἐνεθυμήθην). ἜἜ φη...ἄξειν τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους,
he said he would bring the Lacedaemonians (Τὰς. 4, 28΄, he said ἄξω).
Εἴκαζον ἢ διώκοντα οἴχεσθαι ἢ καταληψόμενόν τι προεληλακέναι,
they conjectured that either he had gone off in pursuit or had pushed forward
to take some point (Xen. Anab. 1, 10", they thought ἢ διώκων οἴχεται ἢ
καταληψόμενός τι προελήλακεν). For an example of the fut. perf. inf., see
Xen. Anab. 1, 5'°).—"Egn Κῦρον ἄρχειν τοῦ λόγου ὧδε, he said that Cyrus
opened the inquiry thus (Xen. Anab. 1, 6°, here ἄρχειν stands for ἦρχε).
᾿Αλίσκεσθαι ἔφασαν, they said they were about to be captured or came
near being captured (Xen. Anab. 5, 2", they said ἡλισκόμεθα, impf. of
2195 THE INFINITIVE 275
attempted action). Dem. 19, 130. Xen. Mem. 2, 6%. Λέγεται ἄνδρα τινὰ
ἐκπεπλῆχθαι...ἐπὶ τῷ κάλλει τοῦ Κύρου, it is said that a certain man had
been struck with wonder at the beauty of Cyrus (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4517, here
ἐκπεπλῆχθαι stands for ἐξεπέπληκτο). τ Ἐνόμιζον παρὰ Κύρῳ ὄντες ἀγαθοὶ
ἀξιωτέρᾶς ἂν tipns τυγχάνειν ἢ παρὰ βασιλεῖ, they believed that by being
brave under Cyrus, they would obtain more adequate reward than under the
king (Xen. Anab. 1, 955, direct τυγχάνοιμεν ἄν). Δοκεῖτέ μοι πολὺ βέλτιον ἂν
περὶ τοῦ πολέμου....βουλεύσασθαι, εἰ τὸν τόπον τῆς χώρᾶς, ἡ πολεμεῖτε,
ἐνθυμηθείητε, it seems to me that you would deliberate better concerning the
war if you should consider the position of the place where you are fighting
(Dem. 4, 31, direct βουλεύσαισθε ἄν). Κῦρος εἰ ἐβίωσεν, ἄριστος ἂν δοκεῖ
ἄρχων γενέσθαι, if Cyrus had lived, it seems to me that he would have
become a most excellent ruler (Xen. Oec. 4, 18, direct ἄριστος ἂν ἐγένετο ἄρχων).
Οἴει ἂν τοὺς θεοὺς τοῖς ἀνθρώποις δόξαν ἐμφῦσαι,...εἰ μὴ δυνατοὶ ἦσαν ; do
you suppose that the gods would have implanted an opinion in men....if they
were not able (Xen. Mem. 1, 4'*, direct ἐνέφῦσαν ἄν). Dem. 49, 35. Lys.
27, 9 (for perf. opt. with ἄν). Dem. 19, 312 (for pluperf. ind. with dv).—
For the rare and doubtful fut. inf. with dv, see 1967.
2194. Norr.—The context must determine whether the infinitive
with dy represents a potential optative or potential indicative of the
direct discourse.
- 2495. Verbs of promising, hoping, expecting, threatening, and
swearing, take either a future infinitive of indirect discourse or
an aorist or present infinitive as object (2207). So ελπίζω τοῦτο
ποιήσειν, I hope I shall do this, or ἐλπτίζξω τοῦτο ποιῆσαι Or ποιεῖν,
I hope to do this. The negative with the infinitive is regularly
μή (but see 2338—2340).
Ὑπισχνοῦντο μηδὲν χαλεπὸν αὐτοὺς πείσεσθαι, they promised that they
would suffer no harm (Xen. Hell. 4, 4). Ὑπέσχετό μοι βουλεύσασθαι, he
promised me to consider (Xen. Anab. 2, 3%). Xen. Anab. 1, 2° (pres. inf.).
- Ἐλπίζει ῥᾳδίως tuas ἐξαπατήσειν, he expects to deceive you easily (Dem.
29, 54). Ἐλπίζω ἐκείνους ἐλθεῖν, I hope that they will come (Xen. Cyr.
2,4"). Plat. Rep. 573°.—Todv στρατηγὸν προσδοκῶ ταῦτα πράξειν, I expect
that the general will do this (Xen. ἅπαν. 3, 1.1). Andoc. 3, 27.—Noy
dredovow ἐμβαλεῖν εἰς τὴν ᾿Αττικήν, the Boeotians now threaten to make
an incursion into Attica (Xen. Mem. 3, Ὁ). Xen. Hell. 5, 41.--δικάσειν
ὀμωμόκατε, you have sworn that you will give judgment (Dem. 39, 40).
᾿Αναγκάζει τὸν Κερσοβλέπτην ὁμόσαι εἷναι μὲν τὴν ἀρχὴν κοινὴν..., πάντας δ᾽
ὑμῖν ἀποδοῦναι τὴν χώὠώρᾶν, he compels Kersobleptes to swear that the
government should be common, and that all should give up the land to you
(Dem. 23, 170).—With the infinitive and dv: Xen. Anab. 7, 7*’.
276 THE INFINITIVE 2196
2196. Norr.—l. Ἐλπίζω (or ἐλπίς) rarely has also these construc-
tions: ὡς with a finite verb: Thuc. 5, 92; 6, 30?; Eur. Hl, 919 ----ὅπως
with future indicative: Soph. Hl. 963; infinitive with ἄν: Xen.
Mem, 2, 6%.
2. ᾿Απειλέω may take ὅτι with the indicative or optative future; as
in Xen. Anab. 5, 6*4; Ar. Plut. 88.
2197. Personal and Impersonal Constructions.—1. Some verbs,
which may be used impersonally and be followed by an accusative
with the infinitive in indirect discourse, may also be used person-
ally in the passive form. Thus we may say λέγεται τὸν Κῦρον
τεθνάναι, it is said that Cyrus is dead, or λέγεται ὁ Κῦρος τεθνάναι
Cyrus is said to be dead, With the impersonal passive construction
the infinitive is the subject.
2. With verbs of saying, announcing, and admitting, the personal
and impersonal constructions are used indifferently ; with verbs of
thinking, the personal construction is regular.—Compare δίκαιός εἶμι,
etc., for δίκαιόν ἐστι 2204.
Ἐλέγετο Κύρῳ δοῦναι χρήματα πολλά, she was said to have given Cyrus
considerable money (Xen. Anab. 1, 2!*). Ἔς τοῦτον τὸν χῶρον λέγεται
ἀπικέσθαι τὸν στρατόν, it is said that the army reached this place (Hdt. 3,
262). ὋὉ ᾿Ασσύριος eis τὴν χὠρᾶν ἐμβαλεῖν ἀγγέλεται, it is announced that
the Assyrian has made an incursion into the land (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3°), Ἔρως
ὁμολογεῖται παρὰ πάντων μέγας θεὸς εἶναι, Eros is admitted by all to be a
mighty god (Plat. Symp. 202°). ‘Opodoyetrac τὴν πόλιν ἡμῶν ἀρχαιοτάτην
εἶναι, it is admitted that our city is the most ancient (Isoc. 4, 23).
2198. 1. Of φημί, εἶπον, and λέγω, all meaning to say,
(a) φημί nearly always takes an infinitive construction ;
(δ) εἶπον takes ὅτι or as;
(c) λέγω takes indifferently ὅτι or és, or an infinitive construction ; :
but passively λέγω regularly takes the infinitive, and actively it takes
generally ὅτι or ws.
2. Verbs of thinking, and δοκέω when it means to think, regularly
have the infinitive. ‘Opodoyéw, to admit, nearly always takes the
infinitive construction.
3. Λέγω and εἶπον with the infinitive usually mean to command.
4, Φημ' with ὅτι or ὡς occurs several times: as Xen. Hell. 6, 37;
Dem. 4, 48.—Eirov with the infinitive in indirect discourse occurs
occasionally ; as Hdt. 2, 30°; Thuc. 7, 352.
2201 THE INFINITIVE 277
5. For πείθειν ὡς, see 2211.—For the construction of verbs of
disputing, doubting, and denying, see Redundance of Negatives, 2350—
2357.
2199. Assimilation of Relative and Temporal Clauses to Infinitive.
—1l. When a relative or temporal clause (with ds, ore, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή)
depends on an infinitive in indirect discourse, it sometimes has the
infinitive by assimilation instead of an indicative or optative.
Ta δὲ μέγιστα τῶν ἐν τούτοις ἔφη τοὺς θεοὺς ἑαυτοῖς καταλείπεσθαι, ὧν
οὐδὲν δῆλον εἶναι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, he said that the gods reserved to them-
selves the most important particulars attending these matters, of which nothing
is apparent to men (Xen. Mem. 1, 15). Plat. Rep. 616", 490°. Ὡς ἀκοῦσαι
τοὺς παρόντας, θόρυβον γενέσθαι (paciv), they say that there was a tumult
when those present heard it (Dem. 19, 195). Thuc. 2, 1027 (ὅτε). Plat. Prot.
353" (ἐπεί) ; Rep. 614° (ἐπειδή).
2. In Herodotus this occurs also with <i, if, and διότι,
because: Hdt. 3, 108'; 3, 55°.
3. The use of the infinitive in indirect questions is uncommon; as
διορίζουσι σαφῶς ἐφ᾽ οἷς ἐξεῖναι ἀποκτιννύναι, they define
clearly under what circumstances it is lawful to kill (Dem. 23, 74) ;
compare Dem. 36, 25.
2200. Historical Infinitive—Sometimes in narrative, the infini-
tive appears to stand ‘alone, even throughout a series of sentences,
where the indicative would be expected; but it here dey end: on
some word of saying either expressed or understood.
‘PAAN, ὦ wai,” φάναι τὸν ᾿Αστυάγην, “οὐκ ἀχθόμενοι ταῦτα περι-
πλανώμεθα,᾽᾽ etc., ‘but, child,” said Astyages, “ἐξ is not with pain that we
ramble through these windings, etc. (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3°, see this passage and its
continuation) ; similarly in Hdt. 1, 245 ; Plat. Rep. 614°.
(b) INFINITIVE NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
2201. The infinitiv» not in indirect discourse may be used—
1. Like a noun, as a subject, object, predicate, or appositive
(Nominal Infinitive).
2. To complete or limit the meaning of verbs, adjectives, nouns,
or adverbs (Supplementary Infinitive).
3. In various constructions; 1.6., to express conditions, commands,
wishes, resolutions ; it is also used absolutely, and in certain idiomatic
expressions.
278 THE INFINITIVE 2202
NOMINAL INFINITIVE
2202. Infinitive as Subject-Nominative.—The infinitive (with or
without a subject-accusative) is used as the subject of a finite
verb, especially of impersonal verbs and expressions.
Such are χρή, det, it is necessary, δοκεῖ, it seems good, πρέπει, προσ-
ἥκει, it 1s proper, ἔξεστι, Ut is permitted, ἔστι, it is possible, ἀδύνατόν (or
ἰδύνατά) ἐστι, οὐχ οἷόν τέ ἐστι, it is impossible, καλόν ἐστι, it is honour-
able, αἰσχρόν ἐστι, it is base, vopos ἐστι, it is the law, dpa ἐστι, it is time,
καιρός ἐστι, there is opportunity, and many others. The negative is
μή.
Τί χρὴ ποιεῖν; what is it necessary to do? (Xen. Anab. 2,1"). "Ἔδοξεν
avrois...mpoiéva, it seemed best to them to proceed (Xen. Anab. 2,12). Φ εὖὐ-
γειν αὐτοῖς ἀσφαλέστερόν ἐστιν, it is safer for them to fly (Xen. Anab. 3, 219).
Οὐχ ἡδὺ (€or) πολλοὺς ἐχθροὺς é χειν, it is not pleasant to have many enemies
(Dem. 19, 221). Αἰσχρὸν ἀκούσαντα χρήσιμον λόγον μὴ μαθεῖν, it is
disgraceful for one who has heard a useful discourse not to learn (Isoc. 1, 18).
"Qpa ἡμῖν βουλεύεσθαι, it is time for us to consider (Xen. Anab. 5, 713).
Xen. Hell. 7, 1*'.
2208. Norr.—1l. With verbs meaning to happen, ὥστε sometimes
precedes the infinitive.
Ἐγένετο αὐτῷ ὥστε χρήμασιν εὐεργετεῖν, he happened to have the
means of benefiting friends with money (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2%). ΞἘυνέβη... ὥστε
πολέμου μηδὲν ἔτι ἅψασθαι μηδετέρους, it happened that neither party applied
themselves any longer to war (Thue. 5, 141). Hdt. 3, 71°.
2. Rarely ὥστε appears before such an infinitive after other verbs ;
as ἀδύνατον ἐστιν tpiv ὥστε Πρωταγόρου τοῦδε σοφώτερόν twa ἑλέσθαι, it
is impossible for you to select a wiser man than Protagoras here (Plat.
Prot, 338°).
2204. Nore.—Personal Construction.—1. Instead of the impersonal
construction, the Greek here often uses a personal construction, as
with the infinitive in indirect discourse (2197). Thus we may say
δίκαιόν ἐστιν αὐτὸν ζημιοῦσθαι or δίκαιός ἐστι ζημιοῦσθαι, it is right for
him to be punished.
2. The personal construction is almost regular with δοκέω, ἔοικα,
φαίνομαι, I seem, and συμβαίνει, it happens ; it is wholly regular with
ἐπίδοξός εἰμι, it is expected that I , also with δέω πολλοῦ (μῖκροῦ or
ὀλίγου, τοσούτου), tt lacks much (little, so much) that I ——, or I am
2207 THE INFINITIVE 279
far from , and zap pixpov ἔρχομαι, I come near ; it is usual
with δίκαιός εἰμι, it ts gust that I ——, ἄξιός εἰμι, ἐπιτήδειός εἰμι, and a
few similar expressions. ,
Δοκῶ po ἀδύνατος εἶναι, I seem to myself to be unable (Plat. Rep. 368°,
impers. Xen. Anab. 1, 4:8). ᾿Ἐοίκᾶσι, they seem (Xen. Oec. 7, 11). ‘Qs
φαίνει, as you seem (Plat. Polit. 280”). TodAn τις droyid ξυμβαίνει
γίγνεσθαι, there would be a considerable absurdity (Plat. Phil. 55"; impers.
Plat. Rep. 375°).—EwidoéEds εἶμι τυχεῖν τῆς τιμῆς ταύτης, I expect to
attain to this honour (Isoc. 6, 8). Πολλοῦ δέω ὑπὲρ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογεῖσθαι,
I am far from speaking in my defence (Plat. Apol. 804). Isoc. 9, 62. Lys.
17, 1.—Aixacos εἶ βοηθεῖν τῷ ἀνδρί, it is just for you to help the man or
you are right to help the man (Plat. Prot. 339). Ar. Nub. 1434. Xen.
Hell. 5, 2°.
2205. ΝΟΤΕ.---Δῆλόν ἐστι and φανερόν ἐστι, it is clear, take only a
clause with ὅτι; as in Xen. Anab. 3, 11°—We have also δῆλος or
φανερός εἶμι ὅτι; aS in Xen. Anab. 5, 2:6, Cyr. 1, 4%. For δῆλός εἰμι
and φανερός εἰμι and a participle, see 2301.
2206. Nore.—Kivdives ἐστι takes either the infinitive or else the
construction of a verb of fearing.
Οὐ cpixpos κίνδῦνός ἐστιν ἐξαπατηθῆναι, there is not a little danger of being
deceived (Plat. Cratyl. 436°). Κίνδῦνός ἐστιν μὴ of Ἕλληνες συστῶσιν,
there is danger lest the Greeks combine (Xen. Hell. 4, 8?).—Kivdivevo with
the infinitive means to run a risk (Xen. Mem. 4, 7°).
2207. Infinitive as Object.—1. The infinitive is used as the
object of many verbs ani expressions which d2note an action
influencing another action which is its object; as βούλομαι τοῦτο
ποιῆσαι, I wish to do this. The negative is μή.
2. Such verbs are those meaning to wish, to desire ; to command,
to compel, io permit, to demand, to beg; to advise, to persuade ; to
attempt, to begin, to dare, to intend ; to teach, to accustom ; to resolve,
to choose, to fear ;—those meaning to take care, to be unwilling ; to
forbid, to dissuade, to hinder, to avoid, and others. Such constractions
are usually the same in Greek as in English.
Βούλεται καταμεῖναι τὴν στρατιὰν καὶ πόλιν οἰκίσαι, he wishes the
army to remain and to found a city (Xen. Anab. 5, 617). Τοὺς ὁπλίέτᾶς
ἐκέλευσεν αὐτοῦ μεῖναι, he commanded the hoplites to remain on the spot
(Xen. Anab. 1, 5). Πάντες ἔλεγον τοὺς μὲν τούτων ἄρξαντας δοῦναι
δίκην, τοῦ δὲ λοιποῦ μηκέτι ἐξεῖναι ἀνομίᾶς ἄρξαι, all said that the
leaders of these proceedings should suffer punishment, and that for the future
280 THE INFINITIVE 2208
it should no longer be permitted to enter wpon lawlessness (Xen. Anab. 5, 733).
᾿Ἐβόων δὲ ἀλλήλοις μὴ θεῖν δρόμῳ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τάξει ἔπεσθαι, they called
out to each other not to run, but to follow in order (Xen. Anab. 1, 8).
So εἶπον, commanded (Thuc. 7, 29), κηρύσσω, command by herald (Xen.
Anab. 7, 17), γράφω, decree, move (Xen. Hell. 6,3"). “Ὑμῖν συμβουλεύω ἐγὼ
γνῶναι ὕμᾶς αὐτούς, I advise you to know yourselves (Xen. Hell. 2, 459).
᾿Ἐπεχείρησα λέγειν" ἐν τῷ δήμῳ, I tried to speak in public (Lys. 16, 20).
Tupavveiv ἐπινοεῖ, he intends to be ruler (Ar. Thesm. 338). ‘EXoipny ἂν
μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθαι ἢ ἀδικεῖν, I would rather choose to suffer wrong than to do
wrong (Plat. Gorg. 4069... Xen. Anab. 1, 3. Lys. 1, 25. Isoe. 10, 3.
Xen. Symp. 8, 23. Ar. Eccl. 238. Plat. Gorg. 457°. Φοβοῦνται λέγειν, they
fear to tell (Xen. Cyr. 8, 213).
For those meaning to take care, to be unwilling, to forbid, to dissuade, to
hinder, to avoid, see Redundance of Negatives, 2551..—Ti τὸ κωλῦον αὐτὸν
ἔσται βαδίζειν ὅποι βούλεται; what will hinder him from marching whither
he pleases (Dem. 1, 12).
2208. Norr.—Observe that verbs of saying may express a command
or request. As a command or request takes the infinitive like an
indirect assertion, the nature of the infinitive, whether expressing an
indirect assertion or an indirect command, can only be recognised by
the negative if the infinitive has one; otherwise only by the context.
2209. Nore.—In poetry and in the dialects, especially
in Homer, the object-infinitive may accompany other
verbs which do not take this construction in prose.
Οἷον ἐπόρσειαν πολεμίζειν (Il. 7,42). Μάστιξεν eddav
(Il. 5, 366). “Ὅσιον ἄνδρ᾽ ἐρρῦ σάμην θανεῖν, I delivered a
pious man from dying (Eur. Ale. 11). Hdt. 7,11. With σῴζω
(Eur. Phoen. 600). Frequent in Homer are βῆ ἰέναι or ἴμεναι,
he proceeded to go (Od, 6, 130), and βῆ θέειν (Il. 2, 183).
2210. Norr.—Occasionally we find ὥστε prefixed to an object-
infinitive with some of the verbs in 2207 ; as ψηφισάμενοι ὥστε... ἀμύνειν,
having voted to defend (Thue. 6, 888); Thuc. 1, 119%; 3, 25%; especially
with πείθω (2211).
2211. ΝΟΤΕ.---Πείθω, to persuade any one to do anything, takes
the infinitive ; in the sense to convince, it usually takes ὡς and a finite
verb, less often an infinitive.
Ai ἡδοναὶ πείθουσι τὴν Wixny μὴ σωφρονεῖν, pleasures persuade the
soul not to exercise self-control (Xen. Mem. 1, 2%). Ἢν πείσωμεν ὕμᾶς,
ὡς χρὴ ἡμᾶς ἀφεῖναι, if we persuade you that you ought to let us go (Plat.
2216 THE INFINITIVE 281
Rep. 327°). Xen. Mem. 1,1’. Ἐπείσθησαν ᾿Αθηναῖοι Σωκράτην περὶ
τοὺς θεοὺς μὴ σωφρονεῖν, the Athenians were persuaded that Socrates
did not have right sentiments concerning the gods (Xen. Mem. 1, 1*°).—
Πείθουσιν ὥστε... ἐπιχειρῆσαι (Thue. 3, 102"). Thue. 3, 31’. Hdt. 7, 6°.
2212. ΝΟΤΕ.---Μένω, wait, await, and its compounds, may take an
object-infinitive ; as οὐκ ἀνέμεινεν ἡμέραν γενέσθαι, they did not wait for
day to appear (Thue. 4, 135'); Plat. Theaet. 173°; it may also take a
clause with ἕως ; also in poetry a participial construction (J/. 13, 38).
2213. Nore.—The verbs of commanding sometimes take a clause
with ὅπως ; as διακελεύονται τῷ νέῳ, ὅπως, ....τἱμωρήσεται τοὺς ἀδικοῦντας,
they exhort the young man to take revenge on those who do wrong
(Plat. Rep. 549°); ἐδέοντο ὅπως (Thue. 5, 36%).
2214. Norr.—For the construction of verbs of causing, see 2216, 2.
2215. Infinitive as Predicate and as Appositive.—An infinitive may
be used as a predicate or as an appositive.
Τὸ yap γνῶναι ἐπιστήμην που λαβεῖν ἐστιν, to learn is to acquire
knowledge (Plat. Theaet. 209°). Πτωχοῦ yap Bios... ν ἐστιν μηδὲν ἔχοντα,
the life of a beggar is to live possessed of nothing (Ar. Plut. 552).—Eis
οἰωνὸς ἄριστος, ἀμύνεσθαι περὶ πάτρης, one omen is the best, to fight for owr
country (Il. 12, 243). Isoc. 4, 38. Xen. Cyr. 2, 2°.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFINITIVE
2216. With Verbs.—1. The supplementary infinitive is used to
complete the meaniny of verbs expressing power or ability or
Jitness.
Σοὶ οὐκ ἂν δυναίμην ἀντιλέγειν, I should not be able to contradict you
(Plat. Symp. 201°). Ἐπίσταμαι νεῖν, I can swim, I know how to swim
(Xen. Anab. 5, 735). Mav@dvovow ἄρχειν re καὶ ἄρχεσθαι, they learn
to rule and to be ruled (Xen. ἅπαν. 1, 94). ᾿Αθῆναι μάλιστα πεφύκᾶσιν ἐν
εἰρήνῃ αὔξεσθαι, Athens is the best adapted by nature to flourish during
time of peace (Xen. Vect. 5, 2). So ἔχω in the sense, J can: ἐκ τῆς χώρᾶς
οὐδὲν εἴχομεν λαμβάνειν, we can get nothing from the country (Xen.
Anab, 2, 2").
2. It is used with verbs meaniny to cause, to bring about.
Ἐποίησε τὸν τῆς Κιλικίᾶς ἄρχοντα Svévveow μὴ δύνασθαι κατὰ γῆν
ἐναντιοῦσθαι Κύρῳ, he prevented Syennesis the governor of Cilicia from being
able to oppose Cyrus by land (Xen. Hell. 3, 1). Κλέαρχος διεπράξατο πέντε
282 THE INFINITIVE 9917
στρατηγοὺς ἰέναι, Clearchus succeeded in getting five generals to go (Xen. Anab.
2, 53),
3. It is also used to express purpose, especially with verbs of
giving, leaving, and choosing.
Ταύτην τὴν χώρᾶν ἐπέτρεψε διαρπάσαι τοῖς Ἕλλησιν, this country he
turned over to the Greeks to plunder (Xen. Anab. 1, 219). ᾿Αριστάρχῳ ἔδοτε
ἡμέραν ἀπολογήσασθαι, you gave Aristarchus a day to defend himself
(Xen. Hell. 1, 738). Τὸ ἥμισυ (rod στρατεύματος) φυλάττειν κατέλιπε τὸ
στρατόπεδον, he left half the army to guard the camp (Xen. Anab. 5, 1).
Παρέχω ἐμαυτὸν ἐρωτᾶν, I give myself wp to be questioned, lit. to question
(Plat. Apol. 33>). Τῷ Κύρῳ προσήνεγκαν οἱ θεράποντες ἐμπιεῖν καὶ
φαγεῖν, the attendants brought Cyrus something to drink and to eat (Xen.
Cyr. 7. 11). ᾿Εἵλοντο Δρακόντιον Σπαρτιάτην δρόμου τ᾽ ἐπιμεληθῆναι καὶ
τοῦ ἀγῶνος προστατῆσαι, they chose Dracontius a Spartan to prepare the
course and to preside at the contest (Xen. Anab. 4, 835).
4, Often in poetry (especially Homer), and very rarely
in prose, the infinitive is connected with an intransitive
verb as an accusative of specification (1595).
᾿Αριστεύεσκε μάχεσθαι, he was the first in fighting (ll. 6,
460). Jl. 16, 195. Ὅστις διαφέρει ἡμῶν προβιβάσαι εἰς
ἀρετήν, if any one is swperior to us in advancing virtue (Plat.
Prot. 328*).
2217. Norr.—With some verbs of power, fitness, and causing, we
occasionally find ὥστε before the infinitive (2216).
Τὸ δύνασθαι, ὥστε ἀγωνιστὴν τέλειον γενέσθαι, to be able to become a
Jinished orator (Plat. Phaedr. 269°). Ἐποίησα, ὥστε δόξαι τούτῳ τοῦ
πρὸς ἐμὲ πολέμου παύσασθαι, I caused this man to resolve to cease from war
with me (Xen. Anab. 1, 6°).
2218. Notr.—The infinitive of purpose is usually active, even
where the passive would be expected ; the passive rarely occurs (Plat.
Charm. 157’).
2219. Norn.—lIlavra ποιεῖν, to do everything, takes an infinitive
clause with ὥστε, or a final clause with ὅπως or ὡς, or an object-clause
with ὅπως (Xen. Mem. 2, 9°; Anab. 3, 1%; 3, 118),
2220. Norr.—In prose verbs of going, coming, and sending usually
take a future participle of purpose (2256) instead of an infinitive of
purpose ; examples with the infinitive: Soph. Oed. Col. 12; Il. 9, 442;
Thue. 6, 504.
2995 THE INFINITIVE 283,
2291. Infinitive with Adjectives.—As in English, the adjective
is used to complete cr to limit the meaning of adjectives.
Such adjectives are especially those expressing power, ability,
fitness, willingness, and those meaning good, beautiful, agreeable, easy,
worthy, and the like, with their opposites. In poetry this use of the
infinitive with adjectives is much more extended than in prose.
Ἱκανὸς ἀνὴρ διαγνῶναι, a man able to distinguish (Plat. Gorg.
48%). Οἱ λέγειν δεινοί, those skilful in speaking (Isoc. 21, 5). Φαγεῖν
δεινός, a terrible fellow for eating (Xen. Anab. 7, 3%). Ἕτοιμος ἐπαινεῖν,
ready to approve (Plat. Gorg. 510°). Γυνὴ εὐπρεπὴς ἰδεῖν, a woman comely
to behold (Xen. Mem. 2, 1333. Κλέαρχος ὁρᾶν στυγνὸς ἦν, Clearchus was
gloomy to look wpon (Xen. Anab. 2, 6°). οἰκίᾳ ἡδίστη ἐνδιαιτᾶσθαι, α
house most agreeable to live in (Xen. Mem. 3, 85). Ov ῥᾷδιον ἀπιστεῖν,
not easy to disbelieve (Plat. Rep. 331°). Movapyia ἄνομος χαλεπὴ καὶ
βαρυτάτη ξυνοικῆσαι, a monarchy when lawless is most disagreeable and
oppressive to live in (Plat. Polit. 302°). “Agios θαυμάσαι, worthy to
admire (Thue. 1, 138°). ‘O χρόνος βραχὺς ἀξίως διηγήσασθαι, the time
is (too) short for relating it fitly (Plat. Menex. 239°).—So with τοιοῦτος... οἷος
or οἷος alone, such as, fit, capable (Xen. Hell. 2, 34°).
2222. Norr.—The infinitive is here also generally active even
where the passive would be more natural, but the passive sometimes
occurs ; as Βορυσθένης tives Oar ἧδιστός ἐστι, the Borysthenes is most
pleasont to drin’ (Hdt. 4, 53%, πίνειν would be more common) ; αἰσχραὶ
ὁρᾶσθαι (Xen. Ven. 3, 3).
2223. Norr.—We seldom find ὥστε before the infinitive with these
adjectives ; as φρονιμώτεροι Gote μαθεῖν... ἢ ἄνδρες, more intelligent
in learning... than men (Xen. Cyr. 4, 3").
2224. Infinitive after Comparatives—After comparatives, ἢ ὥστε
(less often ἢ ὡς or ἤ alone) is used with the infinitive.
Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἤσθοντο "Exdixov ἐλάττω δύναμιν ἔχοντα ἢ ὥστε τοὺς
φίλους ὠφελεῖν, the Lacedaemonians perceived that Ecdicus had too small
a force to help their friends (Xen. Hell. 4, 8%), Xen. Mem, 3, δ᾽, Oi
Αἰγύπτιοι ras ἀσπίδας μείζους ἔχουσιν ἢ &s ποιεῖν τι καὶ ὁρᾶν, the Egyptians
have their shields too large to act and to see with (Xen. Cyr. 6, 4.7). Νόσημα
μεῖζον ἣ φέρειν, a disease too great to bear (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1293).
2225. Infinitive with Nouns and Adverbs.—The infinitive may also
be used with nouns, when they express a fitness or willingness fcr
anything; seldom, and chiefly with θαῦμα, to limit their meaning
284 THE INFINITIVE 9296
like an accusative of specification (1595). A limiting infinitive with
adverbs is very uncommon.
Ἡλικίᾶν ἔχουσι παιδεύεσθαι, they are of the age to be educated
(Plat. Lach. 187°). Ἐκμαθεῖν σπουδὴν ἔχων, have great desire to know
(Eur. And. 1050). 6a <adiferOa, grass to sit down (Plat. Phaedr. 229°).
Rarely with ὥστε prefixed; as εἰς ἀνάγκην καθέσταμεν ὥστε xivddvevew, we
have stepped into the necessity of inewrring danger (Isoc. 6, 51).—Oadpa καὶ
ἀκοῦσαι, a wonder even to hear of (Plat. Leg. 656°). Θαῦματ᾽ ἀνθρώποις
ὁρᾶν, wonders for men to behold (Eur. Jon 1142). Φόβος ἀκοῦσαι, a terror to
hear (Hat. 6, 112*).—KadAAtcora ἰδεῖν (ποιεῖν) τὴν ἐξέτασιν, to make the
muster in a manner most beautiful to behold (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3°).
INFINITIVE IN OTHER CONSTRUCTIONS
2226. Conditions.—After ἐφ᾽ & or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, on condition that, the
infinitive is used, less often the future indicative in Herodotus and
Thucydides; sometimes ἐπὶ τούτῳ precedes. Sometimes ὥστε with the
infinitive expresses on condition that (2081).
᾿Αφίεμέν σε, ἐπὶ τούτῳ μέντοι, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε μηκέτι φιλοσοφεῖν, we release
you, but on the condition that you shall no longer philosophize (Plat. Apol.
29). Xen. Anab. 4, 45. Xen. Hell. 2,3".—ZuvéBynoav...ed ᾧτε ἐξίᾶσιν
ἐκ Πελοποννήσου ὑπόσπονδοι καὶ μηδέποτε ἐπιβήσονται αὐτῆς, they made
an agreement with the condition that they should leave Peloponnesus and
never set foot on it again (Thue. 1, 103'). Hdt. 3, 83%.
2227. Result, Purpose; Infinitive with zp‘v.—For the infinitive
expressing result, see 2080; purpose, see 2216, 3; for πρίν with the
infinitive, see 2176—2182.
2228. Infinitive Absolute—1. The infinitive, generally preceded
by ὡς, is used absolutely in a number of phrases. The most
common of these are the following :—
Ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν or ὡς εἰπεῖν, 80 to speak, the most frequent of these
phrases (Plat. Gorg. 450°; Xen. Oec. 12, 8); ὡς συνελόντι (or συντόμως)
εἰπεῖν, to speak briefly (Xen. Anab. 3, 138. Oec. 12, 19); ὡς τὸ ὅλον, on
the whole (Plat. Rep. 377"); ὡς ἁπλῶς εἰπεῖν, to speak simply (Isoe. 4,
154); ὥς ye τἀληθὴ εἰρῆσθαι, to tell the truth (Plat. Gorg. 462”)—Epoi
δοκεῖν Or ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν, as it seems to me (Plat. Huthyd. 273%); (ὥς ye)
οὑτωσὶ ἀκοῦσαι, at first hearing (Plat. Lys. 216*; Dem. 20, 18); ὡς
ἀπεικάσαι, so to judge (Eur. Or. 1298); ὅσον γέ μ᾽ εἰδέναι, as far as I
know (Ar. Nub. 1252).—Note particularly ὀλίγου δεῖν and μῖκροῦ δεῖν»
alm st, lit. to want a little (AMschin. 3, 165; Dem. 18, 269).
9999 THE INFINITIVE 285
Herodotus has many infinitive expressions of this sort;
as ὡς λόγῳ εἰπεῖν, so to speak; ὡς ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ δηλῶσαι,
to show very briefly ; ὡς ἐμὲ εὖ μεμνῆσθαι, as far as I
remember correctly ; οὐ πολλῷ λόγῳ εἰπεῖν, in short, besides
* others (Hdt. 2, 15*; 2, 24%; 2, 125°; 1, 61°).
2. In some expressions, εἶναι seems to be unnecessary. Such are:
ἑκὼν εἶναι, willingly, usually in a negative sentence (Xen. Cyr, 2, 2;
Plat. Apol. 37*); τὸ viv εἶναι, at present (Isoc. 15, 270) ; τὸ ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις
εἶναι, as far as depends on them (Xen. Hell. 3, 5°); ὡς παλαιὰ εἶναι,
considering their antiquity (Thue. 1, 211) ;—so in Herodotus, ὡς efi ar,
as ὡς εἶναι Αἰγύπτου, for (a country like) Egypt (Hat. 2, 8+).
2229. Infinitive in Commands, Proclamations, Wishes.—1. The
infinitive is sometimes used as an imperative of the second person ;
the subject is in the nominative. This use is rare in Attic prose; it
occurs mostly in Homer.
Σὺ δ᾽, ἄν τι ἔχης βέλτιόν ποθεν λαβεῖν, πειρᾶσθαι καὶ ἐμοὶ μεταδιδόναι,
if you have anything better to bring from any quarter, try to communicate it
to me (Plat. Cratyl. 426"). Θαρσῶν νῦν, Διόμηδες, ἐπὶ Τρώεσσι μάχεσθαι,
with courage, Diomedes, fight now against the Trojans (Il. 5, 124). Hat. 1,
32". Od. 11, 72.—For the infinitive in commands of the third person, see
2 and 3 below.
2. As an imperative of the third person, the infinitive with a
subject-accusative is often used in laws, treaties, and public or formal
orders (legal language). Some word of command may be regarded as
understood.
Ποιεῖσθαι δὲ τὴν αἵρεσιν ἐν ἱερῷ, let the election be held in a temple
(Plat. Leg. 753°). Ἔτη δὲ εἶναι ras σπον δὰς πεντήκοντα, and that the
treaty shall be for fifty years (Thue. 5, 185). ᾿Ακούετε λεῴ: τοὺς γεωργοὺς
ἀπιέναι, hear, ye people; let the husbandmen depart (Ar. Pax 551). II.
3, 285. Xen. Anab. 5, 3.
3. In poetry and in Herodotus, the infinitive with a
subject-accusative may express a wish or an entreaty.
Ζεῦ πάτερ, ἣ Αἴαντα λαχεῖν ἣ Τῦδεος υἱόν, Father Zeus,
may Ajax or the son of Tydeus draw the lot (Il. 7, 179).
Θεοὶ πολῖται, μή με δουλείᾶς λαχεῖν, O gods of our country, may
I not fall into slavery (Aesch. Sept. 253). Ar. Ach. 816. *o
Zed, ἐκγενέσθαι po ᾿Αθήνᾶς τίσασθαι, O Zeus, grant that I may
revenge myself on the Athenians! (Hdt. δ, 105').—Some
word of prayer or entreaty is considered understood, as
εὔχομαι, or δός, grant; the latter is sometimes expressed
286 THE INFINITIVE 2230
(Il. 3, 351).—For a similar exclamatory infinitive in prose
and poetry, see 2237.
III. INFINITIVE WITH THE NEUTER ARTICLE
2230. 1. With the neuter article prefixed, the infinitive assumes
more clearly the character of a substantive, while it stiJl retains
its verbal qualities. It is declinable (as τὸ γράφειν, τοῦ γράφειν,
τῷ γράφειν, TO γράφειν); it retains its government; its subject,
if it has one, is in the accusative ; it can stand in most of the
relations of a noun. |
2. The articular infinitive is absent from Homer; it is not very
frequent in Herodotus and the dramatists, being here chiefly a nomi-
native or accusative; it is most common in the Orators, especially
Demosthenes.
3. Often the articular infinitive can be conveniently translated by
*‘that” or “the circumstance that’’ and a clause. The infinitive
with the article may not only have a subject and other adjuncts of
a verb, but it may even have a clause depending on it or on its
adjuncts, the infinitive with everything depending on it appearing
like any ordinary substantive.
Θαυμαστὸν δὲ φαίνεταί μοι καὶ τὸ πεισθῆν αἰ τινας, ὡς Σωκράτης τοὺς
νέους διέφθειρεν, (the circumstance) that some persons were persuaded that
Socrates was corrupting the young, seems astonishing to me (Xen. Mem. 1, 2").
here τὸ to διέφθειρεν is the subject. Τὰ μὲν ἄλλα ζῶα... πείθεσθαι μανθάνουσιν,
ἐκ τοῦ, ὅταν ἀπειθεῖν ἐπιχειρῶσι, κολάζεσθαι, the other animals learn to
obey by being punished whenever they try to disobey (Xen. Oec. 13, 6). Xen.
Mem. 2, 1°.
2231. The infinitive with the article may be a subject-nominative,
appositive in any case, object-accusative (especially with verbs different
from those which take the simple infinitive, 2207), also sometimes in
indirect discourse after verbs of saying and thinking.
The infinitive with 76 is sometimes used with adjectives and nouns
which usually have the simple infinitive (2221), not often with nouns.
The infinitive with rod may be used as a genitive with nouns,
genitive after comparatives, partitive genitive, genitive of cause, genitive
after verbs or adjectives, genitive absolute.
The infinitive with τῷ may follow verbs or adjectives which take
the dative; or it may be a dative of instrument or cause. ;
2231 THE INFINITIVE 287
The infinitive with τοῦ, τῷ, τό, often depends on a US. agers or
on an adverb used as such.
The negative with the articular infinitive is μή.
NomInaTIVE :—T6 κολάζεσθαι τῇ ψυχῇ ἄμεινόν ἐστιν ἢ ἡ ἀκολασία,
chastisement is better for the soul than intemperance (Plat. Gorg. 505”).
Οὐ τὸ μὴ λαβεῖν ra ἀγαθὰ οὕτω ye χαλεπόν (€or), ὥσπερ τὸ λαβόντα
στερηθῆναι λῦπηρόν, it is not so hard not to have acquired advantages, as
᾿ itis painjul to be deprived of them after having acquired them (Xen. Cyr.
7, 5°*).—Totré ἐστι τὸ ἀδικεῖν, τὸ πλέον τῶν ἄλλων ζητεῖν ἔχειν, this is to
commit wrong, to desire to have more than others (Plat. Gorg. 483°).
ACCUSATIVE :—Médvov ὁρῶν τὸ παίειν τὸν ἁλισκόμενον, seeing only the
beating of the captive (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4%). Αὐτὸ τὸ ἀποθνήσκειν οὐδεὶς
φοβεῖται, nobody fears mere dying (Plat. Gorg. 522°). Τὸ μὲν εὐνοέειν τε
καὶ προορᾶν ἄγαμαί σευ, I admire your friendly disposition and your
foresight (Hdt. 9, 79').—TO προειδέναι τὸν θεὸν τὸ μέλλον... πάντες
λέγουσι, all men say that the divinity knows the future beforehand (Xen.
Apol. 13). Ἐξομεῖ τὸ μὴ εἰδέναι; will you swear that you do not know?
(Soph. Ant. 535). Τὸ μὴ ζητοῦντα ἐπιτυχεῖν τινι τῶν δεόντων εὐτυχίᾶν
οἶμαι εἶναι, for any one to light upon something he wants without seeking tor
it, I consider to be good fortune (Xen. Mem. 3, 914).--τ ὁ δὲ Bia πολιτῶν
δρᾶν ἔφῦν ἀμήχανος, I am incapable of acting against the will of the
citizens (Soph. Ant. 78). Μακρὸς τὸ κρῖναι ταῦτα χὠ λοιπὸς χρόνος, the
time left is long enough to decide this (Soph. El. 1030). Thuc. 2 δ8΄. ᾿Αλλ’
οὐδ᾽ ἐμοί τοι τοὐξανιστάναι πόλεως diy’ ἔστι θάρσος, but I too lack boldness
without the city’s authority to dislodge thee (Soph. Oed. Col. 48). Thue. 2, 87).
- Βασιλέως ἀγαθοῦ τοῦτο ἔργον ἐνόμιζε, τὸ τοὺς ἀρχομένους ὡς πλεῖστα ἀγαθὰ
ποιεῖν, he believes this to be the business of a good king, to do as much good
as possible to those governed (Xen. Ag. 7,1).—Acd τὸ Δήλια ἐκείνου τοῦ μηνὸς
εἶναι, on account of the Delian festival being in that month (Xen. Mem.
4, 8). Πρὸς τὸ μετρίων δεῖσθαι πεπαιδευμένος (Xen. Mem. 1, 2°).
og Xen. Cyr. 1, 4°; 1, 9),
GENITIVE :— Es ἐλπίδα ἦλθον τοῦ ἑλεῖν, they entertained a hope of
taking the city (Thuc. 2, 56"). Tod πιεῖν ἐπιθυμία, the desire to drink
(Thue. 7, 84°). Xen. Cyr.1,4*. Plat. Leg. 935°.—Néos τὸ otyav κρεῖττόν
ἐστι τοῦ λαλεῖν, for the young silence is better than prattling (Men. Mon.
387).---Αφορμὴ τοῦ κακῶς φρονεῖν, the beginning of fuolish thinking
(Dem. 1, 23).—Znr@ σε...τοῦ μηδὲν φρονεῖν, I envy thee....for that thou
knowest nothing (Eur. Iph. Aul. 677).—‘Hpeis ἄρξωμεν τοῦ ἐξορμῆσαι καὶ
τοὺς ἄλλους ἐπὶ τὴν ἀρετήν, let us be the first to excite others to valour (Xen.
Anab. 8,13). Ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τοῦ ὡς φρονιμώτατον εἶν αι, to study to become
as intelligent as possible (Xen. Mem. 1, 2°°).—’AnOeas τοῦ κατακούειν, wn-
accustomed to obeying (Dem. 1, 23). Κατηράσατο τῷ αἰτίῳ τοῦ μὴ πάλαι
288 THE INFINITIVE 2932
ἀποδεδόσθαι τὸν μισθόν, he cursed him who was the cause of the wages
not having been paid long before (Xen. Anab. 7, 7%). Tod δραπετεύειν
ἀπείργουσι, they restrain them from running away (Xen. Mem. 2, 1.6). "Αξιος
τοῦ τοιαῦτ᾽ ἀκούειν (Dem. 21, 134).—Totd γ᾽ ἀποθανεῖν ὑπ άρ-
χοντος ἤδη, death being already imminent (Lys. 12, 13).—Ti τούτου
μακαριώτερον, τοῦ γῇ μιχθῆναι; what can be more desirable than this, to
be mixed with the earth? (Xen. Cyr. 8, 7*°).—Aynoiddos ἀντὶ rod ἐπὶ
Kapiav ἰέναι εὐθὺς ἀντιστρέψᾶς ἐπὶ Φρυγίας ἐπορεύετο, Agesilaus, instead of
advancing towards Caria, turned in the opposite direction and proceeded ὦ
straight to Phrygia (Xen. Ages. 1, 16). Πρὸ δὲ τοῦ ἀναβαίνειν τοὺς
μάρτυρας βραχέα βούλομαι διαλεχθῆναι ὑμῖν, before the witnesses go up, I wish
to say a few words to you (Lycurg. 20). “Ἑτοιμοί εἰσιν ὁτιοῦν πάσχειν, ὑπερ
τοῦ μὴ ποιεῖν TO προσταττόμενον, they are ready to suffer anything for the
sake of not submitting to dictation (Isoc. 7, 64). So Isoc. 1, 19 (ἕνεκα) ;
Xen. Mem. 4, 1° (ex); Dem. 5, 5 (werd); Xen. Mem. 4, 3' (ἄνευ) ; Plat. Leg.
670" (μέχρὺ.
DativE:—Iva ἀπιστῶσι τῷ ἐμὲ τετμῆσθαι ὑπὸ δαιμόνων, that
you may disbelieve my being honowred by the gods (Xen. Apol. 14). Τῷ ζῆν
ἐστί τι ἐναντίον, ὥσπερ τῷ ἐγρηγορέναι τὸ καθεύδειν ; is there any-
thing contrary to living, as sleeping is to waking? (Plat. Phaedo 115).----
Kexpdrnke...1@ πρότερος πρὸς τοῖς πράγμασι γίγνεσθαι, he has conquered
by being quicker in action (Dem. 8, 11). Ἢ βασιλέως ἀρχὴ ἀσθενὴς ἦν...τ ᾧ
διεσπάσθαι τὰς δυνάμεις, the empire of the king was weak through the
dispersion of its forces (Xen. Anab. 1, 5%). Μένων ἠγάλλεττο τῷ ἐξαπατᾶν.
δύνασθαι, Menon delighted in being able to deceive (Xen. Anab. 2, 6539).
—Toir@ διαφέρειν..., τῷ tins ὀρέγεσθαι, to differ in this, namely, in
seeking honowr (Xen. Hier. 7, 3).—E@aupdtero ἐπὶ τῷ εὐθύμως τε καὶ
εὐκόλως ζῆν, he was admired for his living cheerfully and calmly (Xen.
Mem. 4, 8*). Πρὸς τῷ μηδὲν ἐκ τῆς πρεσβείᾶς λαβεῖν, besides receiving
nothing from the embassy (Dem. 19, 229). So Soph. Aj. 554 (ἐν); Plat.
Rep. 468° (dua).
2232. Norr.—For the peculiarities of verbs of hindering, see 2351—
2356.
2233. Norr.—Many verbs which regularly take a simple object-
infinitive sometimes take the infinitive with τό; even a few which
govern a genitive sometimes take an object-infinitive with τό. This
usage is common in tragedy and occurs also in prose.
Τὸ πλουσιωτέρᾶν τὴν πόλιν ποιεῖν ἀναβαλούμεθα, we will put
off making the state richer (Xen. Mem. 3, 6°). Ἔστιν, ὅς σε κωλύσει τὸ
δρᾶν, there is one that shall prevent thy executing it (Soph. Phil. 1241).
Τλήσομαι τὸ κατθανεῖν, I shall endure to die (Aesch. Ag. 1290). Τὸ δρᾶν οὐκ
2237 THE INFINITIVE 289
ἐθέλησαν, they did not wish to act (Soph. Oed. Col. 442). Κλέαρχος pixpor
ἐξέφυγε τὸ μὴ καταπετρωθῆναι, Clearchus barely escaped being
stoned to death (Xen. Anab. 1, 3°), ᾿Αναγκάζονται τὸ ὑπὸ οἴνου μὴ o pad-
λεσθαι ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, they are compelled to be careful not to slip from the
_ effects of the wine (Xen. Rep. Lac. 5, 7).—For the negative here with verbs
of hindrance and separation, see 2351—2356.
2234. Norr.—1l. We find τό with the infinitive after διά, ἐπί, eis, κατά,
παρά, πρός ; τοῦ with the infinitive after ἀντί, ἀπό, διά, ἐξ, μετά, περί,
πρό, ὑπέρ, and after ἕνεκα, χάριν, ἀνεύ, χωρίς, μέχρι, ἔξω, πόρρω ; τῷ With
the infinitive after ἐν, ἐπί, πρός, and dya.—The adverb πλήν, except,
which is used also as a preposition with the genitive, often takes the
infinitive alone; as πλὴν... στρατηλατεῖν, except in warring (Eur. Or.
718); see 2 below.
2. An infinitive depending on a preposition must have
the article. But Herodotus omits it after ἀντί in a few
cases,
Ὃς ἀντὶ μὲν δούλων ἐποίησας ἐλευθέρους εἶναι, ἀντὶ δὲ ἄρχ ε-
σθαι ὑπ᾽ ἄλλων ἄρχειν ἁπάντων, who didst make them free
instead of slaves, and instead of being ruled by others, to rule
all nations (Hdt. 1, 210°), here perhaps on account of the
antithesis to ἀντὶ μὲν δούλων ; but in 6, 32? ἀντὶ εἶναι without
any antithesis.—For rAnv with simple infinitive, see above.
2235. Norr.—Purpose.—Sometimes τοῦ with the infinitive ex-
presses purpose, especially a negative purpose; as ἐτειχίσθη ᾿Αταλάντη
ἡ νῆσος, TOD μὴ λῃστὰς κακουργεῖν τὴν Εὔβοιαν, the island Atalanta was
fortified that pirates might not ravage Euboea (Thuc. 2, 821); Xen.
Cyr. 1, 3°; Thue. 1, 4.
2236. Norr.—Sometimes τό with the infinitive stands in loose
construction like an accusative of specification, in respect to.
Τὸ ἀρχὴν μὴ κάμνειν τὸ στράτευμα, τοῦτου cot δεῖ μέλειν, you ought to
make this your care, that the army may never be diseased at all (Xen. Cyr. 1,
6%). Μὴ ὑστερίζειν δεῖ τὸν ἄρχοντα μήτε τὸ εἰδέναι ἃ δεῖ μήτε τὸ
πράττειν ἃ ἂν καιρὸς ἧ, the commander ought not to be the last to know
what ought to be known, or to do what occasion may require (Xen, Cyr. 7,
5"). Ἴσως ἐγὼ αἴτιος, τὸ σὲ ἀποκρίνασθαι μὴ τοῦτο ὃ ἠρόμην, perhaps I
am at fault that you did not answer what I asked (Plat. Lach. 190*).—See
also the examples in 2231.
2287. Infinitive in Exclamations.—The infinitive, mostly with the
article, is used in exclamations,
19
290 THE PARTICIPLE 2238
Τῆς popias, τὸ Δία νομίζειν, what folly! to believe in Zeus! (Ar.
Nub. 819). Xen. Cyr. 2, 25, Without the article: Aesch. Hwm. 837 ; Dem.
21, 209.
THE PARTICIPLE
2238. Nature of the Participle—.1. The participle is a verbal
adjective. It shows its verbal nature by these qualities: (a) it retains
the government of its verb; a8 κρατοῦντες τῆς θαλάσσης, commanding
the sea ; τῇ ἰατρικῇ χρώμενος, employing the medical art ; vixnoas τοὺς
πολεμίους, having conquered the enemy ;—(b) it may be used as the
equivalent of a protasis or apodosis; it may be used with ἄν for a
finite verb with ἄν ;—(c) each verb has several participles, according
to voice and tense ;—(d) it expresses the same time as the indicative.
2. The participle has three general uses which sometimes blend
into each other. (a) It may be used attributively, like an adjective.
(6) Predicatively it may be used as the equivalent of a subordinate
clause, to express time, condition, cause, manner, concession, purpose,
etc. (circumstantial participle) ; or it may be used absolutely. (c) It
may be used predicatively to complete the meaning of many verbs;
here it may refer to the subject or to the object of the verb (swpple-
mentary participle),
I. ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE
2239. The participle may qualify a noun attributively like any
adjective ; it then has attributive position with respect to the article.
Oi παρόντες πολῖται ΟΥ̓ οἱ πολῖται οἱ παρόντες, the citizens who
are present; παῖς καλῶς πεπαιδευμένος, ὦ well-educated child ;
οἱ ξένοι οἱ ἐν τῇ πόλει κατοικοῦντες, the strangers living in the city ;
οἱ πρέσβεις οἱ παρὰ βασιλέως πεμφθέντες, the ambassadors sent by
the king ; πόχις κάλλει διαφέρουσα, a city excelling nm beauty; ὃ
ἀνὴρ ὃ ἡγησόμενος, the man who will lead.—Observe that the
participle is often conveniently rendered by a relative clause.
2240. Norr.—Our “ so-called”’ is expressed in Greek by καλούμενος,
λεγόμενος, ὀνομαζόμενος : aS τὸν ἱερὸν καλούμενον πόλεμον, the so-
called Sacred War (Thue. 1, 112°); Plat. Phaedo 68°; Rep. 4983.
2241. The attributive participle may be used with the article
alone as a substantive, like an adjective or any other attribute.
»"
2945 THE PARTICIPLE 291
It is then often to be translated by a noun or by the one who or
those who.
Ὁ λέγων, the speaker, the one now speaking ; ὃ τοῦτο dpacas, the
doer, the one who did this, ὃ οὐ τοῦτο δράσᾶς, the one who did not do
this; ὃ φεύγων, the defendant; οἱ πεπεισμένοι, those who have been
persuaded ; oi γραψάμενοι Σωκράτην, those who accused Socrates ; ὃ
βουλόμενος, any one who wishes ; ὃ τυχών, any one, the first one you
meet ; οἱ πολιτευόμενοι, statesmen ; ὃ ἡγησόμενος, one who will lead.
τὸ συμφέρον, the advantage ; τὸ διαλεῖπον, the space between ; τὸ μέλλον,
the future. ,
2242. Norr.—Even without the article the participle is used
indefinitely as a noun; as πολεμούντων πόλις, a city of belligerents
(Xen. Cyr. 7, 5) ; Plat. Lys. 221”; Xen. Heli. 5, 11°; Eur. Phoen.
270.
2243. Norr.—aAs the participle expresses the same time as the
indicative, the future participle strictly means the one who is to do
anything or who is expected to do something.
‘O ἡγησόμενος οὐδεὶς ἔσται, there will be no one who will lead us
(Xen. Anab. 2, 4°). Οὐδ᾽ ὁ κωλύσων παρῆν, there was not present any one
to prevent it (Soph. Ant. 261). Οὐ σπανίζει τῶν βοηθησόντων, he is
not in want of people to lend him aid (Xen. Anab. 7, 7%).
2244. Nore.—1l. A few participles are so completely felt to be
nouns, that they may even take the genitive instead of the case which
the verb governs.
Βασιλέως προσήκοντές τινες, certain relations of the king (Thue. 1,
125°). Παρὰ τὸ συμφέρον τῆς πόλεως, against the interest of the state
(Lycurg. 130). Τὰ συμφέροντα ἀνθρώποις, the advantages of men (Plat. Leg.
875").
2. But such constructions are generally poetic; as ὃ
ἐκείνου τεκών, his parent (Eur. El. 335, for ὁ ἐκεῖνον
τεκών).
2245. Norz.—Like the infinitive, the neuter participle with the
article is sometimes used as an abstract noun. This occurs mostly in
Thucydides, also in the poets.
Td δεδιὸς, the fear (Thue. 1, 36'). Τὸ ὀργιζόμενον τῆς γνώμης, the irritation
of their feelings (2, 59°). Τὸ τιμώμενον τῆς πόλεως, the honour of the state
(2, 63"). Ἔν τῷ μὴ μελετῶντι, in not practising (1, 142%). Τὸ νοσοῦν, sickness
(Soph. Phil. 674).
292 THE PARTICIPLE | 2246
II. PREDICATE PARTICIPLE
(A) OLROUMSTANTIAL PARTIOIPLE
2246. The participle is used to state a cirewmstance connected
with an action. It expresses various relations, often more than
one at the same time. The negative of the circumstantial
piruciple is od; but when it is equivalent to a condition, the
negative is μή. For the omission of ὦν, being, see 2277.
2247. Time.—The participle may simply express time and be thus
equivalent to a temporal clause.
Κῦρος ὑπολαβὼν τοὺς φεύγοντας, συλλέξας στράτευμα, ἐπολιόρκει
Μίλητον, Cyrus, having received the exiles and having assembled an army,
laid siege to Miletus (Xen. Anab. 1, 1"). Tatra ποιήσαντες ἐπὶ τὰς
ἄλλους νήσους avayovro, having done this, they set out against the other islands
(Hat. 6, 96). Νῦν μὲν δειπνεῖτε" δειπνήσαντες δὲ ἀπελαύνετε, NOW pray
dine; and after dinner (= having dined), depart (Xen. Cyr. 3, 15). οἱ
Ἕλληνες διαβεβηκότες ἀπεῖχον τῆς χαράδρᾶς ὅσον ὀκτὼ σταδίους, the Greeks,
having crossed, were about eight stadia distant from the ravine (Xen. Anab.
3, 4°), ᾿Ακούσᾶσι τοῖς στρατηγοῖς ταῦτα, ἔδοξε τὸ στράτευμα συναγαγεῖν,
when the generuls heard this, they resolved to collect the force (Xen. Anab.
4, 4"). ᾿Αγησίλᾶος ἔτι νέος ὦν ἔτυχε τῆς Baowelas, Agesilaus, while yet young,
obtained the kingship (Xen. Ages. 1, 6).
2248. Norr.—As in the last example above, the participle év
cannot be omitted.
2249. Norr.—These temporal participles are practically equivalent
to adverbs: ἀρχόμενος, at first ; τελευτῶν, at last ; διαλιπὼν χρόνον,
ἐπισχὼν χρόνον, after a while; διαλείπων χρόνον, at intervals of time.
"Arep καὶ ἀρχόμενος εἶπον, as I also said at first (Thue. 4, 64°).
Τελευτῶντες καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕδατος εἶργον αὐτοὺς οἱ Θρᾷκες, at last the Thracians
shut them off even from the water (Xen. Anab. 6, 835). ᾿Ολίγον χρόνον
διαλιπὼν ἐκινήθη, after a little while he moved (Plat. Phaedo 1185); πολὺ
διαλιπών (Thuc. 5, 10"). Οὐ πολὺν δ᾽ οὖν χρόνον ἐπισχὼν ἧκε, after
waiting no long time he came (Plat. Phaedo 59°); μῖκρὸν ἐπισχών (Aeschin.
3,10). Διαλείπουσαν χρόνον, at intervals (Plat. Rep. 617°).
2250. Norr.—Time is often expressed by a noun with a participle
in agreement depending on ἐπί, with the genitive, dwring ; with the
dative, just after ; μετὰ with the accusative, after ; seldom πρό, before ;
ὑπό with the accusative, at about, towards ; ἅμα (seldom σύν) with the
dative, at the same time with, just as.
-
2253 THE PARTICIPLE 293
Ἐπὶ Αἰνησίου ἐφόρου, while Aenesias was ephor, during the ephorate of
_ Aenesias (Thue. 2, 2"). *Emi χιόνι πεσούσῃ, after snow had fallen (Hat. 2, 22*).
Mera Σόλωνα οἰχόμενον, after Solon was gone (Hdt. 1, 34"). Πρὸ ἡλίου δύνοντος,
before swnset (Aeschin. 1, 12). Ὑπὸ τὴν πρώτην ἐπελθοῦσαν νύκτα, on the first
oncoming of night (Hdt. 6, 2"). “Aya ἡλίῳ ἀνίσχοντι, with the rising sun
(Xen. Anab. 2, 1°). Σύν (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5”).
2251. Cawse.—The circumstantial participle may express cause.
“Odciobe δ᾽ ἠδικηκότες τὸν ἄνδρα τόνδε, ye shall perish jor having
injured me (= this man) (Soph. Phil. 1035). Παρανομοῦσιν ἄρα Λακεδαιμόνιοι
ob διδόντες σοι χρῦσίον, they then act contrary to law in not giving you
their gold (Plat. Hipp. Maj. 285°). Ti yap ἂν βουλόμενοι ἄνδρες σοφοὶ ὡς
ἀληθῶς Seordras ἀμείνους αὑτῶν φεύγοιεν ; what can be the reason that truly
wise men would wish to flee from masters better than themselves? lit. wishing
what? (Plat. Phaedo 63*).
2252. Norr.—The expressions τί παθών (lit. having suffered what ?)
and τί μαθών (lit. having learned what?) both mean wherefore? or
why ?
Ti yap μαθόντες τοὺς θεοὺς ὑβρίζετε; why on earth (or with what idea)
did you insult the gods? (Ar. Nub. 1506). Ti wadotca....6vnrais εἴξᾶσι
γυναιξίν; what on earth makes them look like mortal women? (Ar. Nub.
340).—So also 6 τι μαθών, become, used dependently : Plat. Apol. 36°.
2253. Means, Manner, Accompanying Circumstance.—The participle
may express means or manner or an accompanying circumstance.
An {opevor ζῶσιν. they live by plunder (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2%). Τοὺς Ἕλληνας
ἐδίδαξαν, ὃν τρόπον διοικοῦντες τὰς αὑτῶν πατρίδας καὶ πρὸς ods πολ ε-
μοῦντες μεγάλην ἂν τὴν Ἑλλάδα ποιήσειαν, they taught the Greeks by what
means of governing their own states, and by carrying on war against what
peoples, they might make Greece great (Isoc. 12, 44).---Προαιροῦνται μᾶλλον οὕτω
κερδαίνειν ἀπ᾿ ἀλλήλων ἣ Tuvaperodvres αὑτους, they prefer thus to get
gains from each other than to unite for their mutual benefit (Xen. Mem. 3,
δ᾽. Kal γελάσᾶσα...ἔφη, and she said with a laugh (Plat. Symp. 202).
Προείλετο μᾶλλον τοῖς νόμοις ἐμμένων ἀποθανεῖν ἣ παρανομῶν ζῆν, he
_ preferred to die abiding by the laws than to live transgressing them (Xen.
Mem. 4, 4*).—Adxe ξίφος dpyupéndov...pépwv, he gave him the silver-studded
sword,....presenting it (Il. 7, 803). "Ἔρχεται ἡ Μανδάνη... τὸν Κῦρον τὸν υἱὸν
ἔχουσα, Mandane comes with her son Cyrus (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3}). Ξενίᾳ ἥκειν
παρήγειλε λαβόντα τοὺς ἄνδρας, he ordered Xenias to come and bring all
his men (Xen. Anab. 1, 2’). Bop χρώμενοι, with a shout (Thue. 2, 845).
Πείραιος... ἦλθεν ξεῖνον ἄγων, Piraeus came bringing the stranger (Od. 17,
72).
294 THE PARTICIPLE 2254
2254. Norr.—The participles ἄγων, ἔχων, φέρων, λαβών, and χρώμενος,
may be generally translated by with. See the last four.examples in
2253.
2255. Nore.—These participles of manner are practically equivalent
to adverbs. ἔχων, constantly ; φέρων, hastily, rapidly ; φερόμενος, with
a rush ; ἀνύσᾶς, quickly ; χαίρων, with impunity (rejoicing); κλαίων, to
one’s sorrow, at one’s peril; θαρρῶν, boldly ; pbacas, before (having
anticipated) ; λαθών, secretly (having escaped notice).
Anpets ἔχων, you trifle continually (Plat. Gorg. 497*). Eis τοῦτο φέρων
περιέστησε τὰ πράγματα, he rapidly brought matters to this point (Aeschin. 3,
82). Ὡς ἐπέπεσον φερόμενοι ἐς τοὺς Ἕλληνας of Μῆδοι, when the Medes
(Persians) fell wpon the Greeks with a rush (Hdt. 7, 2105). Ανοιγ᾽ ἀνύσᾶς
τὸ φροντιστήριον, make haste and open the thinking-shop (Ar. Nub. 181). Οὐ
χαίροντες ἂν ἀπαλλάξαιτε, you will not get away with impunity (Xen.
Anab. 5, 6"). Κλάων de τῶνδε, you will towch these at your peril (Eur.
Heracl. 270). Λέγε τοίνυν θαρρῶν, speak then boldly (Plat. Phaedr. 243°).
—For φθάσᾶς and λαθών, see 2286.
2256. Purpose-—The future participle is used to express purpose,
especially in connection with verbs of going, coming, sending, and
calling. Occasionally the present active participle is used.
‘O δ᾽ ἀνὴρ λαγὼς ᾧχετο Onpdawy, the man was gone to hunt hares (Xen.
Anab. 4, 5"). οὐκ ἐς λόγους ἐλήλυθ᾽, ἀλλά σε κτενῶν, I have not come for
words, but to kill thee (Eur. Tro. 905). "Ἐπεμψέ τινα ἐροῦντα ὅτι συγγενέ-
σθαι αὐτῷ χρῇζει, he sent some one to say that he wished to meet him (Xen.
Anab. 2, 5°). Οἱ Θηβαῖοι συνεκάλεσαν ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων ἁπᾶσῶν ἀκοῦυσ ο-
μένους τῆς παρὰ βασιλέως ἐπιστολῆς, the Thebans summoned deputies from
all the cities to hear the king’s letter (Xen. Hell. 7, 139), Xen. Anab. 5, 5%.
Hat. 6, 70. Plat. Crito 51°).—Tair’ ἐκδικάζων ἦλθον, I went to avenge
this wrong (Eur. Supp. 154). "Ἐπεμψαν... πρέσβεις dyyéAXovras, they
sent ambassadors to announce (Thuc. 7, 25°).
2257. Condition.—The participle may be used as the equivalent of
a protasis. For examples, see 2121.
2258. Concession.—The participle may express concession. Its
force is then usually expressed in English by although.
Πολλοὶ μεν ὄντες εὐγενεῖς εἰσιν κακοί, many, although born noble, are
base (Eur. El. 553). ᾿Ολίγα δυνάμενοι προορᾶν ἄνθρωποι περὶ τοῦ μέλλοντος
πολλὰ ἐπιχειροῦμεν mpadrrev, although we men are able to foresee little with
regard to the future, we undertake much (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2). ‘H Σπάρτη τῶν
ὀλιγανθρωποτάτων πόλεων οὖσα δυνατωτάτη ἐν τῇ Ἑλλάδι ἐφάνη, Sparta,
2261 THE PARTICIPLE 295
although being one of the least populated states, proved the most powerful
(Xen. Rep. Lac. 1,1). Plat. Lach. 197°. Xen. Oec. 15, 3.
PARTICIPLE WITH GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE
Genitive Absolute
2259. When the circumstantial participle agrees with a genitive
which is grammatically independent of any word in the sentence,
the two (genitive and participle) are said to be in the genitive
absolute. Regularly, but not always, the subject (genitive) of the
participle does not occur in the main clause.
᾿Ανέβη ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη οὐδενὸς κωλύοντος, he ascended the heights, no
one hindering (Xen. Anab. 1, 335). Τούτων λεχθέντων ἀνέστησαν, these
things said, they arose (Xen. Anab. 8, 3'). Θεμιστοκλῆς ἦρχε Μαγνησίᾶς
δόντος βασιλέως αὐτῷ, Themistocles governed Magnesia which the king
had given him (Thue. 1, 1388. Τῶν σωμάτων θηλῦνομένων, καὶ ai
Ψῦχαὶ πολὺ ἀρρωστότεραι γίγνονται, (our bodies being weakened) by the
weakening of the body, the spirit also becomes weaker (Xen. Occ. 4, 2). Τῶν
ἀθλητῶν Sis τοσαύτην ῥώμην λαβόντων οὐδὲν ἂν πλέον γένοιτο τοῖς ἄλλοις,
if athletes were to acquire twice their strength, no advantage would accrue to
man (Isoc. 4,2). "“Ovros ye Ψεύδου ς ἔστιν ἀπάτη, where there is falsehood,
there is deceit (Plat. Soph. 260°). ᾿Αφίκετο δεῦρο τὸ πλοῖον, γνόντων τῶν
Κεφαλλήνων, ἀντιπράττοντος Ζηνοθέμιδος,.. «καταπλεῖν, the ship
approached, the Cephalenians having resolved to sail in, although Zenothemis
opposed it (Dem. 32,14). Jl. 1, 88. Xen. Hell. 5, 1°. Thuc. 7, 13°. Dem.
9, 76.
2260. Norr.—tThe participle ὦν, being, cannot be omitted ; but see
2277.
2261. Norr.—1. The subject (genitive) of the participle is some-
times omitted when it is easily supplied from the context or when
some indefinite subject, like ἀνθρώπων or πρᾶγμάτων, is understood.
Θᾶττον προϊόντω ν..-«δρόμος ἐγένετο τοῖς στρατιώταις ἐπὶ ras σκηνάς, (the
soldiers) proceeding faster, a run was made by the soldiers toward the tents
(Xen. Anab. 1, 217; the subject is στρατιωτῶν understood). Ἰόντων es
μάχην, when men go to battle (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3°4; sc. ἀνθρώπων). Οὕτω γε
ἐχόντων, things being so (Xen. Anab. 3,1"; sc. πρᾶγμάτων). Uparropévor
(Xen. Vect. 6, 3; sc. mpaypdrov) Xen. Anab, 4, 8°.—So ἐμοῦ may be
omitted ; as ἐρώτᾶ ὡς ἀποκρινουμένου, ask, as I will answer (Plat. Parm.
137°).
᾿
296 THE PARTICIPLE 2262
2. So with impersonal participles like dovros, when raining (Xen.
Hell. 1,1; Ar. Vesp. 774); with such expressions Διός was originally
understood. Other impersonal expressions like ἀδήλου ὄντος (Xen.
Hipparch. 4, 2), οὕτως ἔχοντος (Plat. Rep. 381°), are uncommon, the
accusative absolute being here regular (2265); but see 2262.
2262. Norre.—The passive participles of verbs of annowncing,
showing, etc., are sometimes used in the genitive absolute with a
dependent declarative clause, introduced by om, serving as a subject.
Ἐσαγγελθέντων ὅτι Φοίνισσαι νῆες ἐπὶ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους πλέουσιν,
it having been announced that Phoenician ships were sailing against the
Athenians (Thuc. 1, 1105. Σαφῶς δηλωθέντος ὅτι ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶ τῶν
Ἑλλήνων τὰ πράγματα ἐγένετο, it having been clearly shown that on the fleet
of the Greeks their cause depended (Thue. 1, 74"). Xen. Cyr. 1, 4°; 6, 219 .---
The plural participle is used when the subject of the dependent clause is
plural, or when several facts are related.
2263. Norr.—As the Greek has active aorist and perfect participles,
it can in many cases use these dependently ; whereas the Latin, which
lacks an active perfect participle, is obliged to employ the less clear
construction of the ablative absolute or to form a subordinate clause.
Ταῦτα ὁ Καῖσαρ λέξᾶς ἀπήει, having said these things Caesar went away ;
Lat. his Caesar dictis abiit. Ἐλθὼν δὲ ὁ Ξενοφῶν ἐπήρετο τὸν ᾿Απόλλω,
having arrived there, Xenophon asked Apollo (Xen. Anab. 3, 1°; Lat. quo
quum venisset, Xenophon consuluit Apollinem). Xen. Anab. 3, 1°.
2264. Nore.—The genitive absolute is usually employed when the
subject of the participle does not already occur in the sentence in some
case to which the participle might be joined. Yet sometimes, for
greater emphasis of the participial clause, the genitive absolute is
used, even when the subject of the participle does already occur.
Διαβεβηκότος ἤδη Περικλέους στρατιᾷ ἐς Εὔβοιαν, ἠγγέλθη αὐτῷ,
ὅτι Μέγαρα ἀφέστηκεν, when Pericles had already crossed over, it was announced
to Huboea that Megara had revolted (Thue. 1, 114', for διαβεβηκότι ἤδη
Περικλεῖ ἠγγέλθη). Xen. Anab. 5, 2%. Thuc. 3, 225 (for accusative). Thue.
3, 13° (for nominative). Usually the genitive absolute in these cases stands
for a dative.
Accusative Absolute
2265. 1. Instead of the genitive absolute, the accusative absolute
in the neuter singular is used of impersonal participles and of
2268 THE PARTICIPLE 297
impersonal expressions composed of an adjective and ὄν; as δέον,
it being necessary ; προσταχθέν, it having been commanded ; δυνατὸν
ὄν, since it is possible.
2. Such accusatives are impersonal participles like δέον, ἐξόν,
προσῆκον, παρέχον and παρασχόν, μέλον, μεταμέλον, δοκοῦν, δόξαν, and
others; impersonal passive participles like προσταχθέν, εἰρημένον, γενό-
μενον ; impersonal expressions with ὄν, as δυνατὸν ὄν, αἰσχρὸν ov. The
accusative absolute begins with Herodotus and the Attics.
Οὐδὲ δίκαιόν μοι δοκεῖς ἐπιχειρεῖν πρᾶγμα, σαυτὸν προδοῦναι, ἐξὸν σωθῆναι,
you do not seem to be doing right in betraying yourself when you might be
saved (Plat. Crito 45°). ὙὉμεῖς ἂν οὐ χρεὼν ἄρχοιτε, you cannot properly
maintain your rule (Thuc. 3, 407). Καλῶς παρασχόν, οὐ ξυνέβησαν, they
did not treat when they had a favourable opportunity (Thue. 5,14"). Δοκοῦν
ἀναχωρεῖν, it being resolved to retreat (Thuc. 4, 125"). Δέον (Hdt. 3, 65°).
Προσῆκον (Isoc. 15, 284). Παρόν (Eur. Heracl. 177). Merdv (Lys. 31, 32).
-Προσταχθέν μοι ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου Mévova...dyew eis Ἑλλήσποντον, ὠχόμην
ἀναγόμενος διὰ τάχους, when the command was given to me by the people to
convey Menon to the Hellespont, I put to sea in all speed (Dem. 50, 12).
Eipnpévoy, when it had been said (Ar. Lysist. 13).—Ilapexeevovro κραυγῇ οὐκ
ὀλίγῃ χρώμενοι, ἀδύνατον ὃν ἐν νυκτὶ ἄλλῳ τῳ σημῆναι, they cheered each
other with no little shouting, as it was impossible in the night to give signals
in any other way (Thuc. 7, 44°). Αἰσχρὸν ὄν ἀντιλέγειν, it being infamous to
deny (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2°). Οὐχὶ ἐσώσαμέν σε, oidvre ὄν, we did not save you,
although it was possible to do so (Plat. Crit. 46a).
Were a genitive absolute used in these cases, the gender would be
uncertain and the impersonal character of the expression would thus
be unrecognisable ; except in the case in 2262.
2266. Norre.—For the omission of ὄν, see 2277.
2267. Norz.—The neuter participle τυχόν (lit. mm case that) is
altogether an adverb, meaning perhaps (Xen. Anab. 6, 12°).
2268. Norze.—l. With ὥσπερ or ὡς, the accusative of a noun with
a personal participle in agreement may stand absolutely in any number
or gender. Without ὥσπερ or ὡς this also occurs in the neuter, but
very rarely.
Τοὺς υἱεῖς of πατέρες ἀπὸ πονηρῶν ἀνθρώπων cipyovow, ὡς τὴν μὲν τῶν
χρηστῶν ὁμϊλίᾶν ἄσκησιν οὖσαν τῆς ἀρετῆς, τὴν δὲ τῶν πονηρῶν κατάλυσιν
(sc. οὖσαν), fathers keep their sons from bad men in the belief that the associa-
tion with the good is an exercise of virtue, but that association with the bad is
298 THE PARTICIPLE 2269
a destruction of it (Xen. Mem. 1, 2%). (Πολλοὶ) τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἀμελοῦσιν,
ὥσπερ ἐκ wodirav μὲ γιγνομένους φίλους, ἐξ ἀδελφῶν οὐ ytyvo-
μένους, many neglect their brothers, as if friends were made from fellow-
citizens and were not made from brothers (Xen. Mem. 2, 3*). Xen. Mem. 1,
37. Hdt. 9, 42°.
Without ὥσπερ or as: Δόξαντα δὲ ταῦτα καὶ wepavOévra, τὰ
στρατεύματα ἀπῆλθεν, this having been resolved and settled, the armies drew
off (Xen. Hell. 3, 2). Ταῦτα δὲ yivépeva, when this happens (Hdt. 2,
66). "AAXAo re δόξαν ἐξαίφνης, some another sudden resolution = lit.
something else suddenly having been resolved wpon (Thue. 5, 65°). Plat. Leg.
844°.
Observe the occasional δόξαν ταῦτα (= ἐπεὶ ἔδοξε ταῦτα), this resolution
being passed = lit. this having been resolved upon (Xen. Anab. 4, 1°),
2. Otherwise with added subject (as τούτου, τούτων, and the like),
we have the genitive absolute; as δοξάντων τούτων, these resolutions
having been adopted (Xen. Hell. 5, 24). Plat. Tim. 30°. Xen. Hell.
1, 1%,
PARTICLES WITH THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE
2269. Certain particles are often added to the circumstantial
participle, both dependent and absolute, to mark more clearly
the relation of the participle to the verb of the sentence.
2270. Particles used temporally.—l. These are: ἅμα, at the same
time ; μεταξύ, between, while ; αὐτίκα and εὐθύς, straightway, immedi-
ately after; ἐξαίφνης, on α sudden; ἄρτι, just now, at this moment.
They often belong to the verb, although closely connected with the
participle. ;
Ἐμάχοντο ἅμα πορευόμενοι oi Ἕλληνες, the Greeks fought while
marching on (Xen. Anab. 6, 3°). Td τοῦ θεοῦ σημεῖον...πολλαχοῦ pe ἐπέσχε
λέγοντα μεταξύ, the sign of the divinity often restrained me while speaking
(Plat. Apol. 40°); with genitive absolute Plat. πέμμα. 275°. Διόνῦσον...
αὐτίκα γενόμενον ἐς τὸν μηρόν ἀνερράψατο Ζεύς, as soon as he was born,
Zeus sewed up Dionysus in his thigh (Hdt. 2, 1465). Ἠπιστάμεθα εὐθὺς
γενόμενοι ξύμπαντα τὰ τοιαῦτα, we knew all such things immediately after
being born (Plat. Phaedo 75°). Τὴν Ψυχὴν θεωροῦντα ἐξαίφνης θανόντος
ἑκάστου, viewing the soul of each one just as he is dead (Plat. Gorg. 523°).
Plat. Cratyl. 396°.
2. These are often joined to the principal verb: ἐνταῦθα, εἶτα,
ἔπειτα, τότε, τότε ἤδη, οὕτως, οὕτω δή, εὐθύς ; all implying a succession in
time, then, thereupon, after.
4
᾿
᾿
2271 THE PARTICIPLE 299
Πειθομένων τῶν Σαμίων καὶ σχόντων τὴν Ζάγκλην ἐν θαῦτα οἱ Ζαγκλαῖοι
«ἐβοήθεον, after the Samians obeying and having seized Zancle, the Zan-
claeans set out to help it (Hdt. 6, 23°). Xen. Anab. 4, 7 (εἶτα). Plat.
Gorg. 456° (érera). Xen. Symp. 4, 23 (τότε). Andoc. 1, 9 (τότε ἤδη). Xen.
Mem. 3, 10° (οὕτως). Plat. Phaedo 61° (οὕτως δή). Thuc. 2, 547 (εὐθύς).
2271. Use of ἅτε, οἷον, ofa, ὡς, and ὥσπερ with Participles—1. The
particles dre, οἷον, οἷα (also ἅτε δή, οἷον δή, ofa δή), inasmuch as, as, are
used with the participle expressing cause to denote that the cause is
real and that the writer or speaker is responsible for the statement.
‘O Κῦρος, dre mais @v..., ἥδετο τῇ στολῇ, Cyrus, inasmuch as he was a
boy, was delighted with the robe (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3°). Καὶ ἅτε θεωμένων
τῶν ἑταίρων, and inasmuch as their companions were viewing them (Xen.
Anab. 4, 87). Οἷον δὲ διὰ χρόνου ἀφϊῖγμένος ἀσμένως ja ἐπὶ τὰς ξυνήθεις
διατριβάς, inasmuch as I had arrived after a long time, I gladly went to my
accustomed haunts (Plat. Charm. 1635). Οἷα ὑπὸ Ἱστιαίου πολιορκη-
θέντες, inasmuch as they had been besieged by Histiaeus (Hdt. 6, 467) ;
with genitive absolute, Hdt. 1, 189*.—"Are δή, οἷον δή, οἷα δή: Hdt. 1, 171°;
Plat. Symp. 203°; Xen. Hell. 6, 4°°.
2. The particle ὡς, as, as if, is used either to denote that the
participle expresses an apparent or pretended fact, or that the participle
expresses merely the thought of some prominent person in the sentence,
not necessarily the writer’s or speaker’s. With the future participle
it may be rendered by in the hope of or with the intention of.
Βοΐσκος ὁ πύκτης τότε διεμάχετο ὡς κάμνων ἀσπίδα μὴ φέρειν, Boiscus
the boxer then strove earnestly by pretending to be sick (lit. as being ill) not
to carry his shield (Xen. Anab. 5, 853).--τὩς οὖν ἀπηλλαγμένοι τούτων
ἡδέως ἐκοιμήθησαν, having escaped from these evils, they gladly took repose
(Xen. Anab. 4, 85). Ταύτην τὴν χώρᾶν ἐπέτρεψε διαρπάσαι τοῖς Ἕλλησιν ὡς
πολεμίᾶν οὖσαν, this country he turned over to the Greeks to be plundered
since it was, as he regarded, hostile (Xen. Anab. 1, 2"). ‘Qs ra βέλτιστα
βουλεύοντες ἰσχῦρίζοντο, they remained firm, as they were counselling the best,
as they believed (Thuc. 4, 68°). Συλλαμβάνει Κῦρον ὡς ἀποκτενῶν, he
seizes Cyrus with the (declared) intention of putting him to death (Xen. Anab.
1, 1°). οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς πολεμήσοντες, the Athenians
prepared with the (declared) intention of going to war (Thuc. 2, 7). Hat.
2, 15, Plat. Menex. 241°. Xen. Anab. 4, 7.
With genitive absolute : Οὐ δεῖ ἀθῦμεῖν ὦ ς οὐκ εὐτάκτων ὄν τω ν ᾿Αθηναίων»
one ought not to despair as though the Athenians were not lovers of order
(Xen. Mem. 3, 5%). Ὡς dvapevoitvros καὶ οὐκ ἀποθανουμένον
(sc. ἐμοῦ), οὕτω παρασκευάζου, make your preparation in the expectation that
I shall remain and shall not die (Xen. Cyr. 8, 457. Xen. Hell. 5, 4°; Cyr.
3,1". Isoc. 6, 86.
300 THE PARTICIPLE 2272
With accusative absolute impersonal: Παρηγγύησε τοῖς Πέρσαις mapa-
σκευάζεσθαι, ὡς αὐτίκα δεῆσον ἐπιδιώκειν, he ordered the Persians to be
ready as it would be necessary (as he supposed) to press forward (Xen. Cyr.
3, 2°). Plat. Rep. 424°; 427°.—For ὡς with the personal accusative absolute,
see 2268.
3. The particle ὥσπερ, as if, as it were, with the participle, merely
expresses a comparison.
᾿Ωρχοῦντο... ὥσπερ ἄλλοις δεικνύμενοι, they danced as if showing
off to others (Xen. Anab. 5, 433. Genitive absolute: ὥσπερ ἢ συὸς
adypiov i) ἐλάφου φανέντος, as if a wild boar or stag had appeared (Xen.
Anab. 5, 7). Accusative absolute impersonal : κατακείμεθα ὥσπερ ἐξὸν
ἡσυχίαν ἄγειν, we lie down as if it were permitted to enjoy rest (Xen. Ana,
3, 1"). Eur. Hipp. 1307. Xen. Symp. 1, 11.
2272. Norz.—1l. Herodotus uses — ὥστε in the same
way as dre; as Hdt. 1, 8?; 1, 783,5, This is very rare
and doubtful in Attic: Thue. 7, 24?.
2. The above use of dre, οἷον, οἷα, ὥσπερ, and ὥστε, with
the participle, is post-Homeric. So ὡς with the participle
rarely occurs in Homer, and not with the force explained
in 2271, 2.
2273. Norr.—These are used in a causal sense and belong to the
principal verb: τοῦδε ἕνεκα, διὰ τόδε, διὰ τοῦτο, διὰ ταῦτα, ἐκ τούτου,
οὕτως, for this reason.
Τοῦδε εἵνεκεν ἀνεβίβασε (τὸν wodtieg) ἐπὶ τὴν πυρὴν βουλ ό-
μενος εἰδέναι, κιτ.ιλ., therefore he caused Croesus to mount on the pyre
wishing to know, ete. (Hat. 1, 86). Thue. 7, 13? (διὰ τόδε). Xen. Anab. 1,
73 (διὰ τοῦτο) ; Anab. 5, 8 (ἐκ τούτου). Plat. Lach. 178° (οὕτω).
2274. Concessive Particles.—1. The particles used to strengthen a
concessive participle are: καίπερ and (less often) καί, though ; καὶ ταῦτα,
and that too; οὐδέ (μηδέ), though not; καίτοι, though (very. rare,
especially in early writers).
᾿Αποπλεῖ οἴκαδε, καίπερ μέσου χειμῶνος ὄντος, he set sail homeward
though it was mid-winter (Xen. Ages. 2, 31); Anab. 1, 6°. ᾿Αδελφὼ φίλω
ὄντε καὶ πολὺ διεστῶτε, brothers being friends although far distant from
each other (Xen. Mem. 2, 3). Il. 9, 655. Σὺ δέ μοι δοκεῖς οὐ προσέχειν τὸν
νοῦν τούτοις, καὶ ταῦτα σοφὸς ὦν, you do not seem to give attention to
these things, and that too though you are wise (Plat. Gorg. 508"). Οὐδὲ
πεπονθὼς κακῶς ἐχθρὸν εἶναί μοι τοῦτον ὁμολογῶ, although I have not
suffered ill, yet I admit that this man is my enemy (Dem. 21, 205). Ἱκανά
2277 THE PARTICIPLE 301
μοι νομίζω εἰρῆσθαι, καίτοι πολλά ye παραλιπών, I believe I have said
enough, although I have passed over much (Lys. 31, 34).
2. Homer often has περ, which occurs also in Aeschylus,
rarely in Euripides and Herodotus, once in Sophocles
(Phil. 1068).—In Homer xai....7ep generally stand sepa-
rated ; this is uncommon in tragedy.—The tragedians
sometimes have οὐδέπερ (μηδέπερ), Homer has οὐδέ... περ
separated.
Οὔ τι δυνήσεαι ἀχνύμεν ὀς wep χραισμεῖν, although much
grieved thou wilt be wnable to help them (Il. 1, 241). Aesch.
Sept. 1038. Eur. Jon 1324. Hdt. 3, 131°—Tov μὲν ἔπειτ᾽
εἴασε καὶ ἀχνύμενός περ ἑταίρου κεῖσθαι, although griev-
ing for his companion, he then let him lie (Il. 8, 190). Eur.
Or. 680.—Ovdérep (Aesch. Supp. 399; Eur. Phoen. 1624;
Ar. Ach. 222). Οὐδέ...περ (Od. 13, 294).
2275. Norz.—l1. In Attic, ὅμως, yet, nevertheless, is often joined to
the principal verb, when the sentence contains a concessive participle ;
the participle may also separate ὅμως from its verb.
Td πλῆθος ἄμετρον ὁρῶντες, ὅμως ἐτολμήσατε ἰέναι ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς, though
seeing their number was countless, you nevertheless had the cowrage to march
against them (Xen. Anab. 3, 2"). Σὺν coi ὅμως καὶ ἐν τῇ πολεμίᾳ ὄντες
θαρροῦμεν, with you, though we are in the enemy's country, we fear not (Xen.
Cyr. 5, 1%). Eur. Med. 280.
2. The particles εἶτα, ἔπειτα, xara, κἄπειτα, and οὕτως are also used
like ὅμως : Ar. Nub. 861; Plat. Charm. 163"; Xen. Mem. 1, 1°; Plat.
Phaedo 98°; Dem. 28, 5.
3. So also are used ἔμπης (epic and tragic), καὶ ὥς and
οὐδ᾽ ὥς (epic): Il. 15, 339; Soph. Ay. 1338; Il. 3, 159;
Od. 1, 6.
2276. Οὕτως is occasionally found with the leading verb when the
participle expresses a condition ; as in Xen, Cyr. 1, 6°,
OMISSION OF ὦν
2277. The participle ὦν, belonging to a predicate noun or
adjective, is sometimes omitted.
1. (a) This occurs after dre, ofa, καίπερ, and ὡς ; occasionally with
predicate nouns, oftener with adjectives.
Αὐτοὺς els τὴν πολϊίτείᾶν οὐ παραδεξόμεθα dre τυραννίδος ὑμνητάς, we
will not receive them into the state, as they are singers of the praises of tyranny
302 THE PARTICIPLE 2278
(Plat. Rep. 568°). Xen. Cyr. 1, 85.-- -"Ἰγνώσκω σαφῶς, καίπερ σκοτεινός (se.
ὦν), I know well although my sight is darkened (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1326). ‘Qs
ἐμοῦ μόνη ς πέλας (sc. οὔσης), as I alone am near (Soph. Oed. Col. 88). ‘Qs
καλὸν (se. ὄν)... ἀγορεύεσθαι αὐτόν, as it is good for the oration to be spoken
(Thue. 2, 35").
(Ὁ) Without these particles, ov is very rarely omitted in
poetry ; as dpvis, ὧν ὑφη γητῶν (sc. ὄντων), birds, under
whose guidance, like Lat. quibus_ ducibus (Soph. Oed.
Tyr. 966); accusative absolute, Soph. Ant. 44,
2. The adjectives ἑκών, willing(ly), and dxw:, wnwilling(ly), are
treated like participles from Homer on, and thus omit ὦν.
Ἐμοῦ μὲν ody ἑκόντος, against my will (Soph. Aj. 455). . Tots βαρβάροις,
ὧν ἀκόντων τὴν χώρᾶν ἔχουσιν, to the barbarians, against whose will they
possess the country (Isoc. 4, 122).
2278. Norr.—aA predicate adjective or noun connected by a
conjunction with a participle, usually has ὦν; as in Ar, Plut. 751;
Vesp. 507. But sometimes the predicate noun or participle here
omits dv; as in Thue. 3, 691: Jl. 10, 342.
(B) SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE.
2279. The supplementary participle completes the meaning of
the verb, and may refer to the subject or to the object of the
verb. Moreover, it may be used either to qualify the verb by
limiting its meaning to a particular circumstance ; or else it may
be used as the equivalent of a proposition introduced by ὅτι or ὡς.
Thus: Σωκράτης σκοπῶν διῆγεν, Socrates was continually
enquiring ; παύσω σε ἀδικοῦντα, I will stop you from doing wrong ;—
but οἶδα αὐτὸν τοῦτο δεδρᾶκότα = οἶδα ὅτι τοῦτο dédpaxev, I know
that he has done this ; οἶδα θνητὸς dv = olda ὅτι θνητός εἰμι, I know that
I am mortal.
(a) PARTICIPLE LIMITING THE MEANING OF THE VERB
2280. 1. With εἰμί, γίγνομαι, brdpyw—Like any adjective,
- the participle may be used predicatively after the copulative
verbs εἰμί, be, γίγνομαι, be, become, and ὑπάρχω, used in the sense
to be or to be taken for granted.
Ei τοῖς πλέοσιν ἀρέσκοντές ἐσμεν, if we are acceptable to the
majority or if we please the majority (Thuc. 1, 38°). Ἦ σαν ἀπιστοῦντές
2283 THE PARTICIPLE 303
τινες Φιλίππῳ καὶ νοῦν ἔχοντες, there were some persons distrusting Philip,
and having intelligence (Dem. 19, 53). Τιγνώσκων mov αὐτὸς ἑαυτὸν τότε
ἔσται, he will know himself then or he will be knowing himself (Plat.
Charm. 169°). Οὔτε yap θρασὺς οὔτ᾽ οὖν προδείσᾶς εἰμὶ τῷ ye viv λόγῳ,
I am neither emboldened nor yet prematurely alarmed by thy present speech
(Soph. θεὰ. Tyr. 90). "Hv yap ὁ Θεμιστοκλῆς βεβαιότατα δὴ φύσεως ἰσχὺν
δηλώσας, Themistocles was a man who pre-eminently manifested his strength
of genius (Thue. 1, 1383). Ἐγὼ τὸ πρᾶγμά ei pe τοῦτο δεκρᾶκώς, I am the one
who has done this (Dem. 21, 104). Οὐδ᾽ ἤσθοντο ὅτε ἦν τετελευτηκὼς
᾿Αγνίᾶς, they did not even hear of it when Hagnias was dead (Dem. 43, 64).
Κατειλημμένοι ἔσονται, they will be swrprised (Xen. Cyr. 4, 2").—Micotvres
γίγν ονται τοὺς κακούς, they get to hate the wicked (Plat. Leg. 908”).—Totro
ὑπάρχειν ὑμᾶς εἰδότας ἡγοῦμαι, I think it may be taken for granted that
you know this (Dem. 18, 95); with ὑπάρχω this occurs mostly in Demosthenes.
2. So with poetic πέλομαι, be; as ἐμεῖο λελασμένος
ἔπλευ, thow wert forgetful of me (Il. 23, 69).
2281. Norz.—In these constructions with εἰμί, the verb expresses
a continued state of being resulting from the action of the participle ;
hence the present and perfect participles are mostly so used. The
simple perfect and pluperfect may express the continued state in the
same way, but not so distinctly and sometimes not at all (1928),
But the periphrastic form with the perfect participle has the ordinary
force of a perfect or pluperfect when it can only be formed periphrasti-
cally, as in the third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect passive
and middle of mute and liquid verbs; also in the usually periphrastic
future-perfect active, as ἐγνωκότες ἔσομεθα, we shall have known ; and
in the periphrastic form of the future-perfect passive, as pesca
ἔσομαι, I shall have been deceived.
2282. Nore.—The construction of the predicate participle
with εἰμί, especially with the aorist participle, occurs
oftener in poetry than in Herodotus or in Attic prose:
Il. 5, 873; Soph. Oed. Tyr. 970; Eur. Cycel, 381; Ar.
Ran. 36; Hat. 9, 51?.
2283. Norr.—1l. Occasionally we find an impersonal participle,
like συμφέρον, used predicatively with εἰμί; as συμφέρον ἦν τῇ πόλει, tt
was advantageous to the state = συνέφερεν (Dem. 19, 75). Isoc. 12,
124,
2. We even find ἔστιν dv or γιγνόμενος, ἔστιν (οὕτως) ἔχων ; rarely
304 THE PARTICIPLE 9984
ὧν with another participle. Thus: ὑπόμνημα ἦσαν ὄντες οἱ στέφανοι,
the crowns, while existing, were a memorial (Dem. 22, 74); Thue. 4,
54° (ἦσαν γενόμενοι) ; Dem. 20, 113 (ἐστιν... ἔχοντα) ; Plat. Leg. 963°
(διαφέρων ... ὦν).
2284. With ἔχω.---Ἰ. The verb ἔχω (εἶχον), have, with an active
or middle aorist or (seldom) perfect participle, denotes possession
as a result of the action expressed by the participle. In the
dramatists this construction is sometimes merely equivalent to
the simple tense.
Τῆν προῖκα τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον εἶχε λαβών, he got the dowry in this
way, and held it (Dem. 27, 17). Πολλὰ χρήματα ἔχομεν ἀνηρπακότες,
we have much money that we have seized = lit. having seized it (Xen. Anab.
1, 34). “A viv καταστρεψάμενος ἔχεις, which you have now sub-
jugated and possess (Xen. Anab. 7, 757); Anab. 4, 7. Soph. Oed. Tyr. 701.
Eur. Med. 33; Bacch, 302. Hdt. 1, 28; 3, 65". The first example of this
usage is in Hes. Op. 42.—Herodotus uses also ἔσχε in this way, as in 1, 75.
2. The intransitive ἔχω is also found in this use to express a
condition or state, but mostly in tragedy.
Θαυμάσᾶς ἔχω, I stand wondering, lit. having wondered, I stand
(Plat. Phaedr. 257°). Τοῦτ᾽ ἀπειλήσας ἔχεις; have you made this threat ?
(Soph. Oed. Col. 817). Dem. 19, 288. Ar. Thesm. 236. Soph. Trach. 37.
2285. With verbs of “ being”.—1. The supplementary participle
is used with verbs denoting being in some definite manner. In
translating into English, the participle is generally made the
principal verb, and the verb is rendered by:+some adverb or
phrase like continually, by chance, secretly, first, away.
2. (a) Such verbs are: διατελέω, διάγω, διαγίγνομαι, διαμένω, διατρίβω,
to be continually ; θαμίζω, to be wont, to be frequently ; τυγχάνω, to
happen (to be by chance) ; A\avOdvw, occasionally διαλανθάνω, to escape
the notice of (to be secretly), also ἀποκρύπτομαι ; φθάνω, to anticipate (to
be first) ; οἴχομαι, am gone away.
(b) Add poetic διανύω, to bring to an end, to arrive at ;
poetic κυρέω = τυγχάνω ; συγκυρέω only in Hdt. 8, 87°;
poetic λήθω = λανθάνω.
᾿Ασκοῦντες διετέλεσαν, practising continually (Xen. Cyr. 1, 5°). “Emre
μελόμενος ὧν δεῖ Sidéa, studious always of the things one ought to be
studious of (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5%). οὐδὲν ἄλλο ποιῶν διαγεγένηται ἢ
διασκοπῶν τά τε δίκαια καὶ τὰ ἄδικα, he has passed through life doing
2286 THE PARTICIPLE 305
nothing else than considering what is just and what is unjust (Xen. Mem.
4, 8*). Διαμένω (Xen. Mem. 4, 77). Διατρίβω (Ar. Eccl. 1151).—o8 τι
κομιζόμενός ye θάμιζεν, he was not accustomed to being thus cared for
(Od. 8, 451).—"Ervuyov ὁπλῖται ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ καθεύδοντες ὡς πεντήκοντα,
about fifty hoplites happened to be sleeping in the market-place (Thue. 4, 113%).
Ὅπου ἔτυχεν ἕκαστος ἑστηκώς, wherever each happened to be standing
(Xen. Anab. 1, 5°). Od. 14, 344.—"Edadev ἀποδρᾶς, he escaped wnobserved
(Xen. Hell. 1, 3). "Edadov ἐσελθόντες, they entered wnobserved (Thue. 2, 2°).
Βουλοίμην ἂν λαθεῖν αὐτὸν ἀπελθών, I should like to depart without his
knowledge (Xen. Anab. 1, 3"). Ἐλάθομεν ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς παίδων οὐδὲν
διαφέροντες, unconsciously we found that we did not differ at all from
children (Plat. Crito 49). Isoc. 8, 32. Plat. Gorg. 471. Isoc. 1, 16.
Hat. 1, 445. Διαλανθάνω (Isoc. 3, 16). ᾿Αποκρύπτομαι (Xen. Mem. 2, 34).—
Φθάνουσιν ἐπὶ τῷ ἄκρῳ γενόμενοι τοὺς πολεμίους, they arrive at the
summit before the enemy do (Xen. Anab. 3, 433). Χαλεπὸν ἦν ἄλλον φθάσαι
τοῦτο ποιήσαντα, it was difficult for another to do this first (Xen. Cyr.
1, 3”). Κόνων as ἔφθη ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων κατακωλῦθείς, ἠναγκάσθη
ναυμαχῆσαι, Conon, having been stopped by the enemy before he could go any
farther, was compelled to fight a naval battle (Xen. Hell. 1, 617). Plat. Rep.
375°). Hat. 4, 136%. Il. 23, 805.—Oityera θανών, he is dead and gone (Soph.
Phil. 414). “Qiyovro ἀπελαύνοντες, they rode away (Xen. Anab. 7, 6%), Il.
2,71. Xen. Hell. 4, 8°; Anab. 7, 6%.
Ὅστις ἐχθρὸς Sv κυρεῖ, whoever happens to be my enemy
(Eur. Alc. 954). Soph. Aj. 87; Oed. Col. 119.—Anée (Il.
10. 279).—Avaviw (Od. 17, 517).
2286. Νοτε.--- υγχάνω, [κυρέω], λανθάνω, φθάνω.---1. With any
tense of these verbs, except the present or imperfect, the supplementary
aorist participle does not express time past with reference to the verb,
but time coincident with it. See the examples above, 2285 and 2288.
2. The few cases of φθάνω with the infinitive in classic Greek (as
in Ar. Hq. 935) are very suspicious; so the one of AavOdvw with
infinitive in Plat. Rep. 333°. In late Greek only are these verbs found
with the infinitive.
3. (a) With λανθάνω and φθάνω we occasionally find the regular
construction reversed, the participle of these verbs being used, and the
finite form of the other verb.
Ὅπως μὴ ποιῶνται ἔκπλους αὐτόθεν λανθάνοντες, sothat they might
not sail out from thence wnobserved (Thue. 3, 51°, for ὅπως μὴ λανθάνωσιν...
ποιούμενοι). Soph. Ant. 532. Φθάνοντες ἤδη δῃοῦμεν τὴν ἐκείνων γῆν,
we waste their land before they know it (Xen. Cyr. 3, 818), Od. 4, 547; Il.
12, 390; Ar. Plut. 1102. ie
’
306 THE PARTICIPLE 2287
(Ὁ) So very rarely in poetry with τυγχάνω and κυρέω :
Kur, Iph. Aul. 958; Soph. Phil. 371.
2287. NotE.—Oix ἂν φθάνοις (pOavorre).—This expression, meaning
you cannot be too soon, or the sooner you... the better, with a supple-
mentary participle, is equivalent to an urgent request or command ;
much less common is this expression in the third or first person.
Οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις λέγων, the sooner you speak the better = speak at once
(Xen. Mem. 2, 3"). Hdt. 7, 1622—OtKn ἂν φθάνοι τὸ πλῆθος τούτοις τοῖς
θηρίοις δουλεύων, the people might as well be slaves to these beasts at once
(Dem. 24, 143). Οὐκ ἂν φθάνοιμι (sc. λέγων), I will speak at once or I may
as well speak at once (Plat. Symp. 214°).
2288. ΝΟΤΕ.---Οὐ ¢éavw...xai.—When οὐ φθάνω is followed by καί
or καὶ εὐθύς, the meaning of the expression is no sooner...than.
Οὐκ ἔφθησαν πυθόμενοι τὸν περὶ ᾿Αττικὴν πόλεμον καὶ... ἧκον ἡμῖν
ἀμυνοῦντες, no sooner did they hear of the war in Attica than they came to
help us (Isoc. 4, 86). Isoc. 8, 98.
2289. 1. The supplementary participle is used with verbs of
beginning, ceasing, stopping (= causing to cease), persevering, enduring,
wearying, and permitting.
2. (a) Such verbs are: ἄρχομαι, begin, also ὑπάρχω and κατάρχω ;
παύομαι, λήγω, cease; παύω, stop = cause to cease (with acc.); διαλ-
Adoow, reconcile, get to cease (with acc.); ἀπαλλάσσομαι, get free from,
leave off ; οὐ διαλείπω, not to cease ; μεθίεμαι, ἀνίημι, ἐπανίημι, ἀπολείπω,
ἐκλείπω, ἐπιλείπω, leave off; sometimes κωλίομαι, be hindered, and
κωλύω (with acc.), hinder ;—Aurapéw, persevere ; ἀνέχομαι (with nom. or
aCC.), καρτερέω, ὑπομένω, endure ; κάμνω, ἀπαγορεύω (ἀπεῖπον, ἀπείρηκα),
weary ;—év ὀλιγωρίᾳ ποιέομαι, οὐ φροντίζω, not to care, disregard ;—
περιοράω, ἐφοράω, εἰσοράω, see = permit, let go on; προΐεμαι, neglect,
permit ; rarely ἐπιτρέπω, permit.
(6) Add also: dpyw with part. in 1). 2, 378; ἔχω = παύω
and ἐπέχω = παύομαι (poetic); ἄπαγε (= παῦσαι), cease
(poetic); ἐλινύω = παύομαι (Hdt.); in poetry μεθίημι =
μεθίεμαι ;—root τλα- (τλῆναι), endure (poetic) ; rarely in
poetry toAudw, endure, have cowrage ; in poetry épdw =
περιοράω, permit, let go on; seldom in poetry μένω,
await,
2290 THE PARTICIPLE 307
Αρξομαι ἀπὸ τῆς ἰατρικῆς λέγων, I shall begin my speech with the
medical art (Plat. Symp. 186°). Ὑπάρχω (Xen. Anab. 5, 5%). Κατάρχω
(Xen. Oyr. 1, 4*).—Tatoa λέγουσα, stop talking (Eur. Hipp. 706). Aix eg 6-
pevat...obmore λήγουσιν, they never cease plaguing (Xen. Oec. 1, 23).
Xen. Anab. 8,119: Mem. 4,6'. Τοὺς βαρβάρους ἔπαυσεν ὑβρίζοντας,
he stopped the barbarians from committing injuries (Isoc. 12, 83). Διαλλάσσω
(Plat. Phaedo 60°). ᾿Απαλλάσσομαι (Plat. Leg. 800°). Οὐ πώποτε διέλιπον
ζητῶν, I never left off seeking (Xen. Apol. 16). Τοῦτο τέμνων οὐκ
ἐπανῆκε, he did not desist cutting (Plat. Phaedr. 266°). Καὶ ἄλλα ye δὴ
pipia ἐπιλείπω λέγων, and I omit saying ten thousand other things
(Plat. Phil. 26). ᾿Ανώμι (Hat. 4, 28*). ᾿Απολείπω (Xen. Occ. 6, 1). Ἔκ-
λείπω (Plat. Menex. 249°). Μὴ κ πυλλλρ δ: «περαιούμενοι, lest they should be
hindered in passing (Thue. 1, 267). Διακωλύω (Isoc. 14, 44).
Aurapéere μένοντες, persevere, holding your ground (Hat. 9, 459), Οὐκ
ἀνέξομαι ζῶσα, I shall not endure living (Eur. Hipp. 354). Ἰάσων παῖδας
ἐξανέξεται πάσχοντας; will Jason endure to have his children suffer ἵ
(Eur. Med. 74). Kaprepéw (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2°). Ὑπομένεις pe τὸν τυφλὸν
κηδεύων, thow dost submit to curing for me the blind (Soph. Oed. Tyr.
1324). Μὴ κάμῃς φίλον ἄνδρα εὐεργετῶν, do not weary of doing good
to a friend (Plat. Gorg. 470°). Οὐκ ἀπαγορεύομεν θεραπεύοντες,
we are never weary of paying homage (Isoc. 10, 56). ᾿Απείρηκα ἤδη
συσκευαζόμενος καὶ τρέχων, I am now weary of packing up and
running (Xen. Anab. 5, 15). ᾿Απεῖπον (Isoc. 6, 47).—Od φρόντίζω (Eur.
Hee. 256). Ἔν ὀλιγωρίᾳ ποιέομαι (Thue. 4, 5°).
Μείζω γιγνόμενον τὸν ἄνθρωπον περιορῶμεν, we allow the man
to become greater (Dem. 9, 29). Μὴ περιίδωμεν ὑβρισθεῖσαν τὴν
Λακεδαίμονα, do not let us see Lacedaemon insulted (Isoc. θ,.108). Thue. 1,
86°. ᾿Εφοράω (Isoc. 4, 96). Εἰσοράω (Eur. Med. 712). Προΐεμαι (Thue. 2,
73°. ᾿Ἐπιτρέπω (Isoc. 12, 170).
ἔλρχω (Il. 2,378). "Exo = παύω (Pind. Isth. 3, 72). Τάσσων
ἐπέσχον, by arranging I restrained (Eur. Phoen. 449). “Amaye
«««αὐδῶν, cease speaking (Eur. Phoen. 1733). ᾿Ελϊνύω = παύομαι
(Hdt. 1, 67°; 8, 71°). Μεθίημι (Il. 24, 48).—TAjoopa ἄλγεα
πάσχων, I will endure to suffer toils (Od. 5, 362). Od. 20,
311. Soph. Hl. 943. Τόλμᾶ δ᾽ ἐρῶσα, have the courage to
love (Eur. Hipp. 476). Od. 24, 162.—My μ᾽ ἰδεῖν θαν ὁν θ᾽
ὑπ᾽ ἀστῶν, not to see me killed by citizens (Eur. Or. 746).
Μένω (Il. 13, 37).
2290. Norz.—Some of the above verbs are also used with the
infinitive, but their meaning is then commonly somewhat changed.
1. ΓἌρχομαι with the participle means to begin by actually doing
something, to begin with something, to be beginning, in distinction to
308 THE PARTICIPLE 2290
ending. With the infinitive it means to begin to do something; as
ἤρξαντο...τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ᾿Αθηναῖοι οἰκοδομεῖν, the Athenians began to
build the long walls (Thue. 1, 1071); Il. 7, 824.
So ἄρχω with the infinitive: IJ. 2,84. "Apyw with the
participle is nearly always explained differently from
2289, 2 (b), as to rule in Soph, El. 522.
2. Ilavw with the participle means to stop = to cause to cease ;
with the infinitive it means to prevent from occurring in the future
(= κωλύω), as ῥαψῳδοὺς ἔπαυσε ἀγωνίζεσθαι, he prevented the rhapsodists
from contending (Hat. 5, 67"); Plat. Rep. 416".
3. Μεθίημι with the infinitive, to omit, to permit, in prose and
poetry.
MeOiaou τὰ δέοντα πράττειν, they neglect to do their duties (Xen.
Mem. 2, 153). Ἐμὲ, ..μετὲς ἰέναι, permit me to go (Hdt. 1, 37%). Soph. Oed.
Tyr. 1381; El. 628. Μεθίημι with the participle is poetic (2289).
4. (a) ᾿Ανέχομαι and ὑπομένω with the participle mean to endure, to
hold out ; with the infinitive, to ventwre. ,
᾿Ανέσχοντο τὸν ἐπιόντα ἐπὶ τὴν χώρην δέξασθαι, they ventured (or
had the cowrage) to receive the invader in their country (Hdt. 7, 139°; ἀνέχομαι
with infinitive is very rare). Ὑπομείναντα τὰ πάντα πάσχειν, to
endure the suffering of any extremity (Plat. Leg. 869°). So τολμάω in prose
and poetry (2207).
Also τλα- (τλῆναι) in poetry when it means to venture.
With the participle τολμάω and τλα-, endure, are very
rare and poetic.
(Ὁ) ᾿Ανέχομαι may also be accompanied by a genitive absolute; as
οἴει twa ἀνέξεσθαί σου λέγοντος, do you think any one will
tolerate you saying (Plat. Phil. 13°).
5. ᾿Αποκάμνω with the participle, to weary of an action; with the
infinitive, to leave off from weariness, a8 μήτε ἀποκάμῃ ς σαυτὸν σῶσαι
(Plat. Crito 45°).
6. Περιοράω with the participle means to overlook, to let an action
go on without attempting to stop it; with the infinitive, it means to
allow a thing to happen without attempting to prevent it.
Τοὺς yap ᾿Αθηναίους ἤλπιζεν... τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἂν περιιδεῖν τμηθῆναι,
for he hoped that the Athenians would not allow their land to be ravaged
(Thue. 2, 207). Hdt. 1, 24°, Thuc. 1, 35%. Sometimes there is practically
no difference between the infinitivefor participial construction.
9991 THE PARTICIPLE 309
7. Ἐπιτρέπω, to permit, to give wp, with the infinitive is the regular
construction (Xen. Anab. 1, 215); with the participle it is very rare.
2291. With Verbs of Feeling or Emotion.—1. The supplementary
participle accompanies many verbs signifying to be satisfied, to
rejoice, to be pleased or displeased, to be vexed or angry, to be ashamed,
to repent.
2. (a) Such verbs are: ἀγαπάω, be satisfied ; χαίρω, ἥδομαι, γέγηθα,
rejoice, be pleased ; ἀγάλλομαι, to delight in, exult in; ἀρκέω, to suffice ;
ἀλγέω, be troubled, grieved ; λυπέομαι, grieve ; ἄχθομαι, ἀγανακτέω, be
vexed, discontented ; ὀργίζομαι, be angry; χαλεπῶς φέρω, be vexed,
displeased ; ῥᾳδίως φέρω, bear easily; αἰσχύνομαι, be ashamed ; pera-
μέλει μοι, μεταμέλομαι, repent, and others.
(b) ᾿Ασχαλάω (Hom.), be impatient, vexed ; περιημεκτέω
(Hdt.), be sad, angry ; poetic ἀναίνομαι when it means
to be troubled, to regret, to repent ; in poetry αἰδέομαι, be
ashamed ;--- φιλέω with nom, part. in Ar. Plut. 645:
φιλεῖς δὲ δρῶσ᾽ αὐτό, you are fond of doing it ;---ὄθομαι
(epic), to have care, regard; μέλω, be an object of care
or interest or thought, used personally with part. in Od.
5, 6; Od. 20, 21;—@avpafw with part. in Soph. Oed.
Tyr. 289.
Ὑπὸ σμϊῖκροτέρων.. τ μώμενοι ἀγαπῶσιν, they are contented to be
honowred by smaller people (Plat. Rep. 475°).—Tivopevor χαίρουσιν, they
delight in being honowred (Eur. Hipp. 8). Χαίρουσιν ἐξεταζομένοις
τοῖς οἰομένοις μὲν εἶναι σοφοῖς, οὖσι δ᾽ οὔ, they delight in having those examined
who consider themselves wise but are not (Plat. Apol. 33°). Ἰδὼν ἥσθην, I
was delighted in beholding (Plat. Prot. 315»). Téyn@as ζῶν, you live in exulta-
tion (Soph. Phil. 1021). ---᾿ Αγάλλομαι (Xen. Hier. 8, 5).— Apxéw (Thue. 5, 9").
—Aryéo (Plat. Phil. 47°). Adméopa (Thuc. 2, 65°). ᾿Ἐλεγχόμενοι ἤχθοντο,
they were vexed at being exposed (Xen. Mem. 1, 2%"). Τοὺς μὲν φρονίμους
ἀγανακτεῖν ἀποθνήσκοντας πρέπει, it is proper to grieve when the
wise die (Plat. Phaedo 62°).— A δικούμενοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι μᾶλλον dpyifor-
ται ἣ βιαζόμενοι, when injured, men are more angry than when treated with
violence (Thuc. 1, 77°). Χαλεπῶς ἔφερον οἰκίᾶς καταλιπόντες καὶ
ἱερά, they are grieved to leave their houses and their temples (Thue. 2, 16),
Οὕτω ῥᾳδίως φέρεις ἡμᾶς ἀπολείπων, you bear it so easily to leave us
(Plat. Phaedo 63*).—Todro οὐκ αἰσχύνομαι λέγων, I say this without
shame (Xen. Cyr. 5, 1").—MerepédXovro τὰς σπονδὰς ob δεξάμενοι,
they repented at not having accepted the peace (Thue. 4, 37). Μετεμέλησ ἐ
310 THE PARTICIPLE 9999
οἱ τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον pagctiyaoartt, he repented having scourged the
Hellespont (Hdt. 7, 544). Thue. 5, 354. Xen. Anab. 7, 1°.
Homeric ἀσχαλάω (Il. 2, 293).—Hadt. περιημεκτέω with gen.
part. in 8, 109.—Nixo@pevos λόγοισιν οὐκ ἀναίνομαι,
I do not deny being overcome by the tidings (Aesch, Ag. 583).
--αἴδεσαι πατέρα...προλείπων, be ashamed of deserting
your father (Soph. Aj. 506).—Epic ὄθομαι (Il. 5, 403).
2292. Notr.—Most of the participles used with the above verbs
express a cause and could thus be placed under 2251.
2293. Norn.—l. With ἄχθομαι a genitive of the participle can be
used (genitive absolute) ; as οὐδὲν ἤχθετο αὐτῶν πολεμούντων, he was
not vexed because they were fighting (Xen. Anab. 1, 18); Thue. 1, 951,
2. In poetry χαίρω, ἥδομαι, and γηθέω, rejoice, may have
the accusative; as σὲ μὲν εὖ πράσσοντ᾽ ἐπιχαίρω, I
rejoice at thy faring well (Soph. Aj. 136); Eur. Hipp.
1340; Soph. Phil. 1314; Il. 8, 378. So also ἐλεαίρω,
pity, and ἄχθομαι (Il. 18, 15 and 352).
2294. Norr.—l. Αἰσχύνομαι with the participle means 1 do some-
thing and am ashamed of it ; with the infinitive it means I refrain
from doing something because I am ashamed.
Τοῦτο οὐκ αἰσχύνομαι λέγων, I say this without shame (Xen. Cyr.
5, 1°).—But αἰσχύνομαι ὕμῖν εἰπεῖν τἀληθῆ, I am ashamed to tell you the
truth = I do not tell you the truth because I am ashamed (Plat. Apol. 22>).
Xen. Anab. 2, 3%; Rep. Lac. 9, 4.——So αἰδέομαι with the infinitive: Xen.
Symp. 8, 33; 8, 35. So ΣΕ with the infinitive: Xen. Symp. 8,
33; 8, 35.
Also epic ὄθομαι with the infinitive; as τοῦ δ᾽ οὐκ ὄθεται
φίλον ἦτορ.... φάσθαι, but his heart fears not to assert (Il.
15, 166).
2. Other verbs of feeling or emotion rarely take the infinitive ; but
στυγέω, hate (to do), always has the infinitive from Homer on.
2295. Notr.—Verbs of feeling or emotion are often followed by ὅτι
and a causal clause (2071); sometimes by εἰ and a conditional clause
(2074). .
2296. Explanatory Participle—1. The supplementary participle
may be used to explain the action of a verb, as an appositive
explains a noun or pronoun. ‘This occurs chiefly with verbs
2297 THE PARTICIPLE 311
meaning to do well or ill, right or wrong ; to surpass, to be inferior,
and the like. Here the aorist participle in connection with a
verb expressing a past action does not denote time past, but time
coincident with the verb. Compare 2286.
2. Such verbs are εὖ (καλῶς) ποιέω, to do well ; ἀδικέω, to do wrong ;
xapiLopai τινι, χάριν φέρω τινι, to do any one a favour ; vixdw, κρατέω,
περιγίγνομαι, to conquer, surpass ; ἡττάομαι, λείπομαι, to be surpassed,
to be inferior ; and others. ,
Εὖ ye ἐποίησας ἀναμνήσᾶς pe, you did well in reminding me (Plat.
Phaedo 60°). ᾿Αδικεῖτε πολέμου ἄρχοντες, you do wrong in beginning
war (Thue. 1, 53"). Τόδε po χάρισαι ἀποκρϊνάμενος, do me the
favour by replying (Plat. Gorg. 516°). Πάντας πειρῶ vixav εὖ ποιῶν, try
to vanquish all in doing good (Xen. Hier. 11,14). Οὐχ ἡττησόμεθα εὐ
ποιοῦντες, we shall not be surpassed in doing good (Xen. Anab. 2, 3%),
Εὐεργετῶν οὐδενὸς λείπεται, he is inferior to none in doing good
services (Xen. Mem. 2, 4"). Lys. 28, 8. Ar. Eccl. 1045. Plat. Phaedo 894.
Hdt. 9, 79%. Xen. Hier. 11,15. Xen. Mem. 2, 3”.
The participle here may also be regarded as circumstantial (2246).
2297. 1. The supplementary participle is sometimes found with
συμβαίνω and συμπίπτω, to happen; so also βελτίων (ἀμείνων, κρείσσων)
εἰμί are sometimes used personally with the participle where an
impersonal construction with the infinitive would be expected.
Οὕτω cupBaiver ἅμα καὶ ἡ τῶνδε εὐγένεια κοσμουμένη, in this way
their noble birth is praised (Plat. Menex. 237°). Πάντα..συμβαίνει
γιγνόμενα, all happens (Plat. Phil. 424). Συνεπεπτώκεε ἔρις ἐοῦσα,
there happened to be a quarrel (Hdt. 1, 821). ᾿Αρισταγόρῃ συν ἐπἵπ τε...
πάντα ταῦτα συνελθόντα, it happened that all these things occurred to
Aristagoras (Hdt. 5, 36). Plat. Phil. 47°)—Kpeicoowyv ἦσθα μηκέτ᾽ dv
ἢ ζῶν τυφλός, thou wert better to live no longer than to live blind (Soph.
Θεά. Tyr. 1368). Hat. 1, 37%. Lys. 26,4. Dem. 3, 34.
2. The supplementary participle is sometimes found with verbs
meaning to be full of, to be sufficient. Such are ἐμπίπλαμαι, be full,
μεστός (πλήρης) εἰμι; ἀρκέω, ἱκανός εἰμι, am sufficient.
Οὐ. βλέπων ἐμπίπλαμαι, I cannot satiate myself with looking (Eur.
Ton 925). Meords ἦν θυμούμενος, I was full of anger (Soph. Oed. Col. 768).
Hdt. 7, 146°.—"Apxéacw θνήσκου σ᾽ ἐγώ, it will be enough for me to die
(Soph. Ant. 547). Thuc. 5, 9°. Ἱκανὸς ἔφη αὐτὸς ἀτυχῶν eva, he said
it was enough for himself to be unhappy (Isae. 2, 7).—But ἀρκεῖ or ἱκανόν
ἐστι with the infinitive would be more common.
Soin poetry ἅλις εἶμι = ἱκανός εἶμι ; as in Soph. Oed, Tyr.
1061.
312 THE PARTICIPLE 9998
2298. With Verbs of Coming and Going.—1. With verbs of going
and coming, the supplementary participle is used to explain the
action, the participle expressing the main thought. When the
future participle is used, the whole expression means to be about
to or to be going to.
2. Thus are used ἥκω, I am come ; ἔρχομαι and εἶμι; for οἴχομαι,
am gone, see 2285.
Ἵνα εἰδῆς obs φέρων ἥκω λόγους, that you may know the words which
1 bring (Eur. Or. 1628). Νῦν δ᾽ ad ἕτερόν τι ἥκεις ἔχων, now again you
bring another thing (Plat. Gorg. 491°). Ἔρχομαι yap δὴ ἐπιχειρῶν σοι
δείξασθαι τῆς αἰτίᾶς τὸ εἶδος, I am now going to try to show you the nature of
the cause (Plat. Phaedo 100%). "Hee ταύτην αἰνέων, he went on praising
her (Hdt. 1, 122*).—"Epyopa ἐρέων, I am going to say, am about to say, like
the French je vais dire (Hdt. 1, 5°). Xen. Ages. 2,7. Καὶ ἐγὼ μὲν fa ras
ἐφεξῆς ἐρῶν, I was going to speak of them in order (Plat. Rep. 449"). “Hes
ἀγγελῶν (Eur. Phoen. 1075). Plat. Prot. 313°.
Homer uses the aorist of βαίνω, go, in this way.
By φεύγων, he took to flight or he fled (Il. 2, 665). Ods μὴ κῆρες
ἔβαν θανάτοιο φέρουσαι, whom the Fates of death did not
carry off or whom they did not go to carry off (Il. 2, 302).—B 7...
"Avrupoy ἐξεναρίξων, he went to slay Antiphus (Il. 11, 101).
2299. With other Verbs.—1. The supplementary participle is
oceasionally used with πειράομαι, to try; πολὺς ἔγκειμαι or
ἔγκειμαι alone, to importune, to urge, to be urgent; πάντα ποιέω,
to do everything ; rarely with orrovddfa, to be zealous ; with παρα-
σκευάζομαι, to prepare, the future participle is found, usually
preceded by ὡς.
Νῦν πειρᾶσόμεθα ἐλέγχοντες, we will now try to prove (Antiphon
3,1). Plat. Theaet. 190°. Πολὺς ἐνέκειτο λέγων, he was very wrgent in saying
(Thue. 4, 22"). Thue. 2, 815, Πάντα ἐποίουν πείθοντες τὸν βασιλέα
συγχωρῆσαι ταῦτα, they did everything to persuade the king to comply with
this (Xen. Cyr. 5, 4°). Plat. Huthyphr. 8°. ἫἪ γυνὴ ἐδόκει σοι ὑπακούειν ὧν
σὺ ἐσπούδαξες διδάσκων; did your wife appear to attend to those
matters which you took pains to teach her? (Xen. Oec. 9, 1). Plat. Polit.
310°). πΠροσβολᾶς παρεσκευάζοντο τῷ τείχει ποιησόμενοι, they
were preparing to make assaults on the wall (Thuc. 2, 181). But oftener with
ὡς preceding the participle, as in Thuc. 2, 71; Plat. Phaedo 985.
———E eee see.
2301 THE PARTICIPLE 313
2. Herodotus often uses the participle with πειράομαι, to
try; also with πολλός εἰμι, πολλὸς ἔγκειμαι, ANd παντοῖος
εἶμι, all meaning to importune, to urge, to be urgent ;
very rarely with ἐπείγομαι, to hasten, to press on.
Ἐπειρήθην ἐπελαύνων ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους, I tried
marching against these men (Hdt. 7, 9°). Πολλὸς ἦν λισ-
σόμενος 6 ξεῖνος, the stranger was urgent in entreating
(Hdt. 9, 91"). πολλὸς ἔγκειμαι (Hdt. 7, 158). Παντοῖος
εἰμι (Hdt. 9, 109*).—"Hv μὴ ἐπειχθῇς ποιεύμενος (se.
ναυμαχίην), if you do not hasten to fight a naval battle (Hat.
8, 68°).
(8) PARTICIPLE EQUIVALENT TO A CLAUSE WITH ὅτι
2300. The supplementary participle is used with certain verbs
in a manner similar to the infinitive of indirect discourse (2192),
In this case the participle with its subject is equivalent to a
clause with ὅτε or ws. If such a clause would have ἄν, the
participle also takes av. The participle may refer to the subject
or to the object of the verb. If the subject and object are
identical, the object is usually not expressed and the participle
then agrees. with the subject in case (compare assimilation of case.
with the infinitive, 2190).
Οἶδα αὐτὸν τοῦτο ποιοῦντα (ποιήσοντα, ποιήσαντα, πεποιηκότα), I
know that he is doing this (will do this, did this, has done this). Οἶδα τοῦτο
ποιῶν (ποιήσων, ποιήσᾶς, πεποιηκώς), I know I am doing this (shall do this,
did this, have done this)—OiSa αὐτοὺς ἐλθόντας ἄν εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς ἐκωλύσατε,
I know that they would have come if you had not prevented it (like ἦλθον ἄν).
Οἶδα αὐτοὺς ἐλθόντας ἄν εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς κωλύσαιτε, I know that they would
come if you should not prevent it (like ἔλθοιεν ἄν).
The present participle may represent the imperfect (see 1955, 2193) ;
as olda αὐτὸν τοῦτο ποιοῦντα, I know that he was doing this at that time.
2301. The supplementary participle is used with verbs of
perception (sensory or mental) and such whose action may be
regarded as causative of perception. Such verbs signify: to see,
to hear, to perceive, to know, not to know, to learn, to find (out), to
detect, to remember, to forget, to show, to appear, to asswme (suppose),
to prove, to admit, to announce (ἀγγέλλω), to represent (in art).
314 THE PARTICIPLE 2301
The following examples give most of the verbs so used :—
Εἶδον αὐτοὺς πελάζοντας, they saw them approaching (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4%).
ὉΟρῶμεν πάντα ἀληθῆ ὄντα ἃ λέγετε, we see that everything you say is
true (Xen. Anab. 5, 5%4). ὋὉ θεὸς τὰ μέγιστα πράττων ὁρᾶται, God is
seen in the performance of his very great works (Xen. Mem. 4, 3"). Ἤκουσε
Κῦρον ev Κιλικίᾳ ὄντα, he heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia (Xen. Anab.
1, 4°). Ἤκουσε τὸν Θρασύβουλον προσιόντα, he heard that Thrasy-
bulus was approaching (Xen. Hell. 4, 8°). For ἀκούω with object-gen. and
part., see 2309. ᾿Ἤισθετο Κῦρον πεπτωκότα, he learned that Cyrus had fallen
(Xen. Anab. 1, 9%). “HioOer’ ἠδικημένη, she knew that she had been wronged
(Eur. Med. 26). For αἰσθάνομαι with object-gen. and part., see 2309. Οἷδά
σε λέγοντα ἀεί (= ὅτι ἔλεγες dei, 2300), 1 know that you used to say (Xen.
Cyr. 1, 6°). Ἤιδει...ἀπειρηκότας τοὺς otpariaras, he was aware
that the soldiers were tired (Xen. Anab. 2, 2"). Ὄσθι μέντοι ἀνόητος ὦν,
know, however, that you are foolish (Xen. Anab. 2, 1.3. "Haiararo τοὺς ᾿
Ἕλληνας οὐκ εἰθισμένους ὑπομένειν τὰς povapxias, he knew that the
Greeks were not accustomed to put up with monarchies (Isoc. 5, 107). Kar é-
μαθον φάρμακον ὑμῖν αὐτὸν ἐγχέαντα, I learned that he had poured in
poison for you (Xen. Cyr. 1, 31°). Xen. Anab. 6, 6". AcaBeBAnpévos
ὑπὸ ᾿Αμάσιος οὐ μανθάνεις ; dost thou not perceive thou hast been deceived by
Amasis? (Hdt. 3, 18). Ἐπύθετο...τὸ Πλημμύριον ὑπὸ τῶν Συρᾶκοσίων
ἑάᾶλωκός, he found out that Plemmyrium had been taken by the Syra-
cusans (Thuc. 7, 31%). Thue. 4, 50°. For πυνθάνομαι with object-gen. _
and part., see 2309. Τὰ rod πολέμου τοιαῦτα ἐγίγνωσκον ὄντα,
I know that the affairs of war were such (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5). Thue. 2, 13.
Γνωσθησόμεθα ξυνελθόντες ἀμύνεσθαι, we shall be known to have
assembled to defend (Thue. 1, 124%). For γιγνώσκω with object-gen. and
part., see 2309. ᾿Ἐννοήσᾶς γένος ἐπιεικὲς ἀθλίως διατιθέμενον, perceiving that
a respectable race was badly situated (Plat. Criti. 121”). With nom. Eur.
Hipp. 435. For évvoéw with object-gen. and part., see 2309. Τίς οὕτως
εὐήθης ἐστὶν ὑμῶν, ὅστις ἀγνοεῖ τὸν ἐκεῖθεν πολέμον δεῦρο FEovro, who
of you is so simple as not to know that the war from yonder will come here
(Dem. 1, 15). μέμνημαι Κριτίᾳ τῷδε ξυνόντα σε (= ὅτι ξυνῆσθα), T
remember when you were with Critias here (Plat. Charm. 156"). Mepvnpe®
és κίνδῦνον ἐλθόντες μέγαν, we remember to have encowntered a great
danger (Kur. Hec. 224). Μέμνημαι τοιαῦτα dxovads σου, I remember
having heard such remarks from you (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6°). For μέμνημαι with
an object-gen. and part., see 2309. Ἐπιλελήσμεθ᾽ ἡδέως γέροντες ὄντες,
gladly we forget that we are old men (Eur. Bacch. 188). ὋὉ κῆρυξ ἀφικόμενος.
εὗρε τοὺς ἄνδρας διεφθαρμένους, the herald on his arrival found the
men slain (Thue. 2, 64). Ἐμὲ ἀληθὴ λέγοντα εὑρήσεις, you will find
that I speak the truth (Xen. Cyr. 2, 21). Δρῶν ἐφευρίσκει κακά, you
are detected in doing what is base (Soph. Oed. Col. 938). Il. 1, 330. “Av
een are
2301 THE PARTICIPLE 315
τινα λαμβάνῃ ψευδόμενον, if they find any one (guilty of) lying
(Plat. Rep. 8894). Ὅταν ληφθῇ ἀδικῶν, when he is caught doing wrong
(Plat. Rep. 609°). Καταλαμβάνουσι τοὺς φύλακας ἀμφὶ rip καθη-
μένους, thef surprised the guards sitting around a fire (Xen. Anab. 4, 2°).
Τοὺς νόμους κακουργῶν εἴληπται, he has been caught violating the laws
(Dem. 24, 65). Οὔ wore τούτου. προδιδοὺς ἁλώσομαι, I shall never be
found betraying them (Xen. Cyr. 5, 133). Ταὐτὸν δὴ τοῦτο δεῖ φωρᾶσαι
δρῶντας ἡμᾶς, we may catch ourselves doing this very same thing (Plat.
Tim. 63°). ἽΑ.... παρὰ τοὺς νόμους πράττων tis Poparar...., what one
is caught doing against the laws..... (Dem. 21, 41).—Examples of the parti-
ciple with dv: Σὺ εἰ ἐνορᾷς twa πόρον καὶ ἀπ᾿ ἐμοῦ ἂν γενόμενον,
λέγε, if you see any means of obtaining supplies depending on me, tell me
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 6°). Εὑρίσκω δὲ ὧδε ἂν yivépeva ταῦτα, εἰ λάβοις τὴν
ἐμὴν σκευήν, I find that this might happen if thou shouldst take my attire
(Hdt. 7, 15°). ἙΕὑρίσκω ταύτην μόνην ἂν γενομένην τῶν παρόντων
κακῶν ἀπαλλαγήν, I see that this would be the only escape from present ills
(Isoc. 7, 16). Εὖ ἴσθι μηδὲν ἄν pe τούτων ἐπιχειρήσαντά σε πείθειν,
εἰ δυναστείᾶν μόνον καὶ πλοῦτον ἑώρων ἐξ αὐτῶν γενησόμενον, be assured that I
would not have attempted to persuade you of any of these things if I had seen
that only your power and wealth would come therefrom (Isoc. 5, 133). Thuc..
1, 76' (with nom.). Isoc. 15, 7 (with nom.).
Ἐπέδειξα (Αἰσχίνην) οὐδὲν ἀληθὲς ἀπηγγελκότα, I have shown
that Aeschines has reported nothing true (Dem. 19, 177). Dem. 29,5. Xen.
Mem. 1, 2°. Δειχθήσεται τοῦτο πεποιηκώς, he will be shown to have
done this (Dem. 21, 160). Δείξω πρῶτα σοφὸς γεγώς, I will show first
that I have been wise (Eur. Med. 548). Ληλόω : Dem. 45, 34; Thue. 3, 84°;
Antiphon 38, 5. Δῆλον ποιέω (Hdt. 6, 215). ᾿Αποφαίνουσι τοὺς φ εύ-
γοντας πάλαι πονηροὺς ὄντας, they show the defendants to have been long
since evil-doers (Lys. 30,1). Ei φανήσεται ταῦθ᾽ ὡμολογηκώς, if he
shall be shown to have confessed this (Dem. 27, 16). Φανερὸς ἦν καὶ
δημοτικὸς καὶ φιλάνθρωπος Sv, he was evidently a friend of the people and
humane (Xen. Mem. 1, 2%). Δῆλός εἰμι (Thuc. 1, 1402. ἘἙοίκατε.. ἡδόμενοι,
you appear to be pleased (Xen. Hell. 6, 3°). For ἔοικα with inf. and with
dat. of part., see 2307. Ὁμολογουμένη οὖσα δούλη, it was admitted
she was a slave (Isae. 6, 49). Ὁ μμολογούμεθα..... ἐλθόντες, we admit
having gone (Lys. 4, 7). TiOnpi oe ὁμολογοῦντα, I asswme that you agree
(Plat. Apol. 27"). Πᾶσι ταῦτα δεδογμένα ἡμῖν νόμιζε, consider these
things as agreed to by all of us (Plat. Rep. 450°). ᾿Αδικοῦντα Φίλιππον
ἐξήλεγξα, I convicted Philip of injustice (Dem. 18, 136). Εὐθὺς ἐλεγχθ ἡ-
σεται γελοῖος dv, he will at once be proved to be ridiculous (Xen. Mem. 1,
7%). Τισσαφέρνης βασιλεῖ Κῦρον ἐπιστρατεύοντα πρῶτος ἤγγειλεν,
Tissaphernes was the first to annownce that Cyrus was marching against the
king (Xen. Anab. 2, 3%). Xen. Hell. 7, O°. ᾿Απηγγέλθη Φίλιππος...
316 THE PARTICIPLE 2302
“Hpaiov τεῖχος πολιορκῶν, Philip was announced to be besieging the
Heraean wall,—see 2311, 2 (Dem. 3, 4). Xen. Hell. 4, 813,
For σύνοιδα and συγγιγνώσκω (with or without a reflexive pronoun)
and the participle, see 2306.—For ποίεω, to represent in art, see 2311,
13.—For καθίζω, to put in a condition, see 2311, 14.
Herodotus has ἐπάϊστος γίνομαι, to become known or heard
of (like φανερός εἰμι) : 2, 119°; 6, 74}.
2302. Norz.—Construction with ὅτι or &s.—The verbs of perception
and their causatives (2301) may also take a dependent clause with ὅτι
or ws; δῆλόν ἐστι and φανερόν ἐστι, it is clear, much less often used
than δῆλός (φανερός) ἐστι, always take ὅτι or ds; ἐνθυμέομαι, to lay to
heart, to consider well, almost regularly takes ὅτι.
‘Op@pmev ὅτι οἱ σώφρονες οὐδὲν δήπου ἄδικον οὐδὲ ἀνόσιον ποιοῦσιν,
we see that honowrable men do nothing unjust or impious (Xen. Hell. 7, 3°).
Ακούω ὅτι (Xen. Occ. 15,7). Αἰσθάνομαι ὅτι (Xen. Anab. 1, 2"). οἶδα Gre
(Xen. Cyr. 3, 3*°). ‘Qs (Ar. Nub. 458). Μανθάνω ὡς (Thue. 1, 341). Τιγνώσκω
os (Eur. Ale. 418). Μέμνημαι ὅτι (Ar. Hq. 1254). Δηλόω ὅτι (Plat. Parm.
160c). ᾿Αγγέλλω ὅτι (Xen. Anab. 2, 14), Δῆλοι (sc. ἦσαν) ὅτι ἐπικεί-
σονται, it was clear that they would attack (Xen. Anab. 5, 2*°).—Anddv (ἐστιν)
ὅτι (Xen. Anab. 1, 3°; Cyr. 2, 434). Φανερὸν (ἐστιν) ὅτι (Xen. Mem. 3, 92),—
"Ev Oipéopa ὅτι (Isoc. 1, 48; with part. Thuc. 1, 120°).
2303. Nore.—Construction with ére.—With verbs of remembering
and occasionally others, a clause with ὅτε, when, is sometimes used.
Μέμνησαι ὅτε οὐδ᾽ ἀναγρύζειν po ἐξουσίᾶν ἐποίησας, do you remember
when you did not give me leave to utter a sownd (Xen. Oec. 2, 11). Lys. 18,
60). Οἶσθ᾽ ὅτε (Eur. Hec. 112). ᾿Ακούομεν...ὅτε (Plat. Leg. 782°).
So in poetry also ἦμος and ἡνίκα : Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1134;
Aj. 1273.
2304. Norz.—When the participle of an impersonal verb or
expression is used, it stands alone in the accusative.
‘Op® καὶ σοὶ τούτων δεῆσον, I see that you will have need of this (Xen.
Mem. 2, 6). Εἶδον ἀδύνατον ὃν tipepeiv τοῖς ἀνδράσι, they saw it was
impossible to aid the men (Thuc. 4, 153).
2305. Nore.—When the subject and object are identical, the
object is usually not expressed and the participle agrees in case, by
assimilation, with the subject (see 2300 and examples in 2301). But
sometimes the object, a reflexive pronoun, is emphatically expressed
in the accusative, and the participle naturally agrees with it in case.
2308 THE -PARTICIPLE 317
Οἶδα yap ἐμαυτὸν ὁσίως καὶ δικαίως κεχρημένον αὐτοῖς (for οἶδα
κεχρημένος, I know that I have made a virtuous and just use of them, i.e. my
speeches (Isoc. 15, 321). Dem. 27, 14.
2306. Norr.—wvoda and συγγιγνώσκω..---]. Σύνοιδα (and ovyyy-
νώσκω) ἐμαυτῷ, to be conscious of, with the reflexive referring to the
subject, may take the participle either in the nominative or dative.
*Ey® οὔτε μέγα οὔτε σμικρὸν ξύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ σοφὸς ὦν, I am not
conscious of being wise, either in great or in small degree (Plat. Apol. 21°).
Ἐμαυτῷ ξυνήδειν οὐδὲν ἐπισταμένῳ, I was conscious that I knew
nothing (Plat. Apol. 22°). Xen. Ουν. 1, δ᾽}, -ὁδλοὐγγιγνώσκομεν αὐτοῖσι
ἡμῖν ov ποιήσασι ὀρθῶς, we are conscious within ourselves that we have
not acted rightly (Hdt. 5, 91%). Lys. 9, 11.-Συγγικνώσκω ἐμαυτῷ occurs
mostly in Herodotus.
2. When the subject and object of σύνοιδα are different, σύνοιδα
means to share in the knowledge, to know with another. The object
and its participle may then be both in the dative, or less often in the
accusative, very rarely the object is in the dative and the participle in
the accusative.
Svvoidapev ὑμῖν ἐοῦσι mpobipordrac, we know that you have been
the most zealous (Hdt. 9, 604). Plat. Symp. 193..-.-Συνίσᾶσι τοὺς rerv-
ρανευκότας... ἀνηρημένους, they know that those who have been despots
have been put away (Isoc. 8, 113). Aesch. Cho. 216.—Ey® σοι σύνοιδα
πρωὶ ἀνιστάμενον, I know that you rise early (Xen. Oec. 3, 7).
2307. Norr.—Eowxa.—The verb ἔοικα may have three constructions :
with the nominative of the participle, to appear clearly ; oftener with
the dative of the participle, to resemble, seem like ; with the infinitive,
to seem to be or to do.
᾿Ἐοίκατε.. ἡδόμενοι, you appear clearly to be rejoicing = you are clearly
rejoicing (Xen. Hell. 6, 3°). "Eotxds ye ὀρθῶς λέγοντι, you seem to say
what is true (Plat. Cratyl. 416"). Οὐκ ἔοικεν εἰδέναι, he does not seem
to know (Xen. Apol. 29).
2308. Norz.— When a verb with a dative has an infinitive with a
supplementary participle referring to the dative, the supplementary
participle stands in the dative.
Συμβέβηκε τοῖς προεστηκόσι...«πρώτους ἑαυτοὺς πεπρᾶκόσι αἱ-
σθέσθαι (= οἱ προεστηκότες πρώτους ἑαυτοὺς πεπρᾶκότες ἤσθηνται),
it has happened to those who were in power to perceive that they have sold
themselves first (Dem. 18, 46).
318 THE PARTICIPLE 2309
2309. Norn.—Object-Genitive with Participle—When a verb of
perception takes its object in the genitive, a supplementary participle
referring to the object is also in the genitive (compare 1693), This
occurs mostly with ἀκούω (poet. κλύω), ἀκροάομαι, αἰσθάνομαι, γιγνώσκω,
μέμνημαι, ἐννοέω, πυνθάνομαι.
Ἡδέως ἀκούω Σωκράτους διαλεγομένου, I gladly hear Socrates
talk (Plat. Symp. 194°). Κλύω (Od. 4, 505). ᾿Ακροάομαι (Plat. Apol. 872).
Οὐκ ἠσθάνοντο προσιόντων τῶν πολεμίων, they did not perceive the enemy
approaching (Xen. Hell. 4, 219). Ei γιγνώσκεις ἐμοῦ φθεγγομένου,
you understand me when I am speaking (Plat. Cratyl. 4305. Μέμνημαι
τοῦτο σοῦ λέγοντος, I remember you saying this (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6°).
᾿Ἔννενόηκα σοῦ λέγοντος, I heard you saying (Plat. Hipp. Min. 369°). ‘Qs
ἐπύθοντο τῆς Πύλου κατειλημμένης, when they heard of the capture of Pylus
(Thue. 4, 6').
2310. Norr.—In poetry verbs of saying and denying
occasionally have a participial construction instead of an
infinitive or a clause with ὅτι or ὡς.
Cavdver ᾿Ορέστην...λέγω, I declare that Orestes is dead
(Soph. El. 676). Οὐ yap εὐτυχῶν ἀρνήσομαι, I will
not deny being happy (Eur. Ale. 1158). Eur. Hel. 1076.
Soph. Qed. Col. 1024. Eur. Tro. 478. Eur. Or. 1581.—
Isolated cases in prose: Plat. Phil. 22°; Soph. 235°.
2311. Nore.—Verbs of Perception with Infinitive—A number of
verbs of perception are also used with the infinitive as well as with
the participle, with more or less difference of meaning.
1. Αἰσθάνομαι, πυνθάνομαι, and especially ἀκούω, take the infinitive
when the thing perceived is not stated as an absolute fact, but as
indirectly perceived, as by hearsay or report.
᾿Ακούω ἄλλα ἔθνη πολλὰ τοιαῦτα εἶναι, I hear there are many other such
nations (Xen. Anab. 2, 013). Πυθόμενοι τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους ἐξεστρα-
τεῦσθαι, having heard that the Lacedaemonians had ended their expedition
(Thue. 5, δῦ). Aig @avdpevos αὐτοὺς μέγα παρὰ βασιλεῖ Δαρείῳ δύνασθαι,
perceiving that they had great influence with King Darius (Thuc. 6, 695).
2. ᾿Αγγέλλω with the participle means to announce something as a
fact; with the infinitive, to announce something as a report.
Ὁ ᾿Ασσύριος eis τὴν χώρᾶν ἐμβάλλειν ἀγγέλλεται, the Assyrian is
said to have invaded his territory (Xen. Oyr. 5, 339. The statement is only ©
a report, and is not yet known to be really so. |
——— «a.
2811 THE PARTICIPLE 319
3. Γιγνώσκω with the participle means to perceive, to know; with
the infinitive it means to judge, to decide, or to resolve, to decree.
Γνόντες τοῦτον εἶναι τὸν καιρόν, judging that this is the crisis (Thue.
1, 43). Hdt. 9, 715.--Ἔγνωσαν Πᾶσίωνα ἐμοὶ παραδοῦναι τὸν παῖδα,
they decided that Pasion should deliver the child to me (Isoc. 17, 16). Hat.
1, 74°). Xen. Hell. 4, 6°.
In poetry γιγνώσκω with the infinitive occasionally means
to learn how; as (iva) γνῷ τρέφειν τὴν γλῶσσαν
ἡσυχωτέρᾶν, that he may learn to keep his tongue more
quiet (Soph. Ant. 1089).
4. (a) Οἶδα and ἐπίσταμαι, with the infinitive, mean to know how to
do anything.
Atrny εὔνους οἶδεν ἰᾶσθαι φίλος, a benevolent friend knows how to
heal a grief (Men. Mon. 319). Il. 7, 238. Soph. Aj. 666. Ἐπίσταται...
ῥήσεις παμμήκεις ποιεῖν, he knows how to make very long speeches (Plat.
Phaedr. 268°). Il. 4,404. Soph. Ant. 472.
(6) Οἶδα and ἐπίσταμαι are also found with the infinitive in the
sense to know or to have a conviction; this use of οἶδα is rare and
chiefly poetic, while éricraua in this sense often occurs in Herodotus,
occasionally in Attic poetry.
Οἶδα yap dei μαρτυρήσεσθαί μοι, ὅτι..., I know that they will always
bear witness to me.... (Xen. Mem. 4, 8"). Εὖ ἴσθι τοῦτον καὶ δαπανῶντα
ἰσχῦρῶς ἀνιᾶσθαι, be assured that he will also feel much annoyed at
spending (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3"). Soph. Phil. 1829. Eur. Med. 593.— Ἐ πι-
στάμενοι αὐτὸν τότε τελευτῆσαι, having the conviction that he had
then perished (Hdt. 1, 122"). Hdt. 3, 66°; 3, 1344; 3, 140°. Soph. EI.
616 ; Ant. 1092.
5. Μανθάνω, μέμνημαι, ἐπιλανθάνομαι, take the infinitive when they
mean to learn how to do, to remember to do, and to forget to do
anything.
Τοὺς προδότᾶς yap μῖσεῖν ἔμαθον, I have learnt to abhor traitors
(Aesch. Pro. 1068). Xen. Anab. 3, 2%. Il. 6, 444..-.- Μεμνήσθω ἀνὴρ
ἀγαθὸς εἶναι, let him remember to be a brave man (Xen. Anab. 3, 2°).
Xen. Anab. 6, 4"; Cyr. 8,6°.—EmeXaddpny rods καδίσκους ἐκ φέρειν,
I forget to bring out the wrns (Ar. Vesp. 853). Plat. Rep. 563”.—With the
participle these verbs mean to learn, to remember, to forget, that anything
takes place; but ἐπιλανθάνομαι here seldom takes the participle, generally a
clause with ὅτι.
6. Φαίνομαι with the participle generally means to be evidently,
clearly ; with the infinitive, generally to seem to, to appear (as if).
320 THE PARTICIPLE 2311
Ἢ Ψυχὴ ἀθάνατος φαίνεται οὖσα, the soul is evidently (manifestly)
immortal (Plat. Phaedo 107°).—Ed λέγειν φαίν εἰ, you seem to speak well
(Ar. Nub. 403). Τῇ φωνῇ σαφῶς κλαίειν ἐφαίνετο, by his voice he
seemed clearly to be weeping, but he was not (Xen. Symp. 1, 15).
7. "Eoxa, see 2307.
8. (a) Δείκνῦμι with the participle means to show ; with the infinitive,
to show how todoanything. Thus: διαιτήρια τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἐπ εὃ εἰκ-
νυον...τοῦ θέρους ἔχειν ψύχεινά, I taught (showed) the men how to
keep their dwellings cool in swmmer (Xen. Oec. 9, 4).
. (Ὁ) Δηλόω in the sense to order, to command, takes the infinitive.
Κηρύγματι ἐδήλου τοὺς ἐλευθερίᾶς δεομένους ὡς πρὸς σύμμαχον αὐτὸν
παρεῖναι, he commanded by a proclamation all those desiring freedom to
come to him as an ally (Xen. Ag. 1, 33).
(c) Δηλόω and ἀποφαίνω, to show, declare, occasionally take an
infinitive instead of the usual participial construction.
Δηλοῖς yap αὐτὸν σωρὸν ἥκειν χρημάτων ἔχοντα, for you show that he
has come with a heap of money (Ar. Plut. 269). Andotdvres προσΐεσθαι
τὰ κεκηρυγμένα, showing that they accepted the proposal (Thuc. 4, 38"). (H
βουλὴ Αἰσχίνην) καὶ προδότην εἶναι καὶ κακόνουν ὑμῖν ἀπέφηνεν, the
council declared Aeschines a traitor and an enemy to you (Dem. 18, 136).
9. Εὑρίσκω, find = judge, rarely takes the infinitive.
Εὕρισκε ταῦτα καιριώτατα εἶν αι, he fownd that this was the most convenient
(Hdt. 1, 125+). Plat. Leg. 699". So rarely in the middle in the sense to
obtain by request; as mapa δὲ σφίσι εὕροντο mapa Παυσανίεω ἑστάναι
aeent τοὺς. «τριηκοσίους, they obtained permission from Pausanias that the three
hundred stand by them (Hat. 9, 284).
10. ‘Oporoyéw, to admit, to acknowledge, generally takes the infini-
tive, rarely the participle; as Ἔρως ὁμολογεῖται παρὰ πάντων μέγας
θεὸς εἶναι, Hros is acknowledged to be a great god (Plat. Symp. 202°).
Xen. Anab. 1, 9.
11. Τίθημι, assume, suppose, νομίζω, think, are seldom found with
the participle, as in the examples cited in 2301.
12. Δοκιμάζω with the participle, to test, to prove; with the
infinitive, to show, to explain; as Lys. 31, 34; Xen. Oec. 6, 8.
13. Ilovéw with the participle means to represent in art.
"AxAntov ἐποίησεν (Ὅμηρος) ἐλθόντα τὸν Μενέλεων ἐπὶ τὴν θοίνην,
Homer represents Menelaus coming to the banquet wnasked (Plat. Symp. 174°).
—Ilovéw with the infinitive means to effect, bring about (see 2216, 2); also to
assume, suppose a case; aS ποιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατηθέντας ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἥκειν εἰς Φᾶσιν, 1
suppose (or asswme) the case that you have been deceived by me and arrive
at the Phasis (Xen. Anab. 5, 7°).
2313 THE PARTICIPLE 321
14. Καθίζω with the participle, to put into a. condition, to cause;
as ἐὰν κλαίοντας αὐτοὺς καθίσω, if I make them cry (Plat. Jon
535°) ; Xen. Cyr. 2, 2%.
15. “Opdw, see, has the infinitive only in Thue. 8, 60: ἑώρων.... οἷόν
τε elvat... ; perhaps here (according to Kiithner, Griechische Grammatik,
ἃ 484, 2) equivalent to judge, decide, like γιγνώσκω.
16. Συγγιγνώσκω, to admit, acknowledge, occurs with the
infinitive in Herodotus and late writers: Hdt. 1, 895;
1, 918; 4, 437.
OMISSION OF THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE ov
2312. The supplementary participle ὧν is occasionally omitted in
the constructions given in 2285, 2289, 2297, and 2301.
1. This occurs frequently with τυγχάνω (poetic κυρέω), also with
διατελέω and διαγίγνομαι, rarely with συμβαίνω and περιοράω.
Εἴ ris εὔνους τυγχάνει (sc. dv), -if any one happens to be friendly (Ar. Eccl.
1141). Jl. 8, 430. Thuc. 1, 32%. Plat. Rep. 369%. Xen. Hell. 4, 85.
Kupé@ (Eur. Hipp. 1421) .---Ανυπόδητός re καὶ ἀχίτων διατελεῖς (sc. ὦν),
you continue both shoeless and coatless (Xen. Mem. 1, 63). Xen. Hell. 6, 83:9,
Διαγίγνομαι (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2").— Ap’ οὖν συμβαίνει μέγιστον κακὸν ἡ ἀδικίᾳ
καὶ τὸ ἀδικεῖν (sc. dv); is it not a fact the injustice and the doing of injustice
is the greatest evil? (Plat. Gorg. 479°).—Mndéva (sc. ὄντα) ἐν συμφορᾷ τῶν
πολῖτῶν δι ἔνδειαν περιορᾶν, to permit no one of his countrymen to be in
want (Dem. 19, 230).
2. It occurs sometimes with verbs of perception and their causatives.
Κἂν ὑμᾶς ὁρῶσιν ἀθύμους (sc. ὄντας), and if they see you dispirited
(Xen. Anab. 3, 1°). Eur. Hipp. 905. Εἰδὼς εὐπρεπεῖς μᾶς (se. ὄντας),
knowing you to be prepared (Dem. 4, 18). ᾿Εὰν ἐν Χερρονήσῳ πύθησθε
Φίλιππον (se. ὄντα), if you hear that Philip is in Chersonesus (Dem. 4, 41).
"Epé ye εὑρήσετε οὐ κακόν, you will not find me to be bad (Isae. 7, 41).
Ὥς σε δηλώσω κακόν, that I may prove you base (Soph. Oed. Col. 783).
"Ἄγγελλε πᾶσῶν ἀθλιωτάτην ἐμέ (sc. οὖσαν), tell that I am the most
miserable of all women (Eur. Hec. 423).
USE OF ὡς WITH THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE
2313. 1. With verbs of perception, saying, and the like, we often
find a genitive-absolute preceded by ὡς, where we should expect a
clause with ὅτι or an object-accusative with a participle or an accusative
with the infinitive. The use of ὡς i is the same as with the ordinary
1
322 VERBAL ADJECTIVES 2314
circumstantial participle (2246): it denotes that the thought is that of
the subject of the verb or of some person in the sentence.
‘Qs τοίνυν ὄντων τῶν δέ σοι μαθεῖν πάρα, it is in your power to learn
that this is so, assuming that this is really so (Aesch. Pro. 760). ‘Qs ἐμοῦ
ἀγωνιουμένου οὕτως γίγνωσκε, know that I shall contend (Xen. Cyr.
2,3”). Acavonbévres...as ἰόντων τε ἁπάντων ἀεὶ καὶ ῥεόντων,
thinking that all things were always in motion and in flux (Plat. Cratyl.
439°). Mav οὖν λέγεις ὡς τοῦ Μίνω φοιτῶντος... ; do you then
believe that Minos went...? (Plat. Leg. 624”). Soph. Aj. 281. Xen. Anab.
1, 85.
2. This use of ws also occurs with the ordinary supplementary
accusative or nominative participle after verbs of perceiwing, thinking,
saying, and the like.
Ὡς μηδὲν εἰδότ᾽ ἴσθι pw ὧν ἀνιστορεῖς, understand me as knowing
nothing of what you ask (Soph. Phil. 253). Πατέρα τὸν σὸν ἀγγελῶν
ὡς οὐκέτ᾽ ὄντα, (he comes) to announce that your father is no more (Soph.
Oed, Tyr. 956). ‘Qs στρατηγήσοντα épe...pndeis ὑμῶν λεγέτω, let
no one of you speak of me as one who is to be commanding.... (Xen. Anab.
1,3”). ‘Qs μὴ ᾽᾿μπολήσων ἴσθι τὴν ἐμὴν φρένα, know me as one who
will not sell my intention (Soph. Ant. 1063). Δῆλός ἐστιν ὥς τι
δρᾶσείων κακόν, it is clear that he wishes to do some evil (Soph. Aj. 326).
Xen. Anab. 1, 5°. Καμβύσης Ἴωνας καὶ Αἰολέᾶς ὦ ς δούλους πατρωΐους ἐόντας
ἐνόμιζε, Cambyses regarded the Ionians and Aeolians as slaves inherited
From his father (Hdt. 2,1). ‘Qs οὐχ ὑπείξων οὐδὲ πιστεύσων λέγεις;
speakest thou as one who will neither yield nor obey? (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 625).
3. Sometimes the participle preceded by ὡς is practically a circum-
stantial. It will be seen that verbs of thinking and saying, which
seldom take the supplementary participle, are apt to take it with ὡς.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -réos, -τέα, -τέον
2314, The verbal adjective in -réos, -réd, -réov, is used both
personally and impersonally. It is chiefly Attic and is found also
in Herodotus, but not in Homer.
2315. Personal Construction.—Only verbals formed from transi-
tive verbs can be used personally. The verbal then agrees in
gender and number with its subject; and is passive in meaning,
expressing necessity (what must be done, like the Latin gerundive
in -ndus, -nda, -ndum). The agent is in the dative. The copula
εἰμί is very often omitted.
fh
9318 VERBAL ADJECTIVES 323
‘H ἀρετή σοι ἀσκητέᾶᾷ (éorw), virtue must be cultivated by you, Lat. virtus
tibi colenda est. Οὐ πρό ye τῆς ἀληθείᾷᾶς τ᾽ μητέος ἀνήρ, a man must not be
honoured before the truth (Plat. Rep. 595°). “QgmerAnréad σοι ἡ πόλις ἐστίν,
the city must be aided by you (Xen. Mem. 3, 65). ᾿Αλλᾶς....μεταπέμπτέᾶς εἶναι,
others (sc. ships) must be sent for (Thuc. 6, 25%). Xen. Anab. 2, 4°.
2316. Impersonal Construction—In the more frequent imper-
sonal construction, the verbal is active in meaning, and also
expresses necessity. It stands in the neuter singular (-réov), less
often in the plural (-réa); and its object is in the case which
the finite verb would govern. The agent is usually expressed by
the dative; but sometimes by the accusative, perhaps because the
impersonal verbal may have been regarded as equivalent to δεῖ,
one must, with an infinitive. The copula εἰμί is very often
omitted.
᾿Ασκητέον (οΥ ἀσκητέα) ἐστί σοιτὴν ἀρετήν, you must cultivate virtue.
Ἐπιθῦμητέον (or ἐπιθυμητέα) ἐστὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τῆς ἀρετῆ ς, men must
desire virtue. Ἐπιχειρητέον (or ἐπιχειρητέα) ἐστί σοι τῷ ἔργῳ, you
must take hold of the work. Τοὺς φίλους εὐεργετητέον, ......τὴν πόλιν ὠφελητέον,
«τῶν βοσκημάτων ἐπιμελητέον, one must serve one’s friends, one must benefit
the city, one must bestow care on herds of cattle (Xen. Mem. 2, 135). Φημὶ δὴ
BonOnréov εἶναι τοῖς πράγμασιν ty, I say that you must aid the
public cause (Dem. 1,17). Ots οὐ παραδοτέα τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐστίν, whom
we mvust not give up to the Athenians (Thue. 1, 86°). Οὐ γυναικῶν οὐδέποτ᾽
ἐσθ᾽ ἡττητέα ἡμῖν, we must never be beaten by women (Ar. Lysistr. 400).
Plat. Gorg. 499°. Xen. Cyr. 1, 6°. Plat. Huthyphr. 8°. Hdt. 7, 168°.
With the agent in the accusative: Τὸν βουλόμενον εὐδαίμονα εἶναι
σωφροσύνην διωκτέον, who desires to be happy must pursue temperance
(Plat. Gorg. 507°). Ἰτέον ἂν εἴη θεᾶσομένους, we ought to go and see (Xen.
Mem. 3, 11').—Sometimes both dative and accusative are used in the same
sentence ; as in Thuc. 8, 65°.
2317. Norz.—In Latin the impersonal construction in -ndwm is
used only with such verbs as do not govern an object-accusative ; but
in archaic Latin the impersonal construction with transitive verbs is
occasionally found ; as habendum est canes (Varro).
2318. Norz.—Sometimes an impersonal verbal construction is
followed by an infinitive construction in the same sentence, some
word like δεῖ or χρή being understood, or implied with the latter; as
ποιητέον ἃ ἂν κελεύῃ ἡ πόλις, ἢ πείθειν αὐτήν, one must do what the
state orders or convince it otherwise (Plat. Crito 51°); Xen. Mem. 1, 5°.
324 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 9319
2319. Nore.—The verbal adjectives used impersonally sometimes
appear with middle as well as actwe meaning; as φυλακτέον, one must
guard and one must guard oneself against ; πειστέον, one must persuade
(τινά) and one must obey (τινί) ; ἀπαλλακτέον, one must release and one
must release oneself, get off.
Φυλακτέον ἐκάτερον τὸν ἔρωτα, one must guard against one of these two
loves (Plat. Symp. 187°). Πειστέον πατρὸς λόγοις, I must obey my father’s
. words (Eur. Hipp. 1182). Εἶπεν ὅτι ἑκτέον pov εἴη, he said that I ought
to be retained (Xen. Hell. 6, 1**).
INDIRECT DISCOURSE
OR
ORATIO OBLIQUA
2320. 1. An assertion or question is said to stand in direct
discourse when the original words or thoughts of the speaker or
writer are given in the form of an independent sentence.
2. When the words or thoughts of the speaker or writer are
incorporated in a sentence as a subordinate clause, and their
construction is thus made dependent on a verb of saying, thinking,
knowing, and the like, they are said to stand in indirect discourse
(oratio obliqua).
2321. Principal Clauses of Indirect Discowrse.—Principal clauses
of indirect discourse are such clauses as would be principal or
leading (independent) clauses also in direct discourse.
1. Those which contain an assertion are expressed by a sub-
ordinate clause with ὅτι or ὡς (see 2016); or else by an infinitive —
construction (see 2192). For the subject of the infinitive, see
2186, 2289,
2. Those which contain a question are introduced by inter-
rogative particles or by interrogative pronouns or by indefinite
relatives, and are construed according to 2008,
2322. Norze.—Sometimes one leading clause of indirect discourse
is introduced by ὅτι (ὡς) and the next is joined to the first by γάρ,
οὖν, δέ, etc.
Ἔλεγον πολλοὶ ὅτι παντὸς ἄξια λέγοι Σεύθης χειμὼν γὰρ εἴη...» many
declared that Seuthes uttered proposals of great advantage, for it was winter...
(Xen. Anab. 7, 83:3. Hdt. 7, 13"*. Dem. 50, 50.
9324 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 325
2323. Nore.—In longer indirect discourse one clause may be
introduced by ὅτι or ὡς, and the next may have the infinitive con-
struction: Lys. 13, 78.
2324. Subordinate Clauses of Indirect Discowrse.—Subordinate
clauses of indirect discourse are such clauses as would also be
subordinate or dependent clauses in direct discourse.
1. If the verb of saying, thinking, knowing, ete., on which the
indirect discourse depends, is a primary tense, all such subordinate
clauses retain their original mood and tense. Thus: λέγει ὅτι
ἥκει ἵνα ἴδῃ, he says that he has come to see (direct “ἥκω iva
iS,” and ié# simply becomes the third person iéy, the mood
and tense remaining).
2. If the verb of saying, etc. is a past tense, subordinate clauges
may be changed to the optative of the same tense; but subordinate
past indicatives (see 2325), must remain unchanged in mood and
tense. These rules apply also to subordinate clauses whose
leading or governing clause has been changed to a participial
construction after verbs of perception (2301).—Subjunctives with
ἄν, which are changed to the optative, naturally drop ἄν.
(a) Subordinate Clauses changed to the Optative after Past
Tenses :— ‘
Ὁ Κλέανδρος εἶπεν ὅτι Δέξιππον οὐκ ἐπανοίη, εἰ ταῦτα πεποιηκὼς εἴη,
Cleander said that he did not approve of Dexippus if he had acted in this way :
i.e. he said “"οὐκ ἐπαινῶ εἰ ταῦτα πεποίηκε (Xen. Anab. 6, 6). "Ἔλεγεν
ὅτι ἔτοιμος εἴη ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοῖς..., ἔν θα πολλὰ καὶ ἀγαθὰ An Worvro, he said
that he was prepared to conduct them..., where they would find plenty of good
things ; i.e. he said “" ἕτοιμός εἰμι ἡγεῖσθαι ὕμιν..., ἔν θα..«λήψεσθε᾽" (Xen.
Anab. 7, 155). "Ἔλεγεν ὁ Θηραμένης ὅτι, εἰ μή τις κοινωνοὺς ἱκανοὺς λήψοιτο
τῶν πρᾶγμάτων, ἀδύνατον ἔσοιτο τὴν ὀλιγαρχίᾶν διαμένειν, Theramenes said that
if one did not adopt enough associates in the measures, it would be impossible
Jor the oligarchy to stand; i.e. he said “ei μή ris... AQ Weran., ἀδύνατον
fora’ (Xen. Hell. 2, 3"). Τισσαφέρνης ὥμοσεν ᾿Αγησιλάῳ, εἰ σπείσαιτο
ἕως ἔλθοιεν obs πέμψειε προς βασιλέᾶ ἀγγέλου ς, διαπράξεσθαι αὐτῷ
ἀφεθῆναι αὐτονόμους τὰς ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασίᾳ πόλεις, Tissaphernes swore to Agesilaus
that if he would make a truce till the messengers whom he would send to the
king would return, he would procure for him that the Greek cities in Asia
would be left independent ; i.e. he swore “ἐὰν σπείσῃ, ἕως ἂν ἔλθωσιν
obs πέμψ ω..., διαπράξομαι... ᾿" (Xen. Ages. 1, 10). ᾿Απεκρίνατο ὅτι pav-
θάνοιεν ἃ οὐκ ἐπίσταιντο, he replied that they were learning what they did
-----
326 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 2324
not understand ; i.e. he replied ““ μανθάνουσι ἃ οὐκ emioravrar”’ (Plat.
Euthyd. 276°), ᾿Απεκρίνατο ὅτι.... βουλεύσοιτο περὶ τῶν στρατιωτῶν 6 τι δύ"
ναιτο ἀγαθόν, he answered that he would contrive for the soldiers whatever
good he could; i.e. he replied ““ βουλεύσομαι... ὅ re dv S0v@pac” (Xen.
Anab. 7, 153). Ἤιδει Κῦρος ὅτι, εἴ τι μάχης δεήσοι, ἐκ τῶν φίλων αὐτῷ καὶ
παραστατὰς καὶ ἐπιστατὰς ληπτέον εἴη, Cyrus knew that if he had to fight a
battle, he would have to take companions and leaders from among his friends ;
ie. “et τι μάχης Senoet,...Anmrréov ἐστι᾿᾿ (Xen. Cyr. 8, 110).----Τὴν αἰτίᾶν, 7
πρόδηλος ἦν ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνους ἥξουσα, εἴ τι πάθοι Χαρίδημος, the charge which
would be clearly advanced against them if Charidemus suffered anything ; i.e.
“ἥξει, ἐάν τι πάθῃ Χαρίδημος (Dem. 23, 12).—More examples: Xen. Anab.
3,515; Hell. 4, 83; 7, 434. Plat. Rep. 455". Thue. 1, 90’,
In all these and similar examples, the original mood and tense of
the subordinate (and principal) clause might have been preserved.
(Ὁ) Subordinate Subjunctive and Indicative retained after Past
Tenses :—
Οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι, €av pn τις αὐτοῖς χρήματα δι δῷ, they said they would
not proceed unless some one gave them money; i.e. they said “ οὐκ ἵμεν, ἐὰν
μὴ tis...668@” (Xen. Anab. 1, 413). "Edn χρῆναι, ot ἂν ἐξελεγχθῶσι
διαβάλλοντες, ὡς mpoddras ὄντας tipwpnOnva, he said that whoever should be
proved guilty of uttering calumnies must be punished as traitors; i.e. he said
“ot ἂν ἐξελεγθῶσι διαβάλλοντες, χρή... " (Xen. Anab. 2, 52”).—Edacav
αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄνδρας ἀποκτενεῖν, ods ἔχουσι ζῶντας, they said they would put
to death the men whom they had alive in their hands; i.e. they said “" ἀπο-
κτενοῦμεν, ods ἔχομεν ’ (Thue. 2, 5°). Karacyioew τὰς πύλᾶς ἔφασαν, εἰ μὴ
ἕκοντες ἀνοίξουσιν, they said they would break down the gates if they did
not open them willingly ; i.e. they said ““κατασχίσομεν...εἰ μὴ Exovres ἀνοί-
ξουσι ᾿ (Xen. Anab. 7, 1'*).—Tovro πρόδηλον ἦν ἐσόμενον, εἰ μὴ Tpeis
κωλύσετε, it was clear that this was going to happen unless you should
hinder it (Aeschin. 3, 90).
(c) Subordinate Past Indicatives retained after Past Tenses :—
ἭΚκεν ἄγγελος λέγων, ὅτι λελοιπὼς εἴη Συέννεσις τὰ ἄκρα, ἐπεὶ ἤσθετο
τὸ Μένωνος στράτευμα ὅτι ἤδη ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ἦν, a messenger came saying that
Syennesis had quitted the heights since he had fownd out that the army of
Menon was already in Cilicia (Xen. Anab. 1, 25). "Edeyov ὡς Ξενοφῶν
οἴχοιτο ὡς SevOnv οἰκήσων καὶ ἃ ὑπέσχετο αὐτῷ ἀποληψόμενος, they began
to say that Xenophon was going to Seuthes to live, and to receive what Seuthes
had promised them (Xen. Anab. 7, 755). ᾿Αντέλεγον.....λέγοντες μὴ ἐπηγγέλθαε
we ἐς Λακεδαίμονα τὰς σπονδάς, ὅτ᾽ ἐσέπεμψαν τοὺς ériiras, they pleaded
.... declaring that the truce had not yet been proclaimed at Lacedaemon when
they sent the troops (Thuc. 5, 49°). Dem. 30, 19 (ὧν ἐναντίον ἀπέδοσαν).
2324 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 327
Xen. Anab. 2, 13 (66ev...dppynvro). Hdt. 1, 87? (εἰ...ἐδωρήθη).--- ἘῸΣ the reason
of the necessary retention of the subordinate past indicative here, see 2325.
(d) Subordinate optatives, and subordinate indicatives of unreal
conditions, naturally remain unchanged : see 2012.
2325. Norz.—l. The necessity of preserving the past tenses of
the indicative of a dependent clause in indirect discourse unchanged,
arises from the fact that it would otherwise be generally impossible
to distinguish the past time, which is only marked by the augmented ν΄
form. Compare these examples :—
(a) Δώσω πάντα ἃ ἂν λάβω, I will give ali that I (may) receive.
Indirect: ἔλεγεν ὅτι δώσοι πάντα ἃ λάβοι OF ἔλεγεν ὅτι δώσει πάντα ἃ ἂν
λάβῃ, he said he would give all that he might receive.
(Ὁ) Δώσω πάντα ἃ ἔλαβον, I will give all that I (actually)
received,
Indirect: ἔλεγεν ὅτι δώσοι (or δώσει) πάντα ἃ ἔλαβεν (not λάβοι),
he said that he would give all that he has received.
Obviously if ἃ λάβοι could be used in the second indirect example
(δ), it would not be possible to tell whether it represented “ & é\aBov,”
what I (actually) received, or “ἃ av λάβω,᾽ what I may (or shall)
receive.
2. But where no confusion is possible, as in causal clauses, the
past indicative can pass into the optative.
Εἶχε yap λέγειν ὡς Λακεδαιμόνιοι διὰ τοῦτο πολεμήσειαν αὐτοῖς, ὅτι οὐκ
ἐθελήσαιεν per ᾿Αγησιλάου ἐλθεῖν ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν οὐδὲ θῦσαι ἐάσειαν αὐτὸν
ἐν Αὐλίδι τῇ ᾿Αρτέμιδι, he was able to say that the Lacedaemonians waged war
against them (the Thebans) because they had refused to march against him
(the Persian king) with Agesilaus, and had not even permitted him (Agesilaus)
te sacrifice to Artemis at Aulis (Xen. Hell. 7, 134); the direct statement was
“ἐπολέμησαν ἡμῖν, ὅτι οὐκ ἐθελήσαμεν..«.ἐλθεῖν.. οὐδὲ θῦσαι ε ἰάσαμεν
αὐτόν. See also Hat. 2, 121.
3. The present optative is not used to represent the present indica-
tive of a subordinate clause, after a past tense, whenever a confusion
would be possible as to whether it represented a present indicative or
present subjunctive with ἄν. Thus in a sentence like the following:
ἔλεγον ὅτι δώσοιεν πάντα ἃ ἔχοιεν, it would generally be impossible
to tell whether “ἃ ἔχοιεν ᾿᾿ represents an original “ ἃ ἔχομεν,᾽᾽ what we
(actually) have, or “ ἃ ἂν tywpev,” what we may (or shall) have. For
this reason a dependent present indicative is mostly retained.
328 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 2326
But the optative may be used when the context makes it perfectly
clear that it represents an original indicative, and not a subjunctive
with ἄν.
Οἱ δ᾽ ἔλεγον, ὅτι τὰ (Sc. χωρία) πρὸς μεσημβρίαν τῆς ἐπὶ Βαβυλῶνα (sc. ὁδοῦ)
εἴη καὶ Μηδίᾶν δι᾿ ἧσπερ ἥκοιεν, they said that the regions toward the
south were on the road to Babylon and Media, through which the Greeks had
come; i.e. they said ‘‘ra πρὸς μεσημβρίᾶν...δι᾿᾽ ἧσπερ ἥκετε," (Xen.
Anab. 3, 010) ; so Plat. Huthyd. 276°, quoted in 2324, 2 (a).
2326. Norr.—Occasionally a dependent (or leading) present or
perfect becomes an imperfect or pluperfect in indirect discourse after
a past tense; whereas regularly such a dependent present or perfect
would either be retained or changed to the optative. Compare 2020.
Ἔλεγον ov καλῶς τὴν Ἑλλάδα ἐλευθεροῦν αὐτόν, εἰ ἄνδρας διέφθειρεν
οὔτε χεῖρας ἀνταιρομένους οὔτε πολεμίους, they said that he was not liberating
Greece in the right way by destroying men who were neither raising their
hands against him nor were hostile ; direct, ‘‘ οὐ cadds...€devOepois, εἰ ἄνδρας
διαφθείρεις᾽" (Thue. 3, 322). Ἔν πολλῇ ἀπορίᾳ ἦσαν οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἐννοούμενοι
μὲν, ὅτι ἐπὶ ταῖς βασιλέως θύραις ἦ σαν, ..... ἀγορὰν δὲ οὐδεὶς ἔτι παρέξειν ἔμ ελ-
λεν,..«προὐδεδώκεσαν δ᾽ αὐτοὺς οἱ.... βάρβαροι, the Greeks were in great
perplexity, reflecting that they were at the king’s gates,....that no one would
furnish them with a market,....that the barbarians had betrayed them (Xen.
Anab. 3, 1%). Dem. 48, 16 (ὅσον μὴ ἦν ἀνηλωμένον). Dem. 19, 151
(ἃ eiAngec).—In such cases the writer uses his own standpoint of time, the
present.
2327. Norzr.—1. In the same sentence, the principal clause of the }
indirect discourse may retain the original indicative, while the sub-
ordinate clause may change its verb to the optative; rarely does the
reverse take place.
Προηγόρευεν αὐτοῖς, ὡς, εἰ μὴ ἐκπέμψοιεν τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους, πόλε-
pov ἐξοίσει πρὸς αὐτούς, he declared to them that unless they would eject
the Lacedaemonians, he would bring war against them; direct, “εἰ μὴ
ἐκπέμψετε..., πόλεμον ἐξοίσω ᾿" (Xen. Hell. 4, 85). Xen. Hell. 5, 4°°; Ages.
2, 81] Ἐδόκει δῆλον εἶναι, ὅτι αἱρήσονται αὐτὸν, εἴ τις ἐπιψηφίζοι,
it seemed to be evident that they would elect him, if any one put the ques-
tion to a vote, i.e. “αἱρήσονται αὐτὸν, ἐάν τις ἐπιψηφίζῃ ᾿ (Xen. Anab. 6,
1535)..- “Ἔλεγον ὅτι. «ἥκοιεν ἡγεμόνας ἔχοντες, of αὐτοὺς, ἐὰν σπονδαὶ γέ-
νωνται, ἄξουσιν ἔνθεν ἕξουσι τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, they said that they had
come with guides, who, if a truce were made, would conduct them where they
would get provisions (Xen. Anab. 2, 3°; here more regularly of αὐτοὺς, «i
σπονδαὶ γένοιντο, ἄξοιεν ἔνθεν EEorev). Xen. Anab. 5, 6.
ent ihati: iene
2329 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 329
2. Neither leading nor dependent clauses of indirect discourse are
necessarily put into the oblique optative. The Greek here prefers
variety ; sometimes employing the original construction where the
oblique optative could be used, and sometimes making sudden transi-
tions from the oblique optative to the original construction.
2328. Norr.—Very rarely do we find a subordinate subjunctive
clause, introduced by a relative with ἄν or a conjunction with ἄν, pass
into the optative and retain dv. See Dem. 30, 6, direct ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθῶ
which would regularly remain or become ἐπειδὴ δοκιμασθείην. Xen.
Cyr. 4, 2°; Mem. 1, 2°. Many scholars consider such passages corrupt
and emend them accordingly, making them conform to the general
rule. Compare 2332.
2329. Indirect Discourse Implied.—1. The general rules govern-
ing dependent clauses of indirect discourse after past tenses
(2324).—also their various peculiarities (2825—2327),—apply also
to all dependent clauses which, although not standing in indirect
discourse, yet express a past thought of some person in the leading
clause. The dependent clause may retain its original mood or
pass into the optative.
2. Such a dependent clause may be conditional (with ec), or
relative. or temporal (as with ἕως), or causal (with ὅτι) ; and may
also depend on an infinitive after verbs of wishing, commanding,
permitting, persuading, choosing, and the like.
Οὐδ᾽ ἦν τοῦ πολέμου πέρας οὐδ᾽ ἀπαλλαγὴ Φιλίππῳ, εἰ μὴ Θηβαίους καὶ
Θετταλοὺς ἐχθροὺς ποιήσειε, there was neither end of the war nor escape
from it for Philip, as he saw, unless he should make the Thebans and Thes-
salians hostile to the city; i.e. Philip’s implied thought (or apodosis) was
I cannot end or avoid the war, and the protasis, ἐὰν μὴ ποιήσω, could have
been retained in the third person ἐὰν μὴ ποιήσῃ (Dem. 18, 145). οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι
Θηβαῖοι, obs ἔδει...παραγενέσθαι mavorparia, εἴ τι dpa μὴ rT pox wpoin τοῖς
ἐσεληλυθόσι,...ἐπεβοήθουν, the rest of the Thebans, who were to have joined
them with all their forces if anything should go wrong with those who had
entered, advanced to help; i.e. the thought was ἐάν ri dpa μὴ προχωρῇ (Thue.
2, ὃ). Οὐδὲ rods ἀνθρώπους ἐδίωκον ὑποφειδόμενοι, εἴ πως ἐθελήσειαν οἱ
Καρδοῦχοι διιέναι αὐτοὺς ὡς διὰ φιλίᾶς χὠρᾶς, nor did they pursue the men, being
inclined to spare them, if perchance the Carduchi might wish to let them pass
through their country as that of friends ; i.e. their thought was ἐὰν ἐθελήσωσι
(Xen. Anab. 4, 1°). Οἱ δ᾽ ᾧκτειρον, εἰ ἁλώσοιντο, and others pitied them
330 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 2399
if they were to be captured; i.e. the thought was εἰ ἁλώσονται (Xen. Anab.
1, 47). ’EBovAovro yap σφίσιν, εἴ τινα λάβοιεν, ὑπάρχειν ἀντὶ τῶν ἔνδον,
for they wished that if they should capture any one, he should remain a hostage
for their friends within ; i.e. ἐὰν λάβωμεν (Thue. 2, 5*).
"Edevyov ἔνθα μήποτ᾽ ὀψοίμην, I fled where (as I believed) I should
never see; i.e. the thought was ἔνθα μήποτ᾽ ὄψομαι, rel. object clause (Soph.
Θεά. Tyr. 796). Ανδρα οὐδέν᾽ ἔντοπον (ἑώρων), ὅστις ἀρκέσειεν. I saw
no one in the place who could assist me; the thought was ἄνδρα οὐδένα ὁρῶ
ὅστις dpxéon, interrog. subj. (Soph. Phil. 281). Evfavro σωτήρια θύσειν,
ἔνθα πρῶτον εἰς φιλίᾶν γῆν ἀφίκοιντο, they offered sacrifices for their
safety as soon as they should reach a friendly country ; the thought was ἔνθα
«ἂν ἀφικώμεθα (Xen. Anab. 5,1"). Xen. Cyr. 7, 3’. Hat. 6, 497. 1
Σπονδὰς ἀλλήλοις ἐποιήσαντο, ἕως ἀπαγγελθείη τὰ λεχθέντα εἰς Aaxe-
δαίμονα, they made a truce with each other (to last) wntil what had been said
should be reported at Sparta; the thought was ἕως ἂν ἀπαγγελθῇ (Xen. Hell.
3, 27°), ‘Immoxparns,.....6 πότε καιρὸς εἴη, ἔμελλε στρατεύειν ἐς τοὺς Βοιωτούς,
Hippocrates intended to march against the Boeotians when it should be fit
time ; i.e. ὁπόταν καιρὸς 7 (Thuc. 4, 77!). "Ἔδοξεν οὖν avrois...mpoiéva εἰς τὸ
πρόσθεν, ἕως Κύρῳ συμμίξειαν, it seemed best to them to march forward
till they could effect a junction with Cyrus; i.e. ἕως ἂν συμμίξητε (Xen. Anab,
2,12). «Παρήγγειλαν, ἐπειδὴ δειπνήσειαν, συσκευαζομένους πάντας ἀνα-
παύεσθαι, καὶ ἕπεσθαι ἡνίκ᾽ ἄν τις παραγγέλλῃ, they gave orders that when the
soldiers had supper they should all pack wp their baggage and go to rest, and
to follow whenever any should give the signal; i.e. ἐπειδὰν δειπνήσητε, and
ἡνίκ᾽ ἄν τις παραγγέλλῃ, the latter retained (Xen. Anab. 3, 5**).
For causal clauses with this principle, see 2325, 2.
In all these cases the original mood could be retained.
Examples with original mood retained :—Tdv Etnvov ἐμακάρισα, εἰ ὡς
ἀληθῶς ἔχει ταύτην τὴν τέχνην, I congratulated Euenus if he really possessed
this art (Plat. Apol. 20”; ἔχοι could have been used). Τῷ μηδὲν ἑαυτῷ
συνειδότι δεινὸν εἰσήει, εἰ πονηρῶν ἔργων δόξει κοινωνεῖν τῷ σιωπῆσαι, it
seemed terrible to one conscious of nothing wrong, if he was to appear, by his
silence, as an accomplice in infamous acts (Dem. 19, 33; here εἰ δόξοι could
have been used). ᾿Ἐπέστειλεν, ἢν μὲν αὐτὸς σω θῇ, αὑτῷ ἀποδοῦναι: ἢ ν δέ
τι πάθῃ, ἀναθεῖναι ποιησάμενον τῇ ᾿Αρτέμιδι ὅτι οἴοιτο. χαριεῖσθαι τῇ θεῷ, he
enjoined him, if he escaped, to return the money to him, but if he met with
disaster (lit. if he suffered anything), to make such an offering as he thought
would please the goddess and dedicate it to her (Xen. Anab. 5, 3°; we might
have had εἰ σωθείη and εἴ τι rab). Τοιούτους ἤλπιζον ἔσεσθαι καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους
οἷοίπερ ἂν ὦσιν οἱ τῶν πρᾶγμάτων ἐπιστατοῦντες, they hoped that the rest
of the people would be like those at the head of affairs (Isoc. 7, 22; we might
have had οἷοίπερ εἶεν). Ἦν ἡ γνώμη, ὅταν ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐπὶ σφᾶς χωρῶσιν, ev
2331 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 331
μέσῳ ποιεῖν αὑτῶν τοὺς πολεμίους, the plan was to enclose the enemy between
them when the Athenians should advance against them (Thue. 1, 627; or ὅτε
χωροῖεν). Εἶπον μηδένα τῶν ὄπισθεν κινεῖσθαι, πρὶν ἂν ὁ πρόσθεν ἡγῆται,
I ordered that no one of those behind should move before the man in front lead
the way (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2°; or πρὶν ἡγοῖτο). Τοὺς ἵππους ἐκέλευσε φυλάττειν
τοὺς ἀγαγόντας, ἕως ἄν tis σημήνῃ, the horses he ordered those who had
brought them to watch until some one should give a signal (Xen. Cyr. 4 5°;
or ἕως τις σημήνειε. Ὑπέσχετο ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ δώσειν πέντε ἀργυρίου μνᾶς,
ἐπὰν εἰς Βαβυλῶνα ἥκωσι, he promised to give each man five minae of
silver when they should arrive at Babylon (Xen. Anab. 1, 4138; or ἐπεὶ ἥκοιεν).
Mixed constructions as in 2327 are also very common.
2330. Norzr.—1. The aorist indicative is regularly retained for the
reason given in 282, ἃ and 2. So the present indicative is retained
when a confusion would be possible as to whether the optative re-
presented an indicative or a subjunctive with ἄν, as in 2325, 3.
2.. A relative clause seldom changes its aorist or present indicative
to an optative ; and then only when the context makes it clear that
an indicative, and not a subjunctive with ἄν, is represented. This
occurs principally in Herodotus.
Λύδοῖσι πᾶσι προεῖπε θύειν πάντα τινὰ αὐτῶν τούτῳ, 6 τι ἔχοι ἕκαστος,
he proclaimed to the Lydians that every one should make sacrifice of what he
had (Hat. 1, 502; direct Ovér@ πᾶς ris...6 τι ἔχει ἕκαστος). Παρήγγειλεν
ὁ Τιρίβαζος παρεῖναι τοὺς βουλομένους ὑπακοῦσαι ἣν βασιλεὺς εἰρήνην
καταπέμποι, Tiribazus ordered those to be present that wished to hear
what terms of peace the king sent down (Xen. Hell. 5, 1°°); direct ἣν εἰρήνην
καταπέμπει). Καλεῖ τὸν Λάιον, μνήμην παλαιῶν σπερμάτων ἔχουσ᾽, id ὧν
θάνοι μὲν αὐτὸς, τὴν δὲ τίκτουσαν λίποι..., she cries on Laius, bearing
memory of that ancient issue by which (as she asserted) he himself had perished,
and had left her procreatress (Soph. Oed Tyr. 1245; here θάνοι and λίποι
stand for ἔθανε and ἔλιπε).
2331. Norz.—The present and perfect are occasionally represented
in these clauses also by the imperfect and pluperfect, as in 2326
Κῦρος ὑπέσχετο τοῖς Μιλησίοις φυγάσιν, εἰ καλῶς xararpdgeev, ἐφ᾽ ἃ
ἐστρατεύετο, μὴ πρόσθεν παῦσαι πρὶν αὐτοὺς καταγάγοι οἴκαδε, he promised
the Milesian exiles that if he successfully accomplished the objects for which
he undertook the expedition, he would not rest before he had re-established
them in their home (Xen. Anab. 1, 2*; direct ἣν καταπράξω, ἐφ᾽ ἃ or par-
εὔομαι, ob παύσομαι, πρὶν ἂν καταγάγω). ‘Eroipos ἦν...κρίνεσθαι εἴ τι τούτων
εἰργασμένος ἦν. «καὶ, εἰ τούτων τι εἴργαστο, δίκην δοῦναι, he was ready
to make an answer as to whether he had done any of these things, and if he
332 : NEGATIVES 2332
had done any of them, to be punished (Thue. 6, 291 ; direct ἑτοῖμός εἰμι xpive-
σθαι, εἰ...εἰργασμένος εἰμί... καὶ, el...eipyacua, δίκην δοῦναι). Thue. 3, 33?
Andocides 2, 16.
2332. Norr.—Occasionally we find a subordinate subjunctive
clause introduced by a relative with ἄν or by a conjunction with ἄν
pass into the optative and retain ἄν (as in 2328).
᾿Εψηφίσαντο πλεύσαντα τὸν Πείσανδρον καὶ δέκα ἄνδρας per αὐτοῦ πράσσειν,
ὅπῃ ἂν αὐτοῖς δοκοίη ἄριστα ἕξειν, they resolved that Pisander should sail
with ten commissioners and conclude negotiations in whatever way it might
seem to them to be best (Thuc. 8, 542; direct πρᾶσσόντων ὅπῃ ἂν δοκῇ).
Xen: Hell, 2, 418, Andocides 1, 81.
Such passages are considered corrupt by many scholars, who
amend them accordingly. ͵
2333. ΝΟΤΕ.---Τῦ is on the general principle of implied indirect
discourse (2329) that final (and object) clauses (2040) and clauses
after verbs of fearing (2063) admit the optative or retain the original
mood after past tenses.
NEGATIVES
2334. Ov and μή.---Ἰ. There are two negative adverbs in Greek,
ov and ju}.—Rules applying to these particles apply also to their
various compounds ; as οὐδείς and μηδείς, οὐδέ and μηδέ, οὔτε and
μήτε, οὐκέτι and μηκέτι, οὐδαμῶς and μηδαμῶς, ete.
2. As a general rule, οὐ is the negative of simple declaration ;
while μή is the negative of an expected or wished action or condition
(protasis), also of the infinitive.
2335. Οὐ and μή in Principal Clauses.—In principal (or in-
dependent) clauses expressing an assertion (1973), od is used; in
those expressing a command or wish (1973), μή is used.
2336. Ov and μή in Subordinate Clauses.—Of subordinate
clauses with a finite verb, the following take μή : final clauses,
clauses after verbs of fearing; conditional clauses, concessive
clauses ; consecutive relative clauses which express a ‘possible or
necessary or intended result, final relative clauses, conditional rela-
tive clauses ; and conditional temporal clauses. Other subordinate
clauses take ov.
9844 NEGATIVES 333
2387. Norr.—We may have οὐ for μή whenever a single word,
_ and not the whole clause, is to be negatived. Thus: ἔχει οὕτως, ἐάν
τε οὐ φῆτε, ἐάν Te φῆτε, it is so whether you say it not or do say it
(Plat. Apol. 25°).
2338. Mn with the Infinitive—The infinitive, when not in
indirect discourse, is negatived by μή.
2339. Norn.—For ὥστε ov instead of ὥστε μή, see 2078.
2340. Norz.—1. Apparent exceptions occur when οὐ belongs to
a preceding verb, or when οὐδείς (οὐδέν) is to be regarded as equivalent
to οὐ and ris (τὴ) with the negative belonging to the principal verb.
Δεῦρο ἥκουσιν...«μᾶς viv ἀξιοῦντες οὐ ξυμμαχεῖν ἀλλὰ ξυναδικεῖν, they
come hither now requesting not that you should join them in alliance, but in
wrong-doing (Thuc. 1, 39°). Aeschin. 3, 204. Τῆς ἀρετῆς οὐδένα δεῖ
ἰδιωτεύειν, no one ought to make virtue a private possession (Plat. Prot. 327°) :
here οὐδένα δεῖ is equivalent to οὐ δεῖ τινα or rather ov δεῖ οὐδένα (2359) ;
Soph. Phil. 88; Xen. Anab. 2, 4°.
2. So with participles and comparatives with οὐδείς (οὐδέν).
Οὐδὲν βίαιον ποιήσοντες παρεληλύθαμεν, we have come with the intention of
committing no violence (Xen. Anab. 7, 1%). Οὐδενὸς ἧττον ᾿Αθηναίων
πλούσιος, not less rich than any of the Athenians (Lys. 32, 23).
2341. Ov with the Infinitive—The infinitive standing in indirect
discourse takes ov. But there are certain exceptions; see 2342—
2344.
2342. Norz.—After verbs of promising, hoping, expecting, and
swearing, the infinitive takes μή (2195).
2343. Norz.—After verbs of saying and thinking, the infinitive
takes μή when saying or thinking expresses a command or belongs to
a protasis.
Nopicare νεύτητα καὶ γῆρας ἄνευ ἀλλήλων μη ὃ ἐν δύνασθαι, be convinced
that youth and old age can do nothing without each other (Thuc. 6, 18*).
Isoc. 1, 41.
2344. Norz.—Sometimes we find μή in other cases where οὐ
would be expected; as after ofwa(Xen. Mem. 1, 2"); γιγνώσκω (Xen.
Hell. 3, 2%); φημί (Plat. Gorg. 449°); ὁμολογέω (Plat. Rep. 456%) ;
νομίζω (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5%); ὑποπτεύω (Ken. Anab. 2, 3) ; ἀποκρίνομαι
(Xen. Hell, 3, 3").
334 NEGATIVES 2345
2345. Norzm.—Sometimes the negative is drawn from the infinitive
to the leading verb.
Οὔ φημι, I say that...not (Xen. Anab. 1, 3'). Ov νομίζω, I believe that...
not (Xen. Hell. 2, 4°°). οὐκ ἀξιῶ, I request that...not (Thue. 2, 89).
2346. Ov and μή with Participles, Adjectives and Nouns.—
Participles, adjectives, and nouns, are negatived by μή when
they express a condition ; otherwise by ov.
Thus ὁ μὴ εἰδώς, any one who does not know, or if any one does not
know; but ὃ οὐκ εἰδώς, the particular person who does not know.
In the same way are distinguished 6 μὴ δυνατός and 6 οὐ δυνατός. So
also ἡ οὐκ ἐμπειρία, the actual non-experience ; but ἡ μὴ ἐμπειρία, the
possible or eventual non-experience.
2347. Notr.—Participles, belonging to an imperative or to a pro-
tasis or to an infinitive which would take μή, are negatived by μή.
Ψηφίσασθε τὸν πόλεμον, μὴ φοβηθέντες τὸ αὐτίκα δεινόν, vote for war,
not being afraid of the immediate danger (Thuc. 1, 1243). Χρὴ τὸν ἀγαθὸν
πολίτην μὴ ἐκφοβοῦντα τοὺς dvrepovvras, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου φαίνεσθαι ἄμεινον
λέγοντα, a good citizen ought to show himself the better speaker not by terrifying
the opposing speakers, but by meeting them on equal terms (Thuc. 3, 42"). Ti
ἐστιν, εἰ χρὴ μὴ κελευσθεῖσαν λέγειν; what is it if it befits me to
speak when not bidden? (Eur. Iph. Tawr. 1288).
2348. Ov and μή as Interrogative Particles—Used as Interroga-
tive particles, οὐ expects the answer yes, and μή expects the
answer no, See 2008.
2349. Norz.—1. In indirect single questions, introduced by εἰ,
whether, either od or μὴ can be used.
*Eporas εἰ οὐ καλή μοι δοκεῖ εἶναι ἡ ῥητορική, you ask whether rhetoric
does not seem (a) fine (thing) to me (Plat. Gorg. 462°). Βουλόμενος ἐρέσθαι εἰ
μαθών τίς τι καὶ μεμνημένος μὴ οἶδεν, wishing to ask whether a man who has
learned something and remembers it, does not know it (Plat. Theaet. 163*),—
Here οὐ implies that the matter is decidedly true, while μή expresses it as
doubtful.
2. In double questions, or not is expressed by ἢ μή or by ἢ οὐ (εἴτε
μή OF εἴτε οὐ).
Εἰ δὲ ἀληθὲς ἢ μή πειράσομαι μαθεῖν, I will try to learn whether it is true
or not (Plat. Rep. 339°). Σκοπῶμεν εἰ ἡμῖν πρέπει ἢ οὐ, let us see whether it
is proper or not (Plat. Rep. 451°).—But when the double questions are
SOS -) Sh CCU
2351 NEGATIVES 835
introduced by relatives, the second member takes μή when the verb is not
re , otherwise μή or ov: Plat. Gorg. 472°; Xen. Oec. 16, 3; Aeschin.
1, 27.
APPARENT REDUNDANCE OF NEGATIVES
2350. With Finite Verb— After verbs of denial, and the like,
a dependent assertion with ὅτε or ὡς very often has od which
appears superfluous to us.
᾿Αντέλεγεν ὅτι οὐ κ ἐγχωροίη, he contended that it was not possible (Xen.
Hell. 2, 3°). Τί οὖν, ἐν ἀμφισβητῇ ὡς οὐκ ἀληθῆ λέγομεν ; well then,
if he should contend that what we say is not true? (Plat. Rep. 4764).
᾿Αρνηθῆναι ὡς οὐκ ἀπέδωκα, to deny that I have paid (Lys. 4,1). Plat.
Gorg. 508*.
This is explained by the Greek conception of such a clause. He
does not say exactly, I deny that this is so, but he says I deny this ;
at is not so.
2351. With the Infinitive—1. An infinitive depending on a
verb of negative meaning usually takes μή. This negative only
expresses that the object is negative, and it must be omitted in
translating. If the verb of negative meaning is itself negatived,
the infinitive usually takes μὴ od which must also be omitted in
translating. Thus: ἀπαγορεύω σοι μὴ τοῦτο ποιῆσαι, I forbid you
to do this ; οὐκ ἀπαγορεύω σοι μὴ οὐ τοῦτο ποιῆσαι, I do not forbid
you to do this.
2. Often the infinitive is preceded by τό; and if the governing
verb might govern a genitive, by tod; but τοῦ with a negatived
infinitive is perhaps never found when the principal verb is
already negatived.
3. Such verbs of negative meaning are: ἀρνέομαι and ἔξαρνός εἰμι,
to deny; ἀντιλέγω, to speak against, gainsay ; ἀμφισβητέω, to dispute ;
ἀπιστέω, to doubt, to distrust ; εἴργω, to restrain; κωλίω, to hinder ;
ἐμποδών εἰμι, be in the way; ἀντέχω and ἀντιόομαι, to oppose ; ἀπαγορεύω
(ἀπεῖπον), to forbid ; ἀπολύω, to acquit ; ἀπέχομαι, to refrain ; ἀπογιγνώ-
σκω, to depart from a judgment, to give up a design; εὐλαβέομαι, to
take care; φεύγω, to escape ; and others.
Ἢρνοῦντο μὴ πεπτωκέναι, they denied that they had fallen (Ar. Eq.
572). “Ἑξαρνός εἶμι (Plat. Hipp. Maj. 288°). ᾿Αμφισβητεῖ μὴ ἀληθῆ λέγειν
ἐμέ, he disputes (calls into doubt) that I speak the truth (Dem. 19, 19).
336 NEGATIVES 2352
᾿Απιστέω (Thue. 4, 407). Νόμων ypada εἴργουσι χρῆσθαι μὴ κατὰ γνώμην
τρόποις, the dictates of the laws restrain one from adopting manners according
to one’s conviction (Eur. Hec. 867). Κωλῦδόμεθα μὴ μαθεῖν, we are prevented
from learning (Eur. Ion 391). Ἠναντιώθην μηδὲν ποιεῖν παρὰ τοὺς νόμους,
I was opposed to doing anything contrary to the laws (Plat. Apol. 32>). Oi
ἰατροὶ ἀπαγορεύουσι τοῖς ἀσθενοῦσι μὴ χρῆσθαι ἐλαίῳ, physicians forbid the
feeble to use oil (Plat. Prot. 334°). Aeschin. 1, 138, ᾿Απελύθη μὴ ἀδικεῖν,
he was acquitted of doing wrong (Thue. 1, 1283), ᾿Απέσχοντο 1 1)...0 7 pat ed-
σαι, they refrained from making war (Thue. 5, 25°). EvAaBéoua (Plat. Leg.
843°). Φευξόμεθα μὴ θανεῖν, we shall escape death (Eur. Heracl. 506).
With τό μὴ.---Οὗτοί εἰσιν.. ἡμῖν ἐμποδὼν τὸ μὴ ἤδη εἶναι, ἔνθα πάλαι
σπεύδομεν, these are in the way of our already being where we have been long
hastening (Xen. Anab. 4, 8.3). Μικρὸν ἐξέφυγετὸ μὴ καταπετρωθῆναι,
he narrowly escaped being stoned to death (Xen. Anab. 1, 83). Κίμωνα παρὰ
τρεῖς ἀφεῖσαν ψήφους τὸ μὴ θανάτῳ ζημιῶσαι, they allowed Cimon, by three
votes, to escape punishment by death or they refrained, by three votes, from
punishing Cimon by death (Dem. 23, 205).
» With τοῦ μή. --- τούτους τοιαῦτα λέγων ἔσχετοῦ μὴ ἐκπεπλῆχθαι, by so
speaking, he prevented them from being overcome with fear (Xen. Hell. 4, 85).
᾿ ᾿Αποσοβοῦντες ἂν ἐμποδὼν γίγνοιντο τοῦ μὴ ὁρᾶν αὐτοὺς τὸ ὅλον στράτευμά
σου, by scaring them away they might prevent them from seeing the whole
army (Xen. Oyr. 2, 42°). Plat. Leg. 832%. Xen. Anab. 3,5". Isoe. 15, 122.
With μὴ οὐ.--ΕΟὐδὲν ἐδύνατο ἀντέχειν μὴ οὐ χαρίζεσθαι, im
nothing was he able to resist favouring him (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4). Mayas οὐκ
ἀρνοῦμαι μὴ οὐ συμβεβηκέναι po, I do not deny that I had fights
(Aeschin. 1,136). οὐδεὶς πώποτε ἀντεῖπε μὴ οὐ καλῶς ἔχειν τοὺς
νόμους, no one ever denied these laws to be good (Dem. 24, 24). Eur. Hipp.
658.
With τὸ μὴ ov.—O dk ἀπεσχόμην τὸ μὴ οὐ κ...ἐλθεῖν, 1 could not refrain
from going (Plat. Rep. 354°). Μὴ παρῇς τὸ μὴ οὐ φράσαι, omit not to say
it (Soph. Θεά. Tyr. 283). Aesch. Pro. 918. Xen. Symp. 3,3; Hell. 3, 3°.
2352. Norz.— When the principal verb is interrogative and implies
a negative, μὴ ov is also used.
Ti ἐμποδὼν μὴ οὐχὶ πάντα τὰ δεινότατα παθόντας ὑβριζομένους ἀπ o-
θανεῖν; what is to prevent us from dying ignominiously after having suffered -
the most dreadful outrages ? (Xen. Anab. 3,1). Τίνα οἴειἀπαρνήσεσθαι
μὴ οὐχὶ αὐτὸν ἐπίστασθαι τὰ δίκαια; who, do you think, will deny that he
νου what is just ? (Plat. Gorg. 461°).
2353. Norz.—Sometimes μή is omitted ; after κωλύω this-is usual.
Σχήσω σε πηδᾶν, I will stop thee from springing (Eur. Or. 263). Ei
τοῦτό τις εἴργει δρᾶν ὄκνος, if some hesitation prevents one from doing this
(Plat. Soph. 242%). Oi θεῶν ἡμᾶς ὅρκοι κωλύουσι πολεμίους εἶν αι ἀλλήλοις,
2358 NEGATIVES 337.
our oaths sworn to by the gods prevent us from being enemies to each other
(Xen. Anab. 2, 5%), Ken. Ages. 11,7. Plat. Phaedo 61*).—With τό : Xen.
Mem. 1, 3’; 4, 4°.—With τοῦ : Xen. Mem. 2, 1°; 1, 2%*; Cyr. 3, 1°.
2354. Nore.—Occasionally μὴ od is omitted; this is usual with
κωλύω.
Δρᾶσαι.. οὐκ ἀρνούμεθα, we do not deny having done it (Aesch. Zum.
611). οὐδὲ διακωλύουσι ποιεῖν, Sv ἂν ἐπιθῦμῇς, nor do they hinder you from
doing what you wish (Plat. Lys. 207°); Plat. Euthyd. 305°.
2355. Norr.—Rarely μή alone stands for μὴ ov. Thus: οὔτε
ἠμφισβήτησε μὴ ἔχειν (τὴν προῖκα), nor did he deny having the dowry
(Dem. 27, 15); Soph. Trach. 226; Phil. 349.
2356. 1. Analogous to verbs of hindrance are verbs and ex-
pressions of inability, impossibility, impropriety, and the like. If
an infinitive depending on these expressions is to be negatived,
it usually takes μὴ οὐ, much less frequently simple μή.
2. Such verbs and expressions are: οὐ δύναμαι, I am unable;
ἀδύνατόν ἐστι, οὐχ οἵόντε ἐστι, it is impossible; οὐδεμία μηχανή ἐστι,
there is no device or way; οὐ δίκαιον, οὐχ ὅσιον, αἰσχρόν (-Ξ οὐ καλόν),
δεινόν, ἀνόητόν ἐστι; αἰσχύνη ἐστι, tt is a shame, and others.
Οὐδεὶς οἷός τ᾽ ἐστὶν ἄλλως λέγων μὴ οὐ καταγέλαστος εἶναι, NO One
is able to speak otherwise without being ridiculous, i.e. no one is able not to
be ridiculous (Plat. Gorg. 509). ᾿Αδύνατα ἦν μὴ od μεγάλα βλάπτειν,
it was impossible for it not to do much damage (Thue. 8, 601. Οὐχ ὅσιόν
σοι ὃν μὴ οὐ βοηθεῖν δικαιοσύνῃ, it being imp ious for you not to give
aid to justice (Plat. Rep. 427°). Αἰσχρόν ἐστιν ἐμοὶ σοφίᾶν καὶ ἐπιστήμην
μὴ οὐχὶ πάντων κράτιστον φάναι εἶναι, it would be base for me to say that
wisdom and knowledge are not the best of all things (Plat. Prot. 352"). Xen.
Hell. 2,3". Plat. Symp. 218°. Xen. Anab. 2, 3"..—With simple μή : Plat.
Phil. 50” ; Xen. Cyr. 8, 715,
2357. Μὴ ot with Participles and Nouwns.—Occasionally μὴ οὐ (Lat.
nisi, except) is found with participles or nouns.
Τιμῆς τυχεῖν οὐχ οἷόν τε μὴ οὐ πολὺ TH γνώμῃ διαφέρον ra, to meet with
honour is not possible, except that one be much superior in intelligence (Isoc.
10, 47). Αἱ πόλεις χαλεπαὶ λαβεῖν, μὴ οὐ χρόνῳ καὶ πολιορκίᾳ, cities
difficult (= not easy) to take, except by time and siege (Dem. 19, 123).
DOUBLING OF NEGATIVES
2358. 1. Apart from the use of μὴ οὐ with the infinitive
(2351), the negatives are often doubled; in some cases this
22
338 NEGATIVES | 2359
doubling merely strengthens the negation, in others it de-
stroys it.
2. For μὴ οὐ with verbs of fearing, see 2062 ; with the leading
clause omitted, see 2067.—For οὐ μή with the subjunctive (or
future indicative) in strong denials, see 1977; for od μή with the -
future indicative or aorist subjunctive in strong prohibitions,
see 1985.
2359. When a negative is followed by one or more compound
negatives of the same kind, the negation is simply made stronger.
Οὐ μὴν οὐδὲ βαρβάρους εἴρηκε, he does not yet even speak of barbarians
(Thue. 1, 3*). Οὐδενὶ οὐδαμῇ οὐδαμῶς οὐδεμίαν κοινωνίαν ἔχει,
they have no communion anywhere in any way with any one (Plat. Parm.
166"). Xen. Anab. 2, 4535.- -ςὈμνῦμι) μηδέποτέ σοι ἕτερον λόγον μηδένα
μηδενὸς μήτ᾽ ἐπιδείξειν μή τ᾽ ἐξαγγελεῖν, I swear I will never show you any
speech of any one or tell of any to you (Plat. Phaedr. 236°).
2360. Norz.—Instead of the negative compounds, the Greek
might have the ordinary indefinite pronouns or adverbs.
Οὔτε τις ξένος ἀφῖκται χρόνου συχνοῦ ἐκεῖθεν, nor has any stranger arrived
from there for a long time (Plat. Phaedo 57*, for the more common οὔτε ξένος
οὐδείς). Μισθὸς οὐδείς rw ἐφαίνετο, no pay as yet appeared (Xen. Anab. 7, 5%,
for μισθὸς οὐδεὶς οὔπω ἐφαίνετο. But the Greek usually prefers to use the
corresponding negatives in such cases.
2361. Norr.—Simple οὐ or μή is always separated from its following
compound by one or more intervening words,
2362. When a negative is followed by a simple negative, each
always has its own negative force, and the two are often equiv-
alent to an affirmative.
Οὐδεὶς οὐκ ἔπασχέ τι, every one was somewhat affected = no one was
not affected (Xen. Symp.1,9). Οὐδὲ τὸν Φορμίων᾽ ἐκεῖνος οὐχ ὁρᾷ, nor does
he not see Phormio = he sees Phormio surely enough (Dem. 36, 46). Isoc.
8,52. Οὐκ dyvoia...od κατέδειξεν αὐτό, not through ignorance did he not make
it known (Plat. Rep. 406°).—M ἡ οὖν.. ὧν ὑμᾶς otros ἐξηπάτησε μὴ δότω δίκην,
let not this man escape punishment for the deception he practised on you =
* do.not let him not be punished ’’ (Dem. 19, 77).
2363. Norr.—Observe the difference according to the rules: οὐκ
ἐποίησεν οὐ ὃν, he did not do anything ; ; but οὐδὲν οὐκ ἐποίησεν, he
did evel ything.
When-ov is followed by μή, or μή by ov, both negatibaal retain
the separate force.
2367 PARTICLES 339
PLACE OF THE NEGATIVE
2364. 1. The negative particle regularly stands before the ford
that it negatives. Hence the difference in meaning : .
Οὐ πάντα μον ἐποίησεν, not all nee did he do well (i.e. ony
some) ;
Πάντα οὐ χα ς age sti he did all things badly (i.e. none soa
VARIOUS NEGATIVE EXPRESSIONS
2365. See, under Particles (2366) these and other negative ex-
pressions : μόνον. οὐ or μόνον οὐχί, ὅσον οὐ, οὐχ ὅτι and μὴ ὅτι, οὐχ ὅπως
and μὴ ὅπως, οὐ μὴν ἀλλά and οὐ μέ: τοι ἀλλά, etc.
PARTICLES »
2366. 1. The Particles are adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions,
and interjections. In the alphabetical list in 2371 are given the
conjunctions (particles which connect words or sentences), certain
emphatic particles or adverbs, the interrogative and negative particles.
2. The Interjections are numerous, and some are the same as in
English ; among them are: 4; a; ἄδ; aa; ἔ; ἕ; ἔξ; € €; ὃ; ὦ,
&;—ai, ha! af and αἰαῖ, alas !—éa; Lat. vah ! ha! εἶα and poetic ἐΐα,
Lat. eja! on! up! away !—edboi, Lat. evoe! (Bacchanalian) ;—iad,
ho! hallo! ah! ἰαυοῖ, ho! ho! (joy); ἰοῦ, Lat. heu! alas ! (occasion-
ally expresses joy); ἰώ, 10! O! (joy), also may express grief ;—éd ;
alas !—oi, ὀΐ, oh ! alas! woe! oid expressing astonishment or abhor-
rence ; οὐαί, Lat. vae ! ah! woe !—éér, mariner’s or rower’s call ;—
ἀτ(τ)αταῖ, ὀτ(τ)οτοῖ, exclamations of grief or pain; ἐλελεῦ, ἃ war-cry,
any cry; po, expressing weeping or sighing or indignation ; —rarai,
Lat. papae, expression of deep grief or astonishment or joy (ταπαιάξ,
comic) ;--- φεῦ, expression of grief or astonishment.
2367. The conjunctions are divided into eleven biased. Several
belong to more than one class.
1, Copulative: καί, τέ, poetic ἠδέ, epic ἰδέ.
᾿ 2. Disjunctive > 4 (or), εἴτε, οὔτε (μήτε), οὐδέ (μηδέ).
3. Adversative : ἀλλά, vile (Hom. also veka av, δέ, μέν.. ἐπὶ
μέντοι, μήν." . .
340 PARTICLES 2368
4, Comparative: ὡς, ὥσπερ, ὅπως, ὥστε, ἤ (than), Hom. ἠΐτε and
εἶτε.
5. Declarative: ὅτι, διότι, ds, poetic οὕνεκα.
6. Final: ἵνα, ὡς, ὅπως, μή, poetic ὄφρα.
7. Consecutive: ὥστε, ὡς ; ἄρα, δή, νῦν (poet. also viv, Hom. νύν
and νύ, Hdt: viv), οὖν ; τοίνυν, τοιγαροῦν, τοιγάρτοι, poet. τοίγαρ.
8. Conditional: εἰ (ἐάν, ἤν, av).
9. Causal: ὅτι, διότι, ὡς, ἐπεί, γάρ, ἅτε, ὅτε, ὁπότε, poet. οὕνεκα and
ὁθούνεκα.
10. Concessive: εἰ καί, καὶ εἰ, καίτοι, καίπερ, ὅμως.
11. Lomporat : ὅτε, ὁπότε, WS, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ἄχρι, μέχρι, at. ἡνίκα,
ὅπηνίκα, ὁσάκις, ὁποσάκις, ἕως, ἔστε, ἐξ οὗ, ἀφ᾽ οὗ, ἐν ᾧ ;—poet. εἶτε, ὄφρα,
πάρος, Hom. ἦμος and εἰς ὅ(τε) κε.
2368. The emphatic adverbs are: γέ, γοῦν, δαί, δή, δῆθεν, δήπου,
an ’ὔ ͵ , / > ,ὔ
δῆτα, ἢ, μά, μέν, μήν, ναί, νή, οὖν, περ, τοί.
2369. Postpositive Particles are such as cannot stand first in ἃ
sentence, but must follow one or more words. The enclitics of course
are all postpositive.
2370. Asyndeton.—In ordinary discourse every Greek sentence
is connected with the preceding one by means of a conjunction; most
frequently δέ is thus used, but often καί or οὖ. The omission of such
a connecting particle, termed asyndeton (ἀσύνδετον, not connected),
sometimes occurs for lively effect, naturally oftener in poetry than in
prose (as Soph. H/. 1234). ,
A connecting particle is not necessary when a demonstrative —
referring to what precedes stands first in the sentence. After an
announcement of something to follow by words like ὅδε, τοιόσδε and
the like, the new sentence is usually joined to the preceding one
without the intervention of a particle; but sometimes γάρ is here
employed.
2371. List of Particles.—In the following list the more important
particles are mentioned, and quoted examples are given when neces-
sary.—The prepositions are given in 1843—-1864.—For the syntax of the
ordinary adverb, see 1865.—The negative particles are explained in
2334—2365.—Certain interrogative particles are explained in 2008 and ©
2009.—Certain affirmative and negative particles used in answering
2371 PARTICLES 341
questions are also mentioned in 2010, 4.—The sections of the syntax
are also indicated in which the uses of certain other particles in the
list are explained.
1. ᾿Αλλά, but, yet, the ordinary meanings.
(a) Often ἀλλά introduces a reply or sudden transition, and may
then be rendered by well, or need not be translated.
Ἣν ἡμῖν ἡγήσῃ....., καὶ ὁ Σεύθης ἔφη- “ἀλλὰ οἶδα κώμᾶς πολλᾶς....... Pe
if you lead us....., and Seuthes replied, ‘‘Well, I know of many villages
pe )ὺς " (Xen. Anab. 7, 3°). Xen. Anab. 2, 14; 3,1. Kai po ἐπίδειξιν
ἜΣ τῆς βραχυλογίᾶς ποίησαι.... ᾿Αλλὰ ποιήσω, show me an example of
brevity of speech. I will do so (Plat. Gorg. 449°).
(Ὁ) A sudden exhortation is introduced by ἀλλά, come now! Ti
δεῖ ἔτι λέγειν ; GAN..... ire εἰς Μήδους, what more need I add ? come now !
--+-,Join the Medes (Xen. Cyr. 1, 5). ᾿Αλλ’ ἴωμεν (Plat. Prot. 311°).
(c) After a conditional clause ἀλλά often means at least; ἀλλά ye,
(but) then at least; ἀλλ᾽ οὖν, but then; ἀλλ᾽ οὖν....γε, but then...at
least. .
Ei σῶμα δοῦλον, ἀλλ᾽ ὁ νοῦς ἐλεύθερος, even if the body be captive, the
soul at least is free (Soph. fr. 855). δΔεῖ..... πειρᾶσθαι ὅπως, ἣν μὲν δυνώμεθα,
«--σῳζώμεθαι, εἰ δὲ μὴ, ἀλλὰ καλῶς ye ἀποθνήσκωμεν, we must try if we can,
«+++-t0 save gereniees, but if we cannot, then at least to die nobly (Xen. Anab.
a AY pe ad Ag. 2, 21). —The condition may be omitted ; as ὦ θεοὶ
πατρῷοι, manera ti γ᾽ ἀλλὰ viv, gods of my ancestors, help me at least now,
if (or as) you did not before (Soph. l/l. 411).
(4) Sometimes ἀλλά is to be rendered by rather, on the contrary ;
a preceding negative clause is understood.
Κίνδῦνος πολλοὺς ἀπόλλυσθαι ἣν ἀμελῶς τε καὶ ἀφυλάκτως πορεύησθαι ἐπὶ τὰ
ἐπιτήδεια - ἀλλά μοι δοκεῖ σὺν προνομαῖς λαμβάνειν τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, there is danger
that many may be killed if you go out in quest of provisions heedlessly and
ungquardedly ; it seems to me that we should rather seek provisions in foraging-
parties (Xen. Anab. 5, 157).
(6) ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἤ after a negative means except ; as ἀργύριον οὐκ ἔχω GAN
ἢ pixpov τι, I have no money except a little (Xen. Anab. 7, 7%; 4, 611).
Probably ἀλλ᾽ 7 stands for ἄλλο 7.
(7) See under οὐ (67 below) the following : οὐ (μή) μόνον.....ἀλλὰ καί,
ἀλλ᾽ of and ἀλλὰ μή, οὐχ ὅπως. ...«ἀλλὰ Kal, μὴ ὅτι....«ἀλλὰ Kal, οὐ μὴν
ἀλλά.
2. “Addo τι (ἢ), in questions, see 2008, 4.
3. “A\\ws, in another way, otherwise, in vain, at random (Soph.
342 _ PARTICLES 2371
Oed. Tyr. 1151; Xen. Anab-5, 1"). Τὴν ἄλλως, to no purpose (1280).—
"AdAws τε καί Means especially (Xen. Anab. 5, 6°; Xen. Hell. 6, 3").
4, “Apa, together with, improper prep., see 1771; with participles,
see 2270 ;—au...:kai, no sooner..:.than, see under καί 44, 8, below.
5. “Av (Epic dn, κέ), modal particle, see 1960—1972.
6. "Apa, Hom. also do and enelitic pa, all postpositive then, of
COUrSe, 80, therefore, accordingly.
᾿Αλλὰ πάντα μὲν dpa ἄνθρωπον ὄντα προσδοκᾶν δεῖ, α a man ou then to
expect everything (Xen. Anab. 7, 6"; 4, 6°). Plat. Gorg. 476°; Od. 4, 107.;
Il, 2, 482.
(a) Ei ἄρα, if really (Dem. 56, 28).—Ei μὴ aoe unless indeed, Latin niet
forte (ironical), as Xen. Mem. 1, 2°.— ‘Hy ἄρα referring to the future (Xen.
Anab. 5, 11*).—8i ἄρα interrogative, whether o or if indeed (Xen. Anab. 3, 2%),
7. "Apa, interrogative particle, see 2008.— Apa (postpositive), see-6.
8. ᾿Ατάρ, Hom. also αὐτάρ, but, yet a Anab. 7, 7; Hell. 6,
417),
9, “Are, with participles, see 2271, 2272.
10. αὖ (postpositive), on the other hand, in return, moreover (Xen,
Anab. 1, 10!'; 2, 65). Epic αὖτε.
11, Αὐτίκα. With the participle, straightway, see 2270.—Also for
example, as αὐτίκα γεωμετρίαν μέχρι τούτου ἔφη δεῖν μανθάνειν. ..., for
example, he said that one ought to learn geometry'to this οαϊἰοηξ....ὕ..
(Xen. Mem. 4, 173).
12. [dp (postpositive = ye dpa), for, introduces a reason n (Xen. Anab.
5, 6°; Ag. 1, δ). Sometimes the reason explains what follows;
as in Plat. Prot, 8475 ;—this following clause often has οὖν, as ὁρᾶτε
yap....de οὖν, for you sée........t is necessary therefore (Xen. Anab. 3,
929, 30),
(a) In answers we usually find yap, which is then equivalent to
‘< certainly,” ‘‘ indeed ”’
ὋὉμολογεῖς οὖν περὶ ἐμὲ ἄδικος γεγενῆσθαι ; Ἦ γὰρ ἀνάγκη, do you then admit
having wronged me? Yes, I certainly must (Xen. Anab.1, 6°). Plat. Rep. 381°.
(6) In lively questions, yap is equivalent to “what?” or ‘ whys j
or ‘‘can it be?” or simply ‘then ”’
Οἴει. γάρ σοι μαχεῖσθαι τὸν ee fat ; gas do you think your brothek will
fight against you! (Ken. Anab. 1, 7°). Soph. Oed. Col. 1575.—So the
formulas οὐ γάρ; = “ἐδ it not so?” and ἦ yap = “ἐδ it really so?” expecting
the answer “ yes” ; as Xen. Mem. 2, 3'°; Plat. Huthyd. 288'.—So τί γάρ;
= ‘for how?” (Plat. Phaedr. 258%). ye ἵ
᾿
;
2371 PARTICLES 3 343
ες (0) Καὶ. γάρ may mean “ for” (etenim), as in Xen. Anab. 2, 6?, the
καί only serving to connect the thought closer to what precedes. —It
may mean “* ‘for also,’ the καί belonging to the following thought, as
in Xen. 2, 1°,—It may pa followed by a second καί; thus καὶ γὰρ...
καί = “for both....and” “ for....as well as” (Xen. Anab. 1, 9°).
(d) ᾿Αλλὰ γάρ, “ but” 4 enim) = “ but that is not so, for”? or“ but
say no more of it, for”. So Xen. Anab. 3, 2; 3, 2°°.— AXA’ οὐ yap =
but really not (Hat. 957; Xen. Cyr. 2, 11%).
(6) Οὐ yap ἀλλά is an elliptical expression meaning “‘for’’; the
ellipsis after yap being some expression like ‘‘it is not so” or “this
ought not to be”. Thus: μὴ σκῶπτέ μ᾽ ὧδελφ᾽ ᾿ οὐ γὰρ GAN ἔχω
κακῶς, do not mock me, brother, for I am ill (Ar. Ran. 58).
13. γέ (enclitic), at’ intensive particle, serving to emphasise the
preceding word (Lat. quidem), may sometimes be translated by at
least, even, indeed, just; but in most cases is best rendered by
emphasising the a word or giving it a prominent eat in the
sentence. >
Χειμῶνός γε ὄντος, οἵου heart the winter being just as you say = during so
severe a winter as you say (Xen. Anab. 5, 8%). Αὐτῷ ἑνί ye ἀνδρί, and indeed
to himself (Xen. Anab. 1, 6°).—It is found particularly with pronouns: as
ὅς ye, who = Lat. qui quidem ; ἔγωγε, I for my part. So ἐπείγε; just because.
Very often γέ is inserted between the article and its noun, or
between the preposition and its noun: thus of ye ἀγαθοί, σύν ye τοῖς
ἀγαθοῖς. So γέ may also be separated from the word it emphasises by
μέν or δέ, as ὁ δέ ye σοφός. .
14, Γοῦν (= ye οὖν, postpositive), at any rate, at least, then, in truth
(Lat. certe).
Σὺ δέ μοι δοκεῖς τἀναντία τῆς φιλοσοφίας ἀπολελαυκέναι" ζῇς γοῦν οὕτως,
ὡς οὐδ᾽ ἂν εἷς δοῦλος ὑπὸ δεσπότῃ διαιτώμενος μείνειε, you (Socrates) seem to
have enjoyed the opposite from philosophy ; at least, you live in a way in which
no slave would continue to live with his master (Xen. Mem. 1, 6°; 4; 3").
15, Aai, an Attic colloquial particle (postpositive), used only in
urgent questions and in the formulas τί δαί; (= “what then?” or
“why then ?”) and (less frequently) πῶς δαί; (‘‘ how then?” or “ how
now?"), Xen. Cyr. 5, 18. - Ar. Nub. 1266.—Compare δή.
16. Aé (postpositive), but, and, usually does not introduce any-
thing contrary, but merely something else. or something new ; in
numberless cases it only serves to, connect a sentence with what
344 PARTICLES 2371
precedes (see 2370), and is then seldom rendered by but; usually it
is equivalent to and, and very often it need not be translated at all.—
For ov δέ we usually find οὐ μέντοι to avoid confusion with ovdé.—For
μέν....δέ, see below 48 (B).
17.. Δή (postpositive), an emphatic particle, has a variety of
meanings. |
(a) Originally temporal, it may mean now, already, just. 7
Ὃ πατὴρ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ πάλαι δὴ...ἐτετελευτήκεσαν αὐτῷ, his father
and mother had long since (= already long ago) been dead (Xen. Cyr, 8, 7).
Ta viv δὴ γεγενημένα, the things which have just now occurred (Xen. Anab.
7, 1%). Ar. Ran. 604. -
After a temporal clause, δή often follows the first word of the
principal clause (= just or just then); as ἐπεὶ.... βασιλεὺς ἤκουσεν.....
ἐνταῦ7α δὴ ἀθροίζει, κιτιλ. (Xen. Anab. 1, 105).
All commands or requests are made more urgent by adding δή.
Thus: λέγε δή, say it then or do say it or say it, pray (Xen. Cyr. 8,
4%); ἔχε δή, just wait (Plat. Gorg. 470"); Xen. Anab. 2, 21°; Xen.
Cyr. 1, 3°.
So δή is found in questions expecting an immediate answer; as τί
δὴ (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3!°).—For δαί similarly used, see above 2371, 14.
In Homer and in lyric poetry δή may stand first in the
sentence (mostly in the forms δὴ yap and δὴ τότε).
(Ὁ) As a particle emphasising a word or a thought or even a whole
sentence, δή may be rendered by of cowrse, naturally, evidently, indeed,
really.
‘Yyieva καὶ ἰσχὺς καὶ κάλλος καὶ πλοῦτος δή (and also riches, of cowrse, Plat.
Meno 87°). Οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει; "Exes δή, is it not so ?—Of cowrse it is (Plat. Apol.
27°). Δῆλον δή, δῆλα δή, it is quite clear, evidently (Plat. Gorg. 478”; Rep.
387°).
So, often with superlatives and words expressing number or
quantity ; κράτιστος δή, the very greatest (Xen. Anab. 1, 97°) ; πολλὰ δὴ
καὶ καλὰ ἔργα (Plat. Menex. 239°).
(c) Very often δή adds emphasis to other particles and to pro-
nouns; as εἰ δή, if really ; dre δή, just when; ὡς δή, ἵνα δή, just that ;
οὕτως δή, Just so; ὃς δή, just the one who; ὅστις δή, quicunque, ete.—
Καὶ δὴ καί, and also........ in particular, and also....... of course (Hat.
1, 29; Plat. Phaedo 59").
For δή in δήποτε, ete. see ποτέ,
2371 PARTICLES 345
(4) To δέ is sometimes added δή to emphasise the thought; as εἷς
δὲ δὴ εἶπε, but one even said en Anab, 1, 81:4; 7, 18). So ἀλλὰ δή
(Xen. Anab. 6, 8:5).
(e) Asa particle of inference, δή means therefore, accordingly, hence.
"Ἐλεγόν (reves) ὅτι κατίδοιεν στράτευμα, καὶ νύκτωρ πολλὰ πυρὰ φαίνοιντο.
Ἐδόκει δὴ τοῖς στρατηγοῖς οὐκ ἀσφαλὲς εἶναι διασκηνοῦν, some said that they
had seen an army and that many fires had appeared in the night. It seemed
therefore unsafe to the soldiers to encamp separately (Xen. Anab. 4, 4'°).—So
δή is often used in transitions referring to something preceding already
settled; as Φεραύλᾶς μὲν δὴ οὕτως εἶπεν: ἀνίσταντο δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι πολλοί,
Pheraulas then spoke ; and many others stood up (Xen. Cyr. 2, 315).
(7) For δή added to indefinite relatives, see under οὖν below.
18, Δῆθεν, as it appears, mostly ironically, forsooth, of something
pretended or only apparent (Thuc. 1; 92; Xen. Cyr. 4, 6°).
19, Δήπου (postpositive, sometimes written δή που), doubtless, I
suppose, surely ; often used -ironically. Οὐ δήπου od εἶ τῶν τοιούτων
ἀνθρώπων, you swrely are not one of those men (Xen. Mem. 2, 3').—
Δήπουθεν is a stronger form (Dem. 14, 34).
20. Δῆτα (postpositive), a stronger form of δή, of course, surely ;
as οὐ δῆτα, no, surely not (Plat. Crito 49°).—With questions, as πῶς
δῆτα; how then ? (Plat. Gorg. 469°).
21, Διότι. (a) Causal (= διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι), because, see 2015, 3.—(d)
Declarative (rarely), that = ὅτι, see 2015, 3.—(c) Relative and
indirectly interrogative, wherefore (Xen. Cyr. 8, 418).
22, Ἐάν (= εἰ ἄν), if, conditional particle, see 2090, 2098, 2109 ---
For ἐάν in certain indirect questions, see 2034.—For ἐάν τε.... ἐάν re,
see ἘΠ. —For ἐὰν καί and καὶ ἐάν, see 2133.
23, Ei. (1) Conditional particle, vf, see 2090.—For εἰ in certain
indirect questions, see 2034.—For εἰ καί and καὶ εἰ, see 2133.—For «i
= because, see 2074.—For εἰ, whether, in indirect questions, see 2024.
(2) Ei μή, if not, unless, Lat. nisi. Without a verb after a nega-
tion = except (Xen. Anab. 1, 5°; 2, 113), see 2131. So ὅτι μή (see
66 (6) below).
(3) Ei μὴ εἰ, except if, Lat. nisi si, sometimes occurs (Plat. Gorg.
480"). See 2131.
(4) Ei μὴ dpa, unless indeed, see 6 above.
(5) Ei μὴ διὰ, except for, see 2131.
(6) Πλὴν εἰ, see πλήν below and 2131.
346 PARTICLES 2371.
(7) Et τις (τὴ) is often found for ὅστις ; aS ἔκαιν καὶ χιλὸν καὶ εἴ τι ~
ἄλλο χρήσιμον ἦν, they burned all the fodder and whatever (=if ann
thing) else was of use (Xen. Anab. 1, 6°).
24. Ei γάρ and εἴθε, particles of wishing, O that, see 1999, 4; ‘so in
poetry εἰ (2001).
25, Elos, etws, Hom. for ἕως (2161).
26. Εἴπερ, with the indicative, means if really (=f, as ts really
the case), Lat. si quiden. Xen. Anab. 1, 7°. ;
27. Eis ὅ κε, Hom. = ἕως.
28. Εἶτα and ἔπειτα, then, thereupon, used eceperitil and in
enumerations ; after πρῶτον μέν often = in the second place ; even
when μέν precedes they are usually found without δέ, as in Dem, 9: Ay
—Use with participles, see 2270, 2.—In ironical questions, εἶτα (ἔπειτα,
κἀπειτα) = and then ? (Dem. 1, 24).
29. Eire....cire (sive....sive), whether....or. Used in disjunctive con-
ditional clauses (2118); rarely one εἴτε only is found as in Plat.
Leg. 907°; occasionally we find εἴτε....ἤ as in Plat. Phaedr. 277°—
For ¢ire....cire in indirect questions, see 2024.
30. “Eel (1) Temporal; when, after (2161); with regard to the
future, ἐπάν or ἐπήν, Hdt. ἐπεάν, Hom. ἐπεί κε (2166) ; ἐπεὶ τάχιστα, as
soon as (Xen. Hell. 2, 3!'!)—(2) Causal: since, seeing that (2071).—
(3) Coneessive, although (2135).
31, Ἐπειδή (from ἐπεί and dy), temporal particle, since, after (2161) ; ;
with regard to the future, ἐπειδάν, which is more frequent than ἐπάν or
ἐπήν (2166) ; ἐπειδὴ τάχιστα, as soon as (2161).—Rarely ἐπειδή is causal
(2071).
32, "Eore, wntil (2161), not in Homer.
99, Etre, poetic and Ionic for ὅτε, when, since, temporal and
causal (2161, 2071).—In Homer occasionally = jire, as,
like as.
34. Ἕως, until, as long as, Hom. εἵως and «fos; see 2161, 2172. ᾿ ᾿
35. Ἦ (at the beginning of the sentence). (1) Truly, really; usually
7 μήν (Hom, ἧ μέν) or ἦ τοι (Xen. Anab. 6, 61"); rarely alone (as Xen.
Cyr. 5, 415) ;—for ἦ yap, see 12 (δ) above ;—#ov is milder than ἦ μήν
(Xen. Hell. 6, 548). (2) For ἦ interrogative, Lat. -né, see 2008. —
36. Ἤ (Hom. also ἠέ), or, see 2008, 2024 ;—7....7, either....or,
often the first 7 is strengthened by τοι, thus: #rou...7.
2371 PARTICLES 347
37. Ἤ, thin, after comparatives (1341). Also after words expres-
sing difference, like ἄλλος, ἕτερος, ἐναντίος, διάφορος, διαφέρειν and —
like. Πολὺ oi Γ᾿ λύγοι. ἀντίοι εἰσὶν ἢ οὺς ἐγὼ ἥκόυον (Xen. Anab. 6, 6*4
Anab. 3, 4**).—For ἢ κατά, see 1345. —For ἢ ὥστε, see 2224.—For 7 ‘
sometimes omitted after certain comparatives, see 1346.—For ἄλλο τι
(7), see 2008, 4.
_ 38. Ἦμος Hom. = ἡνίκα, when, with the indicative.
" 39. Ἠύτε, Hom., as, like as.
40. Ἡνίκα and δηνίκα, at the time when, when, see 2161.
41. Θήν (enclitic), epic, very rare in Attic, Aesch. Pro. 930, surely
now, often sarcastic (1. 12, 620; 10, 365).
42. ᾿Ιδέ, and, see ἠμέν and ἠδέ under μέν.
43. Ἵνα. (a) Asa relative, where.
Πατρὶς γάρ ἐστι πᾶσ᾽ iv’ ἂν πράττῃ τις εὖ, one’s country is every land ishere
one does well (Ar. Plut. 1151). Soph. Aj. 386. (b) As a final particle, that,
in order that (2037) ;—iva ri (sc. γένηται) = why ? (Plat. Apol. 26 ).
44, Kai, and, also, even, Lat. et ; τέ (enclitic), and, Lat. -que.
Τῶν σωμάτων θηλῦνομένων καὶ ai Ψψῦχαὶ πολὺ appwordrepa γίγνονται,
when the bodies. become weakened the minds also become weaker (Xen. Occ. 4, 2).
Ἔστιν ἀξίᾳ ἡ yopa καὶ ὑπὸ πάντων ἐπαινεῖσθαι, ov μόνον ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν, thé
land is worthy of being praised even by everybody, not only by us (Plat. Menex.
237°).—When there are more than two members connected they are all con-
nected with each other by καί; as ᾿Αγησιλάῳ ἑαυτὸν καὶ τὴν γυναῖκα καὶ τὰ
τέκνα καὶ τὴν δύναμιν ἐνεχείρισε (Xen. Ages. 3, 3).—For καὶ αὐτός and καὶ
οὗτος, see 1428, 1431, 1478.
(1) Καὶ... καί, both....and, the two members considered separately.
“Apxovres μέν εἰσι καὶ of βουκόλοι τῶν βοῶν καὶ oi ἱπποφορβοὶ τῶν
ἵππων, herdsmen are rulers of oxen and horse-feeders of horses (Xen. Cyr.
1, 15; Plat. Euthyphr. 7°).
(2) Te in prose is mostly re....re to connect clauses, and re καί to.
connect thoughts or words (both... .and, not only....but also, on the
one hand....on the other hand).
Τοῦ σώματος αὐτός τε οὐκ ἠμέλει, τοὺς τ᾽ ἀμελοῦντας οὐκ ἐπήνει, he did not
neglect the body and did not praise those that did (Xen. Mem. 1, 24; Anab.
3, 2%). ᾿Εθήρευον ἀπὸ ἵππου, ὁπότε γυμνάσαι ἑαυτόν τε καὶ τοὺς ἵππους βούλοιτο,
he hunted on horseback whenever he wished to exercise himself and the horses.
(Xen. Anab. 1, 27).—For ἄλλως re καί, see 3 above.
(3) Kai often stands between an adjective of quantity or number
(like πολύς and éAéyos) and another adjective relating to the same sub-
stantive.
348 PARTICLES 2371
Πολλοὶ yap καὶ ἀγαθοὶ φίλοι, many good friends = many friends and
good ones (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2)*),—Sometimes we find re καί between πολύς
(ὀλίγος) and a following adjective; as πολλᾶς re καὶ εὐδαίμονας καὶ μεγάλᾶς
πόλεις, many rich and large cities (Xen. Anab. 3, 2533),
(4) Kai....d€ means and....also (even), here δέ meaning and and καί
also (even).
Δαρεῖος Κῦρον σατράπην ἐποίησε καὶ στρατηγὸν δὲ ἀπέδειξε, he made him
satrap and even (also) appointed him commander (Xen. Anab. 1, 17; 2, 65).--
But in this sense double καί is also used with a particle intervening as
καὶ δή καί, and of cowrse also, and in particular (Plat. Phaedo 59°; ἨΔδῦ. 1,
29); καὶ ἔτι καὶ viv, and even now yet.
(5) Before superlatives καί strengthens, like the Latin vel ; as καὶ
μάλιστα, and most particularly (Xen. Cyr. 2, μὴ; ; καὶ μωρότατον, even
very foolishly (Xen. Anab. 3, 253).
(6) After words of likeness, καί, like Latin atque, is equivalent to
as,
Avdol νόμοις παραπλησίοις χρῶνται καὶ Ἕλληνες, the Lydians use
nearly the same laws as the Greeks (Hdt. 1, 94); ὁμοίως καὶ πρίν (Thue.
7, 28*).
(7) In shehase of comparison (in English often = as....80) καί, also,
is used in both clauses; often it is used i in the relative and omitted in
the demonstrative clause.
Aci ὑμᾶς ὥσπερ καὶ τἴμῶν μεθέξετε, οὕτω καὶ τῶν κινδύνων μετέχειν, a8
you share the honours, so you ought also to share the dangers (Xen. Hell. 2,
4°), "Oo οἶδα κἀγώ, πάντα ἐπιστήσει, whatever I know you also will know
(Soph. Oed. Col. 53).—So arise the formulas εἴ ris καὶ ἄλλος, ὥς τις καὶ ἄλλος,
εἴποτε καὶ ἄλλοτε, where καί is not translated; as εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος ἀνὴρ, καὶ
Κῦρος ἄξιός ἐστι θαυμάζεσθαι, for Cyrus, if any man in the world, is worthy of
admiration (Xen. Cyr. 5, 1°); Anab. 2, 6°; 6, 4!
(8) In English, clauses expressing a sudden or decisive action inter
vening on what precedes, are introduced by when. In Greek such
clauses are usually connected with what precedes by simple καί,
Οὔπω τούτω δύ᾽ ἢ τρεῖς δρόμους περιεληλυθότε ἤστην κ αὶ εἰσέρχεται Κλειν-
ἰᾶς, they had not yet taken more than two or three turns when Cleinias
entered (Plat. Euthyd. 273"); Thuc. 1, 50°; Xen. Anab. 2, 1%. For οὐ
φθάνω... καί, see 2288.—Rarely does the Greek use a temporal conjunction in
such cases, as in Xen. 1, 81 (ἡνίκα).
(9) Occasionally we find clauses contrasted by ré....d€: Soph. Phil.
1312.
(10) In epic poetry ré is often found with conjunctions ;
as μέν, dé, οὐδέ, καί, yap, dre ;—also with other particles,
2371 PARTICLES 349
especially in ὅς pa re (Od. 12, 39) ;—also with πέρ ;—with
}, really ;—in questions, τ᾿ dpa; with relatives, as ὅς. τε.
In Hat. ὅσον τε = about (Hdt. 2, 71); in Attic ὥστε, ἅτε,
οἷός τε are relics of this early extensive use of τέ. In all
the above cases τέ cannot be translated.
45. Καίπερ (Hom. xai....7ep), although, always with a participle
(2274).
46, Καίτοι, ‘and yet, although, always introduces an independent
clause (Xen. Mem. 2, 8:5).
47. Μά particle used in swearing (1603—1604).
48. Μέν (postpositive) originally = μήν, indeed, truly.
(A) (1) The word is used alone with its original meaning, indeed,
truly, in a few isolated cases; as in Xen. Anab. 1, 7°; 7, 6.
(2) It is always found for μήν in the phrases: πάνυ μὲν οὖν, μάλιστα
μὲν οὖν, κομιδῇ μὲν οὖν, yes, most assuredly ; παντάπᾶσι μὲν οὖν, yes, by
all means; καὶ μὲν δή, and surely yet; ἀλλὰ μὲν δή, but surely yet
(Plat. Gorg. 471*); οὐ μὲν δή, yet surely not (Xen. Anab. 2, 2°); οὐ μὲν
οὖν, no, indeed not (Plat. Symp. 201°).
(3) The expression μὲν οὖν may mean according to the context
either yes, indeed or no, rather (Plat. Phaedr. 280"; Crito 44°).
(4) Μὲν οὖν, like μὲν δή (17, 6), is very often used in transitions,
now (Xen. Anab. 2, 5).
5. In Homer and Herodotus we find the formulas 7 μέν,
οὗ μέν, μὴ μέν in strong assertions. Homer has much
oftener καὶ μέν than καὶ μὲν δή.
(6) In questions μέν is equivalent to μήν (Ar. Av. 1214; Plat.
Charm. 153 ).
(B) (1) The ordinary use of μέν is in connection with a following
δέ or μέντοι, One particle belonging to one thought or sentence, and the’
other particle belonging to another, thus forming a contrast (pév.....d€,
pav.....evto). This is a favourite Greek idiom. Occasionally this
may be translated by indeed.....but or on the one hand.....on the
other ; but usually μέν is left untranslated, and δέ is rendered by but
or and.
Ὁ μὲν Bios βραχύς, ἡ δὲ τέχνη μακρά, life indeed is short, but art is long
(Lucian, Herm. 63). For ὁ pév.....6 δέ, see 1377.
In cases of anaphora (the repetition of the same word in two
350 PARTICLES ᾿ 2371
succeeding sentences) μὲν, ...δέ are generally αάροῦα; δέ here = but
(and) also,
Σύνειμι μὲν θεοῖς, σύνειμι δ᾽ ἀνθρώποις τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς, I associate with the
gods and also with good men (Xen. Mem. 2, 1535, Anab. 7, a
(2) Instead of δέ or μέντοι, the particles ἀλλά, ἀτάρ, μήν, οὐ μὴν
ἀλλά, τοίνυν are sometimes used to correspond to péev.—Sometimes the
contrasted thought is expressed without any of the above par biel in
some other way. .
Homer has, besides δέ, also ἀλλά, ἀτάρ, αὐτάρ, ad, αὖτε,
and καί, corresponding to μέν.
(3) If more than two members are contrasted, only the first has
μέν, all the others δέ.
(4) Within a contrast indicated by μὲν .....δέ, there may be another
contrast also indicated by pév.....d€. Ὃ μὲν ἀνὴρ τοιαῦτα μὲν πεποίηκε,
τοιαῦτα δὲ λέγει: ὑμῶν δὲ σὺ πρῶτος ἀπόφηναι γνώμην (Xen. Anab.
1.65.
(5) When two relative or conditional clauses are contrasted, double
μέν....μέν is followed by δέ....δέ; but the second δέ is usually omitted.
Οἷα μὲν ἕκαστα ἐμοὶ φαίνεται, τοιαῦτα μὲν ἔστιν ἐμοί: ola δὲ σοί,
τοιαῦτα δὲ αὖ σοί (Plat. Theaet. 1625). Dem. 2, 18.
6, Clauses are often co-ordinated by μὲν....δέ when in English one
is subordinated to the other by a conjunction like while.
Αἰσχρόν ἐστιν τοὺς μὲν ἐμπόρους τηλικαῦτα πελάγη διαπερᾶν ἕνεκα τοῦ
πλείω ποιῆσαι τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν οὐσίᾶν, τοὺς ὃ ἐ νεωτέρους μηδὲ κατὰ γῆν πορείᾶς
ὑπομένειν ἐπὶ τῷ βελτίω καταστῆσαι τὴν αὑτῶν διάνοιαν, it is shameful that
merchants travel throvgh so many seas to increase their wealth while young
men, etc. (Isoc. 1, 6; here αἰσχρόν does not refer to the first but to the —
second clause). Diet: 24,31. Xen. Mem. 1, 2°.
(7) On the other hand, an apodosis to a relative or conditional
clause is occasionally introduced by δέ = then ; asin Il. 1,193; 1, 187.
(8) The member with δέ may be omitted, especially after ἐγὼ μέν,
1 atleast, I for my part.
Ἐλεύθερον εἶναι ἐγὼ μὲν οἶμαι ἀντάξιον εἶναι τῶν πάντων χρημάτων, I,
for my part, consider that to be free is worth all riches (Xen. Hell. 4, 1**).
(9) From 7 and μέν and δέ are derived jue and ἠδέ,"
and, Ἢμέν is epic, often found with ἠδέ corresponding.
(= τε....καῦ. ἨἮἨδέ is found alone often in epic poetry,
and occasionally in the on (mostly ἌΘΡΟΥΝ
Hom: also ἰδέ, and
2371 PARTICLES 351
Ὁ 60) Position of μέν and 8é.—When several postpositive particles
τους μέν and δέ come first; as’ ὅσα μὲν δὴ.... ἐγένετο (Xen. Anab. 4, 11).
—When the words contrasted are nouns with their articles, μέν and
δέ come between the article and the noun; if the contrasted words
are prepositional phrases, μέν and δέ come after the preposition.
Ta μὲν σώματα...., ἡ Se ψύχή (Isoc. 1,12); εἰς μὲν rods ὑβρίζοντες, τοῖς
ὃ ἐ δουλεύοντες (Isoc. 4, 151).—In cases like τοῦτον δὲ τὴν νύκτα μὲν δήσετε,
τὴν δὲ ἡμέρᾶν ἀφήσετε (Xen. Anab. 5, 852), the position οὗ μέν gives a stronger
emphasis to the noun ; similarly δέ in Xen. Anab. 4, 8': ἐπορεύθησαν
σταθμοὺς τρεῖς " τῇ πρώτῃ ὃ ὲ ἡμέρᾳ ἀφέκοντο, κιτιλ.
49, Μέντοι (postpositive, from μὲν = μήν + τοί) : in narrative, truly,
certainly ; in answers, of course, indeed ; in questions with οὐ expecting
an affirmative answer, then; in contrasts, yet, however, often with
preceding μέν.
Μέμνησαι ἐκεῖνα ;...... Ναὶ μὰ Δία, μέμνημαι μέντοι τοιαῦτα ἀκούσᾶς σου.
do you remember those things ὕ......... Yes, by Zeus, I certainly remember
hearing such remarks from you (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6°). Οὐ σὺ μέντοι Ὁμήρου
ἐπαινέτης εἶ; are you not then a praiser of Homer? (Plat. Prot. 8095"). Φιλο-
σόφῳ μὲν ἔοικας " ..... ἴσθι μέντοι ἀνόητος ὦν, you seem like a philosopher,.......
but know that you are foolish (Xen. Anab. 2, 113), Xen. Anab. 1, 9° (truly).
50. Μέχρι, ἄχρι, wntil, 2161; as preposition, wp to, 1862, 1.
51. My, not, as a. negative, 2334.. In final clauses, 2037. After
verbs of fearing,-2062; without a principal clause, 2067. For μή and
μὴ ov With the subjunctive = perhaps, perhaps not. For μή in questions,
2008.
52. Μηδέ, see οὐδέ below.
53. Μήν (postpositive), partly strengthening, in trash (Il. 23, 410) ;
—oftener adversative, yet, however (Plat, Tim. 20"). In questions, then ;
as τίνος μὴν ἕνεκα ἐμανθάνετε τοξεύειν ; (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6%). Ti μήν; what
then ? in Attic = of course (Plat. Leg. 6905. For ἦ μήν see 2371, 35.
᾿Αλλὰ μήν (at vero), yet truly,-and καὶ μήν (et vero, et sane), and
yet, nay more, introduce objections or merely something additional
(Xen. Anab. 3, 17; 1, 918; Ar. Ran. 106).—For οὐ μήν after μέν, and
οὗ μὴν ἀλλά, see below under οὐ, 2371, 67 (/).
54, Μήτε, see οὔτε below under οὐ in 2371, 67 (ὦ).
55. Μή τί ye (δή), not to say, to say nothing of, Lat. nedwm (Dem.
21, 148). See μὴ ὅτι under οὐ in 2371, 67 (ἃ).
56. Μῶν (= μὴ οὖν), interrogative particle expecting the answer iat
like Lat. mwm (2008),
352 PARTICLES 2371
57. Nat, yes, swrely, in answers. For vai μά, see 1603—1604.—For
other ways of expressing yes, see 2010.
58, NH, see 1603—1604. —
59. Nov, now, at present. After a conditional sentence (2089), viv
δέ means but then, but now, Lat. nunc vero (Dem. 1, 9).
Niv or viv (enclitic, weakened from viv), used inferentially, then,
therefore, with an imperative synonymously with δή (as Xen. Anab. as
276). See τοίνυν.
In Homer viv and vi are not confined to the imperative.
60. Ota, οἷον, with participles (2271).
61, “Opws, nevertheless, notwithstanding, with participles, 2275.
62. Ὅπως, as, that, in order that. As an indefinite relative adverb:
Οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως ἡμάρτετε, m no way have you erred (Dem. 18, 208).—
Use as final conjunction, 2037; with verbs of striving, 2050.—For
ὅπως without a principal clause, 2058.—For οὐχ ὅπως, not only, see
67 below.—For ὅπως declarative, that, see 2015, 2.
63, Ὅσῳ....τοσούτῳ, the....the (1814).
64, “Ore and ὁπότε, when, as, 2161 :--μέμνημαι ὅτε, 2165.—For ὅτε,
ὁπότε, ἐπειδή, Sometimes causal = because, since, whereas, see 2071.
65. ‘Oré, distinguished by the accent from ὅτε; found in ὁτὲ δέ,
but sometimes ; and in été peév....6ré δέ, Lat. modo....modo, now....now,
sometimes....somelimes, at one time....at another time. Equivalent
expressions are ποτὲ μέν....ποτὲ δέ, and τοτὲ μέν....τοτὲ δέ.
66, Ὅτι. Declarative, that, 2213; with verbs of perception, 2302 ;
causal, because, 2071 ; for ὅτι with superlatives, 1359; for μὴ ὅτι, not
only, 67 below.—’On τί; 56. ἐστιν, for what reason ? (Dem. 23, 214).—
“Orin, because, colloquial for ὅτι, as in Ar. Nwb. 1046; see τίη.
(a) The expressions δῆλον ὅτι (sometimes written δηλονότι), it is clear
that, evidently, clearly, and (εὖ) οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, I (well) know that, certainly,
are almost used like adverbs, and are added to or inserted in the
sentence.
Ἃ ἐπίστανται δῆλον ὅτι, with regard to what they know (they are wise), it
is clear (Xen. Mem. 4, 6"). Πάρειμι δ᾽ ἄκων οὐχ ἑκοῦσιν, ofS ὅτι, I am
unwilling here to unwilling hearers, I know (Soph. Ant. 276).
(6) Ὅτι μή after a negative = εἰ μή, except (67 below and 2131); as
οὐκ ἐπὶ θεωρίαν πώποτε ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ἐξῆλθες ὅτι μὴ ἅπαξ εἰς Ἰσθμόν, you
never went out to see the games except once to the Isthmus (Plat. Crito
52"), .
2371 PARTICLES 353
(ὁ) Like the Latin quod, ὅτι sometimes means that = as far as this
as concerned.
Εἴποιμ᾽ ἂν ἔγωγε ὅτι τὰ μὲν ἄλλα ὀρθῶς ἤκουσας, Gre δὲ καὶ ἐμὲ οἴει εἰπεῖν
τοῦτο, παρήκουσας, I should say that you heard the other things right, but that
when you think I said this, you heard wrong (Plat. Prot. 330°). Oftener ὅ
is so used, as in Xen. Hier. 6, 12 (6 δ᾽ ἐζήλωσας.....).
(4) Homer also has simple 6 in the sense of that; as
in Od. 3, 146 and 166 (2071, 2; 2015, 5). Originally ὅτι was
identical with 6 τι.
67. οὐ, not, treated in detail with μή in 2334—2365.—Oi, no, as in
Xen. Mem. 6, 63, see 2010, 3.—In questions = dp’ οὐ or οὐκοῦν, as in
Xen. Anab. 3, 12°; see 2008.
(α) Μόνον οὐ, μόνον οὐχί (lit. only not, Lat. tantwm non), almost, all
but.
Ois σὺ μόνον ov προσκυνεῖς, whom you all but worship (Ar. Vesp.
517).—"Ogor οὐ (also followed by ἤδη), ὅσον οὔπω, almost, with reference to
time. Τὸν ὅσον οὐ παρόντα πόλεμον, the all but present war (Thue. 1, 36%).
*Erépxovra καὶ ὅσον ot rw πάρεισιν (Thue. 6, 348). Xen. Hell. 6, 215,
(6) Οὐ (or μὴ) μόνον....ἀλλὰ καί, not only.....but also, Lat. non solum
....8ed etiam ; as in Xen. Mem. 1, 6*; Aeschin. 3, 65.
(c) "AAN οὐ, ἀλλὰ μή, but not, and not ; as Isoc. 1, 30; Xen. Heil.
7,4.
(4) These expressions are elliptical :—
Οὐχ ὅτι... ἀλλὰ καί, μὴ ὅτι... «ἀλλὰ καί, not only....but also.
Οὐχ ὅτι μόνος ὁ Κρίτων ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ ἦν, ἀλλὰ καὶ οἱ φίλοι αὐτοῦ, not only
was Crito himself wnmolested, but also his friends (Xen. Mem. 2, 9°). Μὴ
ὅτι θεὸς ἀλλὰ καὶ ἄνθρωποι, not only a god, but also men (Xen. Cyr. 7, 2%").
Xen. Hier. 8, 5.
Οὐχ ὅπως... ἀλλὰ καί, not only not....but also. “H yp οὐχ ὅπως
τινα καρπὸν ἤνεγκεν ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ ὕδωρ ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ ἐκ τῶν φρεάτων
ἐπέλιπεν, not only did the earth bear no fruit in that year, but the water in
the wells also failed (Dem. 50, 61). Lys. 19, 31. Dem. 18, 271 (without
και
δ.
Οὐχ (μὴ) ὅπω »-.... ἄλλ᾽ οὐδέ or μηδέ, not only not.,...but not even.
Οὐχ ὅπως τῆς κοινῆς ἐλευθερίᾶς μετέχομεν ἀλλ᾽ οὐ ὃ ἐ δουλείᾶς μετρίᾶς ἠξιώ-
θημεν τυχεῖν, not only have we no share in the common liberty, but we are
not even deemed worthy of meeting with moderate slavery (Isoc. 14, 3). Μὴ
ὅπως ὀρχεῖσθαι ἐν ῥυθμῷ ἀλλ᾽ οὐ δ᾽ ὀρθοῦσθαι ἐδύνασθε, not only were you
not able to dance in measure, but you were not able even to stand straight
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 319), Χρὴ..... ἐν οὐχ ὅπως ζημιοῦν ἀλλὰ
354 PARTICLES 2371
μη δ᾽ ἀτιμάζειν, the state ought not only not punish the man who is wrong in
his opinion, but ought not even to degrade him (Thue. 3, 427).
Ov6é....49 ὅτι, not even.....much less (not to say). Διὰ τὸν χειμῶνα
οὐδὲ πλεῖν, μὴ ὅτι ἀναιρεῖσθαι τοὺς avdpas δυνατὸν ἦν, on account of the
storm it was not even possible to put to sea, much less to rescue the men (Xen.
Hell. 2, 335). Xen. Symp. 2, 26. Plat. Rep. 398°.
Of the above, the expressions beginning with οὐ stand for οὐκ ἐρῶ
(λέγω) ὅπως, 1 will (do) not say that: those beginning with μή stand
for some expression like μὴ εἴπω ὅτι, not to say or μὴ εἴπῃς ὅτι OF μὴ
εἴπῃ τις ὅτι.
(6) Οὐ μήν after μέν = οὐ μέντοι (Isoc, 4, 18).
(f) Οὐ μὴν ἀλλά and οὐ μέντοι ἀλλά, nevertheless. These are ex-
plained by the omission of something before ἀλλά which is contrasted
with what follows.
Ὁ immos....pixpov ἐκεῖνον ἐξετραχήλισεν - ov μὴν ἀλλὰ ἐπέμεινεν ὁ Κῦρος,
the horse almost threw him over its head; nevertheless Cyrus kept his seat
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 4°; 1.6. yet it did not throw him, but [= nevertheless] he kept
his seat). Example of the uncommon οὐ μέντοι ἀλλά, Thue. 5, 43°.—Compare
ov yap ἀλλά, above, 12 (e).
(7) Μᾶλλον ἢ οὐ is sometimes found for simple μᾶλλον 7, rather than
(instead of), the οὐ being superfluous, Πόλιν ὅλην διαφθεῖραι μᾶλλον
ἢ οὐ τοὺς αἰτίους, to destroy a whole city rather than (instead of) the
guilty (Thue. 3, 862).
68, οὐδέ (μηδέ), connecting negatives,
(a) And not, nor, connecting a negative member with a preceding
negative member. Οὐδεμία ἦν ἐλπὶς tipwpids, οὐ ὃ ἐ ἄλλη cwrnpia ἐφ ai-
vero, there was no hope of aid nor did any other means of safety appear
(Thue. 3, 20).
In poetry, especially in Homer, οὐδέ (μηδέ) may also thus
occur after an affirmative clause; also in Herodotus.
Ἤμβροτες οὐ δ᾽ ἔτυχες, thou hast missed, nor hast thou reached
thine aim (Il. 5, 287). Od. 4, 825. Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1434.
Hat. 1, 82}.
In Attic prose, after an affirmative clause, and not is καὶ ov or GAN
ov (Thue. 2, 5’). |
(ὁ) Not even (Lat. ne....quidem), is οὐδέ. ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐδὲ τούτων στερή-
σονται, but not even of these shall they be deprived (Xen. Anab. 1, 4°).
Xen. Symp. 6, 2 ;—see below καὶ οὐδέ (9).
(c) Οὐδ᾽ ὥς (οὕτως) = not even thus, not even then (Xen. Anab. 1,
821; Lys. 1, 14). |
2371 PARTICLES 355
(d) Οὐδ᾽ εἰ = not even af (Xen. Cyr. 2, 18),
(e) Οὐδὲ....δέ, and not, nor indeed, or simply nor (Xen. Anab, 1, 8°).
(f) οὐδέ....οὐδέ = not even....nor (yet) or and not. ;
Σὺ δέ ye οὐδὲ ὁρῶν γιγνώσκεις οὐδὲ ἀκούων μέμνησαι, you do not even know,
nor do you remember (Xen. Anab. 8, 157). In οὐδέ.... οὐδέ, the first οὐδέ has
adverbial force, ‘‘ not even” ;—compare οὔτε..... οὔτε, neither....nor, below (i).
(g) Καὶ οὐδέ, and not even, nor even (Isoc. 19, 40).
(A) Οὐδὲ μέντοι (Xen. 4, 155), and οὐ μὲν οὐδέ (Thue. 1, 3°), and οὐ
μέντοι οὐδέ (Plat, Prot. 331°), all mean yet (however).....not, but......
not.
(i) Neither....nor is not oddé....0dd€, but οὔτ ε....ο ὔτε (see below,
2371, 72).
69. Οὐκοῦν and οὔκουν (from οὐκ and οὖν); in the former οὖν, therefore,
is accented, in the latter the negative.
(a) Οὐκοῦν, therefore, then, accordingly.
Τί φήσομεν ;.....ἢ τοὺς ἀμύνεσθαι κελεύοντας πόλεμον ποιεῖν φήσομεν ;
οὐκοῦν ὑπόλοιπον δευλεύειν, what shall we βαῃ ?.....shall we declare that
men who are bidding us to defend ourselves are making war? therefore it is
left for us to be slaves (Dem. 8, 59). Plat. Rep. 3534,
(6) Οὐκοῦν as an interrogative particle (“not therefore ?’’),
expecting the answer “ yes’’ (see 2008). This is the original use of
the word. In this sense some also write οὔκουν.
(c) Οὔκουν, therefore not, swrely not, the negative accented (Lat.
non igitur, while οὐκοῦν = nonne igitur ?).
Οὔκουν ἀπολείψομαί γέ σου εἰ τοῦτο λέγεις, I will not therefore leave you
if you say that (Xen. Cyr. 4, 153. “Οἶσθα τι οὖν ἔθνος," ἔφη, “ἐἠλιθιώτερον
ῥαψῳδῶν ;” “Οὐ μὰ τὸν Ac” ἔφη ὁ Nixnparos, "οὔκουν ἔμοιγε doxei,” “do
you then know a sillier tribe than the rhapsodes?”’ ‘‘ No, by Zeus,” said
Niceratus, ‘‘it swrely does not seem so to me” (Xen. Symp. 3, 6).
70. οὖν (postpositive ; Hdt. and Dor. ὦν), therefore, then, consequently.
I. The usual meaning is therefore, then, consequently.
Τούτοις ἥσθη Κῦρος - βούλεται οὖ ν καὶ σὲ τούτων γεύσασθαι, Cyrus enjoyed
these things, therefore he wishes you also to taste of them (Xen. Anab, 1, 95;
1, 5%; 3, 2).
After a parenthetical remark οὖν, then = therefore, like Lat. igitur.
Xen. Anab. 1, δ᾽; Plat. Apol, 29" .----Μὲν οὖν, then ; see 2371, 48 (A) (4).
II, In certain phrases, swrely, in truth, certainly.
(a) Πάνυ μὲν οὖν, μάλιστα μὲν οὖν, κομιδῇ μὲν οὖν, yes, most assuredly ;
356 PARTICLES 2371
παντάπᾶσι μὲν οὖν, yes, by all means ; οὐ μὲν οὖν, no, indeed not ; for
these expressions see 2371, 48 (A) (2).
(Ὁ) Mev οὖν, yes, indeed, or no, indeed ; see 2371, 48 (A) (3).—But
μὲν οὖν in transitions (then) ; see 2371, 48 (A) (4).
(c) ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὖν, but then; see 2371, 1 (c).—A’ οὖν = at any rate,
however tt is certain (Xen. Anab. 1, 213).
III. Attached to indefinite relatives, οὖν (like δή, δήποτε, δή ποτ᾽ οὖν)
makes the indefinite relatives still more indefinite; as ὁστισοὖν, who-
ever, any one who ; ὁπωστιοὖν, in what manner soever ; οὐδ᾽ ὁπωσί(τι)οὖν,
not in any way whatever, not in the least. Plat. Gorg. 516*; Dem. 3,
7; Xen, Anab. 7, 67’.
71. οὕνεκα and ὁθούνεκα (poetic, the latter tragic), because,
sometimes declarative, that. Il. 9, 505; Soph. Phil.
232.—Sometimes rovvexa, for that reason, therefore, is
used as its correlative (J/. 13, 727).
12. οὔτε....οὔτε (μήτε....μήτε), neither....nor.
Ἔργον καλὸν οὔτε θεῖον οὔτε ἀνθρώπινον χωρὶς ἐμοῦ γίγνεται, nO
honourable deed, divine or human, is done without me (Xen. Mem. 2, 133).
Οὔτε ἀποδεδρᾶκᾶσιν....ο ὕτε ἀποπεφεύγᾶσι, they have not fled secretly........
nor have they completely escaped (Xen. Anab. 1, 45. Myre.....unre (Xen.
Eques. 9,11). Oidre...... μήτε (Dem. 19, 149).
(a) Οὔτε (μήτε)....τε = Lat. neque....et, not only not....but also, on
the one hand not....and (but) on the other.
- Οὔτε yap ἐπὶ ξενίᾳ τὸν κήρῦκα ἐδέξαντο, περί τε τῆς βοηθείᾶς οὐδὲν ἀπε-
κρΐναντο, not only did they not show hospitality to the herald, but they gave
no answer to the request for help (Xen. Hell. 6, 439). Xen. Anab. 2, 28;
uw
(Ὁ) Οὔτε....οὐδέ, μήτε.... μηδέ are the negative of τέ.....δέ (see above,
2371, 44 (8)); Thue. 2, 93?; Xen. Anab. 7, 672; Pind. Isth. 2, 44-45.
(c) Οὔτε... .οὐ and μήτε.... μή are poetic (Eur. Or. 41, 1086).
—Rarely τέ οὐ....τέ for οὔτε....οὔτε (Eur. Iph. Tawr. 1367).
73, Οὔτι or οὔ τι, not at all (Plat. Rep. 331°).
14. οὔτοι (μήτοι), swrely not, in nowise (od or μή + τοι; Xen. Mem 1,
410; Aesch, Prom. 625).
75. οφρα, poetic; temporal, until, as long as (2161); final,
that, in order that (2037).
76. Πάρος, formerly, poetic.—Epic also before with the infini- ©
tive.
2371 PARTICLES 357
77. Mep (enclitic, weakened from older πέρι), very, much, just, even,
used to strengthen relatives to which it is attached, as ὅσπερ, just the
one who ; also in εἴπερ, if really = since (2071); ἐπείπερ, since really,
ὅτεπερ, just when, just as.—For καίπερ with participles, see 2074.
In Homer περ is also used with other words.
Γυναικί wep (Od. 11, 441). Πρῶτον rep, for the very first time
(1. 14, 295). "Ev περ ὀνείρῳ (Od. 19, 541; note the position
of wep). Rarely with verbs, as ὡς ἔσεταί περ (Od. 21, 212).—
Several isolated examples in Herodotus (as in 3, 151: doxeuns
περ ἐών) ; in Sophocles only Phil. 1068 ; several in Euripides,
as in Alc. 2; and in Aeschylus, as in Sept. 1038.
78. πΠχήν, except.
(1) As a preposition, except, see 1862.
(2) As a conjunction, except that. -
Διασπείρονται καὶ οἱ Κύρου ἑξακόσιοι eis τὸ διώκειν ὁρμήσαντες. πλὴν πάνυ
ὀλίγοι ἀμφ᾽ αὐτὸν κατελείφθησαν, Cyrus’s six hundred, having rushed to the
pursuit, were scattered, except that a very few remained with him (Xen.
Anab. 1, 8*°).—Occasionally without a verb ; as πάντες ἄνθρωποι ἡδέως προσ-
δέχονται τὰς ἑορτάς, πλήν οἱ τύραννοι, all men gladly look forward to feasts
except the rulers (Xen. Hier. 1, 18).
(3) Πλὴν εἰ without a verb is equivalent to «i μή, wnless, except
(if}, Lat. nisi, as Ar. Av. 601. |
79. πολλάκις, often, many times. In Attic, especially in Plato, εἰ
πολλάκις, if perhaps, if perchance, Lat. si forte, and iva μὴ πολλάκις,
lest perchance, Lat. ne forte. Plat. Lach. 179°; Prot. 361°.
80. Moré (enclitic) (1) At any time; ποτὲ μέν....ποτὲ δέ, at one time
(sometimes).....at another time (sometimes).
(2) Questions are made more urgent by adding zoré=5y, ever,
possibly (Xen. Mem. 1, 1').—So δήποτε, postpositive (Xen. Mem. 3,
4252), and δή zor’ οὖν.
81. Πού (enclitic) (1) Anywhere, somewhere.
(2) In any way, perhaps, probably, apparently. ᾿Ἐπίστασθέ που ὅτι
...you probably know....(Xen. Anab. 5, 7). Xen. Hell. 2, 2°.—Arrov,
see above, 19.
82. Mpiv, before, ere, see 2161.—As an adverb, formerly, before,
sooner ; in Attic only as an attribute with substantives, as ἐν τοῖς πρὶν
λόγοις, in the foregoing statements (Thue. 2, 62); also τὸ πρίν, formerly.
In Homer πρίν = sooner is found with the indicative
(2180 ; 2182, 2).
83. Nw (enclitic), wp to this time, ever yet, hitherto, mostly with a
358 PARTICLES 2371
negative. Οὔπω, not yet.—Ilwrore, ever, ever yet, often in protases.—
Οὐδεπώποτε, never yet (up to the present time); οὐδέποτε, never (at any
time).
84, Te (enclitic), see καί,
85. Τέως, before this, antecedent to ἕως ;—réws μέν, for a time (Xen.
Anab. 5, 41°). Τέως is sometimes used for ἕως, until, as long as, while
(Hom. Hym. Cer. 138); Hdt. has twice, 1, 173, and 4, 165 (réws pev
..-νοΐ δέ, ἡ 5€); Plato once, Symp. 191"; Dem. often, as in 1, 20; 2, 21.
86. Tot (enclitic), in truth, swrely, doubtless, therefore, accordingly ;
particle of firm conviction (Xen. Mem. 2, 1"; Plat. Huthyphr. 5°).
(a) Τοιγαροῦν and τοιγάρτοι (prepositive), therefore, indeed, ‘then, so
then; similar are καὶ yap οὖν ‘and καὶ yap τοι (Plat. Soph. 234°; Phaedo
82°; Xen. Anab. 1, 989; Isoc. 7, 30).—Kairo, see above.—Oitro, see
above.—Mévra, see above.—Hra, see above.—Hrou....7, see above.—
Τοίνυν, see below.
(b) Tovydp, poetic; τἄρα for τοι dpo, dramatic.
87. τοὔνεκα, for that reason, therefore, see οὕνεκα.
88, Τοίνυν (postpositive, from ro and νυν, not in Homer nor in
Pindar), therefore, then, surely now.
Λέγε δή, τί φὴς εἶναι τὸ ὅσιον ;.....Aéyo τοίνυν, ὅτι τὸ ὅσιόν ἐστι.....τῷ
ἀδικοῦντι. .... ἐπεξιέναι, say now what you declare to be holiness....I say then
that holiness is to prosecute any one who acts unjustly (Plat. Euthyphr. 5*).
(a) So rarely μὲν τοίνυν is used in transitions like μὲν οὖν or μὲν δή
(Isoc. 4, 28: Xen. Mem. 2, 110).
(Ὁ) Moreover, for, Lat. atqui (Xen. Mem. 1, 2; Cyr. 1, 1%).
(c) Sometimes it merely connects like δέ (Xen. Anab. 5, 1°).
89, ‘Qs (proclitic), as, that, Lat. wt; it has various uses.
(a) As a relative, as, sometimes with a corresponding οὕτως, so
(Lat. wt, wt....2ta). |
‘Qs πολεμίοις αὐτοῖς χρῶνται, they treat them as enemies (Xen. Cyr. 3, 139).
κέλευσε τοὺς Ἕλληνας @s νόμος αὐτοῖς εἰς μάχην οὕτω ταχθῆναι καὶ στῆναι,
he ordered the Greeks to be so marshalled and to take their places as was their
custom for battle (Xen. Anab. 1, 2)°).—In exclamations like Lat. quam (as
ὡς ἡδύς, how sweet, see 1542).—With superlatives like Lat. quam (ὡς βέλτιστος),
see 1359.—Considering that, for, like ut in cases like this: Βρασίδᾶς ἣν οὐδὲ
ἀδύνατος, ὦ ς Λακεδαιμόνιος, εἰπεῖν, nor was Brasidas unskilled in speaking, for
a Lacedaemonian = considering that he was a L. (Thuc. 4, 84°); Xen. Anab.
4, 3*!.—Before numbers, about; as ὡς pipids δραχμᾶς (Lys. 19, 40). So in
expressions like ὡς (ἐπὶ) rd πολύ, for the most part (Plat. Rep. 330°; 377).—
2373 SOME FIGURES OF SYNTAX . 859
As if, as for, of what appears to be; as παρεσκευάζετο ὡς ἐς μάχην, he
arranged them as if for battle (Thuc. 4, 93"). So with participles (as, as if ;
2271, 2). With participles to express purpose (2271, 2).—With independent
infinitive (ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν), see 2228.
(6) As a demonstrative (so, thus) in certain expressions.
Ὥς οὖν, so then (Thuc. 3, 37°). Kai ὥς, even so (Thuc. 7, 74). Οὐ δ᾽
ὥς, μηδ᾽ ὥς, not even so, and not so (Soph. Ant. 1042; Thuc. 1, 74*).—
So also with other adverbs as in cases like the following: Ὡς αὔτως
(ὡ σαύτω ς), in like manner, just so (Plat. Phaedo 1029). ‘Qs ἑτέρως, in
the other way, but ἑτέρως tas = in some other way (Dem. 18, 85). ‘Qs
ἀληθῶς, truly, most assuredly (Plat. Phaedo 63*).—In these cases ὡς is the
adverb from the article ὁ, ἡ, τό (originally a demonstrative).
(c) Ὥς temporal, as, when, as soon as, see 2161.—Causal, as, since,
because, seeing that, see 2071.—Declarative, that, see 2013.—Con-
secutive, so that, like ὥστε, see 2077.—Final, that, in order that, see
2037.—In wishes (Lat. wiinam), see 2001, 2.—As a preposition, to, see
1864. f
90, Ὥσπερ (from ὡς and zep), even as, just as; only comparative.
Ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ, see 2130. Ὥσπερ with participles, see 2271.
91. Ὥστε, so that, with result-clauses, see 2077.—With verbs of
causing and impersonal verbs of happening, see 2217, 2203.—With
adjectives of fitness, see 2223.—Sometimes ὥστε = on condition that,
see 2081.
Notre.—Homer uses ὥστε with result-clauses as above,
only in Jl. 9,42; Od.17,21. Heuses it for comparisons
synonomously with ὥσπερ, as.—Herodotus uses ὥστε
with participles in the same way as ἅτε, ofa (Hdt. 6, 94).
SOME FIGURES OF SYNTAX
2372. Ellipsis (defect) is the omission of words essential to the
thought. Many cases have already been treated. For asyndeton
or the absence of connectives between sentences, see 2370.—Other
cases require no special mention.
2373. Pleonasm (redundance), the reverse of ellipsis, is the
introduction of words not essential to the sense; sometimes this is
done for greater clearness. Some cases have already been treated.
1. The apparent redundance of negatives is treated under 2350—
2357 ; see also 2358—2363.—For μᾶλλον and μάλιστα redundant, see
360 SOME FIGURES OF SYNTAX 2374
1354, 1365.—For the repetition of ἄν see 1970.—So οὗτος is sometimes
used pleonastically (as in Dem. 18, 159).—For example of pleonastic
repetition of ὅτι, see Xen. Anab, 7, 4°.
2374. Brachylogy (brevity im speech) is a condensed form of
expression in which words essential to the thought are to be inferred
from the context. Thus, a predicate verb may have to be supplied,
especially an infinitive; an affirmative expression from a negative ;
in a comparison, the owner may be compared instead of the object.
“Ποῖόν τινα τοῦτον νομίζοις ἂν τὸν ἄνδρα eivac;” “ Δῆλον drt,” edn, “ μαλακόν
τε καὶ δειλόν ” (sc. εἶναι νομίζω), ‘‘ what kind of person would you consider this
man to be?” * Evidently,” he said, ‘‘a weakling and a coward” (Xen. Mem.
3, 71). Tatra ἐγώ σοι οὐ πείθομαι, ὦ Μέλητε, οἶμαι δὲ οὐδὲ ἄλλον ἄν θρώπων οὐδένα
(se. πείθεσθαί σοι), in this I cannot believe you, Meletus, nor do I believe any
other man would believe you (Plat. Apol. 25°). Oidev.....dre οὐδεὶς ἑκὼν
δίκαιος, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ avavdpids ἢ γέρως ἤ τινος ἄλλης ἀσθενείας ψέγει τὸ ἀδικεῖν,
He knows that no one is willingly just, but that each one blames injustice
from cowardice or age or some other weakness (Plat. Rep. 366°; here ἕκαστος
or ris is supplied from οὐδείς). Χώρᾶν ἔχετε οὐδὲν ἧττον ἡμῶν evripov, here
ἡμῶν for τῆς ἡμετέρᾶς, you have a land no less prized than our own (Xen.
Cyr. 3, 3*!).—See also the pregnant construction of prepositions (1840, 1841).
2375. Zeugma (yoking) is the grammatical connection of one
verb with two or more subjects or objects while it is appropriate only
to one.
Χρήματα τελοῦντες.....«καὶ χάριτας, paying them money and thanks (for
χάριτας διδόντες, Plat. Crit. 48°). Οὔτε φωνὴν οὔτε του μορφὴν βροτῶν ὄψει,
thow wilt see neither voice nor form of any mortal (for φωνὴν ἀκούσει Aesch.
Prom. 21).
2376. Aposiopesis (becoming silent) is the sudden interruption οὗ
the sentence, from emotion or for effect, leaving it unfinished.
Εἴπερ γάρ x’ ἐθέλῃσιν ᾿Ολύμπιος ἀστεροπήτης ἐξ ἑδέων στυφελίξαι, what if
the Olympian, the lord of the lightning, wish to dash us from our seats (Il. 1,
580). Many examples are like cases of ellipsis.
2377. Anacoluthon (inconsistency) is a change or interruption of
the grammatical construction begun in the first part of the sentence.
᾿ΕἘπιθυμῶν ὁ Kipos....éd0fev αὐτῷ, Cyrus considering...., it seemed best
to him (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5°"); Thuc. 3,36. Ἢ μῖν vevoréov.....fro ἐλ πίζον-
Tas, we must swim,.....or hoping (Plat. Rep. 453*).
In these and in many similar cases, the construction becomes
grammatically inconsistent.
2380 SOME FIGURES OF SYNTAX 361
ORDER OF WORDS AND CLAUSES
2378. Usual Order.—Owing to its great wealth of inflections, the
Greek language is very much less restricted than the modern languages
in the position of words in a sentence or of clauses to each other.
The usual order of words is: (1) the subject with its qualifying words
at the beginning; (2) the predicate (verb, or the copula εἶναι with a
noun or an adjective) at the end. Oblique cases and adverbs and
prepositional phrases belonging to the verb, may come before or after
the verb.
Τισσαφέρνης διαβάλλει τὸν Κῦρον, Tissaphernes accuses Cyrus (Xen. Anab.
1, 1°). Κύπριοι πάνυ προθύμως αὐτῷ συνεστράτευσαν, the Cyprians very readily
joined him in the expedition (Xen. Cyr. 7, 4°).
For the position of adjectives with their nouns, of pronouns, Ἐξ
of particles, see the appropriate sections.
2379. Inverted Order.—Deviations from the regular order, for the
sake of emphasis, are very frequent. As the beginning and the end
of the sentence are the strongest places, important words, or words
which it is intended to emphasise, may be placed at the beginning of
the sentence or kept back to the end.
Οὐκ ἀγαθὸν πολυκοιρανίη - εἷς κοίρανος ἔστω, a multitude of masters is
not a good thing, let there be one master (Il. 2, 204). Καὶ γάρ, ἔφασαν,
πολύχρῦσος ὁ ἀνήρ, for, they said, the man is very rich (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2355).
Εἶχον δὲ of Χαλδαῖοι γέρρα τε καὶ παλτὰ δύο: Kal πολεμικώτατοι δὲ λέγονται
οἶτοι τῶν περὶ ἐκείνην τὴν χώρᾶν εἶναι, the Chaldaeans had each a shield and
two javelins, and they are said to be the most warlike of all the people in that
part of the world (Xen. Cyr. 3, 27). Οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἐλπὶς ἦν ταῦτα γενέσθαι βελτίω,
there would be no hope of this situation becoming better (Dem. 9,5). Εὐδαίμων
γάρ po ἀνὴρ ἐφαίνετο καὶ τοῦ τρόπου καὶ τῶν λόγων, the man
appeared to me to be happy both in manner and in discourse (Plat. Phaedo
58°).
2380. Postpositives.—The following words cannot stand at the
beginning of their clause or sentence ; i.e., they are postpositive :—
1. The indefinite pronouns and adverbs: τὶς, τὶ, ποιὸς, woods, πὼς,
etc.
2. ἄν (modal particle, Epic κέ; except dv = ἐάν, if); dpa, pic dp
and ῥά (except dpa); αὖ (poetic αὖτε), again ; γάρ, γέ, γοῦν, δαί, δέ, δή
(except Epic δὴ γάρ, δὴ τότε) ; δήπου, δήπουθεν, δήποτε ; δῆθεν, δῆτα ;
362 SOME FIGURES OF SYNTAX 2381
θήν; μέν, μέντοι, μήν ; viv (Epic νύ, except viv); οὖν; πέρ; τέ; τοί,
τοίνυν:
2381. Position of Dependent Clauses.—1. Clauses introduced by
ὅτι, ὡς, ἵνα, ὅπως, etc., regularly follow their leading verbs; but they
are sometimes placed first for emphasis. .
Ἵνα δὲ σαφέστερον δηλωθῇ πᾶσα ἡ Περσῶν πολιτεία μῖκρὸν ἐπάνειμι, that
the whole form of government of the Persians "ἰὸν be shown more clearly, I
shall go back a little (Xen. Cyr. 1, 215).
2. For the placing of the relative clauses before the principal clause
for emphasis (as ὃν εἶδες ἄνδρα, οὗτός ἐστιν), see attraction of relative
(1358, 1359).
3. A dependent clause is sometimes inserted within its principal
clause; and a principal clause is sometimes inserted within its
dependent clause.
Τοῦτον δ᾽, ἐπείπερ χεῖρας ἦλθεν εἰς ἐμάς, οὐκ ἔστι θνητῶν ὅστις
ἐξαιρήσεται, but this man, since he has come into my hands, there is none of
mortal who shall take him from me (Eur. Heracl. 976). ᾿Ἐφτέμενοι yap
ἐκείνων of δ᾽ ὅτι καὶ ἡμᾶς παιδεύσουσιν, for longing after them, I know they will
instruct even us (Plat. Euthyd. 272"). The inserted clause is the less emphatic
one.
2382. Hyperbaton.—For the sake of emphasis, two words belonging
closely together are separated by other less important words. This
is called hyperbaton (transposition). Usually the first of the two
words is emphasised thereby, but often both, especially if both are
placed in strong positions in the sentence.
OVP ἥδομαι τοῖσ δ᾽ οὔτ᾽ ἐπάχθομαι κακοῖς, I am neither pleased nor —
troubled at these ills (Eur. Hipp. 1260), Πολλῶν, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι,
λόγων γιγνομένων, though many, O Athenians, are the speeches made
(Dem. 9,1). ᾿Αξιῶ....... μηδεμίαν po διὰ τοῦτο παρ᾽ ὑμῶν ὀργὴν γενέσθαι,
I beg that there be no resentment on your part towards me for this (Dem. 9,
3). Πρός σε γονάτων, for πρὸς γονάτων ce (ixerevo), by thy knees, I implore
thee (Kur. Hipp. 607).
2383. Juxtaposition.—1. Words expressing similar or opposite
ideas are often placed side by side for emphasis; in this juxtaposition
the nominative case precedes the oblique case.
Παρ᾽ οὐκ ἐθέλων ἐθελούσῃ, unwilling with her willing (Od. 5,
150). Ξυνῆν ἡλικιώταις ἡδόμενος ἡδομένοις ἐμοί, I associated with my
comrades, delighting in them and they delighting in me (Xen. Hier. 6, 2).
2386 SOME FIGURES OF SYNTAX 363
2. Thus αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ, etc.
Τοῖς τ αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ πήμασιν βαρύνεται, he is weighed down by his own
sufferings (Aesch. Ag. 836).—Also én’ αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ for αὐτὸς ἐφ᾽ αὑτῷ (Aesch.
Ag. 921); and similar juxtaposition of pronouns, as πρὸς αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ
κενοφρόνων βουλευμάτων, himself by his own senseless cownsels (Aesch. Pro.
762); ἄρ᾽ οὖν ἡδὺ ἡδέος ὁτιοῦν ὁτουοῦν διαφέρει for ἡδὺ ὁτιοῦν ἡδέος
ὁτουοῦν, anything whatever pleasant differs from anything else whatever pleas-
ant (Plat. Hipp. 1, 299°); ἀπὸ τῶν ὑμετέρων Byiv πολεμεῖ συμμάχων, he
maintains war against you through the resources of your allies (Dem. 4, 34).
3. Similar are the frequent forms ἄλλος ἄλλο(ν) = alius (aliwm)
aliud, ἄλλος ἄλλοθι = alius alibi, ἄλλος ἄλλοσε = alius alio, ἄλλος
ἄλλοθεν = alius aliunde, ἄλλος ἄλλως = alius aliter, and others; in
English such expressions must often be rendered by two clauses,
“* the one (some).....the other(s)”’.
Αλλος ἄλλον εἵλκει, one drew up another (Xen. Anab. 5, 2"). Οὗτος...
ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει, these men say, one one thing, and another another thing
(Xen. Anab. 2,1"). ‘O ἕτερος τὸν ἕτερον, alter alterwm (Xen. Anab. 6, 1°).
Καλὸς οὖν ἄν μοι ὁ Bios eiy.....ddAAnv ἐξ ἄλλης πόλεως ἀμειβομένῳ, a fine
life I should lead wandering about from one city to another (Plat. Apol. 874).
Πρὸς ἄλλοτ᾽ ἄλλον for πρὸς ἄλλον ἄλλοτε (Aesch. Pro. 276).
2384. Chiasmos.—When two pairs of words are contrasted, the
order of the second pair is often inverted, thus a:b x b:a, This is
called chiasmos (imitation of a X), and is also very common in Latin.
Καλὸν τὸ γηρᾶν, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπεργηρᾶν κακόν, old age is a blessing, but dotage an
evil (Men. Mon. 608). Αἱρετώτερόν ἐστι καλῶς ἀποθανεῖν ἣ ζῆν
αἰσχρῶς, it is more desirable to die nobly than to live shamefully (Isoc. 4,
95). "EE οἶμαι τῆς ἀκροτάτης ἐλευθερίᾶς δουλείᾶ πλείστη, from
the most extreme liberty, arises, I suppose, the greatest slavery (Plat. Rep.
564"). Π. 4, 63 and 64; 5, 839.
2385. Hysteron proteron.—Two predicates or expressions are
sometimes placed not in the logical or natural order of occurrence in
time, but in the reverse order. This is called hysteron proteron (the
last first), and is employed when the naturally last expression is
regarded as the more important and is thus placed first.
Eivara τ᾽ ἀμφιέσᾶσα θυώδεα καὶ λούσᾶσα, having clad him in perfumed
garments and having washed him (Od. 5, 264). Il. 2,547 and 548. Od. 12,
134. i’ ἔλειπον lox tovrd re καὶ ζῶντα, I left him both strong and living
(Soph. Trach. 234 and 235). Τροφὴν καὶ γένεσιν, the education and birth
(Xen. Mem. 3, B**),
2386. Insertion of Words.—1. A word may be effectively empha-
364 SOME FIGURES OF SYNTAX 2386
sised by inserting immediately after it particles like δή, πέρ, γέ; the
modal adverb av; expressions like οἶμαι, I swppose; the address ὦ
ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι. Examples: Thuc. 2, 4%; Xen. Cyr. 5, 34; Dem. 1,
18; Il. 6, 242; Aesch. Sept. 1038; Il. 19, 334; Soph. Hl. 1188;—
οἶμαι (Plat. Rep. 564*) ;----ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι inserted Dem. 4, 2.
2. When the verb φημί introduces a direct quotation, it is regularly
inserted in the quotation itself.
Kal ὁ Σωκράτης iva τοίνυν, ἔφη, μὴ ἀμφίβολον 7, ὁρίσατέ μοι, x.T.r., ‘that
it may not then be doubtful,”’ said Socrates, ‘‘ define for me,” ete. (Xen.
Mem. 1, 25°).
3. In the introduction of a direct quotation, the subject of φημί is
generally placed after the verb.
“᾿Αλλὰ Σωκράτης γ᾽," ἔφη 6 κατήγορος, “τοὺς πατέρας προπηλακίζειν
ἐδίδασκε," ‘* but Socrates,” said the accuser, “‘ taught children to show contempt
for their parents” (Xen. Mem. 1, 299).
ABBREVIATIONS
USED IN CITING GREEK AUTHORS
(In other cases the name or title is given in full)
Aeschylus
Agamemnon
Choéphori
Eumenides
Persae
Prometheus
Septem
Supplices
Aeschines
Aristophanes.
Acharnenses
366
Cycl.
El.
Hee.
Hel.
Heracl.
Herc. Fur.
Hipp. .
Iph. Aul.
Iph. Taur. .
Med.
Or. ;
Phoen. .
Rhes.
Supp.
Tro.
Hat.
Hes.
ABBREVIATIONS
Cyclops
Electra
Hecuba
Helena
Heraclidae
Hercules Furens
Hippolytus
Iphigenia Aulidensis
Iphigenia Taurica
Medea
Orestes
Phoenissae
Rhesus
Supplices
Troadeés
Herodotus
Hesiod
Opera et Dies
Scutum
Theogonia
Homer
Hymns
Iliad
Odyssey
Isaeus
Isocrates
Lycurgus
Lysias
Menander
Monostichi
Pindar
Isthmian Odes
Nemean Odes
Olympian Odes
Pythian Odes
Plato
Alcibiades I, II
Apology
ABBREVIATIONS 367
Sophocles
Charmides
Cratylus
Crito
Critias
Euthydemus
Euthyphro
Gorgias
Hippias Major
Hippias Minor
Laches
Leges
Lysis
Menexenus
Meno
Parmenides
Phaedo
Phaedrus
Philebus
Politicus
Protagoras
Republic
Sophistes
Symposium
Theaetetus
Theages
Timaeus
Ajax
Antigone
Electra
Oedipus Coloneus
Ocdipus Tyrannus
Philoctetes
Trachiniae
Theognis
Thucydides
Xenophon
Agesilaus
Anabasis
Apologia Socratis
Cyropaedia
INDEXES TO
THE SYNTAX
The numbers refer to the sections.—See also the Table of Contents, the Preposi-'
tions 1828-1864, the Negatives 2334-2365, and the Particles 2366-2372
ENGLISH IN DEX
Ablative case, how expressed in Greek
1563
Accompaniment, dat. of 1773-1775
Accompanying circumstance expressed
by participle 2153-2155
Acountability and liability, adjectives of,
with gen. 1714, 8
Accusative 1573-1617 ;—as direct obj. of
transitive verb 1574 ;—direct obj. in-
stead of object-gen. (with adjectives
or nouns) 1576;—Greek verbs with
direct obj. for English verbs with
different constructions 1577-1584 ;—
with verbs meaning to feel shame or to
be afraid 1581, 1582 ;—with intransi-
tive verbs 1583 ;—acc. of the way with
verbs of leading 1584 ;—acc. with in-
transitive verbs compounded with a
prep. 1585;—acc. of effect (as γράφω
ἐπιστολήν) 1586 ;—cognate accusative
1587-1594 ;—acc. of specification 1595 ;
—adverbial accusative 1597 ;—acc. of
extent (time or space) 1599 ;—acc. of
obj. of motion (in poetry) 1602 ;—acc.
with verbs of swearing 1603 ;—double
object-ace. with one verb 1605-1608 ;—
object-acc. and predicate acc. with one
verb 1609-1614 ;—object-acc. and cog-
nate acc. with one verb 1615-1617 ;—
(369)
TO THE SYNTAX
with verbs meaning to (say) do any-
thing, and to divide 1615, 2 and 8 ;—
also 1616 and 1617 ;— accusative
absolute 2264-2268 ;—accusative of
specification, τό and infinitive some-
times so used 2236
Active Infinitive used for passive 2222
Active Voice: transitive and intransi-
tive use, causative meaning 1866, .
1867
Adjectives 1333-1366 ;—adjectives with
adverbial force 1317-1321 ;—adj. with
object-acc. 1576 ;—agreement 1333-
1336 ;—adj. and part. used as nouns
1337 ;—comparison 1338-1366 ;— posi-
tive degree with comparative meaning
1338 ;—adj. with πολύς 1339 ;—com-
parative equivalent to too, very,
rather, somewhat 1840 ;—comparative
followed by gen. or by 6 (than) 1341-
1843 ;—comparative followed by αὐτός
and gen. of reflex pron. 1844 ;—com-
par. expressing highest degree between
two 1356 ;—comparative with 4 κατά
or ἢ πρός 1845 ;—ocoasional omission
of § after πλέον {πλεῖν), ἔλαττον, μεῖον
1840 ;—two adj. or adv. compared by
ἤ in comparative 1347 ;—omission of
μᾶλλον before ἤἥ in Hom, and Hat.
24
370
1348 ;—use of ἀντί (or πρό) with gen.
or παρά with acc. instead of ἤ 1349 ;—
second part of comparison omitted
1350 ;—still, much, and other words
with comparatives 1353 ;—superlative
1355-1366 ;—expressing a very high de-
gree 1355 ;—superlative with αὐτός and
gen. of reflexive pron. 1357 ;—super-
lative strengthened by (mapa) πολύ,
μακρῷ, πολλῷ, and other words 1358;
—superl. strengthened by ὡς, ὅτι, ἡ
ofos and other words 1359-1366 ;—ad-
jective agreeing in gender with de-
pendent partitive gen. 1625 ;—adjec-
tives with gen. 1714-1725 ; —adjectives
followed by dat. 1754-1756
Advantage or disadvantage, dat. of
1787-1790
Adverbial acc. 1597
Adverbs 1865 ;—emphatic adverbs 2368 ;
—see also Particles, gen. with adverbs
1725-1728
Adverbs followed by dat. 1754-1756
Age, how expressed 1601
Agent, expressed by preposition and a
gen. 1885 ;—by a preposition and a
dat. 1886 ;—dat. of agent with verbals
2315 ;—dat. of agent with perf. and
plupf. pass. 1800
Agreement 1246-1248
Anacoluthon 2377
Answers, how expressed 2010
Aorist tense 1910-1920 ;—with τί οὐ indic.
aor. equivalent to exhortation or com-
mand 1913;—aor. of customary
action 1908 ;—gnomic aor. 1914, 1915;
—ingressive or inceptive aor. 1916-
1918 ;—aorist equivalent to perf. or
plupf, 1919 ;—epistolary aor. 1920 ;—
aorist as vivid fut. 1934, 2; aorist with
ἄν in apodosis referring to present
time 2103, 2
Apodosis 2089
ENGLISH INDEX TO THE SYNTAX
Aposiopesis 2376
Apposition 1322-1332 ;—app. to a per-
sonal pronoun expressed or implied
1323 ; app. to two or more nouns gen.
in du. or pl. 1324;—app. denoting
inhabitants to noun of place 1325;—
app. representing part of subject
1326 ;—adj. with app. in genitive
1327; app. denoting part of a person
in Hom. 1328;—app. agreeing with
subjects in gender 1329 ;—noun app.
to a sentence 1330 ;—names of rivers,
islands, lakes, cities, as appositives
1381.
Appositive infinitive 2215 ;—appositive
noun 1203
Article 1367-1417 ;—in poetry and dia-
lects 1367-1376, 1400;—in Attic Greek
1377-1417 ;—as pronoun or demonstra-
tive 1377-1388;—as article proper
1389-1395 ;—insertion and omission of
article 1396-1405 ;—position with attri-
butes and predicate adj. 1406-1417 ;—
article with attribute (see attribute
used substantively 1270-1301) ;—article
with apposition 1396, 5 and 6;—
article used in forming substantives
1394-1395
Assertions: dependent 2013 - 2022;—
declarative particles 2013 - 2015;— ~
moods in declarative clauses 2016 ;—
impf. and plupf. seldom changed to
opt. 2018;—pres. or perf. indic.
seldom changed to impf. and plupf.
2020
Assimilation of mood: in final clauses
2044;—in relative and temporal
clauses 2183, 2184;—assimilation of
relative and temporal clause to infini-
tive 2199
Association and resemblance, words of,
followed by dat. 1758-1775
Asyndeton 2370
ENGLISH INDEX TO THE SYNTAX
Attribute 1207, 1265;—used substan-
tively 1270-1301
Attributive adjective 1206 ;—attributive
adjective and noun with article 1406-
1414 ;—attributive gen. depending on
noun 1619-1622 ;—attributive parti-
ciple, see Participle
** Before,”’ temporal clauses introduced
by 2176-2182
Beginning, verbs of, with gen. 1644-
1647
Brachylogy 2374
Cases: see Nominative and Vocative,
Accusative, Genitive, Dative, Pre-
positions
Causal clauses 2071-2076 ;—causal par-
ticles 2071 ;—ei used in causal clauses
= ὅτι 2074 ;-—causal clause after verb
of fearing 2070, 4 ;—causal rel. clauses
2138, 2139 ;—other ways of expressing
cause 2076
Causative meaning of act. and mid.
voices 1867, 6 and 1870 and 1873.
Cause: expressed by participle 2251,
2252;—gen. of cause 1619, 2; 1631,
2; 1688-1691 ;—dat. of cause 1804-
1809
Caution, verbs of, with infin. 2056
Chiasmos 2384
Cognate-acc. 1587-1594 ;—with verbs of
sitting, standing, lying poet. 1593 ;—
with adj. or noun 1594
Collective singular with plural verb
1257
Commanding, verbs of, with dat. 1744
Commands: expressed by fut. ind. with
ὅπως (uh) 2058 ;—sometimes expressed
by infinitive 2229, 1 and 2
Comparative degree followed by gen.
1728
Comparatives: infinitive after 2224
371
Compound verbs followed by dat. 1776-
1785
Concession expressed by participle 2258
Concessive clauses and particles 2133-
2135
Conditional sentences 2089-2133 ;—con-
ditional particles 2090 ;—particular
and general suppositions 2092 ;—four
classes of conditional sentences 2093 ;
—synopsis of conditional forms 2094;—
simple present or past conditions with
nothing implied 2095-2101 ;—present
and past conditions with supposition
contrary to reality 2102-2108 ;—&
omitted in apodosis with certain verbs
2105-2108 ;—future conditions of more
distinct form 2109-2112 ;—future con-
ditions of less distinct form 2113-2115 ;
—mixed forms of conditional sent-
ences 2117 ;—disjunctive conditional
clauses (with εἴτε... εἴτε and ἐάν τε
... ἐάν τε 9118 ;—ellipis and substi-
tution in protasis 2119-2128 ;—ellipsis
and substitution in apodosis 2124-
2127 ;—&» omitted ini protasis or apo-
dosis 2128-2182;—tonditional rel.
clauses 2147-2159; —condition ex-
pressed by participle 2257
Conjunctions 2367, see also Particles
Consecutive clauses 2077-2088 ;—con-
secutive particles 2077 ;— consec.
clause with finite mood 2078, 2079 ;—
with infinitive 2080-2088 ;—with dere
or ὡς and participle 2084 ;—dore and
infinitive in ind, disc. 2087 ;—8eos and
οἷος (instead of ὥστε) with inf. in
consec, clauses 2088 ;— consecutive
rel. clauses 2140, 2141
Constructio pregnans 1840, 1841
Construction according to sense 1248
Contents, gen. of 1619, 4
Copulative verbs 1205
Crime and punishment gen. of, with
372 ENGLISH INDEX
verbs 1699-1703, 1709-1713 ;—with adj.
1714, 8
Dative 1739-1826; — of indirect obj.
with transitive verbs 1740 ;—dat. with
intransitive verbs 1742-1753 ;—dat.
with adjectives and adverbs 1754-
1756 ;—-with nouns 1757;—dat. of
association and resemblance with
verbs 1759-1765; with adjectives 1766-
1769; with nouns 1770; with ad-
verbs 1771;—dat. of accompaniment
1778-1775;—dat. with compound verbs
1776-1785 ;— with compound adjec-
tives 1781;—dat. of interest 1786-
1800 (dat. of advantage or disadvan-
tage) 1787-1790;—dat. of possessor
1791-1794 ;— ethical dative 1795;—
dat. of relation or standpoint 1796-
1799 ;—dat. of agent 1800;—dat. of
instrument or means 1801-1803 ;—
dat. of cause 1804-1809;—dat. of
manner 1810-1813 ;—dat. of measure
of difference 1814, 1815;—dat. of
time 1816-1822 ;—dat. of place 1823-
1827
Declarative clauses, see Assertions ;—
declarative clause after verbs of fear-
ing 2070, 6;—declarative particles
2013-2015 ;—see also Particles
Deliberative or interrogative subjunctive
1987-1990
Demanding, verbs of 1605, 1607
‘Demonstrative pronouns 1470-1492 ;—re-
ferring backward or forward 1470-1471 ;
local meanings 1472 ;—in calling out
(οὗτος) 1474;—position with article
1479, 1481, 1482, 1489;—without article
when predicate 1482;—with proper
name and without article 1483;—as
antecedent of rel. pron. 1484;—re-
placed by oblique case of αὐτός 1486;
demonstratives as predicates 1487 ;—
TO THE SYNTAX
gen. of demonstratives for emphasis
instead of reflex. of third pers. 1468
Denial and hindrance, verbs of : followed
by ov in dependent assertions 2350 ;—
followed by μή (μὴ οὐ) with infinitive
2351-2356
Depriving, verbs of 1607
Desire, aim at, etc., verbs principally
with gen. 1648-1652
Disjunctive conditional sentences 2118
Distinction, gen. of 1686, 1687 ;—adj.
with 1714, 7
Dividing, verbs of, with acc. 1615, 3
Dual, peculiarities in the use of 1239-
1241
Dynamic Middle, see Middle Voice
Effect, acc. of 1586
Ellipsis 2372;—ellipsis and substitu-
tion in conditional clauses 2119-
2132
Enjoying, verbs of, with gen. 1641-
1643
Ethical dat. 1795
Exclamations, gen. in 1736 ;—exclama-
tions with ofos etc. 1542, 1543 ;—infini-
tive with τό used in exclamations
2237
Explanatory rel. clauses 2137
Extent of time or space, acc. 1599-
1601
Fear, verbs expressing, with acc. 1581
Fearing, clauses after verbs of 2062-
2070 ;—verbs of caution, danger, etc.
2065 ;—leading clause omitted 2067 ;—
verbs of fearing followed by object-
clause 2068;—clause of fearing
followed by indic. 2069 ;—other con-
structions with verbs of fearing 2070
Feel shame, verbs expressing, with acc.
1581
Feeling, verbs expressing, with acc. 1584
ENGLISH INDEX
Feeling and sensation, adjectives of,
with gen. 1714, 9
Figures of syntax 2372-2377
Final clauses 2037-2661 ;—final particles
2037 ;—clauses of absolute purpose
2040-2047; unattainable purpose 2048,
2049 ;—object clauses with .verbs of
effort, etc. 2050-2057 ;—drws and ὅπως
μή in commands, etc. 2058-2061
Final particles 2037, 2038
Final rel. clauses 2142-2146
Future tense 1921-1927;—inceptive fut.
1921, 2;—2 pers. fut. expressing per-
mission 1922 ;—2 pers. fut. expressing
command or prohibition 1923 ;—2 pers.
sing. fut. in geographical and other
descriptions (in Hdt.) 1924 ;—fut.
indic. with ἄν in Homer 1925 ;—peri-
phrastic fut. expressed by μέλλω and
infinite 1926
Future-indicative for subj. in final
clauses 2046 ;—future-ind. (or subj.)
with οὐ μή expressing strong denial
1977 ;— future-indic. used like de-
liberative subjunctive 1988 ;—future-
indic. in conditional clause 2096 ;—
future-indic. in protasis 2111
Future-perfect tense 1936, 1937 ;—
equivalent to fut. 1937, 1
Genders, peculiarities in the use of 1949.
1244
Genitive 1618-1738 ;—with nouns 1619-
1630 ;— predicate gen. 1631-1637 ;—
gen. with verbs 1638-1713 ;—with ad-
jectives 1714-1724 ;—gen. with adverbs
1725-1728 ;—gen. of time 1729-1735 ;—
gen. in exclamations 1738 ;— gen.
with regard to 1787 ;—gen. absolute
1738, 2259-2264 ;—gen. for apposition
1622 ;—gen. of quality 1636
Gnomic aorist 1914, 1915 ;—gnomic per-
fect 1933
TO THE SYNTAX 373
Historical infinitive 2200
Hortative subjunctive 1986
Hyperbaton 2382
Hysteron proteron 2385
Imperative in independent clauses
1979-1985 ; —with obj. rel. 1980;—
preceded by ἄγε (δή), φέρε (δή), ἴθι
1981 ;—perf. imperative 1982 ;—pro-
hibitions 1983-1985, with od μή 1985
Imperfect tense 1901-1909 ;— inter-
changeable with aorist in certain
verbs 1902 ;—in narrative 1903, 1904;
—impf. of attempted action 1907 ;—
impf. and aor. of customary action
1908 ;— impf. with force of plupf.
1909 ;—imperfect with ἄν in apodosis
expressing continuance in past time
after unreal conditions 2103, 1;—
imperf. with & in Homer referring to
past time 2104, 1
Imperfect and pluperfect seldom changed
to opt. in ind. disc. 2018;—seldom
standing for pres. and perf. of direct
disc. 2020
Impersonal participles 2265, 2;—im-
personal verbs 1211, 1212,
Implied inquiry, mood of dependent
clauses of 2034-2036
Improper prepositions 1838, 1862-1864
Inceptive aor. 1916-1918
Indefinite article a = ris 1553
Indefinite English pronoun, one, you
(they), how expressed 1432-1434
Indefinitive pronouns τὶς and ἄλλος
1553-1562
Indicative in independent clauses 1974-
1978
Indirect discourse 2320-2333 ;—principal
clauses in indirect discourse 2321-
2323 ;—subordinate clauses in ind.
disc. 2324-2333;—subordinate past
indicative retained in ind. disc. 2324,
374
2and 2325;—subordinate past indi-
catives occasionally passing into op-
tative in certain cases 2325, 2 and 3;
—leading or dependent present and
perfect indicatives occasionally pass-
ing into imperfect and pluperfect in
direct discourse 2326-2331; — sub-
ordinate subjunctives with ἄν rarely
passing into optative and retaining
ἄν 2328, 2332 ;—dependent clauses of
implied indirect discourse 2329, 2330 ;
—infinitive in indirect discourse 2192-
2200 “
Indirect object with trans. verbs 1740 ;—
with intrans. verbs 1742-1753
Infinitive 2185-2237 ;—nature of infini-
tive 2185 ;—subject and predicate-
noun with infinitive 2186-2191 ;—
infinitive without the article 2192-
2229 ;—infinitive in indirect discourse
2192-2200 ;—in assertions 2193, 2194,
2198 ;—after verbs of promising, etc,
2195, 2196 ;—persona! and impersonal
constructions 2197 ;—assimilation of
relative and temporal clauses to
infinitive 2199 ;—historical infinitive
2200 ;—infinitive not in indirect dis-
course 2201-2229;—nominal infini-
tive (as subject) 2202-2206, (as object)
2207-2214 ;— infinitive as predicate or
appositive 2215 ;—supplementary in-
finitive 2216-2225 ;—with verbs 2216-
2220;— with adjectives 2221-2293;
—after comparatives 2224, with
nouns and adverbs 2225 ;—infinitive
with ἐφ᾽ ¢ or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε or ὥστε to ex-
press condition 2226 ;—infinitive to
express result 2080 ;—purpose 2216, 3 ;
—infinitive with πρίν 2176-2182 ;— in-
finitive absolute 2228 ;—infinitive in
commands, proclamations, wishes
2229 ;—infinitive with neuter article
2230-2237 ;—after prepositions 2234 ;—
ENGLISH INDEX
TO THE SYNTAX
τοῦ with inf. expressing purpose 2235 ;
—ré with inf. like an acc. of specifica-
tion 2236 ;—infinitive in exclamations
2237 ;—infinitive after verbs of fearing
2070, 1-3;— infinitive in consec.
clauses 2080-2088; — infinitive as
apodosis 2125, 2126
Insertion of words 2386
Instrument, dat. of 1801-1803
Intensive pronouns, see Personal Pro-
nouns
Interest, dat. of 1786-1800
Interjections 2366, 2
Interrogative clause after verbs of fear-
ing 2070, 5
Interrogative or deliberative subjunctive
1987-1990
Interrogative particles 2008, 1;—see
also Particles
Interrogative pronouns 1545-1552;—
with art. 1399:—as pred. adj. 1547 ;—
two or more interrog, words belong-
ing to same verb without connective
1552
Intransitive verbs with dat. 1742-1753
Inverted order of words 2379
Juxtaposition 2383
Leading, verbs expressing, with acc. of
way 1585
Locality indicated by τό (rd) and geni-
tive 1278
Manner, dat. of 1810-1813 ;—manner
expressed by participle 2253-2255
Material, gen. of 1619, 4;—1631, 4;—
1674
Means, dat. of 1801-1803;—means ex-
pressed by participle 2253-2255
Measure, gen. of 1619, 3; 1631, 3;—
measure of difference, dat. of 1814
Middle voice 1868-1880 ;—direct middje
1869-1871 ;—causative 1870 ;—reflex-
ENGLISH INDEX TO THE SYNTAX 375
ive 1871 ;—indirect middle 1872-1875 ; | Object-infinitive after verbs of fearing
—causative 1873, 1874;— reciprocal| 2070, 1 and 2;—with ὥστε 2070, 3
1875 ;—subjective or dynamic middle | Objective gen. 1619, 7 ;—1631, 7 ee
1876-1878 ;—middle voice different in| 1722
meaning from active 1879 Oblique optative 2012
Moods, general view 1958, 1959 ;—see|Optative in independent clauses 1993-
Contents 2007 ;—potential optative 1993-1998 ;
Motion, obj. of, with acc. (poet.) 1602;—| —without ἄν in poetry 1995, as mild
verbs expressing motion, with acc.
1584 ;
oe (οὐ and μή) 2334-2365 ;—in
principal clauses 2335 ;—in subordin-
ate clauses 2336, 2337 ;—with infini-
tive 2338-2345;— with participles,
adjectives and nouns 2346, 2347;—
οὐ and μή as interrogative particles
2348-2349 ;—apparent redundance of
‘negatives 2350-2357 ; doubling of
negatives 2358-2363 ;—place of nega-
tive 2364;—various negative expres-
sions 2365 ;—see also Particles 2366 ;
—and Denial and Hindrance etc.
imperative 1997 ;—opt. of wishing
1999-2007 ;—unattainable wishes ex-
pressed by past tenses of indic. with
εἴθε or εἰ γάρ, also by ὥφελον and in-
finitive 2004-2007 ;—optative in in-
direct discourse 1945-1948 ;—optative,
oblique 2012;—optative with κέ as
apodosis,in Homer expressing un-
reality 2104, 2
Oratio Obliqua, see Indirect Discourse
Order of words 2378-2386 ;—usual order
2378 ;—inverted order 2379 ;—post-
positives 2380 ;—position of dependent
clauses 2381;—hyperbaton 2382;—
juxtaposition 2383 ;—chiasmos 2384 ;
—hysteron proteron 2385 ;—insertion
of words 2386
verbs of, also οὐ, μή, μὴ. οὐ
Neuter adj. or pron. as cognate acc.
1592
Neuter participle as abstract noun | Participle 2238-2313 ;—attributive 2239-
2245 ;—used as substantive 2241-2245 ;
—neuter participle used as abstract
noun 2245;—predicate participle
(circumstantial and supplementary)
2246-2319 ;—circumstantial participle
2246-2278 ;—equivalent to temporal
clause 2247-2250 ;—expressing cause
2251, 2252; —expressing means or
manner or accompanying circum-
stance 2253-2255 ;—expressing purpose
Neuter plural with singular verb 1255,
1256
Nominative: as subject or predicate
1564 ;—as appositive to a voc. 1569-
1571 ;—in exclamations 1568, 1571 ;—
as vocative 1572
Nouns followed by dat. of indirect obj.
1758 ;—noun with obj.-acc. 1576
Numbers, peculiarities in the use of
1224-1241 2256 ;—expressing condition 2257 ;—
. concession 2258 ;—genitive absolute
Object of verb 1202 2259-2264 ;—accusative absolute 2265-
2268 ;—particles with circumstantial
participle 2269-2276 ;—omission of ὥν
with circumstantial participle 2277,
.-
Object clause, see Final Clauses ;—
object.clause after verbs of fearing
2069
376 ENGLISH INDEX
2278 ;—supplementary participle 2279-
2318; limiting meaning of verbs 2280-
2299 ;—equivalent to a clause with ὅτι
‘2300-2313 ;—omission of the supple-
mentary participle ὥν 2312;—use of
ὡς with supplementary participle 2313;
—tenses of participle 1949-1956 ;—
participle after verbs of fearing 2070,
7; participle representing protasis or
apodosis 2121, 2125, 2127 ;
Particles, see Prepositions 1828-1864;
particles 2366-2372 ;—particles used
with circumstantial participle 2269-
2276
Partitive genitive 1619, 6; 1631, 6;
1638; 1714, 1; 1728 ;— partitive
gen. and noun with article 1410;—
partitive gen. depending on neuter
noun or adj. to indicate extent 1627 ;
part. gen. as subject of a verb 1628 ;—
partitive gen. agreeing in gender with
governing adj. 1625
Passive Voice 1881-1890 ;—object of
active subject of passive 1882, 1;—
personal passive from verbs governing
gen. or dat. 1882, 2 and 8 ;—part of
person retained as obj. acc. and
person as subject 1882, 5;—cognate-
acc. retained and object-acc. becom-
ing nom. of pass. 1617 ;—cognate-acc.
as subj. of pass. 1882, 7 ;—one of two
object-accusatives becoming subj. of
pass. 1882, 7 and 8 ;—agent of passive,
how expressed 1885, 1886 ;—intransi-
tives serving as passives to certain
verbs 1888-1890
Perception (mental and sensory), verbs
of, mostly with gen. 1663-1669
Perfect and pluperfect tenses 1998.
1935 ;—perfect with pres. meaning,
1930;—gnomic perfect 1933 ;— perf.
and aor. as vivid fut. 1934 ;—plupf.
with impf. meaning 1935
TO THE SYNTAX
Perfect imperative 1982
Periphrastic fut. μέλλω and inf. 1926,
1927
Personal and impersonal constructions,
with infinitive 2197
Personal construction with infinitive
2204-2206
Personal and intensive pronouns 1418-
1434 ;—omitted when not emphatic
1418 ;—éuod, euol, ἐμέ used when
emphatic 1419 ;—enclitic forms with
two contrasted prepositions 1420;—
oblique cases of αὐτός as pers. pron.
1421 ;—pronouns omitted with second
of two verbs governing different cases
1422 ;—airds, uses 1421, 1423-1431 ;—
personal pronouns used as reflexives
1487, 1438
Persons, peculiarities in the use of
1245
Place dat. of 1823-1827;—gen. of place
(in poetry) 1732, 1733
Plenty and want, verbs of, with gen.
1674-1679 ;—adj. 1714, 5
Pleonasm 2373
Pluperfect, see Perfect
Plural, peculiarities in the use of 1227-
1238
Position of clauses, see Order of Words
Possessive genitive 1619, 1; 1631, 1;
1634; 1714, 4
Possessive pronouns 1454-1469 ; — re-
placed by article when ownership is
obvious 1454 ;—possessive genitives of
personal pronouns used instead 1455;
position of possessive pronouns and
possessive genitives with respect to
article 1455, 1459 ;—adj. or appositive
in gen. (dat.) with possessive pron,
1458 ;—poss. pron. equivalent to sub-
jective or objective gen. 1459 ;—re-
flexive possessives 1460-1468 ;—parti-
tive gen. of reflex. pron. in predicate
>
ENGLISH INDEX TO THE SYNTAX
position 1464;—simple possessives
ἐμός, σός etc. as reflexives 1465 ;—
αὐτοῦ as reflexive 1465 ;—gen. of pers.
pron. (μου, σου, etc.), as reflexive
possessives 1467 ;—synopsis of posses-
sive forms 1469
Possessor, dat. of 1791-1794
Postpositive particles 2369, 2380
Potential optative 1993-1997
Predicate-adjective 1208;— see also
predicate noun 1302-1316 ;—predicate-
adj.and noun with article 1415
Predicate-infinitive 2215
Predicate-nom. to express measure 1632
Predicate-noun 1204 ;—with infinitive
2186-2191 ;— predicate-noun, adjec-
tive, participle 1302-1316 ;—agreement
of pred. noun 1302-1313 ;—expressing
purpose, character, or quality 1316
Predicate-relative 1510
Prepositions 1828-1864;—as adverbs
1828-1830; —tmesis 1831;—place of
prepositions 1832-1836 ;—prep. used
for compound verb 1837 ;—general use
of prepositions 1839-1841 ; —preposi-
tions in detail alphabetically 1843-
1861, and improper prepositions 1862-
1864
Present tense 1894-1900; —historical
present 1896;—present for future
1897 ;—present of attempted action
1897 ;—present of customary action
1898 ;—present in general truths 1899 ;
—present with perfect force 1900
Primary and secondary tenses 1957
Prohibitions 1983-1985 ;—with οὐ μή and
fut. indic. or aor. subj. 1985
Prolepsis 1214
Proleptic predicate 1612
Pronouns, see Personal and Intensive,
' Reflexive, Possessive, Demonstrative,
Relative, Interrogative, Indefinite
Pronouns
377
Protasis 2089
Purpose, see Final clauses ;—expressed
by participle 2256 ;—sometimes ex-
pressed by τοῦ and infinitive 2235
Questions: direct questions 2008-2011 ;
—interrog. particles 2008 ;—moods in
direct questions 2008, 3, 4;—answers
2010 ;— dependent questions 2023-
2036 ;— indirect interrog. particles
2024;— moods in dependent ques-
tions 2026-2036 ;—after verbs of im-
plied inquiry 2034-2036
Reciprocal pronoun replaced by reflex-
ives 1442
Reflexive pronouns 1435-1454 ;—refer-
ring to subject of sentence or object of
leading verb (indirect reflexives) 1435 ;
—referring to a dependent verb 1436;
—personal pronouns as reflexives
1437, 1438, 1465 ;—reflexive with αὐτός
prefixed for emphasis 1439 ;—reflexive
of third person sometimes used for
first or second 1441 ;—reflexives in
Homer 1444-1448 ;—personal pronoun
οὗ, of etc. as reflexives 1449-1453 (in
Homer 1444-1448) ;—reflexives used
for reciprocal pronoun 1442 ;—simple
posses-ive pronouns used as reflexives
1465, 1466 ;—partitive gen. of reflex-
ive pron., predicate position 1464 ;—
gen. μου, gov etc. as reflex. poss. 1467
Relation or standpoint: dat. of, 1796-
1799
Relative clauses 2136-2160 ;—explana-
tory relative clauses 2137 ;— causal
relative clauses 2138, 2139 ;—consecu-
tive relative clauses 2140, 2141 ;—final
relative clauses 2142-2146; —con-
ditional relative clauses 2147-2159 ;—
assimilation of mood in rel. and
temporal clauses 2183, 2184
378
Relative pronouns: particular and in-
definite relatives 1493-1508 ;—és as
demonstrative 1509; — relative as
predicate 1510;—agreement of rela-
tive 1511-1520 ;—preposition govern-
ing relative omitted 1521; — ante-
cedent of relative omitted 1522-1528,
1526 ; — assimilation and attraction
of case of relative and antecedent
1529-1539; — relative not repeated
1540, 1541 ;—relatives in exclama-
tions 1542-1544 ;—relative depending
on participle alone 1505 ;—qualifying
words belonging to antecedent, drawn
to relative 1506 ;—simple relative used
for rel. of quantity or quality, and the
reverse 1500 ;—rel. adv. for rel. pron.
1501; several relatives in same sen-
tence without copula 1502
Remember, forget, etc. verbs principally
with gen. 1653-1662 ;—adj. with gen.
1714, 2
Reminding, verbs of, 1605, 1607
Result, ace. of 1586
Rule and lead -etc., verbs, mostly with
gen. 1669-1673 ;—adj. 1714, 3
Saying, verbs of 2013, 3
Separation, gen. of 1680-1685 ;—with
adj. 1714, 7
Sharing, verbs of, with gen. 1641-1643 ;
—adj. with gen. 1714
Similes with ὡς, ὥς re, ὡς ὅτε, ὡς ὁπότε
in Homer 2170
Singular, peculiarities in the use of
1224-1226
‘‘ So-called,” how expressed 2240
Source, gen. of 1619, 2; 1631, 2; 1692
Specification, acc. of 1595
Subject and predicate 1201
Subject of finite verb 1209-1215 ;—in
nom. 1209 ;—subject-nom. omitted
1211 ;—infinitive or sentence as sub-
ENGLISH INDEX TO THE SYNTAX
ject 1212;—-subject supplied from some
word 1213 ;—subject of dep. clause
emphatically placed at beginning
1214, 1 ;—-subject of dep. clause drawn
into principal clause (prolepsis) 1214, 2
Subject of infinitive 2186-2191
Subject-nominative and verb 1249-
1264 ;— agreement with predicate-
nom. or appositive 1250, 1;— with —
pred.-adj. verb in singular 1250, 2;—
preposition and numeral as subject
1251 ;—dual subject with plural verb,
plural subject with dual verb 1252 ;—
masc. or fem. pl. subject with singu-
lar verb 1253 ;—singular imperative
ἄγε etc. addressed to several persons
1254 ;—neuter plural with singular
verb 1255, 1256 ;—collective singular
with plural verb 1967 ; —subjects
connected with and, construction
1259-1261 ;—singular, subject with
μετά used with plural verb 1262 ;—
subjects connected by or, either—or,
neither—nor, construction 1263, 1264
Subjective gen. 1619, 8
Subjunctive in independent clauses
1986-1992 ;—hortative subj. 1986, with
ἄγε (δή), φέρε (δή). ἴθι 1986, 2;— de-
liberative or interrogative subj 1987-
1990 ;—subj. used like fut. indic. in
Homer expressing expectation 1991;
—similar use of fut. indic. 1992 ;—
subjunctive or fut. indic. with od μή
expressing strong denial 1977
Substitution in conditional clauses
2119-2132
Supplementary infinitive 2216-2225 ;—
with verbs 2216-2220 ;—with adjec-
tives 2221-2223;—after comparatives.
2224 :—with nouns 2225
Supplementary participles with various
verbs 2280-2299 ;—equivalent to @
clause with ὅτι 2300-2313
ENGLISH INDEX TO THE
Suppositions, see Conditional Sentences
Swearing, acc. with verbs of, 1603, 1604
Temporal clauses 2161-2184 ;—temporal
particles 2161, 2163, 2172, 2174, 2176,
2180-2182 ;—temporal clauses express-
ing actual occurrence 2164 ;—with
ὅτε and verbs of remembering 2165 ;—
temporal clauses not expressing
actual occurrence 2166-2171 ;— tem-
_ poral clauses introduced by “ until”
2172-2175 ;— temporal clauses intro-
duced by ‘‘ before”? 2176-2183;— as-
similation of mood in relative and
temporal clauses 2183, 2184
Tenses 1891-1957 ;—general meaning of
1891-1893 ;—tenses of indicative 1894-
19387 (see also Present, Imperfect,
Aorist, Future, Perfect and Pluper-
fect, Future-Perfect);— tenses in
other moods 1938-1944 ;—optative and
indic. in indirect discourse 1945-1948 ;
—tenses of participle 1949-1956 ;—
primary and secondary tenses 1957
Thinking, verbs of, construction 2198,
2
Time, dat. of 1816-1822 ;—gen. of 1729-
1731;—time expressed by participle
2247-2250 ;—often expressed by a noun
SYNTAX 379
and participle depending on preposi-
tion 2250
Tmesis 1831
Touching, etc. verbs of, with gen. 1644-
1647
Transitive verbs with ind. obj. in dat.
1740
“ Until,” temporal clauses introduced
by 2172-2175
Value, gen. of 1619, 5; 1631, 5; 1693-
1698 ; 1714, 6
Verb 1216-1223 ;—omitted 1216-1221
Verbal adjectives in -réos -réa -τέον
2314-2319 ; — personal construction
2315 ;—impersonal construction 2316-
2319 ;—sometimes with middle as well
as active meaning 2319 |
Voices 1866-1890;—see Active, Middle.
and Passive Voices _
Wishes: expressed by opt. 1999-2007 ;—
unattainable’ wishes expressed by
past tense of indic. with εἴθε or εἰ γάρ,
also by Sedov and infinitive, also (in
Homer) by opt. 2004-2007 ;—some-
times expressed by infinitive 2229, 3
Zeugma 2375
GREEK INDEX TO THE SYNTAX
ἄγαμαι constructions 1690
ἀγαπάω construction 1806
ἀγγέλλω with infin. or part. 2311, 2
ἄγε (δή) with imperative 1981, with
hortative subj. 1986, 93 ;---ἄγε, φέρε
etc. addressed to several persons 1254
αἴθε, ai γάρ, see εἴθε (εἰ γάρ)
αἰσθάνομαι With infin. or part. 2311, 1
αἰσχύνομαι with infin. or part. 2294
ἀκούω as pass. of verbs meaning to call
1614; ἀκούω with infin. or part. 2311, 1
ἀκρός 1416, 1
ἁλίσκομαι aS pass. to αἱρέω 1888
ἄλλο τι (#) ; 2008, 4
ἄλλος 1558-1562
ἄν͵ modal particle 1960-1972 ;—&» omitted
in apodosis expressing unreality with
some verbs 2105-2108
ἄνα 1837
ἀνέχομαι with infin. or part. 2290, 4
ἀνθ᾽ ὧν 1530 (c)
ἀντί with gen. for # after comparatives
1349
ἀντίος, ἀντίον 1768
ἄξιός τινί τινος 1798
ἀπειλέω constructions 2196, 2
ἀποθνήσκω 8.8 pass. to ἀποκτείνω 1888
émoxduyw With infin. or part. 2290, 5
ἀποφαίνω with part. or infin. 2311, 8 (c)
ἀποφεύγω as Pass. ἀπολύω 1888
dpérxw 1752
ἀρχὴν ἄρχειν etc. 1589
ἄρχομαι and &pxw with part. or infin.
2290, 1
ἀρχόμενος, τελευτῶν etc, 2249
αὐτός, Oblique cases as personal pronouns
1421; as reflexives 1437; use of αὐτός
as intensive pronoun 1423; ὁ αὐτός =
the same 1423, 2; αὐτός with ordinal
numeral 1427; various meanings of
αὐτός 1428; καὶ αὐτός and καὶ οὗτος
1431; αὐτός prefixed to reflexive for
emphasis 1439; αὐτός in oblique cases
used as antecedent of a rel. 1486
αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ 1344
αὐτοῦ etc. in. emphasis or contrasts
1440, 2
αὐτῶν ἡμῶν etc. emphatic 1440, 3; rarely
for ἡμέτερος αὐτῶν etc. 1462
βαίνειν πόδα (βῆμα) 1591
βαρέως φέρειν 1806
βασιλεύς without article 1401, 1
γεγένημαι 1932
γέγονα 1932
γεγονώς expressing age with acc. 1601
γίγνομαι as pass. of dynamic- middle
ποιοῦμαι 1877; γίγνομαι ἐκ as pass. to
τίκτω 1889; γίγνομαι with adverbs
1222, 1223 .
γιγνώσκω with infin. or part. 2311, 3
δεῖ 1748; with acc. of person and gen.
of thing (poet.) 1580
δείκνῦμι with part. or infin. 2311, 8 (a)
δεύτερος etc. with gen. 1723
δέχομαι ἀγορᾷ 1813
(380)
GREEK INDEX TO THE SYNTAX
δῆλός (φανερός) ἐστι 2302
δηλόω with part. or infin, 2301; 2311, 8
(Ὁ) (¢).
διάφορος construction 1768
δίκην διδόναι as pass. to ζγμιόω 1888
δοκέω construction 2198, 2
- δοκιμάζω with part. or infin. 2311, 12
δόξαν ταῦτα 2268, 1
δύο with pl. noun 1335
ἑαυτοῦ γίγνεσθαι etc. 1633
ἐβουλόμην without ἄν as apodosis of
unreality 2108, 1
ἔδει, ἐχρῆν etc. without ἄν in apodosis |.
expressing unreality 2105
ei often used for ὅτι, because, after certain
verbs 2074
ei δὲ μή as substitute for conditional
clause 2132
εἴθε (or εἰ γάρ) in wishes 1999, 2001, 2004,
2007
εἰμί as copula 1205, 1216-1218; εἰμί
omitted 1216, 1217, 1218, 1792; εἰμί
and γίγνομαι with adverbs 1222, 1223
εἶναι connecting two acc. 1610
εἶπον construction 2198
els (ἀνήρ) with super]. 1363
εἰς (ἐν) with gen. and house omitted 1279
ἕκαστος 1416, 6; ἕκαστος with pl. verb
1258 ; ἕκαστός τις 1556
ἐκεῖνος, 866 οὗτος
ἐκινδύνευσα without ἄν as apodosis of
unreality, 2108, 2
ἐκπίπτω as pass.-to ἐκβάλλω 1888
ἑκὼν εἶναι etc, 2228, 2
ἑλίσσειν θεόν 1579
ἐλπίζω and ἐλπίς constructions 2196, 1
ἐμὲ αὐτόν or αὐτόν με (αὐτὸν ἐμέ) etc.
1440, 1
ἔμελλον without ἄν as apodosis of un-
reality 2108, 1
ἐμὸς αὐτοῦ etc. in poetry 1468
ἐμός, σός etc. as reflexives 1465
381
ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ used instead of μου etc.
1419
ἐν τοῖς with superlative 1864
ἐναντίος construction 1768
ἔνι 1837
ἐξ ὧν 1530 (c)
ἔοικα constructions 2307
ἐπεί sometimes used in the sense of
although 2078
ἔπι 1837
ἐπιλανθάνομαι with cern or infin. 2301 ;
2811, 5
ἐπίσταμαι with part. or infin. 2301; 2311,
4
ἐπιτρέπω with infin. or part. 2290, 7
ἐσθίω with gen. and acc. 1639
ἐστί, εἰσί omitted 1792 .
ἔστιν and γίγνεται with plural masc. or
fem. subject 1253
ἔσχατος 1416, 1
érepos 1491, 1492
ἔτι (still) 1353
εὖ “and σφέων reflexives as simple pos-
sessives in Old Ionic 1456, 2
εὖ ἀκούω as pass. to ed λέγω 1888
εὖ (κακῶς) ποιεῖν τινα 1616
εὖ πάσχω as pass. to εὖ ποιῶ 1888
εὑρίσκω with part. or infin. 2301; 2311, 9
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε with infinitive expressing
condition 2226
ἔχω with aor. or perf. participle 2284 ;
with obj. used instead of pass. 1890
(nuidw 1802
(ἣἔν βίον etc. 1588, 2
# after comparative 1341
ἢ or ἢ ὡς or ὥστε with infinitive after
comparatives 2225
ἢ κατά (4 πρός) after comparative 1345
# with superl. 1359, 1362
ἢ δ᾽ bs, ἢ δ᾽ 1609, 1
ἡ βουλὴ οἱ πεντακόσιοι 1332
382
ἥκω = am come 1900, 2
ἡλίκος 1493; peculiar assimilation of
1534 (a)
ἥμισυς 1416, 5; 1417
ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ate. reflexive or emphatic
1440, 8
hoxivéuny without ἄν as apodosis of un-
reality 2108, 1
θαυμάζω constructions 1690
θαυσαστὸς ὅσος assimilated 1587
θαυμαστῶς ὡς 1537
ἴθι with imperative 1981; with hortative
subj, 1986, 2
ικαθίζω with part. 2311, 14
καὶ ὅς etc. 1501, 1 and 3
καὶ οὗτος 1431, 1478
καὶ ταῦτα 1478
καὶ τόν (τήν) as acc, subj, of inf. 1377, 3
καὶ ὥς 1509, 1
καλούμενος etc, 2240
κατά, compounds of, with verbs, govern-
ing gen. 1709-1713
κατεάγέναι τῆς κεφαλῆς 1640
κεῖμαι &S pass. to τέθεικα 1889
κείρεσθαί τινι 1789
κολάζω 1809
κόπτεσθαί τινα 1579
κυρέω with supplementary participle
2286
λαμβάνω with obj. used instead of pass.
1890
λανθάνω with supplementary participle
2286
λεγόμενος etc, 2240
λέγω construction 2198
λοιδορεῖν τινα ΟΥ̓ τινι 1578
AtualverOal τινα or τινι 1578
μακρῷ with compar. 1353, with superl.
1358
GREEK INDEX TO THE SYNTAX
μάλιστα with superl. 1865
μᾶλλον followed by ἢ οὐ for # 1351; joined
to compar. 1354
μανθάνω With part. or infin, 2301; 2311, 5
μέγα with compar. 1353, with superl. 1358
μέγιστον with superl. 1858; 1865
μεθίημι With infin. or part. 2290, 2
μέλλω and inf, expressing fut. 1926, 1997
μέμνημαι with part. or infin, 2301 ; 2311,5 —
μέμφεσθαί τινα and τινι 1578
μένω Construction 9919
μέσος 1416, 1
μέτα 1837
uh, see Negatives and Particles; μή rarely.
used alone for μὴ οὐ 2355; μή sometimes
omitted with infinitive after verbs of
negative meaning 2353; uh ob some-
times omitted with infinitive after
verbs of negative meaning 2354; uh
ov with participles and nouns 2357
aly 14538, 4
μόνος 1416, 4; μόνος τῶν ἄλλων 1719
μου, σου etc. as reflex. poss. 1467
νϊκᾶν ᾿Ολύμπια etc. 1590
νίκην νικᾶν etc. 1588, 1
viv 1453, 5
νυκτί 1822
νομίζω construction 1803; with part. or
infin. 2811, 11
ὁ δέ, ἡ δέ, τὸ δέ, 1377, 2
ὁ ἐκείνου (for ἐκεῖνον) τεκών 1620
ὃ μέν.....ὃ δέ 1377-1388
5, ὅπερ, ἅ, with verb announcing some-
thing following 1520 (6)
ὃ (ὅπερ) πάντων θαυμαστότατον ets. 1520
(a), (c)
ὅδε, see οὗτος
ὅδε ὁ ἀνήρ = ἐγώ 1472, 9
ὅθεν for ἐκεῖθεν οὗ or of 1533
oi ἀμφί (περί) with name of person 1272
of αὐτῷ etc. in Homer 1440, 4
GREEK INDEX TO THE SYNTAX
οἷδα with part. or infin. 2301; 2311, 4
οἷος 1493; with superl. 1360; peculiar
assimilation of 1534 (a), (δ). (c); in
exclamations 1542; ofos with infin. as
consec. clause, 2088
οἷός re 1494
οἷός τέ εἶμι 2088, 2
οἴχομαι = am gone 1900, 2
ὀλίγῳ with compar. 1353
ὅλος 1416, 8
ὁμολογέω construction 2198, 2; with
part. or infin. 2311, 10
ὀνομαζόμενος etc. 2240
ὅπῃ with superl. 1362
ὁποῖος with superl. 1362; in exclamations
1542
ὁπόσος with super]. 1362 ; in exclamations
1542
éxécos, ὁποῖος, ὁπηλίκος, ὅπου, ὁπόθεν etc.
1493
ὅπως with super]. 1361
épdw with part. 2301; with infin. 2311,
15
és as demonstrative 1509
ὅς relative, see Particular and Indefinite
Relatives 1493-1508
ὅς and éés as simple possessive pron. in
Homer 1456
ὅς and éés (poetic) as reflexive 1466
ὅς and éés for ἐμός 1468
ὅς περ 1507
ὅς γε 1507
ὃς καὶ ὅς 1509, 1 :
ὃς μέν......ὃς δέ in oblique cases for ὁ μέν
.....ὅ δέ 1501, 9
ὅσοι μῆνες etc. 1534 (g)
ὅσον with super]. 1361
ὅσος 1493; with superl. 1862; in ex-
clamations 1542; with infin. as consec.
clause 2088
ὅσος and ὁπόσος in plur. with numerical
meaning 1501
ὅστις, see Particular and Indefinite
383
Relatives 1493-1508 ; ὅστις assimilated
1534
ὅστις βούλει 1534 (f)
ὅσῳ = because, since, as 1530 (ἃ)
ὅτε with verbs of remembering 2165, 2303
ὅτι with superl. 1359
ov, see Negatives and Particles; οὐ μή,
see 2358; od μή with subj. or fut.
indic. expressing strong denial 1977;
with fut. indic. or aor. subj. expressing
prohibition 1985
οὐ φθάνω....καί 2288
οὗ, ὅθεν, of etc. rel. adv. 1493
οὗ, of etc. (pers. pron.) used as reflexives
in Homer 1444, in Attic 1449-1452; as
personal pronoun in Homer and dia-
lects 1453
οὐδ᾽ (μηδ᾽ ὥς 1509, 1
οὐδείς assimilated in οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐ 1536
οὐδείς (ἐστιν) ὅστις 1499 ©
οὐδέν (μηδέν) in no wise 1858
οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις 2287
οὗτος, ὅδε, ἐκεῖνος, see Demonstrative
pronouns ; οὗτος repeating emphatic-
ally preceding subj. or obj. 1473; οὗτος
in calling to a person 1474; οὗτος as
vocative 1571
οὑτοσί etc. 1472, 1601
οὕτως so much, with compar, 1353
οὕτως... ὥστε 1485
ὀφλισκάνω 1699-1701
πάλαι With pres. tense 1900, 8
πάντα, in all respects 1858, 1358
πάρα 1837
παρά with acc, for # after comparatives
1349
mdpos 2182, 5
was 1416, 2; was ris 1556
παύω with part. or infin. 2290, 2
πείθομαι 1749
πείθω construction 2211
πελάζω construction 1759, 1764
384
meptopdw with infin. or part. 2290, 6
πίνω with gen. and acc. 1639
πλεῖστον With superl. 1358; 1365
πλέον (τι) and τὸ πλέον for μᾶλλον 1352
πλήν 1863, 2284, also under Particles
ποιέω With part. or infin, 2311, 13
πολεμεῖν construction 1763
πολλοί and οἱ πολλοί 1397
πολλόν with superl. 1358
πολύ, πολλόν, πολλῷ With comparatives
1353, with superl. 1358
πρὶν % 2182, 1 and 5
πρίν... «πρίν 2182, 4
πρό with gen. for ἤ after comparatives
1349
πρός με 1420
πρόσθεν... «πρίν 2182, 3
πρότερον %, πρὶν %, ὕστερον ἤ, πρότερον
(πρόσθεν), πρίν... «πρίν, πάρος, πάρος. ...
πρίν 2182
πρότερον... «πρίν 2182, 8
πυνθάνομαι With infin. or part. 2311, 1
πῶς οὐ μέλλω; 1927
στεφανοῦσθαί τινι 1189
στέργω construction 1806
σνυγγιγνώσκω (ἐμαυτῷ) constructions 2306 ;
2311, 16
σύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ constructions 2306
σύνοιδα τινί (ἐμαυτῷ) τι 1780
συντρίβειν τῆς κεφαλῆς 1640
σφέτερος for ὅς 1468
τε added to relatives 1494
- τεθνάναι = to fear 1582
-τέος, -Téa, -réov verbal adjectives in
2314-2319
τέρπεσθαί τινι 1805
τηλικοῦτος 1488-1490
τηλικόσδε 1488-1490
τι somewhat 1353
τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί; 1793
τί μαθών 2252
GREEK INDEX TO THE SYNTAX
τί ov with indic. aor. in exhortations or
commands 1913
τί οὐ μέλλω 1927
τί πάθω; 1990
τί παθών 2252
τίθημι assume, with part. or infin, 2311,
11
τίλλεσθαί τινα 1579
τίμιός τινι 1798 ;
τινί or ἀνθρώποις understood with dat. of
relation or standpoint 1797
τίς interrog., see Interrog. Pron.
τὶς, τὶ, see Indefinite Pronouns; τὶς as
subject omitted 1211, 6; τὶς equivalent
to many a or every one 1557
τό = wherefore 1370
τὸ δέ adverbial 1382
τὸ peév.,..7d δέ etc. 1378, 5
τὸ τί; etc. 1399 (a)
τὸ πάντων θαυμαστότατον 1520 (a)
τοιόσδε 1488.1490
τοιοῦτος 1488-1490
τὸν καὶ τόν οἷο. 1377, 4
τὸν σὲ καὶ ἐμέ etc. 1399 (δ)
τοσόσδε 1488-1490
τοσοῦτος, τοσόσδε, τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλι-
κοῦτος, τηλικόσδε 1488-1490
τοῦτ᾽ ἐκεῖνο and τόδ᾽ ἐκεῖνο 1476
τοῦτο μὲν....τοῦτο δέ 1377, 5; 1475
τύγχανω 1648-1650; with obj.
instead of pass. 1890; with supple-
mentary participle 2286
τὐπτεσθαί τινα 1579
τῷ = therefore 1370
ὑπακούω 1743, 1749
ὑπομένω With infin. or part. 2290, 4
ὕστερον ἤ 2182, 2
φαίνομαι with part. or infin. 2311, 6
φέρε (δη) with imperative 1981, with
hortative subj. 1986, 2
φεύγω as pass. to διώκω 1888
used .
GREEK INDEX TO THE SYNTAX
φημί construction 2198
φθάνω with supplementary participle
_ 2286-2288
φθονέω construction 1747
φίλε τέκνον etc. 1336
χαλεπῶς φέρειν 1806
χορεύειν θεόν 1579
χράομαι construction 1803
χρεώ with acc. of person and gen. of
thing (poet.) 1580
χρή 1748; with acc. of person and gen.
of thing (poet.) 1580
ὥν belonging to a _ predicate-noun
or adjective sometimes omitted
2277, 2278;—sometimes omitted
when a supplementary participle
2312
ὧν, ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, ἐξ ὧν = τούτων ὅτι (for this,
that, because) 1530 (c)
és with superl. 1359, 1362
ὡς in exclamations 1542
ὡς with supplementary participle 2318
ὡς with infinitive absolute 2228
ὡς as conjunction, see Particles
ὡς as prep. to 1864
ὡς ἀληθῶς 1501, 9
385
ὡς εἰ Or ὡς ef τε in Homer in clauses of
comparison 2129, 2130
ὡς ἐμοί 1797
ὡσαύτως 1509, 1
ὥσπερ assimilated 1534
ὥσπερ or ὡς with acc. absolute 2268
ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ in clauses of comparison
2129-2130
ὥστε with infin. as consec. clause in
ind. discourse 2087
ὥστε with supplementary infinitive 2217,
2223
ὥστε with infinitive expressing condition
2226
ὥστε with infin. sometimes expressing a
condition 2081
ὥστε with infinitive after verbs meaning
to happen 2203; ὥστε before object-
infinitive 2210
ὥστε and ὡς and infin. with ἄν consecu-
tive clause 2086
ὥστε or ὡς and participle as a consecutive
clause 2084
ἀφελεῖν with dat. poet. 1578
ὥφελλον as apodosis of unreality in
Homer 2108, 3
ὥφελον (-es, -ε) With infinitive to express
unattainable wish 2004-2007
ABERDEEN : THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
ὍΝ
iy
onl
“Sai saucy A: a4
hh Sees ἢ }
“
nae
ων" rie aa
a, 9 ν»ε n
ke aye ς ἢ
via é A. ‘ih Ἢ - eA Uy
= " . νὴ a ‘ 4 ‘
ἥν - Ρ κα STAD) CPN te we iat Νὴ δὲ ᾿
‘ 4 ; a
Oo ν wane
i Se) bale τον he iggy rity Bie ἐπε, it > Ae
- wee * fre a foe Li a Bit as
roe i hey ἘΝ Re; Ὁ ἘΠ ΠΣ δκήκραι nue alee “ei a: eye ἐών,
jm μεν wae ὅδ. ᾿ ΑΝ αν Agi a ἢ
᾿ ἘΜΌΝ, ae r tates eas rt et, Sion red, oa iat eo
f * ΕἾ ii aso alae 2 dcr Aj Hace wi bl; aan A ἀγν
aft Oe ἣν ᾿ ἡ ἀφ} Mies) a!) ν ΨΗ͂Ν SD HR yey : AL Nass cia οὖν
Ty ‘ ΡΝ ul SMT I ab ay : δΝ Agave ; cae ἀν Ψ
1 be τ. ‘a ᾿ “" Ως, dase ead se _ Kul ee ‘ty. per ὅν " ἃ Ὗ ts Loeid ὝΝΗΝ
wie a x aj 2 4° alee . en “ der ti. 4 Ae
Per ka A at ng “". RG) TASH Fhe ia sada 4. ΑΝ ἘΡΦΟὴ real He
Πρ RETR D4 hl ileal y Reale eee walla Meet
— ἜΣ ‘ ἣν ὧν ἐκ ἃ Ys ai ta μν nif, peas Ses <3
τ Ae er iia Sne δὰ; ὴ : ,
“x " ae ' oA we in ATE yz »ἀὶ-. v "ὦ 14
ὩΣ P ou e ; ‘ ae re
» : ; {RESP “ἱ ΒΕ νὰ shew wat: ἧ i _ ΜΡ
ἵν. μ᾿ ᾧ ω ψ é aS
‘ ὠὰ, Ὕ
: ὡ ὦ ὡς ᾿
ΕῚ ear v
: - 4 ὰ
Β ὴ 4 Lon
ἢ Ἵ . —_
is ; iw on
’ 3 μὰς ἊΝ
’ ‘ hd ΨΗ "
al ¥ ᾿ _) . 2G ‘ ἱ
᾿ Υ a j
" 4 "a' hes LA νὼ a - al on
a +
* ju ἢ Υ δ.
| ὦ ΤΆ : reg ces
: - ἣν ᾿ - ay y
F 4 ᾿ ἂ “ον COE {τὸ
- τὶ ΓΕῚ - - ἜΝ '
ih a ’ oe, i Vis of
. al 5 a. :
te τοὶ, ‘ce. % Savy Ἷ a’
7 i ᾿ Ὶ + 2% q tT Ρ -
᾿ ΕΥ̓͂ = ᾿ i
rae oe 4 <
» me é& i a
, , i δ, ἃ ἐδ" φ αι 3 βίων ὦ
ει 7 Ὶ ᾿ ‘ Lm “aa acd δ.
= ah | φρο ξ, ὶ a . 745 oe 5 ἕω "ἢ ᾿ ᾿ ~
>i ——> : he ee AD: τῶν. βρβθεῖο A =i
χὰ, | -
ἂς
00.4 ee
139286
weer
A Greek grammar: Syntax.
Simonson, Gustave
ic.
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO
LIBRARY
------ -
Do not
remove /
the card
from. this
Pocket.
—_- - Ὁ
Acme Library Card Pocket
Under Pat. “‘ Ref. Index File.”
Made by LIBRARY BUREAU ᾿'
aisha...
am
pee
y oat,
wh
δ.
ΠΡ ΤῊΝ
Mand» “ὁ,
Fr te
att
hs io
4
Rie
Z
ae =
Se as
γον «yh
a 7%
La
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11